THE

PEOCEEDINGS

OF THE

LINNEAN SOCIETY

OP

NEW SOUTH WALES.

VOL. X.

Foe the Yeae 1885,

SYDNEY :

PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY

BY

F. CUNNIXGHAME & CO., 146 PITT STREET,

AND

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.

1886.

^72

/' /

CONTENTS OF VOL. X.

PART I.

PAGE

A Monograph of the Australian Sponges, Part IV. The Myxo-

spongiaB. By R. voN Lendenfeld, Ph.D. Plates I-V. ., 3

The method of Section-Cutting, with some improvements. By R.

VON Lendenfeld, Ph.D. 23

On Amceba Parasitica, a new Protozoan infesting sheep. By R. von

Lendenfeld, Ph.D. Plate VI ,35

The Meteorology of Mount Kosciusco. By R. von Lendenfeld,

Ph.D 39

The Glacial Period in Australia. By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

Plates VII. and VIII 44

The Proteacese of Australia. By the Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D.,

F.L.S., &c 54

On a new Snake from the Barrier Ranges. By William JIacleay,

F.L.S., &c 61

On some Reptiles from the Herbert River District, Queensland. By

William Macleay, F.L.S., &c 64

Notes on certain Ceylonese Coleoptera deseribed by the late F. Walker.

By A. Sidney Olliff 69

On Flight. By R. Von Lendenfeld, Ph.D 73

On a Devonian Australian Fossil, allied to Worthenia. By F.

Ratte. Eng. Arts and Manuf. Plate IX. 79

The Phoriospongise. By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D 81

IT. CONTENTS.

PAGE
Synonymy of, and remarks upon, the specific names &c. of four species
of Australian Marine Shells originally described by Gray. By
John Brazier, C.M.Z.S 85

Notes on the Australian Amphipoda, By W. A. Haswell, M.A.,

B.Sc. PlatesX-XVIII 95

Revision of the Toxoglossate MoUusca of New Zealand. By Captain

F. W. HuTTON, F.G.S. &c 115

Notes and Descriptions of some rare Port Jackson Fishes. By J.

Douglas-Ogilby 119

Notes and Exhibits ... ... 62,75,123

PART II.

Revision of the genus Lamprima, with descriptions of new

By William MACLEAy,F.L.S., &c 129

Notes on the Zoology of the Maclay-Coast in New Guinea, No. II.

By N. DE Miklouho-Maclay. Plate XIX. 141

On two new species of Dorcopsis from New Guinea. By N. de

Miklouho-Maclay. Plate XX 145

Notes on the Australian Sponges recently described by Carter. By R,

VON Lexdenfeld, Ph.D. 151

On the fertilization of Goodenia hederacea. By Alex. G. Hamilton.

Plate XXI 157

Notes on the habits, &c., of Birds breeding in the interior of New

South Wales. By K. H. Bennett. 162

The Geology of Dubbo. By the Rev. J. Milne Ccrran, F.G.S.

Plates XXII. and XXIII 170

Note on the Brain of Halicore Australis. By N. de Miklouho-
Maclay. Plate XXIV 193

PAGE
Record of a remarkable Haloragis, from New South Wales. By

Barox VON Mueller, K.C.M.G., &c 197

Two new Australian LucanicL-e. By William Macleay, F.L.S,, &c. 199

A list of the Cucujidae of Australia, with notes and descriptions of

new species. By A. Sidney Olliff 203

Descriptions of new Fishes from Port Jackson. By J. Douglas-

Ogilby 225

Note on Neoanthias Giintheri. By J. Douglas-Ogilby, Esq, ... 231
Notes on the Geology and Water Supply of the Interior of New
South Wales. By the Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.G.S. Plate
XXV 233

Some remarks on the fertilization of the genus Goodenia, By E.

Haviland 2.37

Note on a Medusa from the Tropical Pacific. By R. von Lendenfeld,

Ph.D 241

Contributions to the Zoology of New Guinea. Notes on Birds from
Mt. Astrolabe, with descriptions of two new species. By E.
P. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., &c 242

Description of a new species of Collyriocincla from Cairns. By E. P.

Ramsay, F.R.S.E., &c 244

Rough Notes on the Natural History of the Claremont Islands. By

Gervase F. Mathew, R.N., &c. .. 251

An afternoon among the Butterflies of Thursday Island. By Gervase

F. Mathew, R.N., &c. 259

New Fishes from the Upper Murrumbidgee. By William Macleay,

F.L.S., &c 267

Description of a new Diplocrepis from Port Jackson. By J. Douglas-
Ogilby. 270

Jottings from the Biological Laboratory of Sydney University. No. 1-3.

By William A. Haswell, M.A., B.Sc. ... «. 273

Notes and Exhibits 187,245,279

PART III.

I'AGE

Monograph of the Australian Sponges. Part V. By R. von Len-

DExXFELD, Ph.D. Plates XXVI-XXXV .. ... 282

On a Sponge destructive to Oyster Culture in the (Clarence River. By

R. VON Lendenfeld, Ph.D ;^26

Note on the Glacial Period in Australia. By R. von Lenuenfelb,

Ph.D :m

Jottings fi'om the Biological Laboratory of Sydney University.

Nos. 4 and 5. By W. A. Haswell, M.A., B Sc :^-21

On the supposed Glacial Epoch in Australia. By Captain F. W.

HuTTON, F.G.S., &c 334

List of Plants in use by the Natives of the Macleay-Coast, New
Guinea, with some botanical remarks by Baron Ferd. von Mueller,

K.C.M.G., &c. By N. DE Miklodho-Maclay 346

Catalogue of the described Coleoptera of Australia. By George

Masters. Part T. 359

Descriptions of three new Fishes from Port Jackson. By J.

Douglas-Ogilby 443

Remarks on the Decay of certain species of Eucalypti. By K. H.

Bennett 4.")3

Double Flowers. By the Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D., &c 455

Occasional Notes on Plants indigenous in the immediate neighbour-
hood of Sydney. N. 9. By E. Haviland, F.L.S 459

Notes on the distribution of some Australian Sharks and Rays, &c.

By J. Douglas-Ogilby... 463

Contributions towards a knowledge of the Coleoptera of Australia.

No. I. By A. Sydney Olliff 467

A new genus of the sub-family Lamprimides. By William Macleay,

F.L.S 473

Addendum to the Monograph of Australain Sponges. By R. voN Len-
denfeld, Ph.D 475

CONTENTS. Vii.

rr • . PAGE

Ihird Addendum to the Australian Hydromedusas. By R. vON

LiENDENFELD, Ph.D 477

M onograph of the Australian Sponges. Part VI. By R. von

Lendenfeld, Ph.D. Plates XXXVI-XXXVIII 4S1

Notes and Exhibits 341,448,553

PART IV.

PAGE

Studies on Sponges. By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D. Plates XXXIX-

XLIV

I. The \estihule oi Dench-illa cave7-nosa, n. ST[i. 557

II. On Raphijrus Hixonii, a new gigantic Sponge from Port

Jackson 562

III. On Halme tingens, a Sponge with a remarkable colouring

power 568

IV. On two cases of Mimicry in Sponges 569

Descriptions of new or rare Australian Fishes. By E. P. Ramsay,

F.R.S.E., and J. Douglas-Ogilby 575

Remai-ks on the Trachichthys of Port Jackson. By J. Douglas-Ogilbt. 580
Catalogue of the described Coleoptera of Australia. Part II. By

Geokge Masters 583

The Plagiostomata of the Pacific. Part III. By N. de Miklouho-

Maclay and William Macleay, F.L.S. Plates XLV, and XLVI. 673

Fourth Addendum to the Australian Hydromedusoi. By R. von

Lendenfeld, Ph.D. Plate XLVI II, 679

A Second Note on Macrodontism of the Melanesians. By N. de

Miklouho-Maclay. Plate XLIX 682

Note on the " Keu " of the Maclay-Coast, New Guinea. By N. de

Miklouho-Maclay 687

A List of the Trogositkla> of Australia, with notes and descriptions of

new species. By A. Sidney Olliff, F.E.S. 699

Notes from the Australian Museumi. On a new Butterfly of the Family
LycrenidiP, from the Blue Mountains. By A. Sidney Olliff,
F.E.S 716

VUl. CONTENTS.

PAGE
On a remarkable Fish, from Lord Howe Island. By William

Macleay, F.L.S., &c. Plate XLVII 718

Recent changes in the Forest Flora of the interior of N. S. Wales.

By R. VON Lendenfeld, Ph.D 721

On the Australian Freshwater Rhlzopoda. Part I. By E. vox

Lendenfeld, Ph.D 7'2g

On an Alga forming a Pseudoniorph of a Silicious Sponge. By R.

VON Lendenfeld, Ph.D. Plate XLVIII 726

Description of a new species of Onchklinm. By John Brazier,

C.M.Z.S 729

Preliminary Report on the Histological Structure of the dorsal papillae

of certain species of Onchidium. By R. voN Lendenfeld, Ph.D. 730
Observations on some Australian Polych(eta. Part I. By W. A.

Haswell, M.A., B.Sc. Plates L-LV 733

Descriptions of two new Fishes from Port Jackson. By E. P. Ramsay,

F.R.S.E., and J. Douc;las-Ogilby 757

On some remarkable crystals of Siderite. By F. Ratte, M.E. Plate

LVl 759

Descriptions of Australian Micro- Lepidoptera. Part XII. By E.

Meyrick,B.A., F.E.S 765

Remarks on Aiistralian Ptinida, and descriptions of new genera and

species. By A. Sidney Olliff, F.E.S 833

On new species of Land and Freshwater MoUusca, from Maclay-Coast

and Triton Bay, New Guinea. By J. Brazier, C.M.Z.S. ... 841

Second Addendum to the Monograph of the Au.stralian Sponges. By

R. VON Lendenfeld, Ph.D. 845

Notes from the Australian Museum. Description of a new Coris. By

E. P. Ram3.\y, F.R.S.E., and J. Douglas-Ogilby 851

Notes and Exhibits 695,760,853

President's Address 855

Office-Bearers and Council for 1886 881

Title page, Contents, and Index to Vol. X.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE '

LINNEAN SOCIETY

OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

WEDNESDAY, 28th JANUARY, 1885.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M. A., F.G.S., in the chair.

Mr. T. W. David, BA., F.G.S , of the Mines Department, was
introduced as a visitor.

MEMBERS ELECTED.

Mr. E. G. W. Palmer, Burvvood ; Mr. Arthur J. Mills, Bur-
wood ; Ml'. Alexander Hamilton, Giintawaug, N.S.W. ; Mr,
Smithurst.

DONATIONS.

" Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes." No. 169. November 1884.
From the Editor.

" Bulletin de la Societe Royale de Geographie dAnvers." Tome
IX., Fasc, 2, 1884. From the Society.

li DONATIONS.

''Victorian Naturalist" Vol. I., Nos. 11 and 12, November
and December, 1884. From the Field Naturalists' Club of
Victoria.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger." Jahrg. VII., Nos. 182, 183, 1st and
15tli December, 1884 From the Editor.

" Midland Medical Miscellany." Vol. III., No. 36, December,
1884. From the Editor.

" Verhandlungen des Naturhistorischen Vereines des preussi-
schen Rheinlandes nnd Westfalens." Jahrg. IX., Heft. 2, Jahrg.
X., Heft 1 and 2. 1882-83, 8vo. From the Society.

"Science." Vol. IV., Nos. 94 to 97. November 21st to
December 10th, 1884. From the Editor.

'•■ Annual Report of the Curator of the Museum of Comp. Zool.
of Harvard College, Cambridge, Mass., for 1883-84." From Prof.
Alex. Agassiz.

" Eucalyptographia." By Baron F. von Miillei-. Decade X.,
1884. From the Author.

"Journal of Conchology. Vol. IV, No. 8. October, 1884.
From the Conchological Society of Great Britain.

" Bolletino della Societa Africana d'ltalia." Anno III., Ease.
3, 4, and 5. June, August and October, 1884, 8vo. From the
Society,

PAPERS READ.

A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES

By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

Part IV.

Plate I. to V.

PRELIMINARY REPORT ON THE AUSTRALIAN MYXOSPONGI^.

11. ORDO. MYXOSPONGI^. Haeckel (1).

SPONGES WITHOUT A SKELETON, OR WITH SPHERICAL
POLYACTINELLID FLESHSPICULES.

Sollas (2) has remarked in a recent paper that the Myxospongise,
as a group, containing Halisarca and Chandrosia, will eventually
have to be abandoned, he thinks that the diifereuce between the
Halisarcinse and Gumminse is so great that we cannot combine
them. The Halisarcidae, with the genera Halisarca Dujardin and
Oscarella Vosmser, are, according to Sallas, the sole true repre-
sentatives of the Myxospongise, wliilst the Gumminae should,
according to him, be placed in the neighbourhood of the Tetracti-
nellidge.

It is very difficult to say whether the Gumminte represent
transition forms from any ancestral groups to the Tetractinellidse
or not, but it is quite certain that there is a vast difference
between the Gumminae on the one hand and Oscarella and Hali-
sarca on the other.

I think it will approach the real relationship nearest, to establish
for these groups two Sub-orders within the Ordo Myxospongige,
as follows : —

(1) E Haeckel. Die Kalkschwamme, eine Monografie. Band L, Seite 453.

(2) W. T. Sollas. On the development of Halisarca lobularis, O.S.
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, Vol. XXIV., ]}. 618.

4 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

I. SUB-ORDO. MYXIN^^. Von Lendenfeld.

MYXOSPONGI.E, THE GROUND SUBSTANCE OF THE MESO-
DERM OF WHICH IS A SOFT AND TRANSPARENT GALLERT
AND DESTITUTE OF FIBRILLS OR SPICULES. RARELY SUP-
PORTED BY DISTANT FIBRES (HALISARCA). THE CILIATED
CHAMBERS IN A SURFACE LAYER. THE INTERIOR LACUNOSE
AND WITHOUT CHAMBERS.

This Sub-ordo is identical with the Halisarcinpe of O. Schmidt

8. FAMILIA. OSCARELLID.E. Von Lendnfeld.

Myxinse, with spherical ciliated chambers.

No Australian representatives of this family are known.

The sole representative, at the same time the type-species of the
family is Halisarca lobularis, O. Schmidt (2), Oscarella lobularis,
Vosmaer (3). It has been very exhaustively described by F. E.
Schulze (4) and others. Halisarca Dujardiui, Johnstone likewise
exhaustively described by F. E. Schulze (5) belongs, I think, to
another, the following family. The right place can of course not
be assigned to those species which have not been investigated
in a scientific manner.

9. FAMILIA. HALISARCID^. Von Lendenfeld.

Myxinae with sack-shaped, elongated ciliated chambers.

The type species of this Family is Halisarca Dujardini Johnstone,
which has ramified ciliated tubes like certain Sylleibidse. An
Australian species which I have discovered belongs to this Family
as possessing elongate ciliated chambers, the fibres found in Hali-
sarca Dujardini are absent and the ciliated chambers are very
regular in shape and never appear ramified. I establish therefore
for this species the following new Genus.

(1) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Seite 79.

(2) 0. Schmidt. L.c. Seite 80.

(3) G. Vosmaer. Porifera, Classen und Ordnuiigen des Thierreiches. Von
Bronn. Band 11. , Tafel VIII.

(4) F. E. Schulze. Die Gattung Halisarca, Zeitschrift fiir Wissen-
schaftliche Zoologie. Band XXVIII. , Seite 1.

(5) F. E. Schidze. L.c.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 0

•23. GENUS. BAJALUS. Von Lendenfeld (1).
Halisarcidce with regular cylindrical not ramified, elongate
ciliated chambers.

53. SPECIES BAJALUS LAXUS. Nov. spec.

This is the only Australian representative of the Suborder
Myxinae.

The specific name is derived from the loose texture and tender-
ness of the whole sponge, a consequence of its extensive lacunose
cavities.

Our sponge represents (fig. 1-2) an irregular ramified or lobular
mass of a dull purple colour. The separate processes are either
finger-shaped and slender as in the specimen represented in fig. 1,
or short broad and lobular as in the other. They measure to 18
mm. in length and from 2-10 mm., in breadth. The long and
slender processes are cylindrical, the truncate ones generally more
or less flattened. Both kinds of processes never occur on the
same specimen, so that one might distinguish two varieties of this
species, one with broad the other with slender ramifications. The
whole sponge never seems to attain a large size, the finest specimen
I have seen measured 50 x 40 x 20 mm. They seem always more
or less expanded in one plain.

The Oscula are situated terminally on the processes so that there
are as many vents to the sponge as there are branches to it. There
are very small " chimneys " on them, slightly smaller than those
tubes described by Schulze (2), which appear as prolongations of the
Oscula margin in Oscarella lobuiaris.

The surface of the sponge apj^ears perfectly smooth as in Hali-
sarca Dujardini. The Oscula measure from 1-2 mm. across and
are liable to great alterations in size. The " chimney " can be
retracted, so as to leave the oscular ppening nearly bare.

The inhalent pores measure O'l mm. across; they are circular.
Each is covered by a thin and tender perforated plate. The
perforations are circular or polygonal with rounded corners and

(1) Bajulus. A man who carries sacks, sackbearer.

(2) t. E. Schulze. L c. Plate I., fig. 6.

6 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

measure O'Ol in diameter (fig. 4). These little pores, as also the
large inhalent vents below them, are liable to great alterations in
size and can be contracted, the little ones even closed by the
Sponge.

Canal System.

The Canal System is very peculiar and totally different from
that of Oscarella. It approaches tliat of Halisarca but appears
also much more complicated and highly developed than it is in that
Sponge.

The outer skin (b. fig. 4) is divided from the interior part of
the sponge, from the zone of ciliated chambers by a broad sub-
dermal cavity, 0*15 mm., wide. This cavity is continuous. It is
traversed in all directions by a highly complicated network of fine
threads measuring 0-005 — 0-01 mm., in thickness (s. fig. 4).
These repeatedly ramified anastomosing threads are cylindrical and
between the joining points generally more or less straight. These
threads connect the skin and the body of the Sponge. They
appear to be contractile to a certain extent and by their contrac-
tion the subdermal cavity can be diminished in size locally.

The zone of ciliated chambers is much folded, and does not reach
the subdermal cavity everywhere ; there are moreover, empty
spaces left between, which appear as inhalent canals (i., fig. 3, j.,
fig. 4). These are of an irregular shape, somewhat conic, as they
ai'e invariably wider centrifugally than proximally.

The ciliated chamhers are of a regular elongate, oval, cylindrical
shape. They are longer than in Aplysilla (1), and represent some-
what the radial tubes of the Syconidse or the ciliated chambers of
Euplectella (2). They measure 0-17 in length and are 1"03 mm.
wide (/!, fig. 4). They have inhalent pores only at the distal end
which touches a part of the inhalent canal system. These pores are
ariable in number, probably because the Sponge can close them at
option. Generally there seem to be from 3 — 5. As a look at fig. 4

(1) R. V. Lendenfeld. Neue Aplysmidae, Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche
Zoologie. Band XXXVIII., Seite 234.

(2) F. E. Schidze. The soft parts of Euplectella aspergillum. Transac-
actions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. Vol. XXIX., p. 661. Tab. A.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. i

will show, some chambers are in direct communication with the sub-
dermal cavity, whilst otliers draw their supply of water from the
inhalent canals. These ciliated chambers are not constricted at
their exhalent aperture, which is circular and opens generally into
a narrow exhalent canal (e. fig. 3), a few ciliated chambers open
direct into the gastral cavity in the centre of the Sponge.

The exhalent canal system consists of more or less radial narrow
canals, pointing slightly upwards towards the Osculum, these
canals are cylindrical and curved in such a manner, that their
distal portion runs for a short distance parallel to the outer
surface, whilst their proximal part is radial, and often stands at
nearly right angle with the former ; and of an extensive gastral
cavity taking u]i the central portion of the Sponge and traversed
by a few thick and ramified threads of tissue.

The narrow exhalent branch canals have a diameter measuring
from 0-1 — 0*3 mm. The central gastral cavity has a diameter
equal to a fourth to a third of the diameter of the part of the
Sponge in which it is situated. The threads pervading it in
varying direction are distant and rare. They are more or less
cylindrical, and measure 04 mm. in thickness.

Towards the Osculum they get scarcer and scarcer, in the upper-
most 5 mm. of the Oscular tube or Gastral cavity there are none.
(Fig- 3.)

Histology.

The Skin is covered on both sides by a low flat Epithelium and
contains in the Gallert of its Mesoderm three kinds of cells.
Amoeboid wandering cells towards the lower surface in great
abundance forming a regular layer (d. fig. 4) ; ordinary multipolar
tissue cells and an external layer of Gland cells.

In the threads perforating the subdermal cavity, which are
covered by the same Epithelium as the outer skin we find bipolar
and multipolar tissue cells and also a few amoeboid wandering cells
The extensive inhalent canals are clothed with a similar Epithelium.
The fringe cells in the chambers are of uniform kind throughout
and do not become lower towards the inhalent aperture as in some

O A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

other Sponges. The Mesoderm between them is filled with bipolar
and multipolar tissue cells and also contains a few wandering
amoeboids (fig. 4).

The thick threads pervading the gastral cavity are covered by a
flat Epithelium, which is not different from the ectodermal Epithe-
lium of the outer surface and inhalent canal system. The most
prominent elements in this ])art of the Sponge are the sexual
products, which at certain seasons take up nearly the entire
substance of these gastral threads.

The amceboid wandering cells.

Partly by observations on the distribution of these elements
and partly by a series of experiments, I have been led (1) to
assume that they absorbed digestible matter, which is transmitted
to them by the Epithel cells on the upper side of the Subdermal
cavities in certain Aplysinidte.

The distribution of these elements in our Sponge also points to
a similar function. They are most numerous just below the inner
siii-face of the skin, and met with, less abundantly, also in other
parts of the Sponge.

I had no opportunity of observing these cells in the live tissue,
but the images represented by good sublimate and Alcohol speci-
mens on sections are exactly like those described by me (I.e.)
in the case of Aplysinidte.

The Gland Cells.

These elements have the same position as the corresponding
elements in Aplysinidse (2), and are also of similar shape. They
appear pear-shaped and attached to the outer surface by two to
four slender threads. They measure 0*01 x 0-002 mm.

(l)E.v. Lendenfeld. Neue Aplysinidaj. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche
Zoologie. Band XXXVIII., Seite 249, ff.
(2) R. V. Lendenfeld. L.c. Seite 254.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D.

The sexual products.

Ova and Sperraatophores, that is to say, masses of Sperma-
tozoons enclosed in a kind of sack ai^e found abundantly and
exclusively in the threads of the Gastral cavity. Polejaeff (1)
has given a new explanation of the formation of these masses of
Spermatozoons, and I am inclined to believe that the Spermato-
genesis described by that author from Sycandra also holds good in
the case of our Bajalus.

Ova and Spermatozoa are never found in one and the same
specimen, but that is no reason why this Sponge should not be
hermaphroditic all the same, as it is not altogether improbable
that the male and female products are matured in the same
specimens at diiferent times.

The fact that the sexual products are massed in the interior
of the Sponge, in the exhalent canal system, shows that our
Sponge is in this particular similar to Aplysilla (2), and
particularly to Oscarella lobularis (3).

We find that in our Sponge there is, if my hypothesis (4)
regarding the digestion of Sponges be accepted, a digestive cavity
below the skin — the subdermal cavity — a breathing and excretary
zone below this — the ciliated chambers — and a kind of very little
differentiated sexual organ in the centre — the gastral threads —
whilst the " Gastral cavity " has the function of a breeding place, a
marsupium.

Locality : South Coast of Australia, Port Phillip, Von Lenden-
feld. Pretty rare in the laminarian zone attached to stones.

Season : The Sponge was found repeatedly with sexual products
in August and September. At that time and also at other times
specimens without sexual products were obtained.

(1) iV. Polejaeff. Die Spermatogenese bei Sycancka raphanus. Sitzungs-
berichte der Kaiserlichen Academie der'Wisenschaften in Wien, Mathema-
tisch-Naturwissenschaftliche Classe. Band LXXXVI., Seite 278.

(2) B. V. Lendenfeld. L.c. Tafel XL , fig. 14.

(3) F. E. Schulze. Die Gattung Halisarca, Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaft-
liche Zoologie. Tafel IV., fig. 20,

(4) B. V. Lendenfeld. The Digestion of Sponges Ectodermal or Ento-
dermal. Proceedings of the Linneau Society of New South Wales. Vol.
IX., p. 434, ff.

\^.

10 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

II. SUBORDO. GUMMING.
0. Schmidt (1).

MYX0SP0NC4I.^ WITH A MESODERM RENDERED TOUGH BY
NUMEROUS DENSELY PACKED FIBRILLS WHICH FORM THE
MAIN PORTION OF THE WHOLE SPONGE AND WHICH GIVE
TO IT THE KNOWN INDIA-RUBBFR LIKE DEGREE OF ELAS-
TICITY AND HARDNESS. WITH OR WITHOUT SPHERICAL
POLYACTINELLID FLESH-SPICULES.

This Subordo comprises at present only the single Family of
the Chondrosidae

When the aberrant Cellulojjhana 0. Schmidt, will be better
known it may perhaps require the establishment of a family for
itself.

Gorticium, O. Schmidt, which as we shall see connects the
Gumminae with the Tetractinellidre might perhaps also be placed
in a separate family of the Gumminfe.

10. FAMILIA. CHONDROSID^. F. E. Schulze (2).

With the characters of the Subordo.

F. E. Schulze (3) has taken the trouble to enumerate all
Sponges which have been described as members of this group.

There are seven genera enumerated by him : — Chondrosia,
Nardo (4) ; Chondrilla, O. Schmidt (5) ; Osculina, 0. Schmidt
(6) ; Columnites, O. Schmidt (7) ; Gorticium, O. Schmidt (8) ;
Cellulophana, 0. Schmidt (9), and Lacinia, Selenka (10).

(1) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Seite 37.

(2) F. E. Schulze. L.c. Seite 87 ff.

(3) F. E. Schulze. Die Familie der Chondrosidaj. Zeitschrift fiir wissen-
schaftliche Zoologie. Band XXIX. , Seite 95.

(4) Nardo. Osservazioiie anatomiche supra 1' animale marino detto
volgarnente Rognone di mare Estratte dal, Vol. VI., degl' Atti dell'
Istituto Veneto.

(5) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Seite 38.

(6) O. Schmidt. Die Spongien der Kilste von Algier (Drittes Supplement
zu den Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres.) Seite 42.

(7) 0. Sclimidt. Grundzuge einer Spongienfauna des Atlantischen
Gebietes. Seite 25.

(8) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Seite 42.

(9) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Seite 41.

(10) E. Selenka. Ueber einige Suhwamnie aus der Slidsee, Zeitschrift fii
Wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XVII., Seite 568.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 11

Chondrosia, Osculina, and Cellulophana contain no flesb-
spicules, and I combine them in my Sub-family C]iondrosim«.

Cbondi'illa contains spherical polyactinellid spicules, and I place
it in my Sub-family Chodinssina3.

Corticium, I consider, as a genus of Tetractinellidte, connecting
this order with the Myxospongiaj, in accordance with 0.
Schmidt (1).

Colummites is a Monactinellid Sponge, and I^acinia as Carter
(2), and F. E. Schulze (3) have shown is no Sponge at all.

The Australian specimens I have found can be placed in the
existing genera without any difficulty.

I. SUB-FAMILIA CHONDROSIN.E. Von Lendenfeld.
Chondrosidfe without fleshspicules.

24. GENUS. CHONDROSIA. Nardo.

Chondrosinfe with one or a few Oscula, a smooth surface and
without incised frills to the Oscula.

54. SPECIES. CHONDROSIA RAMSAYI. Von Lendenfeld, %. 6—9.

I dedicate this species to the Curator of the Australian Museum.

Chondrosia Ramsayi appears in flat, irregular masses, attached
to rocks etc., by a few small places only. It always seems to have
the shape of a convex lamella. The convex side is uppermost. Such
a lamella may attain an extension of 40 x 30 mm., and at the
same time be about 10 — 14 mm. thick. Smaller specimens are
proportionately thinner.

The color is, extraordinary to say, subjected to no variability, it
is always dark blueish black all over the Sponge in reflected light.

In transmitted lio;ht it is dark brown.

(1) 0. Schmidt. Grundziige einer Spongienfauna des Atlantischen
Gebietes. Seite 64.

(2) T. Carter. On two new species of Gummmse. Annales and
Magazine of Natural History. Ser. IV., Vol. VII., p. 26.

(3) F. E. Schulze. Die Familie der Chondrosidse. Zeitschrift fitr
Wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXIX., Seite 92.

12 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The surface is shining as in other species, but not quite smooth.
A reticulate structure as described by O. Schmidt (1) of Chon-
drosia plebeja does not exactly ruake its appearance, but still the
roughness is of a kind not met with in other species of Chondrosia,
so that by this alone our species is distinguished from others.

A transverse section shows, that the cortex is highly developed,
and has a dark outer margin, it is very light coloured towards the
interior. The Pulpa is of a uniform daik brown color. A few
canals are seen in it (fig. 6), but these are rare and small, so that
the Sponge is pretty dense, as is the rule with the genus.

The Osculae are more numerous than in other species, and
grouped together asin Osculina (2). They possess small " chimneys"
that is thin membraneous frills about 1 mm. high, which however
are simple cylindrical, and have a siiiooth margin (different from
Osculina.)

The Canal System.

The Canal System certainly shows some peculiarities which
distinguish it fiom the hitherto investigated species, and if I
have not established a new genus for our Sponge I have not
done so mainly for the sake of simplicity and also because
the canal system of our species although peculiar can be easily
derived from that, so excellently described, of Chondrosina reni-
formis by F. E. Schulze (^3).

Scattered all over the surface we find small pores, measuring
about 0-01 across. These are circular and we soon perceive that
they are always situated in groups of 5 — 10 and in fact, that there
always lies a group of such pores at the base of an indenture.
These indentui-es of the surface are inconspicuous. Their existence
causes the roughness of the surface described above (fig. 8). I
think it highly probable, that the pores of Chondrosia plebeja may
be distributed in a similar manner,

(1) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien der Kiiste von Algier. Seite 1.

(2) O. Schmidt L.c. Seite 2.

(3) F. E. Schulze. Die Familie der Chondrosidae. Zeitschrift fiir
wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXIX. Seite 100 flf.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 13

Below each group of pores we find an extensive hollow (on the
section). In comparing the different sections of a continuous series
it is easy to ascertain that these hollows are the expression of
transverse sections of tangentally extended wide lacunose canals
(fig. 7-8). Below the zone of these smaller tangental lacunes we
find a system of larger ones similar in shape and distxibution. The
canals of the outer zone communicate with one another by means
of very rare and minute pores (fig. 8), and also with the larger
lacunes below by means of similar pores which in consecpience of
their paucity and smallness are very hard to find (figs. 7-8).

All these lacunes lie so close to one another, that only narrow
walls of tissue remain between them (fig. 7.)

The average diameter of the lacunes in the outer zone is 0-05,
of those in the lower zone 0"2mm. The lucunose zone has a
thickness of 0*4 mm.

Below this no lacunes are found in the cortex, except a few
very distant and large irregular tangental canals (fig. 6), which
collect the water from the small communicating outer lacunes.
These canals have very irregular transverse sections and an
average diameter of 1 mm. The cortex is of about equal thickness,
so that the whole thickness of it is taken up by these large inhalent
canals. The lower side of these large tangental canals lies in the
surface, which divides the cortex from the Pulpa of the Sponge.

From this lower side numerous canals originate, which are
cylindrical, and follow a moi-e or less radial direction. Repeatedly
ramified, they become smaller and smaller the further we penetrate
into the Sponge.

Around the final coecal and narrow ramifications the ciliated
chambers, which are spherical, cluster. They have a diameter of
0-05 mm., and do not appear to be very numerous. The inhalent
pores could not be found. The exhalent opening is small and
circular. Regarding their shape and position they do not difier
from those of Chondrosia reniformis, and I refer to F. E. JSchulze's
(1) description.

(1) F. E. Schulze. Die Familie der Chondrosidaj. Zeitschrift fur
wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XX [X. Seite 107-108.

14 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The exlialenb canal system is simple not lacunose, and sliows
no peculiarities.

Structure.

Histologically our species resembles Chandrosia reniformis (1)
very closely. The round fat like globular masses are most
numerous towai'ds the outer surface. Here also the Pigment
masses (fig. 8) are situated. The latter follow the inhalent canals
downward for a good distance (tig. 8). I found the whole surface
covered with flat Epithelial cells. I failed to detect Gland cells,
and believe that their protective function is performed in the
GummiuEe by the universally distributed fat-like spherules so
common below the outer surface. The walls of the large Canals
inhalent and exhalent are highly granular, and the margin of
this granular coating is sharply defined outward towards the
Gallert tissue of the Sponge. This granular lamella is thicker
around the lai'ge canals than around the small ones. Ciliated
chambers are never found in the granvilar canal coating.

The pigment is massed in the outer portion of the Cortex,
which consequently appears very dark in colour. The rest of the
Cortex is nearly colourless, hyaline, and of much lighter colour
than the pulpa (compare also F. E. Schulze's figures (2), the latter
is very granular and intransparent.

Locality: East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson, 10-20 metres
on stones, <tc. (Ramsay.)

II. SUB-FAMILIA. CHONDRISSIN.E. Von Lendenfeld.

Chandrosidte, with fleshspicules. The iieshspicules of this sub-
family are of a very simple kind, and all represent the type of a
ball with numerous irregularly disposed axes. The axes are repre-
sented by spines, extending radially from the sphere. The possible
variations are the following : The spines may attain a relative great
length whilst the diameter of the central solid sphere decreases j

{\) F. E. Schuke. Die Familie der Chondrosidre. Zeitschrift fiir
wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXIX. Seite 100 ff.
(2) F. E. Schulze. L.c. Tafel VIII., fig. 8.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 15

in this way the star shaped spicule is produced. The spines of
this may be smooth or roughened, and serrated by secundary
very small spines extending centrifugally.

If the central solid sphere attains a large size and the spines
become small then the shape of a spiny ball is attained, which
may be more like a Datura fruit or a Swiss " Morgenstern,"
according to whether the spines are numerous and slender or not
numerous, short and thick.

25. GENUS. CHONDRILLA. 0. Schmidt (1).

Chondrissinfe without subdermal cavities. The commencement
of the inhalent canal system consists of a great number of parallel
radial canals leading from the inhalent pores direct into tangental
canals which collect the water and from which the inhalent system
of the Pulpa originates.

Although this Genus is at present the only one of the Sub-family,
still I give this diagnosis for the purpose of showing on what
principles I consider other genera might be established.

55. SPECIES. CHONDRILLA SECUNDA. Nov. spec. Fig. 10-12.

I name this Sponge the second to commemorate the fact that
it was of the thousands of different forms collected by me in
Australia the second specimen I found.

Our Sponge resembles in outer appearance a lamellar or irregular
bulbous mass, the lamellar shape is by far the most frequent. The
Lamellae are not of uniform thickness throughout ; they attain an
average size of 30 x 60 mm. and more, and are in the thickest part
12 mm., in diameter. In places these lamellae are very thin and
in fact they may be pierced in certain places so as to present a
sieve-like appearance. The bulbous variety of this species is not
large ; it attains a diameter of 25-35 mm. It is attached to
stones etc., by a small basis only. Also the more frequent
lamellar form is attached to stones by small parts of its lower
surface only. I obtained most of my specimens adrift The

(1) 0. Schmidt, Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Seite 38,

16 A MONOGRAPH OP THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

surface is perfectly smooth. The colour is subject to similar
variations as in some European species and varies from light dull
yellowish gray to dark bluish black.

Mostly the side exposed to the light seems to be of a darker
colour than the other. However a strict rule can be established
here as little as in the case of Chondrosia reniformis (1).

The outer surface-colour only is subject to the above variations.
The interior of the Sponge always has the same dull grey colour.
A Cortex is not distinguishable.

The oscula are raised slightly over the surrounding surface 3 — 6
in number, always on the upper side of the flat specimens, circular
and about 2 — 3 mm. in diameter.

The bulbous specimens have only one osculura.

The outer part of the Sponge appears very dark and intrans-
parent, in consequence of the great number of pigment granules
in the dark parts. The light parts are much better suited for
investigation and more transparent. This outermost zone always
appears radially striped in consequence of the inhalent canals all
standing vertical on the surface in their outer portion.
Structure.

Our species does not seem to differ from Chondrilla nucula (2)
in any respect, except the shape of the spicules. There are two
kinds of spicules. (Figs. 11, 12.)

Both kinds are met with not very abundantly throughout the
Sponge. Towards the outer surface, and particularly also in the
canal walls, they became much more numerous.

The larger kind measure 0*064 mm., the smaller kind 0-012 mm.
across. The spines of the larger kind are about 0*006 mm. long
at 0-004 mm. broad. The spines of the smaller kind measure
0-003 X 0-001 mm.

The larger kind represents a ball with distant short and truncate
smooth spines which are rounded terminally. The surface of the
central sphere is clearly visible between the spines. In the small
kind the spines are pointed and relatively much longer, three

{I) F. E. Schuhe. Die Spongieii des Adriatisclien Meeres. Seite 97-98.
(2) F. E. Schuhe. Die Familie der Chondrosidae. Zeitschrift fiir
wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXIX., Seite 108 ff.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 17

times as long as broad at the base, regularly conic. The surface
of the central sphere does not exist, the spines stand so close that
their biases touch each other.

Locality : South Coast of Australia, Port Phillip. (Von Len-
denfeld.) Laminarian Zone.

56. SPECIES. CHONDRILLA AUSTRALIENSIS. Carter (1).

Incrusting or self-supporting, and spreading horizontally, flat,
cakeshaped, lobed, of a dirty yellow or buff colour. Surface
smooth, slippery, glistening consistence, semi-elastic, subcartila-
ginous. Tolerably tough. Vents numerous, small, of difterent
sizes in groups or terminal on the lobes. Cortex translucent.

Spicules of two kinds. 1. With short, sharp conic spines,
taking up the whole surface of the sphere. 2. With slender,
sometimes terminally bifid or trifled spines, with serrate side
These two kinds of spicules are most numerous towards the outer
surface. The short spined spicules measure 0-026 mm., the others
0"026 mm. across.

Localitj : East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson.

Note. — I have dredged in Port Jackson numerous specimens of
this Sponge. It appears to be very abundant.

57. SPECIES CHONDRILLA PAPILLATA. Nov. spec. Fig. 13—16.

This species is characterized by the vei-y peculiar roughness of
the surface. The Sponge is lobate and massive, not lamellar or
globular as the other species generally. It appears somewhat like
a hornsponge (fig. 1.3), in consequence of its erect shape and the
papillse on its surface.

It consists of a central mass from which cylindrical or slightly
flattened processes extend upwards. The whole Sponge attains
the great diameter of 60 mm. (height.) The processes measure
10 — 14 mm. in diameter.

The Oscula are situated terminally on these finger-shaped
processes. They are circular and have a diameter of about 2 mm.
There exist no " chimneys " around them.

(1) //. Carter. On two new species of Gumminje. Annals and Maga-
zine of Natural History, IV, Series. Vol. XII., p. 23, pi. I., fig. 10—14, 16.
2

18 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The whole surface is greatly roughened in consequence of
papillse, which stand very close projecting from it all over the
Sponge. (Fig. 13, 11.)

These papillte are spherical, 1 mm. in diameter, and attached to
the Sponge surface with a broad base, which is slightly smaller
than the equatorial diameter. They appear as f of spheres and
stand so close to one anothei-, that the spaces between them are
always smaller than their own diameter. In some parts of the
surface they even touch.

In internal structure this Sponge shows an aberrant peculiarity.

The spicules are of two kinds as in the foregoing and the following
species. There are spherical spicules with short, sharp conic spines ;
and stellate spicules with slender, conic, serrated spines fig (15-16).

The spherical spicule measures 0*019 mm., across, the spines
000-3 X 0*002 mm. The stellate sjncule 0*013 mm., across, the
spines 0*008 x 0*0015 mm.

Both kinds of spicules are met with, scattered throughout the
whole of the Sponge rather scarce. In the papillae however the
spicules are massed (fig, 14) so that the distance between the
spicules is about equal to their diametei*. The spicules lie here
three or four layers deep. In this part of the Sponge the spherical
spicules predominate very much over the stellate ones. In the
Pulpa the difference in number of the two is slight. If there
is any perceptible difference the stellate form predominates.

The colour of this species in spirits is a uniform light melange or
brown. The interior has the same colour as the surface, only in a
lighter shade.

Locality : East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson, Ramsay.
58. SPECIES. CHONDRILLA CORTICATA. Nov. spec. Fig. 17-20.

This species is characterized by its extremely hard outer surface.

It has as yet only been found in the shape of rather thin lamellfe,
which are peculiarly bent and curved so as generally to attain the
shape of a cup (fig. 17).

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 19

The flat extended Sponge measures, full grown, 70 ram., in
length, and 40 mm., in width. It is the largest of the Australian
Gumminse I have seen. The plate is of uniform thickness
throughout measuring from 10-12 mm.

The outer surface is smooth. The whole Sponge has a light
brown colour. The oscula are few in number, about seveii to a
large specimen, circular and slightly drawn in, that is to say at the
bottom of slight funnel-shaped depressions in the surface, and
surrounded by a ring-shaped slight elevation. Sometimes they lie
in the plane of the surface.

The interior of the Sponge is coloured a little darker than the
Cortex. A transverse section shows that the canals in the pulpa
are more numerous and smaller than in other species.

The structure of the inner parts afford no peculiarity. The
Cortex, however, is of great interest.

There are two kinds of spicules in this species as in the foregoing
one. Spherical and stellate ones.

The spherical sjncule measures 0"015 mm. across ; the spines are
particularly short, broad, conic and truncate, with very sharp points
they measure O-QOl mm. in height and are at the base 0-0015 mm.
thick.

The stellate spicule measurea 0-01 across; the spines are mostly
smooth and generally taper to one fine and sharp point, they are
slender and conic, measuring 0-004: nun. in length and at the base
0 0008 mm. in width.

In the pulpa we find both kinds of spicules distributed pretty
evenly with a slight preponderance of the stellate spicules. The
spicules are scarce and on thin sections very far apart.

In the outer part of the Cortex, ^ust below the outer surface we
meet with a regular hard pavement of the spherical spicules which
lie closely packed in three or four layers above one another. They
lie as close to one another as their spherical shape will allow, and
their spines are interposed with one another in such a manner

\

20 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

that the whole pavement attains a high degree of firmness.
Similar cortical layers are known of many Sponges. No species
of Gumminte possesses them so highly developed as this Chondrilla
corticata.

Locality : East Coast of Australia. Port Jackson.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES. I. to V.

Fig. 1 . — Bajalus laxus. R. v. L. A specimen of the variety with lobate
processes. Natural size drawn from life.

Fig. 2. — Bajalus laxus. R. v. L. A specimen of the variety with finger-
shaped slender processes. Natural size drawn from life.

Fig. 3. — Bajalus laxus. R. v. L. Transverse section through a process of
the variety with slender outgrowths, 1:20. An outer trabecular
reticulate zone, (d) can be distinguished and large conic inhalent
Canals (i.) The exhalent Canals (e) are much narrower, extending
more or less radially, these are cut obliquely, and therefore appear
very oval in the section. The interior (I) appears lacunose, and can
be considered as a wide Canal (like the central tribe of the
Syconidse) traversed by threads of tissue (t. )

Fig. 4. — Bajalus laxus. R. v. L. Distal part of the transverse section
through a slender process 1:450. The inhalent pores {p) are covered
by a thin perforated plate externally, (a) which is perforated by
numerous small pores (p), leading into the pore (P.) Below the
outer skin (6) a wide sub-dermal cavity extends all round the
Sponge (/■), which is traversed by numerous anastomosing and
repeatedly ramified threads (c). All these parts are covered
by flat Ectodermal Epithelium cells (e). In the skin and in the
Sub-dermal threads we find amoeboid wondering cells (d.) In the
skin below the outer surface glandcells (g), the water flows partly
direct from the Sub-dermal cavity, and partly by way of large

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 21

conical inhalant canals (I) into the ciliated chambers (f), which
possess apparently from 3 —5 inhalent pores at their distal rounded
ends, exclusively (h.) Amoeboid wondering cells (d) are also
found in the Mesoderm between the ciliated chambers.

Fig. 5. — Bajalus laxus. R. v. L. A portion of the thread network in the
central Gastral cavity of the Sponge. The thread is filled with
Spermospores containing numerous Spermatozoans each, 1,000:1.

Fig. 6. — Chondrosia Ramsayi. R. v. L. Half a middle sized, flat specimen,
in natural size drawn from a spirit specimen from the Australian
Museum. The Oscula are slightly raised above the rest of the
surface, but not surrounded by an incurved fringe as in Osculina.

Fig. 7. — Chondrosia Ramsayi. R. v. L. Transverse section, vertical to
the upper surface 1:20. A coi'tex is well defined, (c) outwards it is
dark colored (h), and full of pigment granules, below it is light and
transparent. The Pulpa (p) is colored much darker and very
intransparent. Below the surface there is a layer of small anas-
tomising irregular tangental canals, which form a kind of subdermal
cavity (i). They unite to form large likewise tangental inhalent
canals (t). From these small inhalent canals of a more or less radial
direction originate the ramifications of these bear the ciliated
chambers. The inhalent canals (e) unite to form large lacunose
canals leading into the Oscular tubes.

Fig. 8.— Chondrosia Ramsayi. R. v. L. Transverse section through the
Cortex showing the structure of the subdermal cavities and the
distribution of pigment 1:200.

Fig. 9.— Chondrosia Ramsayi. R. v. L. Section through part of the Pulpa
1:80. Inhalent branch canals (j). Ciliated spherical chambers (c).
Exhalent canals (e).

Fig. 10. — Chondrilla secunda. R. v. L. Drawn from life in natural size.
Fig. 11.— Chondrilla secunda. R. v. L. A large spherical spicule 300:1.
Fig. 12.— Chondrilla secunda. R. v. L. A small spherical spicule 300:1.

Z\L A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPOXGES.

Fig. 13. — Chondrilla papillata. R. v. L. Natural size, drawn from a spirit
specimen.

Fig. 14. — Chondrilla papillata, R. v. L. Transverse section through outer
zone, showing a Papilla densly filled with spicules 70:1

Fig. 15.— Chondrilla papillata. R. v. L. Spherical spicide. 300:1

Fig. 16.— Chondrilla papillata. R. v. L. Stellate spicule. 300:1.

Fig. 17. — Chondrilla corticata. R. v. L. Natural size, drawn from life.

Fig. 18. — Chondrilla corticata. R. v. L. Transverse section through the
outer zone 60:1, showing the dermal pavement skeleton.

Fig. 19.— Chondrilla corticata. R. v. L. A spherical spicule. 300:1.

Fig. 20. —Chondrilla corticata. R. v. L. A stellate spicule. 300:1.

THE METHOD OF SECTION-CUTTING WITH SOME
IMPROVEMENTS.

By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

It is a well-known fact that the structure of many organs of
plants and animals cannot be investigated without getting a direct
insight into the interior. It is easy enough to place a small
portion of the interior of any organ under the microscope, but it
is impossible in that way to ascertain the mutual position of parts.
To enable the observer to study them under the microscope and in
sufficient connection with other parts, so that their position can
be defined, there is only one method, that of section cutting.

Organs of plants and a few hard parts of animals can be cut as
they are. It is advantageous to jikce such in a slit made in a
cork and cut them together with the adjacent cork with a sharp
razor. In cutting sections of plants, which are damp, it is
necessary to wet the razor so that the section, when cut, can
immediately be immersed in water and so prevented from drying
and shriveling up.

Soft animal parts must be hardened. Any one of the methods
described in my paper on the preservation of tender marine
animals (proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South
Wales, Vol. IX.) can be used. The result will in every case be
that the hardened organ will be preserved in strong spirits, with
which it will also be saturated. The other methods of cutting
with the hand, and hardening and embedding simultaneously, and
the freezing method, do not seem to. yield such good results as the
one to be described below.

Brothers Hertwig (Das Nervensystem und die Sinnesorgane
der Medusen) have made use of the former of these two methods.
They placed the specimen, after it had been treated with osmic
acid and stained with alum-carmin in a solution of gum-glycerine,

24 THE METHOD OF SECTION-CUTTING WITH IMPROVEMENTS,

and enclosed it between bits of fresh liver. The whole was then
placed in strong spirits, where the liver, together with the gum-
glycerine, got very hard, and enclosed the specimen which was
afterwards cut by hand. This method is an old one, and has
often been used befoi'e for less tender animals than those, to
which the brothers Hertwig have applied it, namely, the small
jellyfish.

Sollas (Sponge Fauna of Norway, Annals and Magazine of
Natural History, 1879) recommends the freezing Microtome. The
specimen is placed in glycerine-gelatine and hardened, not by the
influence of spii-its of wine but by cold, which is produced by a
small refrigerating apparatus. The specimens treated in this way
are cut by a machine or Microtome.

Both the sections cut in liver and with the freezing Microtome
cannot be placed in Canada balsam but must be kept in glycerine
or gelatine and are consequently liable to attain too great a trans-
parency in course of time and also to get dim in consequence of the
growth of Bacteria under the cover glass.

The method which is recognised as the very best by most
microscopists is the one which I have been using and improving
for several yeai-s, .and a description of which follows.

The Specimen.
It is of great importance that as small a piece as possible should
be cut out of the organ, that all unnecessary parts should be cut
away and the whole thing cut into such a shape that it will after-
wards be easy to find out what position the specimen had in the
organ from which it has been taken.

Hardening.

To small and tender organs osmic acid can be recommended as
yielding better results than any other re-agent known. The
specimen is placed in a solution varying in strength from 0-5 — 2%
and left there for a short time. Both time and strength depend on
the nature of the organ which is to be cut.

Corrosive sublimate, a concentrated solution to be used, which
may be made stronger by warming. The specimen, if tender,

BY R. VON LENDENPELD, PH.D. 25

should be dipped in tlie solution if warm and left a short time if
cold. Tough organs can remain for some time in the solution.
Wilson (On Alcyonarians, Mittheilungen der zoologischen Station
in Neapel, 1884,) recommends to leave soft corals for several hours
in a wai-m concentrated solution of corrosive sublimate. For most
purposes this will be too strong.

Picric acid solution or a mixture of it with sulphuric acid diluted
has been used by many with good results, so particularly Kleinen-
berg (Hydra). It is particularly good for staining nervous fibres
which are coloured yellow by it.

Chromic acid or Bichromate of potassium in dilute solution is
used for brains to great advantage.

Chloride of gold 1% solution colours nerve fibres and tissue cells
and the intercellular substance.

Nitrate of silver is reduced by the intei'cellular substance and
eventually turns it black so that the limits of the cells can be made
clearly visible.

Chloride of Palladium hardens the tissue and colours, muscular
fibre brown. Cloride of iron has also been reoommended for
hardening the tissue.

Most metallic salts have some influence or other on the Proto-
plasm, and in every case the metal enters into combination with
it, changing its colour and making it hard.

A specimen treated with one of these re-agents will stand
washing in distilled water without any perceptible change taking
place.

Staining in Toto.

The specimens should be stained, because the colour not only
makes certain parts more distinct, but also counteracts the
noxious after effects of the hardening^re-agents. Osmic acid, gold,
and other specimens, invariably commence to darken after some
months if they have not been stained.

The specimens can either be stained when whole, or the sections
can be coloured. The staining in toto saves much trouble and
time, and is also advantageous, because the sections have not to be

26 The method of section-cutting with improvements,

handled so much. On the other hand the staining in toto has
two great drawbacks. Firstly, it very often happens that with
every care the colour does not penetrate to the centre of the
specimen, and even if this result has been attained it is very
difficult to stain the whole specimen in a uniform manner ; the
outer portions will generally be stained in a greater degree than
the inner ones. Secondly, it is necessary to keep the specimen in
the colouring solution for a long time to attain thorough staining,
and it is very difficult with most colouring liquids to prevent
maceration from spoiling the whole specimen. Even if the
specimen is kept on ice the epithelia will often be loosened and the
whole thing spoilt if the specimen is left in the staining solution
over night.

In a hot country such as this it is difficult to prevent this.

Any colour in solution will do for staining, and a wide scope is
left to the microscopist in this field.

Aniline dyes have been extensively used of late, but although
they are of great help to those who study bacteria, they have not
yielded any good results with higher organisms. Eosin, Fuchsin,
Bismarckbrown, &c., have been tried. They stain very rapidly,
and diffuse through the tissue with greater rapidity than any
other colouring fluid. The fault they have is, that they stain
everything in the same way and nearly in the same degree, so
that one sees in a section stained with aniline dye hardly more
than in a section not stained at all.

Carmine, in different solutions, is a very much better colour.
It stains the " chromatin " of the protoplasm very much, and all
the other parts of the tissue only faintly. We know in what
kind of cells and parts thereof this chromatin is contained, and
we can therefore attain a clearer insight into the structure of any
specimen by colouring with carmine, than we could with the
investigation of not coloured sections. The carmine can be
dissolved in various ways — I refer the reader to text-books on
Histology, mainly Renvier — the solutions I have found best are
those in alum and picric acid. Carmine powder is dissolved in a
concentrated solution of alum when still hot and immediately

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 27

filtered ; a deep red solution passes through and can be used as it
is, or for very tender specimens diluted with 50 % of destilled
water. This alum-carmine stains the nuclei of all cells ; the ova
spermatozoa and ganglia cells, and also muscular and gland cells very
intensely, whilst it gives to the oi'dinaiy connective tissue only a
slight red tinge.

Picric-acid-carmine is a most excellent colouring fluid for the
tissue of higher animals. It stains like the foregoing, the nuclei,
ganglea cells, &c., red, but the picric acid in it at the same time
colours the horny substance of the skin and also nerve fibres
intensely orange-yellow.

Hfemotoxylin is also an excellent staining fluid, prepared
according to the Kleinenberg. It stains the oixlinary protoplasm
light violet and the nuclei dai-k violet, nearly black.

I refer the reader who may wish to collect some further particulars
on this subject to the standard works on Histology by Renvier
and Klein.

Preparation.

After the specimen is coloured it must be well-washed so as to
remove all colouring matter, which has not entered the protoplasm
or other parts of the specimen in a fixed combination.

Cold water will in most cases be the best thing. For Haema-
toxylin, spirits.

When the specimen is svashed it can either be imbedded in gum
Glycerine, frozen and cut forthwith or imbedded in gum glycerine
enclosed in liver, hardened in spirits and cut with the hand as
described above, or also prepared for imbedding in paraffin.

I, together with many other zoologists, consider the paraffin
imbedding method to be far superior to any other.

The first thing to be done with the washed specimen to prepare
it for imbedding in parafiin, is to extract all the water from it by
means of alcohol. This is a very difficult operation in the case of
veiy tender specimens, and requires gi'eat patience and care.

If the specimen is placed in strong spirits immediately it will
shrink and become totally useless, because the water is extracted
from it by the strong hygroscopic spirits with such great violence.

28 THE METHOD OP SECTION-CUTTING WITH IMPROVEMENTS,

It is therefore necessary to place the specimen in a series of
mixtures of alcohol and water, getting continuously stronger until
it is placed in pure absolute alcohol.

It is always connected with difficulties to procure this latter,
wherefore I recommend it to the workers in the colonies to make
it themselves. Ordinary strong not methylated spirits of wine are
mixed with quick lime, which will absorb all the water, and the
pure absolute alcohol can be distilled from this mixture of spirits
and quicklime. In this way the spirits which have been used can
always be utilised again, and the whole process will save a great
deal of expense in the course of time.

Good non-methylated spirits of wine must be procured, and its
percentage of alcohol ascertained. The spirits of wine consists of a
mixture of water and absolute alcohol ; the percentage of which
is expressed in a most unpractical and clumsy way by the term x
over pi-oof. By means of an areometer it is easy to ascertain the
percentage of alcohol in the spirits. This mixture can then be
mixed with absolute alcohol or water, and any desired strength
produced.

I can recommend the following mixtures for practical use,
30%, 50%, 70%, 90%, 100% of Alchohol in 100 parts of the
mixture.

The specimen, when washed is firstly placed in 30% alchohol,
left there several hours, then in .50% left there for some hours,
then 70%, 90% and finally 100% or absolute alcohol and left in
each mixture 2-4 hours. In the absolute alcohol, which ought to
be changed once or twice, 1 2 hours to a day.

In this way it is possible to get all the moisture out of the
tenderest specimen without it shrinking.

The specimen is then placed for a few hours in a solution of
alcohol in ether and finally in ether, where it again should remain
for a day. The specimen will lie at the bottom. Chloroform is
then poured into the ether (Giesbrecht) and being much heavier
than the latter it sinks down to the bottom, whilst the ether swims
on the surface. The specimen then lies between the two, below the
etlier and above the chloroform. The ether contained in the

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 29

specimen is slowly exchanged for chloroform and, finally, when
nearly all the ether is replaced, the specimen sinks down to the
bottom. It can then be removed and placed in fresh pure chloro
form and left there for 12 hours.
It is iiow ready for imbedding.

The Imbedding in Paraffin.

The imbedding is also a process which requires much care,
patience and experience. If the beginner often loses his specimen
in consequence of the want of the latter, he need not be disheart-
ened or ashamed ; this happens repeatedly to every one, and I
have seen even men like Lang and F. E. Schulze spoil their
specimens in imbedding.

I have found it advantageous to place the specimen for a day or
two in molten soft paraffin and keep the latter liquid and at the
uniform temperature of 47 — 49° <\, in a self-regulating water-bath
stove. During this time all the chloroform has escaped and the
specimen can be placed in another little cup with molten hard
paraffin kept at a temperature not exceeding 58° C. Pretty
hard paraffin will melt at that point. It can be left there for an
hour or so and can then be imbedded. A trough of paper or brass
measuring 1^ x -i x ^ inches is tilled with molten hard paraffin and
at the time when it commences to solidify the specimen is placed in
it. The " freezing " surface is kept open by heated needles and
the specimen is put in position by the same implements

It is of the greatest importance to put the specimen in such a
position that the desired direction of the sections can be obtained
by cutting the paraffin stick, cast in the trough straight across
that is vertical to its longitudinal axis. This is often a matter of
great difficulty, and it will always be of advantage to throw a
ray of reflected and concentrated- sunlight into the molten
paraffin, so as to illuminate the specimen properly. It is of
course most convenient to cut to an elongate shape before in such
a manner that one can tell the position in which it ought to be
imbedded by the outer shape of the specimen.

30 the method op section-cutting with improvements,

Cutting.

The paraffin Ijlock should cool down slowly, and be made as
cold as possible before cutting. The colder the paraffin the
harder, and the harder the better,

Caldwell recommended a very ingenous method of cutting
sections which has been adopted in sevei-al places, but which is
in pi-actice by no means so beautiful as in theory.

He encloses the hard paraffin with a thin coating of soft paraffin,
and in cutting, the one section sticks to the opposite margin of the
other. If cutting is continued a " ribbon " of sections is produced
which can be caught up by a moving bit of tape, and poi^tions of
which can be cut out showing continuous series of sections.

The Pai-affin block can be either cut by the hand or placed in a
section-cutting apparatus termed a Microtome, and cut either by
hand or automatically.

Cutting with the hand has been nearly universally abandoned
(Leuckart), and the Microtomes are used for the purpose. The
principal always is, that the knife moves backwards and forwards
whilst the paraffin block is slowly raised. Or the knife is steady
and the paraffin block lises and moves backwards and forwai'ds
at the same time. (Caldwell.) In the simpler instruments, one
moves the holder of the knife backwards and forwards in a metal
groove with the right hand, and i-aises the specimen to be cut,
with the left either by pushing it up along an inclined groove.
(Leiser), or by turning a screw (the common form.)

Automatic Mici'otomes are made by the Cambridge Mechanics'
Institution, which can be worked by water power or by ti-eading,
and the model has been copied by many with diverse alterations.
These automatic instruments yield very excellent results as long
as they are in order, but being so complicated they are apt to get
out of order. These are all adapted for the ribbon method and
sections of any desired thickness that is to the limit at which the
sharpest razor at a certain angle will cut can be made in
continuous series of specimens, measuring two inches across.

To all these instruments the same remarks apply, and every-
where the same difficulties are encountered.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 31

The success of making good sections depends firstly on the
quality and secondly on the position of the knife. No expense
should be spared to obtain the best razor possible for the purpose.
The knives, which are sold specially for the purpose, are always
bad and utterly useless.

The razor can be fixed either at right angles to the direction in
which the knife is moved, or obliquely. The opinions as to which
is the best diSer. Caldwell and I use the knife vertical to the
direction of the motion. Further the plane of the knife itself can
be altered so that the cutting edge dips moi-e or less downward.
With an angle of about 12° to the plain in which the knife moves
the finest sections can be cut. The difiiculty of having the knife
so steep is that then the sections tend to curl up.

This latter is a great evil and not altogether overcome by the
appliance of an outer carting of soft parafiine as recommended by
Caldwell.

F. E. Schulze has in recognition of this difficulty of the curling
up of the sections constructed an apparatus which prevents it to a
great extent, so much so, that if Schulze's method is combined with
Caldwell's one can be pretty sure of obtaining good sections.

A smooth round rod is fixed to the knife in such a manner, that
it lies parallel to, and just above the cutting edge so that any
section cut must pass through between the blade of the razor and
this rod, which can be attached by springs or screws to the back of
the knife.

I would recommend therefoi-e that such an additional apparatus
be added to any of the Microtomes in trade.

The outer coating of soft paraffin can be produced in a most
simple manner.

When the paraffin is cold and hard, all the unnecessary parts
around the specimen are cut away with a knife so that only a
millimetre of paraffin is left on every side of it. The top is then
removed. The lower end, which is subsequently fixed in the
paraffin-holder of the Microtome should be cut down just to fit
into the holder.

32 THE METHOD OF SECTION-CUTTING WITH IMPROVEMENTS,

When this has been done the top of the paraffin-stick containing
the specimen is dipped into a freezing molten mass of soft paraffin
and instantly withdrawn.

The desired coating of soft paraffin will then be found on the
outer surface.

There should always be continuous series of sections cut and
mounted, one after the other. For certain things, and particularly
for a preliminary investigation, this is not necessary to such an
extent, and it will save time, trouble and material, if in such a case
every second section is cut thick and thrown away, and every
second cut to the required fineness and mounted.

The thickness of sections is a point on which a great deal
depends. The mutual position of whole organs or groups of cells
can generally be ascertained much better by means of thick
sections and low powers, than by means of the very fine sections.

For histological detail a section is rarely too fine. The thick-
ness required varies with every case, and the thickness to choose
must be left to the investigator and his experience.

For an investigation into the structure of a rare and valuable
specimen, a continuous series of sections might perhaps be recom-
mended, which are alternately very thin— as thin as they can be
made — and of medium thickness, perhaps 0'005 — 0'02 mm.

Mounting.

The sections when attached to one another as a ribbon, can be
placed on a slide by cutting a portion of the ribbon corresponding
in length to the size of the slide off, and placing it there. Other
wise it is necessary to place the sections as they are made, one after
the other on the slide. It is hereby very important, that they all
should be parallel to one another.

Before placing them on the slide, the latter must receive a
coating of shellac. White shellac is dissolved in absolute alcohol
and allowed to stand. A sediment will form and the clear solution
can be poured off. This is put on to the slide with a brush just
before use.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 33

The sections are placed on the slide as soon as the shellac film is
dry and the whole slide then placed in the water-bath stove, where
it is just so much heated as necessary to soften and partially melt
the paraffin and to soften the shellac, about 55° — 60° C. A.S
soon as the paraffin has melted, the slide is immersed in a flat
dish, filled with spirits of turpentine. The sections adhere in con-
sequence of the shellac to the slide, the turpentine dissolves and
removes the pai'affin. The slide can be taken out of the turpenine
bath at convenience, but with great care so as not to create a
strong current of turpentine on its surface, which might wash some
of the sections off and so spoil the series.

If staining is not required, the sections are now ready for
mounting in Canada balsam. The best way is to drain off the
turpentine by holding the slide upright and wiping the margin,
then to ])ut drops of a Canada balsam or Damar resin on the sections
and finally to cover with the cover glass.

Caldwell and others use slides 6x2, with cover glasses of
exceeding thinness and nearly equal size, which I can warmly
recommend.

The ordinary cover glasses o ;, sale here, are much too small and
much too thick for any fine work.

The Canada balsam or Damar resin, the latter is to be preferred
on account of its white colour, should be dried in the oven but not
heated above 75° to prevent the Canada balsam from turning
brown, which it invariably does if heated too much. When
dry, brittle and hard, the resin or Canada balsam, is dissolved in
chloroform. A mixture of 50 % Canada balsam or Damar and
50 % chloloform has the most convenient consistence, and will get
hard in an hour on the outer margin and never cracks.

The mounted sections should be left until the free margin ot the
resin has consolidated and then they can be examined.

As a hint to beginners, I would add, never omit to let the
sections pass under a low power both at the beginning and at the
termination of the examination.
3

34 the method of section-cutting with improvements,
Staining the Sections.

I have alluded above to the difficulties connected with staining
in toto, and will now dwell on the staining of the sections. They
are of course made just in the same way as described above. The
staining process is omitted. The specimen is placed in the
weakest alcohol, as soon as the hardening re-agent has been
washed out. The further process as above until the sections on
the slide are taken out of the turpentine bath. Haswell uses
colours mixed with turpentine or similar oils for staining his
sections an equally simple as commendable method. The slides
are removed from the turpentine bath and placed in a solution of
the desired colour in turpentine or any oil. Any transparent
oil-colour can be used for the purpose. Carmine yields also here
very good results.

The ordinary staining-reagents can also be used, but this
requires a complicated and to the sections injurious process of
washing. The turpentine must be washed out with absolute
alcohol. This must be replaced by spirits of wine and finally
water. Then the sections are stained, after which they must be
washed, and treated with increasing strengths of alcohol as before,
finally they must be covered with clove oil and then mounted in
resin as above. If the staining is performed with an oil-colour,
the sections are immersed for a few minutes in the colouring
matter, and then replaced in the turpentine bath and afterwards
mounted as above.

AMCEBA PARASITICA. A NEW PROTOZOAN
INFESTING SHEEP.

By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

(Plate VI.)

Some weeks ago I was commissioned by the Hon. the Minister
of Mines to investigate some diseased sheep in two different
localities in New South Wales, at Quirindi in the Liverpool Plains
and near Young.

I forwarded my reports in due course to the department, but
thinking that my researches might also be of some general scientific
interest I publish them here.

The sheep are affected by a disease which appears very similar
to epithelial cancer and was met with on the feet behind the hoofs
and also on the lips and nostrils and the gums of lambs.

The epithelium in these places grows with pathological rapidity
the horny layer produced soon attains a thickness of 3 — 5 mm., the
wool drops out in the deceased parts and below the thick outer
layer a festering process sets in.

After some time a new Epithelium makes its appearance below
the festering layer. Then, provided the lamb does not die, the
thick horny layer is thrown off like scurf and the Epithelium below
attains new wool and replaces the old skin — the lamb has recovered.

In studying the circumstances in which these sheep live, I found,
that they invariably were exposed to being wounded in some way
or another in those places, which eventually developed the disease,
— blistered by standing on rocks heated by the sun after they had
been standing in water for several hours or pricked by the spines
of the variegated thistle under the shade of which they had, in
consequence of the prevailing drought, to find their food.

36 AMCEBA PARASITICA. A NEW PROTOZOAN INFESTING SHEEP,

These traumatic influences are not, however, the actual cause of
the disease. It is produced by an Amosba which enters the
wounds and multiplies rapidly in the Epithelium causing very
strong irritation.

On the one hand the sheep are continually i-ubbing the diseased
parts, and on the other, the microscopic investigation shows, that
the Rete Malpighi in those places is highly inflamed, extending
centrifugally so as to form large protruberances and x-apidly
producing Epithel-cells, between the successive layers of which the
parasite is imbedded and so rendered harmless. The disease is
very infectious. Burning out the affected places and dipping in
poisonous solutions have been found in some cases reported to me
to yield good results and to accelerate the healing process, at the
same time diminishing the percentage of deaths. This treatment
I had previously recommended in my report to the department.

Between the layers of horny substance which are either concentric
and thimble-shaped (fig. 1), or show an alveolar reticulate structure
(fig, 2.), I discovered granular masses with a nucleus in each, and
of course was inclined to consider them as the eggs of some parasitic
insect, particularly inconsequence of their large size 0*05 — O'l mm.
On examining extensive series of sections I found, however, that
they never developed into insects, and further that they evidently
multiplied. I found (fig. 3) on several occasions the granular
mass divided into two portions, with a nucleus in each part. Never
were there more than two nuclei in one and the same granular mass.

In the cases where the small wart-shaped excrescences of the
skin, with which the disease always begins, had a reticulate
structure (at Young) (fig. 2), the granular masses were found in
several layers in the proximal part only, whilst the meshes of the
distal part of the network (fig. 3) were empty.

In the cases where the protruberances consisted of concentric
layers (at Quirindi) (fig. 1), there existed occasionally also in the
distal part some small empty spaces, but mostly the granular
bodies filled all the spaces between the horny layers. Here however,

BY K. VON LENDENPELD, PH.D. 37

the granular masses in the distal part had evidently undergone a
change. No nucleus could be detected in them, and they were not
nearly so readily colourable as the proximal ones with the nucleus.

I assumed on the ground of these observations that a parasitic
protozoon of some kind or another entered the wounds
mechanically made Id the tender skins of lambs and there
multiplied.

I subsequently made some experiments to find out whether this
assumption was correct, as follows : —

The scurf in the lower portion of which there were many
granular masses, with nucleus, was placed in fresh water in a
small aquarium.

A small portion of the skin of a sound lamb was placed in a
similar aquarium filled with water from the same source (boiled
rain water.)

Infusoria and Bacteria made their appearance in both aquaria
after a few days, but in the one with the diseased scurf only I
found after four days several Amoebge, in shape similar to an
ordinary lobate Amoeba. (Fig. 4.) These were most numerous
after six days, and then rapidly vanished, so that there wei'e
apparently none left in ten days.

I believe I am justified in concluding from this observation
that the cause of the disease is an Amoeba, which I name,
accordingly to its mode of life, Amo3ba parasitica, which, however
does not differ moiphologically from the well-known, and as I
believe, cosmopolitan Amoeba princeps of Ehrenberg.

It is well-known that several fungi, in certain stages of their
life, appear very similar to Amoebse, and so it is no"- impossible
that my Amoeba is in some connection with them, I do not
consider this probable, however, as I made no observation which
might lead one to suppose that the Amoeba ever divided into a
multitude of swarming spores.

38 AMCEBA PARASITICA. A NEW PROTOZOAN INFESTING SHEEP.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI.

Fig. L — Part of diseased skin ; a protruberance. with concentric layers
from the lip of a lamb at Quirindi. Chromic acid, picric acid-
carmine, longitudinal section. C, Oc. I.

Fig. 2. — Part of the diseased skin ; a protruberance, with reticulate
structure, from the nostrils of a lamb at Young. Chromic acid,
picric acid-carmine. DD., Oc. I.

Fig. 3. — Amceba parasitica multiplying by fission fresh. F., Oc.I.

Fig. 4. — Amosba parasitica bred in the aquarium alive. F., Oc. I.

METEOROLOGY OF MOUNT KOSCIUSCO.
By E,. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

During my recent expedition to the central part of the Australian
Alps, I made some observations of interest regarding the Meteor-
logy of that part of our colony.

In a recent map showing the quantity of rain in various parts of
New South Wales and Victoria, published in Victoria, it is stated
that there is less rain on Mount Kosciusco than either north or
south-west. This is a statement contradictory to alpine experience
and it is partly to show the fallacy of it, that I have written this
paper.

The nearest meteorological station is Kiandra and more rain
falls there during every season than during the corresponding lapse
of time in any other station in New South Wales or Victoria.

On approaching the mountain one immediately perceives that
there must be plenty of water there as the rivers which drain the
mountain are large and full even in a time of drought.

Coming down the mountain I measured the Snowy River above
its junction with the Crackenback and found that over 2,300 cubic
feet of water passed there per minute, at a height of 2,952 per feet.
When the river is high this amount is greatly increased ; then the
stream conveys at that point about 1,000,000 feet of water down the
valley per minute. This river drains an area of about 500 square
miles and so it is quite clear that that area cannot be suffering
much from drought.

This area forms the main part of the Kosciusco-plateau extending
40 miles north of Mount Townsend.

The valleys on this plateau through which the tributaries of the
Snowy River flow are so wet and boggy that it is with great
difficulty that one can get along through them. On the plateau

40 METEOROLOGY OF MOUNT KOSCIUSCO,

itself there is an abundance of beautiful clear rivulets, eacli strong
enough to turn a mill. Most of these arise from the bogs in the
valleys, some originate in lakes. There are no springs. The
amount of water which comes from the melting of the snow-fields
during the dry season is very small.

The extensive melting of the snow in spring makes the rivers
rise at that time of the year.

All these facts show plainly that there must be a very great
amount of aquaeous precipitation there during the year, and I do
not think that I am far out in estimating it at 100 inches to 120
inches per annum.

All this water water comes down in three different shapes : —
1 as rain ; 2 as snow or hail, and 3 as dew.

The rain is not always a pi'onounced downpour, but often nothing
else than a precipitation of mist. The amount of water precipitated
from mist without the formation of regular rain in the mountains
is much greater than one generally assumes. I have frequently
seen in Europe the water run down the roofs of the Chateaux de
Chasse or the shepherd's huts in the mountains in a fog without
rain, just as rapidly as if it were actually raining. As the Sur-
veyor-General informs me, there is a similar kind of precipitation
sometimes met with also on the Kosciusco plateau. From this wet
fog to actual rain there is every transition form of precipitation,
depsnding entirely on the height of the clouds. If the clouds hang
on the mountain, then there is no rain, if they are high the rain is
pronounced.

I have made extensive inquiries as to the amount of rain of the
old residents in the district, and found that they all agree in
saying, when it rains below it invariably rains or snows above ;
and that it also rains or snows above however, often when it is fine
below.

The snow falls all the year round in heights above 5,500 feet on
the Kosciusco plateau. For eight months in the year it probably
never rains on the highest elevations. In midsummer, however,
there is rain also there in the warm weather. The snow lies on
the greater part of the plateau from 5 to 8 months in the year

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D.

41

according to the height. There is no spot however, where the fall
of snow in winter and spring exceeds the amount melted during
summer and autumn. Consequently, the snow lies only there,
where it has been piled up by wind in snowdrifts. The
remnants of such drifts last through the summer. They appear as
bands often interrupted, following the ridges about 20 feet below
the summit, and 30 to 50 feet broad on the southern and eastern
slopes, as stripes and patches in a line parallel to the summit line,
fringing the upper margin of the south-eastern slopes. Such little
snowdrift patches are met with in all suitable places above 6,500
feet.

Similar snow patches formed in a homologous manner are
formed everywhere, where the mountains attain a sufficient height.
They form the most striking peculiarity of those mountains in
the European Alps, which attain a height of about 9,000 feet.
There such eternal snow patches are, however, not found below
8000 feet. These alps lie in lat. 47° N. If we compare this with
the fact that on Kosciusco homologous snow patches are found in
37° S. and 1,500 feet lower, we must come to the conclusion that
also in Australia, as in New Zealand and Patagonia, it is either
colder or damper or both than in the noi-thern hemisphere at
corresponding latitudes. The snow patches come down to
about 6500 feet in Europe in lat. 52°, that is 15 degrees further

42 METEOROLOGY OP MOUNT KOSCIUSCO,

away from the equator than Mount Kosciusco. This result is
only in so far interesting, as it shows that Australia, with its hot
and dry continental climate, is no exception to the rule of the
greater amount of cold and wet in the Southern Hemisphere.

Perhaps the most important of the aqueous precipitation is the
dew. I have never in any part of the world at any height between
1000 and 15,000 feet experienced such dews as every night at our
camp on the Kosciusco plateau. The whole plateau covered by a
thinner layer of air than the low lands around, is of course subject
to very extensive radiation during the night and gets so cold
towards the morning that it freezes there above 5,500 feet nearly
every clear night in the year. During our stay in the middle of
January it was very warm in the day but invariably froze at night.

The sea breeze coming up of an evening to replace the heated
air in the centre of the Australian continent is comparatively warm
and saturated with moisture.

It blows up the eastern slopes of the plateau and encounters its
ice cold surface^ It can easily be understood how an exceptional
amount of dew is precipitated in consequence.

This dew freezes and fresh dew is deposited on the ice. In this
way a coating of ice, about a sixteenth of an inch thick, was formed
on our tin plates which I left outside the tent over night for the
purpose of ascertaining the amount of dew.

Our tent was frozen as hard as a weatherboard cottage every
morning and could not be packed until the rising sun had melted
the ice attached to it.

It will appear from these statements that as one might a priori
expect, the Kosciusco plateau is blessed with a great amount o*
aqueous precipitation and that the abundance of crystal clear water
in the streams draining it can easily be accounted f oi'.

I should like to add a few remarks concerning the exceptionally
wet weather we have had the last few days, namely, from January
the 17th to the 25th. On the morning of January 11th, when we

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 43

were in Bett's Camp nearly 6,000 feet high, I observed the forma-
tion of high clouds in the S.E., and their approach towards the
N.W., subsequently they vanished. There is no surer sign of
continuous and extensive rain approaching than that.

On that day and the following, it was very fine, and also the
morning of the 13th was cloudless in the mountains. The next
was fairly fine in the morning. There were very high clouds all
over the sky. This together with the foregoing observations,
enabled me by my old alpine experience to foi'etell a regular
extensive rain, which also set in. Tt is of course, not here to
decide how often a mistake would be made by a forecast of this
kind ; but two conclusions can at all events be drawn from the
fact, that I did foretell the rain. Firstly, that European experience
also holds good in Australia ; and secondly, that no place is so well
adapted for the erection of a meteorological station as these high
mountains, as one is nowhere else in so good a position to make a
forecast as there ; where in consequence of the elevation, one is
nearer the clouds, and in most cases probably close to the place —
on the main dividing range, where the rain is brewed.

THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN AUSTRALIA.
Plates VII. and VIII.

By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

Introduction.

During a recent expedition to the central part of the Australian
Alps I have discovered undoubted traces of ancient glaciers, and
can assert accordingly that Australia also has passed through a
glacial period.

Before entering into a description of my discoveries, I think it
my pleasant duty to express my thanks to those who materially
assisted me in the accomplishment of my work, by lending me
instruments and maps, and many other services.

The Hon. Mr. Abbott, the Minister for Mines, supplied me with
railway passes, for which I am particularly indebted to him. The
Surveyor-General supplied me with several instruments and maps,
and I am also indebted to him for many practical hints drawn
from his own experience on the mountain.

Mr. Wilkinson, the Government geologist, supplied me with
instruments and his assistant, Mr. Cullen, rendered me invaluable
services during the expedition ; also in other ways Mr. Wilkinson
aided me very much in my research. The greatest practical
assistance was rendered me by Mr. Betts, the district surveyor at
Cooma, to whose energy and chivalrous courtesy alone our advance
was made possible, and the diificulty of getting along the bulky
luggage, provisions, instruments, &c., overcome.

Literature.
In literature there are a few statements regarding the ancient
glaciation of Australia, but they are all very vague or made by
people of not sufficient practical alpine experince. I shall review
what I have fonnd in a few words.

GLACIAL PERIOD OF AUSTRALIA, BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 45

Tenison-Woods (1) says — " There is no satisfactory evidence of
a former participation in the great ice age by the continent of
Australia. One or two instances of grooves or striations are
recorded, but standing alone in so vast a territory the ice origin is
very doubtful."

Howitt (2) says — " Nowhere in Gippsland have I been able to
detect any appearances which I could in any away refer to a
glacial period, analogous to that of the Northern Hemisphere. I
have nowhere met with grooved or scratched rocks, erratic
boulde'-s, moraines, or any traces of ice action." He goes on to
say that the ancient lake-basins near Omeo might suggest the
action of ice.

Whilst these two authors do not believe in a glacial period
having ever occurred in Australia, Professor Tate and Mr. Griffiths
assert that there are such traces, but their observations are very
vague, and it appears that these gentlemen as well as those
mentioned above, had looked for glacier remains altogether in the
wrong places.

Professor Tate (3) states that he found erratic boulders and
striated rock surfaces on the beach near Adelaide. To look for
glacier's one must go up the mountains not down to the sea.

The evidence collected by Professor Tate proves by no means
that any glaciers had ever existed in Australia, and it is probable
that the erratics found by him were deposited on the beach by ice
bergs stranded there, which may have drifted to the South Coast of
Australia, from the South Pole at the time when it was colder in
the southern hemisphere than it is at present.

Mr. Griffith's (4) evidence is of a still more vague character ; he
finds a lot of gravel and clay, and concludes that this must have
been formed by glacial action. Mr. Griffiths did not however,

(1) Tenison-Woods. Physical structure and geology of Australia. Pro-
ceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales. Vol. VII., p. 382.

(2) Howitt. Geology of North Gippsland, Victoria. Quarterly Journal
of the Geological Society of London. Vol. XXXV., p. 35.

(3) 7\ite Anniversary Address to the Royal Society of Transactions of
the Royal Society of South Australia, 1878 — 1879.

(4) Griffiths. On the Evidences of a Glacial Epoch in Victoria during
past niiocene times. Royal Society of Victoria, 1882.

46 THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN AUSTRALIA,

take the trouble to go up to the place where all this gravel and
clay was said to have been brought down from, so that, as he
himself states, his evidence is very unsatisfactory. He also tries
to bring some other geological facts in connection with a glacial
period. I however, perfectly agree with Hutton (1), that all the
formations referred to by Mr. Griffiths, could just as well have
been formed in another way, and I do not think it likely that
Mr. Griffith's clays and gravels are of glacial origin.

Own Observation.

Every child in the European Alps knows that glaciers are
formed on mountains and nowhere else. So if one wants to find
glacial remains, of course up the mountains one must go. If the
glaciers at any time since the land has attained its present shape,
have extended so far as Tate and Griffiths assert, if the Omeo Lake
has been scooped out by glacier ice which Howitt considers possible,
how much clearer must the evidence of glaciers be then, in the heart
of the mountains down the sides of which they must have extended
and where they must have originated.

On the other hand, if no evidence of glacial action is found in
the low lands, that is no reason why glaciers could not have been
present on the slopes of the highest mountains.

It is quite evident from this, that the glacial traces must be
looked for in the mountains first, and then, when the existence of
traces of prehistoric glaciers there have been found, the investi-
gation can be extended down to the low lands to ascertain how far
the glacies reached. The gentlemen mentioned above never took
the trouble to look for the glacial traces in the alpine valleys, so
that of course no reliance whatever can be placed on their state-
ments where negative, and even where positive, they will not be
satisfactory.

On these grounds I undertook an expedition to the highest
mountains in Australia, knowing that I could easily decide the
question of pre-historic glaciation there.

(1) Hutton. The Origin of the Fauna and Flora of New Zealand, part II .,
p. 16.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 47

Between the sources of the Murray in the west and the sources
of the Snowy River in the east, there lies an extensive plateau on
an average about 5000 feet high and extending over about 160
square miles. This plateau extends N. and S. for about 22 miles,
and has an average breadth of 8 miles. A mile to the east of the
western margin of the plateau the main range is situated
extending in the same direction as the plateau from N. to S. In
that part of the main range lies the highest mountain in
Austialia which I mapped, measured, and ascended for the first
time, 7256 feet high, Mount Townsend. In a western secondary
range, a mile to the north of my highest peak, another mountain
is situated, which has been frequently ascended and which is
ci'owned by a stone cairn. This latter has the name Mount
Kosciusco or Mueller's Peak, and is 7171 feet high. Round
about on this plateau there are numerous hills over 7000 feet in
height, and the Hat extended bottoms of some of the valleys lie
about 6000 feet high.

Even now we find small patches of snow lying on the south-
eastern face of the ranges, the remnants of snow drifts all the
year round in heights above 6500 feet. These snow patches ai^e
never found in "deep ravines" as Mr. T. Stirling (1) states.
Snow patches such as those on Kosciusco only lie close to the
exposed parts where the wind blows a great amount of snow
together and stores it for the summer.

Where eternal snow is to be found even now there glaciers
must have been at the time of the glacial period, if it ever
existed. I found in reality, as I anticipated, most beautiful and
indubitable traces of glacial action in these valleys, and I con-
clude from my observations that the glaciers of that, very recent,
glacial period in Australia, covered a part of the plateau mentioned
and extended over about 100 square miles.

The evidence of glacial action which I discovered were roches
montonnees, glacier polished rocks, in several places above 5800
feet. Wherever the rocks protrude from the face of a mountain

(1) Stirling. Remarks on the Flora of the Australian Alps, &c. Souther
Science Record, January, 1885, p. 12.

48 THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN AUSTRALIA,

to form a spui' there particularly, but also at other places, one
may expect to find these traces. The ice-stream moving down the
valley presses with the greatest force against the j^rotruding parts
of the sides of the valleys on the way, against the spurs. Any
rocks or small stones which may have been accidentally frozen
into the ice, and which may be situated near the bottom, will,
when hard and protruding, cut deep grooves in the rocks which
they pass over slowly, with the immense pressure of the whole
glacier behind them. In this way the protruding rocks will be
polished down more and more. As soon as the glacier retreats
these polished rocks will be left bare and exposed to the air.

In our case these rocks are granite without exception, and their
surface withers very fast. The grooves and scratches soon become
oblitered, but the shape of the extensive polished surface remains
and indicates to an experienced eye immediately the action of
moving ice.

Further proofs for the correctness of the supposition that we
have to do with the effects of ice, are furnished by the relative
position of joints and surface. The polishing goes on of course
quite regardless of joints, and consequently in 99 cases out of a
hundred, one will find the polished surface cutting the joints at
varying angles, and not parallel to the direction of any one system
of joints.

I have examined the direction, dip, &c., of joints in 12 of the
rocks which I consider as glacier polished, and found in every case
that the direction of the polished surface followed the direction of
the valley, the direction in which the glacier there, once had moved,
and was never parallel with any system of joints. The rounded,
always convex shape, and particularly also one fact proves the
glacial origin of these surfaces without a doubt — viz., that the
polished surface is continuous for a long distance in some places.
That is to say, in those parts numerous isolated rocks, in different
parts of the hill side or spur, are polished down to exactly the
same level.

One of these instances, on a spur high above a tributary to the
Snowy River, was so remarkable, that my assistant, who had never

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 49

seen any roches moutonnees in his life before ; was immediately
very much struck by the appearance of it.

There, there is one rock polished off with a surface of about 3
acres and about 25 other much smaller ones around it, all polished
down to exactly the same surface, divided from one another how-
ever by depressions of varying depth.

The most numerous and the best preserved of these roches
moutonnees are found in a valley, which I name after our
President the Government Geologist, Wilkinson Valley. As I
have studied this valley most minutely and as it is doubtless the
highest valley in Australia, I shall describe it and also the glacier
which at one time tilled it.

On Plate 7 and 8, the Wilkinson Valley is represented, as seen
from Mount Townsend, which I ascertained to be the highest
peak in Australia. The Wilkinson Valley is enclosed by the
Abbott Range and Miiller's Peak in the north and north-west, by
the Main Range for a mile on the east and by the Wilkinson
Range on the south-east. Its main direction is from N.E., to
S.W. For the upper three miles of its length its bottom is broad
and flat and lies very high, forming part of the Kosciusco plateau,
Then the fall which is only about three feet to the mile in the
upper part rapidly increases and at the same time the valley
becomes quite naiTow so as to represent a steep ravine.

From the Abbott Range a broad spur descends in a southerly
direction into the upper flat part of this valley and forces the
stream in its bottom to curve round in the same direction.

On the sides of this valley but particularly on this spur ruches
moutonnees are very numerous and it is easy to see how far the
glacier reached up the hill side by the extent of these glacier
polished rocks.

In plate 7, this spur with the polished rocks is seen " en face "
just opposite,

Plate 8, represents the probable shape and size of the glacier
when it filled that valley. Of course I name the glacier after the
valley which it helped to scoop out,
4

50 THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN AUSTRALIA,

The picture is the same as ])late 7, and I have drawn the glacier
to that height, at which roches moutonn6es were observed by me.
The other parts are of course drawn without regard to the denu-
dation since then, and I have used my alpine experience in giving
a picture of the distribution of rock and snow, as it would probably
be in summer, were Australia now subjected to a glacial period.

To those who have not seen the glaciers in the high alps, the
picture will convey a better idea of the chai'acter of the country at
that time than any description.

The picture pi-etends to nothing but a hypothetical value, and
will, I hope, be judged accordingly.

Conclusions.

On going to the place where glacier traces might have been
expected, these were found in the shape of ruches moutonnees,
scattered over an area of about 100 square miles on a plateau
above 5,800 feet.

That part of Australia was therefore not so long ago certainly
covered by ice.

The question arises whether toe glaciers did not extend further
down than that. I have looked carefully around on vaj way up
and down the mountain, but I was not able to detect any trace of
glacial action below 5,800 feet. In the Snowy Valley a glacier
might be expected to have descended for some distance from the
mountains, and I think it very likely that moraines will eventually
be found there. This valley is, however, the only one in which
moraines may be expected, because it is the only one which comes
down from an extensive plateau on which a glacier was formed.

It is difficult to fix the time of the glacial period, but it is evident
that it was in all probability simultaneous with the glacial period
in New Zealand.

According to von Haast (1) the glaciers there descended at that
time into the sea on one side and down to a height of a few
hundred feet on the other. In New Zealand there are high

(1) Von Haast. Geology of Canterbury and Westland.

BY R. VON LENDENFKLD, PH.D. 51

mountains on the slopes of which the glaciers were formed, and
New Zealand also lies further south than Mount Kosciusco.
Further there is no doubt that there were warm dry winds from
the interior of Australia blowing over the Kosciusco plateau at
the time of the glacial period as they do now, winds which must
have diminished the size of the nevees very considerably.

Taking all this into considei-ation we must come to the conclusion
that the glaciers of the glacial period in Australia need not have
been very extensive, even if nearly the whole of the middle Island
of New Zealand were covered by eternal ice at the time.

Hutton (1) is not inclined to believe that the glacial period in
New Zealand was so severe as is generally believed, in consequence
of the great abundance of animal life at that time. I must say
that I do not see this at all. Chamois and many other mammals,
as well as birds, live always high above the glacial terminations in
summer and winter in Europe, so that there is no reason to suppose
that there should not have been an abundance of animal life even
if the glaciers had extended further than von Haast (2) states.
Hutton (I.e.), is quite I'ight when he says, that if the glaciers in
Australia had had that extent which Griifiths supposed, that then
the climate in the South Island of New Zealand (I suppose the
Middle Island is meant), would have been polan

This certainly was not the case, as the fossil fauna shows, and
therefore, the simultaneous glacial period in Australia could not
have been very severe as Hutton very ingeniously concludes.

My own observations tend to jirove the correctness of his state-
ments, and the extent of glaciers in the glacial period of Australia
according to my oh>servations, is quite in accordance with the much
greater extent of glaciers in New Zealand.

(1) Hutton. The Origin of the Fauna and Flora of New Zealand. Part
II., p. 16.

(2) Von Haast. Geology of Canterbury and Westland.

52 THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN AUSTRALIA,

The state of preservation of the I'oches moutannees in the
Australian Alps, is nothing like so good as in the New Zealand
Alps. I am, however, not inclined to ascribe that to a difference
in age. I consider it simply as a consequence of the difierence in
the rocks ; there hard metamorphised slates, here granite.

The difference between diurnal and nocturnal temperature will
doubtless also be much greater on Kosciusco, with a continental
climate, and nearer the equator, than in New Zealand where an
island climate prevails, and where the sun is never so hot in the
day time.

I have in another paper (1) drawn attention to the immense
amount of weathering caused by differences of temperature, and I
think that the rocks on Kosciusco are accordingly exposed to a
much more energetic processs of weathering than those in New
Zealand.

These differences I think suffice to explain the difference of
preservation of the polished rocks in Australia and New Zealand,
and I believe I am therefore justified in considering the glacial
period of Australia and that of New Zealand to be isochrone.

In another paper (2) I have tried to show that this latter was
very recent, and we should in that case have to assume that also
the Australian glacial period had occurred at a relatively recent
date.

Eesult.

1. At the time of the glaciation of the Southern Hemisphere,
Australia was subjected to a glacial period as well as New
Zealand,

2. The climate was then not very cold so that the glaciers only
covered the highest part of the Australian Alps, and were conse-
quently very small.

(1) Vo7i Lendenfeld. Der Tasman Gletscher unci seine Umgebnng.
Erganzfmgsheft, Nr. 75 zu Petermanns geografischen Mittheilungen.
Seite 42.

(2) Von Lendenfeld. The time of the glacial period in New Zealand.
Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales. Vol. IX.,
p. 806.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 53

3. One glacier sy.stem has been discovered on the highest part of
the Australian Alps. The glaciers extended from a high ])lateau —
Mount Kosciiisco — down into the valleys around. The glacial area
may be estimated at at least 100 square miles. There were small
glaciers at the source of the Murray, not extending far down the
plateau, there was a small glacier at the head of the Crackenback.
The largest glacier tilled the valleys at the sources of the Snowy
River and probably extended for some distance down the Snowy
Valley.

4. As even on the highest elevation the glaciers were so small
it is not likely that glaciers existed anywhere else in Australia
at the time.

5. The glacial period in Australia was probably isochrone with
a pluviatile period, vvhen the rivers were large and when there was
a dense vegetation in many parts of the country which now are
barren, and which was sufficient to feed the gigantic Diprotodon
and other fossil marsupials.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate 7. — Muller's and Abbott Peak and Wilkinson Valley from Mount
Townsend from a sketch taken by the Author on 11th January,

1885.

Plate 8. — The same as it would appear in the glacial period.

54 THE PROTEACE.E OP AUSTRALIA,

THE PEOTEACEiE OF AUSTRALIA.
liY Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L.S.

The late William Forster, M.P., in his paper on " Australian
Autochtlhony" published in the Sydney University Review (1882),
when referring to the Proteacece remark .s : — "The Proteaceoe con-
stitixte in themselves, as it were, a microcosm of orders, comprising
a number of sub-divisions, each of which seems, as if, nnder
favourable circumstances, it might have developed into a separate
order, and which, by agreeing to differ, strike one at first sight as
if they had been classified, not so much by their resemblances to,
or affinities with each other, as by their differences or divergences
from other groups, though doubtless a close, and more strict
comparison reveals essential affinities." A casual observer might
naturally adopt this view of the order ; but, though the species
differ widely from each other in appearance, and suggest alliances
with other orders, there is in reality a bond of union which
separates them from the rest of the vegetable kingdom and binds
them closely together. The name of the order is, indeed, highly
appropriate, for the species are protean in their character, ranging
from mere herbs to large trees, exhibiting an inflorescence dififering
very much in colour and arrangement, and occurring from the
immediate vicinity of the sea-coast to the summits of mountains.
According to the eminent R. Brown, the Proteacece have the
radicle always pointing towards the base of the fruit, this distin-
giiishing it from the orders nearly allied, such for instance as the
Thymelacece and Zawflcece, which have the radicle short and superior.
But independently of this mark of difference, the order is easily
I'ecognized by the harsh, woody texture of the leaves, the irregular
tubular calyxes with a valvate aestivation, the position of the four
stamens on the divisions of the calyx, the bursting of the anthers
longitudinally, and the erect disposition of the ovules. Ilie
characters of the species are in some genera so well defined, that
even in a fossilised state they may be referred to their appropriate

BY REV. W. WOOLLS, PH.D., F.L.S. 55

places in the vegetable kingdom. Sir J. D. Hooker in his essay on
the Flora of Australia (1851)) states that "in the Bag^^hot sands some
silicified wood has been found, which may confidently be referred to
Baaksia, and which is in fact scarcely distinguishable from recent
and fossil Banksia wood ;" and he further adds " Wesel and
Weber describe from the brown coal of the Rhine a rich and
varied Flora, representing, &c., &c., &c., some of the peculiar and
characteristic genera of the Australian, South African, American,
Indian, and European Floras " A more recent writer affirms that
all the family of the Proteaceee, compi-ehending Banksia, Hakea,
Grevilka, existed in Europe during the tertiary period, and that
some of the fruits bear a marked resemblance to certain species
now found in Australia. At the present period of the world's
history the geographical distribution of the order is somewhat
j)erplexing, for whilst the species are most abundant in Australia
and South Africa, extending on the one hand to New Caledonia,
the Indian Archipelago, and tropical Asia and Japan, and on the
other to the Andes of South America— none of the Australian
and African species are identical, nor do any of those with
indehiscent fruit extend to America or Asia. Whilst, therefore,
the species described in the Flora Australiensis are strictly
indigenous, the relation to the Afi-ican Flora is simply tribual or
generic, so that Mr. Bentham, speaking in general terms without
any reference to the Flora of other geological periods, was of
opinion that " the great mass of purely Australian species and
endemic genera must have originated or been diiferentiated in
Australia, and never have spread for out of it."

Now that, through the labours of Mr. Bentham and Baron
Mueller, we are enabled to take a general view of the Proteacece in
Australia, it appears that the known species of the order in this
continent amount to nearly 600, and that about two-thirds of that
number are found in Western Australia. The genera peculiar to
that colony are Simsio,, Synapheay Franklandia and Dryandra ;
whilst of Adenanthos, A. sericeus occurs in South Australia, and
A. terminalis in South Australia and Victoria, and of Lambertia,
L formosa in New South Wales.

56 THE PROTEACE^ OF AUSTRALIA,

The western genera and species are thus arranged in Baron
Mueller's census.

1. Petrophila , 33 species.

2. Isopogon 25

3. Adenanthos 14

4. iSimsia .. 5

5. Synaphea 8

6. (J onosfermum 26

7. Franklandia 2

8. Persoonia 24

9. Xylomelum 2

10. Lambertia 8

11. Strangea 1

12. Grevillea 90

13. Hakea 68

14. Banksia 36

15. Dryandra 47

389
Next to West Australia, N. S. Wales has the greatest number
of species, but as will be seen by the subjoined list, some of the
genera are but poorly represented, though the Waratah ( Telopea
speciosissima), regarded by some as the finest of Australian flowers,
is peculiar to this colony : —

Petrophila 3 species.

Isopogon 4

Gonospermuni 7

Symphyonema 2

Persoonia 32

Macadamia 1

Helicia 4

Xylomelum 1

Lambertia 1

Orites 1

Strangea 1

Grevillea 39

Hakea 14

Stenocarjyus 2

Lomatia 3

Telopea 1

Banksia 8

124

BY REV. W. WOOLLS, PH.D., F.L.S.

57

Thus it appears, that in N. S. Wales the species are not one
third of those in W. Australia, whilst Queensland, Victoria, S.
Australia, N. Australia and Tasmania have respectively, so far as
yet known — 59, 51, 33, 33 and 23. Banksia, Hakea, and Grevillea
are common to all Australian Colonies and Tasmania, whilst the
first has been found on S.E. of New Guinea (F. v. M., Papuan
Plants, p. 18.) Dryandra, which differs from Banksia principally
in having an involucre of numerous bracts, is exclusively a western
genus, and so remarkable for the uniformity of its flowers, that
Mr, Bentham found it difficult to establish any definite sections.
No species of this genus has travelled accidentally out of its peculiar
region. Syminliyonema, in its two species of *S'. montanuni and
S. ^;aZMC?osttm, has not been found beyond the limits of New
South Wales, whilst Bellendena, Agastachys and Genarrhenes,
each represented by a single species, are peculiar to Tasmania.
Hakea cychptera seems limited to a small area in South Aus-
tralia, but H. multilineata which is beautifully figured amongst
Brown's " Forest Plants of South Australia," and was sup-
posed to have migrated as a solitary species from the west, has
recently been met within the north (F. v. M.) There is something
remarkable in the distribution of the Proteacece in Australia.
Allan Cunningham who accompanied the late Admiral King in his
survey of the north-western coasts of the continent, was of opinion
that in that region the order was limited to Grevillea, Hakea and
Persoonia, and, further, that Banksia was not rejjresented there.
He says : — " Viewing the general distribution of Banksia it is a
singular fact in the geographical distribution of this genus, that its
species, which have been traced through almost every meridian of
the south coast, upon the Islands of Bass's Strait, in Van Diemen's
Land, and widely scattered throughout the whole extent of New
South Wales to the south coast, at which extreme of the continent
B. dentata has been observed as far west as longitude 130° east,
should be wholly wanting as the north-west coast." He then adds
" Our limited knowledge of the west coast (properly so called)
does not aff"ord us matei-ials to hazard even a particular conclusion
relative to the existence of this family on its shores, excepting that,

58 THE PROTEACEiE OF AUSTRALIA,

from the total absence of any one plant of Proteacece at those
parts of Rottnest and Dirk Hartog's Islands visited during the
Batliurst's voyage, an inference may be drawn of the general
paucity of any part of the order on the shores of the neighbouring
main." Since the days of Cunningham, who, amidst many
discouragements and disappointments, did so much to promote the
knowledge of Australian vegetation, our views have been some-
what modified as to the distribution of the Proteacece and the
genera prevalent in particular regions. Bavon Mueller, when in
company with A. C. Gregory, in 1856, illustrated the Flora of
Arnheim's land by the i-ecord of some 800 species of plants,
amongst which he mentions 45 species of Proteacece, including
Conospermum (1), Helicia (1), Persoonia (5), Orites (1), GreviUea
(22), Eakea (7), Lomatia (1), Stenocarpus (2), and Banksia
(5). Banksia Dentata he found at the mouth of the Victoria
river, whilst he saw specimens of the same species from the
promontory Escape Cliffs. (Frag., Vol. 7, p. 57.) In the Flora
Australiensis, Vol. 5, \^. 555, it is also recorded from the Glenelg
River (125° E.) The only Proteaceons plants collected at Nickol
Bay and the Murchison River, by Mr. Pemberton Walcott and
Mr. Maitland Brown in 1861, were Hakea lorea (R. Br.) and
GreviUea Wickhami (Meissn.), but several species of Banksia (B.
sphceroc^ir2}a, B. Menziesii, and B. Lindleyana) are known from
the latter locality. In the recent list of Western Australian
Plants, 1883, collected by the Hon. John Forrest, at Shark's Bay
and its vicinity, Banksia is not enumerated, but the following
species appear to be indigenous there, as specimens of them were
seen and examined by Baron Mueller : —
Gonosjiermum Skechadis, Endh
GreviUea pterosper7na (F. v. M.)

stenobotrya (F. v. M.)

chrysodeniron (R. Br.)

annulifera (F. v. M.)

leuGopteris (Meissn.)

striata (R. Br.)

de/lexa{F. v. M.)
Hakea Citnninghami (R. Br.)

BY REV. \V. WOOLLS, PH.D., P.L.S. 59

Professor Lindley (Vegetable Kingdom, p. 533), characterises
the Proteaceaj as one of the most useless orders to man. But this
opinion must be modified, as well as that which regards the
geographical distribution of its species, for whilst many of them
play an important part in the economy of nature — growing in
sandy, sterile, and exposed places where other plants could not
exist, and preparing the way for a higher order of vegetation,
some of the species are now utilised for the value of their timber,
the industrial ])roperties of their barks, the various pi-oducts
extracted from them by distillation, and the fruits, which may
prol)ably be improved by cultivation. Amongst the woods pre-
j)ared by the late Sir W. Macarthur for the Paris Universal
Exhibition, 1867, those of the following trees are enumerated with
greater or less commendation : —

Stenocarpus saligious.
Xylomelwm pyriforme.
Banksia serrata.

integrifoUa.
Grevillea robusta.
Persoonia linearis,
latifolia.

Mr. Moore, F.L.S , also mentions from the nortliern districts,
in addition to several of those recorded by Sir William : — ■

Orites excelsa.

Hellcia glabrijlora.

H. 2)r(ealta.

H. ternifoUa. ( Macadamia. )

Stenocarpus Gunning hami

In Queensland several species of Grevillea, Banksia and Steno-
carpus, are likewise valued for their "■ woods. According to the
documents relating to the Intei-national Exhibition (1866-67), it
is shown that the per centage of tar and the strength of the wood
vinegar from some of the Froteacece bear fair comparison with the
results attained in other countries from other trees.

60 THE PROTEACEiE OF AUSTRALIA.

Banksia Australis is especially instanced in yielding as 100 parts
of its wood, 29'5 of charcoal, 40-062 of crude wood vinegar, 6-562
of tar, and 23-876 of uncondensible gases, while Banksia serrata
gave 10-8 per cent of tannic acid. The drupaceous fruits of the
Proteacem are for the most part small and insipid, but Macadamia
teruifolia, or the Queensland nut, bears an edible nut of excellent
flavour, whilst the flowers of Banksia ornata, Lambertia formosa,
and some other species are rich in melligenous sap.

ON A NEW SNAKE FROM THE BARRIER RANGES.
By William Macleay, F.L.S., &c.

Among a small collection of reptiles made at Milparinka by Mr
Charles Macarthur King, P.M., and pi-esented by him to the
Australian Museum, I find an undescribed species of the genus
Furina. Two species have been previously described. Furina
himaculata, Dum. and Bibr., an inhabitant of Western Australia,
and Furina hicucullata, M'Coy, found in the colony of Victoria.

The present species I propose to name after the distinguished
Curator of the Australian Museum, E. P. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., &c.

Furina Ramsayi.

Scales in 17 rows.

Ventral plates 1G2

Sub-caudals 38/38

Anal plate bifid.

Total length 1.5 inches.

Tail 2^ inches.

Colour reddish yellow on the back, whitish yellow beneath. The
upper sui'face of the head and a broad band behind the head, black,
the muzzle and a broad collar on the back of the head, white.
Four, or in some cases five narrow black bands or rings, not
extending to the ventral plates, cross the body at almost regular
intervals ; the last at the junction of the tail ; the tip of the tail is
also black.

The head plates are like those of F. cucullata, but the rostral
shield seems to be more triangularly rounded between the anterior
frontals, and the vertical is almost quite truncate in front ; the
anterior ocular and the nasal at their junction completely separate
the posterior frontal and second labial."

The three species of the genus Furina have a strong general
resemblance, particularly in the colouration of the head, but they
differ in other respects as widely as in their distribution. Thus in
F. himaculata the scales are in 15 rows, the belly plates are 200,
and the sub-caudals 21/21, while in F. bicucullata the scales are as

62 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

in the present species in 17 rows ; the ventral plates vary from 180
to 220, and the sub-caudals are in 64 or 66 pairs, difiering widely
from F. Ramsayi, where they are respectively 162 and 38/38.
The markings on the body also seem distinct and constant in each.
There ai-e three specimens in the collection, of different sizes,
but all marked alike. The dimensions given above are from the
largest specimen. The other Reptilia from Mount Brown
received at the same time were a specimen of Vervdcella annulata,
the rare Dehna Fraseri, a species of Typhlojis doubtful.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Whitelegge exhibited a large collection of fossil ferns
from the Hawkesbury and Wianamatta beds, mounted as trans-
parent objects for the microscope. It is remarkable that the
tissues of these plants have remained almost unaltered and per-
fectly elastic and pliant through the vast periods during which
they have been preserved.

Mr. Tenison- Woods exhibited two very small stone axes, or
" kelts," from the Murrumbidgee, supposed to have been used for
ceremonial purposes ; a canoe ornament from Florida, Solomon
Islands ; a wooden figure of a mammal (Cuscus 1) from the
Louisiade Archipelago ; and several fine stone axes from New
Guinea, the Louisiades, Solomon Islands, New Zealand, and Aus-
tralia.

The President exhibited some of the " pug," or mixed clay and
wash-dirt which is being worked in the Caledonian claim, near
Gulgong. This material is found filling up the ancient caverns
and tunnels of a mass of crystalline Devonian ("?) limestone,
excavated under conditions of rainfall and drainage totall}'
different from those now existing. It contains large quantities of
ii'on and manganese in small grains, and also in lumps of con-
siderable size. The gold is said to be coarse, or nuggetty.

He also exhibited specimens of Macadamia ternifolia, or
Queensland nut, in illustration of Dr. Woolls' paper.

WEDNESDAY, 25th FEBRUARY, 1885

ThePresident, Professor W. J. Stephens, M. A.,F.G.S., in the Chair.

VISITORS PRESENT.

Mr. W. G. Harrison, Dr. Coppinger, Mr. Sydney Olliff, Mr.
Ogilby.

MEMBERS ELECTED.

Mr, Ogilby, Australian Museum, Dr. Coppinger, H.M.S. Nelson.

DOXATIONS.

" Abhandlungen von der Senckeiibergischen Naturforschenden
Gesellschaft." 13th Band, Heft IV. From the Society.

" Les especes Frangaises du Genre Philoscia, Latreille, 1884.''
From the Author, Mons. Adrien Dollfus.

"Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society." Series II., Vol.
IV., Part 6. December 1884. From the Society.

" Feuille des jeunes Naturalistes." No. 171, 1st January 1885.
From the Editor.

"Victorian Naturalist," Vol. I., No. 13, January, 1885. From
the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

64 ON SOME REPTILIA FROM THE HERBERT RTVER, QUEENSLAND,

" Zoologischer Anzeiger," Jahrg. VII., No. 184 : Jahvg. VIII.,
No. 185, 29tli December, 1884, and 12th January, 1885. From
the Editor.

"Abstract of Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania,"
Januai-y 26th, 1885. From the Society.

" Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phih\-
delphia," Part II., May to October, 1884. From the Editor.

" Mittheilungen ans der Zoologischen Station zu Neapel."
Funfter Band, III. and IV. Heft. From the Director.

" Monatliche Mittheihmgen des Naturwissenschaftlichen
Vei-eins des Eegierungsbezirkes Frankfurt." Jahrg. II., Nos. 8
and 9. November and December, 1884. From the Society.

PAPARS READ.

ON SOME REPTILIA LATELY RECEIVED FROM THE
HERBERT RIVER DISTRICT, QUEENSLAND.

By William Macleay, F.L.S., &c.

I have frequently, within the last two years, received from my
friend, Mr. J. A. Boyd, of Ripple Creek, Ingham, collections of
Mammals, Reptiles, and Fishes made in the vicinity of the
Herbert River ; and I have, I believe, more than once, expressed
my surprise at the wonderful richness of the Fauna of that
district of Northern Queensland. I have now to record the
receipt from the same district and the same gentleman, of two
drums of spirit specimens, the contents of which fidly bear out the
reputation of the district for the abundance of its animal life. The
Mammals and Fishes of the collection I shall probably have some,
thing to say about on another occasion. I shall at present confine
myself to some notices of the Lizards and Snakes, with which the
district seems to abound.

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &C. 65

Class. REPTILIA.

Order. SAURIA.

Family. Scincid^e.

HiNULIA PICTA. n. sp.

Rostral shield large, very obtusely angled at its contact with
the praefrontal. Nasal shields small, distant. Prsefrontal large,
rounded in front, and truncate behind with the exception of a
small lobe in the middle. Postfrontals pentagonal, in contact
with the prsefrontal on their anterior face, and with the vertical
behind. The vertical is four-sided, the anterior faces forming a
short triangle, the posterior a long one. At the base and on each
side of the apex of the vertical, are two rather small occipital
shields, and behind these three larger ones, the middle of these
beiiig narrower than the others. The orifice of the ear is round
and smooth The general colour is a pale lavender grey, slightly
darker on the back and tail than on the belly ; the scales are
uniformly smooth and glossy. On the head and neck are numerous
black and brown marks which appear to take the following order :
— An ill-defined black band encircles the nose and muzzle ;
another, broad and composed of two black streaks with the inter-
vening space bi'ownish, extends from beneath the eye across the
throat, where it is connected with the first band ; the third of the
same double character, extends from the ear across the throat ;
immediately behind this a very broad band extends across the
nape, the hinder portion of it forming a distinct double black
band extending to the fore legs. Behind this the body is marked
by 12 equidistant, narrow, undulating, parallel, black, more or less
white edged, bands not extending on the ,belly. The tail is similarly
marked, but the bands are straight.

One specimen. Length, 8 inches.

This is a very beautiful species. The disposition of the head
shields differs considerably from that of most if not all the species
of this very numerous Australian genus, excepting perhaps Himdia
Gerrardi

5

bb ON SOME REPTILIA FROM THE HERBERT RIVER, QUEENSLAND,

Tetradactylus guttulatus. n. sp.

Entii-ely of a nitid bronzy brown paler on the belly, every scale
with one or more very minute black spots, a few palish marks on
and about the labial shield. The nasal shields are widely separated
by the frontal, behind the frontal lies the vertical, which is in form
of a triangle with rounded apex, behind it there are two pentagons!
occipital shields and behind these are three others larger, the middle
one triangular and enclosed between the two lateral shields. There
is a deep longitudinal impression from the mouth to the eye along
the summit of the first three labial shields. The ear orifice is round
and open. The legs are weak and distant as in the genus, and the
tail is very elongate. Length, 6 inches.

One specimen only.

Order. OPHIDIA.

Family. BoiD^.

Nardoa crassa. n. sp.

Scales in 42 rows

Abdominal Plates 280

Anal Plate undivided

Sub-caudal Plates 52/52

Total length 6S inches

Tail 7 inches

Head 2 inches

Girth of body 7 inches.

The body of this snake is thick and cylindrical, the tail shoi't,
chick and tapering to a blunt point ; the head is narrow and
elongate for the family. The rostral shield is broad and low ; the
anterior f rontals are oblong ; the posterior frontals are very long,
(in Nardoa Gilherti there are two pair), the vertical is nearly as
broad as long and polygonal ; the first upper labial shield, and the
four posterior lower labials are pitted. The eye is rather small and
comes in contact with the sixth and seventh upper labial shields.
The upper surface of the head and body and the tail is of a
brownish black, the side scales becoming paler towards the belly,

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &C. 67

which is yellowish white. The abdominal plates are little more
than twice the widths of the body scales nearest them, which grow
rapidly narrower towards the back. The labial shields are
yellowish.

I received from Mr. Boyd three specimens of this powerful
snake, and the above description is taken from the largest of the
three.

The genus Nardoa was originally created by Gray in 1842, for
the rece})tion of two Snakes, one which he named Gilberti, from
Port Essington, the other Schlegelii, from New Ireland. The
first of these has since been got from Port Denison and Port
Darwin, but I am not aware that the New Ireland species has
ever been taken again.

The present is a very distinct well marked species. The genus
will very probably be found in New Guinea.

Tropidonotus ater. n. sp.

Scales in 14 rows

Abdominal Plates 147

Anal Plate bifid

Sub -caudal Plates 64/64

Total length 30 inches

Tail . . 5^ inches

This a handsome active looking Snake. The head and head-
shields exactly correspond with those of T. picturattts, but the
body is of slighter make, and the tail is very fine and tapering.
The colour is jet black on the entire upper surface ; the
abdominal and sub-caudal plates are of a pinkish-white with a
dark band on the base of each plate, giving much the appearance
of the marking on the belly of the Black Snake — PseudecMs
2)or2)hyriacus. Three species of Trojndonotus are now known to
inhabit Australia, two of these T. angusticeps and the present
species T. ater have been described by me from specimens taken at
the Herbert River, and the third species T. picturatus I have also
seen from that district.

68 ON SOME REPTILIA FROM THE HERBERT RIVER, QUEENSLAND.
HOPLOCEPHALUS ASSIMILIS. n. Sp.

Some months ago I received from Mr. Boyd a species of Roplo-
cephahis which, with some hesitation, I referred to the Sydney
species Hojilocephalus nigrescens, Guntli. I received from Mr.
Boyd on this last occasion, two other specimens of the same snake,
and T am thereby enabled to pronounce positively that the Sydney
and Herbert River specimens belong to different species. I propose
the name given above for the Herbert River species.

Scales in 15 rows

Abdominal Plates 192

Anal Plate single

Sub-caudal Plates 37

Total length 17 inches

Tail 2h inches.

The head shields are almost identical with those of H. nigrescens,
excepting that the anterior frontals are shorter, being less than
half the length of the posterior, and the loreal space is taken up by
the nasal and anterior oscular shields, completely separating the
second labial and posterior frontal. The superciliaries are only
half the length of the vertical, which is broad, six sided, and
triangular behind. The eyes are very small, and the post-orbitals
vary in number from 1 to 3. The tongue is not white as in H.
nigrescens. The colour is black above, beneath it varies from a
pinkish colour in some specimens, to an almost leaden gray colour
in others.

NOTES ON CERTAIN CEYLONESE COLEOPTERA
(CLAYICORNIA) DESCRIBED BY THE LATE MR.
FRANCIS WALKER.

By a. Sidney Olliff, Assistant Zoologist,
Australian Museum.

A few months ago, whilst going through the collection of
Clavicorn Coleoptera in the British Museum, I had occasion to
examine the types of some species from Ceylon, described by the
late Mr. Francis Walker. As many of these species were referred
to genera widely remote from those to which they naturally
belong, and are consequently out of place in Gemminger and von
Harold's general catalogue of Coleoptera, I thought a few notes
which I made at the time would not be without interest to the
members of this Society, especially as two of the species are very
nearly allied to some of the commonest Clavicorns of this country,

One or two of the following synonyms, distinguished by an
asterisk and included here for the sake of completeness, have
already been published by Mr. C. O. Waterhouse, who has also
pointed out that Inclica solida, described by Walker as a new
genus of Byrrhidse, belongs to the Cryptocephalidfe, at the same
time suggesting that it may prove to be identical with Monachus.

NlTIDULID^.

NiTiDULA CONTEGENS, Walk., Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), Vol. II.,

p. 206 (1S5S).^ Carpo2)hilus vittiger, Murray, Trans. Linn.

Soc, Lond., Vol. XXIY., p. 373 {\^U). = Carpoi)hilus

higuttatus, Mostch., Etudes Ent., 18-58, p. 43,

I think the latter name should have precedence, as Walker's

description applies almost equally well to any of the spotted

species contained in the ninth section of Murray's sub-genus

Carjwphilus.

70 NOTES ON CERTAIN CEYLONESE COLEOPTERA (cLAVICORNIA),

NiTiDULA INTENDENS, Walk., loc. cit.^Haptoncus jntbescens,

Murray, Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond., Vol. XXIV., p. 403 (1864).
Walker's type is a small stained example.
NiTiDULA SIGNIFICANS, Walk., loc. cit. = Haptoucus tetragonus,

Murray, Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond., Vol. XXIV., p. 401, pi.

33, fig. 7 (1864).
NiTiDULA ^ TOMENTIFERA, Walk, loc. cit.=Aethnostoma und^data,

Motsch, Etudes Ent., 1858, p. 47, pi. 1, fig. 10.
The true position of tliis insect is in the family Dermestidee as
indicated by Motschulsky,
NiTiDULOPSis ^QUALis, Walk, loc. ciL=Brachi/])eplus omallnus,

Murray, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., Vol. XXIV, p. 299, pi. 34,

fig. 7 (1864).
A typical Brachypej)lus. The only character given to distinguish
the genus Nitiduloiysis is common to almost all the species of this
section of the family
Rhyzophagus parallelus, Walk, loc. cit.=N'ausibms dentatus

Marsh, Ent. Brit., p. 108, (1802).
This should, of course, be referred to the Gucujidcc.
NiTiDULA submaculata, Walk, op. cit., Vol. III., p. 52, (1859)

^Epurea. n. sp.
Meligethes respondens. Walk, loc. cit. p. 53. =Idrethina (Mac-

roura) nigritula, Reitter, Verh. Ver. Briinn, Vol. XII., p. 82,

(1874).
I have already pointed out (Notes Leyden Mus. VI., p. 74) that
Idcethina and Macroura are synonymous and that the latter name
is preoccupied. Walker's insect is closely allied to /. hrunnescens,
Reitter, which occurs in the neighbourhood of Sydney.

The two species Tntoma bifascies and Chilocorus opponens,
described by Walker as belonging to the Diaperidce and Goccin-
ellidce respectively, are varieties of the same species and must be
referred to this family. The synonmy is as follows : —

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 71

Camptodes BIFASCIES.

Tritoma bifascies, Walk, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (3) III., p. 259,

(1859).
Chilocorus op2)07iens, Walk. loc. cit. IV., p. 219, (1859). (1)
CamjAodes ornatus, Motsch. Bull. Soc. Mosc, II., p. 442 (1863.)
Hemirophalon notatum, Murray in litt.

Trogositid^e.

Trogosita ixsinuans, Walk, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (3) II., p.
206, {\d>bd>).=^Tenebrioides insinuans.

Trogosita rhyzophagoides, Walk, loc. cit.. III., p. 53, (1859).

This species must form the type of a new genus for which I
would propose the name Asana. It has all the essential characters
of Lipaspis, Wollaston, but is at once distinguished by the presence
of a distinct scutellum.

CUCUJID.E.

SiLVANUS RETRAHENS, Walk, Ann. Mag Nat. Hist., (3) II., p. 207,
(lS58).^Lyctus, sp.

Cucujus? INCOMMODUS, Walk, loc. cit., Vol. III... p. 53 (1859).=
Telephanus cruciger, Waterhouse, Ent. Mo. Mag., Vol. XIII.,
p. 12i.^Psammcecus hreviusculus, Reicter, Verh. z — b, Wien,
Vol. XVII., p. 178 {\'$>11 ).^Psammtecus trimaculatus,
Motsch. Etudes. Ent., 1858, p. 45.

The markings on the elytra of this insect vary considerably. In
typical specimens the transverse fascia is very distinct but in
others it is almost effaced.

*Prognatha deoisa, Walk, loc. ci^.: Vol. II., p. 205 (1858).=
Inopep)lus lateralis, Motsch., Etudes Ent., 1859, p. 97. Cf.,
Waterhouse, Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1876, p. 14.

(1) cf. Von Harold, Col. Hefte XIV., p. 211, and Reitter, Verh. z— b,
Wien XXIV., p. 510.

72 NOTES ON CERTAIN CEYLONESE COLEOPTERA (cLAVICORNIA).

The type of this species, which Walker placed in the genus
Prognatha of the family Staphylinidse, is in good preservation,
and perfectly agrees with si^ecimens hi I lateralis received from
Motschulsky, by the late Mr. Andrew Murray.

Lathridiid^.

* MoNOTOMA CONCINNULA, Walk., Ann. Mag. ISTat. Hist. (3), Vol.
II., p. 207 (lSo8). = C7-ijptamorpha fasciata, Wollaston, Ent.
Mo. Mag., Vol. X., p. 169 (1874). C/., Waterhouse, Ent.
Mo. Mag., Vol. XIII., p. 122.
This species should be referred to the preceding family.

Dermestid^e.

Attagenus defectus. Walk., Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), Vol. II.,

p. 207. = Troyoderma defectum; Olliff, Trans. Ent, Boc ,

Lond., 1883, p. 185.

I think it very probable that this species will be found in New

South Wales. It is caught among feathers, hides, &c., and has

already been received from Ceylon, N. E. Borneo, and Java.

ON FLIGHT.
By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

The locomotion of animals has been the topic of an ever
increasing number of papers since Marey published his unparalleled
book (1) on this subject. Of all the different modes of locomotion
none is so interesting as flight, because the organs adapted for this
function are much more highly developed than any other locomotive
organs.

In studying this subject one would naturally assume that the
size of the wings was in proportion to the weight of the body, and
that an animal would fly the better, the larger the relative size of
the wings. It has however, been shown by myself and others, that
this is by no means the case, and that an insect the relative size of
whose wings is equal to the relative size of the wings of a swallow,
cannot fly (grasshoppers, Dytiscus, &c.)

I have explained this fact by asserting that the very short wings
of small animals would reqviire a rapidity of motion, to have the
same efi'ect as the long wings of large animals, which is altogether
incompatible with the celerity of the muscular contractions, and
which has not been observed by Marey, who measured the number
of wing-flaps per minute, nor by myself, who measured the extent
of the angle which is passed through by the moving wing. I have
previously asserted that the resistance of the air to flight was equal
to C^ that is the cube of the rapidity. The rapidity in itself is of
course a factor depending not only on the rapidity of the wing-
flaps and their angles, but also on the length of the wing increasing
in pro})ortion to the latter.

All these statements have been laid down in an essay published
some years ago by me (2 .)

(1) Marey. Locomotion ammale, International Scientific Series.

(2) V. Lendenfeld. Der Fhig der Libellen Sitzungsberichte der Kais.
Academie der Wissenschaften in Wien. Band 81.

74 ON FLIGHT,

Several writers have since then dwelt on the subject of flight.
Of these the careful essay of Miillenhoff (1) requii-es our especial
attention.

Although Miillenoff dwells on his dissent from my views
extensively, he acknowledges the correctness of my deduction
referred to above, by stating that the correlation between the
rapidity of wing-flaps and weight of the body can be expressed by
asserting that the " centre of resistance " always moves with nearly
the same velocity.

Among his numerous valuable statements, I will particularly
refer to his ingenious, and doubtlessly to a great extent correct
explanation of the mode in which eagles and vultures can rise by
describing circles in the air without the movement of their wings.
His explanation is the following : — He says the bird moves with
the wind, with his head turned to the direction to which the wind
blows downward, and moves in the opposite direction with his
head facing the wind ui^ward. The force which enables the bird
to rise higher when he is moving against the wind than he has
sunk when he was moving with the wind, is derived from the
feathers being raised from the body when the bird moves with the
wind, when the wind comes from behind, and that these feathers
lie close to the body, so that it presents a much smaller surface
when the bird moves against the wind. At the same time
MullenhoflP asserts that the bird moves with the wind, describing a
screw- line, following the surface of an inclined cylinder, in the
direction of the wind. I think that this explanation is a most
ingenious one, but I would at the same time like to submit, that
it appears highly probable that the bird moves its wings at the
same time round the axis of the forearm in such a manner as to
catch the wind on the lower surface which ever way it moves.
I have very often observed, through a telescope, eagles and hawks
rising in a slight breeze, and believe that these birds change
the position of wings and tail_ as they move round and round in

(1) Midlenhoff. Die Grosse der Flugflachen Pfliigers Archiv fur die
Gesammte Physiologie. Band XXXV

BY R. VON LENDENPELD, PH.D. 75

such a manner that the wind always tends to force the bird ii^pwards,
and that the bird never sinks at all. Of course the bird is carried
faster along with the wind the quicker it rises.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. C. S. Wilkinson exhibited some Fossil Bones which had
been recently obtained from the coral sand rock on Lord Howe
Island. Amongst them was an almost complete skull somewhat
resembling that of the Horned Lizard Megalania prisca, from the
Pleistocene deposits on the Darling Downs, Queensland.

Mr. Wilkinson also exhibited specimens of Shells of oysters
found in the beds of clay and sand at a depth of 40 feet below
the surface, in sinking the new shaft of the Bullock Island and
Wickham Coal Company near Newcastle. Mr. Brazier identified
this oyster, which must have been 12 inches in length, as a large
form of the Ostrcea edulis.

Dr. J. C. Cox exhibited other specimens of the Ostrcea edulis
from Port Jackson, found firmly attached to a bottle. He pointed
out the great difference between this oyster, which will not keep
for more than a day, and the Englisli native oyster, and suggested
that they are of separate species. Mr. E. P. Ramsay mentioned
that the same oyster in South Australia keeps well for many days,
and was of opinion that they were the same as the 0. edulis of
England.

Mr. Ptamsay exhibited a Fossil phalanx of Palmorchestes, from
Wellington Caves, from the size of which he calculated tliat the
animal must have stood about 15 feet high. Also some Devonian
shells and corals from the same district, in which the lime had
been replaced by silica, and which had been cleared from the
matrix by the application of muriatic acid.

76 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Dr, Cox exhibited a plant (undetermined) in cultivation by
Mr. Scholtz, of Hunter-street, in which the flowers had been
succeeeded by bulbils as in Fourcroya gigantea. Also a large
femur of Dlnornis robustus from Christ Church, New Zealand.

Mr. Masters exhibited very large and heavy wooden swords
from Herbert River, Queensland, resembling boomerangs in shape,
together with unusually wide Hielemans or shields from the same
district. Also a waddy or club, with the head thickly set with
hobnails.

Mr. Hirst exhibited a centipede (Heterostoma) 10 inches long,
and about f-inch broad, from the Herbert River.

Dr. von Lendenfeld exhibited a series of Photographs of
Mount Kosciusko, showing the various ways in which the granite
rocks are broken down in that locality, partly by frost, and partly
by ordinary weathering.

The President drew attention to a singular case of germination
of the seeds of an orange within the uninjured fruit before its
removal from the tree. The testa was broken, the cotyledons
enlarged, free, and green, and the plumule and radicle well
developed.

WED^fESDAY, 25x11 MARCH, 1885.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M.A., F.G.S., in the chair.

Mr. Sidney Olliff was present as a visitor.

MEMBERS ELECTED.

Mr. J. A. Boyd, Ripple Creek, Queensland ; Mr. Sidney Olliff,
Australian Museum.

DONATIONS.

"Transactions of the Entomological Society of London." Parts
III. and IV. October and December, 1884. From the Society.

"Victorian Naturalist." Vol. I., No. 14. February, 1885.
From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

"Science." Vol. IV., Nos. 81-83; Vol. V., Nos. 102-105.
From the Editor.

" Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History." Vof.
VII., Nos. 1, 2, and 4. April and July, 1884 ; January, 1885.
From the Society.

" Annali del Museo Civico di Sboria Naturale di Geneva."
Series 2. Vol. I., No. 21. 1884. From the Director.

78 DONATIONS.

From L'Academie Imperiale cles Sciences de St. Petersbourg,
" Bulletin." Tome XXYIII. No. 4. Tome XXIX. No. 1.
" Memoires." Tome XXXI. Nos. 9-14.

*' Catalogue of Superior Second-hand Books on Sale." From
Henry Sotheran and Co.

" Bericht iiber die Senckenbergische naturforschende Gesell-
schaft." 1884. From the Society.

" Comparative Vocabularies of the Indian Tribes of British
Columbia." " Descriptive Sketch of the Physical Geography and
Q-eology of the Dominion of Canada." With maps. From the
Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada.

" Feuille des jeunes Naturalistes." No. 172. February, 1885.
From the Editor.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger." No. 187. February 9th, 1885.
From the Editor.

Fifty copies " President's Annual Address." From C. S.
Wilkinson, Esq., F.L.S., F.G.S.

PAPERS READ.

ON A DEVONIAN FOSSIL ALLIED TO WORTHENIA

(DE KONINCK) FROM NEW SOUTH WALES.

Plate IX., Figs. 1 and 2.

By F. Ratte, Eng. Arts and Manuf., Paris.

This note accompanies the drawings of a probably new fossil
from the Devonian limestone of New South Wales.

It has been found among a number of fossils from the Murrum-
bidgee limestone, which were collected in 1881, by Mr. Chas.
Jenkins, author of a note on the Geology of Yass Plains. (1)

Among some fossil Gasteropods, such as Loxonema anglicum,
Euomjjhalus Bigshyi, Murcldsonia Verneuiliana, M. turris, which
occur, together with a few corals, Camites, Billingsia, &c., described
by Prof, de Koninck as Devonian, there are some undescribed
Gasteropods. All these fossils are silicified, showing themselves in
relief on the weathered surface of the limestone. One of them
was obtained in an acceptable condition by dissolving the most part
of the limestone in hydrochloric acid.

Worthenia'? (De Koninck .) Sp. nov.

This Gasteropod is interesting from the fact of its close relation
with a new genus i-ecently made out of Pleurotomaria and other
genera, by Prof, de Koninck. (2)

This paleontologist acknowledges, in the carboniferous limestone
of Belgium, eleven genera in the family HcdiotidcB. Besides the
species maintained in the old genera Polytremaria, Murchisonia,
Ptychomj)halus and Porcellia, he creates seven new genera out of
some Turbo, Trochus, Pleurotomaria, Murchisonia, &c. These
genera are Gosseletia, Worthenia, Baylea, Mourlonia, Agnesia,
Rhineoderma and Luciella.

One of them, the genus Mourlonia, has an extensive synonymy
being formed out of five genera, including Helix and Euomphalus,

(1) Explor. of the Caves and Rivers of N.S.W., 1882, and Proc. Lin.
Soc, N.S.W., 1879, pp. 21 and 216.

(2) L. G. de Koninck. Fauna du Calc. Carb. de la Belg., 1883, 4th Part,
p. 64.

80 ON A DEVONIAN FOSSIL ALLIED TO WORTHENIA.

The author describes five species of Worthenia, two of which are
from America, whilst four belong to the carboniferous of Belgium.

He diflerenciates this genus from the others belonging to the
same family by the following characters : —

" The angular shape of the whorls, the small width of the
band (' bande ') of the sinus, comparatively to the size of the
species, by the position of this band on the angle of the whorls
and its crenulated form." And he adds :

'•' T don't know any other species in the lower paleozoics that
can be referred to this genus."

The want of paleontological works is not very favourable
to a further inquiry on the subject. The best marked character
which seems to associate the specimen referred to, with Prot. de
Koninck's new genus, is the crenulated nature of the periphery.

In short the only specimen in the Museum, can be sketched as
follows : Height of spire about }Jth inch ; width about j^th inch.
Shell conical, turriculate, whorls 6 or 8 (1) angular and crenulated
on the periphery. Sinus not known, the mouth being broken :
mouth slightly polygonal. Number of crenulations in the last
half whorl above the periphery about six, large and long, conical ;
number of crenulations in the centre about eight, narrow ; below
the periphery crenulations lose and indistinct.

The suture which, in the upper whorls corresponds with the last
loosely crenulated border does not show any ornament. Apical
angle from 64 to 70° according to position, difficult to appx-eciate in
consequence of the imperfection of the specimen and the size of the
ornaments.

If we compare this short description with the five species
described by de Kordnck, we find a gi-eat difference in the crenula-
tions, some of the species from America and Belgium presenting
in the last half whorl, 50-60 crenulations above the periphery,
while there are only six in the Australian specimen,

Pi'of. de Koninck's new genera seem to be very closely related to
each other, and according to this system one would probably make
a new genus of the present fossil, but I will not take the responsi-
bility of it until further works on the subject can be consulted.

THE PHORIOSPONGI^. Marshall.
By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

In the Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, Vol. 35, p.
122-126, W. Marshall describes two Sponges as representatives
of the new Genus Pboriospongia, which is characterized as Sponges
containing a large amount of foreign particles, sand, etc., and
also possessing siliceous spicules of the monactinellid type.

Both species have been obtained from Tasmania.

Marshall (I.e.) refers to a few British Sponges described by
Bowerbank and others and also to an Australian one described by
Gray, all of which contain foreign bodies, sand, etc., besides spicules.

He is inclined to consider all these Sponges, described by himself
and others, as boring Sponges which however do not live in rocks
or shells as the true Vioa, but which live in sand. They perforate
the sand in all dii-ections and so produce a mass similar to a
Sponge and containing both the spicule of the Sponge and the
sand in which the Sponge took up its abode.

In my extensive collections of Australian Sponges I have not
only found the species described by Marshall, again, but I have
also found a number of other species hitherto not described, which
all possess flesh-spicules and appear nearly related to the Phorio-
spongise. In a paper published in these Proceedings (Vol. IX.,)
by Die last year, I drew attention to the fact that " flesh-spicules "
were sometimes found in Sponges which possess an ordinary
horny skeleton without siliceous spicules. Based on this discovery
is my subdivision of the families of Ceraospongia into sub-families
with and without flesh-spicules.

Up till now I have found in all eleven species of Sponges which
should in consequence of the structure of their fibrous skeleton be
placed among the Ceraospongiae, and possess flesh-spicules. With

/

82 THE PHORIOSPONGIiE,

one exception these spicules belong to the monactinellid type.
The fibrous skeleton of these Sponges is sometimes composed of
" hollow " fibres which do not contain any foi-eign bodies, some-
times again of solid fibre with or without foreign bodies. The
number of foreign bodies in the fibre may increase to such an
extent, that hardly any Spongiolin is left between the sand particles.
In those cases we are not able to distinguish between main, radial
and connecting, tangental fibres. There is only a coarse and
irregular network of arenaceous threads to be seen, which may
contain different kinds of foreign bodies. There are a great many
Australian Sponges with a skeleton of this kind.

Very often we find in these Sponges the well known filaments
characterizing the family Hircinida ; generally there are no flesh-
sj)icules, but sometimes the latter are met with in these arenaceous
Sponges. Often the spicules appear massed around the arena-
ceous fibres and form a dense coating around them : we have
arrived at true Phoriospongiae.

I do not hesitate to consider the Phoriospongise as belonging to
the horny Sponge as well as those porifera which, like Dysidea
possess an arenaceous skeleton but no flesh-spicules.

From the point of view taken up by Marshall (I.e.) and others,
all these horny Sponges with flesh-spicules might be combined to a
iamily for itself. I have however convinced myself of the correct-
ness of my original idea, that within any family of Ceraospongife,
Sponges with flesh-spicules may be produced. A', e find namely
that these flesh-spicules are extremely variable, and that there
exists no correlation between them and the structure of the Sponge
apparently.

I consider the Phoriospongire, not as boring Sponges living in
sand ; but as Ceraospongise belonging to the group with arenaceous
irregular fibres.

Vosmaer has recently in a short paper " on the relation between
certain Monactinellidse and Ceraospongice " (Mittheilungen der
Zoologischen Station in Neapel, Band 5, Seite 490-492), advanced
the hypothesis that the horny Sponges are the descendants of the
siliceous Monactinellidse.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 83

As we jndge of the relationship of different animals mainly by
their morphology, we are of course generally unable to decide
which of two similar forms is the ancestor and which the descen-
dant or whether the two are to be considered as brothers.

Vosmaer's hypothesis is very ingenious although I do not see
that there are any facts proving its correctness. It is directly
opposed to the hypothesis previously published by me (Das System
der Monactinellidse, Zoologischer Anzeiger. Band 1884, No. 164.)

Forms like these Ceraospongiaj with siliceous flesh-spicules may
enlighten us on this question. Their production may have taken
place in one of the following ways.

1. They are descended from ordinary horny Sponges and the
flesh-spicules have been produced sua sponte.

2. They are descended from the Desmacidonidse, the silicious
fibres of which have been converted into arenaceous or horny
fibres.

If the second of these alternatives be true, then we will have to
consider the flesh-spicules as the conservative part and they would
represent the flesh-spicules of the Desmacidonidae, which had
remained unchanged whilst the fibrous skeleton was being
transformed.

If the first of these alternatives be true, then we would have to
consider these Phoriospongise and related sponges, either as tran-
sition forms leading from true hoi-ny Sponges to the Desmacidonidse
or as the terminations of series, beginning with the ordinary korny
Sponges and ending with these forms.

I quite agree with Yosmaer and others that further investigtions
will be required to settle these questions. To my own and
Vosmaer's publications on the subject the merit is due of having
raised the question. As however, these flesh-spicules are much
softer and more variable than the spicules in the fibres it seems
diflicult to understand that the latter should have vanished whilst
the former remained during the disilicifying process as Vosmaer
asserts.

I would also not be inclined to suppose that the Desmacidonidse
are particularly closely related to these Sponges in the opposite

84 THE PHORIOSPONGIiE.

direction. I believe that the flesh-spicules in the Plioriospongise
and horny Sponges on the one hand, and those of the silicifibred
Sponges on the other have been produced inde])endantly of each
other.

Some of the flesh-spicules described by Marshall (I.e.) are very
common. So particularly ^-'^^ (1), I have found them in seven
species of horny sponges. The Parallelapipeds of Marshall I have
however, not found anywhere, not even in those specimens which
I refer to Phoriospongia solida Marshall, in which Sponge Marshall
has found them. I am rather inclined to think that they may have
nothing to do with the Sponge. Marshall describes also tr ac and
tr° ac in various shapes. I have not found the latter in any other
specimens than those which I refer to Marshall's species.

Besides these I have found tr- of various dimensions in three
species. In two also a spicule which although anchorate can be
considered as rut rut.

One species is characterized by spicules tr ac sp and in one I
have found spicules with three equal rays similar to those described
by F. E. Schulze of the Plakinidte.

(1) I use for the spicules the signs proposed by Vosmaer (Bronn Classen
unci Ordnungen des Thierreiches. Band II ; u a 0) instead of the long
and equally unpronouncable and unpractical names.

SYNONYMY OF AND REMARKS UPON THE SPECIFIC
NAMES AND AUTHORITIES OF FOUR SPECIES
OF AUSTRALIAN MARINE SHELLS, ORIGINALLY
DESCRIBED BY DR. JOHN EDWARD GRAY IN

1825 AND 1827.

By John Brazier, C.M.Z.S., Ac, &c.

In this paper I have endeavoured to give Dr. Gray credit for his
work done in 1825 and 1827, as far as regards his specific names.
Tliree of them have been put down as being described or figured by
Wood, Quoy and Gaimard, Sowerby and othei'S.

First we have Nassa livida Gray, well described in Captain
King's Narrative of a Survey of the Coasts of Australia, Vol. 2,
Appendix p. 484, 1827. And from that date the shell has not even
been mentioned by those authors who have catalogued or mona-
graphed the genera, Reeve, Kiener, Marrat and Tryon.

The next species in order is Stromhus australis Gray, always
quoted as of Sowerby.

Then we have Bulla australis, Gray described in the Annals of
Philosophy, new series. Vol. 9, 1825. It is also mentioned again
by Gray in Captain King's Voyages, Appendix Vol. 2, p. 490, 1827.
It is always quoted as of Quoy and Gaimard. The shell figured both
by Reeve and Sowerby in their works as Australis of Quoy and
Gai(nard is a distinct species, and comes from Tahiti and other
Polynesian Islands. Quoy and Gaimard's Shell came from New
Holland and not Tahiti.

The next in order is Bulla lineata Gray, described in the Annals
of Philosophy, new series, Vol. 9, p. 408, 1825. It is quoted by
all authors as being of Wood, who was the first to figure it in
1828. I append a list of the synonyms with their references and
dates of publication wherever I have been able to ascertain them.

86 SYNONYMY OF NAMES OF AUSTRALIAN MARINE SHELLS,

1. Nassa livida. Gray

1827. Nassa livida, G-ray in Captain King's NaiTative of a
Survey of the Coasts of Australia, Vol. 2, Appeiiclix p. 484, No. 57.

(I) Bucchmm imicolorum, Kiener, Coquilles, Vivantes, p. 6,
No. 59. Buccinum unicolor, Kiener, pi. 19, fig 69.

1851. JVassa (Alectrion) unicolor, Kiener. A. Adams. Proc.
Zool. Soc, p. 106.

1853. Nassa [Zeuxisj unicolor, Kiener. H. and A. Adams,
Genera of Recent Molhisca, Vol. 1, p. 119.

1853. Nassa unicolorata, Reeve. Conch Icon., pi. 3, fig. 17.

1853. Nassa rutilans, Reeve. Conch. Icon., pi. 22, fig. 147.

1854. Nassa unicolor, Hombron et Jacq., Voyage au Pole Sud
r Astrolabe et la Zelee, Vol. 5, p. 76. Atlas, pi. 21, fig. 13-15.

1873. Nassa (ZeuxisJ unicolor, Kiener. Paetel, Catalog der
Conchylien-Sammlung, p. 35.

1874. Nassa unicolor, Kiener. Schmeltz, Museum Godeffroy,
Catalog. 5, p. 124, No. 3,699.

1876. Nassa [Alectrion) rutilans, Reeve. Brazier, Proc. Linn.
Soc, N.S.W., Vol. 1, p. 180, No. 47.

1882. Nassa (Zeuxis) unicolorata, Kiener. Tryon Manuel of
Conchology, p. 31, pi. 10, figs. 88, 89, 90.

1884. Nassa unicolor, E. A. Smith, Voyage of H.M.S. Alert,
p. 48, No. 30.

1884. Nassa (Zeuxis) unicolorata, Kiener. Brazier, Proc. Linn.
Soc, N.S:W., Vol. 9, p. 793, No. 3.

Hah. — New Holland, {Captain P. P. King) ; Cape York, N.
Australia {Jukes) ; Darnley Island, Torres Straits, 30 fathoms,
sand and mud bottom {Brazier) ; Port Curtis and Port Molle,
Queensland, 12-20 fathoms {Goppinger) ; Sir Charles Hardy's

(1) Species General et Iconographe des Coquilles Par L. C. Kieuer, con-
tinued by Dr. P. Fischer, 1834 up to 18S0.

BY JOHN BRAZIER, CM.Z.S., &C. 87

Island, N. E. Australia {Jukes ) Rockingham Bay, Queensland
{Brazier Eclipse ExpeditionlSll) ; Port Darwin and Port Essington
{E. Spalding) ; Cossack, N. W. Australia (/. F. Bailey) ; Ceram
{Hombron and Jacquinot) New Zealand "?? 1 (Cttmmg') Cardwell,
Rockingham Bay, Queensland {E. E. Beddome) ; West Australia
( W. H, Hargraves Collection in the Australian Afuseuvi) ; East
Coast of Australia {Schmeltz.)

This species was described by Dr. Gray in 1827, and re-described
and figured by Kiener in his Coquilles Vivantes, as Buccimtm
unicolorum, he also figures it as Bucciiium unicolor. A. Adams,
in 1851, in a list published in the proceedings of the Zoological
Society, of London, classes it as Nassa unicolor ; and in 1853,
Reeve, in his Monograph of the Genus Nassa, calls it .Nassa
unicolorata, and at the same time he calls a variety of it Nassa
rutilans, said to have come from New Zealand, on the authority of
the species maker, Mr. Hugh Cuming, who never visited New
Zealand. The species is confined to Torres' Straits. And in
1854, flombron and Jacquinot also re-dascribe it in the. Voyage
Au Pole Sud as Nassa unicolor ; they do not make any mention of
Kiener's name. In 1873, Paetel, in his Catalog der Conchylien,
Sammlung quotes N. unicolor, Kiener. Schmeltz, in Museum
Godeffroy Catalog V., 1874, quotes N. unicolor, Kiener. G. W.
Tryon, in his Manual of Conchology, 1882, quotes it as N. unico-
lorata, Kiener. Mr. E. A. Smith, in the Zoology of H.M.S.
Alert, 1884, quotes it as Nassa unicolor, Kiener. I have also
done the same in these proceedings, 1884, &^ Nassa unicolorata,
Kiener. Dr. Gray distinctly says that his specimens of N. livida
were presented to the British Museum by Captain P. P. King.
It is quite astonishing that Reeve never mentioned Gray's name,
as he had access to figure any species contained in the British
Museum.

2. Strombus AusTRALis. Gray.

1827. Stromhus Australis, Gray. In King's Narrative of a
Survey of the Coasts of Australia. Vol. 2. Appendix, p. 489,
No. 90.

88 SYNONYMY OF NAMES OP AUSTRALIAN MARINE SHELLS,

1842. Strombus Australis, Sowerby. Thes. Conch., Vol. 1, p.
36, sp. 53, figs. 96, 97.

1843. Strombus Australis, Sowerby. Kiener, Coq. Viv. Strom-
bus, p. 21, pi. 14, fig. 1.

1843. Strombus Australis, Sowerby. Deshayes in Lam. Anim.
Sans Vert., 2nd edition, Vol. 9, p. 716, No. 41.

1845. Strombus Australis, Sowei-by. Kuster's in Conch. Cab.,
2nd edition, p. 30, pi. 13., fig. 2.

1851. Strombus Australis, Sowerby. Reeve, Conch. Icon. pi.
14, sp. 34.

1854. Strombus {Monadactylus) Australis, Sowerby. H. and
A. Adams, Cenera of Recent Mollusca, Vol. 1, p. 259.

1867. Strombus Australis, Sowerby. Mitchell in Catalogue of
the Mollusca in the Collection of the Covernment Central
Museum, Madras, p. 18, No. 2.

1873. Strombus Australis, Sowerby. Paetel. Catalog, der Conch.
Sammlung, p. 7, 52.

Hob. — West Coast of New Holland (Captain P. P. King) ;
Rowley Shoals, West Coast of Australia {J. F. Baley) ; West
Australia ( Sir William Denison and Australian Ilusetmi) : Cape
York, North Australia and West Australia ( W. H. Hargraves'&
Collection in Australian Museum) ; Nicol Bay, North West
Australia {Brazier).

This is another of Dr. Gray's species described in Captain King's
Narrative of a Survey of the Coast of Australia, Vol. 2, p. 489,
1827, the type specimens collected by Captain King were presented
by him to the British Museum, and since that date all Monographers
from Kuster, Sowerby, Reeve, and Kiener quote Sowerby as the
authority of the species. Dr. Gray had the practice of putting
specific names very often to species in the British Museum but
not attaching his name to them, no doubt that is the cause of the
error.

BY JOHN BRAZIER, C.M.Z.S., &C. 89

3. Bulla australis. Gray.

1825. Bidla australis, Gray in Annals of Philosophy, New-
Series, Vol. 9, p. 408.

1827. Bulla australis, Gray in Capt. King's Survey of Avistralia,
Vol. 2, Appendix p. 490, No. 92.

1833, Bulla Australis,Q,\\oj diJviX Gaimard. Voyage de 1' Astrolabe
Zoologie, Vol. 2, p. 357. Atlas, pi. 26, figs. 38-39.

1835. Bulla australis, (Gray), in Yates' account of New Zealand
Appendix p. 308.

1836. Bulla australis, Quoy and Gaimard. Deshayes in 2nd
edition of Lamarck, Vol. 7, p. 673.

1843. Bulla Australis, Gray. King's Voyage in DielFenbach
New Zealand, Vol. 2, p. 243, No. 114.

1850, Bulla australis, Quoy. Jays Catalogue of Shells, 4th
edition, p. 112, No. 3174.

1854. Bulla ohlonga, A. Adams in Sowerby Thes. Conch., Vol.
2, p. 577, No. 50, pi, 123, fig. 74.

1854. Bulla oblonga, H. and A. Adams. Genera of Recent
Mollusca, Vol. 2, p. 16.

1854. Bulla aitstralis, Quoy and Gaimard. H. and A. Adams,
Mollusca, Vol. 2, p. 16.

1859. BuUa australis, Chenu (non Quoy and Gaimard). Manuel
de Conch., Part 1 p. 389, fig. 2938.

1859. Bulla oblonga, A. Adams. Chenu, Manuel de Conch.,
Part 1, p. 389, fig. 2940.

1865. Bulla australis, Quoy and Gaimard. Angas, Proc. Zool.
Soc. p. 188.

1867. Bidla oblonga. A. Adams. Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc, p. 226.

1868. Bulla oblonga, A. Adams. Reeve, Conch. Icon., pi. 3,
species 9, fig. a.b.c.

90 SYNONYMY OF NAMES OP AUSTRALIAN MARINE SHELLS,

1873. Bulla ohlonga, A. Adams. Hutton, Manual of New
Zealand Mollusca.

1873. Bulla australis, Qnoy and Gaimavd. Von Martens Critical
List of New Zealand Mollusca, p. 38.

1873. Bulla australis, Quoy. Pastel, Cat. der Conch. Sammlung,
p. 81.

1877. Bulla ohlonga, A. Adams. Tenison-Woods, Proc. Royal
Soc. Tasmania, p. 47.

1878. Bulla ohlonga, A. Adams. B. Australis, Gray. Hutton
in Journal de Conch, 3rd series. Vol. 26, p. 40.

1880. Bulla ohlonga, Adams. B. Australis, Gray. Hutton,
Manual of the New Zealand Mollusca, p. 121.

Hah. — New Holland {Bsrry, Captain, P.P. King) : King George's
Sound, South West Coast of Australia {Quoy and Gaimard) ;
East Coast of New Zealand (Yates) ; New Zealand ( Dieffenhach) ;
Tasmania (C. E. Beddome, W. F. Petterd, Tenison-Woods); Port
Jackson, near the Sow and Pigs Reef, from 2 to 5 fathoms on a
grassy bottom {Brazier) ; Spencers and St. Vincent's Gulf, South
Australia {G. F. Angas) ; Port Lincoln and Adelaide, South
Australia {G. Masters and Australian Museum) ; Australia {Mr.
F. titrange in Museum of the Asiatic Society of Bengal).

This is a complete history of this unfortunate species, and the
way authors have treated it since being first described by Dr.
Gray in the Annals of Philosophy, new series. Vol. 9, p. 408,
1825, and again in 1827, in Captain King's survey of Australia,
Vol, 2. In 1833, Quoy and Gaimard usurp Dr. Gray's specific
name ; and in 1835, Dr. Gray, in Yate's account of New Zealand,
quotes his own Bulla australis, and refers to King's Voyage to
New Holland. Deshayes in Lamarck's 2nd edition, 1836, makes
no mention of Grey, but quotes Quoy and Gaimard as the
authority. Dr. Gray in Dieffenbach's New Zealand, 1843,
also mentions his Bulla australis. A. Adams in Sowerby, Thes.
Conch., 1854, re-describes it as Bidla ohlonga ; also quotes it in

BY JOHN BRAZIER, C.M.Z.S., ifcc. 91

the Genera of Recent Mollusca of Henry, and Arthur Adams at
the same they quote Bulla australis, Quoy. Chenu in his Manuel
de Conch., figures a species at fig. 2938, as Bulla australis, the
species so figured is not the Bidla australis, Quoy, which is the
Bulla australis of Gray. Chenu also figures the Bulla oblotiya, A.
Adams, which is the Bulla australis, of Gray also Quoy. Mr.
Angas, in 1865, quotes Bulla australis, Quoy and Gaimard, from
South Australia, and in 1867, he quotes it SiS Bulla oblonga, A.
Adams, from Port Jackson. Reeve, in 1868, treats it as Bulla
ohlonga, A. Adams. The Bulla called Australis, and figured as
such in the Conch. Icon., as of Quoy and Gaimard, is not that
shell but a distinct species from Tahiti and other Pacific Islands,
Mr. A. Adams, in Sowerby's Monograph, gives Quoy and
Gaimard's description for a shell from New Holland, and figures
aiiother shell for it from Tahiti. In 1873, Professor Hutton
quotes it as Bulla oblonga, Adams ; in the same year Von
Martens, in his critical list of New Zealand, quotes it as Btdla
australis, Quoy, a common shell of New Holland. In the same
year it is quoted by Paetel in his catalogue as Bulla australis,
Quoy, from Adelaide, and Bulla oblonga, A. Adams, from the
Philippine Islands, the latter locality is an invention of Mr,
Cuming. In 1877, Tenison- Woods quotes it as Bulla oblonga, A.
Adams, and says that it has been confounded with Bulla australis,
Quoy, a shell found at Tahiti. In 1878, Professor Hutton quotes
it as Bidla oblonga, A. Adams, Bulla australis, Gray, he also
repeats tlie same error. In 1880, in the Manual of New Zealand
Mollusca, he quotes Dieflfenbach, New Zealand, for his informa-
tion, but his quotation is entirely wrong. The information that I
have found in DieiFenbach, New Zealand, Vol. 2, p. 243, No. 114,
1843, is Bulla australis, Gray, King's Voyage, so that it is quite
evident that Dr. Gray did not forget that he had mentioned it in
King's Vo^vage in 1827.

The Bull% australis of A. Adams in Sowerby Thesaurus Conchy-
liorum from Tahiti, found on reefs Cuming is quite a distinct
species from the Bulla australis. Gray, and Quoy and Gaimard,
Adamsspecies requiresanewspecificname. B. australis, Gvaj isnever

92 SYNONYMY OF NAMES OP AUSTRALIAN MARINE SHELLS,

found on reefs, its home is deep water, and it is generally washed
on shore after light gales in countless hundreds, about the deep
bays of Port Jackson and Botany Bay. The B. australis, A.
Adams, is found on reefs, we obtained it at the Home Island,
Palm Island, North East Australia; Bet and Darnley Islands,
Torres Straits, Chevert Expedition. I quoted it as Bulla australis,
Quoy and Gaimard, in the Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. 1, p.
83, on the authority of the monograph of the Family Bullidse, by
Ml'. Arthur Adams, in Sowerby's Thes. Conch, Vol. 2, p. 576, No.
45, pi. 122, figs. 64, 65, 66. As it requires a new name it may be
called Bulla Adamsi, Brazier.

lam under great obligation to Dr. George Bennett, F.L.S., for
his great kindness in lending me Dieffenbaoh's Work on New
Zealand, for reference (2); unfortunately it is a work that is not
to be found in the Australian Museum or the Free Public Library.
There is a copy of Yate's New Zealand in the Free Public Library,
and while writing this paper I secured in a second-hand book-shop
a very fine copy of the same work.

4. BuLLiNA LINEATA. Gray.

1825. Bulla lineata, Gray. Annals of Philosophy, new series,
Vol. 9, p. 408.

1828. Bulla lineata, Br. Mus. "Wood in Supplement to the
Index Testaceologicus, p. 9, No. 1, pi. 3, fig. 1, Bulla.

1850. Bulla lineata, Grag. Jay's Catalogue of Shells, 4th
edition, p. 113, No. 3,189.

1854. Bulla (Bullina) lineata, Wood. A. Adams in Sowerby's
Thes. Conch., Vol. II., p. 563, No. 2, pi. 120, fig. 2.

(•2) I have to thank my kinsman, Mr. R. C. Rossiter, of Noumea, New
Caledonia, for his liberal and generous action in presenting me with the
whole of the Zoology of the Voyage of the Astrolabe.

BY J. BRAZIER, C.M.Z.S., &C. 93

1854. Bullina undata, H. and A. Adams. Genera of Recent
Mollusca, Vol. 2, p. 8, Vol. 3, pi. 56, fig. 5a, not Bulla undata of
Brug.

1856. Bulla lineata, Wood. Hanley's Edition of Wood, Index
Test Supplement, p. 209, pi. 3, fig. 1.

1859. Bullina lineata, Wood. Chenu. Manual de Conch., Vol.

1, p. 387, fig. 2,915.

1860. Bullina lineata, W. Theobald. Junr. Catalogue of tho
Recent Shells in the Museum Asiatic Society of Bengal, p. 114.

1867. Btdllna lineata, Wood. Angas., Proc. Zool. Soc, p. 225.

1870. Bullina li7ieata, Wood. Reeve, Conch. Icon., pi. 1, fig.

2, a. b.

1873. Aplustrum lineatum, Hutton. Catalogue of New Zealand
Mollusca.

1873. Bullina lineata, Wood. Psetel, Catalog, der Conch.,
Sammlung, p. 81.

1878. Aplustrum lineatum, Hutton. Journal de Conch., 3rd
series. Vol, 26, p. 40, No. 243.

1880. Bullina lineata. Wood. Hutton, Manuel of New Zealand
Mollusca, p. 120.

1882. Bullina lineata. Wood. Dunker in Index Molluscorum
Maris Japonica, p. 163.

1883. Bullina lineata. Wood. Tyron, Structural and Systematic
Conchology, Vol. 2, p. 361-428, pi. 87, fig. 44.

Sab. — New Holland, (J/r. E. Barnard); Coogee Bay, New
South Wales, {G. F. Angas, Brazier) ; Middle Harbour, {G. F.
Angas) ; Moon Islet, Lake Macquarie, New South Wales, {W. H.
Margraves) ; Shark Island, Port Jackson, in rock pools, {Brazier) ;
Hauraki Gulf, New Zealand, rare, {F. W. HidtonX

94 SYNONOMY OF NAMES OF AUSTRALIAN MARINE SHELLS.

This species was described by Dr. Gray in 1825 and Mr. W.
Wood finding it in the British Museum in 1828 figures it in the
Supplement to the Index Testaceologicus and calls it Bulla lineata,
Br. Mus., found on the tablets in the British Museum. It should
be removed from the Family Bullidje and placed in the Family
Tornatellidse. All the specimens that I have found, had
when extracting the animal a small, horny, linear, trans
verse operculum like the Tornatellidse. Mr. Angas in 1867
remai'ks on this species : — " No one can fail to detect this pretty
species, banded with two lines of rose-colour, and painted with
wavy longitudinal stripes of the same hue. It forms a beaixtiful
object in the watei', when crawling about on the sandy bottoms of
the rock pools left by the receding tide, the expanded membranceous
foot of the animal being bordered with azure-blue. On examination
I found it had a small, horny, linear, transverse operculum like the
Actwonidte, and ougth therefore probably to be included in that
family."

NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHTPODA.
By William A. Haswill, M.A , B.Sc.
(Plates X.— XVIII.)

I. Talitrus sylvaticus.

(Plate X., Fig. I.)

Talitrus sylvaticus, Has well, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol.
IV., p. 246, pi. VIL, fig. L

Talitrus affinis, Haswell. L.c, Vol. V., p. 97, pi. V., fig. 1.

The specimen originally figured was a female. I give here a
figure of the posterior gnathopod of the male.

11, Allorchestes.

Of the species of Allorchestes common on the coast of New
South Wales there are three which are very well marked and
distinct. These are A. longicornis, A. crassicornis, and A. rupicola.
The first two are entirely unlike any of the three species which
have been described by Dana as occurring in Australia. The first,
A. longicornis (pi. X., figs. 6-8), is characterised by the extreme
length of the inferior antennae, which are as long as the
head and pereion, the flagellum being nearly three times as long as
the peduncle, and composed of thirty articuli. A. crassicornis,
again, (pi. X., figs. 2-5), has the inferior antennae scarcely so long
— a little longer than the head and first three segments — but
extremely thick both as regards the peduncle and the flagellum ;
the latter somewhat longer than the former, composed of twelve

96 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

segments, of which those near the base are very thick. Both
peduncle and flagellum are densely fringed with hairs. (1)

A. 7-wpicola (pi. X., figs. 9-12) has the antennae of moderate
length and thickness, the lower with only twelve joints in the
flagellum, and has a prominent rounded process on the carpus of
the anterior gnathopoda, such as occurs also in A. crassicornis. It
is possible that Dana's Allorchestes humilis may be a young foi'm of
this species, but there is nothing in his description or figure to
indicate that his species had the characteristic features which I
have described.

A. niger (pi. XI., figs. 1-3) is distinguished from A. rujncola
only by the form of the anterior gnathopoda, and by having the
inferior antennae relatively longer, with 21-23 joints in the
flagellum.

A. Gaimai'dii, Dana, is characterized by the union of the proximal
articuli of the inferior antenme into one piece, which appears like
an additional segment of the peduncle.

A. australis, which Dana describes as being found at lllawai-ra, I
cannot identify with any of the species I have seen. The description
and figure most nearly resemble A. rupicola, but with well-marked
difl'erences.

III. Neobule algicola.

(Plate XI., figs. 4-6.

Neohule algicola, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. IV.,
p. 255, pi. VIIL, fig. 4.

Rathke's genus Hyale, which is placed by Dana in the " Lysia-
nassinoe," is seemingly nearly related to Neohule, having the last
pair of pleopoda double-branched, but otherwise resembling Nicea.
It may be, therefore, that, if Hyale should prove to possess the
arrangement of the gnathites characteristic of the Orchestidse,
Neohule will require to be united with it.

(1) The species described and figured by Mr. Chas. Chilton as Allorchestes
crassicornis is not this species but the female of Talorchcstia quadrimana,
Dana ; (Proc. Lm. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. IX., p. 1035, pi. XLVL, fig. 1.)

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 97

IV. ASPIDOPHOREIA.

This genus stands between Allorchestes and Nicea, differing from
both in the large size of the anterior coxse, from Allorchestes also
in the character of the telson, and from Nicea in the large size of
both upper and lower antennae, and in having the lower pair much
larger than the upper.

V. Stegocephalus latus.

(Plate XI., figs. 7-12.)

Stegocephalus latus, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol.
IV., p. 252, pi. VIII., fig. 2. Cat. Aust. Crust., p. 227.

I give here an improved figure of this species from a second
specimen from the same locality (Tasmania.)

The second and third joints of the peduncle of the superior
antennae are both very short. The appendage consists of two
joints, a short basal and a long distal one, and is terminated by a
long slender spine with a few minute hairs round the base ; the
flagellum contains only four articuli, the first being much larger
than the others ; the first and second have each a long slender
spine connected with the distal end ; at the end of the last joint
is a small fasciculus of small, slightly hooked hairs. The inferior
antennae have six joints in the flagellum in the Tasmanian
specimens, but only three in a specimen from New South Wales,
which appears to be a variety of the same species. (1)

VI. Ampelisca. australis.

(Plate XII., figs. 7-16 and Plate XIII., figs. 1-4.)

Ampelisca australis, Haswell, Proc, Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol.
IV.. p. 257, pi. VIIL, fig. 3. Cat. Aust. Crust., p. 235.

( 1 ) By an error the word ' ' sub-clielate" was substituted for ' ' subpediform"
in the original description of tlie gnathpods. (Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.,
Vol. IV., p. 252, line 21.)

7

98 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

This species would seem to be subject to a considerable amount,
of variation. A specimen from Port Denison resembles the original
specimen from Port Jackson in the proportions of the body and of
the coxJB, in the pleopoda and the telson and the gnathopoda ; it is
distinguished from the latter by the greater length of the superior
antennae, which are as long as the head and first three segments,
and the flagellum of which consists of fifteen narrow articuli ; and
also by the form of the basal joints of the fifth pair of pereiopods
(fig. 10.) The lower antennae are broken.

Another specimen (tigs. 11-16) from Port Jackson, resembles
the first in all points, except that the basal joint of the third pair
of pereiopoda is of a slightly different shape.

In a specimen from Port Stephens, the superior antennse are as
long as the head and first four segments, and its flagellum consists
of about twenty segments. The inferior anlennte are considerably
longer, being longer than the head and pereion of the animal ; the
peduncle is very long and slender, equalling in length the whole of
the superior antennae. The basal joint of the last pair of pereiopods
differs a little in from that of either of the other specimens.

In the Port Stephens and Port Denison specimens, the third
pair of pereiopoda terminate in a hair-like spine, which represents
the terminal joint, while in the Port Jackson specimen there is a
distinct, though small dactylus.

VII. Lysianassa and Anonyx.
(Plate XII., figs. 1-6.)

The species named by me Lysianassa nitens is better placed in
the nearly related genus Anonyx, the anterior gnathopoda having
a feebly developed, almost transverse palm (pi. XII., figs. 1 and 2)
which gives them a sub-cheliform character. The telson is deeply
cleft.

The nearest relative of this species would seem to be Anonyx
Edimrdsii of Kroyer, the principal points of distinction apparently
being the greater number of joints (ten) in the flagellum of the
superior antennte of the present species, the broader form of the
propus of the posterior gnathopod, and its stronger dactylus.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 99

Lysianassa australiensis, (Plate XII., figs. 3 and 4) on the other
hand, has the anterioi* gnathopoda non-prehensile ; while the telson
is divided to the base. It is to be distinguished from A. Kroyeri
chietly by the form of the terminal joints of the posterior gnathopod,
as well as by the non-prehensile anterior gnathopods. The follow-
ing is a more detailed description of L. australiensis : —

The eyes are reniform, rather large, but not nearly meeting above.
The fourth segment of the pleon has a depression on its dorsal
aspect. The superior antennae are about equal in length to the
head and the first segment ; the first joint thick, slightly convex
on its dorsal border, scarcely projecting beyond the angular process
of the head ; the second and third segments are very short; the
flagellum is scarcely longer than the peduncle, of ten articuli, the
appendage with five or six. The inferior antennae are of the same
length as the superior, much slenderer : the flagellum and peduncle
are of nearly equal length, the former with ten joints. The first
pair of gnathopods are obscurely sub-cheliform, the propus having
at its distal end an obscure lobe armed with a pair of stout spines
against which the dactylus works. The posterior gnathopods are
characterised by the extreme smallness of the dactylus, which is
nearly terminal and is ornamented, together with the apposed
palmar border, with some minute cilia : the ventral border of the
propus is ox^namented with a row of short setae and the distal
border with a fasciculus of more slender hairs. The telson is cleft
to the base ; each of the halves is ornamented with three short
conical spines.

The above description would apply equally well to L. nitens, as
far as the antennae, anterior gnathopoda and telson are concerned,
except that the flagellum of the superior pair is a little shorter in
the latter species. The main diflference between the two species
lies in the posterior gnathopoda, whicli in L. nitens have a concave
terminal palm with a well developed dactylus.

L. affinis (pi. XII., figs. 5 and 6) differs from both of these in
the size of the eyes, which nearly meet above, and in the great
length of the inferior antennae. The segments of the flagellum of

100 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

the superior antennpe are also more numerous. The posterior
gnathopoda are similar to those of L. nitens ; the telson is like-
wise deeply cleft, with a conical spine on each half.

VIII. EUSIRUS.
EUSIRUS DUBIUS, Var.

(Plate XIV., fig. 1).

Eusirus duhius, Haswell, Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W , Vol. IV.,
p. 331, pi. XX„ fig. 3 ; Cat. Aust. Crust., p. 247.

The first and second pleonal segments have each five spines on
the posterior border. The fourth and fifth segments are dorsally
carinated — the carinae produced posteriorly into acute teeth. The
supei'ior antennae are as long as the cephalon and first three segments
of the pereion ; the first joint of the peduncle is stout, longer than
the head ; the second is about a third of the length of the first ;
the third is very small ; the flagellum is somewhat longer than the
peduncle, of 21 articuli ; the appendage is composed of 8 rather
elongate articuli. The inferior antennae are a good deal longer than,
the superior, nearly as long as the cephalon and pereion ; the
peduncle is stout, the fifth joint the largest, broad and laterally
compressed ; the flagellum is short, not so long as the last segment
of the peduncle, of 15 joints. The anterior gnathopods are large ;
the carpus has the palmar process about a fourth of the length
of the propus ; the propus is ovate, twice as long as broad, the
palm defined by a small tooth. The posterior gnathopods are
similar to the anterior pair, but larger. The posterior pleopods
have the rami ovate-lanceolate, acute, with a few serrations. The
telson is deeply cleft, each half ending in two acute spines, the
outer of which is more prominent than the inner.

Length, exclusive of antenna?, about \ of an inch.

Port Jackson.

This variety differs from that originally described, which was
obtained in Tasmania, in the greater thickness of the inferior

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 101

antennse, and the absence of a spine on the last segment of the
pereion, besides other minor points.

EUSIRUS AFFINIS. N. Sp.

(Plate XI Y., figs. 2-4).

The second and third segments of the pleon are each armed
with a few minnte spines in the middle of the posterior border ;
the following three have each a very small mesial tooth. The
superior antennae are as long as the head and first four segments ;
the first joint of the peduncle is as long as the head, stout ; the
second joint is about half the length of the first and narrower ;
the third is very small ; the fiagellum is nearly twice as long as
the peduncle, with 22 articuli ; the appendage is well developed,
nearly half the length of the fiagellum, with fourteen articuli.
The inferior antennae are considerably longer than the superior
pair, being as long as the head and the first six segments of the
pereion ; the peduncle is stout, the fifth joint rather longer than
the fourth, but scarcely so thick ; the fiagellum is tolerably stout,
a little longer than the last joint of the peduncle, of more than
twenty-two articuli. The gnathopods and pereiopods are similar
to those of Eusirus duhius.

The length is 2oths of an inch.

Port Stephens.

IX. Leucothoe spinicarpa.

Miers (Crust, of "Alert," p. 313), following Boeck, identifies L.
articulosa with L. spinicarpa, and regards L. commensalis as a
variety of that species. L. gracilis and L. dienienenis are to be
regarded as marked varieties of the same.

X. Atylus homochir. N". s.

(Plate XIII., figs. 5-7)

The cephalon is produced into a well-developed rostrum. The
whole of the body is dorsally carinated, but in none of the segments

102 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

ones the carina become divided into teeth except on the fourth and
fifth segments of the pleon ; the fourth segment of the pleon
presents two teeth — one anterior small, and a posterior very large ;
the tooth on the fifth segment is also large, but a little smaller than
tlie larger of the two on the fourth segment. The telson is deeply
cleft, each half armed with a short spine. The superior antennae
are as long as the head and first five segments of the pereion,
very little longer than the peduncle of the inferior pair ; the first
two segments of the peduacle are nearly equal in length, but the
first is stouter than the second ; the third is small, scarcely distinct
from the articuli of the flagellum ; the flagellum is a little longer
than the peduncle, of thirteen long narrow uniform articuli.
The inferior antennse have the flagellum composed of eleven
long narrow articuli. The terminal joint of the mandibular palp
is not curved ; the toothed edge and accessory plate have each five
or six teeth. The gnathopods are sub-equal, similar, the posterior
pair with the propus a little longer ; neither merus nor carpus
develope processes ; the propus is ovate, ornamented along the
lower border with stout simple setae ; the palm is oblique. The
dactyli of the pereiopods are stout, with a slender spine on the
ventral aspect near the apex. The last pair of pleopods are large,
the rami rather more than twice the length of the protopodite,
serrated and armed with short stout setse.

Length, inclusive of antennte, f^ths of an inch.

Port Stephens.

The nearest relative of this species seems to be A. Swammerdamii
of Milne-Edwards (Bate and Westwood, Vol. 1., p. 246.)

XI. Dexamine Miersii. N. sp.

(Plate XIIL, figs. 8-12.)
The head has a short, blunt rostrum. The eyes are large, reniform.
Tlie antennte are very long and slender ; the upper pair are a little
shorter than the lower, the basal joint of the peduncle shorter than
the head, stout, the second joint nearly twice as long as the first,
narrowing towards its extremity, the third not distinguishable from

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 103

the articuli of the flagellum ; the flagellum much longer than the
peduncle, of about 30 articuli. The lower antennae are as long as
the body. The fourth joint of the peduncle is very long, longer
and rather stouter than the second joint of the superior pair, orna-
mented with numerous short fine cilia ; the fifth joint is small,
about |rd of the length of the fourth ; the flagellum is very long,
with nearly 40 articuli. The coxae are ver}'- small. The first
pair of gnathopods are a little stouter than the second, the carpus
of both is sub-ti-iangular in lateral outline ; that of the second
more elongated ; the propodes are similar, sub-triangular, with
oblique, slightly concave palm. The pereiopods are slender,
with powerful falciform dactyli and stout setae. The third
segment of the perion has a short acute tooth on each side on the
dorsal portion of its posterior border ; the fourth segment has
a strong subacute tooth. The sixth pair of pleopods are large, with
lanceolate acute rami, bordered with a few setae. The telson
is double, the halves long and narrow, slightly excavated at the
extremity. The surface is ornamented with very minute crimson
dots.

Thursday Island, Torres Straits.

XII. Megamcera suensis.
(Plate XV., figs. 1-4.)

Megammra suensis, Haswell, Proc. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. IV.,
p. 335, pi. XXL, fig. 5 ; Cat. Aust. Crust., p 260.

For a detailed description of the ordinary form of this species see
Miers, Crustacea of H.M.S. "Alert," p. 317.

I give here (pi. XV., figs. 1-4,) figures of a species from Port
Stephens which is very nearly related to Meg/amcera suensis, and
yet diff'ers from it in several particulars.

The body is slender, without spines, except on the third segment
of the pleon, which has a few minute spines on the posterior border

104 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

of its pleural portion and a row of setules on the inferior border.
The eyes are long and narrow. The superior antennae are nearly
as long as the body. The first joint of the peduncle is as long as the
head and the first segment of the pereion : the second is longer
than the first and very slender : the third is very small ; the
flagellum is as long as the peduncle, of 38 articuli ; the appendage
has 6 articuli. The inferior antennae are a little longer than the
peduncle of the superior pair, the fourth joint of the peduncle is
the longest ; the flagellum is about equal in length to the last joint
of the peduncle, and is composed of 13 articuli. The anterior
gnathopods have the carpus and propus ovate — the palm not
defined. The posterior gnathopods of the male are unequal, the
right the larger ; the merus of both, as well as those of the anterior
gnathopods are produced below into an acute tooth ; the propus is
rather oblong, rather narrower proximally than distally, twice as
long as broad ; the palm is nearly transverse, but a little oblique,
defined by a strong acute tooth and armed with two blunter teeth
towards the base of the dactylus, the upper tooth being the larger
and bifid ; the dactylus is not abruptly curved, about half the
length of the propus. The left posterior gnathopod is a little
smaller than the right, with the teeth of the propus much less
strongly marked. The posterior gnathopods of the female (?) are
also unequal — the right the larger and having the palm defined by
a short acute tooth and armed with four or five denticles ; the left
without any teeth on the propus. The last two pairs of pereiopods
are very long, nearly as long as the head and pereion, with narrow
basa. The last pair of pleopods are of immense size, as long as the
head and the first four segments of the pereion, the protopodite as
long as the last two segments of the pleon, the rami more than
twice as long as the protopodite, ovate-lanceolate, with serrated
edges. The halves of the telson are long and narrow, with a deep
terminal notch. The total length, inclusive of the antennie and the
pleopoda, is 1;^ inch.

This species bears a considerable general resemblance also to
Ifijera hamigera but the modification of the left posterior gnathopods
in this latter species is so special as to distinguish it very clearly.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A,, B.SC. 105

XIII. Megamcera Mastersii.

Megamcera Mastersii, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol.
IV., p. 265, pi. XL, fig. 1.

Megamo&ra Thomsoni, Miers, Zoology of H.M.S " Alert,"
Crustacea, p. 318, pi. XXXIV., fig. 1b.

These two forms are so closely related to one another that I
think they are scarcely to be regarded as distinct species. My
specimen of M. Mastersii agrees exactly with Miers's description
and figure, except that the spinules on the pleon are absent, and
the telson has on each division only a single notch placed near the
extremity, with a short setule.

XIV. McERA SPINOSA, McERA RUBRO-MACULATA, and MCERA

Ramsayi.

(Plate XV., figs. 5-12.)

The diff"erences on account of which the first and last of these
forms were separated from the second were mainly in the form of
the posterior gnathopoda. I find, however, on examining a series
of specimens, a perfect series of gradations in this respect from the
form figured by Stimpson to typical forms of M. spinosa and M.
Ramsayi. Some of these varieties are figured in outline in the
plate.

Mr. Chilton's M vera f estiva belongs also to this very variable
species. (Proc Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. IX., p. 1037, pi. XLVL,
fig. 2.)

XV. Xenocheira fasciata.

(Plate XVL, figs, 1-3.)

Xenocheira fasciata, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.. Vol.
IV., p. 272, pi. XI., fig. 6.

I give here an enlarged figure of the posterior gnathopoda, the
remarkable form of which distinguishes the genus.

106 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

In most of its characteristics this species shows evident relation-
ships with Microdeuteropus. In fact it is only the form and pro-
portions of the gnathopoda (figs. 1 and 2) that separate it from the
normal members of that genus, with which it is connected through
the European M. versiculatus, Spence Bate.

XVI. Haplocheira typica.

(Plate XVI., figs. 4-8.)

Haplocheira typica, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol.
IV., p. 273, pi. XI., figs. 2.

This curious species, which is not uncommon on the Coasts of
New South Wales and Victoria, was placed by me originally with
the Gammaridse ; a further examination shows that its relations are
rather with the Podocerides, the last pair of pleopods (fig. 7.)
being short, with slightly hooked spines on the outer ramus, and a
very short inner ramus with a simple pointed spine, and the telson
(fig. 8), being a small undivided plate with a strong hook at
each of its postei-o-lateral angles.

The superior antennte have small two-jointed appendages — a
feature which I overlooked in my first examination. The flagellum
of the inferior antennae has three distinct joints. The anterior
gnathopods (tig. 4) might be described as very imperfectly sub-
cheliform — the propus having a small lobe at the base of the
dactylus.

The nearest ally of the genus seems to be Coropliium, and C.
Lendenfeldi of Chilton (Trans. N. Z. Inst.. Vol. XVI., p. 260, pi.
XXL, figs. 1, a. to e.) is probably this species.

XVII. Harmonia crassipes.
(Plate XVI., fig. 9.)

Harmonia, crassipes, Haswell, Proc. Linn, Soc, N.S.W., Vol.
IV., p. 330, pi. XIX, tig. 3.

The relations of this sjiecies were not correctly expressed by the
position in which it was placed in the " Catalogue of Australian

BY WILLI A.M A. IIASWELL, M.A,, B.SC. 107

Crustacea." It is a member of the family Corophiidce, distin-
guished from Amphithoe, Suuamphithoe and JVcenia, among other
points, by tlie presence of an appendage on the superior antennae,
from Cerapus by the biramoas character of the posterior pleopoda,
and from Podowrus by the multi-articnlate flagella of both pairs of
antennae. The genus may be defined as follows : — Coxge not so
deep as the corresponding segments ; antennae both with multi-
articulate flagella, the superior pair with an appendage. Mandibles
palpigeroi:;s. Maxillipedes unguiculate, sub-pediform, with a squam-
iform process on the basos only. Gnaihopods sub-chelate, unequal,
posterior pair very large. Posterior pleopods biramous, the outer
ramus with slightly hooked spines and sti-aight hairs, the inner
with straight hairs only. Telson single, long, pointed.

Harmonia crassipes has been found by Mr. Chilton in New
Zealand.

XYIII. Cyrtophium.

Of the Australian species which I have referred provisionally to
this genus, only one — viz., C minutum — really belongs to Dana's
genus Cyrtophium as defined by Spence Bate (Cat. Amphip., p.
273); G. dentatum, together with two species to be. described below,
differs from it in the superior antenna) having a short, multi-
articulate flagellum and a well-developed secondary appendage. C.
hystrix differs from the type species of Cyrtophium in the presence
of only five segments in the pleon. I gather from a remark made by
Spence Bate, (British Sessile-eyed Crustacea, p. 483) that the genus
Lcematophilus of Bruzelius is distinguished from Cyrtophium by
the absence of the second last pair of pleopods, and have pro-
visionally removed C. hystrix to that genus. For the species with
multi-articulate flagella and appendages to the superior antennae I
propose the name of Dexiocerella. Connecting them with the
typical species is C. parasiticum, which has the flagellum of the
lower antennae well developed and indistinctly multi-articulate,
but has no appendage to the superior antennae.

108 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

Cyrtophium PARASITICUM.

(Plate XVJI., figs. 1-7.)

Cyrtophmm parasiticum, Haswell, Proc. Linn., Soc, N.S.W.,
Vol. IV., p. 274, pi. XII., fig. 1. Cat. Aust. Crust., p. 271.

The superior antennje of this species are nearly as long as the
head and pei'eion ; the first joint of the peduncle is a little shorter
than the head and stout, the second more than twice as long,
narrower, the third a little shorter and narrower than the second ;
the flagellum is equal in length tc the last joint of the peduncle,
composed of four joints, the first more than half the length of the
whole flagellum, the others small. The lower antennae are very
large, as long as the head and body, and are very stout ; the fifth
segment of the peduncle is a little longer than the fourth ; the
flagellum is a little more than half the length of the fifth segment
of the peduncle, and exhibits very slight traces of division into
nine joints ; the extremity is ornamented with a fasciculus of
short spines which ai'e very slightly bent or hooked at the ends.
The anterior gnathopods have the propus ovate, the palm even,
slightly convex, sepai'ated off from the rest of the border by being
more prominent. The posterior gnathopods are large ; neither
merus nor carpus have tooth-like processes ; the propus is narrow,
ovate, constricted proximally ; the palm with a prominent acute
tooth at its proximaj end (the middle of the propus), separated by
a deep excavation from the distal portion, which is minutely denti-
culated ; the dactylus is about three-fourths of the length of the
propus. The protopodite of the fourth pair of pleopoda projects
beyond the extremity of the telson ; the rami are long and narrow,
the outer being much shorter than the inner, the inner is obscurely
serrated, and both are tipped with straight spines. The fifth
segment has no appendages.

The posterior gnathopoda of male specimens vary within certain
limits, the palmar tooth being more or less prominent, and the
propus being sometimes bordered with long hairs, sometimes not

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 109

The female differs from the male (1) in having the body broader
(2) in the form of the posterior gnathopoda. (Figs. G and 7.)

Dexiocerella dentata.
(Plate XVII, figs. 8-12.)

CyrtopJiium dentatum, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol.
IV, p. 342, pi. XXIL, fig. 5. Cat. Aust. Crust., p. 272.

In this species the superior antennse have a well-formed flagellum
of six to eight articuli, and an appendage consisting of sevei'al
coalescent joints ; they are much smaller than the inferior pair,
the flagellum of which has four segments — the last rudimentary.
The propodes of the posterior gnathopods have near the base of
the dactylos a conical tooth and a denticulated lobe ; these are
very small in specimens from Port Jackson, but much larger in
specimens from Victoria ; the merus, carpus and propus are
densely clothed with pinnate hairs.

The females differ from the males in having the processes of the
pleonal segment less prominent, the inferior antennse shorter, and
the posterior gnathopoda much smaller, with the palm of the propus
unarmed. These characteristics aie much more strongly marked
in young females, in which the dorsal processes may be entirely
absent and the inferior antennae very little longer than the superior.

Cyrtophium minutum.

(Plate XVIII., figs 1-5 and fig. 9.)

Cyrtophium minutum^ Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.,
Vol. IV, p. 343, pi. XXIL, tig. 6.

In this species the antennse are subequal, the superior pair
having no appendage ; the flagellum of the superior pair contains
seven joints — the first four of these being cemented into one piece
and the next thi-ee into another.

UO NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

L^MATOPHILUS HYSTRIX.

Cyrtofhium hystrix, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol.
v., p. 104, pi. YII., fig. 3.

In this remarkable little species there are only five segments in
the pleon and only five pairs of appendages. The antennae are
subequal and the superior pair have no appendage.

Dexiocerella lobata. N. sp.

(Plate XVIIL, figs. 6-8.)

The first four segments are produced in the middle dorsal line
into elevations which have the appearance, when looked at laterally,
of rounded lobes. The superior antennae are as long as the head
and pereion ; the first joint of the pedunole is straight, nearly as
long as the head, the second is the longest and slender, the third
is rather shorter and narrower than the second ; the flagellum is a
little longer than the last segment of the peduncle, five-jointed ;
there is a short accessory appendage ; both peduncle and flagellum
are ornamented with delicate hairs. The inferior antennse are as
long as the body, stout, the third joint of the peduncle is short and
thick, the fourth three times as long, narrow proximally, broader
distally, slightly bent ; the fifth is considerably longer than the
fourth and a little narrower, also slightly curved ; the flagellum is
about half the length of the last segment of the peduncle, consisting
of three joints, the first long, the second scarcely a third of the
length of the first, the last rudimentary. The anterior gnathopoda
are scarcely to be distinguished from those of C. minutum. The
posterior gnathopoda are very large, the merus pi-oduced below
into a tooth-like process ; the propus is large, irregularly ovoid,
the greatest length not twice the greatest breadth, the palm defined
by a strong tooth, with, near the base of the dactyl us, a low denticu-
lated lobe and a conical tooth. The pereiopoda are lost. The
pleopoda and telson are as in D. dentata. The length, inclusive
of antennae, is three-tenths of an inch.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. Ill

The single specimen was dredged off Broughton Islands near
Port Stephens, on the coast of New South Wales.

DeXIOCERELLA LiEVIS. N. sp.

(Plate XVIII., figs. 10-12.)

None of the segments are dorsally produced. The superior
antennae are as long as the cephalon and pereion ; the basal joint of
the peduncle is the shortest, scai'cely so long as the head ; the second
joint twice as long as the first ; the third a little longer than the
second ; both the second and third joints with serrations below ;
the fiagellum is about the length of the last segment of the
peduncle, of five articuli, each ornamented below with a few
slender setse, the appendage very small, one-jointed. The inferior
antennse are longer than the superior, nearly as long as the whole
body ; the peduncle is very stout, the third joint shorter than the
fourth and fifth ; the fifth the longest, as long as the third and
fourth together ; the fiagellum is half the length of the last joint of
the peduncle, with three indistinct articulations. The second pair
of gnathopods are large ; the carpus is ti'iangulate, produced below
and distally into a short tooth ; the propus is regularly ovate,
the palm convex, minutely serrulate, with two low, minutely
serrulate lobes near the base of the dactylus, defined by a pair of
obscure denticles, each tipped with a strong spine, bordered
laterally with two rows of setae, each set in a minute denticle ;
the dactylus is three-fourths of the length of the propus. The
pereiopoda ai"e stout, with very large falciform dactyli. The
length (including the antennse) is fgths of an inch.
Port Molle, among sea-weed.

XIX. Proto Nov^-Hollandi^.

(Plate XVIIL, figs. 13-16.)

Proto Novce Hollandice, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.,
Vol IV., p. 275., pi. XII., fig. 3, and "Revision of the
Australian Laemodipoda," Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. IX.,
p. 993.

112 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

The following may be added to the original description. There
are only seven elongated narrow joints in the flagellum of the
superior antennte, and only three in that of the inferior pair. The
propodes of the secon<l pair of legs are greatly dilated transversely
(figs. 13-15), the palm is an oval, slightly concave area along
the axis of which the dactyl as lies with three teeth, two lateral and
one mesial, at its distal end.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Plate X.
Fig. L — Posterior gnathopod of Talitrus sylvaticus.
Fig. 2. — Head and auteiinaj of Allorchestes crassicornis.
Fig. 3. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.
Fig. 4. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 5. — " Pahn " of the same appendage, more highly magnified.
Fig. 6. — Head and antennae of Allorchestes longicornis.
Fig. 7- — Anterior gnathopod of the same.
Fig. 8. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.
Fig. 9. —Head and antenna? of Allorchestes riqncola.
Fig. 10. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.
Fig. 12. — " Palm " of the same appendage.

Plate XL

Fig. 1. — Allorchestes niger, antemife and head.

Fig. 2. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 3. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 4. — Antennas of Neobule algicola.

Fig. 5. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 6. — ^Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 7. — Stegocephalus Icitus.

Fig. 8. — Superior antennse of the same.

Fig. 9. — Inferior antennte of the same.

Fig. 10. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 11. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 12. — Telsou of the same.

Plate XII.
Fig. 1.— Distal end of anterior gnathopod of Lysianassa [Anonyx) nitens.
Fig. 2. — Dactylus and " palm " of the same.
Fig. 3. — Postei'ior gnathopod of Lysianassa australiensis.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 113

Fig. 4. — Telson of the same.

Fig. 5. — Head of Lysianassa affinis.

Fig. 6. — Telson of the same.

Fig. 7. — Antennaj of AmpeUsca australis. Variety from Port Denison.

Fig. 8. — Pereiopod of the third pair of the same.

Fig. 9. — Pereiopod of the fourtli pair of the same.

Fig. 10. — Pereiopod of the fifth pair of the same.

Fig. 11. — Superior antennse of AmpeUsca australis. Variety from Port

Jackson .
Fig. 12. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.
Fig. 13. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.
Fig. 14. — Pereiopod of the third pair of the same.
Fig. 15. — Pereiopod of the fourth pair of the same.
Fig. 16. — Pereiopod of the fifth pair of the same.

Plate XIII.

Fig. 1. — Antenme of AmjKlisca australis. Specimen fi'om Port Stephens.

Fig. 2. — Extremity of pereiopod of the third pair of the same.

Fig. 3. — Basal joints of pereiopod of the fifth pair of the same.

Fig. 4. — Basal joints of third pereiopod of Ampelisca australis. Variety

from Port Jackson.

Fig. 5. — Anterior gnathopod of Atylus homochir.

Fig. 6. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 7. — Telson of the same.

Fig. 8. — Dexamine Miersii.

Fig. 9.— Anterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 10. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 11. — Extremity of pereiopod of the same.

Fig. 12. — Sixth pleopod of the same.

Plate XIV.

Fig. 1. — Eusirtis chibius. Var,

Fig. 2. — Eusirus affinis.

Fig. 3. — Anterior gnathopoda of the same.

Fig. 4. — Posterior gnathopoda of the same.

Plate XV.

Fig. 1. — Meijamotra suensis. Var?
Fig. 2. — Anterior gnathopod of the same. -
Fig. 3. — Posterior gnathopod of male of the same.
Fig. 4. — Posterior gnathopod of the female.

Figs. 5-12. — Various forms of the posterior gnathopod of Moira rubro-
maculata.

114 NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN AMPHIPODA,

Plate XVI.

Fig. 1. — Anterior gnathopod of Xenocheira fasciata.

Fig. 2. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 3.— Extremity of the pleon of the same.

Fig. 4. — End of anterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 5. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 6. — Extremity of lower antennas of the same.

Fig. 7. — Extremity of pleon of Haplocheira typica.

Fig. 8. — Telson of the same.

Fig. 9. — Posterior extremity of the pleon of Harmonia crassipes.

Plate XVII.

Fig. 1. — Superior antennas of GyrtopJiium 'parasitmim.

Fig. 2. — Inferior antennte of the same.

Fig. 3. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 4. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 5. — Another form of the same appendage.

Fig. 6. — Anterior gnathopod of the female.

Fig, 7. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 8. — Superior antenna of Dexiocerella dentata.

Fig. 9. — Inferior antennas of the same.

Fig. 10. — Posterior gnathopod of male of the same.

Fig. 1 1 . — Posterior gnathopod of female of the same.

Fig. 12. — Telson and posterior pleopods of the same.

Plate XVIII.

Fig. 1. — Superior antennae of Cyrtophmm minufum.

Fig. 2. — Inferior antenna of the same .

Fig. 3. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 4. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 5. — Telson and posterior pleopods of the same.

Fig. 6. — Superior antenna of Dexiocerella lohata.

Fig. 7. — Inferior antenna of the same.

Fig. 8. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 9. — Posterior gnathopod of female of Cyrtophium uninutum. Var.

Fig. 10. — Antennae of Dexiocerella loivis.

Fig. 11. — Anterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 12. — Posterior gnathopod of the same.

Fig. 13. — Posterior gnathopod of Proto Novce-Hollandice, seen from the side.

Fig. 14. — Ventral view of the same.

Fig. 15. — Dorsal view of the same.

Fig. 16. — Posterior gnathopod of young specimen of the same species.

EEVISION OF THE TOXOGLOSSATE MOLLUSCA OF
NEW ZEALAND.

By Captain F. W. Button, F.G.S., &c.

In the present list I have omitted the following species as either
not belonging to New Zealand or not belonging to this group of
MoUusca.

distans, Hwass. Inhabits New Caledonia and Polynesia.

Conus zealandicus, Hutton. Inhabits Australia. C. aplustre
Reeve.

DrilUa cemula, Angas. Inhabits New South Wales.

Lacheeis sulcata, Hutton. Probably a Columhella.

Family PleurotomidjE.

Pleurotoma engonia. Watson, Jour. Lin. Soc. of London, Vol.

XV., p. 405 (1881).

Habitat.— DredigQdi by H.M.S. Challenger— N.E. of New Zea-
land ; also at Japan.

This is rather a large species (IJ inch in length) belonging to
the subgenus Genota. It is keeled, without any longitudinal ribs,
but with small broadish spine threads. .

Pleurotoma neozelanica. E. A. Smith, Ann. Mag. of Nat. Hist.,
1877, Vol. XIX., p. 492 ; DrilUa cheesemani, Hutton, Jour,
de Conch., 1878, p. 16.

116 REVISION OF THE TOXOGLOSSATB MOLLUSCA OF N.Z.,

Habitat. — Avickland,

Pleurotoma albula. Hutton, Cat. Marine Moll, of New Zealand,
Wellington, 1873, p, 12. P. antipodum, E. A. Smith, Ann.
and Mag of Nat. Hist., 1877, Vol. XIX., p. 491.

nabitat. — Throughout New Zealand.

Pleurotoma ischna. Watson, Jour. Lin. Soc. of London, Vol,
XV., p. 403 (1881).

Habitat. —Dredged, by H.M.S. Challenger, N.E. of New Zealand.

This species seems to differ from the last in being less deeply
sculptured. Mr, Watson places it in the subgenus Surcula.

Drillia C?) maorum. E. a. Smith, Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist.,
1877, Vol. 19, p, 497. P. Buchanani et P. Trailli, Hutton,
Manual of New Zealand Mollusca, 1880, p. 42 ; [not P.
Buchanani, Hutton, Cat. Tertiary Moll, of New Zealand,
1873, p. 4]. D. Trailli, Tryon, Man. Conch., Vol., VI., p,
206, pi. 34, fig. 90.

Habitat. — Throughout New Zealand.

This species is distinguished from P. Buchanani by having the
suture slightly margined, and the canal shorter.

Drillia bulbacea. Watson, Jour, Lin. Soc. of London, Vol.
XV., p. 418 (1881),

Habitat. — Dredged by H.M.S. Challenger, N.E. of New
Zealand.

Hardly, I think, to be distinguished from the last species.

Drillia (Vj am^ena. E. A. Smith, Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist.,
1884, Vol. XIV,, p. 318.

Habitat. — I much doubt whether this species really inhabits
New Zealand, I have never seen it.

BY CAPTAIN F. W. BUTTON, P.G.S., &C. 117

Drillia neozelanica. Conch. Icon. f. 143 (18 43); Tryon, Man.
Conch., Vol. VI., p. 184, pi. 12, f. 44 (bad). P. rosea, Quoy
and Gaimard, Voy. Astrelabe, Zool II., p. 524, pi. 35, f.
10-11 (1833), [not of Sowerb}]. F. Quoyi, Deshayes [not
of Desmoulins],

Habitat. — Throughout New Zealand.

Drillia gypsata. Watson, Jour. Linn. Soc. of London, Vol.
XV., p. 413 (1881).

HaUtat.—TfveAgedi by H.M.S. Challenger, N.E. of New
Zealand.

Drillia LtEVIS. Hutton, Cat. Mai-ine Moll, of New Zealand,
p. 12 (1873).
Habitat — Foveaux Straits,
Much like D. alabaster (Reeve), but without any spinal grooves.

Drillia ula, "Watson, Jour. Lin. Soc. of London, Vol. XV.,
p. 420 (1881).

Habitat. — Dredged by H.M.S. Challenger, N.E. of New Zealand.

Drillia protensa, Hutton (Daphnella). Trans., New Zealand
Institute, Vol. XVII, p. — (1885). D. Awamoaensis, Hutton,
Trans. New Zealand Institute, Vol. XV., p. 131; Tryon,
Man. Conch., Vol. VL, p. 208, pi. 12, f. 25, [not P. Awa-
moaensis, Hutton, Cat. Tert, Moll, of N.Z., p. 4].

Habitat. — Waiwera, near Auckland.

Mangilia Goodingii, E. a. Smith, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist,,
(1884), Vol 14, p, 320,

Habitat. — I much doubt whether this species inhabits New
Zealand. I have never seen it.

118 REVISION OF THE TOXOGLOSSATE MOLLUSCA OF N.Z.

Clathurella Sinclairii, E. a. Smith, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.
(1884), Vol. 14, p. 320 (Mangilia'?) ; Defranchia luteo-fmciata,
Man. New Zealand MuUusca (1880), p. 45, [not of Reeve].

Hahitat. — Throughout New Zealand, and at the Chatham Islands.

Daphnella lymneiformis, Kiener, Icon. Pleurotoma, p. 62, Taf.
22, f. 3 ; Tryon, Man. Conch., Vol. VI., p. 300, pi. 25,
f. CO; L. cancellata, Hutton, Jour, de Conch. (1878), p. 15.

Hahitat. — Auckland. Found also in Australia.

Family. TEREBRlDiE.

Terebra tristis, Deshayes, Pro. Zool. Soc. (1859), p. 306 ; Reeve,
Conch. Icon. f. 102 ; Tryon, Man. Conch., Vol. VII., p. 36,
pi. 10, f. 100 ; Acus Kirki, Hutton, Man., New Zealand,
Moll., p. 42 ; Tarehra antarctica, E. A. Smith, M.S.S.

Habitat. — Throughout New Zealand ; also at Japan.

NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF SOME RARE PORT
JACKSON FISHES.

By J, Douglas-Ogilby,
Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

I offer no apology for placing before you the following original
descriptions of fishes taken within the limits of Port Jackson during
the last two months, because in many cases — as for instance in
that of Plectropoma nigro-ruhrum — the published descriptions
available for the ordinary student are so meagre as to make the
determination of the species a matter of difficulty, if not of
impossibility ; and because when immistakable descriptions are
given in an accessible publication, the danger of redescription
under a new name is greatly reduced, and thus we may reasonably
hope to keep the synonymy of our Australian fishes within proper
limits.

The following descriptions have also the advantage of having
been taken from newly caught examples, and are therefore mox'e
likely to be correct, both as regards the comparative measurements,
and more especially the coloration, which in every case, where
pi-acticable, has been jotted dovvn immediately on the removal of
the fish from the water.

Plectropoma nigro-rubrum. Cuv. and Val.

D. 10/18. A. 3/8. V. 1/5. P.. 13. L. lat. G5. L. trans.
4/21. Ccec. Pyl. 8.

Length of head 2|, of caudal fin 5§, height of body Zl in the
total length. Diameter of eye ^ of the length of head ; inter-
orbital space 5 of diameter of eye. Hinder limb of prseoper-
culum emarginate, serrated, the denticulations in the notch

120 NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS OP SOME PORT JACKSON FISHES,

stronger than those at either side ; those at the angle small. Two
spines on the lower limb, of equal size, and distant one from the
other. Two flattened opercular spines, of which the upper is the
larger. The posterior extremity of the maxillary extends to
beneath the hinder margin of the orbit. Lower jaw the longer ;
it has three pairs of canines at its front angles, two pairs behind ;
upper jaw with two pairs on the angles of inter-maxillary; they
but little exceed the ordinary teeth in length. Dorsal spines a
little lower than the rays, increasing in length to the fourth, which
is the longest, g of the body below it ; the fin is deeply notched,
the last spine being its own length shorter than the first i-ay.
Second anal spine very strong, | of the longest ray, and | of the
body above it. Caudal slightly rounded.

Colors red ; four broad black transverse bands on the body ;
the first commencing between the fifth and seventh dorsal spines,
and terminating a short distance in front of the vent ; the second
between the anterior rays of the soft dorsal and anal ; the third
from the last dorsal rays to immediately behind the anal ; and the
fourth in front of the base of the caudal : the bands are of equal
breadth with the interspaces. The head and nape are suffused
with dusky blotches, which almost form an irregular longitudinal
band on the occiput. The soft posterior lobe of the operculum
broadly margined with gold. Fins bright scarlet, all except the
ventrals blotched with dull yellow.

Our specimen which measures a little more than 10 inches, is a
female, and has the ova, which are small and numerous, in a
forward stage of development. The stomach contained the
partially digested remains of an Atherina. It was caught in Port
Jackson on the 20th o^ February.

With regai'd to the determination of our example as the " Plec-
tropome rouge et noir " of Cuvier and Valenciennes, it should be
noticed that these authors mention 5 bands on the sides, as also do
Quoy and Gaimard, who figure their specimen in the " Voyage de
1' Astrolabe "; nor does either figure or description shew anything
of the dark markings on the head, so conspicuous in our form ;
and in addition to these distinctions in color, the spines on the

BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 121

lower limb of the prpeoperculum are differently situated, and we
have also an extra ray in the dorsal. The examples described by
the authors quoted above having been obtained in Western
Australia, it is probable that this form now under consideration
is an eastern representative, which, should the differences in form,
color and locality prove constant, would have to be raised to the
rank of a local race or subspecies. A specimen in the Macleay
Museum appears to agree with ours.

Early in the month I obtained by the trawl a fine example .of
Callionymus calcaraius, Macleay, and having had an opportunity
of examining the type specimens, 1 wish to correct a typographical
error which has crept into the original description, and is likely to
create difficulty in future. Mr. Macleay says, speaking of the
prseopercular spine, " strong, flat, with a strong spur on the jiosterior
half of the outer side pointing backwards, and three on the inner
side pointing inwards and hackivards " (1). I find that the spine is
bent inwards at the tip, and armed on the inside with three, some-
times four, additional spinules, all of which are directed forwards
as also is a stout straight spinule, which springs from the outside
angle of the spine in its anterior half ; it is not nearly so long as
the diameter of the eye ; the anal is pure white, both rays and
webs. My fish measures 8f inches, which is much longer than any
of the type specimens.

On the 13th ultimo we obtained in the trawl up Middle
Harbour a magnificent Ammotretis, a genus of which very few
individual examples are known ; as the lateral line is distinctly
curved this cannot be Dr. Gunther's species from Tasmania, from
which it also differs in its greater depth, smaller head and longer
snout. It is probable that the species described by Mr. Macleay
as A. zonatus is identical with our fish, the banded appearance,
which induced him to give it the specific name, having been caused
by contact, when dying, with some foreign stibstance, and as the
name " zonatus " is unsuitable and misleading, I would suggest
that this fine species should be re-named Macleayi in honour of

(1) In my specimen, and in one of Mr. Macleay's types, there are thi'ee
inner spinules on one side and four on the other.

•<P[

122 NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS OP SOME PORT JACKSON FISHES,

our distinguished Secretaiy, on whose fete-day it was obtained,
and who originally described it. The following is a description of
the specimen, which measured 10|^ inches.

Ammotretis Macleayi.
D. 80. A. 50. P. 12. V. dext. 7, sin. 4. L. lat. 87.
Length of head 41, depth of body If^ in the total length. Eyes

on the same level, divided by a narrow
diameter, which is i^ in the length of head, and f of the snout.
The maxillary ends some distance in front of the eye. Teeth in
villiform bands on the blind side only. Dorsal fin commences on
the tip of the rostral appendage, and is not continued to the base
of the caudal : the longest rays are behind the middle of the fin,
opposite and equal to the longest anal rays and scarcely ^ of the
body below them. The anterior rays are almost free. The base
of the left ventral is only J of that of the right, which is
continiious with the anal. Pectorals of equal dimensions. Caudal
slightly rounded, equal to the length of the head. Scales ctenoid,
covering the entire head and extending up the fin rays. Lateral
line with a decided, though slight, curve above the pectoral fin,

Eich olive brown, with a few indistinct darker blotches. White
beneath, tip of left ventral black.

On the 13th of last month we received from Inspector Seymour
an Exocoetus taken in the neighbourhood of the harbour. It
belongs to the division in which the ventral fins extend beyond
the origin of the anal, and which is without the central barbel at
the symphisis of the lower jaw, and is closely allied to the
Exocmtus speculiger of Cuv. and Val., from which it difiers in
the point of origin of the anal fin. It difi"ers from nigricans, to
which also it is closely allied, in the position of the ventrals,
number of dorsal and anal rays, and pattern of coloration. The
example is a male, with the milt very slightly developed, and
measures 15 J inches. I propose to cal! this species melanocercus
in reference to the black caudal.

BY J. DOUGLAS-OGILBY. 123

EXOCCETUS MELANOCERCUS. Nov. Sp.

D. 13. A. 11. V. 6. P. 14.

Length of head 6, of caudal fin 4, height of body 8^ in the
total length. Diameter of eye equal to snout, ^ of interorbital
space which is concave, and fg of the head. Greatest height of
head equals its length anterior to hind margin of orbit. Upper
surface of head flattened, as is also that of the body, almost as faras
the dorsal fin. Snout obtuse ; lower jaw slightly the longer. Max-
illary almost hidden by prseorbital when the mouth is closed. Teeth
in the jaw minute, in villiform bands. Anterior dorsal rays 5 of
the length of the head. Anal fin commences opposite the
middle of the dorsal. Pectorals, which are If in total length, all
but extend to the rudimentary rays of the caudal. The ventrals
are inserted considerably nearer to the root of the caudal than to
the hinder margin of the orbit, and reach almost to the end of the
base of the anal ; they are ^ of the total length, 1^ of that of the
head, and equal to the lower lobe of the caudal which is much the
longer There are about 30 series of scales between the occiput
and the dorsal fins, and 7 between the origin of the dorsal and
the lateral line.

Dai-k steel blue above, becoming lighter on the sides and
beneath ; inferior caudal portion of the body, opercular and man-
dibulary regions silvery ; abdominal region grey, with the margins
of the scales darker. Dorsal and pectoral fins dusky, the latter
with a large white blotch at its base inferioriy. Ventrals with
the central rays dark ; anal white ; caudal black.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Eatte exhibited a Jaw Bone of a Devonian Fish from
New South Wales, pi'obably Asterolepis, (Australian Museum as
well as the following :) — A Silicified Fossil Shell, apparently allied
to Worthenia. A Detached Siphon of an Orthoceras. There is

124 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

doubt about this specimen, as it I'esembles very much the
rare sub-genus Endoceras, which however, is alower silurian fossil,
whilst the fossil exhibited comes from the same limestone beds as
Asterolepis, and is therefore Devonian. He also exhibited
drawings of the above specimens, of the large Crioceras Australe
(Chas. Moore), from the Neocomian of Northern Queensland,
a sketch ot its Septa, and Drawings of two Species of Sanguino-
lites C?) from New Caledonia, probably Carboniferous. (From the
collection of Rev. F. Monrouzier, Noumea. Casts in the A.us-
tralian iMuseum.)

Dr. R. von Lendenfeld exhibited two Rock Specimens from the
Australian Alps. One formed part of the summit of Mount
Kosciusco, and the other was taken from the summit rocks of
Mount Townsend, the highest mountain in Australia. The former
is a very coarse grained dark colored granite, the latter possesses the
appearance of gneiss ; although it is also granite of a very light
colour.

Dr. R. von Lendenfeld also exhibited specimens of Cypress Pine,
( Frenelarohusta), which had been affected by the larva of Diadoxus
erifthrurus. Extensive tracts of pine scrub have been devastated by
this insect, which may thus render great services to the settlers in
the back country. A living specimen of the larva, a grub an inch
and a half long, was also exhibited.

Mr. Ogilby exhibited the Fishes referred to in his paper.

Mr. E. P. Ramsay exhibited the following rare birds : — Scen-
opeus dentirostris, Ramsay, and a new sp. of Collyriocincla,
obtained by Mr. Boyer Bower at Cairns, Queensland ; also a fine
specimen of Lophorina superha from the Astrolabe Ranges, in New
Guinea.

Also the anterior portion of the skull containing the pre-
maxillaries and two front incisors complete of a new extinct
marsupial, allied to the wombat, but quite distinct from the
genus Phascolomys. The portion exhibited indicated an animal
at least twice the size of any known fossil or recent species. The
two upper incisors ai'e worn away in a similar oblique manner to
that exhibited in the aiew genus Sceparnodon.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 125

Mr. Ramsay read the following letter from Sir Richard Owen: —

" Sheen Lodge, Richmond Park, East Sheen, Surrey,

26th December 188^.
" My Dear Ramsay,

" Your letter of December Ist. 1884, with the photographs of
your grand old marsupial carnivore of the Wellington Caves, was
very welcome'; especially so would be any skeletal indication of
the affinities of your Sceparnodon, of which I hope you have
received a copy, together with those of my last investigations of
the generative economy of the Monotremes. I had furnished the
notes and drawings of the larger uterine ova of Echidna, received
subsequently to the smaller ones, early in 1883 ; but the closing
labours of Nat. Hist. Museum in that year, led to the postpone-
ment of publication until the result of Caldwell's researches wei-e
flashed over to us. And what a subject of cogitation is the egg-
laying of milk-giving mammals, bodily represented by our hedge-
hogs and otters at home ! What pains and arrangements are
taken by the feathered warm-blooded kinds to ensure safe hatching
of these eggs ! ! One really shall want satisfactory proof of a
like provision by Platypus of securing the requisite heat for
the evolution of the embryo in its excluded eggs. (1) It
may be an easier matter for the more terrestrial spiny mono-
treme. I suppose a series of the " Philosophical Transactions
of the Royal Society " may exist in Sydney. In 1832 Geoffroy
St. Hilaire had a majority in favour of the abdominal sub-cutaneous
glands 7iot being milk-2)rodiicers ; the paper in the Phil. Trans, of
that year, p. 537, was accepted as proof of Meekel's opinion ; and
that led to the inference of the viviparity, or at any rate ovo-
viviparity of such sucklers. The subsequent discovery of intra-
uterine development in the kangaroo, minus placental attachment,

(1) Baron Maclay's recent experiments show the heat of Platyjms to be
from 24° "5 C. to 25° 2 C, and that of Echidna averaging 28° C. (82° •4F.),
— E. P. R.

126 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

and 2)lus premature birth or transfer to the pouch, weighed further
in support of the hypothesis that the Monotremes might be ova-
vivaparous in some such fashion.

" However when I got the female Echidna with an ovum in each
uterus enlarged to the size shewn in my last paper, but with no
such advance of embryonal development as I had deemed possible
in the case of the smaller ova, I regarded the question as settled,
and was much gratified to learn that eggs had been found in the
nest by so skilled an observer as Caldwell.

" I send with pleasure by the same post which takes this a copy of
Sceparnodon. I know of no extinct Australian form, of which a
skeleton, or any instructive part of the dental series, or of the
osteology, would be more acceptable than of your Sceparnodon.

"You can commu.nicate any matter referred to in this letter to
our Associates in the Royal and Linnean Societies of Sydney.
" Believe me, with every good wish,

" Sincerely yours,

"Richard Owen."

Mr. Pedley exhibited a Fungus occurring on the leaves of the
peach trees over the district extending from Prospect to Camden.
It is of the order Ascomycetes, and lodges exclusively on the
lower side of the leaf, the mycelium choking up the stomata,
and thus destroying the vitality of the plant.

Mr. Edelfelt exhibited a bag formed of fibre obtained from a
species of Morus (?) by the natives of New Guinea near the
Owen Stanley Range, and described the mode of its preparation.

P.L.S. Vol.10.

Pl. I.

>^

:^

^

M, . ,

,-^_A*-

-^

ts

^fe:;>

^9

3.

^d.

V. ZienienfelaL del.

S. Sed^fieU Uth.

•»-i *■ \ ' <* -yfan»!5" v^V ,

[

ll

Ltnine.U d.1

3

P.L.S. Vol 10.

Pl.4.

■'^- sfses.

■«S»? ■<«;? ^1^'

^

^

#

LenienfeU del.

S Sei^fteU lltk

p. L.S. Vol.10.

Pl. 5.

1

/ "^\ %. ^\

/^^*t^ ''

^ ^^ * * ^^

f* ^* '^^ ^

1 i^^v ^F

. « jf- ^

i^ ^ .

^^ # * s ^

'a * * " ; '

1/ ^ ^^ " ^ ^^^f$

1V

^

*

-' ^.2^3^

-A

V. LencUnfeU del.

t^^^

5'. Sed^fieU hih.

P.L.S. Vol. 10.

Pl.6.

V. Zendenfeli del.

S. Sed/teld litk.

m

THE WILKINSON GLACIER fram W TOWNSEND.
probabU sj^apt aid, si^t a,i tht Ume af tkt 6in£ml period.

from. W TOWNSEND
January II'' /m

P.L.S. Vol 10.

Pl. 9.

5.^'

6.-I-

F. Eatie cUl.

S. SedyrieU lith.

P.L.S. Vol 10.

Pl. 10.

!4^^..j7; ^e/.

5. SedgfteU tifh.

P.L.S.VoL 10.

Pl. II

W.A.H. del.

S. Sed^ field lltk.

PL. S. Vol 10.

Pl. 12.

W.A.H.del.

S -SecLgfieU Uth.

PL.S. Vol 10.

Pl. 13.

W. AH. del.

S. SedofteU- litl.

P.L.S Vol 10.

Pl. I4-.

.^^'

i/ii

-^^

W.A.If. del.

S. SeAqfieU Litk.

P.L.S. Vol 10.

Pl. 15.

W. A . H. del .

S. SedgfieU tttk.

P.L.S. Vol 10.

Pl. 16.

W.A..H. del.

S. Sedoftdd. Utk.

P.L.S. Vol 10,

Pl . 17.

W.A.M.d.el

P.LS. Vol 10,

Pl. 18.

W.A. H. del

S. SeifUU llik.

WEDNESDAY, 29th APRIL, 1885.

Dr. James C. Cox, F.L.S., Vice-President, in the chair.

MEMBERS ELECTED.

The Rev. George Brown, Darlinghurst ; W. J. Weston, Esq.,
" Oriel ton," Woollahra ; T. H. Bowyer Bower, Esq., 21 Collingham
Road, S. Kensington, London.

DONATIONS.

" Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania,"
1884. From the Society.

" Remarks on a small collection of Clavicorn Coleoptera, from
Borneo, with description of new Species." " Notes on the life
history of Porphyrasjns tristis, a palm-infesting Cassida, from
Brazil." " Description of two new species of Nitidulidce, from
Sumatra.'' " New Species of the Genus Zephronia, from Borneo."
" Description of an African Coleopterous genus Helota, Macleay."
" Additional notes on the Genus Helota, Macleay." " Description
of two larvae, and new genera, and species of Clavicorn Coleop-
tera." From the Author, A. Sidney OllifF, Esq.

"Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society," London. Vol.
v., Part I. From the Society.

"Recherches sur I'evolution des Araignees," Claparede.
" Beobachtungen liber Anatomie und Entwicklungsgeschichte
Wii-belloser Thiere," Claparede. From William Macleay, F.L.S., &c.

" Transactions, Proceedings, and Report of the Royal Society of
S. Australia." Vol. VIL, 1884. From the Society.

"Report of the Auckland Institute and Museum for 1884."
From the Directors.

•' Zoologischer Anzeiger." Nos. 188,189,190. 1885. From
the Editor.
9

128

DONATIONS.

"Bulletin de la Societe d' etudes scientifiques d' Angers," 1st.
and 2nd Fascicules, 1880. From the Society.

"Journal of the New York Microscopical Society." Vol. L,
No. 2, February, 188-5. From the Society.

" Science." Vol. V, Nos. lOG-109. From the Editor.

" Annual Report of the Historical and Scientific Society of
Manitoba, 1884 ;" also Parts 12-18. From the Society.

" Proceedings of the Geographical Society of Australasia." 1st.
Session, 1883-4, Vol. I. From the Society.

" Memoires de I'Academie Imperiale des Sciences de St.
Petersburg." Tome XXXI. , Nos. 15 and 16 ; Tome XXXII.,
Nos. 1, 2 and 3. From the Director.

" Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History." Vol.
VII., No. 3. From the Society.

"Bijdragen Tot de Dierkunde." Vol. XL, Part 2. "Die
Bryozoen," by Dv. W. J. Vigelius. From la Societe Royale de
Zoologie, Amsterdam.

" Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology." Cambridge,
Mass. Geographical Series. Vol. VII., Nos. 2-8 and 11. From
the Curator.

" Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History." Vol.
XXII., Parts II. and III. From the Society.

" Victorian Naturalist." Vol. 1., Nos. 15 and 16. From the
Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

" Transactions of the Entomological Society of London." Part
v., 1884.

" Meddelanden af Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica." 9th
and 10th Hiiftet, 1883. From the Society.

" Monatliche Mitcheilungen des Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereins
des Regierungsbezirkes Frankfurt." Jahrg II., Nos., 10 and 11.
From the Society.

"Closure of the Cyclostomatous Bryozoa." From Arthur W.
Waters, F.L.S., F.G.S.

"Catalogue of the Library of the Royal Society of Tasmania."
From the Society.

" Annales de la Societe Royale Malacologique de Belgique."
Tome XVIIL, 1883. From the Society.

PAPERS READ,

REVISION OF THE GENUS LA MP RI MA OF LATREILLE,
WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.

By William Macleay, F.L.S., &c.

Mr. C. French of the Botanical Museum of Melbourne, sent
me very recently a veiy beautiful Pecticorn Insect which he had
received from North Australia. The section of the Lucanidse to
which this fine Insect belongs, — the Subfamily Lamprimidse — is
almost peculiar to the Australian Region as defined by Wallace,
indeed the only exception to its entii-ely Australian character, is
in the case of the genus Streptocerus, which is Chilian, and is not
by any means the only instance in which aflinities have been found
between the Fauna of South America and Australia.

The chief characters which distinguish the Lamprimidse from
the other Sub-families of the Lucanidse, are the narrow presternum,
only showing between the fore legs in a narrow keel, and the large
and exserted mandibles of the males, which are however, never so
largely produced as in the kindred American genus Chasiognathus.

With the exception of Streptocerus — the only foreign genus,
the genera of the Sub-family, are four, viz., Dendroblax, represented
by one species from New Zealand. Rhysso7iotus, consisting of
three species, — nehulosus Kirby, found in New South Wales and

130 REVISION OP THE GENUS LAMPRIMA OF LATREILLE,

Queensland, — -jugularis Westw. from Victoria, and parallelus
Dejr. from Queensland. Cacostoma one species, — squamosus
Newm., from Queensland, and Lamjirima a genus rather numer-
ously represented in all parts of Australia.

It is to this last genus that the superb insect sent me by Mr. French
belongs, and before proceeding to describe and name it and some
other species of the genus in my collection, I shall take the
opportunity of making some general remarks on the present state
of our knowledge of all the species comprised in the genus. The
genus itself, remarkable for the metallic brilliancy of its colouring,
is sufficiently well defined, but the species are most difficult of
definition, and much confusion has consequently arisen in their
identification and nomenclature. I shall therefore briefly notice
all the species hitherto described, not to redescribe them, but to
point out the charactei's which seem to me most suitable and
available for noting specific difierences.

LaMPRIMA iENEA. Fab.

This species was first described by Fabrieius in ISOl in his
" Systema Eleutheratorum " under the name of Lethrus ceneus. A
few years afterwards it was described by Schreibers in the 6th
Volume of the Transactions of the Linnean Society of London,
under the name of Lueanus aeneus; and in 1807, Latieille in his
" Genera Crustaceorum et Insectorum " made for its reception the
genus Lamprima. The species has also been described in the
■writings of W. S. Macleay, Burmeister and Reiche. In Gemminger
and Harrolds " Catalogus Coleopterorum " Lamprima cuprea
Latreilla, with the habitat of Sydney, is given as a synonym of the
female of L. aenea and Lamprina viridis Erichson from Tasmania
is placed as a variety of L aenea.

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &C. 131

I believe this to be a mistake. I am confident that L. aenea is
an inhabitant of Norfolk Island only, and I have good reason to
believe that Latreille's L. cuprea is the female of L. aurata, Latr.,
and that Eiichson's L. viridis is another species or a variety of
one of the other species. L. aenea can be readily distinguished
from all the other known species by its rugose sculpture, dense
puncturation, very slightly angled thorax, short mandibles, and the
acute, narrow, terminal spur of the fore tibise in the male. No
reliable distinction can be derived from the colour ; the prevailing
one is brilliant golden-green, but coppery-green, dark bronze, and
even blue are occasionally seen. The female is, as in all of this
genus, more deeply punctured than the male.

Lamprima aurata. Latreille.

Nouv. Diet. Hist. Nat., XVII., p. 278.

This species comes next to L. aenea in priority of description.
It is well described by W. S. Macleay in the " Horse Entomo-
logicse." It seems to have been taken for L aenea by Donovan,
Guerin and Castelnau, and is no doubt the L. fulgida of Boisduval,
Burmeister, and Dupont. The female is the L. cuprea Latreille.
The exact habitat of this species is not known to me. I find in
the old Macleay collection two males and three females but without
locality, while among all the more recent collections of Coleoptera
which I have had from all parts of the country, I have only one
specimen, and that is labelled " Darling River."

In general appearance the resemblance to L. Latreillei is very
great. Both are of a brilliant golden-green, with a coppery
effulgence on the head, bvit as a rule the colour is more golden
and less green than in Latreillei, but the true specific differences
between the two are to be found in the more punctured thorax,
and slightly rugose elytra, the short, obtuse pointed mesosternum,
and the less numerously and regularly dentated fore tibise. The
tibial spur of the male is very broadly scuriform or almost fan
shaped, thereby differing much from L. aenea.

The females are generally of a reddish copper colour, and densely
punctui'ed.

132 REVISION OP THE GENUS LAMPRIMA OP LATREILLE,

Lamprima Latreillei. Macleay.

This is the best known and most common species in New South
Wales, It was first described by W. S. Macleay in the year 1819
in the "Horse Entomologicse." It has been described also by
Burmeister and Erichson. In Gemminger and Harrolds Catalogue,
L. aenea of Boisduval, Z. amplicollis of Thomson, var. L. coerulea
of Donovan, and L. pygmceu, of W. S. Macleay are placed as
synonyms of this species, and not having seen the types, I cannot
dispute the statement. It is altogether a smoother and more seri-
ceous insect than L. aurata, and differs besides in the more densely
punctate breast, the highly keeled prosterrum, and the prominent
and acutely angled mesosternal point. The females of this and the
preceding species are much alike, but they show the same meso-
sternal differences as the other sex. The species is found in
Victoria and Qusensland as well as New South Wales. I have
lately received from the Herbert River District of Queens-
land some specimens of a Lamprima, which I felt strongly
tempted to look upon as a species, and in fact I had at one time
described it under the name of L. sericea. It differs a little from
L. Latreillei in the armature of the fore tibia?, the smaller siz", the
duller coloration, and the slightly less acute mesosternal point, but
I do not think that, for the present at all events, it can be con-
sidered as more than a mere vai'iety of L. Latreillei, and as such I
have named it in my cabinet.

These three species were all that were known for many years,
and they have been confounded one with another in the most
inexplicable way, indeed Reiche asserts, in the " Revue Entomo-
logique " so late as the year 1841, his belief that L. aurata and
Latreillei are mere varieties of L. aenea. It is of course evident
that M. Reiche had never seen true si^ecimens of these insects
when he made such an assertion.

Lamprima Micardi. Reiche.

This is the next species in seniority. It was described by Reiche
in 1841 in the Revue Zoologique of that year, Gemminger and

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &C. 133

Harrold in their Catalogue make L. varians of Germar a synonym
of this species, which is certainly a mistake. It is smaller than
L. Latreillei, and of a more coppery colour, the mesosternal point
is blunt, and the spur on the fore tibiae of the male is spiniform
and narrow.

The habitat is West Australia.

Lamprima varians. Germar.

This species seems to have been described by Germar and
Burmeister in the same year, by the one in the Linn. Ent. III.,
p. 895, and by the other in Burmeister's Lamellicornia, Handbuk,
Band 5, p. 415 and 417. It is, I think, without doubt, identical
with the L. cultridens of Burm., a species which has been for some
time, on the authority of Major Parry, placed as a synonym of
L. Micardi. The spur on the fore tibiae of the male in L. varians
is very much narrower than in most of the species, but much
broader than in L. Micardi, and in this respect it answers to
Burmeister's description of L. cultridens, which is " calcare maris
antico angusto trigono, sidfalciforvii,'" while of L. Micardi he says
"calcare maris antico angustissimo, lacvi." It is the most common
species in South Australia and is also found in West Australia.

Lamprima splendens. Erichs.

Erichson described this species in 1842, in a note to his paper
on the Insects of Tasmania, published in the Archiv. fur Naturg.
His description is very poor, and is taken from a female specimen.
No locality is given, but I have specimens of what I have no
doubt is this insect from the Clarence Biver in New South
Wales, and from Rockhampton in Queensland.

It is, I think, a good species. It is altogether of smaller
dimensions than L. Latreillei. The, male seems to be invariably of
a very brilliant golden green, with the head of a fiery copper, and
the maxillae, palpi, antennae, tarsi and tibial spur, picous. The
puncturation of the thorax and elytra resembles that of L
Latreillei. The mandables have on the upper sui-face a very large

134 REVISION OF THE GENUS LAMPRIMA OF LATREILLE,

indentation, and terminate in three teeth, the extreme two small
and close together ; a deep notch and tooth on the inner surface
above the middle. The presternum terminates in a short pointed
triangle between the fore legs, and does not show a long narrow
keel like L. Latreillei ; the triangular space on the breast on each
side is small, sunken, and strongly punctate. The mesosternal
point is rectangular and clothed in front with yellowish pile. The
whole under surface is densely punctate and sparingly pilose. The
anterior tibse are armed externally with five teeth, the uppermost
reaching the middle ; the spur on the inner apex is broadly
securiform, the middle and hind tibiae are slender and unarmed.
The female is generally of a coppery hue, very brilliant, but
densely punctured all over ; the tibiae are all strongly armed.
Major Parry makes it a synonym of L. aurata, but if I am right
in the recognition of the species it is manifestly distinct.

Lamprima rutilans. Erichs.

Archiv. fur Naturg, 1842, I., p. 170.

Erichson described this species in his Tasmanian Insects (loc.
cit), but it is also a common species in Victoria, and in some parts
of New South Wales. It is generally of a tarnished golden hue,
is more puncate than L. Latreillei, with mandibles more broadly
truncate and recurved at the apex, and the mesosternal point
sharply rectangular. Major Parry thinks this is also the same as
L. aurata. I believe it to be a good species.

Lamprima Kreftii. Macleay.

Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S. Wales, Vol. IV., p. 173.

I described this species in 1871, in my paper on "The Insects
of Gayndah " (loc. cit.) The only specimen known — a male — is
in the Australian Museum. In addition to the distinctive
characters mentioned by me in the original description, T would
add the following — the mesosternal point acutangular as in L.
Latreillei, and the teeth on the outer side of the fore tibiae small
and irregular above and on the middle.

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &C. 135

Two othei' species of Lamprima are admitted as species in the
" Catalogus Coleopterorum," L. nigricollis and L. suinptuosa, both
described by the Rev. F. W. Hope in the year 1845, in a list
of Liicauidse published by him in London, in pamphlet form.
The Rev. gentleman seems in that publication to have bestowed
names of his own on about all the species of Lamjyrima known,
thus we find by Gemminger and Harrold's Catalogue that ho calls L.
cenea — subrugosa, L. aurata — Schreibersii, L. Lotreillei — Tasmanice,
and L. Micardi — purpurascens. Of course this pamphlet is now out
of print and cannot be referred to, even if it were worth the
trouble. But this fact evinces the folly of publishing in a
separate form, instead of in the transactions of some established
Scientific Society, any paper containing original matter, or matter
useful for future reference. Catalogues of Museums, public or
private, or hand lists of collections of any kind, are necessarily
ephemeral productions, and have no chance of a lengthened
existence, unless as a part of a Society's proceedings.

The two species mentioned have, after close inspection of the
types, been ascertained by Major Parry, to be both mere colour
varieties of L. Micardi, Reiche.

I shall now proceed to describe some hitherto unnoticed species
of Lamprima, beginning with the superb insect sent me by Mr.
French, the description of which is in truth the original incentive
for the present paper.

Mr. French has specially asked me to dedicate the species to
the illustrious Botanist, Baron Sir Ferd. von Mueller, and it gives
me much pleasure to comply with the request.

Lamprima Muelleri. n. sp.

Female. Golden-green, nitid. The head small, transverse,
very nitid, excavated and deeply i>unctured in front between the
eyes ; the clypeus and labrum vertical, elongate, of a blackish
colour, and strongly punctate ; the mandibles also black, longer
than the head, strong, with a broad, punctured, slightly excavated
space above and punctate beneath, with a strong prominent horn

\!>,.*''

136 REVISION OP THE GENUS LAMPRIMA OP LATREILLE,

projecting downwards on each side of the labrum. The palpi are
normal. The maxillje and labium are enveloped in yellow haii',
but do not appear to be at all corneous. The raentam is of a
metallic green, strongly punctate, and of a transverse triangular
form. The thorax is quadrangular, a little broader than the
length, a little narrower at the apex than at the base, bisinuate on
both, a rounded angular dilatation with a depression on the sides
behind the middle, the entire lateral margin crenulated with
about fifteen short, strong, blunt teeth, and a number of small
dense punctures in the median line. The colour of the thorax is
of a deader metallic hue than the rest of the body. The scutellura
is of a rounded triangular form, with a few small punctures. The
elytra are more than twice the length of the thorax, about the
width, at the base, of the thorax and narrowing a little to the apex ;
the colour is very brilliant, the greenish-gold of the sides changing
into a coppery hue in the middle. Each elytron has a very distinct
sub-apical callus, and is marked by a number of large shallow
variolose punctures, disposed thinly in irregular I'ows, with densely
punctate recurved margins. The under surface is of the same
colour and. brilliancy as the upper. The prosternum shows in a
narrow keel between the fore legs, the mesosternum is shortly
pointed and concave on its anterior face ; these with the metas-
ternum and sides of the abdominal segments are clothed with a
yellowish pubescence. The thighs are of the colour of the body,
and of moderate size ; the tibiae and tarsi are black or piceous-
black ; the fore tibise are broad and armed externally with seven
teeth ; the other tibiae have two teeth near the middle on the outer
side ; the tarsi are rather shorter than the tibiae.

Length, 17 lines.

Hah. — North Australia.

This large and beautiful species might well form the type of a
new genus ; the triangular mentum, strongly crenulated thorax ;
and entirely peculiar puncturation of the ely tx'a, seem to constitute
almost generic characters. But in the absence of a male s]iecimen,
which may probably prove to be still more peculiar, it would be
premature to attempt to make a genus for its reception.

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., ifec. 137

Lamprima insularis. n. sp.

Male. Brilliant golden green all over, excepting the antennae,
palpi and tarsi which are piceous. The mandibles are nearly-
straight above, and terminate in a slightly truncate point, the
tooth and notch of the under side are strong. The head is strongly
punctate. The thorax is of the usual form, and finely but not
densely punctured. The scutellum is smooth. The elytra are
finely but rather thinly punctured, are marked with some light
striae near the suture and are slightly rugose. The mesosternal
process is very strong and prominent.

The under surface is more densely punctui'ed than the upper,
and is clothed with yellowish pile. The fore tibiae are armed
externally with six teeth not reaching above the middle, the spur
on the inner apex is large and fan-shaped.

The female only diff"ers from the male in having the mandibles
very short, the punctu ration of the body much stronger, the colour
a dark copper-green, and in having ten teeth or serrations on the
outer edge of the fore tibia3.

Length, (J 12 lines, $ 9 lines.

Hah. — Lord Howe Island.

Lamprima nigripennis. n. sp.

Male. The thorax, the legs except the tarsi, the scutellum, and
the under surface are metallic bluish-green ; the head coppery, and
the elytra blackish-brown and without metallic lustre. The
mandibles are deeply emarginate on the upper surface, with a strong
tooth immediately in front of the excavation ; they are truncate
or nearly so at the apex. The triangular depression on the head is
deep, punctured, the punctures becoming coarser on the lateral
dilatations. The scutellum is smooth, rounded and transverse.

The elytra are quite smooth. The prosternal keel is distinct ;
the mesosternal point is strong, prominent, and rectangular. The
fore tibiae are armed externally with six strong obtuse teeth, the
inner terminal spur is broadly securiform.

Length, 14 lines.

Hah. Australia.

138 EEVISION OP THE GENUS LAMPRIMA OP LATREILLE,

This is an unique insect in the old Macleayan collection, labelled
" New Holland," and with no other indication of locality.

Lamprima violacea. n. sp.

Male. Thorax and elytra deep violet-blue with a greenish tinge
on the margins, the first of these is very finely and distantly
punctured, the other has a iew obsoletely punctured striae near the
suture. The scutellum is of a rounded triangular form, with a few
indistinct punctures on the base. The under surface and legs are
of a very brilliant golden-green. The antennae, palpi and tarsi are
piceous. The mandibles are long and slender, slightly diverging,
not or only a little bearded on the inside, and terminate in two
teeth or angles with a slight emargination between them. The
triangular excavation on the head, which is of a dull bronze colour,
is more finely punctured than is usual in the genus. The spur of
the fore tibiae is strongly securiform ; the teeth on the outer side
are five in number, and do not reach above the middle. The
mesosternum is strongly pointed, the anterior face is quite vertical.

The female difliers from the male in being larger, of a greenish
colour, and much more punctate.

Length (mand, inch) ^ 10 lines 9 10 lines.

A male and female of this remarkable species were taken at
Botany Bay, many years ago by Mr. Masters, and are now in that
gentleman's collection.

I have never seen another specimen anywhere.

Lamprina minima. n. sp.

Male. The upper surface is of a rather dull bronze, the under
surface and legs are of a pale piceous red. The mandibles are
very short (shorter than the head) stout, scarcely notched and
toothed below and bidentate (almost truncate) above.

The head which has a copper-red tinge, is very strongly ])unctate,
its triangular depression is very shallow. The thorax is distinctly
but not densely punctate, and has a round depression in the middle

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &C. 139

on each side of the median line, this line is visible only near the
base. The scutellum is transversely rounded, with a small
depression near the apex. The elytra are very faintly punctate
and striate, and leave the pygidium exposed. The fore tibiae are
armed externally with five teeth, the spur on the inner apex is
only slightly securiform, being very much narrower than in many
of the genus ; the mesosternal point is obtuse and not prominent.

Length, 6 lines.

One specimen (a male) is all I have ever seen of this species. I
received it some years ago in a collection from South A ustralia.

In the Annales Musco civico of Genoa for the year 1875, p. 999,
Dr. Gestro describes under the name of Neolamprima a genus
differing only from Lamjjrima in the very remarkable form of the
mandibles of the male. The species on which he forms the genus
is from Arfak on the North-west part of New Guinea and he names
it Ncolamprina Adolphinae I have lately received from the
Herbert District, Queensland, a specimen of the genus, and I think
a distinct species.

Neolamprina mandibularis. n. sp.

Male. In colour and form of body much like Lamprima aurafa.
The thorax very thinly and minutely punctured, the elytra smooth.
The mandibles are very long, (more than half the length of the
insect) slightly narrower in the middle than at the base, widening
again a little at the apex, which is tx'identate, without notch or
tooth on the upper surface, curving upwards from the middle,
densely bearded on the inner surface, and serrated on the lower
edge from a little below the middle to the apex ; the teeth forming
the serration being regular, truncate — resembling the cogs of a
wheel — and eight in number. The mesosternum is acutely pointed.
The fore tibiae are strongly six-toothed on the outer side, the inner
spur is strongly securiform.

Length, without mandibles 10 lines.

Hub. — Herbert River District, Queensland.

140 REVISION OP THE GENUS LAMPRIMA OF LATREILLE.

Judging from the figure accompanying Dr. Gestro's description
of the New Guinea species, the serrations of the mandibles com-
mence near their base and are more numerous than in the present
species. I have a female from the same locality but whether it is
the female of this species or of a Lamj)rima it is impossible to say,
it would do for either. It is small — about 7 lines in length — has
very short mandibles, and is entirely of a bluish-black colour,
densely punctate and rugose. The under surface is brassy. The
mesosternal point is strong and rather acute.

NOTES ON ZOOLOGY OF THE MA.CLAY-COAST IN
NEW GUINEA.

II. (1)

By N. de Miklouho-Maclay.

On a New Species of Macropus : Macropus tibol.
(Plate XIX.)

The only kangaroo, which came into my hands during my stay
at the Maclay-Coast, was a small Macropus, which I now describe
as Macropus tibol, keeping as a name for the species the name under
which the animal is known amongst the natives (2). Macropus
tibol appears to be very scarce on that coast ; during my prolonged
stay there, I succeeded in obtaining only tioo specimens of it — one,
shot by myself in the forest in 1872 and the second, brought to me
in 1876, by a native whose dog discovered and killed it in the
dense scrub not far from the beach. Both were adult males and
of about the same size. (3)

The principal measurements taken the same day on which I

obtained the second specimen in 1876, (a young (J), were the

following : —

From the tip of the nose to the base of the tail ...
Length of the tail ...

From the tip of the nose to the occiput

Fore limb ... ... ... ... ... ... about

Him:l limb ... ... ... ... ... ... about

From the head to the end of the tail of the 4th toe ...

Length of the ear ...

Circumference of the base of the tail ... .. about
From knee to knee over the back ... ... about

(1) The firsit "Note on Zoology of the Maclay-Coast" has been published
in Proceed. Lin. Soc. of N.S.W., Vol. IX., Part, 3, p. 713.

(2) I mean the natives speaking the dialect of Bongu.

(3) Another proof of the scarcity of this animal is the fact, that amongst
the bone implements used by the natives (who, before my arrival at the
Maclay-Coast in 1871 were not acquainted with the use of any metal) only
very few indeed were made of bones of M. tibol.

330 mm.

13 in.

235 mm.

9,3

88 mm.

o 3,5

121 mm.

° 4,8

238 mm.

%- 9,3

119 mm.

§ 4,7

34 mm.

^ 1,4

50 mm.

2,0

260 mm.

10,3

142 NOTES ON ZOOLOGY OF THE MACLAY-COAST,

Colour and character of the, fur. — The general colour chocolate
brown, dulled browner at the base ; fur close, soft to the touch ;
the head and down the back, the arms and legs of a deeper
chocolate tint, inclining to reddish on the feet and hands. Chin,
throat, and under surface, the inner parts of the flanks, ashy.
Beginning at the knee and extending in the direction of the
femur towards the base of the tail is noticeable an indistinct
oblique stripe of a lighter tint. On the face examined from the
side, a narrow line of a light tint is also perceivable, which runs
from below the nostril along the upper lip to below the orbit. A
narrow line of paler hair on the inner margins of the ears. Hair
on the limbs shorter and stiffer. Tail with short soft hair above,
with very short hair almost bare below.

The general habitus of the body resembles in many respects the
smaller kind of Macropi, known in Australia under the vulgar
name of " Pademelons."

The examination of fig. 2 (representing the head of the animal
in profile and natural size), and of fig. 3 (showing the muzzle from
the front), will give a better idea of the muzzle, divided in the
middle, the distribution of the conspicuous hair, the size of the
eyes, ears, and their relative position than a long description.

The muzzle is bare, covered with fine black scales, the margins
of the underlip is also free of hair.

The hands compared with the feet (fig. 4 and fig. 5) are small ;
the fingers thin with long, narrow, dark reddish brown (blackish
on the base paler at the tip) nails. The internal side of the hands
are covered with fine, flat scales of different size.

The scales on the under surface of the foot are larger than those
of the hand and near to the heels are worn down, and the skin
there appears glossy and flocky.

Tail. The u^jper portion of the tail only, as already mentioned,
is covered with hair.

The skull of M. tlbol examined from above (Fig. 7), shows a
very round cranium and no ridges in the Parietalia ; examined
from the side (Fig. 8), the greatest height of the skull corresponds

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 143

to the fron to-parietal suture and makes the bending of the pre-
maxillaiy region downwards very perceivable. (A line joining the
cutting edges of the molars and premolar extended forward would
pass over the base of the incisor.) The apex of the angular process
of the inferior margin of the Zygoma corresponds to the anterior
cusps of the second molar.

The transversal ridges of the palate are 9 in number, and their
relative position is shown on fig. 6.

There are two palatine foramina (of which one is very much
larger than the other) and several smaller on each side.

Dentition.

3 1 3

— , i. — , pm. — , m. (the 4th molar just appealing in both jaws)

113

The shape and size (in proportion to the molars) of the upper
incisors present the most important character of the species.
Compared with the dentition of other species of the same genus,
Macropus Thetidis shows some resemblance to the incisors of
Macropus tibol (1). The fold of the second lateral incisor is very
much behind and is fully seen only when examined from below
(fig. 11). The premolars are not longer than the first molars.

At the Australian Museum, I had the opportunity of examining
a stuffed specimen of a kangaroo from New Ireland, Macropus
Brownii Ramsay (2).

The dentition of Macropus Brownii is somewhat similar (in the
relative size of the incisors) to that of Mac7'opus Tibol, however,

(1) Waterhouse. Marsupiata, p. 144.

(2) This kangaroo has been first described by Mr. E. P. Ramsay in a paper
read before the Linnean Society of New South Wales, in October 1876.
(Description of a New Species of Hahnaturus from New Ireland, by E. P.
Ramsay. Proceed. Linnean Society of N S.W., Vol. I., p. 307) as Halma-
turns Brovmii. Another collection made in the same place and at the same
time as the one which has been purchased by the Australian Museum,
having been sent to London, Mr. E. R. Alston, not knowing about the
description of Mr. Ramsay, desci'ibed agaiii the same kangaroo, as Macropus
higens (E. R. Alston, On the Rodents and Marsupials collected by Rev. G.
Brown in Duke of York Island, New Britain and New Ireland. Proceeding
Zoolog. Soc, 1877, p. 123, pi. XIX.) Although agreeing with the opinion
that the animal in question is a Macropus, I keep the species name (Brownii)
under which it was described ^rsi.

10

144 NOTES ON ZOOLOGY OP THE MACLAY-COAST.

to what extent it is impossible for me to form an opinion, on
account of the absence of the second kiteral incisor in the
specimen of Macropus Brownii in the Australian Museum. (1)

The Macropus tihol is also completely difterent from all the
Macropi of the south coast of New Guinea that have been as
yet described.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.
Macropus tibol. McL

{A II the figures, with the exception of Fig. 1 and Fig. 1 1 , nahiral size. )

Fig. 1. — Sketch of the side view of the Macropus tibol, partly after a
sketch from life and partly from a photograph of a stuffed specimen,
(about ^ of the natural size.)

Fig. 2. — Side view of the head of the same animal, short time after death.

Fig. 3. — Front view of the muzzle.

Fig. 4. — Under surface of the hand

Fig. 5.— Plantar surface of the foot.

Fig. 6. — Palatine folds.

Fig. 7. — Skull from above.

Fig. 8. — Side view of the same.

Fig. 9. — Dentition of the upper jaw.

Fig. 10. — Dentition of the under jaw.

Fig. 11. — View of the upper incisor from below. Twice the natural size.

(1) About the dentition of M. Brownii Mr, Alston says: — "The third
upper incisor is but little longer than the second, and has the external fold
close to its posterior border." E. R. Alston, loc. cit- Proc. Zool. Soc,
1877, p. 123.

ON TWO NEW SPECIES OF DORCOPSIS FROM THE
SOUTH COAST OF NEW GUINEA.

By N. de Miklouho-Maclay.

(Plate XX.)

Further examination of tlie New Guinea Collection in the
Macleay -Museum, resultedin finding twonew species of Dorcopsis,
a short description of which is the subject of this paper.

Both skins had been purchased from Mr. Goldie, who obtained
them in the vicinity of Hanuabada (1), (Village of Port Moresby),
on the South Coast of New Guinea.

Though the skulls had sufiered a great deal by the mode of
preservation (in common salt), already mentioned in a former
paper (2), a suflEicient examination of the same was still possible,
which enabled me to decide without doubt, that in the first place,
the specimens belonged to the genus Dorcopsis ; secondly, that they
were distinct from each other ; and thirdly, that they were distinct
also from the other species of the genus that are known.

I believe that the reasons why they should be included in the
genus are — the breadth of the premolars, the existence of small
canines in the upper jaw, the general shape of the skull, and the
direction forward of the hair on the nape of the neck.

I shall describe the two new species as Dorcopsis Beccarii, and
Dorcopsis Macleayi, in honour of two men of science, whose works
have contributed materially to our j^resent knowledge of the
Natural History of New Guinea.

(1) During the last stay of Rev. W. G. Lawes in t>ydney, I had the
opportunity of ascertaining the right pronunciation and way of spelling
of the name of the large village of Port Moresby. Although some
natives call the place ^ ^ Anuapada, ' others again " Anuabata," the greater
number however, pronounce this name in such a way that the Missionaries
of the London Mission Society, have agreed to spell it as " Baimabada." In
the dialect of the Motu tribe, '■ Banua " means "big" or "large,"
" Bada " " inhabited land " or " village."

(2) Proceed, of the Linn. Soc of N.S.W., Vol. IX, Part 4, p. 892.

,000 mm.

39,7 in.

390 mm.

o

15,4

147 mm.

5,7

49 mm.

2,0

32 mm.

c

1,3

141 mm.

5,6

146 ON TWO NEW SPECIES OF DORCOPSIS,

DoRcopsis Beccarii. N. sp. (Figs. 1-4.)
Adult 2 from the hills in the vicinity of Hanuabada, on the

South Coast of New Guinea. (Skin at the Macleay Museum.)
Some meas7trements taken on the skin : —

From tip of nose to end of tail

Lengtli of tail ...

From tip of nose to occiput ...

Length of ear (measured from behind)

Length of hand ... ... about

Length of foot about

4 nipples in the pouch.

Colour of fur : Dark grey, with a brownish tinge. The back,
hands and feet very little darker than the breast, and only near
the arms and on the base of the tail the brownish grey fur aj^pears
slightly tinged with rufous.

Each hair (of the back) is dark grey on the base, and of a much
lighter tint for nearly | of the hairs length.

The muzzle with a deep median groove is bare and covered with
a black scaly skin.

The lai'ge glandular hairfollicles on the laryngeal region are 3 in
number, but not placed exactly in the median line (as is the case
in Dorcopsis luctuosa and Dorcopsis Chalmersii.) Similar hair-
follicles appear as well on the upper lip, over the inner canthus of
the eye, and others some distance behind and below the outer canthus.

Uars not large, with some light brown hair on the posterior
margin near the meatus ; the inside of the concha nearly bare,
showing blackish skin.

The hair on the nape of the neck of Dorcojms Beccarii is as in
D. luctuosa and B. Chalmersii directed forward. The converging
point between the shoulders is 195 mm., (about 7, Tin.) behind the
behind the occiput.

The tip of the tailifi white and bare, showing large elongated scales.

The skull of Dorcopsis Beccarii (Fig. 1) resembles that of
Dorcopsis Brunii, of which very good representations are given on
the plates appended to the work of Schlegel and Miiller (1) ; it is

{\) H. Schlegel en S. Aluller: Over drie Biudeldieren uit de familie der
kengoeroes (published as a part of the Verhandelingen over de Niituurlijke
Geschiedenis der Nederlandsche overezesche Bezittengen door de Leden
der Naturkundige Commissie en andere Schi-ijvers, uitgegeven op last van
den Koning door C. T. Temminck, 1839-1844. Plates XXXIII. and XXIV.

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 147

very elongated and as in the skull of D. Brunii, the 2 marked
ridges of the parietalia, running from the orbital margin of the
frontal bone, join together in a median crest, which extends over
the interparietal bone towards the superior anterior margin of the
occipital bone. This median parieto-occipital crest is a point in
which the skull of D. Beccarii differs from the skulls of D.
luctuosa (^1) and D. Chalmersii.

The apex of the angular process of the inferior margin of the
zygoma corresponds with the anterior cusps of the 3rd molar.
The nasal bones are in the middle, a little nai-rower than on both
ends, which character has also been noticed in D. Brunii. (2)

The Palate presents 8 well marked transverse folds without
counting a few (6) smaller ones in the anterior corner of the
palate, between the canines and the incisors. About the disposition
of these folds I refer to tig. 2.

One large posterior Palatine foramen with several very much
smaller behind on each side.

The median upper Incisors of D. Beccarii, present the character
of the genus, being much larger than the latei-al ones, which
appears to be, in the specimen of the Macleay Museum, very much
worn down and does not show any indication of cusps on their
lower margin, as is the case in D. luctioosa and D. Chalmersii.

About the size (length) of the canines our specimen cannot be
considered as a standard for the species (3). The distance from
the canine to the premolar (measured on the base of the x'espective
teeth) is 3^ times the distance between the canine and the 2nd
lateral incisor.

The breadth of the upper Premolars, from before backwards, is
quite as great as of the two molars together with the anterior

(1) A. H. Garrod : On the kangaroo called Hab)iatu7-us hictuosens, &c.,
&c. Proceed. Zool. Soc, 1875. Plate VII.

(2) Schleyel en Mi'dkr : Loc. cit., p. 137.

(3) As already stated, the skulls cf the specimens of the two species of
Dorcojpm which description form the subject of this paper, had unfortunately
suffered a great deal, by the mode of preservation, so that the minor details
of the detitiou could therefore not be discerned, as for instance : I could not
decide, if tlie lower margin of the lateral incisors is cuspidated or not, could
not judge about the size and shape of the canines, etc., etc., in removing the
crust of magnesia the enamel has been also veiy likely partly removed.

148 ON TWO NEW SPECIES OF DORCOPSIS,

cusps of the third (1). On the external surface of the tooth, from
the cinguhim several ridges with intervening depressions run at
right angles to the cutting edge which in D. Beccarii is a little
curved and not so distinctly cuspidated as in D. luctuosa. The
anterior part of the tooth, examined from the external (labial) side
is a trifle higher than the posterior. On the internal (lingual) side,
the ridges and the depressions are less marked.

Examined from below (looking at the base of the skull) tlie
external and internal outlines of the premolar, are not quite
parallel, but there is an inflection noticeable on the internal outline
which corresponds also with the narrowest transversal diameter of
the tooth.

Out of the 4 molars, only the first is a little worn down as well
as the cusps of the second. The fourth molar is the smallest and
the posterior portion (cusp) of the same is smaller than the anterior,
in which peculiarity the fourth molar differs from the other molars
which have the two portions (cusps) nearly of the same size.

In D. Beccarii, the molars with the premolars form not two
parallel straight, but two slightly curved lines converging more
behind than in the front. [The distance between the two most
prominent points of the internal side of the premolar being 18 mm.,
and that between the corresponding joints of the molars 15 mm. (2)]

In the lower jaw, the incisors are rather narrow and straight.
The Premolars are scarcely less broad than in the upper jaw, and
present the same proportion of breadth in relation to the first,
second and third molar of the lower jaw as in the upper.

The slightly cuspidated cutting edge of the Premolar, examined
from the side, is curved, the posterior end being the highest point
of the same ; viewed from above, the edge is also not straight, but
convex outwards. Similar to the upper Premolar, the inner

(1) The size of the premolars of D. luchwsa, in comparison with the size
of the molars, present exactly the same proportion (Vide Garrod, On Halma-
turus luctuosa, etc., etc. Loo. cit., p. 54.)

(2) This case proves that the arrangement of the teeth, premolars and
molars, on both sides of the upper jaw, forming straight lines parallel one
to the other, cannot, as Garrod supposed (loc. cit., p, 53), be regarded as a
constant cranial character, which distinguishes Dorxopsiti as a genus from
Macropus,

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 149

surface of the Mandibular premolar does not present any kind of
tubercles (as is the case in D. luctuosa and D. Chalmersii.

Like in the upper jaw, the first mandibular mollar is the most
worn down, as well as the cusps of the second.

DoRCOPSis Macleayi. N". sp.

(Figs. 5-9.)

Habitat. — South Coast of New Guinea, inland from Hanuabada.
Stufied specimen at the Macleay-Museum.

Some measurements taken on the skin before it was stuffed : —

From the tip of nose to the end of tail 790 mm. © •^J>2in.

Length of tail 320 mm. ^ 13,8

From occiput to the tip of nose 112 mm. w 4,4

Length of the foot 115 mm. § 4,5

Length of ear ( measured from behind)... ... ... 30 mm. 1,2

General Colour : Dark brownish grey, a little lighter on the
ventral side.

Muzzle bare, black, slightly divided in the middle. The three
conspicuous glandular hair follicles on the throat are not symme-
trically disposed.

Ears very small.

The hair on the nape of the neck of B. Macleayi presents in its
direction a very peculiar deviation from the usual direction of the
hair of the neck of the other Dorcopsidce, presenting two centres of
irradiation of the hair, one above the other (one near the occiput,
the other on the back between the shoulder, 140 mm. behind the
occiput) instead of one, as is the case in D. Mulleri, D. luctuosa
D. Chalmersii, D. JBeccarii. Fig. 9 is added to illustrate this
peculiar direction of the hair of the neck, and will give, I hope, a
better idea of it than a long description. The end of the tail is
nearly bare, for about 100 mm., (about 4 in.) white and scaly on
the tip.

The skxdl of D. Macleayi presents many points of similarity with
D. Beccari. A glance at plate XX. will easily prove this state-
ment. The foi-mer is only in proportion to its breadth (from
zygoma to zygoma) shorter than the latter. We find in skull of D.
Macleayi the same median parieto-occipital ci'est, the same inflection
on the external outline of the nasal bone as in I). Beccarii.

160 ON TWO NEW SPECIES OF DORCOPSIS.

Looking at the base of the skull of D. Mackayi, we see a
similar disposition of the 8 palatine folds to that of D. Beccarii.
The arrangement of the teeth of the upper jaw forms in the former,
less curved lines than in the latter, only the two posterior (4th)
molars standing a trifle nearer together than the two third molai's
of the same jaw.

The lateral incisors are here also in proportion much smaller
than the median ones, the second lateral a little lai'ger than the first.

The canines are of about the same size as the first lateral incisor,
but longer and much more pointed. The distance from the canine
to the premolar is 3 times the distance from the canine to the
posterior incisor.

The breadth of the Premolar surpasses by a little the breadth of
the first and second molar together. On the internal surface the
posterior portion of the premolar presents a small roundish inflec-
tion of the size of a pins head.

In the lower jaw, the incisors are narrow. The lyremolar com-
paratively smaller than in the upper jaw, its breadth being equal
to that of the first molar and a part of the second (corresponding
to the anterior portion of the tooth to the ridge of the second, or
posterior cusp). The posterior portion of the cutting edge is
elevated, a triangular tubercle which gives the tooth a characteris-
tical aspect, difierent from the lower premolars of other species of
Dorcopsis.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE. XX.

Fig. 1. — Skull of Dorcojysis Beccarii Maclay, from above.
Fig. 2. — A part of the same skull to show the dentitioa aud the palatine fold.
Fig. 3. — Under jaw of the same skull.
Fig. 4. — Sideview of both jaws of the same.
Fig. 5. — Skull of Dorcojjsis Macleayi Maclay, from above.
Fig. 6. — Palatine fold and dentition of the upper jaw of the same skull.
Fig. 7. — Under jaw of the same.
Fig. 8. — Side view of both jaws of the same.

Fig. 9, — Diagram showing the direction of the hair on the neck of Dorcopsis
Macleayi. Centre of irradiation,
f All the tigures, with the exception of fig. 9, natural size.

NOTES TO THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES RECENTLY
DESCRIBED BY CARTER. (1)

By R. von Lendenfeld. Ph.D.

As I am just now engaged in writing a Monograph of the
Australian Sponges, I was particularly glad to receive the publica-
tions on the subject by Carter through the courtesy of the author.

There are in the part concerning the Ceraospongiae and Myxo-
spongia, no figures and the diagnoses are so short that it is, in a
great number of cases, impossible for me to identify them with
the specimens in my collection or to ascertain those characteristics
which I consider as most important.

There are some, however, which in consequence of some
accessory peculiarity or other I have been able to recognize. My
collection of several thousand specimens of Australian Sponges is
by far the finest as yet brought together from this locality,
and I think that not only Carter but also all other scientists, who
are working the Sponges will be interested in the I'esult of a com-
parison between Carter's diagnosis and the specimens in my
collection.

Halisarca austi'aliensis (2) is not a Sponge at all, but the crusts
described by Carter under the above name are the ova of Boltenias,
suiTounded by their Follicula. I myself believed that the slimy
coatings in question were perhaps Sponges, and I examined them
accordingly. The result of this examination are laid down in a
pa]:)er published by me last year. (3)

(1) H. J. Carter. Description of Sponges from the neighbourhood of
Port Phillip Heads, South Australia. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, Ser. 5, Vol. XV., p. 196.

(2) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 197.

(3) R. von Lendenfeld. On the slimy coatings of certain Boltenias in
Port Jackson. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of N.S.W., Vol. IX.,
p. 495.

152 AUSTRALIAN SPONGES DESCRIBED BY CARTER,

The Boltenia is probably Boltenia australis. The name Boltenia
australiensis given by Carter (1) is not warranted.

Chondrilla nucula O.S. is mentioned as occurring in Port
Phillip. (2) I have not found any specimens of this Sponge in
any part of the Australian coast. I have, however, described a
species of Chondrilla as C. secunda, n.s., from Port Phillip, in a
paper read some time ago before the Linnean Society of N.S.W.
(3) This species is somewhat different from C. nucula O.S., in
the shape of its spicules, and particularly the configuration of the
canal -system, but which outwardly appears very similar to the
Adriatic species, of which I brought a specimen with me. I think
it very probable that Carter's specimen is to be referred to my
Chondrilla secunda, a Sponge very abundant in Port Phillip.

Luffaria digitata (4) is very meagerly described, but I think it
highly probable that it is identical with a Sponge described
eighteen years ago by Selenka (5) as Spongelia cactos, which has
also been investigated by F. E. Schulze (6) and myself (7).

Carter has apparently not seen my paper on Sponges of Port
Phillip, otherwise I think that my description of this Sponge
would have been sufficient for identification. I have named it
Dendrilla rosea, which name having priority, ought to replace the
name Luffaria digitata given by Carter. (8)

(1) //. /. Carter. Description of Sponges from the neighbourhood of
Port Phillip Heads, Soiith Australia. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, Ser. 5, Vol. XV., p. 197.

(2) H. J. Carter. L.c., p. 200.

(3) R. von Lendenfeld. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges.
Abstracts of Proceedings of the Linnean Society for January, 1885.

(4) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 201.

(5) E. Selenka. Ueber neue Schwamme aus der Siidsee. Zeitschrift fiir
wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band 17, Seite 566, Tafel 35, fig. 5.

(6) F. E. Schulze. Untersuchungen liber den Bau und die Entwickelung
der Spongien. Die Familie der Aplysinidse. Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche
Zoologie. Band .30, Seite 379.

(7). B. von Lendenfeld. Ueber Coelenteraten der Siidsee II. Neue
Aplysinidse. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band 38, Seite
277 ff.

(Sj //. J. Carter. L.c, p. 201.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 153

The most important feature of the Sponge is its peculiar sub-
dermal cavity. Carter does not mention this, but as he does not
say anything about the canal system at all, it is probable that he
never examined any section-series.

Darwinella australiensis (1) is i-epresented in my collection, but
the canal system is not described by Carter, so that it is difficult
to identify the species.

As Aplysina Isevis (2) Carter, seven distinct species in my collec-
tion could be considered. These are very different from one another,
but all coincide with Carter's diagnosis of the above species. They
are forms which led to the Dysididee of Marshall (3), of which
Carter's Pseudoceratina durissima (4) maybe a true representative.

The diagnosis given by Carter of Aplysina purpurea (5), led
me to believe that it might be identical with a Sponge examined
by me, and named Aplysilla violacea (6), but now it seems that
this is not the case, as Carter considers the Australian specimen of
that Sponge to be identical with his Pseudoceratina durissima (7,)

Carter's new genus Halapsamina(8), is identical with Marshall's
genus Psammapemma (9), established five years ago, and the
latter name must be accepted as it has priority.

(1) H. J. Carter. Description of Sponges from the neighboiu'hood of
Port Phillip Heads, South Austraha. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, Ser. 5, Vol. XV., p. 203.

(2) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 204.

(3) William Marshall. Ueber Dysididen und Phoriospongien. Zeit-
schrift fiir wissenschafsHche Zoologie. Band 35, Seite 92.

(4) H. J. Garter. L.c, p. 204,

(5) H. J. Garter. Contributions to our knowledge of the Spongida.
Order II., Ceratina. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Series 5,
Vol. VIII , pp. 103-105.

(6) R. von Lendenfeld. L.c. Seite 237 ff.

(7) H. J. Carter. Description of Sponges from the neighbourhood of
Port Phillip Heads, South Australia. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, Series 5, Vol. XV., p. 205.

(8) H. J. Garter. L.c, p. 211.

(9) William Marshall. L.c, Seite 113.

154 AUSTRALIAN SPONGES DESCRIBED BY CARTER,

The species described as H. crassa (1) and H. Isevis (2) cannot
be distinguislied. I possess in my collection numerous transition
forms between them, and all these ought to be combined under the
name given to them previously by Marshall (3), viz., Psamma-
pemma den sum. I think that I shall be able to distinguish a few
species as the canal system is not the same in all the specimens I
have examined. It is however, connected with quite unusual
difficulties to make good series of sections through these arenaceous
Sponges.

Holopsamma laminpefavosa (4), may be identical with Marshall's
genus Psammoclema (5.)

Both Holopsamma fuliginosa (6), and turba (7) are unrecog-
nisable.

The establishment of a new genus Sarcocornea (8), for a dry
Dysidea is not justified. In the diagnosis there is nothing by
which the only species could be distinguished from Dysidea.

Dysidea fragilis Johnstone (9) and Dysidea Kirkii Bowerbank
(10) are mentioned. I only possess the latter in my collection.
Chaliniform species are very abundant and I possess long series
of continuous transition-forms. I believe this shape to be caused
by mimicry after the true Chalinidae, which in consequence of
their axial spicules are not very digestible food.

I cannot say anything about the species described as Dysidea
hirciniformis (11) and chaliniformis (12). The descriptions are so
short that it is simply impossible to make any use of them.

(1) H. J. Carter. Dcsci'iptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of
Port Phillip Heads, South Australia. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, Ser. 5, Vol. XV., p. 211.

(2) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 212.

(3) William Marshall. Ueber Dysididen und Phoriospongien. Zeit-
schrift fur wissenchafsliche Zoologie. Band 35, Seite 113.

(4) H. J. Carter. L.c., p. 212.

(5) William Marshall. L.c, Seite 109.

(6) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 213.

(7) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 213.

(8) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 214.

(9) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 215.

(10) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 216.

(11) //. /. Carter. L.c, p. 217.

(12) //. /. Carter. L.c, p. 217.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 155

I consider the genus Dysidea as characterised by the following
points : —

(1). Transparent hyaline Mesoderm without foreign bodies in the
ground substance. (1)

(2). The canal system and ciliated chambers of Spongelia as
described by Schulze.

(3). Foreign bodies forming all the fibres.

It can of course not be decided by the description whether
Carter's specimens belong to the genus Dysidea in this sense or not.

The sponge described by Carter as Spongelia stellidermata (2)
is probably identical with some specimens in my collection which,
however, do not belong to the genus Spongelia but to another
Family (3), that of the Spongidse. I have named this Sponge
Cacospongia gracilis (4) but it may appear necessary to establish
a new genus for it At all events it does not belong to the genus
Spongelia Schulze, who was the first to establish a diagnosis on a
rarely reliable and scientific basis (5).

Carteriospongia caliciformis (6) is described from a dry specimen
so that no opinion can be hazarded at to its real position in the
system.

(1) F. E. Schulze. Untersuchungen iiber den Ban und die Entwickel-
vung der Spongien. Die Gattung Spongelia Zeitschrift ftir wissenschaf tliche
Zoologie, Band 32, Seite 111 ff.

(2) H. J. Garter. Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of
Port Phillip Heads, South Australia. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, Ser. 5, Vol. XV., p. 219.

{ 3) G. Vosmaer. Studies on Sponges I. Mittheilungen der Zoologischen
Station in Neapel, Band IV., Seite 445. (Vosmaer's classification is
identical with mine, which I arrived at independently, and which is there-
fore very likely to be correct. )

(4) In 1883, I identified the Sponges, from several Museums, and I
supplied several with names, the diagnoses of which remained in schedule.
The Sponges referred to can be seen in the Museum of the South Australian
Institute at Adelaide,

(5) F. E. Schulze. L.c.

(6) //. /. Garter. L.c, p. 221.

156 AUSTRALIAN SPONGES DESCRIBED BY CARTER.

As the configuration of the canal system is not described and the
microscopic structure of the soft parts generally hardly referred to,
and as these are considered all-important by me, it is only natui'al
that I should not be able to utilize Carter's Essay. Just as it was
necessary that O. Schmidt compared Bowerband's species with his
own I find it advantageous to review Carter's essay from my point
of view, so that anyone may be enabled to make use of it. To
those who hold the views of PolejaefF, Vosmaer and myself, this
review will be most welcome. As I am in possession of extensive
collections and working the subject on the spot, I have thought
myself in a position to write this review.

ON THE FERTIIJZATION OF GOODENIA
HEDERACEA. (Sm.)

By Alex G. Hamilton, Esq.

Plate XXI.

My attention was drawn to this subject by reading Mr. Haviland's
paper on Goodenia ovata, in the Society's Pi^oceedings for June,
1884, and I examined a large number of specimens of G. hederacea
in all stages of growth, to ascertain if the method of fertilization
was similar to that described by Mr. Haviland (i.e. ), accomplished
by insects, or other extraneous means. 1 have so far, collected the
following plants of the Goodeniacece in this (the Mudgee) district ;
G. hederacea, G. heteromera, G. paniculata, Velleia faradoxa, F.
macrocalyx, and Damjnera stricta. Of these V. paradoxa, V.
macrocalyx ana the species under consideration are very generally
distributed over the district ; but the others are local in occurrence,
G. heteromera being only found in scattered patches on the banks
of the Cudgegong River, and G. paniculata and Dampiera stricta
being confined to sandstone at the head of Cooyal Creek and on the
Goodaman Range.

I have selected G. hederacea for experiment on account of its
being plentiful in my immediate neighbourhood.

On taking a very young bud, and carefully removing the calyx
and corolla, so as to expose the style, filaments and anthers, we
find the anthers, five in number, a little longer than the style and
closely clustered round it ; the style itself is in a rudimentary
condition as regards the indusium which is represented by a slight
shelf on the front and back of the flattened termination of the
style. The superior surface of this flattened part is the stigma
(see fig. 1). Taking a slightly older bud, w^e notice no alteration

158 ON THE FERTILIZATION OF GOODENIA HEDERACEA,

except that the ledge representing the fnture indusium has grown
up higher in the centre and extended to the ends (see fig. 2}. In
a still farther advanced bud the only change in the relative position
of the style anthf^rs is that the latter are slightly higher than
before, but in the style itself, a great deal of alteration is percep-
tible, the indusium being now higher than the stigma, and the
edges showing the hairs which are so striking a feature of the
mature organ (see fig. 3). We now examine a bud nearly ready
to open. Here we find the anthers full grown but not mature,
and leaning over the indusium (fig. 4) their ba&es being on a level
with the top of that organ, and the upper part of the filament
developed into a point which projects beyond the anther itself (see
fig. 5). The indusium is develoi)ed into a deep cup, the edges
being densely clothed with short thick hairs, and the outside
inferior surface having a quantity of longer and thinner hairs on
the centre (see fig. 6). At the bottom of the cup is the stigma,
now almost ready to receive the pollen. For the next stage, it is
necessary to choose a bud just beginning to show slits at the sides.
On removing the corolla the anthers will be found clasping the
indusium and the points (figs. 7 and 8) turned over into the cup
of the indusium, which is quite full of pollen. The anthers will
be seen to be quite empty, and if the parts be exposed to the air
for a short time (as would happen naturally by the fuller opening
of the bud) the filaments contract and twist and the anthers shrivel.
It will immediately strike the observer that the style must have
lengthened considerably and rapidly, as in all younger specimens
the bases of the anthers were on a level with, or above the cup,
and here it is the points of the anthers which are level with it.
Another noticeable feature is the packing of the pollen into the
cup — a point of which I shall have more to f-ay presently. Our
next step is to examine a fully open flower. The basal poi-tion of
the style is bent upwards so as to protrude the indusium through
the slit between the two upper lobes of the corolla. The anthers
are entirely empty, withered, and bent back through the slit, so
that they are outside of the flower — with them we have done. The
slit between the up[)er divisions of the corolla widens in the centre,

BY ALEX. G. HAMILTON, ESQ. 159

to permit the indusium to come out of the tube, but contracts
again beyond that, so that the edges are close together, and each
half of the lobe bulges forward so as to make conjointly, a hemi-
spherical cavity just in front of the indusium, to which it forms a
cover, completely cutting the indusium off from the outside of the
flower, as shown in the diagrammatic section (fig. 10). On
examining the mouth of the indusium, it will be found to be
narrower and more slit-like than in the last specimen. Now
examine a series of full-blown flowers of increasing ages, and the
mouth of the indusium v/ill be found to close more and more on
its load of pollen, while it still i-emains behind the barrier formed
by the upper lobe. At last it will be found quite closed, and then
the flower withers and the edges of the lobe shrink away from each
other allowing the indusium to once more project into the flower,
but its mouth is closed against ail intrusion. In this stage the
indusium has a flattened shape as in fig. 9.

From examining a very large number of the buds and flowers
in this way, I have come to the conclusion that fertilization is
effected in the following manner : — When the anthers are full
sized, and ready to burst, they bend towards each other over the
indusium so that their bases form a ring above the mouth of it, the
ring being a trifle less in diameter than the mouth. The style at
this time begins to lengthen rapidly forcing its way up through
the anthers, and by means of the fringe of hairs on the edge
scraping and brushing all the pollen out of the anthei's, the pollen
drops into the cup as the latter quickly grows upwards. This
packing of the pollen puzzled me greatly at first, for insects could
not possibly do it, and neither could the mere dropping in of the
pollen cause it to cohere so tightly as it does. As soon as the
anthers have discharged all their pollen, they wither and twist
outwards through the slit in the corolla ; and when the indusium
is filled with pollen, it begins to close and assume a flattened shape,
while at the same time the fringe of hairs slope over the mouth so
as to cover the pollen and retain it within the cup. Insect inter-
ference is provided against by the cover formed by the back lobe
11

160 ON THE FERTILIZATION OF GOODENIA HEDERACEA,

of the corolla ; and by the time the flower is withered and the
indusium once more projects into the tube, the cup is completely
protected by its closing.

On the whole this flower seems to me to exhibit a most
elaborate and beautiful series of contrivances to ensui-e fertiliza-
tion by its own pollen ; and not the least remarkable feature is
the fact that the same set of organs which in Gooclenia ovata
prevent self-fertilization, in G. hederacea ensure it. I am struck by
a remark in Mr. Haviland's paper to the effect that in G. ovata
when the indusium is outside the corolla, a touch in the tube
brings it into the proper position for insect fertilization, I tried
the experiment in the flower under consideration, by pushing a
camel hair pencil, the point of my finger and various pointed and
blunt articles into the tube of the corolla, but in no instance
would the back lobe open unless a considerable amount of force
was used. One thing puzzled me a good deal, and does so still,
viz., in two young buds the anthers were shorter than the style,
and in this case the brushing out of the pollen could not occur ;
but these being only found twice in the large number of buds I
dissected, I am inclined to think them merely accidental malfor-
mation. It is a significant fact that neither full anthers nor
empty indusia are ever found in open flowers.

I may say that to observe all the stages, it is necessary to
examine a very large number of specimens, and even then but few
buds will be found just at the critical point when the anthers are
being emptied by the elongating of the style. This leads me to
think that the latter stages of the process are gone through
rapidly. As examination and note taking in the field are irksome
I always collect all the flowers and buds procurable and keep them
in small bottles or homoeopathic medicine tubes with a piece of
wet lint. If then tightly corked they will keep fordaj-s and can
be examined at leisure. In conclusion I may be allowed to express
a wish that some of the other members of the Society would
examine this flower and see if their experience tallies with mine.
Dr. Woolls' mentions it asbeingfound in the County of Cumberland,

BY ALEX. G. HAMILTON, ESQ. 161

and it would be interesting to discover if there is any difference
between the same species in coast and inland specimens.

REFERENCES TO PLATE XXI.

Fig. 1. — From young bud showing rudiment of indusium, St. Stigma in.

indusium, x 20.
Fig. 2. — Side, front, and top of indusium in further advanced bud, x 10.
Fig. 3. — Front and side in older bud, x 8.
Fig. 4. — Arrangement of anthers and indusium in nearly full-grown

bud, X 8.
Fig. 5. — Anther showing point which afterwards hooks over indusium, x 10.
Fig. 6. — Mature indusium, x 10.
Figs. 7 and 8. — Arrangement of anthers in full grown bud just opening ;

indusium full of pollen, x 8.
Fig. 9. — Fertilized and closed indusium, x 8.
Fig. 10. — Diagrammatic section of open flower, showing fold of upper lobe

of corolla, which forms a cover for indusium, ex, calyx an.

anthers ; in indusium ; bl. upper lobe ; cv. cover ; ul. under

lobe, X 2.

162 NOTES ON THE HABITS OP BIRDS BREEDING IN N.S.W.,

NOTES ON THE HABITS, &c., OF BIRDS BREEDING IN
THE INTERIOR OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

By K, H. Bennett, Esq.

1, Falco subniger.

As very little seems to be known of the habits, of this the
fiercest and most rapacious of oxir falcons, perhaps a few notes on
the subject would be of interest. I will premise my remax'ks by
stating that I have for many years resided in a locality where these
birds^ at certain times of the year are tolerably numerous (the
Lachlan River), and I have thus had many opportunities of
observing their habits, &c. The first thing that strikes an
observer with regard to this bird is its extraordinarily swift flight,
almost equalling that of Cyjiselus ; and the next its powers of
endurance on the wing, for like the frigate bird, it passes by far
the greater part of the day (at any rate) on the wing, and it is
indeed a rare thing to see a black falcon perched.

I have said that it is tolerably numerous at certain times — for
here they are undoubtedly migratory, arriving about the beginning
of September in company with the small red quail Turnix velox, on
which it preys; and departing about February. Quail and the young
of birds frequenting the plains, such as Anthus, Cincloramphus,
EjihtJdaunra aurifrons, (&c., constitute its chief prey, but only the
young, as a rule of any but quail, for great as are the falcons
powers of flight, he has more than a match in the adults of any of
the above mentioned birds, for they dodge and turn so quickly that
the falcon has no chance with them, and so well does he know this,
that it is only when rendered desperate by hunger that he will ever
attempt to catch one, and much more rarely it is that he is
successful, and when unassisted by his mate the chase may be set
down as hopeless, for just as he is on the point of clutching hia
prey, by a sudden turn it eludes his grasp and goes sailing ofi" in
quite another direction, whilst the bafiled falcon is carried by its

BY H. K. BENNETT, ESQ. 163

own impetus in the opposite ; it is very I'arely indeed that the
falcon makes a second attempt after his failure, but I have
occasionally seen one do so again and again, with no better success,
until at last the pursuit is given up in disgust. On one occasion
a lark. Anthus australis, defied the united efforts of no less than
three falcons, and for a considerable time, the lark simply avoiding
by a quick turn each falcon's stroke, but finally it fell a victim,
completely tired out. One peculiarity of this bird, not shared
by any others of the family, that I am aware of, is its habit
when watching for prey of frequently ascending to such a great
height as to be invisible, which shows the wonderful power of
vision possessed by this bird. Many and many a time when on
the plains, miles from any timber, with a flock of sheep,
" camped," I have carefully scanned the sky overhead and around
to see if a falcon was visible, but not a speck has met my
gaze in any direction. On starting to drive the sheep and almost
immediately have they disturbed a quail, a rushing sound would
be heard overhead, and on looking up a dark object would be seen
descending with fearful rapidity, and so compressed or gathered
together, as to render any one unacqiiainted with this bird unable
to say what the object was ; when some thirty or forty feet from
the ground the descent is arrested, and by a sudden movement and
expansion of wings the falcon assumes a horizontal attitude and
the chase commences, which as a rule, results in the speedy
capture, and the falcon by a series of graceful curves again
mounts into the air, devouring its prey as it ascends, an occasional
tuft of blood stained feathers slowly wafted earthwards, evidencing
its success ; the above operation being repeated when the next
quail, or some young bird is flushed. Sometimes however,
the falcon is baulked by the quarry suddenly dropping into some
sheltering salt bush (rarely more than a foot or eighteen inches
high), when this is the case the falcon quickly ai-rests its flight,
and closing its wings by a powerful movement shoots perpen-
dicularly into the air for some distance, and then expanding its
wings hovers for a short time over the bush in which its pi'ey has
taken refuge. Should it be a scanty one and the unfortunate bird

164 NOTES ON THE HABITS OP BIRDS BREEDING IN N.S.W.,

be visible, the falcon slowly descends, alighting on the top of
the bush and flapping its outstretched wings, drives the terrified
victim out, when it is speedily clutched in the powerful talons of
its remorseless foe. Should the bush prove too dense, and the
bird not to be seen, the falcon gives it up and mounts skywaid
again. As an instance of the falcon's rapacity, I enclose the
following clipping, which I contributed to the Naturalists Column
of the " Queenslander " some years since, merely adding that the
hawk mentioned as captured by the falcon was Elanus scrvptus : —
" As I see that you invite correspondence on the fauna of
Australia, permit me to offer my experience on the " Plague of
Rats," and also of a species of hawk which accompanied and preyed
upon them. In the year 1864, when the Lachlan of the back country
was first occiipied, these rats were found in incredible numbers all
over the vast plains of that region, where they bxtrrowed in the
soft soil or made nests of grass in the dwarf saltbushes with which
the plains were thickly covered. These vermin were soon found a
great nuisance by the destruction they caused in rations, saddles,
&c., &c., and although we " legislated " against them and introduced
cats, and scattered poison with a liberal hand, still the nuisance
was imabated. Things went on in this manner for some six or
eight months, when the rats — having, I suppose, fulfilled their
mission, whatever that may have been — disappeared, as did also
the hawks and owls. The rats and owls have not appeared here
since, but the hawks came in small numbers on a subsequent
occasion. The plumage of these hawks on the breast and under
parts was pure white, the back — with the exception of the shoulder
coverts — light grey, almost white, the shoulder coverts black.
They spent the greater part of the day on the branches of the
dead pine-trees, on which so closely were they packed that, at a
distance, and with their breasts turned towards the observer, the
branches looked as if covered with snow. They wei'e generally
very sluggish and inactive, and would sit for hours motionless. I
have often seen the little blackboys knocking them off on one side
of a tree with their boomerangs, while those on the other side
remained perfectly still, and apparently quite unconscious of

BY H. K. BENNETT, ESQ. 165

danger. I have frequently fired amongst them with a rifle, killing
three or four at a shot, and the others have not stirred."

"As an instance of their sluggishness or stupidity I may mention
that I one day saw a black falcon — one of the swiftest and most
powerful of our falcons — dash into a number of them perched on a
dry pine-tree, close to the house, and clutch one in its sharp talons ]
both birds fell to the ground, and after struggling for a few minutes
the falcon rose heavily and flew off" with its prey ; the other hawks
sat perfectly still all through the performance. This went on for
several days, the falcon each time securing a victim. Noticing
that the falcon's visits occurred at about the same hour daily, I
determined to try and capture both the falcon and his prey. With
this object I secreted myself in some thick bushes close to the foot
of the tree on which the hawks sat. I had not long to wait, for
soon falcon and hawk came struggling down within a few feet of
where I was concealed, and I sprang out and caught one of the pre-
viously outstretched wings of the Falcon. So fierce was his clutch
that I had difiiculty in releasing the hawk, which, though severely
wounded, had sufiicient strength to make ofi". I cut the falcon's
wings and kept him in confinement for some time, but he was so
fierce and intractable that I got disgusted with him, and ended his
career."

" I fancy these cases of one bird of prey attacking another with
the intention of feasting on him are very rare ; in all my wander-
ings I never saw but one other instance of the kind, and in that
case the aggressor was a peregrine falcon (1) and the bird attacked
a white-fronted owl (2) ; the latter, however, after a sharp tussle,
managed to free himself. But I am digressing, for which I
humbly crave pardon ; and will now return to the hawks. As I
have said, these birds would sit for the greater part of the day
motionless, but at a certain hour in the afternoon they simul-
taneously take wing, and by a series of graceful circles gradually
rise to a great height, until their white breasts became mere
specs in the blue sky. After gyrating about at that height for

(1) Falco melanogenys, (2) Strix ddicatulus.

166 NOTES ON THE HABITS OP BIRDS BREEDING IN N.S.W.,

some time, they would descend in the same manner and resume
their perch, sitting there until dusk, when they would fly out
on the plain, over which they might be observed hovering
like sea-gulls, and every now and then pouncing down upon a
rodent, which they devour whilst on the wing, By sunrise the
next morning they all would be on their accustomed perches.
The number of rats destroyed by these birds must have been very
great, for the ground beneath the trees they frequented was
thickly covered with the balls of fur which, like the owl, they
have the power of ejecting from their stomachs. The native dogs
at that time were very numerous, and used to feed upon the rats
(I haven taken eleven from the stomach of one dog). Yet, not-
withstanding dogs, hawks, owls, cats, and poison, there was no
perceptible diminution in their numbers for some months, when
all at once it was noticed that both they and the hawks had
greatly decreased, and within a week of that time not a rat or
hawk was to be seen, and the rats have not appeared since.
Where did they go 1

" In 1870 (the year of the great floods here) we had a similar
visitation, but this time it was mice instead of rats. They made
their appearance early in January of that year, but not in great
numbers at first ; these, I suppose, were the avant couriers of the
countless swarms which were soon to follow, for by the middle of
February the whole country was literally alive with them, and the
devastation they made in flour, sugar, and other things was
terrible. This invasion lasted for seven or eight months, when
they gradually and almost entirely disappeared ; but ' there are
still some few remaining who remind of the past.' A few of the
hawks to which I have alluded came with the mice, but did not
stay, departing long before the latter. Some idea of the numbers
of the mice may be formed when I state that one day being over
at the adjoining station my friend informed me that he had taken
4000 dead ones out of the store that morning, the result of one
night's poisoning ; he assured me that he had counted them as the
men picked them up."

BY H. K. BENNETT, ESQ. 167

As another instance, a friend of mine (who is a keen observer)
told me that he was driving a small lot of sheep, and a falcon had
made several ineffectual efforts to catch a lark, and whilst in pursuit
of it some distance ahead of the sheep, they disturbed a black duck,
Amis superciliosa, from her nest under a cotton bush, and she flew
off in the direction the falcon had gone ; the latter caught sight of
her, and leaving the lark turned and made for the duck, and so
great was the concussion when they met that they fell to the
ground, and my friend on riding up found both dead.

The black falcon sometimes breeds here but not often, for during
my long residence (over 20 years) in this locality I have only met
with their nests on four occasions (one only a few days since). It
breeds in September and lays four eggs which much resemble those
of Hieracidea orientatis.

The nest I recently found was a clear case of appropriation, as
last year it was occupied by a pair of Gypoictinia melanosternum,
the falcons had possession however, this year, and the nest contained
four eggs. Immediately beneath the edge of the nest a pair of
Xerophila leucopsis had constructed theirs, which contained young,
and the old birds were flying in and out apparently quite uncon-
cerned at the proximity of their dangerous neighbours well knowing
that the intercices between the large sticks of which the upper
nest was composed afforded them a secure asylum.

The habit of builing beneath the large nests of the hawk
family is common with several species of small birds, but although
the raven Corone australis, constructs a nest as large as many
species of hawks, yet these small birds nests are never found
beneath them, instinct teaching the builders that their eggs or
young would not be safe even there from this cunning bird, and
in instances where they have built their nests beneath those of
hawks, I have noticed that none are tenanted except in cases
where the upper structure has also- been occupied by the hawk, the
presence of whom effectually keep the crows away.

A large flat-winged Dipterous parasite infests the black falcon.
I have seen a somewliat similar insect on the other birds but not
nearly so large as that infesting the falcon, it moves about sideways
under the feathers with extraordinary rapidity.

168 notes on the habits of birds breeding in n.s.w.,

2. Glareola-grallaria.

This somewhat singular bird is one of the few migratory species
that visit this part of the colony and remain during the intense
heat of summer. As a rule it arrives towards the end of
September and departs about the end of February. During that
interval it breeds, and the places chosen for this purpose, and in
fact its habitat during its stay are the bare patches of ground,
entirely destitute of vegetation, so frequent on the plains here.
Some of these bare patches are of considerable extent, and the
surface of the ground is broken up into countless small pieces,
from the size of a pea to that of a walnut, giving the appearance
of having been chipped over with a hoe. This is partly due to
the nature of the soil and to the intense heat and dryness of the
climate which causes the surface to crack in all directions and
become quite loose. It is on these loose patches that the Glareola
deposits its eggs, 2 in number. It makes no nest, but simply
lays its eggs on the bare surface of the loose broken ground, and
so much do they assimilate in form and colour to the surrounding
lumps of earth that unless the bird is seen to move off them a
person might walk on them and not observe them, and on several
occasions I have taken my eyes olf the spot for a few seconds and
then had considerable difficulty in distinguishing the eggs again.
As a rule the eggs are laid in October, but this year, 1884, for the
first time, I obtained them in September. Usually it is very shy,
but during the period of incubation it looses this shyness and both
parent birds will allow themselves to be approached quite closely
and seem utterly regardless of danger in their anxiety to protect
their eggs or young. In fact I have seen the female bird so loath
to quit the eggs that it was only when I touched her with my
hand that she would quit the nest, pecking savagely at my
hand several times before she did so ; the male bird in the mean
time laying flat on the ground, with outstretched wings, a few feet
ofi", uttering the most plaintive cries.

The young in the earlier stages are exceedingly helpless, and
although the colour of their down so closely resembles that of the

BY H. K, BENNETT, ESQ. 169

loose pieces of earth amongst which thej were hatched that when
motionless they ai-e undistinguishable, still their slightest movement
would possibly attract the eye of some passing hawk or crow, and
to guard against this danger, the old birds conduct them as speedily
as possible to one of the numerous holes in the ground to be found
all over the plains (the mouth of some deserted burrow is a
favourite place) into this hole the young are led and there they
remain until they are able to fly. When the young are concealed
in one of these holes, one or both of the old birds may always be
seen close by and on the approach of danger I have frequently
seen both take refuge in the hole and on watching for a short
time have seen one or both come cautiously out again only to
disappear once more on noticing me. This bird is the only living
creature I know of, that seems to revel in the intense heat of mid-
summer in this locality for when every other living animal has
sought shelter from the withering mid-day sun, it may be observed
running briskly about on the bare red patches I have described,
when the surface of the ground is so hot that a man could scarcely
bear his hand on it, in fact the hotter the day the more this
feathered salamander seems to enjoy it. It however, requires a
good deal of water for it drinks several times during the day, and
oftsn travels many miles going to and returning from the tanks
containing water, and numbers can be obtained by waiting at the
water until they come to drink.

These birds run with great rapidity when in quest of food, &c.,
and suddenly pausing, the body undulates for some seconds as if
poised on delicate springs when the running is again resumed. Its
flight which appears somewhat laboured from the extreme length
of wing is nevertheless light and buoyant and is characterised by
the same erratic zig-zag motions so noticeable in the Eurostopodidm.
Its food consists of insects which are captured both on the ground
and on the wing, the bird sometimes running along the ground in
pursuit, and springing up to the height of a foot or moi-e as the
insect rises, occasionally towering to a considerable altitude as
some flying insect attracts its attention returning to the ground in
the skimming zig-zag manner before described.

170 THE GEOLOGY OF DUBBO,

THE GEOLOGY OF DUBBO.
By the Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.G.S.

(Plates 22 and 23.)

latroduction. — Dnbbo is situated on the verge of the gi'eat alluvial
which characterise the interior of New South Wales. A few
miles to the north-west, we see, as it were for the last time, the
older I'ocks before they are lost, as truly as if they dipped under
the sea. The general aspect of the country is level. There are
no mountains, and the few hills which diversify the otherwise
almost uniform level are simply patches of basalt or of a veiy
ferruginous conglomerate which have been able to resist the
denuding influences better than the prevailing sandstones.

The average height above the sea of the country, immediately about
Dubbo, may be taken at 900 feet. Although not situated exactly on
the plains which extend hence towards the west and north-west,
yet the same causes which have been at work to form those plains
are very marked in their efi'ects about Dubbo. In other words
the present physical features of the country are due more to a
filling up process than to the effects of denudation. The pre-
cipitous and rugged country about the Upper Macquarie, the
chains of basalt capped hills in the Bathurst district, and all the
surfaces which form the valley of the river down to Wellington
have been carved into their present shapes by the subaerial
influences of air, frost, rain and rivers. Near Dubl)o we might
draw the line which would show the limit of deposition, denu-
dation and deposition being synchronous and co-equal. The
basaltic hills referred to have their representatives at Dubbo,
but with their summits barely on a level with the surrounding
country.

Frevioics Observers. — Mr. Stutchbury, when in theemployment of
the New South Wales Government, visited the coal seams which

BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN, P.G.S. 171

crop out on the Talbragar River, about 28 miles north-east from
the town. He considered the seams exposed as valueless, but
believed them to represent some part of the great coal formation
of the colony. In February, 1870, Prof. Thomson, when on a
visit to Wellington district, examined some specimens (forwarded
to him by Mr. James Samuels) which he labelled '' Fossil Plants
similar to some found in the coal measures at Talbragar."

Rev. W. B. Clarke, in the third edition of the " Sedimentary
Formation," (1875) says he traced the Hawkesbury rocks at
intervals all along the escarpments to the westward of Sydney
from the latitude of the Clyde River to that of Talbragar.

Mr.G. S. Wilkinson, F.G.S.,F.L.S., the present head of the Geolo-
gical Survey, visited the Dubbo district in 1880. In his progress
report for that year he says " Immediately about Dubbo the forma-
tion consists of the Hawkesbury formation, covered in places with
basalt and auriferous tertiary gravels, but on the Talbragar River,
about 12 miles north-east of Dubbo, the Hawkesbury rocks are
seen over-lying the coal measures, containing seams of inferior
coal; there is little doubt therefore but that the coal measures will
be found underlying the Hawkesbury rocks in the vicinity of
Dubbo, but at what depth can only be ascertained by boring or
sinking."

Mr. E. F. Pittman, who examined the same localities, in
company with Mr. Wilkinson, says (Annual Report Department
of Mines, New South Wales, 1880, p. 243) " From Dubbo the
road via Cobborah to the Castlereagh lies over the Hawkesbury
sandstone, with overlying Pleistocene drift and patches of basalt.'

" About Heane's Station there are outcrops of what appears to
be the true coal measures. These are well seen in section with small
seams of poor coal at Ballimore on the Talbragar about 6 miles
from Mr. Heane's, though I could find no fossils except some faint
impressions of plant stems.

" South of Dubbo the Hawkesbury sandstone extends for about
10 miles (with occasional cappings of basalt) and then gives place
to rocks of Silurian age."

172 THE GEOLOGY OP DUBBO,

" The country between Diibbo and the Castlereagh appears to be
formed of a coal basin, the centre of which is situated a few miles
north of Dubbo, and it is quite probable that the thin seams of
coal seen in the cliff at Ballimore may overlie others of a payable
chai-acter."

In February 1883 the Rev. J. E. Tenison- Woods describes some
fossils from this district. [L. S., N.S.W.] This with my own
short paper (read on the 26th March) seems to be all at present
known of the Geology of Dubbo.

Distribution of Rocks. — Sandstone is the prevailing formation.
It is not known exactly how far it extends towards the north-east.
Due east from Dubbo it extends about 30 miles and then gives
place to Silurian limestones and slates. The sandstones differ very
much in texture and composition in different localities. Generally
it is hard and durable when it lies under, or is in close proximity
to basalt. At Barbigal and at Troy a quartzite with a scarcely
perceptible granular structure is developed in this way, while in
many other place it is so friable as to weather into a shapeless mass
after a few months exposure.

When exposed along creeks or in cuttings it presents all the
peculiar characteristics of the Hawkesbury sandstone. The faces
of the rocks are excavated by atmospheric influences and the
rending effects of crystallising salts, into caves and hollows ; the
false bedding, peculiar ironstone bands, and concretions, are
strongly suggestive of the sandstones on the eastern slopes of
the mountains.

Conglomerates are met with at various levels in the series but
never preserving their character over any considerable area. The
shingle of an old water-course is exposed on the Talbragar near
Murrungundy. The deposition and " lie " of the shingle show— if
a solitary instance is of any value — the drainage to have been in the
same direction as in the existing river systeni. A thick bed of
conglomerate caps the hills over the coal at Ballimore.

Surface indications of conglomerates are apt to mislead casual
observers in the country about Dubbo. In travelling over the

BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAX, F.G.S. 173

country known as Ironbark Ridges the formation seems to
consist of very thick beds of conglomerates. It is visible in
the valleys and on the hill tops — quartz and felspar pebbles
cemented by a ferruginous paste. On sinking it is found to be
a comparatively thin layer on the surface. The explanation is that
the pebbles are probably all that remain there of many hundred
feet of rock through which they were distributed. The cementing
is an altogether subsequent work.

It was reported that a thick bed or beds of conglomerate was
cut through in the diamond drill bore put down near Dubbo by
the Railway Department, but from an examination of the cores, I
can say that the conglomerate so called barely meiits to be
described as a pebbly sandstone. True conglomerate is an excep-
tional formation in the District.

Between the Brick Yards platform and Murrumbidgeree Station
the Palaeozoic rocks disappear and the first section of the sandstone
is seen.

This is the extreme edge of the basin, for limestone crops out in
a creek a few yards to the north of the railway fence. From this
the sandstones and shales continue, with occasional patches of
basalt, until granite is met at 289-10 miles. Throughout this
distance every visible section shows wavy beds forming small
basins without any appreciable general dip. Nowhere is the dip
greater than 5°.

Before meeting the granite at 289 miles a remarkable instance
of metamorphism may be seen. A ferruginous i-ock with irregular
concretions or rather patches of darker colour, contains water worn
pebbles. A few chains further it grows more compact and a
crystalline structure is gradually developed. Further on it might
be called a Binary Granite with flesh coloured felspar.

Beyond this again the sandstone' and ferruginous grits appear,
then granite continues for about six miles.

About 293-60 miles an exceptional condition presents itself.
Instead of the usual friable and horizontal beds, the rocks, compact

174 THE GKOLOGY OF DUBBO,

and slaty and not unlike some uppei* Silurian and Devonian beds
in other parts of the Colony, are inclined at an angle varying
from 58*^ to 63° dipping to the north-west. This is the only
instance of the kind in the district. It is not impossible that they
might represent the older rocks appearing again at this the other
extremity of the basin. I could find no fossils. A more probable
opinion is that they are part of the Dubbo series, tilted to their
present position by an outliurst of basalt. The nearest visible
rock is granite, but for many reasons it is impossible to think the
granite of later origin than the sandstones. The inclined rocks
form an isolated hill, a fact which increases the difficulty of
determining either their relative age or the cause of the disturbance.
An additional interest is attached to these beds from the fact that
they dip under the great plains at this point.

Basalt covers about one tenth of the area of the country imme-
diately around Dubbo. The isolated patches on the right bank of
the river are part of one great stream that flowed down the old
river valley. The basalt on the left bank of the Macquarie seems
to be an older flow. A wall of vesicular basalt 40 feet in height
may be seen on the Mogrigui Creek.

On Gearie Station near Murrumbidgeree there is an isolated
conical hill, which is I have no doubt an old volcanic " neck," It
is very different from the usual table-topped basalt-crowned hills
that may be seen from its summit, and which are the remains of a
great basaltic plateau.

A peculiar appearance is often presented when the surface of the
basalt is weathered into a gentle slope. The surface of the ground
resembles a ploughed field. The ridges are always parallel but often
curved at sharp angles, though still preserving their parallelism. The
average height of the ridges is about five inches or less from crest to
troiigh, and they vary in width from six to eighteen inches. No
satisfactory explanation as to the cause has yet been given. I
would suggest that the appearance is connected with the jointings
of the basalt below. The furrows do not always follow the incline

BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN, F.G.S.

175

on the surface, so they cannot be clue to the effect of running
water. "We must only suppose that joints in the basalt are being
filled with clays from the surface by rain waters as they filter
through, and that every furrow marks the position of a joint in
the cooled lava stream.

Division of the Strata. — Although surface indications would
lead to the belief that all the rocks about Dubbo should be
referred to the same age, we have ample evidence to enable us to
distinguish two formations — the Dubbo sandstones and the Balli-
more coal basin.

The diamond drill boring put down near the town of Dubbo
showed the following section. A section I measured at Ballimore
gives the following succession : —

Gvit

Ironstone

White shale and ferruginous sandstone

Ironstone

Impure fireclay

Ironstone

Fireclay

Ironstone band ...

Impure fireclay

Irregular ironstone bands

ferruginous sandstones and shales

White fireclay ...

Talus

The fossils are equally distinct.

Fossils prom Dubbo,

Thinnfeldia odontopteroides.

media.
Odontojjteris macrojjhylla.
Alethopteris australis.
Hymeno2^hyllites, sp.
Walchia, sp.
12

25

0

0

6

18

0

1

0

3

6

0

6

3

2

1

6

6

0

U

0

1

3

20

0

176 the geology of dubbo,

Fossils from Ballimore.

Sphenopteris crehra,

glossophylla.
Neuropteris australis.
Alethopteris currani.
concinna.
Merianoj)teris major.
Walchia milneana.

In correlating these formations with others we have to depend
altogether on the fossils. To facilitate comparison I have compiled
the table (A) appended, which shows at a glance what fossils are
common to any two localities, where our Mesozoic rocks are
developed. Authority or reference is given for every species
enumerated. Dr. Feistmantel's larger work is so inaccessible to
students outside Sydney, that I refer to his paper in the volume
of our Eoyal Society for the year 1880.

BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN, F.G.S.

177

•ds '■Biipx'BjVi

•en'E9iqij\[ 'Biipj'BAX.

3a:jTn^H<3oSii82

•cIs 'sa^^Turezopoj

•su'Bq.sip s9:nuii3Zopo<i

•ds ''Biuai{oi8j^

•■Biqnp 131119110181^3

•TJiIojTmia:^ sija^dooaj

•ds%%'Buivn'ei/A. sia9:;doiia::jojo'Bj\[

•iggj^urep su9^doiu9'BX

•JOC-BJ^ SIJ9:;d0U'BU9J\[

•ds 'su9^do^uopo

•'BqXqdoao'Biu sia9!jdo:jnopo

••eni^qdoaoTiu si.i9^do^uopo

•ds 'su9q.dou9qdg

•-B^l^qdossoxS siJ9:jdou9qdg

•'Bjq9JD STjg^^dougqdg

•■Bij-BSaoig s{.i9:;dou9qdg
•sq'BJi^sn'B 'B09q!^oqj<;q<j

•ds ''B09q^0[{^qj

-Buinouoo 'B09q:;o[Xifqj

•T3tp9ui 'Gippjuuiqx

•S9pioi9:^do:^uopo 'eippjniiiqj^

•lU'BJJtio su9:jdoq:^9^Y

-BnuiouoD sia9:}doq!^9^Y

•sq'Ba^sn'B su9:jdoq^9[y

+ : : : :

+ 2+ i •

^ +

C5 4- '-'.

<0 J- !>•

: 55 +

178 THE GEOLOGY OP DUBBO,

Notes to Table A.

I, 2, 3. Tenison- Woods, Lin. See, N.S.W., Vol. VIII., p. 107.

4. Wilkinson. Notes on Geol., N.S.W., p. 55, and in Annual
Rep. Dep. Mines, 1880, p. 239. Pittman. Rep. Dep. Mines,
1880, p. 244. Feistmantel, Proc. Royal Soc, N.S.W., 1880.

5. Same refs. as 4. Also Tenison- Woods, Lin. Soc, N.S.W.,
Vol. VIIL, pp. 54-112.

6. Refs. as 4.

8. Notes Geol., N.S.W., p. 54.

9, 10. Ditto, and Feistmantel, Proc. Royal Soc, N.S.W., 1880.

II, Notes on Geol, N.S.W., p. 54. Tenison- Woods. Royal
Soc, N.S.W., 1883, p. 82.

12, 13. Notes on Geol., N.S.W., p. 54. Feistmantel. Royal
Soc, 1880.

14. Ditto, and Tenison- Woods. Proc Royal Soc, 1883, p. 82.

15. Wilkinson. Notes on Geol., N.S.W., p. 54.

17. Pittmann. Ann. Rep. Dep. Mines, 1880, p. 244.

18. Tenison- Woods. Royal Soc, N.S.W., 1883, p. 82.

19. Tenison- Woods. Royal Soc, 1883, p. 82. Feistmantel.
Royal Soc, 1880.

21. Tenison- Woods. Lin. Soc, Vol VIIL, p. 74. Royal
Soc, N.S.W., 18S3, p. 82.

22. Royal Soc, 1883, p. 82.

23. 24, 25. Ditto ditto.

26. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol IX., p. 251.

27, 28, 29, 30, 31. Tenison-Woods. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol
VIIL, p. 103. Royal Soc, 1883, p. 82.

32. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. IX., p. 250.

33. Ann. Rep. Dept. Mines, 1880, p. 239.

34. Feistmantel. Royal Soc, 1880.

35. Tenison-Woods. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 75.

36. Refs. as 35, pp. 54-112.

BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN, F.G.S. 179

37. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 112.

38. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 113.

39. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 114.

40. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 118.

41. Tenison-Woods. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 106.
Royal Soc, N.S.W., 1883, p, 82.

43. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 94.

44. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 163,

45. 46. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 54,

47. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 105, and Cavruther's
Qutly. Jour. Geol. Soc, Vol. XXVIIL, p. 355.

48. Mines and Mineral Stat., 1875, p. 178. (In later editions
Mr. Clarke substitutes name Voltzia.)

Age of Formations. — Although lithological resemblances are not
always a safe guide in identifying widely separated formations,
3'^et, before any fossils were found, the general opinion was that
the Hawkesbury and Dubbo sandstones were of the same age.
Fossils have since been discovered which confirm that opinion.
The age of the Ballimore coal beds is not so easily determined.
As may be seen from table A, Dubbo and Ballimore have not one
fossil plant common to the two places. A comparison with New-
castle or Bowenfels is out of the question. No trace of Glossopteris
is known from Ballimore. But the general aspect of the Balli-
more fossils would lead me to think that Ballimore is a connecting
link between the Upper Coal and the Hawkesbury rocks, that is,
if the Clarence River beds are really newer than Hawkesbury
sandstone.

The following fossils are recorded from the Clarence : — Alethop-
teris australis, Thinnfeldia odontopteroides, Spheno2')teris, sjo.
Tceniopteris Daintreei, Zeugophyllites, Walchia. If we except
Taeniopteris they differ in no way "from the Hawkesbury fossils.
It is not easy to see why the former are considered as of Jurassic
and the latter of Triassic age. The table appended (B) shows how
the formations referred to in this paper ai'e correlated by living

180

THE GEOLOGY OF DUBBO,

geologists. Hector's views are taken from an article by him in the
Geological Mag., Jan. 1882, p. 28. Tiie figures account for the
others. It should be remarked that when mention is made of the
lower carbonifei'ous at Cowra, the country near that town generally
is not to be understood, but only a well-defined l)elt running north
and south, which is well seen on the Grenfel road five miles from
Cowra.

TABLE B.

Wilkinson.

Hector. Tenison-Woods.

Jurassic

- middle

Clarence (9)

Clarence )
Jerusalem Coal. T. }

Hawkesbury & Clarence
& Ipswich (1)

^ lower

Cape Patterson, V. )

oolite

Ballimore, Burnett (2)

lias

Triassic

Hawkesbury &
Wianamatta (4)

Wianamatta

Newcastle Bowenfels(3)

Permian

Newcastle &

Hawkesbury

Greta, Anvil & Stoney

upper

lUawarra (8)

Creeks (4)

lower

Newcastle, Stoney
Creek & Wollongong

Carboniferous

upper

Greta and Anvil Creeks,
WestMaitland (7)

lower

Cowra, Canowindra (6)

Port Stephens

Stroud, Manning,
Cowra, Canowindra (5)

Notes to (B) Table.

1. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. VIIL, p. 54-55. Royal Soc.
N.S.W., 1883, p. 82.

2. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., p. 53.

3. p. 52.

4. Notes on Geol N.S.W., p. 53.

5-6. Lin. Soc, N.S.W., Vol VIIL, p. 52.
6-7. Notes on Geol. N.S.W., p. 44.

8. p. 51.

9. p. 55.

RY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN, F.G.S. 181

Prof. Stephens (Lin. Soc. N. S. Wales, Yol. VIII., p. 527) has
reason for thinking that some beds at the Clarence River are of
more recent elate than are usually supposed. He mentions fossil
trunks resembling pines and leaves not unlike some of the Pandanece
and a shell belonging to the Unionidce. The presence of a species
of Unio could hardly prove anything as to the age of the beds, for
the family has a long range in time. The Pandanece date from
Jurassic times, and it will be remembered that TJmmfeldia was
probably a conifer. It is only fair to state that Prof. Stephens
did not mention the fossils in support of the age. He mei"ely
recorded their presence.

So far, no two geologists are agreed as to the age of the
Hawkesbury sandstone. But all are agreed as to the sequence of
the Mesozoic formations, as follows : — Newcastle, Hawkesbury and
Wianamatta, and Clarence River. Until I discovered the Ballimore
fossils, (which were at once described by the Rev. J. E. Tenison-
Woods) I was of opinion that the sequence just named was the true
one. Now, I can see no reason for separating the Hawkesbury and
Clarence by any great interval, and more, I think the Clarence is
the older of the two. The Ballimore coal field with its own
marked flora, I take to be older than either. In my opinion this
represents the true successions of our Mesozoic rocks, jjroceeding
downwards.

1. Hawkesbury and Wianamatta —

With Alethopteris australts, Thinnjeldia odontopteroides,
Phyllothecaconcinna, Macrotceniopleris Wianamattce, Podo-
zamites distans.

2. Clarence—

With Alethopteris australts, Thinnfeldia odontopteroides,
Sphenopteris sp , Tceniopteris Daintreei, Zeugophyllites
and Walchia.

3. Ballimore —

With Alethopteris concinna, A. currant, Sphenopteris
crebra, S. glossophylla, Merianojyteris major, Walchia
milneana.

182 the geology of dubbo,

4. Glossopteris Beds, Upper Coal Measures—

With Glosso2}teris, Vertebraria, Gangamopteris.

Origin of the Duhho Sandstone, — Having now described the
various appearances and the physical characteristics of the sand-
stones, we may proceed to enquire if any light can be thrown on
their origin. Mr. A . G. Green remarks in his Physical Geology
that if accumulations of blown sand be preserved it might be
difficult to distinguished them from sandstones formed beneath
water, unless they happened to contain land shells or land plants
in the position in which they grew. In one respect however, they
do differ. The grains are usually far more clearly rounded in
blown sand than in subaqueous sandstones. I may state at once
that the generally received opinion is that the Dubbo sandstones
are like in origin to the sandstones about Sydney — fresh water or
estuarine. I have given some attention to the matter, and excepting
the fact that the stratification and false bedding are not unlike the
stratification and false bedding exhibited in well known subaqueous
rocks, there is no evidence whatever to offer in support of such an
origin.

Fossils are plentiful enough, but they are all land plants. They
are in such a wonderful state of preservation and so perfect (as
the members will remember from specimens exhibited at a former
meeting) that they could not have been drifted from any distance
— they must have grown where we find them. The thin seams of
coal represent old land surfaces. No fresh water or marine fossil
has ever been discovered. As far as the evidence goes, we are only
justified in considering the formation as Terrestrial in its origin.

The views, and the arguments by which they are supported, of
the Rev. J. C. Tenison-Woods are too well known to i-equire
more than a reference here, but I may state that, as far as my
observations go, no difficulties more weighty than those already
urged will be furnished by the Dubbo rocks. It has been
suggested in Mr. Tenison-Wood's paper that were it not for
internal metamorphism the appearance of the sand grains would
afford a clue to the origin of the sandstones. Daubree, Sorby

BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN, F.G.S. 183

and Phillips all agree that blown sand, by its rounded and abraded
particles can be dihtinguished from river-borne and other suba-
queous sands. In the case of the Hawkesbury sandstone the once
abraded and rounded grains may have been subjected to such
conditions as would induce subsequent crystallisation. But we are
aware of no means by which angular or crystalline particles could
become rounded after deposition, A few rounded and abraded
grains, even when the great mass of the rock is crystallised, would,
to my mind, go far to uphold the -^olian theory, more especially
when considered in the light of other facts equally significant.
Rounded and abraded grains are to be found in the Dubbo sand-
stones. The slide I exhibit is a fairly typical one. The sand grains
were well washed and spread on paper previously brushed over with
gum. Portions containing seemingly abraded particles were then
cut from the sheet.

Mr. J. Milne, in his notes on the Sinaitic Peninsula (Q. J. G.
Soc, Vol. XXXI., p. 18.) mentions the definite character which
blown sand gives the scattered stones in the desert about Nackhl.
All have a peculiar polish, looking as if they had been smeared
with grease, a lustre nearly represented in the fractured surface of
some specimens of witherite. Should these stones, he remarks,
become buried, futui'e investigators will find in them marks as
clearly indicative of their origin as the rounded forms of water-
worn pebbles or the angular and scratched faces in beds of glacial
drift. Just as we infer from the lattei", the existence of former
glaciers, so they will infer the former presence of deserts and
" sand-drifts." The pebbles in the Dubbo sandstones, when
cleared of the minute particles (quartz or decomposed felspar)
adhering to the surface, have in very many instances that I have
noticed, an appearance that rolling in water could never give them.
But whether these may not be water- worn gi'ains chemically corroded
on the surface I am not prepared to say.

Another point worth considering Is the great difference between
the normal sandstone and those portions of it, which have
undoubtedly been deposited in water. We often see beds of
shale which split up into thin laminae. This fissile structure is due

%

184

THE GEOLOGY OP DUBBO,

to plates of mica which are visible on the fresh surfaces. Wind
could not induce such a structure, unless the sand and mica were
drifted into quiet water. This is exceptional, and very different
from the greater part of the rock, where the mica is uniformly
and sparsely distributed throughout the mass.

Rich th of en describes a wind blown deposit (unstratified) in
China, more than 1500 feet in thickness. He refers this to an
origin wholly seolian, and calls it by the name of land-loess, to
distinguish it from like deposits in which water has co-operated.
The latter he calls lake-loess. I consider the sandstones at Dubbo to
be a lake-loess formation. Further research may find material for
another view, but with the materials in hand it would hardly l)e
justifiable to come to any other conclusion.

I may here observe that in the discussion on Mr. Tenison- Wood's
paper, mention was made of recognising hyalite in thin slices of the
rock. I have succeeded in preparing a few sections, which I now
exhibit. The cohesion between the particles is, as a rule, so slight,
that sections cannot be prepared except where metamorphism has
more than ordinarily affected the rock. Unfortunately these sections
give us no idea of the original structure. In the sections I lay
before you the partly formed crystals as are close as the constituents
of a ternary granite.

Origin of the Ironstones. — Beds of Ironstone are found at various
levels in the series, but not to any considerable extent, except
on the Talbragar River up and down from Ballimore. At the last
named place (vide section above) it occurs in beds and lenticular
masses, which leave no doubt as to its origin. It would be hard
to find a better example than Ballimore, to illustrate the process so
clearly put by Dr. S. Hunt in his " Origin of Metalliferous
Deposits " (Chem. and Geol. Essays, p. 228). Every bed of iron-
stone marks an old surface as surely as every coal bed does. The
bands of ironstone, never more than a few feet thick, represent
shallow " lagoons" which held ferruginous water, derived from the
surrounding rocks, through the agency of decaying organic matter.
It might be said that eveiy bed of iron represents a bed of coal.

BY THE RRV J. MILNE CURRAN, P.G.S. 185

Nodules of ironstone are found in the river drifts. When broken
they exhibit a banded structure following the contours of the
exterior — due to the change at various intervals of the ferrous
carbonate into limonite.

Eco'iwmic Geology. — About four years ago a sudden fresh
removed a considerable amount of sand from the bed of Spicer's
Creek near the point where the main road from Wellington crosses
that creek. The surface of a bed of coal was in this way laid bare.
A rude opening such as means at hand would allow, was made and
I measured a seam thirty-seven inches in thickness, without going
through the coal. Since then a seam 49 inches has been measured
near the same place — probably the same coal. It has never been
worked. Nearer to Dubbo, at Ballimore, several shafts have been
put down, but although coal has been met with in every instance,
the seams were thin. The quality of the coal has not been found
fault with. It is bituminous and burns to a soft grey ash. The
proportion of fixed carbon is small and as the coal does not cake it
does not produce a true coke. An analysis, it is said, gave the
following result : —

Water 6-5

Vol. Hydrocarbons ... ... 45-4

Fixed Carbon 37-6

Ash 10-5

It makes a good household coal and is no doubt suitable for
stationaxy engines, but it would be less satisfactory in the case of
locomotives. It easily breaks into small cubical fragments, which
would be blown by the powerful blast through the boiler tubes.
Efforts have been made in other localities to get payable coal, but
the work has been undertaken in a most arbitrary manner, without
theoretical or practical knowledge of coal mining. A slight
acquaintance with the geology of the district would in most instances
have saved a useless expenditure of money. There is every reason
to believe that payable coal will yet be found. The physical
features of the disti'ict are eminently favourable to the miner,
as the rocks are not disturbed to a great extent. Trap is not so
plentiful as to materially affect the coal, so that there will be few
or no difficulties to contend with.

186 THE GEOLOGY OF DUBBO,

The outcrop of the coal on Spicer's Creek is near the edge of the
coal " basin." A series of borings from this point following the
dip of the beds would be the most eflective method of proving that
portion of the country.

Fireclay. — Thick beds of fireclay underlie the coal and ironstones
at Ballimore. It is true that some specimens, sent to experts, were
considered hardly suitable for the manufacture of fire-bricks. But
it has been remarked that though chemical and minei^alogical
examination will often enable us to say that certain clays will
assuredly not make fire-bi-icks ; and that other clays are promising
enough to make it worth while trying them ; yet nothing short of
making a test brick will settle the question. No bricks have been
made as yet.

Freestone. — The sandstone is quarried in a few places for building
stone. The best procurable is more friable and less ferruginous
than Pyrmont stone, nor will it bear an equal weight. In fact
the normal sandstone is hardly more than a mixtui-e of quartz
grains, decomposed felspar and mica, without any chemical union.
In the proximity of basalt it is altered and more compact, and
often changed into a quartzite, as at Barbigal and Dalton's
Paddock, near the general cemetery. From some experiments I
made with the building stone, I found that blocks of a cubic inch
placed in water to a fourth of their depth, absorbed more than one-
half of their own volume of water. Cubes repeatedly saturated
with a solution of common salt lose their angles, and when treated
in the same way with sulphate of soda rapidly disintegrate. The
altered sandstones already referred to as quartzite, make a building
stone durable as granite.

Granite. — It is v/ell exposed on the the railway at 289-10 miles.
It is a ternary granite, hornblende replacing the mica to a great
extent. It takes a fine polish, having a slightly bluish tinge.
Nothing shows how compact the crystals are better than the quality
it possesses of holding together when reduced to thin slices for
microscopic examination. In the near future it will be used for
building purposes, as it is unquestionably the most durable stone

BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN, F.G.S. 187

about Dubbo. The rock as seen in the railway cuttings is traversed
by numerous joints, that will facilitate the working.

Basalt, — The Dolerite about Dubbo is not sufficiently exposed to
encourage its being sought as a building stone. For road purposes
there is practically an unlimited supply within the circuit of a mile
from the town.

Gold. — Gold has been worked, but in every instance outside the
limits of the sandstone rocks, except when, as it often happens, the
older rocks drain across them. Auriferous quartz reefs have been
worked at Tomingly to the south west.

Iron. — The only source of iron known is the clay iron stone
already described. It is best seen along the valley of the Talbragar.
Taken with the coal and limestone, which is within easy reach,
it may prove valuable.

Copper, galena, diamonds (from the gravel in old river beds),
topaz and opal have been met with, but not in quantities of any
" economic " value.

The microscopic character of the granites and basalts is reserved
for another and concluding paper on the Geology of Dubbo.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Macleay exhibited in illustration of his Paper on the Genus
Laminima, all the known species of the genus, excepting L. KreffUi,
the type of which is in the Australian Museum. Mr. French's
beautiful species L. Muelleri excited much attention.

Dr. von Lendenfeld exhibited a Syphonophore of the Genus
Dij^hyes, found at Bondi by Mr. Whitelegge.

Mr. Masters exhibited well mounted specimens of two very rare
Australian Butterflies, Xenica Kershawi from Yictoria, and
Heteronym.ijha Digglesi from Five Dock, near Sydney.

188 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Macleay read a note from Mr. Wilkinson, enclosing the
following notes on the habits of the Aborigines, by Dr. Turner,
Bishop of Grafton and Armidale : —

Armidale, April 18th, 1885.
C. S. Wilkinson, Esq.

Dear Sir, — At p. 436 of Vol. 8, p. 4 of the Linnean Society
of N.S.W., is a brief paper by yourself upon a custom of the
Aborigines in the Mount Poole district, and as an accident
enables me to say something about a like custom among the
Armidale blacks, I venture to submit a short statement to you.
Walking some years ago in the bush, a mile or so out of Armidale,
I picked up a black-fellow's dilly-bag, I forget now what the nature
of its general contents was, but in it was a stone apparently of
yellowish calcareous crystals, very dirty ; as I thought it was
hardly likely such a stone would be preserved without some reason
for its preservation, I kept it and waited an opportunity of enquiry
as to its purpose. Some months after a blackfellow came about my
house and I showed him the stone and asked him what it was for ;
he said at once ii was to obtain water, and volunteei-ed the state-
ment that the gins were not allowed to look at it, they had to
carry it but not to look at it on any account. It was a remarkable
stone, and when I went to England I took it with me, meaning to
give it to some Public Museum, but I am almost afraid it never
got there. The stone, as well as I can remember, was about 3 in.
or 3;|in. long, \\'va.. thick, and nearly 3 in. deep.

Mr. E. P. Eamsay exhibited (1) on behalf of Mr. K. H. Bennett,
of Mossgiel, the eggs of Falco suhniger, and of the Glareola
grallaria, mentioned in his paper ; also the following rare eggs : —

(2) Gyjjoictinia melanosternon, Menura victorice and Astur radiatus.

(3) Some new birds from the Astrolabe Range of New Guinea,
including the following : — Parotia lawesii, a small but distinct
species allied to P. sexpennis ; Lopliorina siuperha minor, a small
form of Lophorina sujjerba ; a male and female of a species of
Gallus, jungle fowl, remarkable for the great development of the
spurs, and apparently different from all other varieties. {^) A

NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 189

new and beautifully marked species of Retaster, recently dredged
in Port Jackson. (5) A new Bat, Taphozous, sp., received from
Mr. G. Barnard, from the Dawson River. He also, on behalf
of Mr. Smithurst, exhibited some interesting and rare semi-fossil
shells from the Muddy Creek deposits, near Hamilton, Victoria,
among these were a new species of Trigonia, a new Telicaria, a
fine large perfect specimen of Murex areolatus and Volula un-
dulata, Lamarck.

Dr. J. C Cox exhibited a sandstone nodule, the outer crust of
which to a considerable depth was stained with iron, the original
colour, as shown by the central portion, having been white. Also
a large Gephalopod, belonging to the family Sepiadoi and genus
Sepia, which had been recently presented to the Australian
Museum, by the Hon. William Macleay. This unique specimen
is about three feet long from the hinder part to the apex of the
arms, the body is about eighteen inches long, and eighteen inches
broad, deeply notched at the lower margin and peaked in the
centre at the neck, and arched on each side ; the head is about
eighteen inches from the body to the apex of the arms. It is of a
dark brown olive colour, quite smooth, the tentacles are about two
feet long, the cups on the arms do not corresjiond with any known
species, nor do the cups on the tentacles ; it is very like Sepia
tuherculata of Lamarck, but no tubercles exist on the surface and
it is much longer. Se2na vermiculata of Quoy and Gaim., is very
like it, but is only fifteen inches long ; most of the species how-
ever of the Genus, have been described from the shell.

Mr. Palmer exhibited foliage of Peach tree affected by a small
fungoid growth ; also a small branch of Grevillea robusta attacked
by a species of Tinea ; an Orange branch attacked by black blight
and coccus ; an Apple stem and leaves attacked by American
blight, and a Quince fruit destroyed by a species of weevil.

Mr. J. Douglas-Ogilby exhibited a species of Platycephalus,
which he believed to be new. Prom its unusually strong dentition
he proposes for it the name Macrodon. He purposes to describe it
at next Meetine:.

WEDNESDAY, 27th MAY, 1885.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, F.G.S., in the chair.

The Rev. W. W. Gill was present as a visitor.

MEMBERS ELECTED.

Mr, Frederick Wright, Lecturer on Materia Medica to the
Pharmaceutical Society ; Mr. Henry Prince.

DONATIONS.

" Zoologischer Anzeigei"," No. 191. From the Editor.

" Bulletin de la Soci^te Royale Botanique de Belgique'" Tome
XXIII., 1884. From the Society.

" Guide to the Galleries of Mammalia in the Department of
Zoology," and " Catalogue of Lizards," Vol. L From the British
Museum.

" Abhandlungen aus dem Gebiete der Naturwissenschaften
herausgegeben vom Naturwissenschaftlichen Verein in Hamburg."
Band VIII, Heft I., II. and III. From the Society.

" Natuurkundig Tijdschrift." Achtste Serie, Deel V. " Cata-
logus der Bibliotheek," " Boekwerken." July and December,
1884. From the Koninklijke Natuurkundige Vereeniging in
Nederlandsch-Indie.

DONATIONS. 191

" Abstracts of Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania."
April 14th and May 12th, 1885. From the Society.

" Bulletin de la Soci^te Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscow."
Tome LIX., No. 2, 1884. From the Society.

" Bulletin of the California Academy of Sciences." Nos. 2 and
3. January and February, 1885. From the Director.

" Annual Report of the Trustees of the Amei^ican Museum of
Natural History." 1884-5. From the Trustees.

" Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History." Vol.
YIII., No. 1. April, 1885. From the Society.

" Proceedings of the Academy of Natui-al Sciences of Philadel-
phia." Partlll. NovemberandDecember, 1884. From the Academy.

"Science." Yol. V., Nos. 110-113. From the Editor.

"Bulletin de la Soci^te Koyale Beige de Geographic." No. 1,
January and February, 1885. From the Society.

" Feuille des jeunes Naturalistes." No. 174. From the Editor.

"Victorian ISaturalist." Vol. II., No. 1. From the Field
Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

" Monatliche Mittheilungen des Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereins
des Regierungsbezirkes Frankfurt." 2 Jahrg., No. 12. From the
Society.

Harris's "Aurelian." From the Hon. William Macleay, F.L. S., &c.

" Directions for Collecting Micro-lepidoptera." By Lord
Walsingham. From John Brazier, Esq., C.M.Z.S.

" Memoires de la Society de Physique et d'Histoire naturelle de
Geneve." Tome XXVIII., Pt. 2. From the Society.

" Verslagen en Mededeelingen." Parts XIX and XX., 1884.

"Jaarboek." 1883. From L'Academie Royale des Sciences,

Amsterdam.
13

192 DONATIONS.

"Journal of Concliology." Vol. IV., Ho. 9. From the Con-
chological Society of Great Britain and Ireland.

" Leopoldina." Hefts XII., XVIL, XX. -'Nova Acta."
Band XXXVII., Nos. 4, 5, XXXVIII., Nos. 2, 3, 5, XXXIX.,
Nos. 1, 3, 4, XL., Nos. 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, XLI, Pt. I., No. 4, Pt. II.,
Nos. 2, 3, 4, 5, XLII., Nos. 2, 3, 5, XLIIL, No.s. 1, 2, 3, 7,
XLI v., No. 2. From the Carolinischen Deutschen Akademie der
Naturforscher zu Halle.

"Note regarding the Silurian Fossils of the Gordon Limestones."
By Eobert M. Johnston, F.L.S. From the Author.

"Catalogue of Birds in the British Museum." Vol. X. From
the Trustees.

" Journal de Conchyliologie." Tome XXIV., Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4.
1884. From the Directors.

" Tijdschrift voor Entomologie." Deel XXVII., Pts, 3 and 4.
From the Entomological Society of the Netherlands.

PAPERS READ.

NOTE ON THE BRAIN OF
H ALIO ORE AUSTRALIS. Owen. (I)

By N. DE Miklouho-Maclay.

(Plate XXIY.)

During a visit to the Islands of Torres' Straits in April, 1880
I had the opportunity of obtaining on the Island Mabiak (2; a
head of a Dugong, for the purpose of studying its brain.

I I'eceived the head a very few hours after the animal was
killed, and proceeded, without delay, to secure the brain. It took
me some time to free the skull from the very thick skin (.3) and
the muscles of the neck. Being anxious not to injure the brain,
and not having examined sections of the skull of H. Australis before,
I thought it safer to make, instead of the stereotyped circular cut
of the cranium, a median longitudinal section of the same, which
process, however, required time and patience on account of the
very dense texture of the bones of the skull.

(1) Prof. Owen separated the H. Australia from the H. indicus on
account of specific distinctions as : the difference in dental formula and of
certain osteological characters. [Vide : Notes on the characters of the
skeleton of a Dugong {Halicore AuatraJis) by Professor Owen, E.R.S. ;
published as an Appendix (No. IV. ) of the Narrative of the Surveying
Voyage of H.M.S. Fly, by T. Beete Jukes, London, 1847, Vol. II., p. 3-26.]

(2) The Dugong is still very plentiful in Torres' t^traits and on the south
coast of New Guinea, where the natives catch them with big nets and kill
them by keeping the Dugong under water until he is drowned. The flesh
of the Dugong is relatively good to eat (when you have nothing better), it
is like beef, but rather coarse and dark.

(3) The thickness of the skin of the neck and the back, after it had been
tanned, (for which purpose the skin had to remain about 10 months in the
pit) was over 25 mm. (or over 1 in.)

194 NOTE ON THE BRAIN OP HALICORE AUSTRALIS,

I was able at last to saw the skull through, and made with a
long sharp scalpel the median section of the brain, which proved
to be in the most perfect (fresh) condition for examination. A
sketch of the section was made at once, because I had no means
of preserving the brain in the skull in alcohol, and I knew
that it would be greatly distorded by the taking it out from the
cranium.

I extracted, as carefully as I could under the circumstances,
(sacrificing, however, the pituitary body and the pineal gland), the
two halves of the brain from the cranial cavity and kept them
well surrounded with wadding for a few days in strong
alcohol of about 90 %.) My time at Mabiak being very fully
occupied, I contented myself as regards the Dugong's brains,
with the sketch above mentioned and a few remarks in my diary.
As the brain appeared to me suflBciently hardened I embedded it
in wadding and a piece of soft calico, and left the small parcel
amongst other anatomical specimens in ajar (filled with alcohol of
about 40 %) waiting my leisure and opportunity for further
examination. [T mention all these details because I know too
well how much the value of anatomical investigations depends
ui)Ou the state of the investigated material.]

A few weeks ago unpacking some of my New Guinea collec-
tions, I came aci-oss the packet with the Dugong's brain which
proved to be in a very good state of preservation, and not being
aware oi a description of the brain of Halicore (1), decided to
complete the examination of it. Of course its having remained
for 4 years in alcohol had some effect upon the brain, and still
more the removal of it from the cranial cavity.

The comparison of the two representations of the same median
section (fig. 3 and fig. 4) shows the effect of the long preser-
vation on some parts of the brain, [bending of the corpus callosum,

(1) The brain of Manatus americanus has been described by Dr. Murie
(Transactions of the Zoological Society, VIII., p. 127) and by Mr. A. H.
Garrod (Transactions of the Zoological Society, X., p. 137. Shaded outlines
with reference to the shape of the upper surface of the brains of : Manatus,
Halicore, Rhytina are given in Brandt's Symboke Sireuologicffi (Mem. de
I'Acad. Imp. des Sciences de St. Petersbourg. Tome XII., (186S), p. 284.

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 195

stretching the crura cerebri, &c., &c.J After these preliminary
explanations I shall proceed to make a few remarks in explanation
of the adjoining figures on plate XXIV.

Already the first examination of the brain at Mabiak showed
me after the removal of the very thick pia mater, that the surface
of the hemispheres was smooth, without convolutions, with the
exception of a transversal depression on the sides in the middle
of the hemispheres and a deep fissure corresponding more or less to
the fissura Sylvii. These fissures are short and difierently shaped
on the two sides. (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.; Examined from below
there are two other sulci, the sulci olfactorii running obliquely
forward and covered with the broad tracti olfactorii.

Horizontal sections of the hemispheres show thin walls and
extensive lateral ventricles, the lumen of which has been, in the
specimen in question, very much reduced by collapsing of the thin
walls. It is only a result of the mode of preservation : should the
brain have remained in the cranium in situ, the walls of the
hemisphere would have kept their shape, maintained in their
natural position by the membranes and blood-vessels of the brain.

I have specimens of sections of difi"erent brains in situ in the
skull which have kept for years their shape and very nearly their
size.

The corpus callosum covers the thalami optici (fig. 3), the
columns of the fornix, the septum lucidum (1) and the hippo-
campus major are well developed. The anterior white commissure
is not large but quite distinct. The upper surface of the compara-
tively big thalami optici with a large commissura mollis are
covered with the ample folds of the choroid plexus which is closely
connected with the epithelium of the third ventricle. (Fig 2.)

The anterior tubercle and the pulvinar are separated by a
distinct oblique groove.

(1) In my notes made at Mabiak, I find no mention of a ventricle of the
septum lucidum and at present it is impossible to decide with certainty
about its prior existence and extent.

196 NOTE ON THE BRAIN OF HALICORE AUSTRALIS.

The corpora quadrigemina are not large and ori the median
section show that the aqneductus Sylvii extends into a narrow
triangular cavity. The posterior wall of the corpora quadrigemina
is rather thin.

The Cerebellum examined from behind is divided into some 10
portions (fig. 5) which divisions however, are rather superficial,
as can be seen on the horizontal section of cerebellum, (fig. 6)

The deepest fissures are to be seen on the median section (fig.
3 and fig. 4) and divide the cerebellum (examined on the
median section) into 3 lobes, of which the anterior is the largest.
Corresponding to the lobes the stem of the white substance rami-
fying in the arbor vitse is divided into 3 principal branches.

The pons Varolii is well developed.

The principal object of the publication of these few remarks about
the brain of H. Australis is the hope, that they may induce anato-
mists in Australia, who may have ample opportunity (on the coast
of Queensland, even in Brisbane) to obtain the Dugong, to fill up
the numerous gaps in these notes which being the result of the
dissection of one brain are necessarily incomplete.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV.

(All the figures Nat. Size.)

Fig. 1. — Brain of Halicore Australis, Owen^ from the side. II. — n. opticus,

v.— n. trigeminus.
Fig. 2. — The left hemisphere of the same brain from the other side to show

the different shape of the deep lateral fissure (fissura Sylvii). I. —

Tractus olfactorius.
Fig. 3. — Rough sketcli of the median section of the same brain made at

Mabiak, showing the same in situ, in the cranium. The falx is

covering a great part of the hemisphere.
Fig. 4. — The same section, after a photograph taken in Sydney from the

same object, about four years later.
Fig. 5. — Diagramatic view of the cerebeHum of the same brain from behind.
Eig. 6. — Horizontsl section of the cerebellum, the position and direction of

which is indicated by the dotted line (* *) in Fig. L To — Thalami

optici, cq — Corpora quadrigemina, v — Fourth verticle.

RECORD OF A REMA.RKABLE HALORAGIS FROM
NEW SOUTH WALES.

By Baron von Mueller^ K.C.M.G., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S, &c.
Haloragis monosperma.

Erect, quite glabrous, leaves rather small, on numerous abbre-
viated branclilets crowded, all opposite linear-lanceolate, almost
sessile, nearly flat, scantily denticulated towards their summit ;
floral leaves also opposite, gradually shorter, but only the uppermost
reduced to bracts ; flowers solitary or two together in the axils of
the upper leaves, the terminal and sub-terminal flowers spicate ;
all on very short stalklets ; lobes of the calyx four, deltoid ; petals
boat-shaped, smooth ; anthers much elongated, very narrow ;
styles four ; stigmas pyramidal, semi-ovate, not downy ; ovary
four-celled ; fruit almost hemiellipsoid, quadrangular, considerably
longer than broad, slightly tubercular, one-seeded ; pericarp crusta-
ceous, under the adnate calyx-tube eight furrowed.

On heaths at the western side of ranges near Braidwood, at an
elevation of about 3,000 feet ; W. Bauerlen, who from the same
region brought Boronia rhomhoidea, B. pilosa, Miihlenheckia steno-
2)hylla. Pomaderris phylicifolia, Didiscus humilis and Uncinia
tenella. Height of the plant above one foot ; branchlets quadran-
gular ; majority of leaves varying in length between | and f inch,
somewhat concave, more crowded than those of most other species.
Fruit bearing calyx fully one-sixth of an inch long ; seed central.
The characteristic of the one-seeded fruit is exceptional in the
genus, but may not be absolutely constant, as the ovary is four-
celled. This species is in some respects allied to H. lanceolata^
but must systematically be placed near H. salso/oides, from which
it differs in being of much more roVjust growth and perfectly
glabrous, in more numerous much larger and particularly broader
leaves, and perhaps also in form and structure of the fruits, that
of H. salsoloides remaining still unknown.

The same collector, while under engagement to the writer, has
afforded the opportunityof recording most of the following plants as
recently traced to far southern localities in New South Wales : —

198 RECORD OF A REMARKABLE HALORAGIS.

Hibhertia saliyno. ; Clyde.

Dysoxylon Muelleri ; Currawang.

Bertya (/uriimifera ; Braidwood.

Casuarina nana ; Genoa.

Dodonaia multijuga ; Shoalhaven.

Mirhelia grandijiora ; Braidwood.

Bossioea Kriamensis ; Braidwood.

A Ihizzia pridnosa.

Acacia vestita ; Genoa.

Acacia glaucescens ; Genoa.

Eucalyptus stricta ; Candelo.

Schizomeria ovata ; Braidwood.

Actinotus Gihbonsii : Genoa.

Astrutricha longifolia; Currawang.

Cryptandra Scortechinil ; Braidwood.

Fetrophila sessilis ; Braidwood.

Persoonia lanceolata.

Persoonia oxycoccoides.

Hakea saligna : Mount Dromedaiy.

Pimelea collina ; Braidwood.

Glossogyne tenuifolia ; Clyde.

ChUocarpus australis ; Bulli.

Polymeria calycina ; Clyde.

Chloanthes parviflora ; Braidwood,

Ruellia australis ; Shoalhaven.

Prostanthera Sieberi ; Genoa.

Epacris Calvertiana ; Braidwood.

Dendrobium Beckleri ; Milton.

Dendrobium teretifolium ; Clyde.

Thelymitra virosa ; Braidwood.

Ucemodorum planifolium ; Clyde.

Dianella cveridea ; Braidwood.

Xanthorrhcea hastilis ; Genoa.

Juncus vaginatns ; Braidwood.

Aristida ramosa ; Braidwood.

Agrostis breviglumis ; Braidwood.
The above named Eucalyptus stricta was found by Mr. Tyrone
White ; Hakea saligna, by Miss M. Bate ; ChUocarpus australis,
by Mr. W. Kirton. In all now of more than 200 New Sonth
Wales plants have records been given during the last few years in
the transactions of the local Linnean Society as regards their
approximate southern limits.

TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN LUCANDI^.
By William Macleay, F.L.S., &c.

In the preparation of the Paper which I read at last Meeting,
on the genus Lamprima, I was necessarily led to make a close
examination of all the Australian Pecticorns in my cabinets. Tl^e
result has been the discovery of two very remarkable insects,
hitherto I believe quite unknown. For one of these I am com-
pelled to form a new genus, it differs so widely from any previously
described; the other, though also of most distinctive and peculiar
appearance, may, I think, be very properly placed in the genus
Rhyssonotus

HOMOLAMPRIMA. nov. gen.

Mentum triangularly rounded in front, slightly transversal.

Labium extending prominently beyond the mandibles.

Maxillce. prominent, apparently corneous, hidden in long hair.

Paljji strong, rather short.

Mandibles short, exserted, not bearded on the inside.

Head small, subquadrate.

Eyes transversal, entire.

Antennce short, stout, the first joint clavate and about the length
of the next six united, the three last forming a foliate club.

Prothorax slightly convex, very slightly angled on the sides.

Elytra slightly convex.

Prosternuin rather broad between the fore legs, terminating
behind in a prominent round point.

Mesosternum terminating in front in a broad crescent shaped
emax'gination, as if to receive the prosternal process.

Legs rather slight, the fore tibiae armed externally.

200 TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN LUCANDIiE,

I scarcely know to what group of the Lucanidge to refer this
genus. In its narrow head, general form, and metallic colouring,
the insect shows an' affinity to the Lamprimidce, but on the other
hand, its distant fore legs, broad prosternum and curiously formed
mesosternum seem to indicate an approach to the true Lucanidoe.
I regret that having only one specimen, I have been unable to
examine the maxilla; and labium in a satisfiictory way.

HoMOLAMPRIMA CRENULATA. n. Sp.

Mcde. Of a rather depressed ovate form. The upper surface
dull bronzy black, with metallic reflections on the margin of the
thorax and elytra, and on the whole of the scutellum. The under
surface, legs, mandibles and antennae are of a brilliant metallic
bluish-green. The head is square, rugose, broadly and triangularly
but not deeply depr'essed, and coarsely and profoundly punctate.
The mandibles are shorter than the head, punctured above, smooth on
the sideS: and curving a little upwards and inwards towards the apex
where tte two terminal teeth of each mandible come in contact. The
thorax is broader than long, narrowed a little at the apex with the
anterior angles a little prominent, rounded on the sides which are
crenulated, slightly bisinuate at the base, very finely and thinly punc-
tate, and with a slight depression near the base of the median line.
Scutellum smooth, triangular, the sides rounded. Elytra about the
width of the thorax, and about twice its length with a few obsolete
strife near the suture, and with the whole surface rather thinly
sprinkled with minute variolose-looking punctui'es. The under
surface is mostly smooth ; the chin is rugosely punctured ; the pro-
and meso-sternal processes ai-e smooth ; the fore tibise are ai-med
externally with four strong teeth, three near the apex, and one
above the middle, the other tibise have each a small tooth on the
outside near the middle.

Length, 9 lines.

Hah. — Clarence River.

Female. I have in my collection one specimen of a female,
which is undoubtedly of this genus, and which I think is almost

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &C. 201

certainly the female of the species just described, but I have no
certain proof of the fact. It is longer, broader and slightly flatter
than the male insect, is of a dark metallic green on the head and
thorax, which are densely punctate, the elytra are of a purplish
blue ; the fore tibiae are sexdentate externally and the mandibles
are very short. In all other respects it is exactly like the male
specimen described above. I cannot give the exact habitat of
this specimen, as it is only labelled " New South Wales," but it
is probably also from the Clarence River District.

Rhyssonotus laticeps. n. sp.

Black, nitid, slightly convex. The head is very short and very
broad, the anterior angles extending laterally to the width of the
thorax ; its anterior margin is nearly straight, and its upper
surface is very rugose and densely punctate, with an elevation in
the middle terminating in two small tubercles, and with a depression
on each side. The mandibles are twice the length of the head, broad,
very roughly punctured, pilose, cuiwed upward a little at the apex,
and armed on the inner side with several obtuse teeth. The
antennae are short, the club consisting of six joints. The mentum
is triangular, and immediately behind it, on the jugulum, there is
a large compressed transverse tubercle. The eyes are completely
divided. The thorax is finely and sparingly punctate, broader
than the length, and of the same width as the triangular
extension of the head ; the sides are parallel, the apex and base
almost truncate, the posterior angles excised, and the median line
deep, with a fovea on each side near the middle. The scutellum is
transversely rounded and punctured lightly. The elytra are of
the width of the thorax and not twice the length, profoundly
striato-punctate, with the four of five interstices nearest the
suture, smooth and convex near the base. The under surface is
minutely punctate and rather pilose. The fore tibise are armed
externally with four rather small teeth, the middle tibiae with one.

Length, 9 lines.

2 02 TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN LUCANDIiE.

One specimen, a male, is all I have ever seen of this strange
looking insect. It is labelled " New Holland," and has evidently
been in the old Macleay collection for a very long time.

The shape of the head, and the sculpture of the elytra, give it
a very different aspect from either Rhyssonotus nebulosus or
jugularis, but it has notwithstanding a considerable affinity to the
latter of these. The only other known species, Rhyssonotus
parallelus, described by Deyrolle, in the " Ann. de la Soc. Ent.
de France," from a female caught in 1881, I have never seen, but
from the description and figure it seems in its parallel form to
resemble a little the present species. The resemblance, however,
does not extend beyond this, and it seems to me extremely
unlikely, therefore, that they are the sexes of the same species.

A LIST OF THE CUCUJID^ OF AUSTRALIA, WITH
NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.

By a. Sidney Olliff,

Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

In the following Paper, which is the first of a series I intend to
offer for publication in the Proceedings of this Society, I have
endeavoured to give a complete list of the Cucujidse of Australia,
as far as they are at present known, together with such notes on
their structure and synonymy as were made whilst determining
the species in the collection of the Austi'alian Museum.

Sixteen genera are contained in this list, comprising forty-six
species, a number which can only be regarded as showing our
ignorance of the Australian Members of this family ; of these
species, ten are here described for the first time, and four, viz.,
Lcemophloeus testaceus, Silvanus surinamensis, Nausihius dentatus
and Gryptmnorpha Desjardinsii are almost undoubtedly imported.
The last mentioned species is especially interesting as it has been
received from widely remote parts of Australia, and even appears
to have established itself in Lord Howe Island, where, I am
informed, it is usually found on the banana-trees.

The genera Tristaria and Omma, referred to this family by their
authors, are not included here ; the former is allied to Eypocoprus,
which has been placed by Dr. G. H. Horn in the tribe Myrme-
chixena of the Mycetophagidse, and the latter is now generally
considered to belong to the Cupesidse.

The following typographical enumeration of the species will
serve to show their geographical distribution : —

204

A LIST OF THE CUCUJID^E OF AUSTRALIA,

Name of Species.

§

II

SI

!5

11

1

a.

31

3

^

a

5
2

11

1

>

1

■S

i

3

i

1

II
II

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23."
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.

Passanclra marginata, Gi'

Hectarthrum brevifossum, Newni
Ancistria retusa, Fahr

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* •••

* ■■■

* •••

*

*

cornutus, Wed.

Bessaphilus cephalotes, Wat.

*

*

*

Ipsaphes mcerosus, Patic

bicolor, Ollitf

*

I

Platisus obscurus, Erich

,, integricoUis, Beitt. ...

,, angusticoUis, Rdtt

Lcemophloeus amabilis, Olliff ...

Ramsayi, Olliff

„ tuberculatus, Gi:

„ tasmanicus, Gr

articeps, Olliff

., contaminatus, Gr.

,, conterniinus, Olliff ...

„ testaceus, Fabr.

Macleayi, Olliff

,, bistriatus, Gr

,, leaoliii, Gr

,, rigidus, Olli£

*.

*

* ••■

...

*

*

*

z

*

»

#

* ...

*

*

«
•

«

* ..

#

*

*

,, insiguis, Gr

,, lepidus, (?r

,, parvulus, Gr

Dendrophagus australis, Erich ...
Bvontes Macleayi, Olliff

,, lucius, PCL^C

australis, Erich

*

.*..

*

^

*

*

*

*

*

* *

,, denticulatus, 5')m<A . . .
niilitaris, Erich.
Inopeplus dimidiatus, Wat.

„ trepidus, Pasc

Cryptamorpha Desjardinsii, Gu6r

,, triguttata, Wat

optata, Olliff

Silvanus brevicornis Erich

.*.

*

.*.

*

»

.*.

• :;;

*

♦

*

*

*

*
* •••
» ...

„ castaneus, Macleay ...
surinamensis, Linn. ...

*

*

.*.

*

■■■|

^

;;;i

,, congener, Olliff

,, atratulus, Gr

Myrabolia Haroldiana, Rntt. ...
Grouvelliana, Reitt.

:

1

* ...

Nausibius deutatus, Marsh

*

♦

"1

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIPF. 205

I take this opportunity of acknowledging my obligations to the
Hon. William Macleay for granting me free access to his rich
library and collections.

The letters A.M., after the name of a species, indicate that it is
represented in the collection of the Australian Museum,

Family. CVCVJIBM.
Sub-family. I. PASSANDRIN.^.
Passandra.
Dalman, Schonherr, Syst. Ins., 1817, App. p. 146.

1. Passandra marginata.

Passandra marginata, Grouvelle, Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr., (5), VII., p.
clix, (1877); Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., (5), VIII., p. 261, pi. 8,

fig. 2, (1878).

Australia.

Hectarthrum.

Newman, Ent. Mag. V. p. 398 (183S.)

The species belonging to this geuus, which are contained in the
collection of the British Museum, have been tabulated by Mr.
Waterhouse. (Ent. Mo. Mag., XIII., pp. 118-119, 1876.)

2. Hectarthrum brevifossum. (A.M.)

Hectarthrum brevifossum, Newman, Ann. Nat. Hist., II., p. 392,

(1839)
Hectarthrum cylindricum, (var.) Smith, Col. Ins. Brit. Mus., p. 21,

(1851.)

Hectarthrum australicum, (var.) Waterhouse, Ent. Mo. Mag.,

XIIL, p. 119; (1876.)

Cape York, Endeavour River, Port Denison, Gayndah, Moreton
Bay, Macintyre River, Queensland; Upper Hunter,. Sydney, New
South Wales; Victoria; West Australia.

206 A LIST OF THE CUCUJID^ OF AUSTRALIA,

After carefully examining a series of more than sixty examples
belonging to the genus Hectarthrum I have come to the conclusion,
notwithstanding their great variation in size and sculpture, that
only one species is at present known from Australia. I, therefore,
fully endorse Grouvelle's opinion that the thi-ee forms described
under the above names are varieties of one species.

The specimens before me vary from 7 to 23 mm. in length.

Ancistria.
Erichson, Nat. Ins., III., p. 305, (1845.)

3. Ancistria retusa. (^A.M.)

Ancistria retusa, Fabricius, Syst. El., II., p. 555.
Priono2)hora cylindrica, Westwood, Cab. Orient. Ent., p. 85, pi.
41, fig. 6.

Cape York, North Australia ; Tasmania.

It is very possible that the specimens from Tasmania will prove
to belong to a distinct species, as they differ slightly in punctuation
from the form which has hitherto been regarded as the typical A.

retusa.

Prostomis.

Latreille, Eegn. Anim., p. 397, (1825.)

The Prostomis laticeps, Macleay, is allied to if not congeneric
with Mimemodes of Reitter (Deutsche Ent. Zeit, 1876, p. 296),
and must be referred to the family Monotomidse. Mr. Macleay
has compared his species with the figure of Reitter's M.
monstrosum (Wien Ent. Zeit, 1884, pi. lY.), kindly forwarded to
me by my friend Mr. George Lewis, and agrees with me in con-
sidering them pi'obably members of the same genus.

4. Prostomis Atkinsoni. (A.M.)

Prostomis Atkinsoni, Waterhouse, Ent. Mo. Mag., XIY., p. 26,
(1877.)

Tasmania ; Alps of Yictoria.

I think it probable that too many species have been described
belonging to the section of the genus having the sides of the

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 207

prothorax rounded, of which this species may be considered the
type, as the series now before me shows that the punctuation of
the head and elytra is liable to some variation. The differences,
such as they are, between this and the allied species I have
recently pointed out in a short paper published in the " Notes
from the Leyden Museum," for April, 1884.

5. Prostomis cornutus. (A.m.)

Prostomis cornuhcs, Waterbouse, Ent. Mo. Mag., XIV., p. 26

(1877.)
South Australia ; Tasmania.

It is interesting to find Tasmanian- examples of this species,
which is at once distinguished by the jugular processes being at
right angles to their base, as showing that its range does not difier
greatly from that of the preceding species. The P. mandihularis,
Fabr., recorded, with doubt, from New Zealand will probably turn
out to be a specimen of this or the foregoing species.

Bessaphilus.
VVaterhouse, Eat. Mo. Mag., XIV., p. 26, (1877).

6. Bessaphilus cephalotes.

cephalotes, Waterhouse, Ent. Mo. Mag., XIV., p. 27,
(1877).
Tasmania.

Sub-family. II. CUCUJIN^.

Tribe. I. CUCUJINA.

CUCUJUS.

Fabricius, Syst. Ent., 17 /t», p. 204.

7. CucuJus coLONiARius, sp. n. (A.M.)

Elongate, much depressed, pitchy black, somewhat shining ; head
produced into a distinct node behind the eyes ; prothorax with the
anterior angles only slightly produced ; elytra bright red.
14

208 A LIST OF THE CUCUJIDiE OF AUSTRALIA,

Head transverse, narrowed in front, closely and rather strongly-
punctured, with a deeply impressed line parallel to the posterior
margin ; the sides produced into a distinct node behind the eyes,
which are rather large and prominent ; the clypeus truncated in
front, with a moderately deep impression on each side at the base ;
the mandibles rather closely rugose-punctate. Antennae rather
longer than the head and prothorax together. Prothorax trans-
verse, slightly narrowed posteriorly, moderately strongly, closely
and irregularly punctured, with a large transverse shallow-
impression on the disc near the anterior margin ; the anterior
angles very slightly produced ; the sides feebly serrate ; the
posterior angles rounded. Scutellum pitchy red, rounded behind,
not very closely punctured. Elytra about twice as long as the
head and prothorax together, distinctly and rather closely punct-
ured ; the sides nearly parallel for about three fourths of their
length, then rounded to the apex ; each elytron with four indistinct
and very feebly raised costae, the lateral margin rather strongly
raised. Underside pitchy black ; the prosternum transversely
rugose in front, moderately strongly and irregularly punctate
behind ; the mesosternum rather strongly punctured ; the meta-
sternum and abdominal segments finely and moderately closely
punctured. Legs pitchy black. Length 15 mm. ; greatest width
4-| mm.

Illawarra, New South Wales.

The present species is the first true Ouctijus detected in Australia
and seems, in some respects, to be closely allied to the Japanese C
coccinatus (1). It is, however, larger, and comparatively broader;
its head is proportionately narrower (the lateral projections being
less piominent and more distinctly nodiform) ; its elytra are much
more strongly punctured ; and its prothorax is broader and has the
sides more feebly serrate.

One of the two specimens of this species which Jiave come under
my notice was captured under bark in company with the fysaphes
bicolor.

(1) Leivis, Ent. Mo. Mag., XVII., p. 19S.

by a. sidney olliff. 209

Ipsaphes.
Pascoe, Journal of Entom., II., p. 39, (1863.)
Ipsaphes nitidulus, of Macleay, appears to be allied to the
lieteromerous genus Sitophagus, and need not be dealt with here.
The resemblance of this genus to the Cucujidse is so great, as to
have mislead Herr Eeitter, who has made a special study of the
Clavicoi-n Coleoptera, into placing it in that family under the
name Schedarosus.

8. Ipsaphes mgerosus. (A.M.)

Ipisaphes mcerosus, Pascoe, Journal of Entom., II., p. 40, pi. 3,
fig. 9, (1863.)
Richmond River, Peter.sham, Lane Cove, Sydney, Chatsworth,
Shelley's Flats, Illawarra, Bombala, New South Wales ; Tasmania,

9. Ipsaphes bicolor, sp. n. (AM.)

Elongate, much depressed, pitchy black and shining ; elytra and
abdominal segments rather bright red.

Head strongly transverse, considerably narrowed in front of the
eyes, rather strongly and closely punctured ; with a deeply
impressed line near the base parallel to the posterior margin ; the
sides somewhat produced behind the eyes ; the clypens very
slightly emarginate in front ; the mandibles closely and finely
punctured. Antennae about as long as the head and prothorax
together, very sparingly clothed with short grey pubescence.
Prothorax transverse, slightly broader in front than behind,
moderately strongly, very closely and irregularly punctured ; the
anterior margin slightly arcuate, projecting over the head ; the
sides rounded and provided with short blunt teeth ; median line
indistinct ; with a moderately large irregular impression on each
side at the base. Scutellum transverse, somewhat pointed behind,
black, rather strongly and closely punctured. Elytra almost twice
as long as the head and prothorax together, very finely, closely and
irregularly punctured, the suture slightly raised ; humeral angles
scarcely prominent ; the sides nearly parallel for two-thirds of

210 A LIST OP THE CUCUJID^ OF AUSTRALIA,

their length, then arcuately rounded to the apex : each elytron
witli indistinct costae ; the lateral margin rather strongly raised.
Underside coloured as above ; the prosternum transversely
coriaceous in front, closely punctured behind ; the meso-and
metasternum more finely and closely punctured ; abdominal
segments dull red, finely punctured. Legs black, finely punctured.
Length 12-14 mm. ; greadest width, 4-4|mm.

Chatsworth, Illawarra, New South Wales ; Mountains near
Melbourne (Howitt.)

Although this species is closely allied to Ipsaphes mosrosus, Pasc,
it may readily be distinguished from it by the colour of its elytra,
its narrower head and the larger size of the thoracic teeth. The
joints of the antennae appear to be proportionately larger,
especially towards the apex, and the scutelhnu is pointed behind
and not ronnded as in that species.

I have had a specimen of this insect in my possession for some
time, bearing the manuscript name " bicoJor" in the handwriting
of the late Dr. Howitt, of Melbourne.

Platisus.
Erichson, Wiegm. Archiv., I, p. 216. (1842.)

10. Platisus obscurus. (A.M.)

Platisus obscurus, Eiichson, "Wiegm. Archiv., I., 216, (1842.)

Upper Hunter, Sydney, Gunning, Illawarra, New South Wales;
Tasmania.

All the specimens of Platisus, some thirty in number, which I
have examined, appear to belong to this species. In some of
them the prothorax is decidedly narrower than in others.

11. Platisus intecricollis.

Platisus integricollis, Eeitter, Verh. z-b. Wien, XXVIII., p. 188,
(1878.)
Australia.

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 211

12. Platisus ANGUSTICOLLIS.

Platisus angusticollis, Reitter, Verb. z-b. Wien, XXVIII.,

p. 189, (1878.)
Platisus ohsGurus, Lacordaire, Gen. Col., II., p. 403, pi. 21, fig. 1,
(1854.)
Australia ; Tasmania.

13. L^MOPHLCEUS AMABILI6. Sp. H. (A.M.)

Elongate, depressed, pale testaceous, shining ; prothorax short,
considerably narrowed behind, with a distinct lateral stria ; elytra
broader than the prothorax in front, with a rather large black spot
at the humeral angles and a conspicuous fascia of the same colour
just behind the middle.

Head transverse, slightly emarginate in front, finely and moder-
ately closely punctured, and provided on each side with a feeble
oblique impression just befoi'e the base of the antennae and a finely
raised line extending from near the origin of this impression to just
before the base ; clypeus rather large, feebly emarginate in front ;
mandibles very strongand prominent, sparingly punctured. Antennse
only slightly longer than the head and prothorax together. Pro-
thorax transverse, much broader in front than behind, finely and
closely punctured ; the anterior angles produced ; the sides regu-
larly rounded ; the posterior angles slightly reflexed ; the lateral
line rather strongly impressed in the middle. Scutellum transverse,
pointed behind, very sparingly punctured. Elytra about one and
a half times as long as the head and prothorax together, slightly
narrowed behind, indistinctly and not very closely punctate —
striate, the first and fitth striae more deeply impressed ; humeral
angles veiy slightly produced ; each elytron with the fascia rather
broad and extending from just beyond the sutural stria to the lateral
margin. Legs pale testaceous. Length 2 — 2^ mm.

Wide Bay, Queensland ; Lane Cove, Sydney, Port Hacking,
New South Wales.

The male of this species has the head somewhat broader and the
antennse slightly longer than the other sex.

212 A LIST OF THE CUCUJID.E OP AUSTRALIA,

The LmmojMoeus characterized above is very distinct from all
the species known to me and may be distinguished by its short
antenna?, broad prothorax (with the deeply impressed lateral line)
and prettily marked elytra.

14. L^MOPiiLOEUs Ramsayi. sp. n. (A.M.)

Elongate, depressed, dark metallic brassy green ; prothorax
considerably narrowed behind, with a distinct lateral stria ;
scutellum testaceous ; elytra metallic green, sparingly covered with
long yellow pubescence, with a moderately broad testaceous fascia
considerably before the middle and a similar but narrower fascia
just before the apex.

Head transverse, narrowed and slightly emarginate in front,
very finely and sparingly punctured, with a rather deefjly impressed
line running parallel to the posterior mai'gin ; clypeus rather large,
slightly emarginate in front ; mandibles very large and prominent,
pale i-eddish testaceous, with the tips pitchy. Antennae considerably
longer than the head and prothorax together, pitchy red, the apex
of the terminal joint pale testaceous. Prothorax finely and
sparingly punctured ; the anterior angles deflexed and rather
strongly produced ; the sides rounded and feebly sinuate just
before the base ; the posterior angles very slightly produced.
8cutellum transverse, impunctate. Elytra scarcely one and a half
times as long as the head and prothorax together, broader than the
prothorax in front, gradually widening out until just Ijehind the
middle, then rounded to the apex, indistinctly and not very closely
punctate-striate, the interstices wide and very sparingly punctured,
the sutural stria obsolete near the scutellum, the fourth stria rather
deeply impressed, the pubescence emitted from the strife ; each
elytron with a moderately broad oblique fascia considerably before
the middle, extending from behind the humeral angles to just before
the suture, and a similar but much narrower fascia extending from
near the suture to the lateral margin near the apex. Legs reddish
testaceous. Length If — 2\ mm.

Wide Bay, Queensland.

\

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 213

This iiiteresliug and very distinct form appears to beloni^ to the
same section of the genus as the L. salpingoides and L. productus
of Grouvelle. It diflfers from the latter, to which it is most nearly-
allied, in colour, in the position of the markings on the elytra and
in having the prothorax slightly narrowed behind. The apical
joint of the antennse in L. Ramsayi is as long as three preceding
ones together.

I am indebted to Mr. Masters for the oppoi'tunity of describing
this species.

15. L.EMOPHLOEUS TUBERCULATUS.

Loimojyhloeus tuber culatus, Grouvelle, Bull. Soc. Ent., Fr., (5) VII.,
pi. 1., (1877); Ann. Soc. Eat., Fr., (5), VIII., p. 71, pi. 2,
fig. 6, (1878).

Australia.

16. LiEMOPHLCEUS TASMANICUS.

LmmophloiiLs tasmanicus, Grouvelle, Ann. Soc. Eat. Fr. (5), VI.,
p. 498, pi. 9, tig. 17, (1876.)
Tasmania.

17. L^MOPHLCEUS ARTICEPS, Sp. n. (A.M.)

Elongate, depressed, reddish testaceous, shining ; head rather
narrow ; prothorax slightly narrowed behind, the lateral stria
distinct and feebly sinuate in the middle ; elytra much broader
than the prothorax, with the base and an irregular fascia behind
the middle pitchy black.

Head transverse, narrowed and slightly emarginate in front,
finely and closely punctured, with an indistinct longitudinal
impression in the middle ; clypeus rounded in front ; mandibles
moderately prominent, extremely finely punctured. Antennse
con.siderab]y longer than the head and prothorax together, reddish
testaceous, the last three joints slightly darker than the others.
Prothorax strongly transverse, considerably broader than the head
in front, only slightly narrowed posteriorly, finely and closely
punctured ; anterior angles produced ; the sides rounded and very

214 A LIST OF THE CUCUJID^ OF AUSTRALIA,

feeljly sinuate just before tlie posterior angles. Scutellum trans-
verse, pointed behind. Elytra about one and a half times as long
as the head and prothorax together, finely and rather closely
striate-punctate, the first and fourth striae rather more deeply
impressed ; humeral angles very slightly produced : each elytron
with a pitchy black basal spot which is continued along the suture
and an irregular fascia behind the middle extending from the
suture (where it is narrowest) to the lateral margin. Legs
reddish testaceous. J^ength 2-2A^ mm.

Wide Bay, Queensland ; Mundarlo, Tarcutta, Merimbula,
Monaro, New South Wales.

Appears to be more nearly allied to Licinophloeus tasmanicus
than to any other species.

18. LyEMOPHL(EUS CONTAMINATUS. (A.M.)

Lcemophheus contaminatiis, G-rouvelle, Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr. (5),
VIL, p. 219, (1877) ; Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (5), VUL, p. 265,
pi. 8, fig. 7, (1878.)

Wide Bay, Queensland.

The specimens of this species in the collection of the Australian
Museum agree in every respect with Grouvelle's figure except that
in the males, the head appears to be slightly broader. In some
specimens the head and prothorax are black, and in others reddish
castaneous.

19. L^MOPIILCEUS CONTERMINUS, sp. n. (A.M.)

Elongate, somewhat depressed, reddish testaceous, shining, veiy
finely and moderately closely pubescent ; prothorax very slightly
broader in front than behind, the lateral stria distinct ; elytra with
four strife on each side, the suture dusky.

Head transverse, narrowed and slightly emarginate in front,
rather finely and closely punctured ; clypens small, rounded in
front; mandil)les not very piomineut. Antennas considerably

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFP. 215

longer than the head and prothorax together. Prothorax much
broader than long, very slightly narrowed behind, finely and
closely punctui-ed ; the anterior angles somewhat produced ; the
sides arcuately rounded ; the posterior angles obtuse. Scutellum
transverse, sparingly punctured, pointed behind. Elytra about
one and a half times as long as the head and prothorax together,
striate, the iuterstices finely and rather closely punctured and
distinctly pubescent ; the humeral angles scarcely prominent. Legs
pale reddish testaceous. Length 2 mm.

Wide Bay, Queensland ; Kiama, New South Wales.

This species approaches very nearly to L. contamlnatus ; it
differs, however, in its smaller size, narrower head and prothorax,
and in the different form and position of the elytral strise ; in
L. contermimcs there is a distinct sutural stria and the punctures
in the interstices are arranged in two tolerably x-egular series ;
whereas in the other species the sutural stria is very indistinct and
the punctures less regular ; the form of the prothorax, whish is
but very slightly narrowed behind, and the concolorous upper
surface will also sufiiciently distinguish it.

20. L.EMOPHLCEUS TESTACEUS. (A.M.)

Cucvjus testaceus, Fabricius Mant, Ins., I., p. 166, (1787.)

Lcemo2)hlceus tesiaceus, Sturm, Ins., XXL, p. 46, pi. 383, fig. A.

LcBmophloeus Zimmermanni, Le Conte, Proc. Ac. Phil., 1854, p. 75.

Upper Hunter, Blackheath, Lane Cove, Sydney, Wagga Wagga,
Mundarlo, Tarcutta, New South Wales ; Tasmania.

A considerable number of specimens of this almost cosmopolitan
insect have come under my notice. It is often found about out-
houses and granaries, but abounds more particularly under the
bark of newly -felled timber, in which situation I have recently
captured it at Blackheath, some 3,500 miles above the sea level.

216 A LIST OF THE CUCUJID^ OF AUSTRALIA,

21. L.EMOPHLCEUS Macleayi. (A.M.)

Placonohis longicornis, Macleay, Trans. Ent. See. N. S. Wales,
II., p. 168 (1871.)

Gayndah, Queensland.

Closely allied to the preceding species, but differs in having the
head and prothorax castaneous and the latei-al striae on the latter,
decidedly more distinct. It is also somewhat larger and the elytra
are, if anything, a trifle broader behind. As the speciBc name
"longicornis^' is preoccupied in the genus Lcemophloeus I have
followed the general practice in such cases and have proposed to
name this species after the author who first published a description
of it.

22. L.emophlceus bistriatus. (A.M.)

Lceinophheus bistriatus, G-rouvelle, Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (5), YIII .
p. 72, pi. 2, fig, 8, (1878.)

Sutton Forest, New South Wales ; Tasmania.

A single specimen collected by Mr. Masters at Sutton Forest
appears to agree with this species.

23. L^MOPHLCEUS LEACHII.

Loimophluius leachii, Grouvelle, Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (5), VI., ]).
499, pi. 9, fig. 18, (1876.)
New South Wales.

24. L/EMOPHLCEUS RIGIDUS. sp. n. (A.M.)

Elongate, depi*essed, reddish testaceous, shining ; prothorax very
slightly broader than long, a little broader in front than behind,
with a distinct latei'al stria which is rather strongly impressed jiTSt
behind the middle ; elytra somewhat depressed on each side of the
suture, almost truncate behind, with an indistinct dusky uiarking
near the scutellum.

Head transverse, slightly narrowed and emarginate in front,
feebly impressed in the middle, finely and rather closely punctured;
clypeus very feebly emarginate in front ; mandibles moderately

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 217

prominent, very finely punctured. Antennae considerably longer
than the head andprothorax together, the first joint much larger
than the other, especially in the male. Prothorax finely and
moderately closely punctured ; the anterior angles slightly pro-
duced. Scutellum rather small, rounded behind, very finely
punctured. Elytra nearly one and a half times as long as the
heail and prothorax together, slightly narrowed both in front and
behind, finely and moderately closely punctate-striate, the inter-
stices very finely punctured, with a slight impression at the base
on each side of the scutellum ; the humeral angles scarcely
produced : the sides almost parallel. Legs robust ; the femora,
especially those of the posterior legs, considerably thickened.
Length, 2i-3 mm.

King George's Sound, "West Australia.

This Lcemophlceus somewhat resembles L. Beccarii, Grouvelle
(Ann. Mus. Genov. XVIIL, p. 286, pi. 7, fig. 14) in outline, but
difi^ers greatly in structure. The first joint of the antennae is
enlarged, particularly in the male, but not triangular, and the
elytra are truncated behind.

25. L^iroPHLCEUS insignis,

Zcemophloeus insignis, Grouvelle, Ann. Mus. Genov., XVIIL,
p. 279, pi. 7, fig. 5, (1883.)
Somerset, North Australia.

26. L^MOPHLCEUS LEPIDUS.

L(emo2)hlceus lepidus, Grouvelle, Ann. Mus. Genov. XVIIL, p.
280, pi. 7, fig. 6, (1883.)
Somerset, North Australia.
Also found at Singapore and in Borneo.

27. LiEMOPHLCEUS PARVULUS.

LKmophlceus parvulus, Grouvelle, Ann, Mus. Genov., XVIIL,
p. 287, pi. 7. fig. ib, (1883.)
" Coke Town, Australia. " [Probably a misprint for Cooktown.]

218 A LIST OF THE CUCUJID.E OF AUSTRALIA,

Tribe, II. BRONTINA.
Dendrophagus.
SchonheiT, Vet. Akad. Handl., 1809, p. 50.

28. DENDRornAGUs australis. (A.m.)

Dendropliagus cmitralis, Erichson, Wiegm. Arcluv., I., p. 218,
(1842).

Wide Bay, Queensland ; Upper Hunter, Lane Cove, Sydney,
Wagga Wagga, Bombala, Mundarlo, New South Wales; Victoria
Port Lincoln, South Australia ; Tasmania ; Lord Howe Island.

This is one of the commonest and most widely distributed of
the Australian Cucujidaj.

Brontes.
Fabricius, Syst. El., IL, p. 97, (1801).

29. Brontes Macleayi. sp. n. (_A.M.)

Elongate, slightly convex, dark ferruginous brown, shining,
sparingly clothed with long dark pubescence ; prothoi-ax rather
longer than broad, with the sides feebly sen-ate and the anterior
angles produced into a strong spine ; elytra moderately strongly
punctate-striate ; antennae, tibise, and tarsi pale furruginous.

Head transverse, rather finely and very sparingly punctured
towards the sides, the space between the antennal nodes almost
impunctate ; clypeus rather large, sparingly punctured. Antennae
reaching considerably beyond the apex of the elytra, the first joint
about as long as the head and prothorax together, the second join^
somewhat less than half as long as the first. Prothorax slightly
narrower in front than behind, strongly, irregularly and closely punc-
tured, with a slight elevation on each side of the middle; the anterior
angles produced into a strong and rather sharp upturned spine ; the
sides feebly serrate and moderately strongly rounded. Scutellum
transverse, closely and rather strongly punctured. Elytra about
twice as long as the head and prothorax together, much broader

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIPF. 219

than the prothorax at the base, arcuately narrowed behind,
moderately strongly and rather closely pimctate-striate, the inter-
stices narrow and very slightly raised ; the humeral angles very
slightly produced ; the sides feebly reflexed. Legs with the femora
dark ferruginous brown, the tibiee and tarsi much paler. Length
13-14 mm. ; greatest width 4| mm.

Port Darwin, North Australia ; Richmond River, New South
Wales.

This fine species, which is the lai'gest Brontes known to me, can
be separated at once from all the Australian species by the form of
its head and prothorax and by its having the elytra somewhat
convex. The Richmond River specimen in the Macleay Museum
is rather darker in colour than the other individual.

30. Brontes lucius. (AM.)

Brontes luciuis, Pascoe, Journal of Entom., I., p. 321, (1862).
Brontes nigricans, Pascoe, loc. cit.

Wide Bay, Gayndah, Queensland ; Clarence River, Port Mac-
quarie, Sydney, Illawarra, New South Wales ; Victoria ; Tasmania.

After a careful comparison of a long series with specimens which
I named from Mr, Pascoe's types, I have little hesitation in stating
my conviction that the two forms bearing the above names are
merely extreme varieties of one species. In the series now before
me the spines on the prothorax vary considerably in size and shape,
the punctuation of the elytra is less regular in some of the larger
specimens and the colour of the individuals from Clarence River
is much darker than that of the others.

31. Brontes australis. (A.M.)

Brontes austi-alis, Erichson, Wiegm. Archiv., I., p. 217, (1842.)
Tasmania.

32. Brontes denticulatus.

Brontes denticulatus, Smith, Col, Ins. Brit. Mus., I., p. 14, (1851.)
Australia.

1 m h>

220 A LIST OP THE CUCUJIDiE OP AUSTRALIA,

33. Brontes militaris. (A.M.)

Brontes militaris, Erichson, Wiegm. Arcliiv., I., p. 217, (1842.)

Ipswich, Queensland ; Sydney, Illawarra, New South Wales ;
Victoria ; Tasmania.

Sub-Family. III. HEMIPEPLIN.^.
Inopeplus.
Smith, Col. Ins. Brit. Mus., I., p. 4, (1851.)

34. Inopeplus dimidiatus. (A.M.)

Ino dimidiatus, Waterhouse, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1875, p. 191.

Port Bowen, Wide Bay, Brisbane, Queensland ; Blackheath,
Illawarra, New South Wales.

During April of the present year I found a single specimen of
this pretty species under the bark of a species of Banksia at
Blackheath. This insect varies slightly in the extent of the black
marking on the apex of its elytra.

35. Inopeplus trepidus. (A.M.)

Ino trepida, Pascoe, Journal of Entora., I., p. 322, (1862.)

Cape York,

A single example agreeing in every particular with the descrip-
tion of this species which has been recorded from Singapore,
Sumatra, Gilolo, Dorey, and New Guinea.

Sub-Family. IV. TELEPHANIN/E.
CrYPTAiMORFHA.

WoUaston, Ins. Mader., p. 156, (1854.)

36. Cryptamorpha Desjardinsii. (A.M.)

Psammcecus Desjardinsii, Guerin, Regn. Anim., V., p. 196, (1829.)
Dendrophagus suturalis. White, Voy. Erebus and Terror. Ent.,
p. 18, (1846.)

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFP. 221

Cryptamorpha musc^, Wollaston, Tns. Mader, p. 157, pi. 4, fig. 1,

(1854.)
Pseiidophamis signatus, Leconte, Proc. Ac. Phil., 1859, p. 85.

Gayndah, Queensland ; Upper Hunter, New South Wales ;
South Australia ; West Australia ; Lord Howe Island.

Appears to be imported in articles of commerce, having been
recorded from North America, jNladeira, Mauritius and New
Zealand.

37. Cryptamorpha triguttata. (A.M.)

Cryptamorpha triguttata, Waterhouse, Ent. Mo. Mag., XIII.,
p. 123, (1876.)
South Australia ; Tasmania.

One of the Tasmanian examples, of the typical size and form,
differs in having the prothorax tinged with bronzy green.

38. Cryptamorpha optata, sp. n. (A.M.)

Elongate, somewhat depressed, reddish testaceous, shining,
finely and closely pubescent; prothorax rather long, fuscous
towards the sides ; elytra rather strongly punctate-striate, with a
broad and very indistinct fascia just behind the middle ; legs pale
testaceous.

Head narrowed in front, finely coriaceous, with a strongly
impressed line on each side extending from the origin of the
antennae to the base, and a smaller oblique furrow running
towards the eye. Antennae reddish testaceous. Prothorax con-
siderably longer than broad, slightly narrowed behind, strongly
and closely punctured ; the anterior angles rounded ; the sides
moderately strongly sinuate just before the base, provided with
six or seven long bristly hairs ; the posterior angles slightly
produced. Scutellum transverse, rounded behind, indistinctly
punctured. Elytra about two and a half times as long as the
prothorax, rather strongly and closely punctate-striate, the
interstices narrow and very slightly raised ; the sides nearly
parallel for two-thirds of their length then rounded to the apex.
Length, ^\ mm.
Tasmania.

222 A LIST OF THE CUCUJIDiE OF AUSTRALIA,

This insect is sufficiently distinguished from C. triguttata, to
which it is closely allied, by its paler colour, slightly broader and
less parallel sided prothorax, and by the absence of black spots on
its elytra. The antennae and legs are entirely testaceous.

Sub-family. V. SILVANIN.^.
SiLVANUS.

Latreille, Gen. Crust, et Ins. III., p. 19, (1807.)

39. SiLVANUS BREVICORNIS.

Silvanus hrevicornis, Erichson, Wiegm. Archiv., I., p. 218, (1842.)
Tasmania.

40. SiLVANUS CASTANEUS, (A.M.)

•Silvanus castaneus, Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc , N. S. Wales, II.,
p. 168, (1871.)

Gayndah, Queensland ; Lane Cove, Sydney, Wagga Wagga,
Gundagai, Mundarlo, Currajong, New South Wales.

Allied to the European Silvanus unidentatus, Oliv., from which
it diifers in having the prothorax much longer and more sinuous at
the sides and in its darker and less shining upper surface ; the
anterior angles are also more prominent and the punctuation of the
head and prothorax somewhat less strong and close.

The »S'. iowequalis, Grouv. (Ann. Mus. Genov., XVIII., p. 293,
pi. 7, fig. 25), appears to be closely allied to, if not identical, with
this species

41. Silvanus surinamensis. (A.M.)

Dermestes surinamensis, Linntous, Syst. Nat., I., pt. 2, p. 565,

(1767.)
Silvanus surinamensis, Stephens, 111. Brit. Ent., III., p. 104,
(1830.)
Blackheath, Sydney, New South Wales ; South Australia.
A single example of this Silvanus, which is found in warehouses
and granaries all over the world, was captured by myself under
bark in the neighbourhood of Blackheath during April last. It
has already been recorded by Redtenbacher from Sydney.

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 223

42. SiLVANUS CONGENER, Sp. 11. (A.M.)

Elongate, narrow and parallel, dark reddish brown, rather
closely pubescent; prothorax much longer than broad, with an
indistinct longitudinal impression on each side of the middle, the
sides armed witli six moderately prominent teeth ; elytra finely
striate-punctate.

Head with the sides nearly straight, deeply and closely punc-
tured at the base, somewhat less closely punctured in front.
Prothoi-ax elongated, slightly narrowed behind, rather strongly
and closely punctured, the disc somewhat flattened, with an indis-
tinct longitudinal impression on each side of the middle extending
from just behind the anterior margin to near the base ; the sides
nearly parallel and armed with six rather prominent teeth situated
at nearly equal distances from each other. Elytra rather long,
generally a little paler than the head and prothorax, finely striate-
punctate, the alternate interstices being almost impei'ceptibly
raised ; the sides arcuately narrowed behind. Legs reddish
ferruginous. Length 3-3J mm.

South Australia.

The somewhat larger size and narrower form of this species, in
conjunction with the more parallel sides, and less rounded angles,
of its prothorax, will serve to separate it from S. surinamensis.
The grooves on the prothorax in .S'. congener are indistinct and
comparatively broad.

43. SiLVANUS ATRATULUS.

Silvanus atratulus, Grouvelle, Bull. Soc, Enc. Fr., (5), VII., p.
clix, (1877) ; Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., (5), VIII., p. 266, pi. 8,
fig. 9, (1878).
Australia.

Myrabolia.

Beitter, Col. Hefte., XV., p. 55, (1876)

44. Myrabolia Haroldiana.

Myrabolia Haroldiana, Reitter, Col. Hefte., XV., p. 56, (1876).
Austi-alia.
15

224 a list op the cucujid^ of australia.

45. Myrabolia Grouvelliana.

Myrabolia Grouvelliana, Reitter, Verh. z-b., Wien XXVII., p. 179,
(1877).
Tasmania.

Nausibius.
Eedtenbacher, Fauu. Aiistr., II., p. 998, (1858).

46. Nausibius dentatus. (A.M.)

Silvanus dentatus, Marsham, Ent. Brit., p. 108.
Nausibius dentatus, Jacq. Duv., Gen. Col., II., pi. 50, fig. 250.

Cape York, North Australia ; Sydney.

Found all over the world imported with articles of commerce
and more especially in .sugar.

DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW FISHES FROM PORT
JACKSON.

By J. Douglas-Ogilby,

Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum,

Petraites hept.colus, sp. nov.
B. VI. D. 3/27/1-2. A. 2/18-2. V. 1/3. P. 12.

Length of the head 5^, of caudal fin 65, height of body 4? in the
total lengtla. Diameter of eye 3| in the length of head. Snout
short, ^ of a diameter of eye. Interorbital space slightly convex,
I of the same. Upper facial profile convex. Maxillary reaches to
behind the middle of the orbit. A single small simple tentacle
above each eye, and another, which is fringed, and widened out at
the tip, on the anterior nostrils. Small teeth on both jaws, and on
the vomer ; the lower jaw with one or two small canines at the
outer angles. The first dorsal is joined by a membrane to the
second, it is ^ of the height of the body, and equal to the last
spine of the second, in which there are but three rays, the anterior
pair of which are separated by a broad membranous interspace,
while the third is similarly joined to the root of the caudal. There
is a corresponding interspace before the two last anal rays, but no
membrane connecting the last ray with the tail ; both these fins
are liighest posteriorly. The pectoral and ventral fins are equal in
length, and ^ of that of the head. Caudal short, rounded. Scales
exceedingly small.

Colours briglit olive-green above, shading into the grey of the
under parts. There are seven black spots on each side along the
base of the dorsal fin, upon which they encroach a little when the
fish is newly caught ; the fii'st spot is below the short dorsal ; along
the middle of the sides is a less conspicuous row of seven spots, the

226 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW FISHES FROM PORT JACKSON,

fiist of which corresponds to the second of the upper row. There
are also faint signs of an anal row. Opercles and under side of the
head suffused with pink. Anal with several narrow dark vertical
stripes, the intervening spaces speckled. Ventrals, pectoi-als, and
caudal spotted with brown, and tipped with orange ; the latter
with a black spot at the upper terminal angle.

The above description is taken from a specimen, caught in Port
Jackson on the 11th of last April, and measuring 3/„ inches.

Mr. Macleay (Cat. Aust. Fishes, Vol. II., p. 22), suggests the
advisability of forming a new genus for the reception of his
Cristiceps fasc'iatus, and certain other forms now placed indis-
criminately in Clinus or Cristiceps as the author's fancy may
dictate. With this suggestion I cordially agree, and propose
therefore to form the genus Petrdites for the reception of those
homeless fishes, which oscillate between the two genera mentioned.

The genus would be thus characterized.

Petraites. gen. no v.

Branchiostegals six ; body compressed, covered with small scales :
Snout very short, cleft of the mouth small. A band of moderate
teeth on the jaws ; lower jaw with a strong curved canine at
either angle ; vomerine teeth present : palate edentulous. First
dorsal fin low, attached by a membrane to the second. Dorsal
slightly contiguous with the caudal.

Type specimen in Australian Museum ; registered number B.
6699.

Platycephalus macrodon. sp. nov.

B. VII. D. 1/7/14. A. 14. V. 1/5. P. 8/14. L. lat. 73.
L. trans. 10/20

Length of head 3 J, of caudal fin 7 J, height of body 8j°u in the
total length. Diameter of eye 5J in the length of head, 1;^ in
that of snout, which is narrow and but moderately depressed.
Interorbital space slightly concave, | of the diameter of eye.
Width of the head immediately in front of the eyes 2^, inside the
preopercular spines Ig in its length. Maxillary extends to below

BY J. DOUGLAS-OGILBY, 227

the middle of the orbit. Supraorbital with a single minute
anterior spine. Snout with numerous smooth ridges, which are
very faint on the interorbital space. A low, irregular, sometimes
double, ridge runs from a little behind the middle of the upper
margin of the orbit to the hinder edge of the cranium, and bears
a few small spines. A similar ridge along the upper edge of the
opercles terminates at the origin of the lateral line, and is also
spiniferous. Two moderately sized spines?, of which the vipper is
the more projecting, point forwards from the lower anterior angle
of each preorbital, behind which rise two prominent smooth
parallel ridges which terminate at the preopei'cular angle in strong
flattened spines, the lower of which is much the longer. Two
compressed opercular spines, almost hidden beneath the cuticle.
A short blunt spine on the suboperculum, which bears no flaps.
Anterior nostril with a short broad fringed tentacle. Lower jaw
the longer. Maxilla with a broad band of villiform teetb, and a
longitudinal row of three strong incurved canines, on either side
of the symphysis, the anterior being much the smallest. The
mandibular and palatine bands are much narrower, and are inter-
spersed with strong canines, pointing inwards, and placed at
regular intervals. A crescentic band of conical teeth on the head
of the vomer, the strongest on the outside. First dorsal spine
short and isolated ; the second the longest, 2^ in the length of
head ; soft dorsal highest anteriorly, nowhere so high as the
spinous. Pectoral short, | the length of head, eight lower rays
simple. Three inner rays of ventrals rather elongate, | of the
length of head, and reaching to second anal ray. Anal commences
beneath the third dorsal ray. Caudal short, truncated. Lateral
line smooth.

Colours bright golden brown, except on the flat lower surface,
which, with the anal fin, is colorless. There are numerous small
bluish spots above the lateral line. Dorsals hyaline, the spines
and rays spotted with golden brown. Pectorals and ventrals
similarly spotted on a lead-coloured ground. Caudal with large
basal golden spots, and a broad dusky marginal band.

228 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW FISHES FROM PORT JACKSON,

The example from which 1 have taken the above description is a
female, and has the ova about half developed. It measures a
little over 13 inches, and was trawled in Port Jackson on the 25th
April. The stomach contained an Atherina jnnguis, 4 inches long,
among other irrecognisable matter.

Type specimen in Australian Museum ; registered number B.
6,541.

Percis nov^-cambri/E. sp. nov.

B. VI. D. 4/24-25. A. 20. V. 1/5 P. 17. L. lat. 65. L.
trans. 3^/13.

Length of head 4|-, of caudal fin 6_:, height of body 7| in the
total length. Diameter of eye about ^ of the length of the head,
equal to the length of the snout, and more than double the inter-
orbital space, which is flat. The greatest width of the head is
equal to its length behind the anterior margin of the orbit ; the
greatest height to half its length. Snout rather blunt ; cleft of
mouth slightly oblique ; lower jaw a little the longer ; maxillary
reaches to beyond the vertical from the middle of the eye. The
preoperculum is furnished with some coarse serrations on the hinder
limb, and especially at the angle ; these however, seem to disappear
with age. A single blunt opercular spine. The jaws are armed
with a broad band of villiform teeth, the outer row of which is
somewhat the larger; also with 4 or 5 strong curved canines on
each side of the symphyses, and a similar row at the posterior end
of each jaw, those in the lower being the strongest ; there is also a
lunate patch of villiform teeth on the vomer. Fourth dorsal spine
the longest, | of the diameter of eye ; the third but little shorter.
The pectoral is equal to I of the length of the head ; the ventral
which is not quite so long does not reach the vent. Caudal
rounded.

Colors, (in spirits) above yellowish-brown, with very indistinct
darker marblings; head darker than body; sides and belly yellowish.
Seven large dark brown spots below the lateral line, and approx-
imating to the ventral profile. A narrow brown band from above
the root of the pectoral to the upper part of the caudal fin, where
it disappears in a round nearly black spot, which is continued

BY J. DOUGLAS OGILBY. 229

downwards, of a lighter shade, across the base of the rays, and
along the lower margin of the fin in a darker band, and finally
passes up the terminal margin in a narrow band ; remainder of
caudal and pectorals yellowish. First dorsal with a black blotch
covering the greater part of the fin ; second with narrow oblique
alternate light and dark bai\s ; anal tipped with blackish, and with
vermiculations of the same color on the hyaline basal half.
Ventrals dusky.

The above description is taken from two Port Jackson examples,
which have long been in the Australian Museum collection, labelled
as Percis nebulosa, but which difier essentially from that species.
They are now in our tyj)e collection ; registered numbers B.
6,696-97.

I am also constrained to describe as new a species of Latris,
which was sent up from the markets a few days since, and which
difiers in several material points from any of those catalogued by
Mr. Macleay. I may mention here that in Castelnau's descriptions
of the three forms differentiated by him, he omits all mention of
two points which are of great importance in this genus, namely,
the number of simple pectoral rays and the presence or absence of
vomerine teeth. The following is a description of the specimen,
which measures 21^ inches and is in the Museum collection, its
registered nmuber being B. 7024.

Latris Ramsayi. sp. nov.

B. VI. D. 18/38. A. 3/33. V. 1/5. P. 10/8. L. lat. 103.
L. trans, about 10/24.

Length of head 4|, of caudal fin 4^, height of body Sj^ in the
total length. Diameter of eye % of length of head, * of snout, and
^ of interorbital space, which is convex. Upper part of snout
much swollen. Maxilla reaches to the vertical from the posterior
nostril. Preoperculum without cilia. A broad simple skinny flap
behind the anterior nostril. Lips fleshy. Lower jaw with a
single row of short conical teeth, many of which are wanting in
our specimen. Upper jaw with an outer band of strong subulate
teeth, and indications of smaller teeth just piercing the skin

230 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW FISHES FROM PORT JACKSON.

behind ; no vomerine or palatine teeth. Tlie fourth to seventh
dorsal spines are about equal and longest, J of the length of the
head ; the first spine is quite separate from the second, and equal
to the 17th, which is much sliorter than the last ; the anterior rays
the longest, longer than any of the spines. Anal spines very
short, the 3rd much the longest, only g of the length of the
anterior rays. Pectoral fins f of the length of head, its eight
lower rays are simple, and shorter than the branched rays.
Ventrals short, originating beneath the 9th dorsal spine, not
nearly reaching to the vent, and I of the length of head. Caudal
deeply forked, lobes equal. Scales small, covering the entire head
except the mandibulary aud anteorbital regions, and the snout in
front of the nostrils ; the bases of the dorsal, anal, and pectoral
fins, and the greater part of the caudal are scaly.

Colours. The upper parts are brown, and shade down into
ashy-grey on the sides, both being marked with numerous narrow
longitudinal rather indistinct dull yellow bands. A broad light
coloured band across the occiput. Lips yellowish-white ; inside
of mouth blotched with black and white. Vertical fins brown
with indistinct lighter blotches. Caudal margined with black,
and with a lighter sub-terminal stripe.

It may be as well to call attention here to the following
differences between this fish aud the genus Latris, as constituted
by Dr. Gunther. (Cat., Vol. II., p. 86 ; and Study of Fishes,
p. 412.) The left hand column pertains to Gunther's Latris, the
right hand to the present fish.

Spinous dorsal with 17 spines. Spinous dorsal with 18 spines.
Teeth villiform in both jaws. No villiform teeth.
Preoperculum minutely ciliated. Preoperculum entire.

1

NOTE ON NEOAXTHIAS GUENTHERI. Casteln.
By J. Douglas-Ogilby,

Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

On the 13tli of last month we received at the Museum a fine
specimen of this fish, which had been caught at the Heads during
the previous night; it measured \1\ inches, and proved to be a
male with the milt well-developed, and being perfectly fresh when
it came into my hands, I had the best possible opportunity of
describing it and of noting down its beautiful coloration.

A slightly larger example of Giinther's Anthias loiigimanus was
also captured at the same time and place, and was sent up to the
Museum along with the Neoanthias ; the similarity of physiognomy
between the two fishes is so striking that I made a careful descrip-
tion of this specimen also, more especially when I found that it was
a female with well developed ova.

The result of my examination is that I fail to find any appreciable
structural difference between the two forms, and as difi:erence in
color alone cannot be relied on as specific in this vertebrate class,
I am of opinion that the fishes described by Giinther, and Castelnau
respectively are identical in species, but diff'erent in sex.

Dr. Giincher (Cat., Vol. I., p. 88), hints at the advisability of
separating his A. longimanus, and certain other forms, from the
typical Anthiads, and in this suggestion I am disposed to agree,
nor have we far to look for a generic title suitable to these forms.
If we turn to the Fauna Japonica, p. 64, pi. 30, we will find a fish
described and figured by Schlegeh under the generic name of
Caprodon, which is easily recognisable as identical with Castelnau's
Neoanthias ; and since we know from the lettei'-press that Schlegel's
description was taken from a mounted specimen which, as remarked
by Giinther — p. 94 — is evidently imperfect, having but five

232 NOTE ON NEOANTHIAS GUENTHERI.

branchiostegals and no palatine teeth, it is probable also that the
caudal fin, the shape of which in his figure is unique in connection
with the genus Anthias, was frayed or even partially broken oflT,
and that the artist replaced it in his own fashion. As Schlegel
neglected to give a specific name to his fish, Giinther gave it a
place in the Catalogue under the title of Anthias Schlegelii ; and
I therefore think that without doubt the true name and synonymy
of our fish should stand thus : —

Caprodon sciilegeli.

Caprodon, Temvi. <b ScJdeg., Faun. Jap., Foiss., p. 64, jjI. 30,
1850, ^.

Caprodon, Richards, Ichth., China, p. 235.

Anthias schlegelii, Gunth., Cat., Vol. /., p. 93, 1859, $.

Anthias longimanus, Gunth., Cat., Vol. /., p. 94, 1859, 5.

Neoanthias guentheri, Casteln., Froc. Lin. Sac, N. S. W., Vol.
III., p. 367, 1878, $.

Gunther remarks the likeness between his A. schlegp.lii and
Richardson's Serranus rasor, but the want of lingual teeth in the
latter, and also in the Anthias richardsoni, forms a marked
difference between tlie two species. Through the kindness of
Mr. Macleay I have been enabled of late to examine a specimen of
A. richardsoni, obtained in this neighbourhood on April 28th, and
measuring a little under nine inches, and the first too recorded
from our shores, I have also examined some spirit specimens in
our own Museum from Tasmania, and am convinced that rasor
will prove to bear the same relationship to richardsoni as guentheri
does to longimanus ; in which case the correct name would be
Caprodon rasor.

NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY AND WATER SUPPLY OF

THE INTERIOR OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

Plate XXV.

By Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.G.S.

The subject of water supply for the interior is occupying a con-
siderable amount of attention at present. Much of what has V)een
suggested on the subject is of no practical value from the fact that
comparisons are instituted with other countries where the existing
physical conditions are very different. The anomalies, (so called)
which we find so often in Australian Geology and Botany pi'esent
themselves in full force when we come to deal with the question
of a water supply for the interior. In other countries the rivers
grow and increase as they flow, while in the intex^ior of the colony
they (with two exceptions) grow less. When we study a map of
the Thames or Ganges we may mark the source of the river and
say that a spring or glacial stream comes to light at that place.
This is all changed in the country to which these notes refer.
When you stand at the point indicated on the map as the source
of any western river, you for the most part find no water-course,
no water, and can form no idea of where the water comes from.
When you do find a *' river " you soon learn that neither does it drain
the country it flows through, nor is there any soakage from the river.
The physical conditions of the interior are so exceptional that one
must be familiar with them before any scheme can be proposed to
meet all facts observed. The following notes refer to underground
waters only, and are made out altogether from personal observation.

Underground Waters. — I take it as proved that the rainfall is
largely in excess of water accounted for by soakage, evaporation
or the outflow of rivers ; otherwise, or as Mr. Russell puts it, we
should expect to find at Bourke a river 200 yards wide, and 200
feet deep. The water gets away underground, and the geological
history of part, at least, of the interior will explain in what way.
By the interior I mean all the country situated west of Dubbo
and north of the 33rd parallel. In this country three well-marked
and distinct geological areas may be distinguished which for
convenience I name as follows : —

234 NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE INTERIOR OF N.S.W.,

I. The Great Tertiary Plains or Merri INFerri Country,

II. Siluro-Devonian, or Cobar Giralanibone Colmtry.

III. Cretaceous or Warrego Country.

The Plains. — The tertiaiy plains extend from the Bogan to the
northern boundary of the colony and are represented to a smaller
extent towards the south-west. They ai^e one great alluvial deposit
which show the vast amount of mateiial removed by denuding
influences from the western slopes noi-th of the 33rd parallel.

The efiicacy of denudation for a work of such magnitude may be
doubted ; but as we find the plains at every known depth composed
of materials similar in character to deposits now in course of forma-
tion, it would be rash to say what might not have been accomplished
by erosion in a counti-y which has been above the sea since mesozoic
times at the very least. Writing of Le Puy, Dr. Geikie says that
his first impression was one of utter bewilderment, and upset all
previous estimates of the power of rain and rivers. There is
almost no amount of waste and erosion that may not be brought
about in time by the influence of frost, springs, rain and rivers.
To understand this in our colony, one has only to travel over
some of the hundreds of miles of plains in the interior.

If we imagine the present surface of the interior covered with a
deposit of impervious clay, to the depth of 200 feet, the plains would
beginabout Wellington insteadof Dubbo, so far would they encroach
on the high lands. The present or Bell River would of course flow
on to the plains about the same place and cut a bed for itself on
the new surface. Now if a well were sunk through this 200 feet
of clay a good supply of water would be found in the old river bed,
and further, if this well happened to be sunk on that part of the old
river which we know as the "Cataract of the Macquarie" the
water would rise to the surface we imagine to exist 200 feet above.
Diagram II., will make this clear. There is a bar of rock on the
river at this i>oint which would efi'ectually stay the flow, while
the impervious clay above would retain the water in that direction.
The supply must be practically inexhaustible, for at the place
where the river comes on to the new surface, there is the old
river bed dipping away, and as capable of absorbing water as if
the new deposit never covered it.

BY REV. J. MILNE CURRAN, P.G.S. 235

Sometliing like what I have been supposing has actually taken
place in the past, with this diSerence that instead of one old
river bed under the plains, at one particular level, we have many
and on different horizons, from the fact that the formation of the
plains extended over great periods of time.

The permanance of drainage-lines is one of the most remarkable
facts in the geological history of continents, and Australia is in no
way exceptional in this regard. The erosive action of the
western rivers and the forming of the plains may have been at
work long before Miocene times, when the whole southern portion
of the continent was upraised some 600 feet. At that time — in
the hey-day of its youth — the average fall of the Macquarie was
much greater than at present, and may be represented by a — 6
(Diagram I.) As the plains were formed the river occupied levels
as c, c^, e, while at the a level would be unaltered or eroded if any-
thing. An important point to note is that the newer beds all
branch from thei old ones, as in the case supposed above, and with
like results, namely that while some water will flow along the new
channel, a great deal will still get away by the old bed.

It may be objected that if the plains were formed in the way I
explain, we should have not many old river beds at different
levels, but one great bed of river drift that has been slowly raised
while the plains were formed. We might, I admit, expect some-
thing like this, if the rivers deposited alluvium to an equal depth,
and at the same time over the whole surface of the growing and
gradually spreading plains. Then the river would not leave its
channel, as when the latter was raised, the banks and surrounding
country would be raised to an equal extent. It is almost needless
to remark that this is not at all in keeping with our knowledge of
the way rivers work in forming plains and depositing alluvium.
The great bulk of the transported matter is deposited on or near
the banks, so that in time the river margins and eventually the
river, will be above the level of the surrounding country. The
effect of this, in the end, is to alter the course of the river, only
, to begin again the same cycle of change. Thus, during the
formation of the plains, we have old river beds, (connected with

236 NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE INTERIOR OF N.S.W.

pi'esent ones) not only at different levels or on different horizons,
but also over separate areas.

If my explanation be the right one, a glance at Diagram TI.,
will show what becomes of the floods that " never come down the
river," and will show, too, how all the wells on the plains are
down to the river drift, otherwise there is no water. On the
plains north of Nyngan I have seen the water, after rain, flow
from the banks of the creeks towards a depression, a few hundred
yards away, and disappear at such a rate as would make the creek
" run," yet the latter was perfectly dry. A vast amount of the
rainfall is absorbed in this way that would otherwise reach the
surface creeks, and so eventually help to swell the river that
wovild then be flowing by Bourke. At Mullungudgeree and other
places the water rises in the wells on the old river drift. After
the reference to the " Macquarie Cataract," further explanation of
this is unnecessary.

I may observe that I have examined a great number of wells ol
quite another class from any referred to in this paper. They give
good water for a time only, and have been called " surface wells."
They are sunk in pans or beds of sand that occupy depressions in
the clay. The water is merely surface water absorbed by the sand.

Giralaynhone Country. — The Cobar Giralambone country consists
of inclined silarian slates and schists, with patches of devonian
lime and sand-stones. The whole area (100 to 150 Q) miles square)
is considerably elevated above the plains. Bare and jagged peaks
•stand out over the general level. Nowhere, as far as I have seen,
is the bed-rock at any great distance from the surface. The
conditions under which we should expect to find under-ground
waters here and on the plains, evidently difler as widely as the
geology of the two districts.

Warrego Country. — Of the Cretaceous or Warrego country I
cannot at present speak from experience. But it is clear to
every geologist, from what is known of Cretaceous rocks, that as
regards underground waters we are justified in separating the
areas where these rocks occur, from both the Great Tertiary
Plains and the Cobar Giralambone country.

SOME REMARKS ON THE FERTILIZATION OF THE
GENUS GOODENIA.

By E. Haviland.

On perusing the Paper by Mr. Hamilton on the genus Goodenia
read at our last Meeting, I was much surprised to find, that wliile
admitting the correctness of my own conclusion, that Goodenia ovata
was cross-fertilized by the aid of insects, he claims that G. hederacea
is self-fertilised. I mentioned in my former paper on this genus
(in Society's Proceedings, June 1884) that, -'there could be little
doubt, that the whole genus was fertilized by the aid of insects."
Indeed it is difficult to imagine that plants of the same genus can
diifer in so important a feature as their mode of fertilization ; unless
it be in some partly or wholly cleistogamous plants, as in Myrsine
variabilis ; where not only in the same genus, but in the same
species, one tree may be found with the whole of its flowers quite
. closed until self-fertilization has been effected ; and yet another
■with a portion, only, of its flowers closed, while the remainder open
in the usual way and expose themselves to cross-fertilisation ; but
the relative position of the organs of fertilisation is similar in
both cases, and the opening or not opening in this genus I consider
to be due to some mechanical condition, which, whether belonging
to the individual plant, or accidental, requires investigation. Be
this as it may, however ; to all intents and purposes, the closed
flowers, doomed to self-fertilisation, are cleistogamous, while the
others are not.

Mr. Hamilton, in referring to my statement, that in Goodenia
ovata, a mere touch will open the division of the upper lobe of the
corolla, and thus admit the approach of an insect to the stigma ;
states his inability to open the back lobe of the corolla of G,
hederacea, even with his fingers, camel hair pencil or other blunt
article ; unless a considerable amount of force is used. In my

238 REMARKS ON THE FERTILIZATION OP THE GENUS GOODENA,

paper, I speak of the upper lobe, and I point out, that, while the
lower lobe is not divided so deeply, the upper one is divided nearly
to its base. This of course makes the claws of the lobe very narrow
and weak, so that the edges of the two divisions which only touch
each other, ai'e, as I said, liable to be separated by the slightest
movement. Generally however, this opening of the divisions of
the lobe is not necessary, the indusium and stigma being in most
cases already within the corolla. I only say in my paper •' some-
times it happens, that although the mouth of the indusium is
presented to the opening of the corolla lobe, it may not have quite
entered it, and that, in such case, the ready opening of the divisions
of the upper lobe remedies the evil, and exposes the stigma to the
visit.s of insects from the inside of the corolla" ; but this (happening
so exceptionally) is a matter of little importance. A. more material
point is that which Mr. Hamilton mentions as a "significant fact"
that neither full anthers or empty indusia are ever found in open
flowers. On reference to my paper, above referred to, it will be
found that I say " Taking now a mature d^nd fully expanded jiower,
weshall find the stamens still outside, and usually bent farther away
from the corolla, the anthers all open and, and the pollen either in
abundance, or, in some cases, past that stage, all gone, and the
anthers shrivelled." Of course I intended by this to imply that
the pollen was generally exposed in the open anthers, but that in
some cases insects had carried it away and left the anthers empty.
As to the non existence of empty indusia in open flowers. I find
in my rough notes, made while studying the genus, a remark
touching an open flower of G. ovata thus " Notwithstanding that
the anthers are empty, there is not a particle of pollen either on
or inside the indusium or on the stigma ; showing that the flower
has not been fertilised by its own pollen (for the stigma was not
mature) and moreover that it has not yet received pollen from any
other flower." I found many flowers in this state, but I did not
deem it necessary to make a note of more than one.

Perhaps the best authority on the fertilization of jjlants was the
late Herman Mueller, and I am bound to admit that in his work
on the fertilization of flowers he agrees with IMr. Hamilton, in

BY E. HAVILAND, 239

supposing that the anthers in this genus deposit their pollen, in
the first place, into the indusium while in the bud ; but from that
point he entirely difiers from him. His (Herman Mueller's)
opinion is pretty clearly expressed thus : — " In the plants of this
order the style ends in a collecting cup which receives the pollen
while still in the bud, and then closes up, leaving a narrow opening
for the most part covered with hairs. At the same time it bends
down to stand in the mouth of the almost horizontal flower, so
that insect visitors come in contact with the hairs and dust them-
selves with the pollen. As the stigmatic lobes grow up in the cup
(indusium) they keeping forcing fresh pollen into the narrow slit,
and finally emerge by it themselves and then receive the follen of
younger flowers from insect visitors." My own expressed opinion,
that the genus is cross-fertilised by the aid of insects, is thus
corroborated by Herman Mueller, who only differs from me in
supposing that the pollen is first deposited by the anthers in the
indusium of the same flower, and then carried away by insects as
the stigma pushes it out of the indusium. Whereas a very careful
study of the genus leads me to the conclusion that insects carry
away the pollen directly from the anthers, leaving in the same way
the stigma when it shall have matured to receive the pollen of
other flowers. Even the fact of Mr. Hamilton having found
the pollen of the flower closely packed aboat its own stigma does
not necessarily imply self-fertilisation. I have already pointed
this out at length in my paper on Utricularia. (Pro. Lin. Soc,
29th November, 1882.) It is not by any means unusual for the
stigma of a flower to be thickly covered by the pollen from its own
anthers ; not however for its own fertilisation, but to hold it up
and expose it to the visits of insects who carry it away, leaving
the stigma clean to receive other pollen in its turn. In the genus
Lobelia, the style pushes the pollen before it out of the tube
formed by the anthers, and in which it is very closely packed.
This is carried away by insects ; and only then do the stigmatic
lobes open to receive what pollen may be brought to them. (See
my paper Pro. Lin. Soc, March, 1883.) So also in the genus
Wahlenbergia, I quote from my paper on that genus in Pro. Lin.
16

^A.*^-**: ^V

240 REMARKS ON THE FERTILIZATION OP THE GENUS GOODENIA.

Soc, Dec, 1884. " When the stigma has grown far above the
anthers it exposes a large mass of pollen adherent to it, it does
not fall into the corolla, but is carried away (presumably) by insects
for the fertilization of other flowers. Thus like Lobelia, in the
same natural order of plants, it first ofiers its own pollen for the
fertilization of other plants, and then exposed its own stigma to
receive that of other plants in return."

But we may go still farther, and say, that even the fact of pollen
tubes being emitted from the pollen grains, does not of necessity
imply self-fertilization. Any one in the habit of examining the
reproductive organ of plants microscopically, will frequently have
found pollen tubes emitted from the pollen grains covering the
stigma ; and which, as the stigma is not covered by the cuticle,
may even have very slightly penetrated it ; but only to this slight
extent, because the stigma is not mature or in any way prepared
to utilize it. Pollen may be induced by artificial means to emit its
tubes, and will do so of itself under favourable circumstances,
■whether on a stigma or not. As an instance of this, I may say
that I had or still have a microscopic slide containing grains of
pollen of the common wall-flower (Cherianthus chieri) which I
supposed to be quite dry when mounted, but which, from damp
and warmth, emitted tubes some days afterwards. In another
instance I found pollen on the stigma of Lobelia which had emitted
tubes ; but which, not being able to penetrate the unprepared
surface, had raised the pollen grains so that they stood up on the
face of the stigma like minute pins upon a cushion. I may
perhaps add here a caution to young botanists, not to mistake this
appearance on the stigma of Wahlenbergia for pollen grains so
lifted up ; the surface of that stigma being covered with globular
headed glands, very likely so to mislead an inexperienced observer,
into the supposition that they are pollen tubes partly penetrating
the stigma.

NOTE ON A MEDUSA FROM THE TROPICAL PACIFIC.

By R. von Lendenpeld, Ph.D.

In 1829 Eschscholtz (System der Acalephen, p. 89, pi. XI., fig. 1),
described and figured a Medusa from the Tropical Pacific, under the
name Gorgonia rosacea. This species has been subsequently placed
in the genus Liriope by Gegenbauer (Versuch eines Systems der
Medusen, p. 257.) Later writers as L. Agassiz and E. Haeckel,
have adopted the view taken of this species by Gegenbauer (I.e.)

No specimens have however, been seen by all these authors, all
copying the diagnosis of Eschscholtz.

Among the Medusse collected by D. Richter of S.M. " Stosch,"
this species is represented by two fine specimens, which were both
procured in the Phillippine Islands.

Both specimens ai-e of equal size. Umbrella 5 mm. high and
9 mm. wide. They are consequently much larger than the
specimen described by Eschscholtz.

Haeckel (System der Medusen I., p. 290), doubts the correctness
of the statement made by Eschscholtz that this species has no
" Zangenkegel," tongue cave.

In the two specimens, which I have examined no tongue was
present, so that the diagnosis given by Eschscholtz appears correct
in this respect.

242 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ZOOLOGY OP NEW GUINEA,

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ZOOLOGY OF NEW GUINEA.

Notes on Birds from Mount Astrolabe, with
descriptions of tavo new species.

By E. p. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., F.L.S., &c.

Having recently received a small collection of Birds from Mount
Astrolabe on the S.E. Coast of New Guinea, I beg to offer some
remarks thereon, with descriptions of two new species of Birds of
Paradise.

LOPHORINA. SUPERBA MINOR.

The specimens from the mountainous parts of the south-east end
of New Guinea are smaller than those received from the north-
west end of the Island, otherwise they appear to be much the same
in coloration.

Adult Male. — A purple tinge from the ear-coverts, surrounds the
nape below the steel-blue of the crown and occiput ; the hind neck,
mantle, and tips of the long plumes are distinctly oil-green, with a
brassy tinge ; the wings and tail are jet black and velvety, with a
shade of purple or steel-blue on the upper tail coverts and the two
centre tail feathers, the inner webs of the others blackish-brown. The
chest-shield and its elongate plumes glossy steel-blue, or metallic
green according to the light. The crown and occiput similar in
tint, with a bar of violet purple about the middle of each feather.
Under surface black, with a slight purplish-tinge ; throat black,
chin black with the anterior feathers elongated and directed
forwards, reaching more than half-way to the tip of the bill. Bill,
legs, and feet black.

Total length, 8-50 in. ; wing, 540; tail, 3-90; tarsus, 1-30; bill
from forehead, I'lO; from nostril, 070.

BY E. P. KAMSAY, F.R.S.E., F.L.S., &C. 243

All the specimens examined are about the same size, and
differ from those of Mount Arfak, and from the north-western
parts of New Guinea, collected by Beocari and d'Albertis. On
reference to the measurements they will be seen to be slightly
smaller.

It is only fair to say that some months ago, I saw similar
specimens in a collection made by Mr. Hunstein, who was, I
believe, the first to discover this species in the south-eastern
portion of New Guinea.

Parotia lawesii. Sp. nov.

This species resembles the Parotia sexpennis (Bodd), but
differs in the following particulars — the frontal white shield
or crest is placed over the nostrils and on the forehead in a
line with the bill, and not across or at right angles to it, the feathers
from each side folded and recurved over a dividing line, which
extends to the base of an olive metallic brown shield, which
is placed between erect side plumes over the eye, the remainder of
the feathers of the head of a more brassy olive tint ; the occipital
ridge or tippet-like crest of stiff elongated feathers are of a clear
steel-blue, pui'ple or violet, but no green tinge so conspicuous in
P. sefilata, (Penn.) The broad chest shield of metallic feathers is
of a much deeper tinge of brassy green, and of a firey orange tint
in certain lights. There are other slight differences, such as the
disposal to a greater or lesser extent of the metallic tints on the
wings and tail, the spathulate or webbed tips of the elongated shafts
from the ear-coverts are proportionately larger and broader, and
the tail very much shorter. Bill black, legs and feet blackish
brown.

Total length (of skins), 9 inches; wing, 6 inches; tail, 3-2;
tarsus, 1'7 ; bill from forehead, 1 '25 ; from gape, 1 -25 : from anterior
margin of nasal crest, 0-6 ; length of ear plumes, 6-3 inches.

The measurements of an adult male Parotia sefilata from
Mount Arfak are as follows : — Total length, 13 inches ; wing, 6*5 ;
tail, 5-4 ; tarsus, 2-1 ; bill fi'om gape, 1-5.

244 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ZOOLOGY OF NEW GUINEA.

The specimens of this species were obtained on the slopes of
Movint A.strolabe.

Xanthomelas aureus. Linn.
That this bird inhabits the south-east end of New Guinea, is
proved by the occurrence of the feathers in various head dresses
worn by the natives, which we have from time to time received
from thence, they are sometimes worked together with the ear
and nape plumes of Parotia Lawesii, and Lopfiorina superba
minor, d'c.

Myzomela rosenbergi., &c.

In the collection of specimens recently received, I found four
adult males of this very distinct species.

The following species not hitherto recorded also occur : — Tricho-
glossus papuana, T. josephinae, T. pulchellus and T. muschenbrohii,
and Ghoitorhynchus papuana.

DESCRIPTIOISr OF A NEW SPECIES OF COLLYRIO-
CINCLA, FROM THE SCRUBS IN THE VICINITY
OF CAIRNS, QUEENSLAND.

By E. p. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., F.L.S., &c.

CoLLYRIOCINCLA BOWERI. Sp. nOV.

Adult Male. — All the upper surface dark lead-blue, wings and
tail brown ; all the under surface rufous inclining to chesnut,
deepest in colour on the under wing-coverts, axillavies, abdomen,
and under tail-coverts ; chin inclining to ashy grey, an indistinct
ashy grey spot in front of the eye ; ear- coverts and sides of head
like the back and upper surface ; throat and chest with a distinct
lead-blue shaft line down the centre of the feathers ; bill and bristles
black, legs and feet blackish lead colour. Total length (of skin ',
7*7 inches; wing, 4 inches; tail, 3-5 inches; tarsus, 1-1 inches;

BY E. P. RAMSAY, F.R.S.E., F.L.S., &C. 245

bill from the foreliead, 1-1 from nostril, 0-7 ; from gape, 1*2 inches.
In form the bill is long and straight, narrow, slightly tapering and
very slightly curved from the base to the tip. Measurements in
the flesh. " Irides brown, bill black, legs bluish lead ; length, 8 J
inches. December 12, 1884." B. B.

This species which I have named after its discoverer, T. H.
Bowyer Bower, Esq., was found in the scrubs of the Cairns
District, Queensland ; it is quite distinct from any of the varieties
of C. rufigaster, or C. parvissima of Gould.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. C. R. Wilkinson, F.G.S., exhibited a collection of recent
shells, which had been obtained at depths of from 24 to 60 feet in
sinking through the estuarine deposits of the Stockton, and
Bullock Island and Y^ickham Coal Pits, and the Harbour Works
near Newcastle. At a depth of 55 feet at Stockton a piece of
wood 3 feet long and 1 foot thick was also found. Some of the
specimens were collected by Mr. John Mackenzie, F.G.S., Mr.
Cecil Darley, C.E., and Mr. J. Rossiter. One of the shells Mr.
Brazier stated does not now live upon the Newcastle Coast, but it
exists in Tasmania. A collection of shells from a similar deposit
at the Mary ville Colliery was exhibited before the Society a few
months ago by Mr. J. G. Grifiin. C.E.

Dr. Cox remarked that amongst the sub-fossils exhibited by
Mi\ Wilkinson, there was to him one of special interest, he
referred to the Syphonalia maxirna, Tryon. Hitherto this species
had only been recorded from Tasmania, but he had recently
ascertained that it existed also on the Victorian Coast near Port
Phillip Heads. Dr. Cox considered that this sub-fossil tended to
confirm the hypothesis that a colder climate prevailed at some not
very remote period of this colony. The discovery also ot the
Valuta papulosa, and Cyprea umhilicata for the first time on our
coast by deep sea dredgings, and alive, led Prof. Wy ville Thompson

246 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

to conclude that these Molluscs had only migrated north, following
some current of water of the same temperature as these species
which were found in Tasmania.

Mr, Wilkinson also exhibited a collection of splendid specimens
of Grasses and other Plants, including about 60 varieties from the
Wonominta Station in the Albert District. They were collected
and presented to the Society by Mrs. Robert Kennedy. Grass
had scarcely been seen in this country during the past four years,
owing to the drought ; but since the late rains there has been a
most luxuriant growth. Mrs. Kennedy has forwarded a duplicate
collection to the Colonial and Indian Exhibition in London. Mr,
Wilkinson considered that owing to the almost isolated position of
the Barrier Ranges, some of the flora may be peculiar to the
locality, and probably new and valuable fodder plants will be
discovered there.

Dr. R. von Lendenfeld stated that he had discovered sensitive
and ganglia cells similar to those which he had described as
occurring in Calcareous Sponges, now also in the horny Sponges. In
a species belonging to the Family Spongidoe, there exists an extra-
ordinary lacunose tissue outside of that layer, which is homologous
to the outer skin of other Sponges, By movements of the
extremely fine membranes constituting this tissue the water
current is regulated. In the lines where the membranes are
joined, ganglia cells are found in small groups and apparently
there belong a number of sensitive cells to each ganglia cell group.
These cells are much larger than the corresponding elements of
Calcareous Sponges.

Mr. Macleay exhibited some Fresh Water Fishes, which he had
received from Mr. Charles Jenkins, L.S., of Yass, They consisted
of specimens of the genus Iltcrraya, Castelnau, an Oligorus of very
remarkable form, and a remarkably elongate Gado2Jsis, all from the
Little River in the Alpine Regions of the Murrumbidgee. Also,
a species of Galaxias from the Yass River. He stated his intention
of describing them at the next meeting.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 247

The President exhibited, on account of the Rev. J. Milne
Curran, the following specimens, to which some allusion had been
made in his paper upon the Geology of Dubbo : —

\. Sandstone in an almost unaltered condition, ferruginous, and
with a little lime and clay. It contains concretionary nodules and
quartz pebbles.

2. Like No. 1, but with larger proportions of lime and clay,
and no pebbles or concretions (in the specimen.)

3. The same stone in a condition of incipient metamorphism.
Divisional planes inclined towards each other at various angles,
indicate an approach to the crystalline condition. The grains of
quartz still distinct.

4. Much the same as the last, but less marked in structure.
Very friable.

5. Quartz and felspar separating. The quartz appears to have
been at least partially re-deposited from solution, perhaps in water
at a high temperature.

6. Has assumed the appearance of a granitic porphyry, with
crystals of quartz. The fractures of the specimen pass through
the quartz.

7. The felspar partially crystallized — Manganese present

8. Has almost the appearance of a quartz and felspar binary
granite, though the structure is rather open or venicular.

10. A cube of the building stone described in his paper.

11. A slide of sand grains, illustrating their rounded and
abraded character. From the Dubbo sandstone.

12 and 13. Thin sections of metamorphic sandstone or quartzite
in which the several grains are very closely united. On examin-
ation by the polariscope these grains were shown to be perfectly
crystallized, and not united by any colloidal silica.

Mr. E. P. Ramsay exhibited (1) some specimens of a new and
large species of Ostracode (Estheria) from the Clarence River, col-
lected by Mr. Goodrich. (2) Two fungi from the vicinity of

248 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mossgiel, received from Mr. K. H. Bennett. (3) A disc-shaped
club of gold-bearing quartz, with sharp circular edge, used by the
natives of New Guinea, in the neighbourhood of Mount Astrolabe.
Mr. J. D. Ogilby exhibited a new form of Blenny, allied to
Cristiceps and Clinas, for which he proposed the new generic name
of Petraites. It differs in the dental formula and fins,

Mr. E. G. W. Palmer exhibited two Moths of the Family
Bomhycidce. The larva of one he found feeding on the Green
Wattle {Acacia decurrens). The larvje of the other, Chelepteryx
Collesii, on various species of Eucalyptus. The moths of this
latter prove to be all males, and took wing on the 6th of May
in immense numbers in the neighbourhood of Burwood. The larvae
attain a groat size and are covered with sharp spine-like reddish
hairs, which are used in spinning their cocoons.

Baron Maclay called attention to the fact that the surprisingly
low temperature of the blood in Echidna hystrix, to which he
had previously called the attention of the Society, had been
observed by Professor Owen forty years ago.

Mr. Whitelegge exhibited a very large and admirably mounted
collection of 120 species of Mosses, 16 of which were new to
Australia, and 26 to New South Wales.

WEDNESDAY, 24th JUNE, 1885.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M.A , F.G.S., in the chair.

MEMBER ELECTED.

The Rev. T. J. Hyder, Lawrence, Clarence River, was elected a
Member of the Society.

DONATIONS.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger." Nos. 192, 193. From the Editor.

" Results of Rain and River Observations made in New South
Wales during 1884." By H. C. Russell, B.A., F.R.A.S. From
the Author.

" Note on an Aphidian Insect infesting Pine Trees, with
observations made on the name ' Chermes ' or ' Kermes.' " By
W. M. Maskell, F.R.M.S. From the Author.

" Proceedings of the Cambridge Philosophical Society." Vol.
v., Parts 1, 2 and 3. "Transactions." Vol. XIV., Part 1.
From the Society.

" Report on the Progress and Condition of the Botanical Gardens
and Government Plantations, Adelaide." From R. Schomburgk,
Director.

250 LONATIONS,

"Science." Vol. V., Nos. 114-117, April lOth— May 1st, 1885
From the Editor.

"Bulletin de la Societe Royale de Geographie d'Anvers."
Tome IX., 4th Fascicule, 1884. From the Society.

" Victorian Naturalist." Vol. II., No. 2, June 1885. From
the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

" Annales de la Societe Geologique de Belgique." Tome XI.,
1883-4. From the Society.

" Meddelanden af Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica."
Helsingfors, Finland. From the Society.

" Verhandlungen des Vereins fur Naturwissenschaftliche Unter-
haltung zu Hamburg." Band V., 188"2. From the Society.

" Feuille des jeunes Naturalistes " No. 175. From the Editor.

" Midland Medical Miscellany." Vol. IV., No. 41, May 1885.
From the Editor.

PAPERS READ.

EOUGH NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE
CLAREMONT ISLANDS.

By Gervase F. Mathew, R.N., F.L.S., F.Z.S., F.R.G.S., &c.

At three o'clock on the afternoon of the 12th of last month,
"H.M.S. Espiegle" anchored off No. 5 (on the Admiralty Chart)
of a group of small islands, called the Claremont Islands, lying
inside the Great Barrier Reef, between ("!ooktown and Cape Yoi'k,
and in latitude 13-42 south. The group consists of eight
principal islands, with a few islets, No. 1 being the farthest to the
south in latitude 13 57 south, and just off Point Claremont,
while No. 8, the farthest north, is in latitude 13 "16 south, so that
they extend for some 41 miles from north to south. They are low
flat islands, moi'e or less covered with scrubby brushwood, and
with a few trees in the centre, and some of them are fringed with
a belt of mangrove bushes. At the time of our visit these
islands were looking beautifully green.

No. 5 having no name we will call " Espiegle " Island. It is
one of the smallest of the group, being little more than one and a
half or two miles in circumstance, and is covered with high grass,
with patches of low bushes and a few trees at one corner of it.
A sloping sandy beach runs round the greater part of it, and at
low tide a large tract of coral flats and reefs, extending for several
miles on each side of the islands is uncovered, and afiords fine
feeding grounds for numerous species of shore birds.

Soon after the ship anchored I landed in company with one of
my messmates — Lieutenant Allenby — to explore the island and

252 ON THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE CLAREMONT ISLANDS,

see what it produced in the way of sport or natui'al history.
AUenby took his gun, but I contented myself with a butter fly net
and a few collecting boxes. As we approached the island we
noticed that most of the low bushes were covered with white and
blue reef herons, as was also the beach, while feeding upon the
reefs, which were then uncovered, were a multitude of shore
birds. Some of the latter, as we drew nearer, became suspicious
and took wing, and with loud cries moved off to a more distant
point along the reef. Among them I recognized the familiar
notes of the curlew, whimbrel, grey and golden plover, &c.
Directly we landed Allenby went off after the birds on the reef,
while I strolled up towards the bushes to look for Lepidoptera, &c.
The reef herons were quite tame and permitted me to approach
within a short distance before they took wing. While watching
them a bevy of quail rose suddenly at my feet and quite startled
me with the whirr of their wings as they flew ofi" at an amazing
pace for a short distance and then alighted abruptly among
the high grass ; and I almost regretted that I had not brought
a gun.

There were many interesting plants growing a little way above
high water mark, and some of them were in flower, but most of
them, I am sorry to say, were unknown to me^ However, there
appeared to be several species of Mesemhryanthemum and
Euphorbia, and a plant which was exactly similar to, if not
identical with, our English Salsola kali. But the commonest
plant was a kind of Convolvulus, with fine pinkish-purple flowers
and vigorous stems, which, in some instances, were to be observed
creeping over the sand for sixty or eighty feet in a perfectly
straight line. It was frequent all over the island, and is a plant
which seems to flourish upon all the islands I have visited in the
Western Pacific, for I have met with it commonly at Fiji, Tonga,
ISamoa, the New Hebrides, &c. It is a favourite food of the
larvse of Protoparce distans, a moth which is closely identical to
Sphinx convolvuli.

A leguminous plant, much resembling our familiar garden scarlet
runner, was creeping in profusion over the low bushes, and numbers

BY GERVASE F. MATIIEW, R.N., P.L.S., P.Z.S., F.R.G.S., &C. 253

of a small dark metallic-blue Lyccena were disporting themselves
about it. They were in such swarms, and attached themselves so
exclusively to this plant, that I suspected that it formed the food
of their larvae, so waited a bit and watched them, and presently
observed a female settle upon one of the clusters of flower buds,
and after crawling backwaixls and forwards once or twice over
them and touching each individual bud with antennte as if looking
out for a suitable spot, she thrust her abdomen between two of the
buds and deposited an egg at their base. After this I had no
difficulty in finding larvse of all sizes feeding in the flowers ; the
petals of all those attacked withered and drooped so that they
could easily be detected. This Lyccena was the most abundant
butterfly upon the island, but several other species were taken, as
well as a few small moths, a list of which, as far as I have been
able to determine, will be found at the end of this paper.

At six o'clock AUenby rejoined me. He had bagged twenty
plovers and sandpipers of diff'erent kinds, and said that they were
remarkably wild and that it was no easy matter to get within shot
of them. On our way back to the ship a tremendous white shark
followed the boat, and at one time I really thought it was going
to attack us. It was a formidable looking monster, and must have
been quite ten or twelve feet long.

The next day, 13th April, the ship remained at anchor all day
ofi" the island exercising at various drills &c., and I was able to get
on shore directly after breakfast. I took a gun, butterfly net and
some lunch, and having deposited the heavy gear beneath the
shadiest tree, put some cartridges in my pocket and proceeded to
beat the island for quail, &c. This took me about an hour, when
I retvirned to the tree and rested for half an hour or so, and then
went for a entomological ramble, returning to my tree again for
lunch and rest, and so on until fouro'clock, when I went on board.
The time passed very quickly and pleasantly, though it was rather
hot tramping through the long grass in a blazing sun. While
eating my lunch, or dozing in the shade, the herons pitched in the
tree above or upon the bushes on each side, and seemed to scrutinize

254 ON THE NATURAL HISTORY OP THE CLAREMONT ISLANDS,

me very intently, and passed remarks to each other on my
appearance and occupation in dismal croaks. I append a list of
the birds met with.

White Nutmeg Pigeon (Myristicivora spilorrhoa, G. E.. Gray.)
Only one seen and shot. It was a young bird apparently not more
than a couple of weeks from the nest, and much smaller than
examples obtained at the North Barnard Islands in December 1882.
Its plumage too, as far as I can remember, is slightly different,
though this may perhaps be due to its youth.

Northern Swamp Quail (Syno'icus cervinus, Gould.) These
little birds were tolerably plentiful lying in the high grass, but
were difficult to flush, and generally allowed themselves to be
almost trodden upon before they rose. Eight couple were bagged,
and double that number might have been obtained had I had the
services of a good steady retriever. Unless I marked the exact
spot where the bird fell, and ran to it at once, it was almost
certain to be lost, as they were so difficult to find in the thick
grass. They usually rose five or six at a time, but it was quite out
of the question firing a double shot as one of the birds would
certainly have been lost. They varied a good deal in size, but I
think I am right in referring them to the above species. They
were excellent eating.

Oyster Catcher {Ecematopus longirostris, Vieill.) There were
several small flocks of these handsome birds. They looked very
conspicuous when flying among a host of other shoi-e birds. One
I shot was a remarkably fine heavy specimen.

Grey Plover [Squatarola helvetica, Linn.) Common.

Golden Plover (^Chanidrias orientalis, Temm. et Schleg.)
Numerous. This is decidedly much smaller than the European
species, and by no means such a delicately flavored bird. All those
that I have eaten have been obtained upon the sea shore, or upon
coral reefs, where the nature of their food probably imparts a fishy
flavour to their flesh.

BY GERVASB P. MATHEW, R.N., F.L.S., F.Z.S., F.R.G.S., &C. 255

Red-capped Dottrel {Aegialophilus rujicapillus, Temm ) Common.

Allied Dottrel. [Ochthodromus inornatus. Gould.) This beau-
tiful little plover, with its bright rufous head, and rufous band
across the chest, was plentiful and conspicuous among the other
species.

Barred-rumped Godwit. [Limosa uropygialis. Gould.) Common,
Very near the European bar-tailed Godwit.

Curlew Sandpiper. (Tringa suharquata. Temm.) Common,
and in breeding plumage.

Little Stint. (Tringa albescens. Temm.) A few seen.

Knot. (Tringa caQiutus. Linn.) Several shot^ in breeding
plumage.

Greenshank. (Glottis canescens. Gmel.) Common.

Grey-rumped Sandpiper. (Gamhetta ^;^i?^'er^(Ze>^<'^is. Miill.)
Numerous, but very shy and noisy.

Australian Curlew. (Numenius cyanopus. Yieill.) This fine
species was not common, and was so wild that it was useless to
try and get a shot at it. Its size and unusually long bill at once
distinguish it from its European cousin, besides which its cry is
slightly different.

Australian Whimbrell. (N'umeniusuro2)yg talis. Gould.) Common.
This is decidedly smaller than the European bird though its call
note is identical.

White and Blue Beef Herons, f Demigretta jugularis. Forst.)
( Demigi-etta Greyi. Gray.) These were the most numerous birds
upon the island, and I believe them to be one and the same
species, for I have constantly seen them in all stages of plumage
passing from blue to white. There is no difference in their size
or habits, and they are always found together. Unfortunately I
have never been able to find them breeding, though there were
17

256 ON THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE CLAKEMONT ISLANDS,

plenty of nests upon the low shrubs on this island. Mr. Magil-
livray, quoted by Gould in his " Birds of Australia," is of opinion
that the two forms are specifically distinct, and states that he has
never seen any exhibiting a change from blue to white, or vice
versd, and upon Dugong Island he had seen the young white from
the nest. I have seen them in this intermediate state of plumage
at the New Hebrides, Solomon Islands, Tonga and elsewhere, and
I do not think that the blue are adult birds.

Silver Gull. ( Bruchigavia Jamesonii wax. Gouldi. Bonap.) Only
a pair of these birds were noticed, and they were very vociferous
as I approached a certain point of the island, flying to and fro
overhead in a very excited manner, as if they had a nest or young
close at hand However, a careful search failed to disclose any.
At times they came so near that I was able to observe them
minutely. They were certainly larger than those to be seen every
day in Sydney Harbour, and their beaks were of a dark brownish
red, almost black at the tip, but otherwise I could detect no
difference.

Caspian Tern. Sylochelidon Gaspia. Brehm.) A pair seen.
Torres Straits Tern. (Thalasseus cristatus. Steph.) Common.

lAttle Tern ( Sternula nereis. Gould.) Several of these elegant
little birds were observed and one shot. They were perfectly
fearless and darted down upon their prey within a few yards of the
spot upon which I stood.

Pi'Mca.n (Pelccamis conspiciilatus. Temm.) Only one seen, and
a magnificent bird it looked as it sat in solitary grandeur far out
on the coral flats, its black and white plumage most conspicuous
in the bright sun. I was anxious to obtain it, but it was very
wary, and would not permit me to approach within a-half mile of it.

Little Cormorant (P/ialacrocorax melanoleucus. Vieill.) Many
seen flying over the island.

Amongst the scrub there were honey-eaters, fly catchers, two
kinds of kingfishers, and several other species unknown to me ; and
from one of the trees I shot a pair of large handsome doves.

BY GERVASE F. MATHEW, R.N., F.L.S., F.Z.S., F.R.G.S., &C. 257

In addition to the shore birds enumerated above three or four
examples were shot of a bird which to me appeared to be identical
with the European dunlin {Tringa variabilis.) They were in
summer dress. I was surprised to find so many of these birds
still in their summer plumage at this time of the year, when I
should have imagined that they would have been in their winter
dress.

List op Lepidoptera observed at Claremont Islands.

lihopalocera.

Tachyris Ada. Only one example seen, but traces of their
larvpe were very apparent upon a shrub with light pea green and
slightly pubescent sub-ovate leaves, possibly a species of Capparis.
In December last I bred many examples of this butterfly from
larvae found upon a similar shrub, at Port Moresby, New Guinea,
This species, I believe, has not before been recorded from
Australia.

Elodina. Sp. A pair,

Terias hecabe. Common, flying about a pretty kind of vetch.

Callidryas crocale. A male and female, in fine condition, were
captured,

Lyccena. Sp, Very numerous, flying about a leguminose
plant, (See remarks in body of paper.)

Lyccena plaiissa. Flying with above, but scarce,

Lyccena cnejus. Not common,

Lyccena. Sp. A very distinct species, and unlike anything I
have yet seen from Austi'alia. It was apparently only just
coming out, for I only caught three — two males and a female —
and they were in very perfect condition.

Precis zelima. Several.

Hypolimnas lasinassa. Several.

Ismene exclamationis. Several.

Pamphila angiades. Common.

Apaustus agraulia. Common.

258 ON THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE CLAREMONT ISLANDS.

Heterocera.

Pachyarches psitticalis. Only one example of this lovely pea-
green Pyrale seen and captured.

Notarcha multilhiealis. I did not see this in the perfect state,
but bred two from larvae taken feeding in curled up leaves of
Hibiscus, It is a widely spread and very abundant species,
occurring upon all the islands that I have visited.

Xinhenia recurvalis. Abundant amongst low herbage. This
species appears to be cosmopolitan, for I have taken it in all parts
of the world I have been to, except the extreme north,

, Siriocanta testulalis. Common. I also bred one from a larva
feeding in a head of Mentha ? This is likewise a universally
distributed species among the islands, and I have taken it near
Sydney.

Pachyxancla mutualis. Common.

In addition to the above I captured several species of Micro-
Lepidoptera, which are quite new to me.

AN AFTERNOON AMONG THE BUTTERFLIES OF
THURSDAY ISLAND.

By Gervase F. Mathew, R.N,, F.L.S., F.Z.S., F.R.G.So , &c.

The following account of an afternoon's collecting among the
butterflies of Thursday Island, on 18th of April 1885, may
perhaps be of interest, as it is a spot, I suspect, which is not often
visited by an entomologist.

Thursday Island is the central and smallest of a group of islands
lying in Torres Straits, off the North Coast of Australia, and
situated between latitude 10-30 and 10-58 south, and 146-6 and
142-20 east longitude. The other islands of the group are
Hammond, Goode, Wednesday, Friday, Horn, and Prince of
Wales Islands, with numerous small islets. Prince of Wales
Island is the largest, being eleven miles long, by ten miles broad.
They are all hilly, and the hills, from the sea, appear to be densely
wooded, as are also the valleys between the hills. Most of the
islands possess numerous small bays, some of. them with an ample
sandy beach, while others are fringed with belts of mangrove
bushes. In some of the islands, between the ranges of hills, there
are wide plains but thinly wooded with eucalypti, and, after the
rainy season covered with high grass. Springs of water are to be
found on nearly all the islands throughout the year, and after the
rains there is generally a profusion in the gullies and water holes.
Thursday Island being so small is but poorly provided, and the
inhabitants store up rain water in tanks to meet their necessities
during the dry season, the water in the water holes being unfit for
human consumption.

Thursday Island is one and a half miles long by about three
quarters of a mile wide, and has a range of hills running half

2G0 AMONG THE BUTTERFLIES OF THURSDAY ISLAND,

way through it in a north easterly ^direction, divided by a
moderately broad valley crossing the island from north to south,
and beyond this again there is a range of hills in the north east
corner of the island, and another range in the south east corner.
The highest point is 374 feet high. The settlement is situated
upon Vivien Point, the south west extremity of the island, and
extends along the beach for about half a mile from thence. The
whole island is surrounded by a coral fringe reef.

After lunch I went on shore with three of my messmates.
Lieutenants Ommanney and Allenby, and Mr. Hunter, midship-
man. The two former I provided with nets and boxes, as they
were anxious to help me to, as they said, complete my collection of
the Australian butterflies, as this would be the last opportunity we
should have of landing in Australia. We landed on the beach a
little to the north east of the settlement, and walked to the valley
which intersects the island, and across this to a range of hills
which lie in the north east corner, and whose highest point. Rose
Hill, is 223 feet. The valley was sparsely clothed with trees, the
chief of them being Eucalypti, Casuarina, Banksia, Persoonia, &c.
Grass was abundant everywhei-e and in some places, especially at
the edge of the forest, was breast high. There were also a few
small acacia and cassia bushes, and some others I am unacquainted
with, and here and there patches of vetches and other leguminose
plants. The ground in many places was thickly strewn with
volcanic blocks of stone, and these, hidden among the grass, made
walking dangerous and unpleasant, and running almost out of the
question. Most conspicuous objects in this valley were the cone-
shaped or castellated dwellings of the Termites. Some of them
were from ten to twelve feet high, and eight or ten feet in circum-
ference. They were evidently all inhabited for several pinnacles
we kocked off were swarming with ants. The galleries were full
of vegetable matter which apparently consisted of a mixture of bits
of dead leaves, grass seeds and wood dust. The nests were
composed of agglutinated sand, and were as hard as sand stone
itself. It is astonishing how these little creatures can construct
such wonderful dwellings. They must be several years raising one

BY GERVASE F. MATHEW, R.N., F.L.S., F.Z.S., F.R G.S., &C. 261

to a height of ten feet, for besides these large dwellings there were
a number of smaller ones in course of erection, some only a few
inches above the surface of the ground, but they had all an old
weather beaten appearance. The galleries looked as if they had
been lined with a dark reddish-brown shining substance, though
this might have been produced by the traffic of such multitudes of
insects constantly running to and fro. •

Tlie first butterflies we saw were Junonia orithya which were
fond of settling on bare patches on the ground, but they were so
wary that they were very difficixlt to catch. There was a strong
breeze blowing, and directly they took wing they were carried off
at a gieat pace. Some of the eucalypti trees were in flower and
proved attractive to several species of butterflies notably Papilio
Polijdorus and Eurycus cressida, butterflies which are very similar
in habits and appearance when on the wing. One evidently mimics
the other, and they fly in a slow floating manner, and are seemingly
easy to catch. However, to day in this particular locality they
were flying high out of reach among the topmost branches of
the trees. Occasionally one descended and crossed the opening
to another tree. This afi'orded a chance, and a rush was made
after it, and it was amusing to watch how easily it avoided the
frantic strokes of the net, and reached its goal in perfect safety,
while its would-be captor stood still beneath the tree hot, panting,
and probably with bruised shins, and in bad French, blessed
Polydorus who was again feasting unconcernedly aloft. By the
way has anyone noticed how closely Papilis an%ctus mimics Acrcea
Andromache in its flight and general appearance ? I have upon
several occasions mistaken the two, the former flying in the weak
straight manner of the latter, and the colours and pattern of both
somewhat resembling each other. Among the grass were several
species of Terias, Satyridce, Lycosnidoe, and Hesj^eridce, and also a
few Noctuce, GeometrcB, and Pyrahs, but on the whole Ilicro-
Lepidoptera were far from plentiful.

As soon as we reached the edge of the forest the aspect of afiairs
changed, and butterflies became decidedly more numerous. Here
we separated, my companions keeping outside, while I scrambled

262 AMONG TUB BUTTERFLIES OF THURSDAY ISLAND,

up the side ot the hill until I got well within the shelter and shade
of the trees. It was difficult walking for the ground was covered
with large loose stones, which were more or less hidden by the under-
growth so that it was necessary to be careful and look where one
was going to. Once or twice I narrowly escaped a fall as I was
eagerly pursuing some attractive species, and usually, upon these
occasions, the insect was lost, and I found it a much better plan to
walk along quietly or stop altogether when I reached a likely-
looking spot, for butterflies often come quite close if one keeps
perfectly still. The most abundant species in the forest were
Papilio Polydorus, Hypolimnas alimena, and Euplcea Sylvester,
but perhaps I had better at once proceed to give a list of the
species seen and captured with remarks thereon, instead of a
rambling disconnected account.

Ormthoptera Priamus. Linn., var. Pronomus. Gray. Three
or four of these most magnificent butterflies were seen, and a pair,
a male and female in perfect condition were captured. I was also
fortunate enough to find two chrysalids and two full grown larvje,
and saw many smaller larvae which I did not take as their food
plant will not keep fresh for more than a couple of days on board
ship. The larvae were feeding upon a kind of Ipomcea which was
twining itself among and over the brushwood, some at a consi-
derable height while others were feeding upon portions of the plant
which were trailing on the ground, and I nearly trod upon one of
the largest larvse. The following is a description of a full grown
larva.

Length two and a-half inches ; tapering slightly towards each
extremity ; central segments thickened ; comparatively short and
obese ; smoky black with a tinge of madder purple ; head black and
shining, with a narrow white v-shaped mark on face ; upon the
crown of the second segment a crescent-shaped shining black plate,
and between this and the head is the nuchal aperture, through which,
when the larva is irritated, is emitted a pair of short thick carmine-
coloured tentacles ; a subdorsal row of finely pointed spines on
each side, the spines rather long, and those on the posterior segments
pointing backwards ; tips and base of spines black, intermediate

BY GEEVASE F. MATHEW, R.N., F.L.S., F.Z.S., F.R.G.S., <fec. 263

portion scarlet ; except on eighth segment, where the base
of spine is white and from thence springs a broad oblique white
stripe pointing forwards and terminating at the spiracular region ;
a row of black spines just below the spiracles ; upon third, fourth,
and fifth segments an additional spine between the subdorsal and
spiracular row ; a short black blunt tubercle on second segment
upon each side of the face ; a short black spine above each leg and
claspers, which are shining black. The chrysalis, which is of an
amber brown colour, is slightly angulated, with a blunt subdorsal
black-tipped spine on each side of the abdominal segments, and
some small black spines on back of thorax ; a large and almost
triangular orange-yellow blotch upon back of anterior abdominal
segments ; wing sheaths dark reddish-brown, with the nervures
well-marked.

These larvse differed in no way from larvae I have taken at the
Duke of York Islands and New Britain, and which produced the
blue variety Urvilliana, Guer., and the usual golden-green form,
and I feel quite convinced that Kirby is correct in referring the
fi.ve Australian varieties, and several others from New Guinea,
Woodlark Island, Batchian, &c., to Papilio Priamus, Linn., of
which there is little doubt that they are merely local varieties.
The Chrysalids are also indentical. Those I found were attached
to the midrib of a very large leaf of some forest tree, and some-
times at a considerable distance from the food of the larvse.
Before suspending itself the larvse takes care to securely fasten the
stem of the leaf at its base to the branch of the tree with strong
threads of silk.

Papilio Polydorus, Linn. One of the most abundant species
met with. It flies in a light airy manner, generally quite straight
like Eurycus or Acrcea and appears to be a particularly easy
butterfly to catch, nevertheless it has a trick of dropping suddenly,
or twisting to one side, as one makes a stroke at it, and instead of
having it in your net, as you confidently expected, you see it
hurrying ofi" among the brushwood or careering aloft far out of
reach

Papilio erithoneus. Cram. One or two seen.

264 AMONG THE BUTTERFLIES OF THURSDAY ISLAND,

Papilio capaneus. West. Several observed, and one or two
worn specimens captured. Young larvae upon.

Papilio erectheus. Don. Common, and larvae of various sizes
upon orange trees in the garden of Mr. Chester, P.M.

Tliese specimens were of the New Guinea form, which is larger
and rather differently marked than those from New South Wales.

Papilio Sarpedon. Linn. Several seen. A rapid flyer.

Papilio Agavuemnon. Linn. Two or three seen and one
captured.

Eurycus cressida. Fabr. Numerous.

TerioiK australis. Wall. \

Terias hecabe. Linn, I Common amongst high grass, &c.

Terias. Sp. j

Pieris ega. Boisd. One male only.

Callidryas crocale. Cram. Several.

Danais affinis. Fabr. Not uncommon in the forest where it
was fond of alighting upon the extremities of dead twigs, a habit
which is common to all the Danaince.

Danais Petilia. Stoll. Common, but local.

Euplcea Sylvester. Fab. Very common in the forest where it
delights to sit in little family parties upon some dead bough.

Euploea. Sp. Possibly a local variety of tulliolus, Fabr.

Junonia orithya. Linn. Common, but very wary and difiicult
to catch.

Junonia vellida. Fabr. Common.

Precis zelima. Fabr. Several.

Phinopalpa sahina. Cram. This fine species was not uncommon
in the forest, and was in good condition. They were usually to
be found in pairs, though sometimes they were in family parties of
six or seven, and were fond of settling upon the underside of a
large leaf near the ground, and flew out suddenly as one passed.
As a rale, if one kept quiet, they almost invariably returned to
the same spot.

Doleschallia hisaltidce. Cram. Common. This butterfly, during
the hottest part of the day, flies high and keeps well out of reach,
but towards the evening, or when passing clouds obscure the sun,

BY GERVASE F. MATHEW, R N., F.L.S., F.Z S., F.R.G.S., &C. 265

it descends and may then often be seen at rest on the underside of
a leaf, when they may be easily caught if one approaches quietly.
They are very pugnacious in their habits. One will take up its
position upon a leaf at the extremity of some lofty branch and
from thence starts oif and gives battle to every passing butterfly,
returning, after the encounter, to its original position.

Hypolimnas aliniena. Linn. Plentiful and in fine condition.

Hypolimnas lasinssa. Cram. Common.

Neptis consimilis. Boisd. This pretty species was tolerably
numerous. It flies in a very airy manner, giving three or four
flaps with its wings and then floats gracefully to a leaf where it
settles with wings fully expanded.

Neptis Shepperdi. Moore. The above remarks a])ply to this
species also.

Melanitis Leda. Linn. A few only.

Mycalesis Perseus. Fabr. A few, but in poor condition.

Mycalesis terminus. Fabr. Common and in fine condition.
These two species were found among high grass by the edge of the
forest.

Ypthima arctous. Fab. Common with the above.

Ccenonympha. Sp. Common. This species also occurs near
Sydney; but is unnamed in the local collections I have had accessto.

Lyccena platissa. Herr. Schafi". Common.

Lyccena Salamandri. Macleay, W. A few.

Lyccena pygmcea. Snell. One example.

Lyccena. Sp., near Erinus. Fabr. One only.

Lyccena. Sp. Three examples.

Lyccena. Sp. One example.

Hypochrysops anacletus. Feld. Three specimens of this beau-
tiful species.

Hypochrysops Apelles. Fabr. One example.

HypolyccKna phorhas. Fabr. Several.

Amblypodia centaurus. Fabr. This brilliant species -v/as common
flying to and fro in front of low bushes. It was difficult to
obtain in good condition as it is very pugnacious in its habits, and
both sexes are to be continually seen engaged in warfare.

266

AMONC

THE BUTTERFLIES OP THURSDAY ISLAND.

Amhlypodia \tnicale. Blanch, Two or three.

Ismene exclajiationis. Fabr. Several.

Ismene. Spl Several.

Famphila auj lades. (1) Feld. Several.

Pamphila. Sp. One or two.

Famphila. Sp. Several.

Apaustus agraulia. Hew. Common.

The above lorty-eight species were the result of an afternoons
collecting at l! believe a not very favoi-able time of the year. If
so much was djone in such a short time it is reasonable to suppose
that the list would have been very much increased if I could have
had a few more days collecting and if it had been at a more
favorable time! of the year. From what I saw of Thursday Island
I should judge that the larger islands, which are all well wooded,
particularly Prince of Wales Island, would produce a greater
variety of Rhopalocera, and all the species that have been taken at
Cape York and other parts of the North Coast of Australia would
be found upon them as well as many New Guinea species which
up to the present time have not been recorded as Australian. I
can imagine ijio better place than Thursday Island for a collector
to make his hd^ad quarters for a couple of months for there could
be no difficulty in working the other islands as they are all easily
accessible by boat, and there are houses upon all of them so that
comfortable acjcommodation could most likely be obtained. I am
confident that' many new species would reward a diligent collector.

In the above list it will be observed that many common species
that ought to occur on this island were not observed upon this
occasion, such as Pieris teutonia, Danais chrysippus, Danais eri2)pus,
and others.

NEW FISHES FROM THE UPPER MURRUMBIDGEE.

By William Macleay, F.L.S., &(j.

At the last montlily meeting of this Society, ]' exhibited four
species of Fishes from the streams forming the! upper waters of
the Murrumbidgee. They had been collected ar.d sent to me by
Charles Jenkins, Esq., of Yass, a gentleman well kno'v^n to this
Society by his Papers on the Palaeontology of that district. One
of the four Fishes is a Galaxias taken in the Yass River; I
believe it to be a species hitherto undescribed, but in the absence
of sufficient evidence of a conclusive kind I shall postpone, for the
present, giving it a distinctive name. Another! of the Fishes, a.
Gadopsis, taken in the Little River, I shall treat in the same way.
One species of Gado^ysis only has been described.! It is found in.
rivers in Tasmania, Victoria, and New South \[Vales, but I have^
long thought that those of the genus found in the western rivers-
of New South Wales were of much more elongate form than the=
original Gadopsis marmoratus of Tasmania. I must defer, how-
ever, any attempt to solve my doubts, until I can procure some=
specimens of the Fish from Tasmania. The other two Fishes are--
undoubtedly new and are here described. ,

Oligorus gibbiceps. n. sp. i

Of rather elongate form, and slightly compressed. The line of:
the back is straight from the top of the head to the tail. The^
height of the body is one-fifth, and the length of the head is one-
fourth of the total length. The head descends almost vertically
in front of the eyes to the mouth, which is horizontally protruded,,
the lower jaw being the longest. The maxillary extends back-
wards to below the middle of the orbit ; the eyes are large, lateral
and near the top of the head. The dorsal and anal spines are

268 NEW FISHES FROM THE UPPER MURRUMBIDGEE,

larger proportionally than in Oligorus Macquariensis, there seems
also to be a cllfFerence in the character of the speckled marking,
which in this species seems to be formed of short angular linear or
semi-circular sspots.

One specimen, nearly 8 inches long, is all I have ever seen or
heard of, of this very extraordinary looking Fish. It was
captured in the Murrumbidgee River in the neighbourhood of
Yass. The most striking feature is the head, but its elongate
form and straight back also show a marked difference from the
other species of the genus.

MURRAYIA JeNKINSI. n. sp.

D. 11/12. A. 3/8. L. lat. about 50.

Of compi-esised form ; the height of the body one fourth of the
total length. The profile descends in a regular slope from the 1st
dorsal spine to the snout, which is rounded and tumid ; the mouth
is small ; the eyes rather large and about two of their diameters
apart. The head is, with the exception of small scales on the
cheek and operculum, entirely naked, and covered with large
rounded pits, similar pits extend in a double row on the lower
limb of the preoperculum, and to a more limited extent on the
posterior limb ; the maxillary scarcely reaches to the vertical from
the anterior margin of the eye. The preoperculum is straight
behind and densely serrated, the serrations become a little longer
at the angle, and larger and more distant on the lower edge. The
operculum has the lower spine which is the largest of the two,
bifid, the upper hranch the shortest, the other spine is broad and
flat, the lower edge of the operculum is finely and densely seri^ated ;
the caracoid and scapular are also serrated. The dorsal spines are
strong, the fifth is the largest ; the anal spines are also strong,
the second strongest and slightly longer than the third. The first ray
of the pectoral fin is elongate. The lateral line is almost straight,
the scales of moderate size.

It is difiicult to guess even at what the coloration has been, as in
addition to the fish having been long in spirits, most of the scales

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &C. 269

have been rubbed off, but it seems to have been silvery-grey, with
many very minute black dots.

The only specimen of this fish I have seen is about 5 inches
long, and was taken in the Murrumbidgee in the Yass District.
The genus Murrayia was formed by Count Castelnau a number of
years ago, for the reception of some fishes which he had received
from the Murray River or some of its ana-branches in the
Deniliquin District, He described three species : — Murrayia
Guntheri, cyprinoides, and hramoides, all from the same locality,
and averaging from a foot to 14 inches in length. I have never
seen any of them, and indeed the fish I have now described is the
only one of the genus I have seen, although I resided for many
years on the banks of the Murrumbidgee. The genus is a very
good one, and shows a decided affinity to the genus Ctenolates of
Gunther.

270 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW DIPLOCREPIS FROM PORT JACKSON,

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW DIPLOCREPIS FROM PORT
JACKSON.

By J. Douglas-Ogilby,
Senior Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

DIPLOCREPIS costatus. sp. IIOV,

D. S. A. 7. V. 1/4. P. 26. C. 12.

Length of head 3j^j, of caudal fin Gjo, height of body above vent
8, in the total length. Greatest breadth of head f of its length; it
begins to narrow beyond the posterior margin of the eye, and is
produced into a pointed snout, which is one-fourth of the length of
the head. The eyes are slightly prominent, large, 5 of the length
of the head, and equal to the interorbital space, which is flat. The
nostrils are close together, near the upper front angle of the orbit,
the anterior provided with a tentacle. The maxilla reaches to the
vertical from the front margin of the eye. Lower lip with a skinny
flap posteriorly. The upper jaw is the longer, and is armed with
an outer band of strong recurved canines, the largest being at the
symphysis, and on the middle of the sides ; behind this row
is a patch of villiform teeth, broadest anteriorly. In the lower jaw
is an anterior band of moderately strong teeth, mingled with
smaller ones, and a lateral row which terminates in four very
strong canines. The dorsal fin commences one-fifth nearer to the
tip of the tail than to that of the snout, and the distance of its
origin from that of the caudal is exactly one-third of its distance
from the snout. The anal commences slightly behind the dorsal,
and both fins are entirely disconnected with the caudal, which is
rounded. Pectorals rounded, with a broad fleshy base, and con-
nected by a membrane with the ventrals, which consist of a spine,

BY J. DOUGLAS-OGILBY. 271

entirely hidden beneath the skin, and four rays. The disk between
them is longer than broad: that attached to the coracoids broader
than long, and with a small angular cutaneous flap behind ; the
hardened epidermis entirely surrounds this disk, and is composed
of series of circular plates with a centi-al hollow, much resembling
miniature disks ; of these there are about four rows anteriorly
and eight rows posteriorly, those on the inner side being always the
largest ; on the ventral portion of the disk these plates are arranged
in a narrow band, and are very minute in front, but are large and
in about seven series on the anterior membranous part of the
ventrals, and their outer rays almost to their tips ; the posterior
edge of this portion of the disk is without plates, the length taken
Tip by the entire sucking apparatus is exactly one-fifth of that of the
fish. The vent is situate considerably behind the middle of the
fish, and much nearer to the origin of the anal fin than to the
posterior margin of the disk. There is a small genital papilla
behind the an vis. The coi'acoid flap extends upwards to fully three-
fourths of the base of the pectoral, and is joined to the side by a
median transverse web.

Uniform pink, appearing almost transparent when first removed
from the water.

The example from which the description has been drawn up, was
taken by the trawl on Shai'k Reef, Port Jackson, upon the 30th of
May, and gives the following measurements.

Total length

Length of head

Origin of dorsal to snout

Origin of dorsal to origin of caudal

Anus to snout ...

There are about 10 strongly marked vertical ridges on each side,
caused by the contraction of the muscles after death, but not
present in the living fish ; owing to this peculiarity, which is
common to its congener, Diplocrepis puniceus, Rich., from New
Zealand, I have proposed costatus as a suitable specific name for
this interesting form.
18

25 lines

7^

j>

151

3J

H

„

13|

„

272 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW DIPLOCREPIS FROM PORT JACKSON.

From Richardson's fish it difi'ers greatly in the number of rays
in the vertical fins, the naiTOwness of the head, the smaller eye,
the position of the dorsal and anal fins, the shape of the plates on,
and small size of, the disk, the position of the vent, and the
coloration. Its sti'ong dentition separates it at once from Crepi-
dogaster and Trachelochismus, but curiously enough its fin formula
is similar to that of the latter, from which however it difi'ers
greatly in the shape of the head, &c. It is very interesting to
observe how our east coast species possess greater affinities to the
two New Zealand than to the more southern and western Crepi-
dogaster

Since writing the above 1 have found a much smaller example,
but 1-^- inches long, in which the fin formula, measurements, and
general characters exactly correspond with those of the larger
individual. Registered number of type B. 7140.

JOTTINGS FROM THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
OF SYDNEY UNIVERSITY.

By William A. Haswell, M.A., B.Sc,
Lecturer on Zoology and Comparative Anatomy, &c.

L On A destructive Parasite op the Rock Oyster.

I was requested some time ago by Dr. Cox, the President of the
Fisheries Commission, to examine some samples of oysters from
the Hunter River beds, which appeared to be dying in large
numbers owing to the attacks of some parasite. On examining
the specimens which I received, I found that most of them, when
opened, presented on the inner surface of the shell one or more
discoloured blisters. In some these raised discoloured patches
were of small extent, with a narrow sinuous form, while in many
instances a large part of the valve was aifected. In some cases,
where the extent of the shell invaded was not large, the oysters did
not seem at all affected by it ; in other cases the animal was found
to be dead, and in a few cases the shell was completely empty.

A very slight pressure suffices to break open the blisters, which
are covered only by a thin layer of nacreous substance, and their
interior is found to be occupied by fine black mud. In the earlier
stages, instead of a fair-sized open cavity, there is merely a narrow
tunnel bent upon itself, excavated in the substance of the shell,
and opening on the exterior at the edge of the valves ; but where
the mischief has spread further the greater part of the substance
of the shell beneath the blisters has become more or less dis-
integrated and readily splits up into soft laminae, with often an
infiltration of fine mud between them. In almost every instance
I found in the interior of the cavity one or more specimens of the
little animal by which the mischief had been elTected,— a very
small annelid of the genus Leucodore or Polydora.

274 BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY OP SYDNEY UNIVERSITY,

Species of this genus have been long known as accustomed to
burrow in the shells of Molluscs — among othei'S of the oyster — as
well as in any sandstone, or shaley, or calcareous i-ock ; but they
do not seem to have been regarded generally as serious enemies of
the oyster.

Oersted (1) does not mention the boring propensities of
Leucodore at all, but merely describes it as found on a sandy
bottom. Grube (2) describes it as perforating cretaceous rocks at
Dieppe. In his " Histoii-e Naturelle des Anneles," Quatrefages
does not allude to the shell-invading habits of the genus, but
describes it as either living in delicate tubes, or in burrows in
sand or calcareous rock. But Macintosh, in a paper " On the
boring of certain Annelids " published in the Annals and Magazine
of Natural History, for 1868, mentions that he had observed
Leucodore ciliata burrowing in the shells of various molluscs,
among others in those of the oyster. I have not been able,
however, to find any record of such extensive destruction of oysters
effected by this little annelid on the European coast as seems to be
taking place on the Hunter River (3), where no doubt some
local circumstances, such as muddiness of the water produced by
increasing traffic, tend to decrease the vital powers of the oysters
and thus favour the inroads of the parasites.

The species which is found most adundantly in these oysters
from the Hunter River beds is, strange to say, identical with the
European Polydora ciliata of Johnston (4).

I found, however one specimen o£ a second species which appears
to be very distinct and of which I append a description.

(1) Annulatorum Danicorum Conspectus, Fasc. I.

(2) Beschreibungea neuer oder wenig bekannter Annelideu.

(3) Prof. Huxley, in a popular article on the oyster in the " English
Illustrated Magazine " of last year, mentions that he had received from Sir
Henry Tliomson specimens of oysters which were invaded by a species of
Leucodore, but adds that the oysters seemed little the worse.

(4) Clapar^dt^s P. Agassizii is apparently the same as P. ciliata (Ann(ilides
Chetopodes du Golfe de Naples, p. 314, pi. XXIL, fig. 1.)

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 275

POLYDORA (LeUCODORE) POLYBRANCHIA. N. S.

The head is of the same breadth behind as the segments
of the body. In front it becomes rather narrower, and ends
anteriorly in two low triangular lobes separated by a wide notch.
There are four veiy small rounded eyes. Running backwards
from the mouth is a narrow groove continued as far as the third
segment. The branchiae begin on the second segment of the body.
The large setfe on the fifth segment are ten in number and arranged
in two sets which differ from one another in shape and in direction.
The five which are directed towards the ventral aspect of the
animal end in a broad head having the form of an inverted cone
with an oblique base ; on the base of the cone are one or two small
conical elevations. The five which are directed more towards the
dorsal side are not so broad at the end and are gently curved in
the form of a hook with a blunt apex. The ordinary setae and
uncini are precisely similar to those of P. ciliata as figured by
Macintosh. The uncini or hooked setse begin on the seventh
segment ; there are from six to ten of them on each parapodium,
all with the apex directed outwards, except the most external,
which is very short, and has the apex directed inwards. Some of
the sette of the anterior parapodia are very long and filiform.

The setaj are not unlike those figured by Eay Lankester (Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist., (4th series) Vol. I., 1868) as those of P. calcarea,
and regarded by Macintosh (1) as belonging to a variety of
Polydora ciliata : but apart from the form of the boring setse, the
presence of branchiae on all the segments, together with the
absence of cephalic tentacles, seems to distinguish the present
species fi'om all hitherto described forms. Polydora cceca of
Oersted (2) resembles it in having " branchias in utroque corporis
parte," but has long prgestomial tentacles.

The only sovtthern species of Polydora described is P. soctalis
of Schmarda (3) which has a pair of well-developed tentacles.

(1) Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1868.

(2) " Zur Klassification der Anueliden." Vide Quatrefages, Hist. Nat.
Ann. II., p, 302.

(3) Neue Wirbellose Thiere. I., ii., p. 64, pi. XXVII., fig 209.

J, to BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY OF SYDNEY UNIVERSITY,

2. On some RECENT Histological Methods, and their adapta-
tion TO the teaching op practical Histology.

Some methods, recently described, of dealing with objects
intended for histological examination are not only great boons to
the original worker, lessening greatly the drudgery of manipula-
tions, and enabling him to prepare and examine a large amount of
material in a comparatively short time ; but are, in certain
instances, of great service also to the teacher of histology,
as, when perfected, they will enable him to su})ply the largest
class without much loss of time with a uniform series of prepara-
tions so preserved and stained as to bring out all the main points
in their microscopic structure. A short account of my experience
of some of these methods in connection with class work, will
perhaps be of service to others who have to do with the teaching
of natural science.

STAINING WITH H^EMATOXYLIN.

Objects which have been hardened by any of the usual methods,
after having been at least a fortnight in alcohol, are best stained
en bloc by an aqueous solution of crystallised haomatoxyliu,
followed by bichromate of potash as recommended by Heidenhain.
(1) Eor most organs and tissues, pieces half an inch square, are
most successfully and uniformly stained through by means of a
^ per cent, solution of hsematoxylin allowed to act for 10 to 24
hours ; the staining agent is followed by a 1 per cent, solution of
bichromate of potash, which should be allowed to act for two or
three hours. It is quite impossible, I need hardly add, to lay
down any precise rule as to the time required for staining
satisfactorily portions of any given organ ; though twenty-four
hours immersion in a half-per-cent. solution of hsematoxylin will,
in the majority of cases, give satisfactorily results, in some
instances the object will be rendered too black, and in others will
be found not to be stained throughout. The tissues which require
the most prolonged staining, when hardened by one method, may

(1) Pfliiger's Archiv., XXIV. (1884), p. 468.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 277

become much more rapidly coloured when treated in another way.
It will, therefore, be found necessary, in order to insure good
specimens of all the organs, to take several pieces of each prepared
in different ways and subject them all to the same process of
staining, or else, taking several pieces of each specimen, to subject
each of them to the action of the staining fluid for a diff"erent
interval. The results obtained by this method excel, in my opinion,
in the definiteness of the cell-outlines, and the distinctness of the
differentiation of the tissues any that can be obtained by any of
the ordinary process of staining capable of being carried out in a

EMBEDDING IN PARRAFIN.

Specimens of animals or of organs stained as above described enhloc
and afterwards treated with bichromate of potash, require, after
soaking for a few minutes in distilled water, to be treated with strong
alcohol for several days — absolute alcohol being used for at least the
last two days — in order completely to remove the water with which
they have become saturated. As in staining so also in the
embedding both time and material are saved by preparing a large
number of specimens— say twenty or more — at one time. The
alcohol is then replaced by chloroform. If the objects are delicate
and complicated, this will be very conveniently and thoroughly
effected by using some such contrivance as the chloroform
box which I employ. This is an oblong brass box divided
internally by a vertical partition, which does not reach the
bottom, but leaves an opening of three-quarters of an inch,
into two compartments. Chloroform with a slight admixture of
sulphuric ether is poui'ed into the box until it rises a little above
the lower border of the vertical partition. Absolute alcohol is
gently poured in by means of a pipette on the surface of the
chloroform in one of the compartments ; the objects are placed in
this, and, as they become saturated with the chloroform, they sink
down until they drift through below the partition into the other
compartment, which contains only the mixture of chloroform and
ether. From this they can be taken out without disturbing the

278 BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY OF SYDNEY UNIVERSITY,

equilibrium of the alcohol and chlovoforin Ordinary objects may
simply be transferred from absolute alcohol to chloroform and kept
in the latter for twenty-four hours, or until saturated. Saturation
with paraffin is then eflfected by the well-known method of Gies-
brecht. I use a special water-bath with troughs divided into a
number of compartments. To ensure a good result equal parts by
volume of chloroform and paraffin (of low melting point) should
be used, and the objects should be left in the bath at the temper-
ature of the melting-point of the soft paraffin for about twenty-four
hours.

To ensui-e sufficiently fine and delicate sections to obtain the
full advantage of the process of staining described above, Caldwell's
or some other good form of automatic microtome must be
employed, a coating of soft paraffin round the hard in which the
object is embedded being added, according to Caldwell's invaluable
process, to prevent curling and secure series if required. Sections
so prepared and cut can be kept unaltered for an indefinite length
of time.

To prevent the sections breaking up or becoming disarranged
during che process of mounting in balsam^ it will be found desirable
in most cases to fix them down to the slide. For this purpose the
best agent is Caldwell's shellac dissolved in creosote, which gives
much better results than the gum arable which I previously used
and recommended.

3. Minute Structure of Polyno'e.

In a short paper in the Zoologischer Anzeiger, Jordan has recently
described the histological structure of the scales of Polyno'e as
revealed by making series of sections. His figures and description
agree exactly with what I find to exist in species which I have
examined, except that he omits to notice certain cells which I find
in the tissue of the scale. The nerve which enters the elytron
ramifies through the scale and the ultimate twigs mostly end
in minute processes on the surface. Just before the nerve
twig enters this end-organ it passes through a little ganglion.
These ganglia are mostly composed (and Jordan represents them

\_./

'7

/

^--t^-
^ J

'?:y

1 it ^^f*T^

.iiJ

^'^'■■^

MaCROPUS TlBOL. A'aclr._y.

S. Sedo.-leU Uth.

■Maciay d.-L

DoRCOPSISBeCCARII. Maclay.

P.L.S. Vol.10.

Pl.2I

{ ^V/ t

\t

f 1

^

■\

/

%fe^«^J4S^j^4^

1 i

.S

r"i

?./

.«/-

A -OH. del.

S.S,;ac,n<'ld Uth.

Sketch^s^^' Diamond Drill Borings.
DUBBO — N.S. WALES.

Scale - 'fO TeeL to an inch

f

CM

qqiff imd^'^H

J9^1}£

-4 M Li

CO

1'

I

ii

f

I

I

-'il

J

^

♦^

P.L.S. VoL.IO

^.

%"

P.L.S. Vol.10.

Pl.25

J. Millie Cu.rrcLn. del

S. Sedq field Uth,.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A.

as entirely composed) of small nerve-cells similar in form to the
ganglion-cells of the ventral nerve-cord but considerably smaller.
But here and there, if not in all the ganglia, are to be found cells
of a different kind. These are bipolar cells of finely gi-anulated
appearance with large vesicular nuclei, nJyjth of an inch in diameter,
and thus about thrice the size of the ordinary cells. Cells of
precisely similar form are found in groups at the ba.ses of the dorsal
cirri, so that it seems unlikely, as might otherwise be reasonably
held, that they have any dii-ect relation to the production of the
phosphorescence for which the elytra are remarkable.

In .sections of male specimens of Polynoe it will frequently be
found that the cavities of the segmental organs are densely jiacked
with spermatozoa ; and in some instances this will be found to be
the case when there are no spermatozoa remaining in the perivis-
ceral cavity itself. This fact, together with the observations whiich
I have repeatedly made of the passage outwards of the spermatozoa
through the efferent ducts, must set at rest entirely the question of
the chief function of the.se organs.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Haswell exhibited specimens of Alepas parasita, Quoy and
Gaimard, a barnacle which is parasitic on large Scyphomedusse.
The .specimens were obtained from Mr. Alex, Moreton, Curator of
the Hobart Museum.

The President exhibited a specimen of Glossopteris Brovmiana
found in a large pebble of the Hawkesbuiy drift, derived from
some portion of the upper coal series which had been hardened by
volcanic activity in its vicinity, j

19

WEDNESDAY, 29x11 JULY, 1885.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M. A.., F.G.S. in the chair,

DONATIONS.

" Mittheilungen avis der Zoologischen Station zu Neapel."
Sechster Band, 1 Heft. From the Director.

" Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London." Part IV.,
188-i. From the Society.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger." Nos. 194-195. From the Editor.

" Archives Neerlandaises des Sciences exactes et Naturelles.''
Tome XIX., Livr. 4 and 5, 1884. From La Societe Hollandaise
des Sciences a Harlem.

" Journal of Conchology." Vol. IV., No. 10, April 1885. From
the Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland.

" Journal of the New York Microscopical Society." Vol. I.,
No. 4, April 1885. From the Society.

" Annual Report of the Board of Directors of tlie Zoological
Society of Philadelphia." 1884. From the Society.

" Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia." Part I., 1885. From the Society.

" Science." Vol. V., Nos. 118-120. From the Editor.

" Annales de la Societe Entomologique de France." 6th Series,
Tome IL, Parts 1-4, 1882. 7th Series, Tome III., Parts 1-4, 1883.
From the Society.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger." VIII. Jahrg. No.s. 196, 197. From
the Editor.

DONATIONS.

281

" Abhandlungen heraiisgegeben vom Naturwissenschaftlichen
Vereine zu Bremen." Band TX., Heft. II., 1884. From the
Society.

" Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland." Vol I.
Parts 2, 3 and 4., 1884. From the Society.

"Victorian Naturalist." Vol. II., No. 3, 1885. "Annual
Report," 1884. From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

" Transactions and Proceedings of the New Zealand Institute,"
Vol. XVII. , 1884. From the Director.

" AIonatlicheMittheilungen des Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereins
des Regierungsbezirkes Frankfurt." 3 Jahrg., Nos. 1 and 2,
1885. From the Society.

" Transactions of the Entomological Society of London. Part
I., 1885. From the Society.

" Special Record of the Proceedings of the Geographical Society
of Australasia in fitting out and starting the Exploratory Expedi-
tion to New Guinea.'' From the Society.

" Bulletin de la Societe Royale de Geographie d' Anvers."
Tome IX., 5th Fascicule, 1885.

282 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

PAPERS READ.

A ]\IONOGEAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES.

By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

Part V.

THE AULENIN^.

Plate XXVI. to XXXV.

III. ORDO. CERAOSPONGIvE. Bronn (1).

SPONGI^ WITH A SKELETON COMPOSED OF HORNY FIBPvE.
SILICEOUS SPICULES PRODUCED BY THE SPONGE ITSELF
MAY OCCUR IN THE GROUND SUBSTANCE, FLESHSPICULES,
BUT NEVER WITHIN THE FIBRES.

I._SXJB-ORDO. MICROCAMER^.

CERAOSPONGI/E WITH SMALL SPHERICAL CILIATED
CHAMBERS.
The study of a great many forms has led me to consider the size
and shape of the ciliated chambers as a more important charac-
teristic, than the structure of the horny fibre, whether solid or
filled with pith. To express the mutual relationship of the horny
sponges according to this idea, [ divide the Ordo Ceraospongise
into the two Sub-orders Microcameroe, with small spherical ; and
Macrocamerae, with large oval ciliated chambers. To the first
Sub-order I reckon the Spongidse, Aplysinidaj and Hircinidse, and
to the second the Spongelidae and Aplysillida?.

(1) Bronn. Classen unci Ordnungen des Thierreiches, Porifera Iste
Auflage.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 283

11. FAMILIA SPONGID^. F. E. Schulze. (1)

Ciliated chambers small and hemispherical to spherical. Com-
munication of inhalent lacunse with the chambers by means of
numerous pores in the latter. Communication of the exhalent
canals and lacunae with the chambers by means of wide pores or
canals. Fibres forming a network. Granular axis of fibres very
thin. The main (radial) fibres often contain foreign bodies.
Numerous granules are usually present in the gallert around the
chambers and render that part of it more or less intransparent.

I. SUB-FAiMILIA AULENIN.^. R. v. Lendenfeld. (2)

Spongidse, the body of which forms a reticulation of fibres or
lamellae of a honeycomb-like structure. The lacunae in the intervals
are either simple or traversed by membranes, but in any case
appear as a kind of vestibule, inasmuch as the outer surface of the
fibres and lamellae mentioned above is homologous to the outer
surface of other sponges. These lacunae belong neither to the
inhalent nor the exhalent canal system, and both these systems
open into them indiscriminately.

The free parts of the surface are often protected by thick layers
of sand forming a dermal layer, which in some cases can be pulled
oft' intact (Halme.)

The skeleton consists of very slender and transparent connecting
fibres, which are free from foreign bodies, and thick radial fibres with
uneven surface, filled with sand, &c. ; or there are no such "main"
fibres at all, and we find at the joining jioints of some of the
ordinary slender fibres, large grains of sand. (Aulena fig. 21.)

The ciliated chambers are very small and spherical.

(1) F. E. Schulze. Untersuchungea iiber den Ban und die Entwickehing
der 8pongien VII., Mittlieilung ; die Familie der Spongidse. Zeitschrift
fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, Band XXXII., Seite 593.

(2) Aulenino'. Name derived from the genus Aulena, Greek root. See
below under " Aulena."

284 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The canal system appears very lacunose. The granules in tlie
mesoderm are not numerous or absent. Foreign bodies are never
found loose in the ground-substance. (1)

The geographical distribution of the species is a very wide one ;
they grow in shallow water.

Although some of the Dysidea described by Mai'shall (2), and
perhaps also some species of Holopsamma described by Carter (3)^
may belong to my Aulenina? ; I cannot place them there. Marshall's
species should I think, be left in the group Dysidea, for which a
Sub-family of the SiJongelidm might be erected. Carter's descrip-
tions are so short that without re-examination of the type
specimens their position in my classification cannot be made out
with great certainty, particularly as they are not accompanied by
illustrations.

The genera described by these authors (I.e.), which come near to
my Sub-family, I shall now criticise : — •

Psammascus (4) Marshall, is tube-shaped, and therefore very
different.

Dijsicha. (5) Marshall, has foreign bodies in all fibres.

Psammoclema. (6) ]\Iarshall, has no connecting fibres.

Psammoperama. (7) Marshall, is a mass of sand with " little
Protoplasm."

(1) Both Marshall and Carter described many sponges with foreign
bodies in the groimd-substance. I have seen similar forms, but believe that
they are more rare than is assumed, as by cutting sections through such
sponges which have a thick skin protected by sand, one invariably scatters
many sand granules throughout the soft parts where they remain imbedded.
In this way the observer may be occasionally deluded.

(2) 11'. Marshall. Ueber Dysideidcn und Phoriospongien. Zeitschrift
fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXXV., Seite 92 ff.

(3) H. J. Garter. Description of Sponges fi'om the neighbourhood of
Port Phillip Heads, South Australia continued. Annales and Magazine of
Natural History. Series 5, Vol. 15, p. 211, ff.

(4) W. Marshall. Ueber Dysideiden und Phoriospongien. Zeitschrift
fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXXV., Seite 92.

(5) ir. Marshall. L.c, Seite 98.

(6) W. Marshall. L.c, Seite 109.

(7) W. Marshall. L.c, Seite 113.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 285

Carter's (1) genus Hohpsamma is described as being ''without
fibre," a statement which although I consider it incorrect, I must
accept, as there are no figures or descriptions of details; one of the
species I believe belongs to this group.

Also, Carter's Dysidea (2) cannot be placed in this group, as all
the fibres of his species seem to contain foreign bodies.

Carter's species Coscinoderma lanuginosiini from Freemantle,
W. A., (3), and from Port Phillip Heads (4), might be comparHl)le
to Aulena. But I think it probably identical with a totally
different sponge, belonging to my Genus Euspongia of which I
possess specimens from Torres Straits, etc.

Among the numerous species described by other well-known
authors on Spongiology, there are none which I could refer to this
Sub-family, which although doubtlessly belonging to the Spongidse
as described by Schulze (5), still shows so many peculiarities, that
a detailed description of the anatomy of some of the species consti-
tuting it, will be of interest.

26. GENUS HALME. (6) NOVUM GENUS.

Auleninse which consist of very thin lamella3. These are much
and irregularly folded, and form a honey comb- like lacunose struc-
ture. Outside the whole structure is enclosed by a lamella,
which is perforated by numerous large pores, and consequently
has a sieve-like appearance. This external covering lamella is
identical in structure with the internal lamellae, and appears as a
continuation of these. The pores of this external lamella lead

(1) H. J. Carter. Description of Sponges from Port Phillip Heads, South
Australia, continued. Annales and Magazine of Natural History. Series 5,
Vol. XV.. p. 211.

(2) H. J. Carter. L.c, p. 215.

(3) H. J. Carter. Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida.
Annales and Magazine of Natural History. Series 5, Vol. XII., p. 309.

(4) H. J. Carter. Descriptions of Sponges from Port Phillip Heads,
South Australia, continued. Annales ..and Magazine of Natural History.
Series 5, Vol. XV., p. 318.

(5) F. E. Srhithe Untersuchungen iiber den Ban und die Entwickelung der
Spongien. VII., te Mittheilung. Die Familie der Spongidse. Zeitschrift .
fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXX., Seite 593.

(6) Halme ; from riX/xr;. The dirt which the sea- waters leaves behind on
drying. (Od. )

286 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

into the internal system of lacunifi. The development of this
lamella is subject to great variations. The pores are either round
and small or they are enlarged and become polygonal, Then only
narrow strips of tissue remain between them. Finally the pores
may attain the size of the lacunse below, when of course the
dermal lamella as such disappears altogether. (Plate XXVI.)

The forms of the species Halme Nidus Vesparum, globosa, and
micropora possess a more or le.ss developed dermal membrane of
this kind, whilst such a structure was never observed in any
specimen of Halme simplex.

The shape of the Halme specimens is very variable. Massive
forms and such with finger-shaped processes appear to be the most
frequent ones. Halme simplex is always expanded, flat and
incrusting.

In the surface both of the covering lamella and also of the
lamellse in the interior, we meet with numerous small inhalent
pores of ellyptic shape, which are covered by a sieve-membrane.
These lead into short and wide cylindrical inhalent canals, v.diich
open into the common subdermal cavity. Irregular and short
pillars of tissue traverse the cavity and unite the skin with the
inner part of the body. There is no Pseudosculum, Halme is a
true Auloplegma.

The subdermal cavity is low. From its inner surface inhalent
canals of irregular transverse section originate which branch in a
more or less penicillate manner. All these canals seem to tend
upwards. The final ramifications of the inhalent system are regular,
cylindrical canals with a circular transverse section. These canals
are comparatively very wide, as even the smallest have a diameter
greatly exceeding that of the membranes of tissue which separate
the two canal sytems.

The exhalent cantils are wider than the inhalent ones. They
commence with sack-shaped cylindrical branches, uniting like-
wise in a penicillate fashion to form the larger exhalent stems.
The canals become more and more irregular the larger they get,
and finally appear as irregular and wide lacunae. The osculum is

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 287

much smaller than the lacunose oscular tube, and more or less
circular. The oscula are scattered irregularly all over the surface
of the lamellie.

The Haliue species differ from other sponges very much in
consequence of the great width of their canals, and the exceptional
thinness of the dividing membranes.

The thickness of these dividing membranes is pretty uniform
0-016 mm.

In these membranes which devide the inhalent from the exhalent
system we find the ciliated chambers forming one continuous,
uninterrupted, dense layer. The chambers are spherical, the
inhalent pores numerous and small. Each chamber possesses one
cii'cular exhalent pore, which opens into the side of an exhalent
canal without a special canal. The chambers take up the whole
of the thickness of the dividing membranes and have accordingly a
diameter of 0 0 1 6 mm. The ground-substance is transparent and does
not contain any granules. It shows in other respects the ordinary
appearance of the Mesoderm of the Spongidae. The skeleton
consists of a network of horny fibre and a dense dermal layer of
sand. The sand in the outer, exposed surface is very coarse and
forms a thick and hard armour, which is perforated by the pore-
canals. On close examination it appears that these sand-granules
are attached to one another by a kind of cement, which in its
optic appearance and chemical structure (susceptability to staining
re-agents) shows no difference from the Spongiolin of the horny
fibres. I do not doubt, that the sand-granules are actually attached
to one another Vjy Spongiolin.

On all surfaces of the internal lamellae we find a similar armour,
but this is not near so thick and consists of very much finer sand.
Spongiolin-cement cannot be demonstrated here.

The fibre-skeleton rises from a basal horn-plate containing much
sand. Radial main, and tangental, connecting fibres are very well
defined.

The main fibres ramify in a penicillate manner, copying in this
respect the Canals. All the ascending branches assume the same
direction further on and so appear parallel in the distal portions.

288 A MONOGRAPH OP THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

These fibres are completely filled with coarse sand and appear
as sand fibres which are enclosed by a thin horny layer only. These
fibres consequently have a very uneven, knobby surface ; because
the outer horny layer is so thin, that it is not sufficient to fill the
depressions between the adjacent projecting corners of the sand-
grains. The covering horny layer shows a very marked stratifica-
tion, consisting of diflPerent layers of horny substance with different
refracting powers. These main fibres are on an average 0-3 mm.,
thick and 1-5 — 2-5 mm., distant from one another.

The connecting fibres are free from foreign bodies and very much
thinner. They attain about one tenth of the thickness of the main
fibi-es. They are generally vertical on the main fibres, straight
and unbranched. Sometimes it appears as if one of these fibres
had several distinct roots, connecting it with the main fibre. It
also may happen that two adjacent fibres coalesce half-way
between the main fibres for a short distance. Only in this way do
some of these fibres appear slightly ramified. The average distance
of these fibres from one another is equal to the thickness of the
main fibres.

The genus is found thi'oughout the Australian region.

59 SPECIES.

HALME NIDUS VESPARUM, NOVA SPECIES.

HOLOPSAMMA LAMIN/E FAVOSA. Carter (1).

Plates XXVI. , XXIX.

Shape.

A great many sponges of very varying shape, which I have seen,
correspond in their internal structure so closely, that I have com-
bined them to the above species.

According to my idea a great many sponge specimens, which
have passed through my hands belong to it,

vl) H. J. Carter. Description of sponges from the neighbourhood of
Port Phillip Heads continued. Annuals and Magazine of Natural History,
Series 5, Vol. XV.. page 212.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 289

The ordinaiy shape of this species is that of a more or less
irregular bulb. (Plate XXVI., fig. 1), on which excrescences are
aften found, these may attain the digitate shape characteristic of the
variety represented in Plate XXVI., fig. 2. Often the bulbous
central mass disappears altogether, and the whole sponge consists
of a smaller or greater number — up to eight have been observed —
of finger-shaped processes of varying length.

The finger-shaped pi'ocesses are cylindrical, and generally have
a very regular, circular transverse section. (Plate XXVII., fig. 5.)
Rarely the sponge expands in the shape of a flat lamella attached
by a small portion of the lower surface to suitable bodies in the sea.

In outer appearance our sponge represents a species of Echispidse
very frequent in Australian waters, so closely that it is often hard
to tell the difference between them without microscopic investiga-
tion. It appears to me that this is a case of mimicry. The
Echispid Sponge referred to is filled with sharp and dangerous
spicules ti'. ac, and tr. tr., and it may be of advantage to the more
defenceless Halme Nidus Vesparum to imitate this better protected
sponge in external appearances to escape being attacked by some
ra})acious animal.

Size.

The largest bulbous specimens attain a diameter of 60 mm.
The finger-shaped processes of the other variety are genei'ally
about 12-18 mm. thick, and attain a length of 70-120 mm.

The largest specimens I have seen belong to the digitate variety.

Color,

The sponge is gray with a slight violet tinge when alive. This
tinge vanishes as soon as the sponge dies, and is probably caused
by a fluorescence in the outer cells in a similar way as the beautiful
carmoisin red of the live Aplysilla violacea. (1)

In spirits and dry, this sponge is gray, it has in fact the color of
the sand which forms the greater portion of its cortex.

Color varieties have not been observed by me.

(1) R.v. LendenfeM. Ueber Coelenteraten der Slidsee, Zweite Mittheilung.
Neue Aplysinidfe, Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band
XXXVIII., Seite238.

290 a monograph of the australian sponges,

Surface.

As raentioned above in the diagnosis of the genus, the surface
is liable to very great variations according to the development of
the dermal lamella.

The whole sponge consists of a horny comb-like reticulation of
lamellae, (Plate XXVII., tig. 4), which is enclosed by a dermal
lamella. This latter is the only portion of the sponge visible from
without. This lamella is perforated by numei-ous pores. The
appearance of the surface depends on the distribution, shape and size
of these pores. They cannot be enlarged or constricted by the sponge.
In some specimens these pores are round, circular, on an average
2 mm. wide and 3-4 mm. apart, as in the specimen represented
in Plate XX VI., fig. I. Exceptionally these pores may be still
smaller and further apart, as it is sometimes found particularly in
the basal portion of the sponge. Generally howevei-, the pores are
larger and then they become polygonal, being so close together that
there would be no room for them if they were I'ound. A specimen
with pores of this kind is represented in Plate XXVI., fig. 2.
Here the pores measure 3-4 mm. across, and the tissue between
them is only 1 mm. wide. Rarely the pores are still larger, and
then of course the dermal lamella disappears altogether, as such.
Then the pores are as large as the cavities in the honeycomb
structure of the interior of the sponge. (Plate XXVII. , fig. 5.)

There seems to be no correlation whatever between the shape
of the si)onge and the development of this dermal lamella with
its pores.

These pores are neither inhalent nor exhalent. They are
indifferent.

Vestibule.

The most interesting peculiarity of our sponge, to which I have
already alluded above, is its structure. This is always the same,
however much the shape and surface of the specimen may change-

The whole sponge is like a honey-comb covered by a beehive
perforated with numerous pores. These pores, which have been
described above, are in direct commuiition with the spaces beneath ;
they lead into them from without.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 291

These large lacunae in the interior are also in communication
with one another by so large apertures in the dividing lamellje
that they must be considered as continuous. (Plate XXVII.,
figs. 4, 5.) The lamellse between these pores are the true body of
the sponge, they are irregularly bent and twisted, and on an
average 1 mm. thick. This system of lacunae connected with the
outer seawater by numerous large pores is a structure different to
anything hitherto known in sponges. All these lacunae together
can be very correctly designated as a vestibule or anti-chaudjer,
and the name of the subfamily is derived from this peculiarity.
Into these lacunsee the oscula open, and from them also the
inhalent canals originate.

If we were to imagine an ordinary sponge to grow in very thin
lamellae, that these lamellae coalesce in parts and form a honey-
comb structure as in the beautiful and large Echispid mentioned
above and that further from the free margins of the lamellae a
dermal membrane were to grow out, which surrounded each
opening with a fringe of varying development ; we would have a
sponge before us which in this respect would be like Halme.

That, as here stated, these lacunae do not belong either to the
inhalent or exhalent system is conclusively proved by the fact,
that in the surface of the lamellae between them, both inhalent and
exhalent pores are found.

The Significance of the Vestibule to the Sponge.
It is perhaps difficult to see what advantage the sponge may
derive from this peculiar structure. "We might assume that the
raison detre of it is the following : — •

1. It is disadvantageous to the sponge to load its outer surface
with a hard pavement of cemented sand granules, which pavement
of course greatly impedes the movements of the pores, and conse-
quently also the regulation of the water current.

2. It is advantageous to any sponge to be defended by a hard
armour of cemented sand on its surface.

The effect of the combined action of these two regulatives during
the ordinary course of evolution, might be the peculiar structure
just described.

292 A MONOGRAPH OP THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The portion of the sponge exposed to attacks is principally the
outer lamella. It is as we shall see below, covered by an immense
armour of large sand granules cemented together with Spongiolin.
This cortex gives to our sponge a high degree of hardness.

The surface of the interior lamellae is not covered by such an
armour, here we only find small and loose sand granules (Plate
XXVIL, fig. 7.)

A difierentiation in function has taken place between the internal
and external portions, they both nevertheless have retained a similar
internal structure : both contain the same canal system and ciliated
chambers. A difference is only perceptible in the sandy cortex of
the two.

It will doubtlessly strike the reader, that these Auleninae are
very similar to certain Asconidse among the Calcareous sponges,
which likewise possess an " Inter-canal system " and numerous
" Pseudopores" just like our Auleninaj. I refer as an example to
the Auloplegma form of Ascaltis cerebrum (1). I established the
term Auleninae without one thought of the "artificial genus"
Auloplegma and only afterwards it occurred to me that Haeckel
had used the same root for his name, which shows better than any
description ; as it were in an intuitive manner, how very similar
these structures must be.

It appears to me veiy likely that the Auleninse are not developed
from ordinary sponges in the manner indicated above, and that
moreover they represent among the Ceraospongise a group similar
to the above mentioned Asconidse among the Calcispongiee.

This is the reason why I place these Auleninte at the beginning
of this Order.

The disadvantages connected with this arrangement are very
apparent. The water may })ass through the canal system of the
sponge proper more than once, which of course is a bad thing
unless there be such arrangements in the distribution of inhalent
pores and Oscula throughout the suface of the lamellae to prevent
the water which has once been expelled through an Osculum from
being inhaled again.
(1) E. Haeckel. Das System der Kalkschwiimme. Band III., Tafel S, fig. 6.

BY R. VON LENDENPELD, PH.D. 293

As far as my own observations extend, I can only say that I have
not seen anything of the kind. It appears to me that pores and
Oscula are scattered over the surface of the lamellis in a perfectly
irregular manner.

These sponges represent aberrant forms which may perhaps have
retained some peculiarities of intermediate stages between the
hypothetical simple gastrula-like ancestors, and the present horny-
sponges.

This appears particularly likely if we adopt F. E, Schulze's (I)
hypothesis regarding the embryological development of the present
highly complicated horny-sponges by a continued process of folding
or plication, as an image of the phylogenetic development of horny-
sponges. In any case our Aulena sponges are very interesting, and
the study of their development may lead to very important results.

Canal System.

All over the surface of the sponge lamellae ; both where it is
exposed to the outer world, as also, where it forms the limit of
the lacunse described above, inhalent pores are met with.

These pores have been referred to in the diagnosis of the genus
above; they are oval and measure 0-025 x 0035 mm. across.
They are covered in the usual manner by a very thin and trans-
parent sieve membrane. There seem generally to be 10-15 pores
in this membrane. These can evidently be enlarged or constricted
by the sponge, and generally appear oval like the pore itself.
CPlate XXVII., fig. 9.)

Spirit specimens never show these pores distinctly, but I do not
think that they can be entirely closed. I once had occasion to
keep a specimen a few days in a natural aquarium. By squirting
strong osmic acid on to its surface, without removing it from the

(1) F. E. Schuhe. Untersucliungen Ueber den Bau und die Entwickelung
der Spongien, IX., Mittheihing Die Plakiniden. Zeitschrift flir wissen-
schaftliche Zoologie. Band XXXIV., Seite 438.

294 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

seawater, in the manner described in my paper on Anstralian
Aplysinidse (1), I obtained the specimen figured, and I think that
the pores in the sieve-membrane will never be much more dilated
than there.

The pores in the interior are of course not surrounded liy such
large sand-gi-anules as those in the outer sui'face, one of which is
represented in the figure (Plate XXVII., fig. 9.)

Below the sieve-membrane we find a short cylindrical canal
leading into the sub-dermal cavity (Plate XXVII., fig. 7, Plate
XXIX., fig. 12.)

As mentioned above, these canals are liable to movements in the
interior; where the skin is soft; but they do not change in the
outer surface, where they are surrounded by a hard immovable
cortex. Consequently we find shape and size of these canals subject
to great variations in the interior where they are sometimes very
much constricted and then appear very nai'row, wliereas those in
the outer surface are always of the same size.

The cortex being much thicker outside than internally, we find
these canals also much longer where they traverse the outer cortex
than anywhere else.

Below, these canals expand conically and open into the common
sub-dermal cavity which undermines the whole of the surface.

The flat lacunae, which, tangentally extended and underlying
the outer skin form the sub-dermal cavity are interiu])ted here
and there by low columns of tissue connecting the skin with the
body. The cavity itself is very irregular (Plate XXIX., fig. 12)
and from its lower limit numerous inhalent canals originate with
trumpet-shaped extensions, which mostly tend upwards (Plate
XXIX., fig. 12).

These canals are rather irregular, more or less cylindiical, and
measure O'06-Ol. mm. in diameter.

They are mostly simple as in Aplysilla. Ramifications are only
rarely met with. Where they do occur the ramification is

(1) B. von Lendenfeld. Ueber Ccelenteraten der Siidsee. TI. Mitthei-
lung Neue Aplysinidse, Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band
XXXVIII.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 295

penicillate. The inhaleut canals, whether ramifying or not, always
taper slightly centripetally and become very regularly cylindrical
towai'ds the blind end. These canals are nearly straight and
attain a length of 1 — 2 mm.

A.S mentioned above, the sponge-tissue, which divides the system
of these inhalent canals from the exhalent ones, is but a very thin
membrane, measuring only 0-016 mm. on an average in diameter;
except whei'e a main fibre intervenes. (Plate XXVII., fig. 7, H.)
Divided from the parallel and straight inhalent canals by this
membrane we find the exhalent canals, which are wider, measur-
ing on an average 0-12 mm. in diameter, cylindrical and likewise,
mostly straight and tending upward. These are oval or circular
in transverse section. (1). (Plate XXVII., fig. 7, e.) Small
canals, as some in this figure, are rare.

The exhalent canals unite in a penicillate manner, they are
slightly more ramified than the inhalents, and finally open into a
large and irregular central cavity, the oscular tube. (Plate
XXVII., fig. 7, A ; Plate XXIX., fig. 12, 0.) Also this, like all
the other canals, tends upwards and genei'ally measures about
O'i X l'5mm. in diametei', on an average it attains a length of
2 — 3 mm. The osculum is circular, and measures about 0 3 mm.
in diameter, so that the oscular tube appears constricted at its
termination. No oscula are found on the external surface. The
osculum lies at the same level as the surface around, it is not
raised above it.

The ciliated chambers (Plate XXVIIL, fig. 11., Plate XXIX.,
fig. 13), fill the whole of the membrane between the canal systems
as described above in the genus diagnosis. They form one con-
tinuous, dense and uninterrupted layer. Filling the whole thickness
of it, they measure 0-016 in diameter, and are accordingly quite
exceptionally small. They are perfectly spherical.

(1) On the section these canals appear oval, but I think that this is due
to shrinking and pressure during the complicated method of hardening, itc.
I believe that in life the whole structure must be more loose, and all
cavities more rounded and larger than in hardened specimens.
20

296 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

Numerous small pores lead from the inhalent canal into the side
opposite the circular and comparatively very small exhalent pore
or Chamber Osculum. Vosmaer (1), in his diagnosis of the Family
Spongidae states that their chambers are semi-sperical. This is
certainly not the case here, and I take this opportunity to mention
that also in several other Australian genera, which, without doubt
belong to the SpongidjB as conceived by Vosmaer (I.e.), F. E.
Schulze (2) and myself (3) ; the chambers form in a similar way
much more than half a, sphere.

The narrow pores appear very variable in size and number, and
I do not doubt that they can be formed in any part of the aboral
portion of the ciliated chamber constricted and closed at the option
of the sponge.

The Chamber Osculum (Plate XXIX., fig. 13 0), appeared to
me to be clothed by a peculiar flat epithelium. But with such
small and delicate structures the observations are of course not
very reliable. In the figure (Plate XXIX., fig. 13), I have
represented this as it appeared to me. In the A plysillidse, I have
found a different arrangement (4), which has also been seen by
Vosmaer (5.) Whilst here in Halme, the ciliated cylindrical
collar-cell epithelium terminates abruptly, and there is no transition
between the high cylindrical elements of the chamber and the flat-
cells of the canal epithelium ; we fin d in the cases referred to
(Aplysilla, etc.), cells around the inner margin of the Chamber

(1) (r. C. Vosmaer. Studies on Sponges. I. On Velmfe Gracilis. N. g.,
n. sp. Mittheilungen aus der Zoologischen Station in Neapel. Band IV.,
Seite 445.

(2) F. E. Schulze. Untersuchungen Ueber den Bau und die Entwickehmg
der Spongien, VII. , Mittheilung. Zeitschrif t flir wissenschaftliche Zoologie.
Band XXXII., Seite 693.

(3) R- V. Lendenfeld. A Monograph of Australian Sponges. Part II.
Proceedings of the Linnean Society of N.S.W., Vol. IX., p. 340.

(4) R. V. Lendenfeld. Ueber Ccelenteraten der Siidsee, II., Mittheilung
Neue Aplysinidae, Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band
XXXVIII., Seite 260.

(5) G. C. Vosmaer. Bronn, Classen, und Ordniingen des Thierreiches.
Porifera. Seite 182.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 297

Osculum, whicli are cylindrical, but do not possess a collar, and
'which in every respect present transition forms between the
chamber epithelium, and the canal epithelium.

Skeleton.

The skeleton of the Halme Nidus Vesparum specimens observed
by me is always the same however different the sponge may appear
in shape and size.

Main fibres and connecting fibres are, as stated above, in the
description of the genus, very different from each other.

The main fibres grow up from a basal horny plate containing
much sand and tend upwai'ds remaining in or near the centre of
the sponge lamellae. They finally curve slightly outward and ramify
in a penicillate manner. The branches are as thick as the stems
and in their terminal portions more or less parallel.

Comparing our sponge with others we notice that the ramification
of these main fibres is but slight and that the main fibres never
hardly seem to coalesce to form a reticulation.

The main fibi'es are on an average 0'3 mm., thick. The greater
portion of them, the whole inner part (Plate XXVIII,, fig. 8, Plate
XXVII., fig. 7) is taken up by a dense mass of large sand granules
held together by a Spongiolin-cement. Outside we find a thin
horny layer on the surface of the sand. This is stratified and the
layers are visible because the successive strata refract the light in
a different degree.

This outer coating or sheath is very thin, measuring only 0-01
mm., in thickness. Consequently the surface or outline of the fibre
appears very uneven as the projecting corners of the imbedded
sand grains are divided by indentures, which the outer horny layer
is not thick enough to fill up.

These main fibres are connected with one another by connecting
fibres (Plate XXVII., fig. 8). These are very simple and as shown
in the figure mostly straight, vertical to the main fibres and only
very slightly ramified.

298 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The I'amifications never lead to the production of a network ;
only occasionally we see adjacent fibres coalescing in the middle or
also a fibre divided into 2, 3 or more little branches which appear
as its roots on one side.

These fibi-es have a thickness of about 0-02 mm. They are very
light in color somewhat like glass and jierfectly transparent With
a high power of the microscope a verj slender axiaL thread is made
apparent, which swells to little conic granular masses at the points
where the axial thread joins the main fibre.

These fibres are about 0-3 mm. apart from one another.

Also the cortex of the sponge must be considered as an integral
part of the skeleton, and this all the more as we find the main
fibres actually coalescing with it. (Plate XX VII., fig. 7.)

The structure of the cortex is very interesting. Some theoretical
conclusions from its peculiarities have been drawn above. The
sand granules forming the cortex on the outer exposed surface
measvxre on an average O'l mm. in diameter, and what is very
remarkable, are all of the same size.

The sand granules in the interior of the main fibres are identical
in size and shape with those in the outer exposed surface, and
without a doubt derived therefrom. (1) The.se sand granules are
held together by a cement of spongiolin, and the armor they
form has a thickness of about 0-35 mm. — a thickness very similar
to that of the main fibres.

The canals leading into the vestibule-lacunfe are short and
circulai', cylindrical perforations of the external lamella. (Plate
XXVII., figs. 4, 7 ; 0.)

In the wall of these short tubes we find a very difierent kind of
cortex. It is a transition from the cortex without to the cortex
within. Near the outer surface (compare the figui-e) the sand
grains are as large as in the outer cortex, but the layer they form
is only about half as thick.

As we proceeded downward the size of the sand grains and also
the thickness of the sand layer decrease rapidly, until finally we

(l)Tliis is in accordance with the views expressed by Carter and others.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 299

find in the lower proximal portion of this canal, sand grains,
which measure only 0-02 mm. or less on an average. (Plate
XXXVII., fig. 7 ; /.) The thickness of the layer they form is
only 0-5 — 0 7 mm. or less. A similar layer of similar sand grains
is found throughout the interior surfaces of the sponge.

Growth of the Skeleton,

Whether a selection in the sandgrains, which came in contact with
the sponge, by the latter, is executed in such a way as to retain
the large grains on the outer surface and the small ones in the
interior, cannot be ascertained, but there can be no doubt, that
also without such an act on the part of the sponge the disparity
in size of these elements of its cortex can be partly explained
without difficulty in the sense of F. E. Schulze. (1) The large
sand granules never enter the pores in the outer lamella because
there is not sufficient current in the interior of the sponge to
carry them along. The small ones are carried along also with the
weak current in the interior, and they are then retained on the
interior surfaces.

The fact however that no small sand grains are found in the
outer surface cannot be accounted for in this way. There we must
assume that the sponge exerts some voluntary selection.

As the sponge grows, the outer surface with the large grained
cortex is moved more and more from the basis of the sponge and
the main fibres grow after it always remaining in contact with it
they derive as it were the sand we afterwards find in them from
the cortex.

We can conclude from this, that the region ivliere the sponge
grows is just below the surface.

The connecting fibres grow out from the main fibres as room for
them occurs below the receding outer cortex.

(1) i^. E. Schulze. Untersuchungen Ueber den Ban unci die Entwickehmg
der Spongien. Die Gattung Spongelia. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche
Zoologie. Band XXXIII., Seite 131.

300 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

Histology.

I have not observed an}- thing peculiar in the structure of this
sponge. It is remarkable, that no granules are found in the
ground substance ai'ound the ciliated chambers. It is known to
the readei', that the family of the Spongidae has been defined as
comprising species with such granules by F. E. Schulze (1) a
definition accepted by us afterwards without alteration. If I now
place these sponges in this family ; I do so in consequence of a
desire on my part not to complicate the classificatory system too
much ; and not because I think that the presence or absence of
granules is a thing of little importance. I must however say that I
examined several, as yet undescribed species of horny sponges
which I intend to describe as Spongidaj, which likewise possess a
comparatively clear ground substance.

The tenacity with which such peculiarities adhere to certain forms
— the "systematic value " of them — can as yet not be ascertained
because we know so very little about all these sponges.

I have found both male and female sexual products in the
specimens I have examined but I cannot say whether the species
is hermophroditic or not. I have never found male and female
sexual cells side by side, but this of course is an observation of no
value to decide this question.

Parasitic Alg^e in the Skin.

In the outer skin between the hard sandy cortex and the outer
surface generally, small algse are met with, which have the shape
of tine threads consisting of a string of cells. (Plate XXVIII.,
fig. 10.) These threads are rounded on each end.

It is connected with difficulty to find these structures, because
they are of a very faint brown color and very small. I have
however, been able to find them in most specimens, and I cannot
say whether they do not occur also in those where I have not seen

(1 ) i''. E. Schnke. Untersuchungen Ueber den Bau unci die Entwickelung
der Spongien Die Familie der Spongidre. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche
Zoologie. Band XXXII.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 301

them. I no not think that they can be of much importance to the
sponge in which they live ; they are certainly very similar to those
Oscillarians of which I assume that they are the cause of the
formation of the filaments in the Hircinidse. (1) The family of
the Hircinidai is a doubtful one, and before the true natiire of the
filaments is known, we will hardly be able to arrive at any satis-
factory conclusions concerning them. I do not place very much
reliance in the conclusions which might be inferred from Polejaefi"'s
(2) observations on the subject. I on the contrary, uphold my
hypothesis referred to above, as the most likely one.

True filaments or anything like them, have not been observed
by me in theHalme specimens I examined, so that I would not
consider myself justified in placing this genus in the Family
Hircinidse, even if the oscillaria I found in Halme were identical
with the one, which according to my idea causes the formation of
filaments in the Hircinid^e.

Geographical Distribution.

Eastern Coast of Australia, Southern Coast of Australia, Port
Phillip (Von Lendenfeld) ; Port Jackson (Ramsay, Yon Lenden-
feld) ; Port Stephens (Ramsay).

Bathymetrical Distribution.

5-20 metres. (Poi-t Phillip and Port Jackson.)
The bulbous variety has been obtained from the three localities.
The digitate vai"iety has been obtained from Port Stephens only.

60. SPECIES.

HALME SIMPLEX, NOVA SPECIES.

Plates XXYI., XXYH.

As the structure of this species is, similar with that of the fore-
going it will be suflicient to give a short diagnosis of it here.

(1) i?. V. Lendenfeld. Notes on the Fibres of certain Australian Hir-
cinidse. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of N.S.W., Vol IX., p. 641,

(2) iV. PoUjaeff. Report on the Keratosa. The Zoology of the Voyage
of H.M.S. Challenger. Part XXXI. , p. 12.

302 a monograph op the australian sponges,

Shape and Size.

Halme simplex is a low, incrusting sponge. The crusts are
higher in the centre than at the margin and of irregular roundish
outline. The regularity of the outline is often disturbed and then
we find lobate extensions of varying shape and size. The crust
has a thickness of 12-20 mm., and may extend to 100 mm. (the
largest specimen seen by me).

Color.

The sponge is generally, alive and also when dry, of a uniform
dark chesnvit color, I have however seen some dried, badly
preserved specimens of it, which were grey.

Structure.

Thesponge consists of lamelloe which are not nearly so complicated
in their plications as those of the foregoing species. The honeycomb
structure (Plate XXVI., fig. 3) is more simple than in Halme
nidus vesparum. The whole of the lamella appears as a portion of
an irregular comb. The surfaces are curved in one direction
(laterally) only, whereas they are straight in the other direction
(vertically). From a basal incrusting lamella numerous upright
and much curved septa or lamelke arise between which there are
large conic spaces (Plate XXVII., fig. 6). These lamellse corres-
pond to the interior lamellse of the foregoing species. The conic
spaces between them are the vestibule lacunae. An external
lamella as described above is not met with ; the conic lacunse are
in open communication with the sea-water outside.

The skeleton is similar to that of Halme Nidus Vesparum and a
cortical layer of sand grains is met with. This latter consists of a
thick layer of lai-ge grains on the free margins of the lamellse and
of a thin layer of small grains further down in the surface near
the bottom of the conic spaces. Half way up we find a cortex
intermediate between the two.

It appeared to me that the skeleton in general was more coarse
than in the other species, microscopic measurements, however,

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 303

proved that it was not so. The sponge is not nearly so haid as
Halme Nidus Vesparum. There is a great abundance of sand, but
it appears that the Spongialin-cement is not so highly developed in
this species as in the foregoing.

Geographical Distribution.

North Coast of Australia, South Coast of Australia, Mauritius,
Port Phillip (Von Lendenfeld); Torres Straits (Macleay); Northern
Territory of South Australia (Haacke) ; Mauritius (Von Haast).

Bathymetrical Distribution.
10-20 metres. (Port Phillip.)

The Port Phillip specimens are black when dry (brown in spirits
and living). All the others light or dark brown (dry),

61. SPECIES.

HALME GLOBOSA, NOVA SPECIES.

Shape and Size.

The specimens which I refer to this species are bulbous, more
or less spherical and attached by a small portion of the surface
only. They measure from 30 to 60 mm. in diameter.

Colour.

In the living state this sponge has a greyish-purple color, which
seems however, to be subject to unusual variations. The purple is
always the same, but the grey varies according to the nature of
the foreign bodies in the dermal lamella, from light to dark gray.
In spirits, it preserved well, the sponge retains its dull purple
color ; if not well preserved, and when dry the sponge is brownish

grey.

surface.

The Dermal Lamella is developed in a rather different manner
than in Halme Nidus Vesparum. It appears as a terminal thick-
ening of the distal interior lamella. On sections it makes the
impression of a wedge-shaped thickening. The contour of the

304 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

Pseudopores is also not so sharp as in Halme Nidus Vesparum,
but more rounded. The Pseudopores themselves consequently
appear from without as trumpet-shaped openings narrowing towards
the interior. They measure on the surface 8 mm., and in the
narrowest part a little below 5 mm. aci'oss. They are more or less
circular and divided from one another by bridges about 7 mm.

wide.

Structure.

In its structure our species represents a marked peculiarity
in one respect only. We usually find that the wide inhalent
canals, which are simple open tubes in the two foregoing species,
are here pervaded by numerous fine membranes, similar in structure
to those which pervade the vestibule space in the genus Aulena.
These contain a great number of wandering amceboid cells, which
are highly colorable and present in sections a very remarkable
appearance, after Alum-Carmin staining. I believe that here in
the inhalent canals we may perhaps look for the digestive opera-
tions of this sponge. It seems that the digestive functions are
performed hy different parts of the inhalent system in different
sponges. I believe also to have seen in these perforated diaphragm-
membranes, cells which might be considered as sensitive and ganglia
cells.

Geographical Distribution.

South Coast of Australia, Port Phillip (Yon Lendenfeld) ; St.
Vincent's Gulf (Haacke).

Bathymetrical Distribution.

In shallow water.

The St. Vincent Gulf specimens are larger than those from Port
Phillip.

62 SPECIES.

HALME MICROPORA, NOVA SPECIES.

Shape and Size.

This species is irregular globose with deep, rounded indentures,
which divide it into lobes of varying shape and extension. Only

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 305

two specimens have been seen by me, both are of equal size,
measiiring 40 mm. in height, and 70 mm. in breadth.

Color.

This species I have only seen in the dry state. Then it is of a
bright yellow, light ochre-coloured.

Surface.

The surface is diflerent from that of any of the foregoing species.
The dermal lamella namely, is very thin and does not contain so
hard and resisting an armour of cemented sand-grains as in Halme
Nidus Vesparum, which species is the most like it as far as the
surface-structure is concerned. Between the terminations of the
interior honeycomb, which is exceptionally regular, the dermal
lamella is in the dry specimens depressed. It appears as if it had
collapsed. In the centre of each depression there is a small round
Pseudopore. These pores measure only 1 mm. in diameter, are all
of uniform width, and about 10 mm. apart, scattered very regularly
over the surface.

Structure.

The internal structure is peculiar. The honeycomb structure is
more marked than in any other species. On a section one perceives
that the walls of the cells are straight and upright as in Halme
simplex. But there are several layers of such cells, one over the
other, the cells of different layers communicating with one another
by small pores only. As no spirit specimens have been examined
by me, the position of this sponge appears somewhat doubtful ; the
general appearance however, is so similar to the other species, that
I consider myself justified in placing this sponge in the genus
Halme. It might however, be one of the Spongelidse.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, Illawarra (Ramsay).

Bathymetrical Distribution.
Both specimens were washed up on the beach near WoUongong.

306 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

27. GENUS APHRODITE. (1) NOVUM GENUS.

Auleninse of Nardorus shape without secundary diaphragm
lamellae in the vestibule-space with a terminal Pseudosculum, Small
conuli scattered all over the surface. No dermal lamella developed.
The skeleton consists of radiating main fibres chai-ged with foreign
bodies and tangental connecting fibres, which have an eighth of the
diameter of the main fibres, and are destitute of foreign bodies.

63. SPECIES.

APHRODITE NARDORUS, NOVA SPECIES.

Shape and Size.

The only specimen of this sponge seen by me is pyriform and
pedunculate.

It reaches a height of 150 mm. The peduncle is cylindrical
and circular on transverse section, perfectly straight and upright,
of uniform thickness throughout, and 80 mm. long. It measures
9 mm. in thickness. On the summit of it the sponge expands in
the shape of a sphere to a width of 30 mm., and tapers towards
the upper end, which is crowned by the large, circular pseudosculum,
which measures 9 mm. in diameter. (Plate XXXV., fig. 34.)

It represents to a great extent the figure given by Haeckel (2)
of his Ascilla Gracilis Nardorus. Only the network is more dense
and the surface conulated.

Color.

In spii'its light yellow, greyish in the interior.

Surface.

There is as mentioned above in the diagnosis of the species, no
dermal lamella, and so the interior structure is open to view from
without. The Pseudopores are very irregular, elongate, pointed at
each end and longitudinally disposed. All the exposed sui'faces

(1) Aphrodite='A/3soStTj;. The Ideal of Beauty arisen from the waves.

(2) E. Haeckel. Die Kalkschwamme ; eine Monografie. Band 3. Tafel

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. SOT

are uniformly conulated. The conuli are about 1 mm. high, and
2 mm. apart from one another. At the bottom of the peduncle
the conuli are nearer to one another than further up. There is no
difference in the conulation of the peduncle and head.

Structure.

With the exception of the dermal lamella, the microscopic
structure is very similar to that of Halme Nidus Vesparam
described above. In other respects this sponge shows greater
affinities to Aulena. The true body of the sponge consists of a
network of thick, cylindrical, longitudinally disposed fibres which
coalesce very frequently. They measure 5-8 mm. in diametei^,
and form a dense network supported by the peduncle. Throughout
these, as also in the peduncle we meet with a canal system and
skeleton similar to that of Halme Nidus Vesparum. The inhalent
pores are found abundantly on the exposed parts, whereas the
Oscula are all directed inward towards the Pseudogaster. At the
top of the peduncle there are several larger Oscula. There
are no Oscula on the sides of the peduncle. Evidently here
the Pseudogaster is being converted into a true Oscular tube,
and if the apertures between the fibres of the true sponge
body were filled up we would have a sponge before us with
a simple terminal Osculum. The thinking reader can draw
his own conclusions from these statements. It may, however, be
of interest here to mention the variety in shape in a sponge which
I have named Cacospongia exemplum. Over a hundred specimens
of this sponge have passed through my hands, There are numerous
varieties, but all are connected with one another in such a manner
by intermediate forms that they altogether represent a continuous
series, special forms of which have been described by Hyatt and
Carter from Australian waters. In the first variety C. ex. prima,
we have flat, expanded frondose forms. All the Oscula are on one
side. In the second, (C. ex. secunda) we have a true cup formed by
the bending and final coalescing of the lateral margins of this plate.
All Oscula are on the inner side. Geelongia Vasiformis, Carter,
is identical with this variety. Further the cup becomes smaller

308 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

and smaller until a pedunculate pyriform sponge with numerous
Oscula on the apex is produced. (C. ex. tertia.) This variety-
is identical with some sponges described by Carter as Stelosponges
levis, Hyatt, etc., and also with Hyatt's Spongelia rectilinea
errecta. Finally in quart. (C ex. terminus) we find a pedunculate
pyriform sponge with a single terminal Osculum. This shows
how in various ways the same form may finally be produced, and
with what difficulties the study of the relationship of sponges is
beset, at the same time furnishing an example to Oscar Schmidt's
statements regarding approximating development.

Geographical Distribution.

North Coast of Australia, Torres Straits, Palm Tree Island
(Macleay.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.

Shallow water.

28. GENUS AULENA. (1) NOVUxM GENUS.

Auleninse, the body of which possesses the shape of a sponge-like
reticulation. In the intervals between the meshes of this network
a network of very fine membranes expands. The fibi'es of the
sponge network possess the usual structure of sponges. The
lacunose cavities between, which are pervaded by the membranes
mentioned above, have the significance of anti-chambers. They
are attached as it were to the outer surface of the true body of
the sponge, and so form a vestibule.

The skeleton consists of a network of very fine horny fibres
which never contain foreign bodies, are solid and transparent ;
and show a slender axial thread and stratified horn substance
around it.

In the vestibule portion of the sponge the meshes of the net-
work of these fibres are very wide. In the true body of the
sponge about four times as small. In the true body of the sponge

(1) Aukna from dv\rj the vestibule or antichamber ; with antichambers.

BY R. VON LENDENFELP, PH.D. 309

we lind in most of the places where two fibres join, large granules
of sand which exceed in diameter the fibres 5 — 15 fold. These
grains are clothed with a fine coating of spongiolin and form an
integral part of the whole skeletal system. (Plate XXXIII.)

The lacunes between the membranes are connected with one
another, and the outer world by numerous large round pores.
The distal portions of the true sponge-body extend in the shape of
conuli in a radial direction some distance beyond the lacunose
tissue. Inhalent pores and oscula occur throughout the whole of
the surface of the true sponge-body. Some of these — on the pro-
jecting conuli — open direct into the outer water. Most of them,
however, open into the system of lacunae. The inhalent pores are
covered with a sieve membrane, they lead into low, tangentally
expanded subdermal cavities. The inhalent canals which originate
from this subdermal cavity are not very large, much curved and
only very slightly branched. The ciliated chambers appear
spherical, and are ^ — ^ as large as the canals, having a diameter
of 0-04 mm. They open with a large circular Chamber Osculum
dii'ect, without special canal into the large exhalent canals which
unite to form extensive oscular tubes. The oscula are numerous
and scattered irregularly over the surface of the sponge. Nai'dorus
and Auloplegma forms.

64 SPECIES.

AULENA VILLOSA. NOVA SPECIES.

(Plates XXX., XXXIV.

At present the only species of the genus.

Shape.

This sponge is comparatively rare. The specimens which I
have seen were bulbous without exception ; spherical or oval.
The sponge is attached to suitable surfaces in the sea by a very
small portion of the surface but not pedunculate. It resembles in
this respect the massive forms of Chondrosia. The sponge appears
to a certain extent radially symmetrical round a vertical axis.

310 a monograph of the australian sponges,

Size
The vertical diameter varies from 25 — 40 mm. Horizontally
the sponge generally measures a little less than in height.

Color.
The color of the live sponge is yellowish-gray, but seems to be
subject to variations. In spirits and dry the sponge appeai-s dirty

Surface.

The surfaceof the sponge iscovered by densely situated cylindrical
and terminally rounded conuli. (Plate XXX., fig. 14, 15, Plate
XXXI., fig. 19, 20.) These conuli are about 2 mm. high, and
0*8 1 mm. broad ; they are about 1*4 mm. apart from one another
and circular on transverse section. The direction in which these
conuli proti'ude from the surface varies to a certain extent. They
invariably radiate from a common centre ; but this centre may
be situated further up or further down as the case may be. In
some specimens this centre coincides with the centre of the sponge ;
then the conuli stand vertical on the surface. (Plate XXX.,
fig. 14;, in others again, this centre lies near the base of the sponge,
and then the conuli all appear to tend upward. (Plate XXX.,
fig. 15, Plate XXXI., fi^. 20.) This makes a great difference to
the appearance of the sponge, although it is immaterial. It appears
that the locality where the sponge grows has something to do with
the direction of the conuli, but as the specimens at my disposal are
but few in number I cannot assert this.

These conuli are rather soft and may move with the current of
the water. This peculiai-ity makes the sponge appear villous, and
from that the s]>ecitic name has been taken. The surface of the
conuli is soft. Microscopic investigation shows that there are no
foreign bodies, sand, or anything of that kind in the outer skin.

The surface in the depressions between the conuli is formed of a
very fine soft and tender membrane, perforated by large circular
pores which lead into the system of vestibule lacunae below. The
Pseudoscula. when present are few in number, 1-4, circular and on
the upper surface they measure 2-5 mm., in diameter.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 311

Vestibule.

The great difference between the genera Aulena and Halme, lies
not only therein, that in the former the true body of the sponge is
formed by lamellfe, and in the latter by cylindrical threads ; but
particularly also in the great difference in the development of the
vestibule in these two.

Whilst in Halme it is a simple empty space between the sponge
lamellte ; it is traversed by numerous fine membranes in Aulena.
(Plate XXXI., fig. 19, Plate XXXIL, fig. 21), which sub-divide
it into smaller, more or or less spherical compartments connected
with one another by large circular pores in these membranes. It
is apparent that by movements of these membranes the current of
water can be greatly influenced, and we find that there are nei'vous
and muscular elements contained in them by the united action of
which, no doubt the water current is regulated to the advantage
of the sponge.

The meshes of the network formed by the true body of the
sponge measure, 7-2 mm,, and this is the extent of the vestibule
lacunae.

The compartments into which the vestibule space is divided are
more or less spherical and measure 0-2-0"5 mm. in diameter.

The whole structure has a froth-like appearance. (Plate XXXI.,
fig. 19.) This tissue fills the whole of the vacant space between
the meshes of the sponge network.

The thickness of the membranes is on an average 0-017 mm.
The circular pores (Plate XXXIL, fig. 21), are situated in the
middle of the fields limited by the lines where the membranes join.

The membranes are supported by horny fibres, which pervade
the whole of the lacunose part of the sponge.

The Significance of the Vestibule in Aulena.

It is apparent that this structure although homologous to the
simpler one of Halme, being very diflerently developed, must
perform slightly different physiological function.
21

312 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The first reason put forward as possible for tlieir formation in
Halme cannot hold good here, as there is no cortical lamella to
the sponge at all. Also in this genus the resemblance to certain
Auloplegma forms of calcareous sponges is very striking.

The whole structure may be a somewhat changed remnant of an
organ previously possessed by sponges, and lost in all, except the
Auleninse. In this case we would have to consider Aulena as still
more conservative than Halme.

I have however, no knowledge of the embryological development
of either genus, so that I must leave it to the thinking reader to
draw his own conclusions from the facts described.

Canal System.

The canal system of our sponge is more complicated than that
of Halme, but still more simple than in most other sponges.

The inhalent pores are scattered all over the surface and on an
average 0'2 mm., apart. They are circular or oval and apparently
very liable to changes in shape and size, as their dimensions differ
in ditJ'erent specimens and also in different parts of the same
specimen. No regularity in these differences could be traced and
I therefore believe that they are of the same size throughout the
sponge and that they can be contracted and dilated at the option
of the sponge.

I estimate the average diameter at 0-04 mm. Outside they are
covered by a very fine and tender sieve membrane, with numerous,
about twenty, circular pores. I have repeatedly found this sieve
membrane absent in spirit specimens, which were preserved by
myself and ought to have shown it. Possibly this is due to the
extreme tenderness of it. The rapid contracting effect of the
alcohol may have x^uptured them.

The inhalent pore is the opening of a short, circular and cylin-
drical canal, about 0-04 mm., long and as wide as the pore itself,
which pervades the skin of the sponge and leads into the subdermal
cavity.

The latter is not so highly developed as in Halme and consists
of a system of wide anastomosing canals extending tangentally and

BY E. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 313

undermining the skin (Plate XXXII., fig. 21). The canals are
depressed radially. The outer side is flat and forms a plane parallel
to the outer surface. Below the outline of these canals is very
irregular, forming wide, conic or trumpet shaped extensions
which lead into the inhalent canals. The average width of this
subdermal cavity is only 0-03 mm.

The inhalent canals are much curved and only slightly ramified.
Their transverse section is generally more or less circular and
their diameter averages about 0'18 mm.

They are accordingly very much wider than the subdermal
cavity. The ramifications are irregular. Divided from the system
of inhalent canals by a lamella, 0-045 — 0'05 mm. in thickness, we
find the exhalent canals. These are much more irregular in shape
than the inhalent ones (compare the figure), and of similar average
width. Also these are only slightly and irregularly ramified and
unite to form irregular lacunose cavities, the oscular tubes. (Plate
XXXII., fig, 21.) The average diameter of these spaces is
0'6 — 0"8 mm. Towards the circular oscula, which are not raised
above the surface and scattered irregularly all over the sponge,
the cavities ai'e constricted. The diameter of the osculum is
0-12 mm.

The ciliated chambers are spherical and very similar to those
described above of Halme Nidus Yesparum. They form like those
of Halme a dense layer taking up the whole of the thickness of the
lamellae which divide the inhalent from the exhalent canals. They
are accordingly much larger than those of Halme, measuring
0"04 mm. in diameter.

Skeleton,

As the reader will have seen from the description of the genus
the skeleton of this sponge is very remarkable. (Plate XXXIII.,
fig. 22.) The whole skeleton consists of a regular network of
solid hoi'ny fibres which do not contain any foreign bodies. Main

314

A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

and connecting fibres cannot be distinguished. They are all alike
as in Carter's (1) genus Coscinoderma, recently also described by
Polejaeff. (2)

The fibres are circular and cylindi-ical^ and they have a diameter
of 0-02 mm. The regular network formed by them is pretty
loose. In the true body of the sponge itself the meshes average
0.2 mm. and in the vestibule tissue 0-5 mm,

At the joining points of the fibres, in the true body of the
sponge only, we find sandy granules of uniform size, 07ie in each
joining jioint. (Plate XXXIL, fig. 21, Plate XXXIII., fig. 22.)
These measure 0-14 mm. in diameter on a average and are of a
more or less spherical shape. Elongate sand grains seem never to
occur.

These sand grains, which form, as it will be seen from the
above, an integral part of the whole skeleton, are enclosed in a
horny coating (Plate XXX., fig. 17), about half as thick as the
fibres which originate from it. This coating is stratified ; but the
layers are not very clearly visible.

The presence of these sand grains is rendered particularly
remarkable by the fact, that no sand whatever occurs in the outer
skin of the sponge. As a rule we find in the skin of such
sponges which contain foreign bodies in their fibres, also similar
foreign bodies, in the skin.

There can be no doubt that these sand grains are originally
attached to the tips of the conuli, and from thence they
api^arently wonder centripetally because they actually remain in
the same place whilst the sponge is growing and the conuli extend
beyond them. They are then sought by the growing horny fibres
and retained in their joining points.

(1) H. J. Carter. Conti-ibutions to our Knowledge of the Spongida.
Annales and Magazine of Natural History. vSeries ,5, X^ol. XII., p. 309.

(2) N. Polejaeff', Report on the Keratosa. The Zoology of H.M.S.
Challenger. Part XXXI., p. 28.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 315

HiSOTOLGY.

Although our sponge does not present any interesting peculiarities
in most respects, it is still remarkable for the development of its
nervous system.

I have found that the surrounding of the horny fibres near the
tips of the conuli are very similar to those described by me of the
Australian Aplysillidaj (1). As in those we find (Plate XXX., fig.
18) a coating of Spongoblasts around the growing fibre (aS*). These
are very small, measuring only 0-006 mm., in length, they are three
times as high as broad. In the distal, rounded end we find a very
elongate nucleus. Outside, this layer of Spongoblasts is covered by
a layer of spindle-shaped longitudinal tissue cells (5). Here and
there we find a thread formed of similar cells {B') extending
through the soft part of the sponge and joining the hollow cylinder
foi'med by those tissue cells which cloth the horny fibre.

The horn fibre is clearly striated {H) and a granular axial canal
{A) can be detected.

The Nervous System.

(Plate XXXIV., fig 23.)

The reader will remember, that elements of calcareotts sponges (2),
have been described by me as being nervous cells. In Aulena
similar elements have been found by me, which I consider to have
a nervous function.

At the joining lines of the membranes which pervade the vestibule
space, where the membranes are thickened, numerous spindle-
shaped cells are found in groups. These are immersed in the
ground substance and vertical to the sui-face.

They are 0-01 mm. long, and in the middle 0-002 mm. thick.
The distal end is protracted to form a short hair or cilia, a Palpocil

(1) R. V. Lendenfdd. Ueber Coelenteraten der Siiclsee, II. Mittheihmg
Neue Aplysinidse Zeitschrif t f iir wissenschaf tliche Zoologie. Band XXXVIII.

(2,1 R. V. LencUnfeld. The Histology and Ners-ous system of Calcareous
Sponges. Proceedings of the Linnean Society. Vol. IX.

316 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

(Plate XXXIY., fig. 23, T), which projects beyond the surface to
some distance. (1)

The protoplasm of these cells is very intransparent, and shows
after treatment with osmic acid the large dark granules peculiar
to the sensitive protoplasm of Hydromedusje after treatment with
the same re-agent. The nucleus is large, elongate and oval.

Below, these cells taper or widen and seem to send forth threads
of Protoplasm which pervade the ground-substance.

These threads are very indistinct and only rendered visible by
the large black granules imbedded in them after treatment with
Osmic acid.

Below these groups of sensitive cells, we find large, and beauti-
fully developed multipolar Ganglia cells, with numerous much
ramified processes on all sides, a dark granular protoplasm and a
spherical nucleus in the centre.

These elements measure 0-01 mm. across ; the nucleiis has a
diameter of 0005 mm. This nucleus appears nearly black after
treatment with osmic acid and picric acid carmin. (Plate
XXXIY., figs. 23, ^.)

A direct communication between the basal centripetal processes
of the sensitive cells and the ramifications of the nerves which
originate from the ganglia cells has not been observed by me with
suflficient clearness. I think that the figure represents well what
I have seen ; even with the homogeneous immersion the doubts
could not be removed on this score, but / believe that such a con-
nection does exist.

(1) The nervous elements can be seen in alcohol-carmin specimens, but
they are much better visible in specimens treated with Osmic acid and
stained with Picric acid carmin. It is necessary to make very fine sections
to demonstrate these elements. The length of the Palpocil cannot be
ascertained, because it naturally shrinks under the influence of Osmic acid.
In the best sections I have, it projects beyond the surface about 6'002 mm.
I believe, however, that it must be much longer in life. I have taken great
pains to see these structures in the living state, and have drawn the palpocils
according to what I believe to have seen. Anyone acquainted with the
study of sponge liistology will admit the great difficulty in the way of such
oV)servations, and will value the correctness of the result accordingly. This
of course only relates to the lem/th of the pelpocil, its ]rjrt>>ence cannot be
doubted.

DY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 317

The membranes are covered on either surface by a flat
Ectodermal Epithelium. (Plate XXXIV., fig. 23, d.) In the
ground substance spindle-shaped cells are found which traverse
the membi-anes in all directions, (c) I do not doubt that some
of the fibres originating from the ganglia cells are connected with
those elements which I consider as muscle cells.

By the sensitive cells the conditions of the water around them is
felt and an irritation transmitted to the ganglia cells below. There a
decision is arrived at, what should be done, provided these outer
conditions and with them the nervous irritation change. The
ganglia cells irritate the muscles, and so the pores in the
membranes can be dilated or contracted, and the current of water
changed and regulated with advantage to the sponge. Whether
any consciousness is connected with this process or not is hard to
decide. The whole process certainly has the appearance of a very
simple reflex action, so that a consciousness, in the human sense
can hardly be assumed.

Geographical Distribution.

East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson. (Ramsay, von Len-

denfeld.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.

10-40 meti-es.

The specimens from greater depth appear to possess longer villi
and a more massive shape, those from shallow water are more
flattened and more smooth.

As the sponge, however, appears to be rare I am not able to
establish any bathymetrical varieties from the observations at my
disposal. Nardorus and Auloplegma forms have been dredged
from all these depths.

Varieties.

There are, as mentioned above no great varieties in the shape of
this sponge. Some possess Pseudoscula as described, whilst others
are Aulaplegmaforms. I propose to establish two varieties for
this species accordingly.

318 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

I. AULENA VILLOSA AULOPLEGMA,

WITHOUT PSEUDOSCULA.

II. AULENA VILLOSA NARDORUS,

WITH PsEUDOSCULA,

65. SPECIES.
AULENA FLABELLUM, NOVA SPECIES.
This species has been obtained only as Auloplegma, without
Pseudoscula.

Shape and Size.

As indicated by the specific name this species is flat, extended,
frondose and fan-shaped with a short peduncle. The sponge does
not seem to grow to any large size. The largest specimens measure
40 mm. in height, 50 mm. in width ; and the plain fan which they
form has a thickness of 4-6 mm. The peduncle is circular cylin-
drical 4 mm. high, and in the central thinnest portion 8 mm. thick,

Color.

Alive in spirits and dry of nearly the same colour, always dirty

g'^ey.

Surface.

The villi are disposed in a somewhat regular manner, so as to
form straight lines, which radiate towards the margin from the top
of the peduncle. Otherwise this species represents Aulena villosa
very closely in the structure of its surface.

Structure,

The internal structure is closely allied to that of the foregoing
species, the skeleton indicates however, a tendency to form main
radiating fibres in this way, that at certain intervals, portions of
the nniform network of threads are slightly thickened (Plate
XXXV., fig. 25.) From joint to joint such fibres are thickened,
which lie in a radiating line, and so a main fibre is indicated.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 319

This fibre retains however, the crooked coarse of the fibres by
the thickening of which it has been formed and never contains
foreign bodies.

Geographical Distribution.

East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson (Von Lendenfeld,
Ramsay) ; Broughton Island (Ramsay).

Bathymetrical Distribution.

From 0-50 meters in Port Jackson, in shallow water at Broughton
Island.

The shallow water specimens from Broughton Island are the
largest, and present the most regular fan-like shape.

66. SPECIES.

AULENA NIGRA, NOVA SPECIES.

Only Aulophlegma forms without Oscula have been obtained,

Shape and Size.

This sponge is Chaliniform in as much as it presents the shape
of a much curved circular cylinder about 8 mm. in diameter.
Generally several cylinders of this kind grow out from an irregu-
larly lobed basal mass. They rarely coalesce for a short distance.
Every one however, retaining its individuality. The cylinders
grow to a length of 50 mm. In the largest specimen there were
five cylinders extending in the same direction, the largest of which
mea.su red 8x50 mm.

Surface.

The villi are shorter and more rigid than in either of the fore-
going species, about 1 mm. high, 1 mm. thick and 1-5 mm. apart
from one another.

Color.

The sponge is in spirits intensely black, as the specific name
implies. In the interior it has a dark brownish grey color. The
black pigment is found in the surface only.

320 a monograph op the australian sponges,

Structure.

Main radiating fibres are still more developed than in the fore-
going species. They have been formed appai'ently by local
thickenings of the originally uniform network, bat they are nearly
straight, broken and abruptly bent only hei^e and there, about
twice as thick as the other fibres, which are similar to those of
Aulena villosa (Plate XXXV., fig. 26.) These main fibres contain
no foreign bodies. They are very rai'e, about 0 6 mm. apart from
one another. They are not found in the villi.

Geographical Distribution.

East Coast of Australia, Port Denison, Queensland (Ramsay.)

Bathmetrical Distribution.
Shallow water, to 20 metres.

29. GENUS HALMOPSIS, (1) NOUM GENUS.

Auleninse with secundary diaphragm lamellae in the vestibule
space, which consist like Aulena of a reticulate sponge structure.
The terminations of the fibres project, as in that genus beyond the
surface of the sponge forming villi. The skeleton consists of
radiating main fibres, w^hich are straight and completely filled with
foreign bodies and tangental, connecting fibres, which have a
diameter one-tenth that of the main fibres.

These fibres are clear and contain no foreign bodies.

This genus is intermediate between Aulena and Halme. Similar
to the first in the high development of its vestibule cavity and
similar to the second in the formation of the skeleton.

67. SPECIES.
HALMOPSIS AUSTRALIS, NOVA SPECIES.
Only Auloplegmaforms have been observed.

Shape and Size.
This sponge resembles Aulena villosa in outer appearance pretty
closely. The usual shape is that of a flattened sphere. The sponge
(1) Halmopsis= deceptively like Halme.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 321

attains a height of 30 and a horizontal diameter of 60 mm. A
vertical section appears oval, a horizontal one circular. As stated
above no specimens have been seen by me with a Pseudosculum,
all are Auloplegmaforra.

Color.

Alive, in spirits and dry this sponge is gray. In the dry state
of a lighter hue than otherwise. In the intei'ior the color is a
little darker than on the surface.

Surface.

The surface is very similar to that of Aulena Villosa. The villi
are scattered and not disposed in lines. They are long and slender
and very close together, attaining a height of 2-3 mm., and a
diameter of 0 8-1-2 mm. They are on an average 1 mm., apart.

Structure.

The peculiarities of the internal structvire have been referred to
above in the diagnosis of the genus. The skeleton is very similar
to that of Halme and evidently our sponge in this respect forms a
connecting species between Aulena nigra and the Halme species.

The structure of the sponge body, the development of diaphragm-
membranes in the vestibule, etc., on the other hand closely resemble
those structures in Aulena. The soft part and the histological
structure likewise resemble Aulena very closely.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson (Von Lendenfeld).

Bathymetrical Distribution.
20-40 metres.

322 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

EXPLANATION OF PLATES,

Plate XXVI.

Fig. 1. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Bulbous Form with small
pores from Port Jackson. Drawn from life. Natural size.

Fig. 2. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Form with finger-shaped
processes, with larger polygonal pores from Port Stephens. Drawn
from a spirit specimen. Natural size.

Fig. 3. — Halme simplex. R. v. L. Brown specimen with wide lacunje
from Torres Straits. Drawn from a spirit specimen. Natural size.

Plate XXVII.

Fig. 4. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Transverse section through
the specimen represented in fig. 1, the bulbous variety. Drawn
from a thick section. Natural size.

Fig. 5. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Transverse section through a
specimen of the finger shaped variety, represented in fig. 2. Drawn
from a thick section. Natural size.

Fig. 6. — Halme simplex. R. v. L. Transverse section through the specimen
represented in fig. 3. Drawn from a thick section. Natural size.

Fig. 7. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Transverse section through
one of the finger shaped processes of the specimen represented in
fig. 2. Alcohol alum-carmine specimen. Taken from one of a
series of sections. Magnified 50:1. (0). Portion of the outer
surface of the sponge. (/). Portion of an internal lamella. (P).
Pores of the inhalent canal system. (T). Large foreign bodies,
sand granules, forming a dermal armor on the exposed outer
surface. (/). Small foreign bodies, mostly sand granules forming
a dermal layer on the surface of the internal lamellas. (s). Sub-
dermal cavities of the inhalent canal system, {e). Inhalent canals,
(a). Exhalent canals. (/7). Radial, knobby main fibres, which are
filled with large sand granules similar to those in the external
cortex. {V). Tangental, solid and slender connecting fibres which
are free from foreign bodies. {O). Ciliated Chambers.

Plate XXVIII.

Fig. 8. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Portion of the skeleton in the
interior of the sponge (the skeletons of the ditferently shaped

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 323

varieties are not different from one another.) Specimen macerated
in fresh water. Magnified 35:1. iH). Radial main fibres with
large sand granules in dense masses in the centre. {V). Hyaline
tangental connecting fibres free from foreign bodies.

Fig. 9. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Surface view of a pore in the
outer surface of the' external lamellae with sieve membrane at the
commencement of an inhalent canal. Osmic acid-alcohol specimen.
Magnified 700:1.

Fig. 10. — An Oscillaria which is generally found in abundance in the outer
surface of the external lamella of Halme species. Drawn after life
from a teased portion of the sponge. Magnified 2,000:1.

Fig. 11. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Portion of a longitudinal
section, showing the ciliated chambers in the dividing membrane.
Alcohol-alum carmine specimen. Magnified 8.50:1. {E). Inhalent
canals. (A). Exhalent canal. (P). Chamber pores (inhalent).
(0). Chamber osculum (exhalent aperture in the chamber wall).
(F). A very fine connecting fibre cut through. {S). Stellate tissue
cells. (G). Ciliated chambers.

Plate XXIX.

Fig. 12. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Longitudinal section through
portion of the finger shaped variety represented in fig. I . Combined
picture. Magnified 35:1. (0). An osculum. (P). Pores to the
inhalent canals.

Fig. 13. — Halme Nidus Vesparum. R. v. L. Axial section through a
ciliated chamber. Osmic-acid specimen teased out. Combined
picture. Magnified 2,000:1. (£"). Inhalent canal. {A). Exhalent
canal. (P). Inhalent chamber pores. (0). Exhalent chamber
pores. (S). Stellate tissue cells. {d). Flat epithel cells of the
canals.

Plate XXX.

Fig. 14. — Aulena villosa. R. v. L. A specimen with radial villi and
spherical in shape seen from above from a depth of 30 meters
Drawn after life. Natural size.
Fig. 15. — Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Side view of a specimen with ascending
villi of oval shape from a depth of 40 meters. Drawn from life.
Natural size.
Fig. 16. — Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Surface view of the outer horny
membrane covering one of the large sand granules in the skeleton,
from a specimen macerated in fresh water. Magnified 1,000:1.

324 A MONOGRAPH OP TIIR AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

Fig, 17._Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Margin of a particularly large sand
grain of the skeleton from a specimen macerated in fresh water.
Magnified 400:1. {H). Horny fibre. (M). Horny membrane.
[A). Axial canal of the horny fibre.

Fig. 18.— Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Transverse section through a horny
fibre just below the point of growth. Osmic-acid alum oarmin
specimen. Magnified 1,000:1. (^). Axial canal. (/?). Stratified
horny substance. [S). Coating of spongoblasts. {B). Tissue
coating. Transverse section through the longitudinal, spindle-
shaped tissue cells. (B'). A tissue thread consisting of spindle
shaped tissue cells which attaches itself to the tissue coating of
the horny fibre

Plate XXXI.
Fig. 19.— Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Section through the outer portion of

the sponge. Alcohol-alum-carmin specimen. Drawn from a thick

section. Magnified 10:1. {L). Lacunose tissue of the vestibule.

{S). The reticulate body of the sponge itself. (6"). Free portions

of the sponge body projecting beyond the surface — rounded

conuli.
Fig. 20. — Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Longitudinal axial section through the

specimen represented in fig. 14. Drawn from a spirit specimen

cut in two. Natural size.

Plate XXXII.
Fig. 21. — Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Radial section through the distal portion
of the sponge. Two conuli are cut through and appear extending
beyond the lacunose tissue of the vestibule. Combined picture.
Magnified 50:1.

Plate XXXIII.

Fig. 22. — Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Skeleton of the distal portion of the
sponge. Macerated in fresh water. Drawn from a thick section
made by hand. Magnified 50:1. {L). Lacunose system of the
vestibule. (S). Portions of the real sponge tissue. (6"). Free
projecting portions (conuli.)

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 325

Plate XXXIV.

Fig. 23. — Aulena villosa. R. v. L. Section through a portion of the sponge
in the interior. Osmic acid picro carniin specimen. (Cilia, coUare
and amoeboid wandering cells from teased specimens after life. )
Magnified 900:1. (L). Lacunse of the vestibule. (P). An inhalent
pore. (jS'). Sieve membrane, (s). Subdermal cavity. (E). Inhalent
canal. (-4). Exhalent canal, (p). Chamber pores, (o). Chamber
oscula. (G), Ciliated chambers. {H). Horny fibre, {a). Spongo-
blasts. (b). Amoeboid wandering cells, (c). Elongate, spindle
shaped cells of a muscular and connective naturie. {d). Ectodermal
flat epithelium, (e). Entodermal flat epithelium. (/). Sensitive
cells in the thickenings at the locality where the lamella of the
vestibule join. (T). Palpocils. (G). Ganglia cells.

Plate XXXV.

Fig. 24. — Aphrodite Nardorus. E,. v. L. Longitudinal section through
the sponge. Half the natural size drawn from a spirit specimen
cut in half. (0). Pseudoscolum. (o). Oscula. (A). Exhalent
canals. (P). Pseudogaster.

Fig. 25. — Aulena flabellum. R. v. L. Portion of the skeleton from a
specimen macerated in fresh water. 20:1. (//). Main fibres.
(F). Connecting fibres.

Fig. 26. — Aulena nigra. R. v. L. Portion of the skeleton from a specimen
macerated in fresh water. 20:1. (H.) Main fibre. (F). Con-
necting fibre.

326 ON A SPONGE DESTRUCTIVE TO OYSTER CULTURE,

ON A SPONGE DESTRUCTIVE TO OYSTER CULTURE
IN THE CLARENCE RIVER.

By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

I was lately instructed by the Commissioners of Fisheries, to
report on a sponge injurious to oyster culture in the Clarence
River. Some of the facts noticed in this report are here men-
tioned, as I think they will be of general interest.

The locality which was affected and which I was to rej)ort iipon,
I did not personally visit, and the information and specimens on
which my report was founded were derived entirely from Mr,
Woodward, the intelligent lessee of the oyster beds in question.

The whole nearly of that part of the bed of Clarence River, which
is situated in proximity to a lake, and also a portion of the lake
itself, was covered five years ago by an extensive oyster bed.

In a small portion of this area, where the river jo ns the
lake, four years ago an overgrowth made its appearance, which
smothered all the oysters and prevented the setting of the spat.
Consequently no oysters have been procured from tiiis area during
the last few years, whilst formerly the same area yielded, as I have
been informed, thousands of sacks. The lessee ascribed this to the
existence of the overgrowth mentioned above.

I have examined specimens of it, and have found that it is a
sponge belonging to a species nevv to science. The sponge grows
on the outer side of oyster shells, which in that locality form the
bottom.

The sponge consists of numei^ous flattened, finger-shaped pio-
cesses joined at the base to form a bulky mass. The color is light
brown. The size of the largest specimens seen by me is 7" x 3" x 4".

The finger-shaped processes attain a length of 4" and a diameter
of f of an inch. They terminate either with a rounded cone or
show a tendency to bifurcation near the termination.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 327

The surface of the sponge is smooth, here and there smal
apertures with a circular circumference and a diameter of 0-1 inch
occur. These are slightly i-aised above the general surface of the
sponge, and more numerous towax'ds the tips of the finger-shaped
processes than in other parts.

The base of the sponge adheres very rigidly to the oyster shell.

The microscopic investigation reveals a skeleton, consisting of a
network of exceedingly slender, anastomosing threads, consisting
of dense masses of silicious spicules.

The spicules are simple, rod-shaped, slightly bent and pointed
abruptly at each end, the outer apparently smooth surface is
pervaded by numerous pores closed externally by a sieve with
extremely fine perforations.

These holes lead into extensive lacunose sub-dermal cavities
from whence canals originate, which extend in a centripetal
direction, and which continually ramify, supplying small ciliated
chambers situated in the interior. From these other canals
originate, which unite to form wide oscular tubes.

It appears that five years ago this sponge did not occur in the
locality, that afterwards the sponges made their appearance and
killed the oysters thereon, and covered that area with a dense
growth of sponges, standing so close to one another, that there
was no room for the oysters between them.

The most interesting fact however, is that now since all the
oysters have died out, the sponge is likewise disappearing, and
great patches of the bottom in that locality are already clean.

It appears from the above that the sponge described, which I
have named Ghalimda Cooeii, grows on the shells of living oysters,
but disappears after the oysters are dead, and furthei', that the
sponge exerts some direct influence on the oysters, which is so
detriraentary to the latter that they die.

There is certainly no direct connection between the oyster
animal and the sponge whatever, as the sponge only adheres to the
outer surface of the shell.

328 ON A SPONGE DESTRUCTIVE TO OYSTER CULTURE,

That tlie sponge does not draw its nourishment, as a parasite
would, from the oyster animal, can also be demonstrated by the
fact, that the sponge grows on other submerged bodies besides the
oyster shell.

The sponge can therefoi-e on no account have a direct etfect on
the old oysters.

The sponge might, however, perhaps have a detrimentary effect
in an indirect manner.

Both the sponge and the oyster live on microscopic particles of
a digestable nature.

The sponge overgrowing the oyster will therefore intercept and
retain a great portion of that food, the whole of which would, were
the sponge not present, be available for the oyster. The sponge
takes the food away from the oyster and thrives at the expense of
the latter.

In this way the sponge will have a bad effect on adult oysters,
but in no other. It appears clear, however, that the sponge will,
where it is dominant, prevent the setting of the spat, as the spat
cannot set on the sponge itself and the sponge takes up the whole
of the area. I think that these conclusions will satisfactorily
explain the facts observed.

The sponge settled on the oyster bed and spread there rapidly
taking up all the space. The spat could not set. The old oysters
died for want of nourishment and finally no live oysters remained
in the locality.

The fact that the sponges are now again disappearing shows that
they depend to a certain extent, probably, on the oysters.

Around the oysters always a superabundance of microscopic
animals congregate, which feed on the excrements of the oysters,
and it is probable that the sponges lived to a great extent on them.

Some species of sponges are found only in water with strong
currents, and it seems not improbable that that is also the
case with our Chalinula Coxii. In the locality where the sponges
have taken possession of the oyster bed the channel is narrower
and shallower than it is in other parts, and consequently the
currents in that part must be stronger than elsewhere.

BY R, VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 329

Remedy.

In the oyster beds along the shores of the Mediterranean,
sponges of various kinds, especially species of the genus of
Euspongia, sometimes smother the oysters in a similar manner as
has been observed in the Clarence.

In Trieste the oysters are grown on submerged trees, on which
the spat readily sets and which are taken from the water and
divested of their marine fruit as required.

It sometimes occurs that sponges grow on these oyster- trees.
The effective remedy against these sponges is to take the tree
from the water during rain.

The fresh water kills all the sponges in a few hours during
which period the oysters are of course not at all affected by being
out of the sea. The tree is, after several hours, placed in the sea
water again and the sponges rot and fall off. In our case such a
remedy can of course not be employed.

The only suggestion which seems possible is to lead fresh water
through pipes to the infected locality, and in this way gradually
kill all the sponges.

330 NOTE ON THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN AUSTRALIA.

NOTE ON THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN AUSTRALIA.
By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

In the proceedings of the Linnean Society of N.S.W., Vol. X.,
Part I., I have given a description of the valleys around Mount
Kosciusco, and have stated as the result of my examination of
those parts, that — (L) The plateau in the central part of the
Australian Alps, was glaciated not so very long ago, and since, that
part of Australia had obtained its present aspect, down to a height
of 5,800,and (2.) No traces of pre-historic glaciers have been observed
by me in the Kosciusco Group of Mountains below the height
given above.

Recently I have seen some photograj)hs of glacier polished
rocks, which being siluro-devonian, and not granitic as those
observed by me on Mount Kosciusco, have retained the strise or
sciatches made by the hard stones imbedded in the bottom of the
ice stream which once moved over them, very well.

These rocks are situated in the Mount Lofty Group of Moun-
tains near Adelaide, and while their appearance furnishes an
additional proof to my statement, that Australia had been subject
to glaciation ; it shows at the same time that near the southern
coast the glaciers must have descended much further than round
Mount Kosciusco, as the height of the lofty mountains barely
exceeds 2,000 feet.

It appears doubtful, however, whether the strife referred to are
isochrone with the glacial traces I discovered on Mount Kosciusco.

JOTTINGS FROM THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
OF SYDNEY UNIVERSITY.

By William A. Haswell, M.A., B.Sc, F.L.S.
Lecturer on Zoology and Comparative Anatomy, ifec.

4. An Australian Species of Bonellia.

About a year ago Dr. R. von Lendenfelcl and myself discovered
on the shores of Neutral Bay, Port Jackson, several specimens of a
species of Bonellia. Instead of inhabiting, like its European
congener, narrow fissures in rocks, from which the soft-bodied
animal can only be extracted entire by the exercise of extreme
care, these species were found under small stones just about the
limit of low water. I had on numerous occasions previously gone
over the very same ground on the out look for various invertebrates
without ever having seen a trace of this remarkable creature ; and
Dr. Lendenfeld informs me that he has very frequently visited the
same spot since, and has hunted carefully for the Bonellia, but has
never found any. A few weeks ago, however, on revisiting the
spot I found several specimens apparently under the very same
stones.

On a careful comparison of the specimens with a specimen of
Bonellia vividis from Naples in the type collection of the University,
and with the description and figures of Lucaze-Duthiers (1), I can
find nothing in the external appearance — the colour, form of the
body, shape and size of the bifurcated tentacle — to distinguish
the Australian species from the European one, and the same
result follows an examination of most of the internal organs :
the alimentary canal, branched appendages and the nervous

(1) " Recherches sur la Bonellie," Ann. Sc. Nat., 1858.

332 BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY OP SYDNEY UNIVERSITY,

system coincide exactly. In the reproductive oi'gans there are
certain differences ; but as none of my specimens had the ovaries
ripe it will be necessary to obtain further material before coming
to a decision on this point.

5. " Aquatic Respiration " in Fresh Water Turtles.

Simon H. Gage (1) announced in 1883, that he had observed
the Soft-Shelled Turtle of the United States (^Aspidonectes
spinifer), to be in the habit, when lying at the bottom of a tank,
of taking water into the pharynx and expelling it again at
regular intervals. The very same process takes place in the
common Australian Long-Necked Fresh-Water Turtle (Chelodina
longicoUis) which has recently been figured and re-described by
McCoy. (2) At more or less regular intervals the floor of the
mouth is depressed, exactly, as remarked by Gage, by the same
movement as that observed in the Frog in breathing air ; the loose
walls of the pharynx swell out, and after a short interval the
hyoid bone and the floor of the buccal chamber are raised again.
A careful observation showed that these movements are accom-
panied by the alternate inhalation and exhalation of a considerable
volume of water as evidenced by the movements of floating
particles, and the question at once arises — Is this a form of
auxiliary respiration by means of which the blood of the reptile is
aerated during its prolonged immersions in pursuit of food 1 In
the case of the American species Gage answers this question in
the atfirmative, and bases his conclusion mainly on the presence,
as observed by Agassiz, of a series of papillae on the walls of the
pharynx, and on the relatively small lung-capacity of the species.

Neither of these conditions hold good in the case of the
Australian species. The pharynx is lined by a perfectly smooth
mucous membrane which is not in any high degree vascular, and
is clothed with a fairly thick stratified epithelium : while the lungs

(1) " Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of
Science," August, 1883. The communication is quoted in full by W. K.
Parker. ("Mammalian Descent," pp. 56-58.)

(2) " Prodromus of the Zoology of Victoria."

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC, F.L.S. 333

are of enormous capacity, lining the whole of the dorsal aspect of
the body-cavity, from the root of the neck to the root of the tail.
That the phenomena described partake of the nature of a process
of auxiliary respii-ation, seems, then, extremely improbable. An
animal of such very moderate vital activity as a Chelonian, and
with such a reservoir for oxygen as it possesses in its lungs, could
only require such a special auxiliary respiratory process, were its
periods of immersion extremely prolonged. All Chelonians
breathe with great slowness and will bear deprivation of oxygen
for a very long time without injury. I am thei'efore induced to
regard this inhalation and exhalation of water as having no
functional importance, but rather to be of the nature of slight
spasmodic movements produced probably by the rhythmical action
of the respii'atory mechanism.

334 ON THE SUPPOSED GLACIAL EPOCH IN AUSTRALIA,

ON THE SUPPOSED GLACIAL EPOCH IN AUSTRALIA.

By Captain F. W. Hutton, F.G.S.,
Hon. Mem. Lin. Soc, of N. S. Wales.

Several geologists have imagined that the glacial epoch, which
overspread Europe and N. America in the pleistocene period, had
its counterpart at the same time in the Southern Hemisphere.
This northern glacial epoch is supposed, with great probability, to
have been due in large part to the high eccentricity of the earth's
orbit which occurred from 80,000 to 200,000 years ago ; since
which time the eccentricity has been diminishing. Reasons how-
ever have been repeatedly given by New Zealand Geologists for
dissenting from the idea that the Southern Hemisphere has suffered
a glacial epoch, and in my last papers on the subject, I pointed out
that high eccentricity would not produce a severe antarctic climate,
owing to the small quantity of land in this hemisphere which
is not already covered with snow ; but that high eccentricity
might produce a pluvial or diluvial epoch, (1) These reasons
I need not recapitulate ; but quite recently the new hypothesis
has been broached that the Southern Hemisphere has had a
small glacial epoch of its own some 2,000 or 3,000 years ago.
No attempt has been made to account for this remarkable episode.
It cannot have been due to great geographical changes in the
Antarctic OcSan, for that is disproved by the sliort time that has
since elapsed, and by the number of endemic species, and even
genera, of plants found in the Antarctic Islands. Neither can it
have been due to any astronomical or cosmical cause, because then
it would have affected the Northern Hemisphei*e as well. As
this hypothesis has been started by such a distinguished zoologist

(1) N. Z. Journal of Science, Vol. II.. p. 266, and Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc,
Vol. 41, p. 213.

BY CAPTAIN F. W. BUTTON, F.G.S., &C. 335

and mountaineer as Dr. von Lendenfeld, whose words must carry
weight, it is necessary that both the observations on which it is
founded and the inferences drawn from them shoukl be carefully
examined ; for, if it really occurred, it must have been one of the
most incomprehensible episodes in thehj^tory of the earth. It will,
however, take very strong evidence to establish it.

Evidence for the Southern Glacial Epoch.

1. During a recent exploration of the central part of the
Australian Alps, Dr. von Lendenfeld discovered traces of ancient
glaciers, and, on the strength of this, he asserts " that Australia
also has passed through a glacial period." (1) This discovery is
highly interesting, and I do not wish to deny the former existence
of these glaciers ; on the contrary I think them highly probable,
but we must bear in mind that the only evidence for them at
present is the occurrence of roches montonnees and smoothed
surfaces of decomjwsing granite, at a level of 5800 feet and
upwards : it is expressly stated that no moraines have as yet been
found. But although I do not wish to deny the former existence
of these glaciers, it is necessary to point out that it by no means
follows that they were caused by a glacial epoeh ; because they
might equally well have been due to greater elevation combined
with greater atmospheric moisture, and no evidence is given to
show that elevation has not occurred.

2. The only other Australian evidence for a glacial epoch
admitted by Dr. von Lendenfeld is the occurrence of granite
erratics on the beach, near Adelaide, which were discovered, I
believe, by Prof. R. Tate, and which Dr. von Lendenfeld says
were probably " deposited on the beach by icebergs stranded there,
which may have drifted to the south coast of Australia from the
South Pole at the time it was cooler in the Southern Hemisphere
then at present."

This is real evidence for a glacial epoch for, if true, it
necessitates a colder climate, which the mountain glaciers do not.

(1) Proc. Lin. Soc. of New South Wales, Vol, X., p. 44.

\.

336 ON THE SUPPOSED GLACIAL EPOCH IN AUSTRALIA,

Let US examine it. The granite composing these erratics has not
Leen described, and I am not aware that any attempt has been
made to trace their origin. Dr. von Lendenfeld suggests the
South Pole, but I am afraid it will take a more arduous journey
than the ascent of Mount Townsend to verify the existence of
granite there. All the land that has been examined at present in
that direction is volcanic ; and if ice-borne erratics had travelled
from the antarctic continent to S. Australia we should expect to
find them also in a,bundance in Tasmania, New Zealand, and the
Antarctic Islands, and that some would be volcanic rocks, which is
not the case. We must always distrust an attempt to explain an
isolated phenomenon V)y means of a wide-spread cause. If these
erratics had been derived from Tasmania or New Zealand, we
should expect that most of them would be gneiss or schist, or
sandstone; while granite would be rare. Large granite blocks,
brought down by ice, are found in preservation Inlet in New
Zealand, but this granite is a remarkable one, and a fragment of it
could probably be recognised. From Australia itself the erratics
could not have come if they are ice-home, because Australia could
not have been sufficiently glaciated to furnish icebergs.

But are these erratics so huge that we are necessarily shut up to
the conclusion that they are ice-borne? I believe they are
described as "small," and consequently they may perhaps have
been conveyed to their present position by floating seaweed or by
means of ascidians : or possibly they may have been ballast of a
ship. I merely throw out these suggestions, for as I have not
examined the locality I cannot judge of the evidence ; but the ice-
berg theory is such a very improbable explanation of the occurrence
of erratics in the latitude of Jeryis Bay, or the North Cape of New
Zealand, that we must hesitate before accejjting it as true.

3. In another and earlier paper on the same subject Dr. von
Lendenfeld says "Von Haast has furnished a map of the glaciers
of the cold period [of New Zealand] which shews that several of
the ice streams at that period extended down to the sea. I had
occasion to observe the characteristic scratches on the rocks in the

BY CAPTAIN F. AV. HUTTON, F.G.S., &C. 337

Sounds on the West Coast close to the water's edge which prove
the correctness of Von Haast's views." (1) But Dr. von Haast's
map only shows that the glaciers of the period would have extended
into the sea provided the sea was then at its present position ; and
J have several times pointed out that there is no evidence at all in
favour of the idea that the glaciers reached the sea, but that on the
contrary the land at that time must have stood at a much higher
level than now. Consequently old moraines at present on the
shore line do not at all prove that the time of the greatest extension
of our glaciers was a cold period. The same remarks apply to Dr.
von Lendenfeld's own obsei-vations on ice scratches (2).

4. At the Meeting of the Linnean Society of N. S. Wales held
on the 27th of last May, Mr. Wilkinson exhibited a collection of
recent shells obtained from an estuarine deposit near Newcastle in
which was a specimen of Siphonalia maxima at present only found
in Bas.s' Strait, and Dr. Cox considered that this sub-fossil tended
to confirm the hyi)othesis that a colder climate prevailed in N. S.
Wales at some not very remote period. Now noscitur a sociis is
a very useful adage in palaeontology, but unfortunately in this case
a list of all the shells found in the deposit has not yet been published.
If S. maxima is associated with other Tasmanian species most of
which do not live now so far north as Newcastle, then this will be
by far the most important evidence of a southern glacial epoch ever
advanced. But if, on the contrary, it is associated with N. S.
Wales shells, as appears to be the case ; then this new evidence
will shew that in Tasmania it is a survival of a species once more
widely spread, and will prove that Tasmania has not undergone a
glacial epoch since aS^. maxiyna lived on its shores. I have not seen
S. maxima but it appears to be the same as Fusus subrejlexus
Sowerby, in Darwin's Geological Observations in S. America ; a
species which is also found in the Pareora System in New Zealand,
and which I believe to be, at best, only a variety of S. dilatata of
North New Zealand, Austi-alia, and Japan. Certainly it by no
means gives the idea of a cold loving form.

(1) Pro. Lin. Soc. of N. S. Wales, Vol. IV., p. 806. \ '

(2) As ice scratches are very rare in the Sound it is a pity that Dr. von
Lendenfeld has not given ns the precise locality where he found them.

338 ON THE SUPPOSED GLACIAL EPOCH IN AUSTRALIA,

This is all the evidence of a glacial epoch in A^ustralia, hut before
passing on to the next part of my subject there is one other point
I must notice. Dr. von Lendenfeld has not correctly understood
the argument against a southern glacial epoch derived from the
fauna and flora of New Zealand ; this however, is my own fault,
for on referring to my paper, I find that I have not been suffi-
ciently explicit on this head. He says, " Hutton is not inclined
to believe that the glacial period in New Zealand was so severe as
is generally believed, in consequence of the great abundance of
animal life at the time. I must say that I do not see this at all"
(1. c, p. 51.) But it is not on the great abundance of life at the
time that I rely, but on the subtropical character of that life in the
north, and especially on the local occurrence of warmth loving plants
and animals in the south. For example I may note the occurrence
of Areca sapida on Banks' Peninsula ; of Paryphanta Ilochstetteri in
Nelson and Picton ; of Ranella leucostoma and Cassis pyrum in
Martin's Bay ; and of Triton Spengleri, Scalaria Zelehori, Goohia
sulcata, and others at Stewart Island. These ai-e outliers, which
have been isolated by a gradually cooling climate ; the cooling
being perhaps due to the shifting of winter in the Southern
Hemisphere from perihelion into aphelion.

It appears therefore that while no atteuipt has been made to
explain the difficulties which must be explained befoi'e we can
believe that a glacial epoch has occurred in the Southern Hemi-
sphere, the evidence bi-ought forward in its favour is, to say the
least, very defective.

Date of the Glacier Epoch.

In New Zealand there are, as is well-known, ice-marks dating
from the present day to some former period when the glaciers were
at their greatest extent, and for many years New Zealand geolo-
gists have been accustomed to call this latter time the glacier epoch
of New Zealand in order to distinguish it from a glacial epoch,
which term implies a considerable reduction of temperature. The
term glacier epoch does not imply any hyjjothesis as to the cause
of the glaciers ; but all New Zealand geologists, whatever views

BY CAPTAIN P. W. HUTTON, F.G.S., &C. 339

tliey may hold as to the cause, are of opinion that the glacier epoch
was long anterior to the glacial epoch of Europe and N. America. (1)
Dr. von. Lendenfeld, however, has come to the remarkable
conclusion that the glacier epoch in New Zealand " has not been
more remote than two or three thousand years. (2) He bases this
conclusion on observations he has made on the deltas at the mouths
of the streams that run into the Sounds on the West Coast of
Otago. " Scarcely," he says, " do we find a small delta sent up
between the rocks at the mouths of the terminal rivers. This,
together with the fact that the rivers bring down a great amount of
rock and sand, shows that the Sounds cannot have existed long,
for otherwise they would necessarily have been filled up more or
less by the material which is continually being deposited at the
bottom of their still waters." Unfortunately, Dr. von Lendenfeld
does not give us any information as to which of the Sounds he has
examined, so that it is impossible to test his statement in any
particular case. I have myself only examined the heads of the
following Sounds — Milford, Bligh, Bradshaw, and Preservation —
so that my observations are not very extended, but so far as they
go, they are at variance with those of Dr. von Lendenfeld. All
these Sounds are shallow near their heads and afford good anchorage.
Also, with the exception of Preservation, which is rocky, all have
alluvial flats running for some distance up the valley at the end.
In Milford the Cleddan Valley is not large, but.that of the Arthur
has considerable mud-flats and fluviatile deposits. The same is the
case in the vallies at the heads of Bradshaw and Bligh Sounds, up
which I went for some distance in 1874 prospecting for gold.
Indeed I think that the fluviatile deposits are very considerable
when we consider that none of the so-called " rivers " are more
than ten or fifteen miles in length and often much less. These
little streams are not to be compared to the Ehone where it runs
into Lake Geneva, nor even to a^ small stream running from
mountains exposed to gi-eat vicissitudes of climate ; for the

(1) See N. Z. Journal of Science, Vol. II., p. 266, and Ann. Mag. of Nat.
Hist.,ser. 5, Vol. 15, p. 97.)

(2) Pro. Lin. Soc. of N. S. Wales, Vol. IX., p. 808.

340 ON THE SUPPOSED GLACIAL EPOCH IN AUSTRALIA,

climate in the Sounds, although moist, is remarkably equable all
through the year; and, with theexception of Milford, the sidesof the
Sounds and the ranges between them, are covered with dense vege-
tation, On the eastern side of the mountains, where the rivers are
longei-, the process of filling up has gone on much more rapidly, and
has reached a pointfarinadvanceoftheri vers in Switzerland, although
the latter are much larger. The rate of filling in of a lake or Sound
does not depend so much on the height of the mountains surrounding
it, as on the size of the catchment basin which it drains. The islands
in the sounds are not 7noutonnees, and although some of the
smaller ones are rounded, they show no sign of lee and strike
sides. The preci{)ices on either side of the sounds are also, in
general, quite rough, and I only noticed two localities (both
previously observed by Dr. Hector) where there was any
appearance of polishing. One was in Milford Sound on the south
side of the entrance to the " Narrows," the other near Deas Cove
in Thompson Sound (1) I saw neither grooves nor striae; but
Dr. Hector noticed them in Thompson Sound and in the Cleddan
Valley. (2) All this is very difierent from any glaciated district
in Scotland, Wales, or Ireland, where nearly every rock tells the
same tale ; and, judging from published accounts, it is very
diflferent from the Fiords of Norway, the rocks of which are much
the same as those of the West Coast Sounds of New Zealand.
Yet that these sounds have at one time been occupied by ice is
proved by the huge granite boulders lying on the sandstones and
niudstones at Kisbee Bay in Preservation Inlet. But I need not
reproduce the evidence in favour of the very ancient date of the
great glacier epoch of New Zealand, (3) I will only say that it
seems to me to be of much greater weight than the attempt of
Dr. von Lendenfeld to show that detritus cannot have been poured
into the West Coast Sounds for a longer period than two or three
thousand years ; for he does not know the original depth of the
sounds nor the amount of debris that is annually brought down.

(1) Geology of Otago, Dunedin, 1875, p. 67.

(2) Geological Exploration of the West Coast, pp. 458 and 461.

(.3) See N. Z. Journal of Science, Vol. II., p. 262, and Ann. and Mag.
of Nat. Hist., Series 5, Vol. XV., p. 93.

BY CAPTAIN F. W. IIUTTON, F.G.S., &C. 341

Ten yeai's ago I brought forward some reasons for thinking that
a second, but smaller, glacier epoch occurred after the first had
passed away. These reasons, however, were based entirely on
some phenomena exhited by the river channels in Otago, which
seemed to imply a second elevation ; (1) for of course in the
South Island of New Zealand every upheaval must cause the
glaciers to advance and subsidence must make them retreat. In
my report just quoted I said " That all our lakes are not filled up
is probably owing to the second advance of the glaciers which
partially scooped them out again." But the evidence for this
statement is very slight, and I have not been able to add to it
during the last ten years.

If now I should be asked to what then do you attribute the
ancient glaciers of the Australian Alps 1 I should answer, It is
more pi'obable that Mount Kosciusco once stood some three
thousand feet higher than at present, when Tasmania was joined
to Australia, and Central Australia was, perhaps, a vast lake ;
than that the temperature of the surrounding ocean should liave
been reduced ten degrees without any apparent cause, which is the
only alternative.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

J. Brazier, C.M.Z.S., &c., exhibited specimens of the shells,
dried ink-bags, and pigment of both sexes of Sepia plangon, Gray,
from Port Jackson, also similar preparations of Sepia Capensis,
from Bondi. He also exhibited mounted specimens of the valves
and mantles of Chiton spiniger Sowb., from Port Denison, and of
Chiton petholatus, from Port Jackson.

Mr. Trebeck exhibited specimens of fungi from Fiji, all belonging
to the family of Polyporus; and a specimen of hard subcrystalline
Tertiary limestone, from Eucla, West Australia, containing a fossil
Pecten.

(1) Geology of Otago, pp. 84, 85, 88. and 94.

342 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Masters exhibited a fine collection of the magnificent Orni-
thojitera Brookeana, from Borneo.

Mr. Fletcher exhibited examples of the young of Pseudophryne
A ustralis, and mentioned some points of interest in regard to their
development. The ova are laid iinder stones, after rain, on the
margins of ponds. In about three weeks the embryos have reached
the condition of fully foi-med tadpoles, which can sustain a pro-
longed postponement of their hatching. Specimens developed from
ova collected more than three months ago were shown, in which
the embryos were seen still coiled up in their gelatinous envelopes.
When placed in water, a number of these tadpoles emerged within
the space of an hour ; a fact which explains their sudden appear-
ance in swarms after heavy rain in places which had been previously
quite dry. No traces of external gills were detected. A fuller
account is in coui-se of preparation.

Mr, A. Sidney Olliff" exhibited the ColeojJtera belonging to the
groups Clavicornia and lihynchophora, collected by Mr. Edward
Whymper during his ascent of Chimborazo, Pichincha, and other
mountains in Ecuador. The species were mostly small and dull
coloured, but were of great interest on account of their having been
obtained at elevations varying from 1,400 to 16,000 feet. They
will be fully described in the Natural History Appendix to Mr.
Whympei*'s forthcoming work.

Mr. E. P. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., Curator of the Australian Museum,
exhibited (1) a very large specimen of a sea urchin, Tripneustes
angulosus, from the New South Wales Coast. (2) An Albino
Tui or " Parson-bird " from New Zealand Prosthemadera Novm-
Zelandim, and (3), an Albino Ground Parrot, Psephofus hcema-
lonotns, which latter bird had been pi-esented to the Museum by
Mr. McCooey of Dubbo. This bird was obtained near Warren.

Mr. Ramsay also read a letter from Sir Richard Owen respecting
a new species of Thylacoleo, the bones of which had been recently
discovered in the Wellington Caves.

Mr. Macleay exhibited four immature specimens of Holostoma
alatum, the Distoma alatum of Rudolphi, from a very young
puppy. He said that this is believed to be the only Trematode

NOTES AND EXHIBITS 343

Worm which infests Dogs, but is much more common in the wild
species, as the Wolf and Fox, than in the domestic animal. Its
History is unknown.

Mr. Ratte read the following note explanatory of Plate 9, figs.
3 to 6, the references to which were accidentally omitted in his
Paper on Worthenia. Figs. 3 and 4 Ptychomjjhalus, sp. nat. size.
Fig. 5 the same enlarged 2^ times to show sculpture. This Fossil
although possessing a round aperture is not a Turbo, and resembles
in general appearance Ptychomphalus Frenoyanus, de Kon., from
the Carboniferous Limestone of Vise Belgium ; but the sculpture
is not the same, the oblique striations visible in the jSgured speci-
mens not shov,'ing in Ptych. Frenoyanus. Fig. 6, magnified or
enlai'ged three times is another species of Ptychomphalus, with a
well-marked sinual band. This specimen is not in the good state
of preservation observable in the others. It is found in the lime-
stone of Yass, and from the same locality as the supposed Wor-
thenia.

Dr. Cox made some observations on the migrations of the
Maray, the fish known as tbe "Australian Pilchard" and " Picton
Bloater," Glupea sagax, and called attention to the importance
of ascertaining the time and place of spawning.

23

WEDNESDAY, 26th AUGUST, 1885.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M.A., F.G.S., in the chair.

Mr, Severn and Mr. Knight were introduced as visitors.

MEMBER ELECTED.

The Rev. John Dixon, St. James' Parsonage, Wickham.

DONATIONS.

" Feuille des jeunes Naturalistes." Nos. 176, 177. June and
July, 1884. From the Editor.

" Annales de la Societe Geologiqae de Belgique." Tome X.,
1882-3. From the Society.

*' The Australasian Journal of Pharmacy." Vol. I., No. 1.
From the Pharmaceutical Society of Australasia.

" Midland Medical Miscellany." Vol. IV., No. 42. From the
Editor.

" Journal of the New York Microscopical Society." Vol. I.,
No. 5. From the Society.

"Science." Vol. V., Nos. 121-125. From the Editor.

" Descriptive Notes on Papuan Plants." VI. By Baron Ferd.
von Mueller, K.C.M.G. From the author.

"Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society," London. Series
II., Vol. v., Part 3. June, 1885. From the Society.

" Abstract of the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania."
July 14th, 1885. From the Society.

DONATIONS. 345

"The Australasian Scientific Magazine." Vol. I., No. 1. From
the Editor.

"Victorian Naturalist," Vol. TI., No. 4, August, 1885. From
the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

" List of the specimens of Cetacea in the Zoological Depart-
ment of the British Museum." Fi'om the Trustees.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger," VIII. Jahrg., No. 198. From the
Editor.

" The Provincial Medical Journal," Vol. IV., No. 43. July,
1885. From the Editor.

" Description of a supposed new species of Flycatcher of the
genus Rhipidura, from New Guinea." By E. P. Ramsay,
F.Pv.S.E., &c. From the author.

*' Sechster Jahresbericht des Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereins zu
Osnabruck." 1883 and 1884. From the Society.

" Les Annelides Chetopodes du Golfe de Naples." Claparede.
" Etudes sur les Infusoires et les Rhizopodes." Claparede.
" Recherches sur la Structure des Annelides Sedentaires."
Claparede. " Glanures Zootomiques parmi les Annelides."
Claparede. From the Hon, William Macleay, F.L.S.

" Transactions and Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria." Vol. XXI. 1884. From the Society.

346 PLANTS IN USE BY THE NATIVES OF NEW GUINEA,
PAPERS READ.

LIST OF PLANTS IN USE BY THE NATIVES OF THE
MACLAY-COAST, NEW GUINEA.

By N. de Miklouho-Maclay.

With some Botanical remarks by Baron Ferd. von Mueller,

Revising my notes of the Ethnology of the Maclay-Coast, I
made a list of plants, the parts of which (roots, stem, bark, leaves,
flowers or fruits) ai-e used by the natives as articles of food, as
stimulants, or other purposes.

Some of these plants are cultivated by the natives in their
plantations, some are gathered at certain times in the forests. The
planting of the food plants is so ai-ranged, that the natives are
provided the whole year round with some special kind of food.
The season of ripening of the principal food plants (taro, yams,
sweet potatoes, &c.), is however not the same in different villages,
but varies according to their different position, on the coast or in
the hills. The time of collecting the products of cultivated plants
mentioned in this paper refers to the coast villages, principally
near to my two residences (Garagassi in 1871-72 and Bongu in
1876-77), near the Port Constantine.

On my return from New Guinea in 1873, I was fortunate
enough to see in Java Dr. R. H. C. C. Scheffer, Director of the
Botanical Garden of Buitenzorg, and of meeting Dr. O. Beccari
in Singapoi-e in 1878. I did not neglect during these interviews
to ascertain, with their help, the systematic names of some
plants, about which I was doubtful, and in which cases I had
brought with me from New Guinea the fruits, or leaves and
flowers.

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 347

A shoi't visit to Melbourne in the beginning of this year, gave me
the opportunity of consulting Baron von Mueller about some
other plants from the Maclay-Coast, of which T had the fruits
preserved in alcohol. Having neglected to obtain in New Guinea
in addition to these fruits, the leaves and flowers of the same
plant, the very incomplete collection would have been quite value-
less, if it had fallen into less competent hands than those of
the Baron von Mueller, and I feel very glad of being enabled to
express my gratitude for his kind help. So, only through the
kind assistance of these friends, I am able to give here the
following list of useful plants, which are of great value in the
household of the natives of the Maclay-Coast.

I. Plants used as Articles op Food by the Natives in

ORDER OF their DOMESTIC IMPORTANCE.

A. Plants cidtivated in plantations, or round the huts in villages.

1. Cocos nucifera (Mtmki) (1) bearing fruits the whole year
round, is, without doubt, of the greatest value as food for the
natives. The pulp of the nut is eaten in all stages of maturity.
The scraped pulp of old nuts is used in cooking on account of its
oily quality, but oilmaking and oil were not known to the natives
before my arrival in 1871. There are two varieties of the cocoanut
palm : the ordinary, with the large green nuts, and the other
with the shorter stem and much smaller, orange coloured nuts. (2)

2. Galadium esculentum (Bau), 3 or 4 var., some of them of
large size, is next to the cocoanut, the principal article of food of
the natives, from March to August, being usually planted in
October.

(1) The native names of plants in the dialect of Bongu (of the Maclay-
Coast) are added in parenthesis.

(2) The larger nuts of the ordinary green kind contains in the average
1200-1600 grammes of water, the smaller, orange coloured ones, in the average
not more than 150 grammes. About the preparation of food by tlie Papuans
andotlier details, vide my paper: EthnologisheBemerkungeniiber die Papuas
der Maclay-Kiiste, publ. in Natuurkundig, Tijdschrift of Batavia, 1875. A
review of which is given by Dr. J. C. Galton in "Nature '"of June 1st
and 8th, 1875.

348 PLANTS IN USE BY THE NATIVES OP NEW GUINEA,

3. Diascorea iSjyec {Ayan), many varieties, is eaten from August
to January.

4. I^wmaea Batatas {Degargol). The sweet potato is, next to
to the Taro and Yams, the most important article of food,
and is ripe usually in September and October.

5. Musa jjaradisiaca (^Moga), 8 or 9 var., are cultivated in some
villages on a large scale, in others in limited quantities. Besides
the cultivated varieties, which have been obtained by exchange
between the villages, there is to be found in the foxiest a wild
Banana (Mtisa Maclayi. F. v. M.), compared to the cultivated
varieties, with a tall stem (nearly twice as tall), with narrow
stiff leaves and small (not edible) fruits full of seeds. (1)

6. Saccharum officinarum (Den). Besides the many cultivated
varieties there is also a wild Sugarcane, with a thin darkish stems
growing in marshy localities.

7. Saccharum {edule ffsskl ?) (Aus.) (2) The panicle of this
cane, which ripens in January and February, is eaten, stewed,
or baked on coals, and is very much liked.

8. Psophocarjyus spec. (Mogar). (3)

9. Artocarpus iiicisa and A. integrifolia known under the general
name : Boli. There are 5 var. at least. The bread-fruit trees are

(1) There is also another kind of wiW Banana (il/wsa Ca^ospevma F. v. M.),
with fruits containing very large irregularly shaped seeds (about 10 mm.
long and 11 mm. in diameter), which, when ripe, are of a brilliant black
colour, are greatly used by natives as ornaments. About the tM'o new
species (M. Madayi and M. Calo^perma), vide Appendix, p. 355 and 356.

(2) Having neglected to obtain in New Guinea a specimen of "Aus,"I
could not ascertain the specific name of this graminese, but remembering
that one of my servants, a Javanese, assured me many times that he knew
the same plant in Java, used to call it something like " Grubuk," I wrote
to the Director of the Botanical Garden of Buitenzorg and received a few
days ago the following answer : . . . . Une plante appel^e " gruhnk'" or
" (jrouhoiik," n'est pas connue chez les malais et les soundanais. Cependant
une Graminee savoir : le Sacharu7n edule Hasskrl. est appee " froubouk," ou
"tehou troubonk" par les Malais, j'ose supposer que le nom de " troubouk"
est le vrai nom de les plante en litigo. (Extract from the answer from Dr.
W. Burck, Direct, adj. of the Bot. (iard- of Buitenzorg.)

(3) Vide Appendix, p. 358.

BY N, DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 349

planted in or near the villages, but are to be found also not unfre-
quently in the forest.

10. Ganarium commune (Kengar). Trees mostly planted, but
growing also in the forests ; are to be found very numerous in some
villages, but are scarce near others. The nuts are gathered in
May, June and July,

11. Sagus spec. (Buam). On account of the scarcity of this
palm, the sago is regarded as a luxury, is seen only at feasts and is
not an article of daily diet,

12. 13, 14, 15. Different kinds of Curcuhitaceo', as : Holl,
Arwan, and others.

B. Plants of the forest sought for on account of their fruit, used
as food.

16. Pangium edule (Orlan) (1), The fruits are hung in great
baskets upon trees in the forest ; the pulp and kernels produce by
fermentation an acid, very strongly, rather unpleasantly (to my
olfactory nerves) smelling sauce, which mixed with food is con-
sidered by the natives as a great delicacy,

17. Bassia cocco {Nate) (2). the green fruit of which not larger
than a middle sized apple have an agreeable sweet taste.

18. Bassia Maclayana, (Ferd. v. Mueller, n. sp.) (3), {Dim).

19. Pandanus spec. The fruits of different Pandani are eaten,
raw or stewed.

20. Barringtonia spec. {Togali).

21. Mangifera indica? (Oei). The fruit small and rather acid,
but quite edible ; they taste better (less acid) when stewed.

22. Citrus spec. ? The fruits have a very thick skin and are so
bitter that they are scarcely eatable."

(1) Fic?e Appendix, p. 356.

(2) Vide Appendix, p. 357.

(3) Vide Appendix, p. 357.

350 PLANTS IN USE BY THE NATIVES OP NEW GUINEA,

There are at the Maclay-Coast some other fruits which are
gathered in the forest, whose systematical names however remain
for the present unknown to me. I mention here the following
names of Papuan fruits, which I frequently saw eaten and
which I have tasted more than once myself without finding them
either nasty or nice. They are : —

23. Aival

24. Bugger.

25. Kabul

26. Aid.

II. Cultivated plants used as stimulants and medicine.

27. Arpxa catechu is cultivated in eveiy village and the kernel
of the nut is used at the difterent stages of maturity, but young
nuts are preferred.

28. Pipe7' betel. The fruits are used in preference to the leaves.
The natives of the jMaclay-Coast have no remembrance, if the use
of this (Areca-betel-lime) chewing combination has been introduced
amongst them, by whom and when. Generally, the men are very
fond of this stimulant, but very few use the same to excess.

29. Piper meihysticum (Keu). The first mention of the use of
the Piper methysticum by the natives of New Guinea, is, as far as
I know, to be found in my letter to the Imp. Geogr. Society of St.
Petersburg (1). When I showed in 1873, some dried leaves and
fruits of the keu of the Maclay-Coast to Dr. Scheflfer, he told me,
that none had ever been brought by ti'avellers returning from
New Guinea and not having specimens of P. methysticum in the
collection of the Botanical Museum of the garden of Buitenzorg,
nor sufficiently complete descriptions of the plant, he was not able
to tell me positively ifthe^ew of New Guinea (2) is identical with it,
the kava (P. methysticum) plant of the South Sea Islands.

(1) " Iswestia " of the Imp. Russian Geographical Society for 1874, Vol.
X., p. 83.

(2) Keu is the name of P. methysticum in the dialect of Bongu, but in the
other dialect of the same coast it is called : keuva, Use, kial, ayo, sei/u, etc.

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 351

I wi'ote therefore to a friend of mine in Samoa and received from
thence some leaves and fruits of the P. methysticum, which enabled
Dr. Scheffer to make sure that the heu is the true P. niethysticum
of the Islands of the Pacific. (1)

All natives of the Maclay-Coast do notuse theA;e?*,in some villages
this stimulant and its effect are known, but the use of it has not
been adopted ; in some others, it is not known at all. These facts
makes me think, that the custom of drinking the keic has been
introduced on the JNlaclay-Coast not very long ago (the natives
however have no tradition about its introduction) and is still in
the pi-ogressing stage.

The keu slirub is cultivated in the villages and on plantations,
but I never heard that it grows wild at the Maclay-Coast.

I may add here an interesting fact, told me by Rev. W. G. Lawes
in answer to my enquiries concerning the use of P. methysticum on
the South-Coast of New Guinea, Mr. Lawes informed me, that as
far his experience goes, the use of this stimulant is completely
unknown to the natives of the South-Coast of New Guinea and the
Louisiade Archipelago, but, that the plant (P. me^Ays^icttm) is growing
wild in many localities in the forest. The Rev. W. G. Lawes
has been often told about it by missionary teachers, who being
Polynesians (from Tonga, Samoa, and Tahiti), knew the kava plant
well.

30. Zingiber affichialis (^Li) is used as a dainty-dish after meals,
mixed with ashes, the native substitute of salt (2) and as an onim
(■medicine).

31. Cinnamomum sintoc (^Afuiu). The bark is esteemed by
the natives as an onim.

(1) Annales du Jardin botanique de Buitenzorg. I., p. 51.

(2) Besides the sea-water (^ to § of fresh water) which the natives use to
cook their food, they have another substitute for salt — the ashes of logs of
trees which after floating in the sea for months are cast up at high tides and
whicli are collected, dried and burnt by the natives — the ashes procured in
this way, has a saltish taste. This kind of salt is principally used by the
hill natives who find it more convenient to carry logs than bamboos tilled
with salt water.

352 PLANTS IN USE BY THE NATIVES OF NEW GUINEA,

32. Nicotiana tahacum (Kas). The old natives of this Coast
remember, that thej were told by their fathers, that in their youth
they (the fathers) were not acquainted with the use of tobacco and
that the seeds and the knowledge of smoking have been introduced
and have spread from village to village from the west. There are
some villages in the mountains of the Maclay-Coast where the
custom of smoking has not yet been introduced (1). The dried
tobacco leaves are, before smoking, dried on a fire, after which
they are torn, crushed and rolled in a leaf (2), also previously
dried on fire, in the shape of a big cigarette and smoked. In
some hill villages, the natives haves large bamboo pipes (3), which
are filled with tobacco smoke from a cigarette and smoked by many
people in turn, every one trying to inhale and to swallow as much
of the cold smoke as he can. The use of the pipe has not been
adopted by the coast natives, wlio prefer to smoke cigarettes.

III. Plants useful in different ways in the household of

THE NATIVES.

I will mention here some other plants, which are of importance
in the every day life of the native of this part of new Guinea.

33. Tauwi (an Urticaceee). The mal (4) of the men is manufac-
tured just like the tapa of the Polynesians out of the bark of young
Artocarpus trees, or the bark of the Tauwi.

(1) The use of tobacco in the Louisiade Archipelago has also been intro-
duced quite lately. I visited in ISSO sojne hill villages on the Island Basilaki
(or Moresbj' Island) where the natives where completely unacquainted with
tobacco and smoking.

(2) The natives of the Maclay-Coast use the leaves of several plants as
covering for their cigarettes, I am sorry however to say, that I have neglected
to ascertain which are these special plants.

(3) Just like on the South-Coast of New Guinea, where the use of tobacco,
according to the authority of Rev. Lavves, has been introduced from the
West and only lately has spread gradually to the S. East extremity of New
Guinea and now the kuku (the native name for tobacco on the S.E. Coast) is
in the greatest demand.

(4) The mal is a piece of tapa of more than three yards in length and
about a I of a yard wide. It is worn thus : one end is held fast near the
navel, the mal passed between the legs and then carried several times round
the waist and the end finally tied on the back.

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 353

34. Abroma Augusta (Mal-Sel) (1). The maloi women, consist-
ing of a fringe more or less long, is made out of the fibres of the
banana stem, or rf the fibres of the Mal-Sel.

35. Gnetum spec. (Tavan-Sel). The ^'rms (bags) are woven on t
of strings twisted of fibres of Tavan-Sel.

36. Vitis spec. (JVug-Sel). Very strong strings are twisted and
sometimes plaited out of the Nu,g-Sel and of

37. Boehmeria nivea (^Den-Sel) and cf

38. Rol-Sel, which is the stem of a plant belonging to the Legu-
minosoe.

39. Calamus spec. (^Bu-Sel). For anchor ropes and difi'erent
riggings in native canoes (which are sometimes two masted), as
well as for binding the parts of the framework of huts and fences
the Bu-Sel is generally in use.

As material for baskets and mats, leaves of cocoanut, sago and
other palms are used.

The sail of canoes is a large square mat made of Pandanus leaves.

Spears, bows, ends of arrows, etc , etc., are made out of the outer
portion of the stem of the cocoanut and caryota palms.

40. Canarium gutur {n. spec.) (Guiur). (2) The c?amar-like resin,
which trickles out from the trees of this species of Canarium is
called by the natives also Gutur and is used by them principally
as a binding material in the manufacture ot different implements.

41. Calophyllum Inophyllum (Subanj). The boiled nuts are
used as a kind of wash for the crisped hair of the natives after
which operation (the subary-nut having made the wash oily) the
kumu (3) sticks better to the hair. For the same purpose — hot,
scraped pulp of old cocoa nut is also in use.

(1) <S'e^ — is the genei-al name for string or rope.

(2) Vide Appendix, p. 357.

(3) The kmnu or the black dye for body and hair of the natives of the
Maclay-Coast is (after the analysis of Mr. R. Everwyn of the Mining
Department in Batavia) Pyrolusite with a little oxide of iron.

354: plants in use by the natives of new guinea,

Plants lately (since 1871) introduced at Maclay-Coast.

Since my first arrival on this Coast in September 1871, some
plants have been introduced by me at difiereiit times. I had the
satisfaction of seeing in a small plantation round my house near
Bongu, some of the introduced plants growing abundantly, as :
different kinds of pumpkins, watermelon, Indian corn, Carica papaya
and many other plants, the seeds of which I brought with me (in
1871 from Tahiti and Java in 1876) (1). The natives were
delighted to get the seeds and watched with the greatest interest
the growth of the new plants. The papaya, the water melon and
the Indian corn became the favourites and were soon introduced in
the plantations and the villages on the coast.

Numbers of natives from distant villages in the mountains came
to pay me visits with the object of obtaining seeds from me.

On my last visits of the Maclay-Coast, in March 1883, I brought
more seeds and seedlings (from Macassar and Amboina). There
were inter alia, seed of the Mangustin (Garcinia), of the Durian, of
the Orange, Lemon, Coffee, etc., etc. I distributed the seeds amongst
the natives of the villages, Bongu, Bogati, Bili-Bili and of some
hill villages, to whom I specially recommended the coffee seeds.

My next visit to the Maclay-Coast will show me the result of
this last importation of useful plants, which, if it succeeds as the
experiment of 1876, will prove to be a complete success.

Before I close, I will only add, that having the intention that
this paper should be chiefly an addition to our knowledge of the
Ethnology of New Guinea, I have given here only a list of the
more important plants in the household of the natives of the
coast, omitting some which are of qviite secondaiy considerations to
the natives, and which they use only as food in quite exceptional
cases, when they have nothing better, as for instance, a species of
Cycas, (from the stem of which they make a kind of sago) of a
wild arrowroot, a species of Nephelium, etc , etc., etc. Some
others (as for instance the Kapok-tree), I have not mentioned
because the tree has no value (at present) to the natives.

(1)1 have somewhere a list of these seeds amongst my papers, but can not
at this moment place my hand upon it.

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 355

APPENDIX.

EDIBLE FRUITS FROM THE MACLAY-COAST,
NEW GUINEA.

By Baron Ferd. von Mueller, K.C.M.G., M.D., F.R.S., etc.

From notes and drawings furnished by my distinguished friend,
I am able to add to his account of Mnsa Maclayi. It belongs to
the series of species, which in M. uranosco2)os has its longest known
representative. The flower stalk is upright or but slightly curved ;
bracts are red-bi'ownish ; the flowers occur about eight together ;
the lobes of the calyx measui^e neai^ly an inch in length, the fruits
are about three inches long, but hardly more than one inch broad,
faintly angular ; the seeds are irregular in shape and often com-
pressed. This Mttsa occurs on swamps and along streams.

This seems an apt opportunity for referring to an allied species :
Musa Seemanni of Fiji, from whence it was first recorded by Dr.
Seemann as M. uranosco-pos (Fl. Vit., 290.) Specimens kindly
transmitted by the hon. J. B. Thurston, C.M.G., enable me to
ofi"er the following notes on the Fiji plant. Flower stalk erect, about
four feet long and to tour inches thick ; the bracts imbricate, the
longest measuring fully one foot ; total fruit spike about 1^ feetlong,
forming fascicles moderately crowded on all sides ; fruits ellipsoid-
ovate, remarkably blunt, 3 to 4 inches long, when aged blackish-
brown outside and shining, with three of the longitudinal angles
more prominent ; pulp very succulent, of not unpleasant taste^
from brown-yellow to vitellinous in color ; pericarp thinly coria-
ceous ; ovules numerous, turbinate-discoid, reaching in the ripe
fruit not to beyond one lines length, outside blackish-grey. This
species difiers from Musa Hillii already in having the fruit-fascicles

356 EDIBLE FRUITS FROM THE MACLAY-COAST, NEW GUINEA,

far less crowded, and the berries mucli less angular, also not
remarkably attenuated at the summit, M. uranoscopos, M. HilUi
and M. Maclayi should be cultivated side by side, so that their
respective characteristics could be carefully studied from the living
plants, I am informed, that the last mentioned produces suckers.

M'usa calosperiiia is as yet only temporarily named, as merely
seeds have been obtained, so that even the generic position needs
yet to be confirmed. These seeds came from Moresby Island ; and
the seeds are also used as ornament by the natives on the eastern
and southern coast of New Guinea ; but the fruits are not eatable.
An only seed seen by me, had been taken from an ornamental
string, and thus had lost its albumen and embryo ; it is about half
an inch long and broad ; the testa is of bony hardness and com-
paratively thick ; at one extremity it opens into an ample cavity
which communicates by a seemingly natural narrow perforation,
with the still wider and not very high central cavity, into the
middle of which the cross-septum somewhat protrudes ; on the
other side of the central cavity a smaller sepai-ate hollow exist,
which is connected with a slight external excavation. It has been
deemed advisable to give at once some account of the remarkable
structure of this seed, in order that speedy attention may be drawn
to the desirability of tracing this perhaps not uncommon Papuan
plant to its primeval habitation, for obtaining thus full material
for specific elucidation also.

{Leaves andjiowers not obtained).

" Orlan^^ Pangium edule, (Reinwardt). "This fruit is suspended
in bags within forest localities till it becomes sour." Professor
Miquel avers, that this tree is wide spread over the Sunda Islands
and Moluccas, probably however through cultivation only ; it is
there known to the autochthones under various names, all however
dissimilar to the Papuan one ; the inner pulps separates in very
angular masses, each of which invests a seed ; the cotyledons are
more or less flexuous. Fruit not dissimilar to that of Hydnocarpus
heterophyllus.

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 357

" Dim" Bassia Madaycma. (F. v. Mueller). This has been
designated in honor of the tinder. A globular five-celled fruit of large
size (measuring about five inches in diameter), which presents all
the carpologic characteristics of the genus Bassia among Sapotese ;
the pulijj portion is copious and adheres firmly to the endocarpal
plates; the seeds measure about 1| inch in length and fully one
in width ; the testa is very thick, of long firmness and outside
shiningly brown-black ; the hilum is remarkably broad. When
the flowers shall have been obtained, we will be able to judge,
whether the tree yielding this very conspicuous fruit is perhaps to
be counted with the species of the genus Lucuma, as now defined,
no generic fruit-difTerences existing between Lucuma and Bassia ;
but the latter should change its name for Illi^jpe, as already 1771
given by Koenig (Linne, mantissa altei'a 563) inasmuch as Allioni
five years earlier fully established a genus Bassia among Salsolacefe.

" A^ate." Bassia Cocco (Schefier in Annales du jardin botanique
de Buitenzorg, L 34.) The fruit is irregularly traversed by several
longitudinal furrows. Dr. Scheff'er (in 1876) also saw fruits only ;
hence the generic position of this tree remains still somewhat
unsettled.

" Gutur." Canarium, the species from the mere fruits unde-
finable. " A tree exuding a resin not unlike Damar." Only
unripe fruits seen, which in that state are prominently triangular,
hardly half as broad as long and somewhat pointed ; the fniit-
calyx spreads horizontally, and is only short-lobed. The seeds are
eatable, (1) and are probably of the same almond-like taste as those
of Canarium commune. Concerning the latter already Gaertner
(de fructibus II., 99) observed, that even in very old fruits the
seeds do not become rancid, although they are so very oily. He
also noticed (as far back as 1791), that fruits of Canarium not
rarely ripen three seeds, as remarked also recently by Engler (De
Candolle, monogr. phanerog. IV., 101). Since now already more

(1) I am not sure if the seeds are eaten or not. M.M.

358 EDIBLE FRUITS FROM THE MACLAY-COAST, NEW GUINEA.

than half a hundred species of Canarium have become clearly
defined merely from India (continental and insular), we may
expect a considerable access still to the few recorded Papuan
congeners.

" Mogar" The pod of a leguminous plant resembling that of
Psophocarpus tetragonolobus, and also that of Cassia alata. "A
climber ; the seeds edible." Fruit very prominently quadran-
gular; valves thinly coriaceous, pulp as well as septa none; seeds
small in proportion to the width of the fruit, placed longitu-
dinally, not provided with any elongated funicle, but supported
by a short narrow strophiole ; areole on each side wanting, albu-
men seemingly none ; cotyledons (in hardly ripe seeds, such as
come under notice here) straight.

CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF
AUSTRALIA.

By George Masters.

Part L

CINCINDELIDJE AND CAEABID^.

The large additions made to the Entomological Fauna of
Australia since the publication of my last Catalogue of Coleoptera
in 1872, and which was never completed, induces me to believe that
the I'evised and complete Catalogue, of which I now lay before the
Society the first part, will be found of great service to the Student
of Entomology here, and not without interest to naturalists
generally.

Family. CICINDELID^.

Sub-Family. MEGACEPHALIDES.

MEGACEPHALA. Latreille.

1 CYLINDRICA Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863.

I., p. 11
Darling River, N. S. Wales; Peak Downs, &c., Queensland.

2 HowiTTi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 31.

Cooper's Creek ; Central Australia.

TETRACHA. Hope.

3 AusTRALASiiE Hope. Proc. Ent. Soc, 1841, p. 45; Ann. Nat.

Hist., 1842, IX., p. 425 ; White Stokes Voy. App. t,
1, f. 1 ; Thoms. Mon., p. 49.
North Australia.
24

360 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

4 AusTRALis Chaud. Cat. Coll. Cic, 1865, p. 63.

WaterJiousii Castelu. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 32.
Central Australia ; Port Wakefield ; S. Austi^alia.

5 BASALis Macleay. Proc. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866, I.,

p. 58.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

6 BosTOCKi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 36.

l!^ickol Bay ; W. Australia.

7 CRUCiGERA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 10.
Port Denison, Gayndah, Duringa, &x.; Queensland.

8 HoPEi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 37.

Nickol Bay ; W. Australia.

9 HUMERALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 9.
Port Denison, Cleveland Bay; Queensland.

10 PULCHRA Brown. Trans. Ent. Soc Lond., 1869, p. 352.

Champion Bay ; W. Australia.

11 scAPULARis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 10.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

Sub-Family. CICINDELIDES.

CICINDELA. Linn(5

12 ALBICANS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1854, I., p. 117.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

13 ciRCUMCiNCTA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 34.
N. S. Wales, and Queensland (widely distributed.)

14 iGNEicoLLis H. W. Bates. Ent. Mon. Mag., 1874,X., p. 262.

Western Australia.

15 iNTERRUPTA Fab. Syst. El., I., p. 243.

seniicincta Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1854, I., p. 117.
Moreton Bay; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 361

16 lOSCELis Eope. Proc. Ent. Soc, 1841, p. 45 ; Ann. Nat.

Hist., 1842, IX., p. 425.
Port Essington ; N. Australia.

17 Macleayi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIII., p. 37.

Western Australia.

18 Mastersi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIII., p. 33.

N. S. Wales (widely distributed.)

19 NIGRINA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

I, p. 107.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

20 PLATYCERA Gestro. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1879, XIV., p. 553.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

21 Rafflesia Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1852, I., p. 13.

Montraveli Blancli. Voy. Pole. Sud., 1853, IV., p. 8, t. 1, f. 6.
Raffles Bay.

22 TETRAGRAMMA Boisd. Voy. Astrol., II., p. 6.

Australia.

23 WiLCOxi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 34.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales. Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

24 YPSiLON Dej. Spec, I., p. 126 ; Boisd. Voy. Astrol., II.,

p. 8 ; Macleay. Dej. Cat., 3, ed., p. 5.
Sea Coast of N. S. Wales. Victoria ?

DISTYPSIDERA. Westwood,

25 FLAViCANs Cbaud. Bull. Mosc, 1854, I., p. 125.

cursitans Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 12.
Northern parts of N. S. Wales, and Southern parts of

Queensland.

26 Gruti Pascoe. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1862, p. 462.

Lizard Island ; N. E. Coast.

27 interrupta Dokh. Rev. Mens. Ent., 1883, I., p. 7.

Cape York ; N. Australia,

28 MASTERS! Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 80.
Wide Bay, Gayndah ; Queensland.

362 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

29 Plustchevskii Dokh. Eev. Mens. Ent., 1883, I., p. 7.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

30 Strangei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 33.

Australia.

31 UNDULATA Westw. Mag. of Zoo!., I., p. 252, t. 7, f. 1.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales, and Southern parts of
Queensland.

32 VOLITANS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 11.
Port Denison, Cleveland Bay ; Queensland.

Family. CARABID^.

Sub-Family. CARABIDES.

CALOSOMA. Weber.

33 AusTRALE Hope. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1845, IV., p. 104.

Cooper's Creek, Gayndah, Duringa, &c ; Queensland.

34 GRANDIPENNB Casteln. Ti-ans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII,,

p. 99.
Victoria.

35 SCHAYERI Erich. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, T., p. 122.

Curtisii Hope. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1845, IV., p. 104;

Wilson. Proc Ent. Soc, 1863, p. 182.
N. S. Wales, Queensland, Victoria, S. Australia, Tasmania.

Sub-Family. PAMBORIDES.

PAMBORUS. Latreille.

36 ALTERNANS Latr. Enc Meth., VTIL, p. 678 ; Dej. Spec, II.,

p. 19, Lacord. Gen. Atl., t, 2, f. 5.
elongahis Gory, Mon., t. 116, f. 2 ; Chaud. Rev. et Mag.

de Zool., 1869.
N. S. Wales, and Southern parts of Queensland.

37 Brisbanensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 96.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 363

Moreton Bay, Wide Bay, Port Curtis, Gayndah ; Queens-
land.

38 GuERiNii Gory. Mag. Zool., 1830, t. 26; Mon. t. 167, f. 2;

Boisd, Yoy. Astro)., II., p. 27.
Northern parts of N. S. Wales, and Southern parts of
Queensland.

39 Macleayi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 96.

Clarence Eiver ; N. S. Wales.

40 MORBiLLOSus Boisd. Voy. Astrol., 1835, II., p. 27 ; Guer.

Mon. t. 167, f. 1.
Cunninghami Casteln. Etud. ent., 1835, p, 156 ; Chaud.

Rev. et Mag. de Zool, January, 1869.
N. S. Wales.

41 Pradieri Chaud. Rev. et Mag. de Zool., January, 1869.

North Australia.

42 viRiDi-AUREUs Macloay. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1883, VIII., p. 409.
Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

43 viRiDis Gory. Mon. t. 166, f. 1.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales ; Southern parts of Queens-
land.

LACORDAIllIA. Castelnau.

44 ANCHOMENOiDES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 98.
Mount Wellington ; Tasmania.

45 ANGUSTATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 98.

Blue Mountains ; N. S. Wales.

46 ARGUTOROiDES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 98.
Yankee Jim Creek ; Victoria.

47 CALATHOiDES Castelu. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria. VIII.,

p. 98.
Ouse River ; Tasmania.

48 CYCHROiDES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 97.

Clarence Rivei-, N. S. Wales ; Brisbane ; Queensland.

364 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

49 Erichsoni Casteln. Trans. Eoy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 98.

Tasmania.

50 MARGiNATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 98.

Yarra River ; Victoria.

51 PROXiMA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 98.

Yankee Jim Creek ; Victoria.

Sub-Family. ODACANTHIDES.

OPHIONEA. Eschscholtz.

52 TiiOUZETi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 100.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

CASNONIA. Latreille.

53 ALiENA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1860, I., p. 39.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

54 AMPLiPENNis Gestro. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1875, VII., p. 853.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

55 AusTRALis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1862, IV., p. 227.

Australia.

56 ClArensii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIII., p. 100.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

57 MICANS Macleay. Trans Ent. Soc N. S. Wales, 1864, T., p.

107 ; Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIII., p. 100.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

58 OBSCURA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc Victoria, VIII., p. 100.

Rockhampton, Gayndah ; Queensland.

ANASIS. Castelnau.

59 HowiTTii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIII., p. 101.

Geelong; Victoria.

EUDALIA. Castelnau.

60 LATiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. N". S. Wales, 1864, 1.,

p. 108 ; Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc Victoria, VIII., p. 101.
Port Denison, Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 365

61 Macleayi Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1871, VIII., p. 32.

Monaro ; N. S. Wales.

62 Waterhousei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIII., p.

102.
Arnheim's Land ; N. Australia.

Sub-Family. GALERITIDES.
DRYPTA. Fabricius.

63 AusTRALis Dej. Spec. I., p. 185; Macleay,Dej. Cat.,3 ed., p. 8.

N. S. Wales ; Queensland.

64 coNNECTA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1877, LIL, pt. I., p. 260.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

65 MASTERS! Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 82.
Gayndali ; Queensland.

DENDROCELLUS. Schmidt, Goebel.

66 SMARAGDiNus Cliaud. Bull. Mosc, 1861, II. , p. 545 ; Casteln.

Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 102.
Rockhampton; Queensland.

POLYSTICHUS. Bonelli.

67 AusTRALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 82.
Gayndah, Rockhampton ; Queensland.

ZUPHIUM. Latreille.

68 AusTRALE Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1862, IV., p. 312.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

69 Castelnaui Gestro. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1875, VII., p. 865.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

70 Masters! Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 103.

Rope's Creek ; N. S. Wales.

71 RoCKHAMPTONENSE Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, p. 103.

Rockampton ; Queensland.

366 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

72 Thouzeti Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 103.

Rockampton, Port Denison ; Queensland.

ZUPHIOSOMA. Castelnau.

73 FULVA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 103.

Singleton; N. S.Wales; Rockampton; Queensland.

Sub-Family. HELLUONIDES.

ENIGMA. Newman.

74 Iris Newm. Ent. Mag., III., p. 499.

N. S. Wales. Queensland.

75 Newmani Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 108.

Neighbourhood of Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

76 parvulum Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 323.
Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

77 SPLENDENS Casteln. Tans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 109.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

GIGADEMA. Thomson.

78 BoSTOCKi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 107.

Northern parts of Western Australia.

79 Damelii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II.,

p. 323.
Cape York ; North Australia.

80 GRANDE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 108.
Port Denison, Cleveland Bay, &c. ; Queenslaud.

81 intermedia Gestro. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1875, VII., p. 877.

Lachlan River ; N. S. Wales.

82 longipenne Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 162.

South Australia.

83 minutum Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 108,

Ipswich, Port Denison, &c. ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 367

84 NOCTis Newm. The Entomol, 1842.

titanum Thorns. Arc. Ent., 1859, p. 93, t. 5, f. 7-8.
Clarence River, N. S. Wales. Port Denison ; Queensland.

85 Paroense Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 107.

Paroo River ; Central Australia.

86 POLiTULUM Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 83.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

87 SULCATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,1.,

p. 108.
Thomsoni Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 108.
Port Denison, Gayndah, &c.; Queensland.

88 UNICOLOR Hope. Proc. Ent. Soc, 1842, p. 47 ; Ann. Nat

Hist., 1842, IV., p. 426.
Port Essington ; N . Australia.

HELLUOSOMA. Castelnau.

89 ATERRiMUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 323.
Cape York ; N. Australia.

90 ATRUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 108.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

91 CYANEUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 109.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales, and Southern parts of
Queensland.

92 CYANIPENNE Hope. Proc. Ent. Soc, 1842, p. 46 ; Ann. Nat.

Hist,, 1842, IX., p. 426 ; Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc,
Victoria, VIIL, p. 109.
Port Denison, Rockhampton, &c.; Queensland.

93 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 83.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

94 resplendens Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 109.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

368 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

ACROGENYS. Macleay.

95 HIRSUTA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc , N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 109.
Southern parts of Queensland.

96 LONGicoLLis Gestro. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1875, VII., p. 859.

Queensland, W. Australia. 1 ?

PSEUDOHELLUO. Castelnau.

97 WiLSONi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 105.

Brisbane ; Queensland.

HELLUO. Bonelli.

98 CARINATUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1848, I., p. 70.

Victoria.

99 COSTATUS Bon. Mem. Ac. Turin , 18L3, p. 455 ; Klug,

Jahrb., I., p. 75 ; Guer. Jc. regn. anini. Ins., t. 4, f. 8.
N. S. Wales.

HELLUODEMA. Casteln.

100 Batesi Thorns. Arch. Ent., 1857, p. 134; Casteln. Trans.

Eoy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 109.
Clarence River, IST. S. Wales ; Brisbane, Queensland.

Sub-Family. BRACHINIDES.

PHEROPSOPHUS. Solier.

101 AusTRALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII. p. 109.

Rockampton ; Queensland.

102 VERTicALis Dej. Spec, I, p. 302.

Jamisoni Macleay. Dej. Cat., 3 ed., p. 13.
Australia (widely distributed.)

Sub-Family. CALLIDIDES.

TRIGONOTHOPS. Macleay.

103 DiMiDiATA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1877, LII., pt. 1, p. 222.

South Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS.

369

104 FLAvoFAsciATA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1877, LII, pt. 1, p. 223.

South Australia.

105 LiNEATA Dej. Sp. Gen. Col., 1831, V., p. 343.

Callida lineata Dej.
Kangaroo Island ; S. Australia.
lOG LONGiPLAGA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1877, LIL, pt. 1, p. 222.
Melboixrne ; Victoria.

107 NiGRicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

I., p. 111.
Rockhampton, Port Denison, &c. ; Queensland.

108 PACIFICA Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 124.

Callida pacifica Erichs.
Tasmania.

109 PALLiBicoLLis Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1864, I., p. 110.
Rockhampton, Port Denison, Gayndah, &c. ; Queensland.

110 PLAGiATA Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 165.

Lebia plagiata Germ.
Soiith Australia.

CYMINDIS. Latreille.

111 ^NEA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II.,

p. 320.
Monaro, N. S. Wales.

112 CRASSiCEPS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 84.
Moreton Bay, Gayndah; Queensland.

113 Illawarr^ Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 320.
Illawarra ; N. S. Wales.

XANTHOPH^A. Chaudoir.

114 angusticollis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, JST. S. Wales,

1864, I., p. 112.
Cymindis angusticollis. Macleay.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

370 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

115 ANGUSTULA Chaud. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1872, XV., p. 189.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

116 Chaudoiri Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871,

11., p. 84.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

117 FERRUGiNEA Chaud. Ann. Ent Belg., 1872, XV., p. 193.

North Australia.

118 GRANDis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1848, I. p. 75,

New South Wales, and Victoria. (Widely distributed).

119 INFUSCATA Chaud. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1872, XV., p. 188.

Tasmania.

120 LINEOLATA Chaud. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1872, XV., p. 194.

North Australia.

121 LissoDERA Chaud. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1872, XV., p. 191.

S. W. Australia.

122 LONGicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

I., p. 111.
Gymindis longicollis Macleay.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

123 PARALLELA Chaud. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1872, XV., p. 192.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

124 piciPENNis Chaud. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1872, XV., p. 190.

South Australia.

125 PILOSULA Chaud. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1872, XV., p. 189.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

126 8UTURATA Newm. Entomol., 1842, p. 367.

Victoria.

127 viTTATA Dej. Sp. Gen. Col., 1831, V., p. 344, supp.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

PHLCEOCARABUS. Macleay.

128 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

11., p. 85.
Gayndah; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS.

371

DIABATICUS. H. W. Bates.

129 AusTRALis Erich. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 124; Bates,

Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 324.
Plochionus Australis Erich.
Tasmania 1

NOTOTARUS. Chaudoir.

130 Australis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1875, XLIX., pt. 2, p. 19.

W. Australia.

ANOMOTARUS. Chaudoir.

131 OLivACEUs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1875, XLIX., pt. 2, p. 48.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

Sub-Family. DEOMIIDES.

HOMOTHES. Newman.

132 ELEGANS Newm. Entomol., 1842, p. 402.

sericeus Erich. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p, 131 ; Lacord.

Gen. Col., I., p. 119.
Victoria and Tasmania.

133 EMARGiNATUs Chaud. Bull, Mosc, 1872, XLV., p. 389.

Melbovxrne ; Victoria.

134 GUTTiPER Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, IIL, p. 166.

Tasmania, S. Australia, Victoria.

135 MARGiNiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 89.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

136 MICANS Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, TIL, p. 167.

S. Australia, Victoria, N. S. Wales.

137 VELUTINUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p. 88.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

DEMETRIAS. Bonelli.

138 BRACHiNODERUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1852, I. p. 46.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

372 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

DROMIUS. Bonelli.

139 CRUDELis Newm. Entomol., p. 37.

Kangaroo Island ; S. Australia.

140 HUMERALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. "Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 88.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

141 TRIDENS Newm. Entomol., p. 38.

Kangaroo Island ; S. Australia.

Sub-Family. LEBIIDES.
PHLCEODROMIUS. Macleay.

142 PICEUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II., p. 86.

Gayndah ; Queensland.

PENTAGONICA. Schmidt-Goebel

143 viTTiPENNis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1877, LII., pt. 1, p. 217.

Australia.

PERIGONA. Castelnau.

144 BASALis Putz. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1873, IV., p. 223.

Queensland,

LACHNODERMA. Macleay.

145 ciNCTUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II.,

p. 321.
Clarence Kiver ; N. S. Wales.

EULEBIA. Macleay.

146 PLAGIATA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 87.
Lehia melanota Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1871, p. 226.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

147 PiciPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 87.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 373

SAROTHROCREPIS. Chaudoir.

148 BENiFiCA Newm. Entomol, 1842, p. 367.

Lebia hetiefica Newm.
Victoria ; S. Australia.

149 CALiDA Newm. Entomol, 1842, p. 367.

Lebia calida Newm.
Victoria,

150 civiCA Newm. Entomol, p. 31.

Lebia civica Newm.

N. S. Wales, Victoria, S. Australia, Tasmania.

151 coRTicALis Fab. Syst. El, I., p. 201.

Tasmania, Victoria.

152 DupoNTi Putz. Mem. Liege, 1846, II., p. 393.

Tasmania, S. Australia, Victoria.

153 PASCiATA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,11.,

p. 88.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

154 LUCTUOSA Newm. Entomol, 1842, p. 368.

Lebia luctuosa Newm.

Bowenfells, and Monaro; N. S. Wales. Tasmania. Victoria

155 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871

II., p. 87.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

156 pallida Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc., N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 87.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

157 POSTiCALis Guer. Voy. Coquille., p. 58, t. 1, f. 8.

Sub-Family. COPTODERIDES.
PHILOPHLtEUS. Chaudoir.

158 ANGULATUS Chand. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 219.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

159 AusTRALAsiiE Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 217.

Victoria.

374 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

160 AusTRALis Dej. Spec. II., p, 449; Guer. Voy. Coquille, t. l,f.8;

Blanch, Voy. Pole. Sud., p. 12; d' Urville Dej. Cat.,

3 ed., p. 9.
Cymindh Australis Dej.
N. S. Wales; Victoria.

161 BRUNNiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. 8. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 89.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

162 DISTINGUENDUS Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 225.

Monaro, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

163 DUBius Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, p. 90.

Gayndah ; Queenland.

164 Eucalypti Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 164.

South Australia.

165 FUSCiPENNis Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 164.

South Australia.
16G GRANDicEPS Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XIT., p. 216.
South Australia.

167 IMMACULATUS Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 17.

Victoria.

168 iNTERMEDius Chaud. Ann Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 216.

South Australia ; Victoria.

169 IRRITA Newm. Entomol., 1842, p. 370.

Lehia irrita Newm.

170 LUCULENTUS Newm. Entomol., 1842, p. 368.

Lehia luculenta Newm.
N. S. Wales. Victoria.

171 MACULATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 89.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

172 MOLLIS Newn. Entomol., 1842, p. 370; Chaud. Ann. Soc.

Ent. Belg., XXL, p. 222.
Victoria.

173 OBTUsus Chaud. Ann. Soc Ent. Belg., XII., p. 219.

N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 375

174 PLANUS Newm, Entomol., p. 33; Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent.

Belg., XII., p. 220.
Lehia plana Newm.
South Australia. Cooper's Creek ; Queensland.

175 PUBERULUS Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 218.

Victoria. Mittagong ; N. S. Wales.
17G QUADRiPENNis Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 21 <S.
Australia.

177 RECTANGULUS Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII , 222.

N. S. Wales.

178 UNICOLOR Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 220.

Gayndah ; and interior of Australia.

179 viTTATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1871,11,

p. 90.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

AGONOCHILA. Chaudoir.

180 ANOMALA Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 223.

Melbourne.

181 BiGUTTATA Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 225.

IS. S. Wales. Victoria.

182 BiNOTATA White. Voy. Ereb. Terr., 1846, p. 2 ; Blanch.

Voy. Pole. Sud., p. 12, t. 1, f. 8.
Australia.

183 coRTiCALis Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 226.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

184 CRiBRiPENNis Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 230.

Melboux-ne ; Victoria.

185 GUTTATA, Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1848, I., p. 119.

Mell)ourne ; Victoria.

186 LiTTERA V. Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 227.

Australia.

187 LUTOSA Newm. Entornol, p. 32.

Lehia lutosa Newm.

Thyreopterus sitbangidatus Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III.,

p. 166.
South Australia.

25

376 CATALOUGE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

188 MINIMA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1854, I.,

p. Ill, ; Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II., p. 88.
Sarothrocrepis minima Macleay.
Port Denison, Gayndah, &c. ; Queensland.

189 siNUOSA Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XII., p. 228.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

190 SUBFASCIATA Chaud. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., XIT., p. 228.

Adelaide ; S. Australia.

191 suBL^vis Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XIL, p. 224.

Australian Alps.

192 SUTUKALIS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 91.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

193 viTTULA Chaud. Ann. Soc Ent. Belg., XII., p. 229.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

IDIUS. Chaudoir.

194 MffiSTUS Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XIL, p. 212.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

EUCALYPTOCOLA. Macleay.

195 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 91.
Gayndah, Queensland ; Clarence River, N. S. Wales.

Sub-Family. THYREOPTERIDES.

COPTOGLOSSUS. Chaudoir.

196 sulcatulus Chaud. Ann. Ent. Belg., XIL, p. 125.

Melboiirne ; Victoria.

ECTINOCHILA. Chaudoir.

197 tessellata Chaud. Col. Nov., 1883, L, p. 21.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

CATASCOPUS. Kirby.

198 australasi;e Hope. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1842, IX., p. 426.

Port Essington : N. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 377

199 Chaudoiri Oasteln. Proc. Roy. Soc, Victoria, 1867, p. 24.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales.

200 LATicoLLis Macleay. Proc. Linn. Soc, JST. S. Wales, 1883,

VIII., p. 410.
North Australia.

201 UxVicoLOR Hope. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1842, IX., p. 426.

Australia.

SCOPODES. Erichson.

202 .ENEUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 91.

Gayndah, Queensland.

203 ANGULicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

p. 92.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

204 aterrimus Chaud. Bull, Mosc, 1872, XLV., I, p. 391.

Sydney, N. S. Wales ; S. Australia 1

205 AURATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 92.

Gayndah ; Queensland.

206 BOOPS Erichs. Weigm. Arch. 1842, I., p. 124, t. 4, f. 1 ;

Lacord. Gen. Alt., I., t. 4, f. 5.
sexpunctatus Newn. The Entomol., p. 413.
Tasmania.

207 DENTicoLLis Macleay. Trans, Ent, Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

I., p. 112.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

208 L.EVIS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871., p. 92.

Gayndah ; Queensland,

209 SERICEUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S, Wales, 187-1,

II., p. 93.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

210 siGiLLATUS Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 163.

South Australia ; Victoria,

211 Tasmanicus H. W. Bates. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 324.

Tasmania.

378 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

212 TRIPUNCTATUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1852, I., p. 64.
Australia.

Sub-Family. PSEUDOMORPHIDES.

SILPHOMORPHA. Westwood.

21-3 ALBOPICTA iSTewm. Zoolog., Append, p. 124,
Australia.

214 AMABILIS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., ]>. 112,

Port Denison, &c.; Queensland.

215 BICOLOR Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 112.

Rockhampton, Gayndah, Port Denison, &c.; Queensland.

216 BIMACULATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 113.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

217 BIPLAGIATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., ]>. 113.

Brisbane, Gayndah, &c.; Queensland.

218 Brisbanensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 114.
Northern parts of N. S. Wales and Southern parts of
Queensland.

219 Castelnaui Reiche. Col. Heft., III., 1868.

marginata Casteln. Trans, Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 112.
N, S. Wales, Victoria.

220 colymbetoides Westw. Mon., p. 403, t. 14, f. 19.

N. S. Wales. Victoria.

221 DECiPiENs Westw. Trans. Linn. Soc, 1840, p. 415, t. 28, f.

3; Mon., t. 14, f. 5.
N. S. Wales. Victoria, Queensland.

222 Denisonensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 115.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

223 DiscoiDALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 113.

Murray River ; Victoria.

224 dubia Casteln. Trans, Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 116.

N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 379

225 FALLAX Westw. Trans. Linn. Soc, 1840, p. 416. t. 28, f. 4 ;

Mon., t. 14, f. 2 ; Lacord. Gen. Atl., I., t. 5, f. 3.
orectochiloides Hope. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1845, IV., 2, p. 104.
N. S. Wales. Victoria. S. Australia.

226 GRANDis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 114.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

227 GUTTIFERA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIT., p. 114.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

228 GUTTiGERA Newm. Entomol., 1842, p. 365.

N. S. Wales ; Victoria.

229 HYDROPOROiDES Westw. Mon., p. 401, t. 14, f, 7.

Australia. (Widely distributed.)

230 L^viGATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 116,

Victoria.

231 L.EVis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 116.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

232 MACULATA Newm. Ann. Nat. Hist., IV., p. 365 ; Westw.

Mon., t. 14, f. 8.
N. S. Wales ; Victoria ; S. Australia.

233 MACULiGERA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

I., p. 113.
Port Denison; Gayndah, &c., Queensland.

234 MARGiNATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 112.

Paroo River, Queensland.

235 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 112.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

236 NiTiDULOiDES Guer. Mag. Zool., 1844, p. 140; Westw.

Mon., t, 14, f. 9.
cinctipennis Westw. olim.
N. S. Wales ; Victoria.

237 occiDENTALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 114.
Swan River ; W. Australia.

238 ovALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 116.

Pine Mountain ; Queensland.

380 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

239 PICTA Casteln. Trans. Roy, Sec, Victoria, VIII., p. 111.

Southern parts of Queensland.

240 POLITA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, p. 93.

Gayndah ; Queensland.

241 QUADRiMACULATA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1864, I., p. 113.
Port Denison ; Gayndah, »tc., Queensland.

242 QUADRisiGNATA Castelu. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p.

112.
Victoria. S. Australia*

243 RocKHAMPTONENSls Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII. , p. 114.
Rockhampton ; Queensland.

244 RUFOMARGINATA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 94.
Gayndah ; Queensland.
24-") SEMISTRIATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. , Victoria, VIII., p. 116.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

246 SPECIOSA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 26

Port Denison, Gayndah, &c.; Queensland.

247 STRIATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 115.

N. S. Wales.

248 suTURALis Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, p. 171 ; Westw. Mon.,

t. 14, f. 6 ; Lacord. Gen. Atl., I., t. 5, f. 2.
N. S. Wales. Victoria. S. Australia.

249 Tasmanica Casteln, Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 115.

Tasmania.

250 Thouzeti Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.. p. 113.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

251 viciNA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII,, p. 1 Jj.

Southern parts of Qneensland.

ADELOTOPUS. Hope.

252 AFFiNis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 119.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 381

253 ANALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S, Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 95.
Gayndali ; Queensland.

254 APHODioiDES Westw. Mon., p. 404.

Australia.

255 APiCALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, 1., p.

113.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

256 BICOLOR Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII. , p. 120.

Loddon Iliver ; Victoria.

257 BIMACULATUS Macleay. Tians. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

L, p. 113.
Port Denison, Wide Bay, Gayndah, &c.; Queensland.

258 BRUNNEUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 119?

Swan River ; W. Australia.

259 CASTANEUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p 120.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

260 CORNUTUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 118.

Arnheim's Land ; N. Australia.

261 CYLiNDRicus Cliaud. Rev. ZooL, 1862, p. 490.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

262 DYTiscoiDES Newm. The Entoniol., p. 365 ; Westw. Mon.,

t. 14, f. 2 ; Lacord. Gen. Alt., I., t. 5, f. 4.
Forinumi Hope Trans. Ent. Soc, 1845, IV,. p. 105.
South Australia.

263 BPHIPPIATUS Newm. Trans, Ent. Soc, 1856, p. 127.

Australia.

264 FASCIA.TUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p, 118.

Sydney, N. S. Wales.

265 FiLiFORMis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc.,Victoria, VIIL, p.l 20.

Victoria. S. Australia.

266 GYRiNOiDES Hope. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1834, I., p. 12, t. 1,

f, 1 ; Westw. Mon., t. 14, f. 1.
South Austialia.

.382 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

267 iiCEMORRHOiDALis Erich. Wiegm. Arch.. 1842, I., p. 126;

Westw. Men., t. 14, f. .3.
var. inquinatus Newm. The Entomol, p. 366.
Tasmania, S. Australia.

268 HYDROBioiDES West. Men. p. 406.

Australia.

269 IPSOIDES Westw. Trans. Linn. Sec, XVIII., p. 413, t. 20, f. 2.
Australia.

270 MACULiPENNis Macleay. Trans, Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 9.5.
Gayndah, Queensland.

271 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,11.,

p. 94.
Gayndah, Queensland.

272 nemosomoides Westw. Men., p. 408, t. 14, f. 4.

Australia.

273 OBSCURUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 120.

Sydney, N. S. Wales.

274 occiDENTALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 118.
Swan River; W. Australia.
27.5 Parroensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII,, p. 118.
Paroo, and Darling Rivers.

276 POLiTUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 188.

Clarence River, N. 8. Wales ; Brisbane : Queensland,

277 PUNCTATUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 118,

Clarence River, N. S. Wales.

278 RUI3IOIN0SUS Newm. Trans. Ent. Soc, 18.56, p. 128.

Australia.
379 scolytides Newm. The Entomol., 1842, p. 366.
Australia.

280 SUB-OPACUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales; 1871,

II., p. 94.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

281 viciNUS Casteln. Trans. Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 117.

Sydney ; N, S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS, 383

282 ZONATUS Casteln. Trans, Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., 119.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

Sub-Family. OZE iS IDES.

MYSTKOPOMUS. Chaudoir.

283 Chaudoiri Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 120.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales.

284 SUBCOSTATUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1848, I, p. 109; 18-54,

II., p. 290 ; Lacord. Gen. Alt., t. 5, f. 5.
N. S. Wales (widely distributed). Pine Mountain ; Queens-
land.

Sub-Family. DITOMIDES.

APOTOMUS. Illiger.
28.5 AusTRALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 121.
Melbourne, Victoria.

286 Masiersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 95.
Gayndah, Queensland.

287 NovoE HoLLANDi^ Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 121.
Rockhampton, Queensland.

Sub-Family. MORIONIDES.

HYPERION. Castelnau.

288 ScHRCETTERi ScLreib. Trans. Linn. Soc, VI., p. 201, t. 19,

f. 15-19; t. 21, f. 10; Casteln., Hist. Nat., I., p. 69,
t. 5, f. 1 ; Westw. Arc Ent., I., p. 89., t. 23, f. 4.

Campylocnemis Schrtetteri Schreib.

N. S. Wales ; Victoria ; Queensland.

MORIO. Latreille.

289 AusTRALASLE Chaud. Rev. Mag. Zool., January, 1869.

Moreton Bay, Queensland.

384 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

290 AusTRALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 122.

N. S. Wales.

291 LONGicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

11. , p, 95.
Gayndali, Queensland.

292 Nov^-HoLLANDiiE Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 122.
Brisbane, Queensland.

293 PACHYSOMUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1880, LV., p. 3.58.

North Australia.

294 PICEUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIT., p. 122.

Mount Macedon ; Victoria.

295 SETlcoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 96.
Gayndali, Queensland.

296 Victoria. Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 122.

Victoria.

MOPJODEMA. Castelnau.

297 M'CoYEi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 125.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

298 Parramattensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 125.
Sydney, Parramatta, Ropes Creek, &c., N. S. Wales.

VERADIA. Castelnau,

299 Brisbaxensis Casteln, Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 126.
Brisbane, Gayndali, &c., Queensland.

SETALIS. Castelnau.

300 NIGER Casteln, Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 126.

Clarence River, N, S, Wales ; Brisbane, Gayndali, Queens-
land.

SILTOPIA. Castelnau.

301 TRICOLOR Casteln. Trans, Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 127.

Parramatta, Clarence River, &c., N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 385

TERAPHIS. Castelnau.

302 ARGUTOROIDES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 128.
Kiama ; N. S. Wales.

303 ELONGATA Castelti. Tran.s. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 128.

Mountains of Victoria.
304. Melbournensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,
p. 128.
Dandenong Ranges ; Victoria.

CELANIDA. Castelnau.

305 MONTANA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 123.

Mountains of Victoria.

MELISODERA. Westwood.

306 piciPENNis Westw. Mag. Zool., 1835, IX., t. 132.

N. S. Wales.

SCARITTDES.

MONOCENTRUM. Chaudoir.

307 GRANDicEPS Chaucl. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., 1869, p. 146.

North Australia.

308 LONGiCEPS Chaud. Ann. Soc Ent. Belg., 1866, p. 147.

North Australia.

309 MEGACEPHALUM Westw. Arcan. Ent., I., p. 86, t. 22, f. 3 3

Hope. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1842, IX., p. 426.
Port Essington ; N. Australia.

CONOPTERUM. Chaudoir.

310 AMABILE Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 135.

Lachlan River ; N. S. Wale^s.

311 INSIGNE Chaud. Ann. Soc Ent. Belg., 1869, p. 148.

North Australia.

312 SUPERBUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 135.

Lachlan River ; N. S. Wales.

386

CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

CARENIDIUM. Chaucloir.
313 Damelii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, II.,
p. 69.
Cape York ; North Australia.
3U GAGATiNUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,
p. 136.
South Australia.

315 Kreusler.e Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc., N. S. Wales, 1869,

II , p. 70.
South Australia.

316 LACUSTRE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II.,

p 326.
Lake Albert near Wagga Wagga ; N. S. Wales.

317 SAPPHiRiNUM H. W. Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1874, XI ,

p. 99,
Australia.

318 Spaldingi Macleay. Proc Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1878,

IL, p. 214.
Port Darwin ; N. Australia.

EUTOMA. Newman.

319 BiPUNCTATUM Macloay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.Wales, 1863,

L, p. 60.
Port Denison, Wide Bay, Gayndah, <k,c.; Queensland.

320 CAViPENNE H. W. Bates. Ent. Month. Mag, 1874, XL,

p. 99.

321 CUPRIPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, JS. S. Wales, 1863,

L, p. 61.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

322 DiGGLESii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

IL, p. 67.
Brisbane, Queensland.

323 EPiscoPALE Casteln. Trans. Ptoy. Soc, Victoria, VIII. , p. 140.

Paroo River, Central Australia.

324 FILIFORME Casteln.' Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 141.

Darling River, N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 387

325 GLABERRiMUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. , N. S. Wales, 1865

I, p. 180.
New South Wales.

326 L.EVE Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 142.

Rope's Creek, N. S. Wales.

327 LoDDONENSE Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 142.
Loddon River, Victoria.

328 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 67.
Dabee, N. S. Wales.

329 Newmani Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 141.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

330 punctipenne Macleay. Proc Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1883,

VIII., p. 411.
Queensland.

331 PURPURATUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 141.
South Austi-alia.

332 splendidum Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 60.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

333 SUBRUGOSULUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, p. 180.
Australia.

334 SUBSTRIATULUM Maclcay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, p. 179.
Richmond River, N". S. Wales.

335 TiNCTiLATUM Newm. The Ent. Mag., V., p, 171 ; Westw.,

Arcan. Ent., I., p. 86, t. 22, f. 2 ; Casteln., Proc. Roy.
Soc, Victoria, 1857, p. 54.
Clarence River, N. S. Wales.

336 UNDULATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 180.

Wingelo ; N. S. Wales.

388 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

337 viOLACEUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

L, p. 138.
South Australia.

NEOCARENUM. Castelnau.

338 CYLiNDRiPENNE H. W. Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1874,

XL, p. 98.
W. Australia.

339 ELONGATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 136.
Krethsleri Casteln. Trans. Roj. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 139.
South Australia.

340 Masters: Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 68.
Mount Barker ; W. Australia.

341 retusum H. W. Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1874, XL, p. 98.

W. Australia.

342 RUGOSULUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 98.
Salt Lake, Hi;mmock Range ; S. Australia.

343 siNGULARB Castln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 139.
Swan River ; W. Australia.

CARENUM. Bonelli.

344 AFFiNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p 142.

345 AMBiGUUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,1.,

p. 177.
King George's Sound; W. Australia.

346 ANGUSTiPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N, S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 98.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

347 ANTHRACiNUM Maclcay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 135.
South Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 389

348 ATRONITENS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 137.
Gawler ; S. Australia.

349 1) Batesi Masters.

planijyenne Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1874, XI., p. 97.
West Australia,

350 BoNELLii Brulle. Hist. Nat., V., p. 63, t. 2,^f. 6 ; Westw.

Arcan. Ent., I., p. 83.
cyaneum Bonelli. Mem. Turin., 1813, p. 479.
N. S. Wales.

351 BREViFORME Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1874, XL, p. 96.

W. Aiistralia.

352 Brisbanense Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 133.
Pine Mountain, Bx'isbane, Maryborough, &c., Queensland.

353 CAMPESTRE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 186.
Lower Murrumbidgee, N. S. Wales.

354 CARBONARiUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 135.
Esperanza Bay, W. Australia.

355 Chaudoiri Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 6.3.
Australia.

356 CORACINUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

L, p. 178.
Ipswich, Queen.sland.

357 CORRUSCUM, Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. IST. S. Wales., 1863,

I., p. 141.
North Coast of Australia.

358 CYANEUM Fabr. Ent. Syst., I., p. 95 ; Lacord., Gen. Atl.,

t. 8, f. 1.
Fahricii Westw. Arcan. Ent., I., p. 85, t. 21, f. 5.
Endeavour River, Queensland.

(1) A change is necessary, planipenne having been previously applied to a
South Austi'alian species by Mr. Macleay.

390 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP ArSTRALIA,

359 CYANIPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc,, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 62.
South Australia.

360 DEVASTATOR Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 137.
Swan River, Western Australia.

361 De Visii Macleay. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1883,

VIII., p. 412.
Queensland.

362 Digglesii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

IL, p. 326.
Moreton Bay, Queensland.

363 DISTINCTUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. ] 45.
Australia.

364 DiSPAR Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, II.,

p. 66.
South Australia.

365 ebeninum Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 134.

South Australia.

366 elegans Macleay. Trans. Ent Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 144.
Victoria River.

367 FRONTALE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

p. 185.
Wallaroo ; S. Australia.

368 lANTHiNUM Macleay. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1883,

VIIL, p. 412.
Queensland. 1

369 INEDITUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, IL,

p. 65.

370 INTERMEDIUM Westw. Traus. Ent. Soc, lS49, p. 203.

Victoria.

371 INTERRUPTUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 181.
Wingelo, Dabee, &c; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 391

372 KiNGii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, II.,

p. 64.
Liverpool Plains ; N. S. Wales.

373 L.EVIGATUM Macleav. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. 8. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 134.
SchombiorffkiC-dsteln. Proc. Roy. Soc, Victoria. 1867, [). 137.
South Australia.

374 L^viPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N, S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. .59.
K. G. Sound ; W. Australia.

375 LATERALE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc , N. S. W ales, 1865, I.,

p. 183.
Australia.

376 MARGINATUM Boisd. Voy. Astrol. Col., p. -3; Westw. Arcan.

Ent, I., p. 84, t. 21, f. 1.

New South Wales.

377 MUCRONATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. >. Wales, 1866,

I., p. 55.
Gawler; S. Australia.

378 MULTIIMPRESSUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 136.
Swan River ; W. Australia.

379 MuRRUMBiDGENSE Macleay. Trans. Eut. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, I., p. 183.
Murrumbidgee ; N. S. Wales.

380 NiCKERLi Ancey. Le Nat., 1880, II., p. 221.

Australia.

381 NIGERRIMUM Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N, S Wales, 1865,

I., p. 176.
South Australia.

382 NITESCENS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, II ,

p. 61.
Salt Lake; Hummock Range ; S. Australia.
26

392 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

383 OBLONGUM Macleay. Trans, Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1863, 1.,

p. 138.
Adelaide ; South Australia.

384 OBSCURUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 18B5, I.,

p. 182.
New South Wales.

385 OCCULTUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales 1871, II.,

p. 97.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

386 Odewahxii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 137,

South Australia.

387 OPACUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 18G9, II.,

p. 63.
Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

388 ORDINATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 66.
South Australia.

389 oviPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc.,N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 98.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

390 PARVULUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873. IL,

p. 325.
Murrurundi ; N. S. Wales.

391 PERPLEXUM White. Grey's Trav., II., p. 456 ; Westw. Arc.

Ent., I., p. 84, t. 21, f. 2.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia,

392 PLANiPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

IL, p. 326.
Port Wakefield ; S. Australia.

393 POLiTULUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 98.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

394 POLiTUM Westw. Arcan. Ent., I., p. 84, t. 21, f. 3.

Tasmania ; Victoria.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 393

395 PORPHYRBUM H. W. Bates. Ent. Month. May., 1874, XI.,

p. 95.
W. Australia.

396 PROPINQUUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N, S. Wales, 1869,

TI., p. 64.
Liverpool Plains ; N. S. Wales.

397 PUNCTicoLLE Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 135.
South Australia.

398 PUNCTULATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1863, I., p. 143.
Byalla, N. S. Wales.

399 PUSiLLUM Macleay. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1883,

VIIL, p. 412.
Queensland.

400 QUADRiPUNCTATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1863, L, p. 59.
Port Denison, &c., Queensland.

401 RECTANGULARB Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1863, L, p. 139.
South Aiistralia.

402 Riverine Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

L, p. 181.
Lower Murrumbidgee, N. S. Wales.

403 RUFiPES Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, IT.,

p. 65.
Stirling Range, W. Australia.

404 SCARITIOIDES Westw. Arcan. Ent., I., p. 92.

New South Wales.

405 sciTULUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 144.
Moreton Bay, Queensland.

406 SEXPUXCTATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

IT., p. 62.
Lower Murrumbidgee, N". S. Wales.

394 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

407 SIMILE Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 182.
Moreton Bay, Queensland.

408 SMARAGDULUM Westw. Ai'can. Ent., I., p. 84, t. 21, f. 4.

Swan Itivei', W. Australia.

409 STRIATO-PUNCTATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, I., p. 184.
Daly Waters, N. Australia.

410 STRiATO-PUNCTULATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.

Wales, 1865, I., p. 178.
Murrumbidgee, N. S. Wales.

411 SUBCOSTATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 186.
Clarence River, N. S. Wales.

412 SUBCYANEUM Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 66.
South Australia.

413 SUBMETALLICUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 98.
Gayndah; Queensland.

414 SUBPLANATUM H. W. Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1874, XI.,

p. 96.
W. Australia.

415 suBPORCATULUM INIacleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, I., p. 184.
Wide Bay ; Queensland.

416 SUBQUADRATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 177.
South Australia.

417 SUBRUGOSULUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

1., p. 180.
Australia

418 SUBSTRIATULUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 179.
Richmoud E.iver ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 395

419 SUMPTUOSUM Westw. Arcan. Ent., I., p. 86, t. 22, f. 1.

Port Essington ; North Australia.

420 SUPERBUM Casteln. Trans. Eoy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 135.

Lachlan River ; N. S. Wales.

421 TERR^-REGiNyB Macleav. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1883,

VIIL, p. 411.
Albania Downs ; Queensland.

422 TRISTE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, II.

p. 63.
Maryborough, Gayndah ; Queensland.

423 UNDULATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 189.
Wingelo, &c.; N. S. Wales.

424 viRiDi-MARGiXATUM Maclcay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 97.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

425 VIRIDIPENNE Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1849, V., p. 202.

New England ; N. S. Wales.

426 Westwoodii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII, p. 136,

Mount Kosciusko, Bombala, &c.; N. S. Wales.

LACCOPTERUM. Macleay.

427 Darwiniense Macleay. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1878,

IL, p. 214.
Carenum Darwiniense Macleay.
Port Darwin ; N. Australia.

428 deauratum Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 140.
Carenum deauratum Macleay.
Port Curtis, Gayndah, Wide Bay, &c. ; Queensland.

429 foveipenne Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

IL, p. 325.
Carenum foveijjenne Macleay.
South Australia.

396 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

430 FOVEOLATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863

I., p. 141.
Carenu7n foveolatnm Macleay.
N. E. Coast of Australia.

431 GEMMATUM Westw. Arcau. Ent., I., p. 85, t. 21, f. 7.

Caremim gemmatum Westw.
Port Essington ; N. Australia.

432 SALEBROSUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

XL, p. 97.
Carenum scdebrosum jNlacleay.
Gayndali ; Queensland.

433 Spencei West. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1841, p. 123; Arcan.

Ent., I., p. 85, t. 21, f. 6.
Carenum Spencei Westw.
N. S. Wales.

434 VARIOLOSUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 143.
Carenum variolosum Macleay.
Murrumbidgee ; N. S. Wales.

TERATIDIUM. H. W. Bates.

435 MACROS H. W. Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1874, XI., ]>. 100.

W. Australia.

PHILOSCAPHUS. Macleay.

436 CAUINATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 142.
Carenum carinatum Macleay.
Wingelo, Bungendore, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

437 cosTALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. 8. Wales, 1873, II.,

p. 324.
Nickol Bay; W. Australia.

438 LATERALIS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II.,

p. 324.
South Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 397

439 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 9G.
Gayntlali ; Queensland.

440 TUBERCULATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 63.
Carenuiii tuherculatuin Macleay.

EURYSCAPHUS. Macleay.

441 AFFiNis Cdsteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, YIII., p. 130.

Coo[)er's Creek ; Queensland.

442 ANGULATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 188.
Victoria River ; Queensland.
44:5 BiPi'NCTATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,
I., p. 189.
South Austi'alia.

444 CARBONARius Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 131.

Cooper's Creek ; Queensland.

445 DiLATATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 188.
Australia.

446 HoPEi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p, 131.

Central Australia.

447 HovviTTii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc Victoria, VIIL, p. 130.

Port Augusta ; S. Au.stralia.

448 MINOR Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I., p. 189.

Victoria River. (Mitchell's Expedition).

449 OBBSUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, 1., p. 65.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

450 Waterhousei Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

p. 146

SCARAPHITES. Westwood.

451 Bacchus Westw. Arcan. Ent., p. 87, t. 22, f. 4.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

452 crenaticollis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1863, I., p. 147.
South Australia.

398 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

453 oiGAS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 132.

Mickol Bay, \V. Australia.
■ioi JIEROS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 129.

Champion Bay, W. Australia.

455 HiRTiPES Macleay. Trans. Eat. Soc, N. 8. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 148.
South Australia.

456 iiUMEKALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 132.
Swan River, W. Australia.

457 INTERMEDIUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 190.
Illawarra, Meriuibula, &c., N. S. Wales.

458 LATicoLLis Macleay. Proc Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866,

I., p. 56.
Northern Territory of S. Australia.

459 LATiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent., Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 66.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

460 Lern^us Westw. Arcan, Ent., I., p. 87, t. 22, f. 5.

Swan River, W. Australia.

461 LUCiDus Chaud. Rev. Zool., 1863, p. 115.

Melbourne, Victoria.

462 Macleayi Westw. Arcan. Ent, I., p. 157.

Sydney, N. S. Wales.

463 Martini Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 133.

Champion Bay, VV. Australia.

464 Mastersi, Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 70.
Mount Barker, W. Australia.

465 rotundipennis Dej. Spec, I., p. 401 ; Boisd., Voy. Astrol.

CoL, p. 21, t. 6, f. 2.
Victoria ; Tasmania.

466 SiLENUS Westw. Arcan. Ent., I., p. 87, t. 22, f. 6.

Swan River, W. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 399

GEOSCAPTUS. Chaudoir.
4G7 APPROXIMATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,
I., p. 191.
Scarites approximatus Macleay.
Victoria River, (Mitchell's Expedition.)

468 Cacus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, 1., p. 67.

Scarites Cacus Macleay.

Scarites 2Iitchelli Castln. Trans. Roy. Vic, VIII., p. 144.

Scarites substriatus Cateln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIU., p. 143.
Scarites Waterkousei Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, I., p. 192.
Scarites nificornis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 144.
Scarites bipunctatus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p, 144.
Australia (widely distributed.)

469 L^vissiMUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1855, I., p. 10.

Scarites Geryon Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1863, L, p. 68.
Scarites Jacksoniensis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, L, p. 193.
Scarites Bostocki Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 144.
Australia (widely distributed.)

470 PLANiuscuLUs Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N.S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 193.
Scarites planiusculus Macleay.
Victoria River (Mitchell's Expedition. )

471 PLICATUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 144.

Scarites plicatus Casteln.
Escape Cliff; North Australia.

472 SUBPORCATULUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, I., p. 192.
Scarites subporc/Uulus Macleay.
North Australia (Hely's Expedition.)

400 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

GNATHOXYS. Westwood.

473 BARBATUS Macleav. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 151.
South Australia,

474 ciCATRicosus Reiche. Rev. ZooL, 1842, p. 121.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

475 FOVEATUS Macleay. Proc. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866, p. 59.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

476 GRANULARis Westw. Arcan. Ent., I., p. 89, t. 23, i. 2 ; Lacorcl.

Gen, Atl., I., t. 8, f. 2.
Bllssi Macleay. Proc. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866, 1., p. 58.
Swan River ; W. Australia.

477 HUMERALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 150.
South Australia.

478 INSIGNITUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 148.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

479 IRREGULARIS Westw. Arcan. Ent., T., p. 89, t. 23, f. 3.

Port Essington ; N. Australia.

480 Macleayi Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1868, p. 377.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

481 MuRRUMBiDGENSis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1865, I., p. 195.
Murrurnbidgee ; N. S. Wales.

482 OBSCURUS Rnicho. Rev. Zool., 1842, p. 121.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

483 punctipennis Macleay. Trans. Eat. Sec, N. S. Wales, 1873,

TL, i>. 327.
South Australia.

484 submetallicus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 151.
South Australia.

485 tessellatus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 152.
Parramatta, Rope's Creek ; X. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 401

486 Westwoodii Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1868, p. 377.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

DYSCHIRIUS. Bonelli.

487 Mastersi Macleay. Proc. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866, I.,

p. 59.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

488 Stephens: Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 195.

Sutton Forest, N". S. Wales.

489 zoxATUs Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1868, XL, p. 9.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

SCOLYPTUS. Putzeys.

490 ABBREViATUS Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1873, XVI., p. 10.

Queensland.

491 CRASSicOLLis, Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg, X., p. 25.

New South Wales.

492 FOVEiCKPs Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 73.
Ceratoglossa foveiceps Macleay,
Richmond Rivei', N. S. Wales.

493 MARGiNATUS Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg, 1868. XT., p. 8.

Rockhanipton, Queensland.

494 OBLONGUS Putz. Ami Soc, Ent. Belg., 1873, XVI., p. 10.

Sydney, New South Wales.

495 PLANiCEPS Putz. Mem. Liege, 1863, p. 42.

Ceratoglossa ricgiceps Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.

Wales, 1863, L, p. 72.
Murrumbidgee, N. S. Wales.

496 PROCERUS Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., X., p. 180 ; XI , p. 7.

Australia.

497 PROMiNENs Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit, 1866, p. 35.

Australia.

402 CATALOGUE OF TJIE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

CLIVINA. LatreiUe.

498 ANGUSTiPEs Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 18G8, XI., p. 12.

Swan River, W. Australia.

499 ANGUSTULA Piitz. Revis, p, 190.

Melbourne, Victoria.

500 ATRATA Putz. Mom Liege, 1863, p. 54.

Australia.

501 AusTRALASiiE Bohem. Res. Eugen, 1858, p. 8.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

502 BASALis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1843, IV., p. 733 ; Putz,

Mem Liege, 1863, p. 38.
Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

503 BiPLAGiATA. Putz. Revis. p. 191.

Australia.

504 CAVA Putz. Sett. Ent. Zeit., 1856. p. 38.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

505 CORONATA Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1873, XVI., p. 17.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

506 CRiBROSA Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1868, XI., p. 20.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

507 DEPLANATA Putz. Revis, p. 190.

Melbourne ; Victox'ia.

508 DiFFORMis Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1868, XL, p. 19.

Victoria.

509 DiLUTiPES Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1868, XL, p. 19.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

510 DiMiDiATA Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1860, p. 39.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

511 ELEGANS Putz. JVIem. Liege, 1863, p. 44.

Austi-alia.

512 EMARGiNATA Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1868, XL, ]i. 15.

Australia.

513 FERRUGiNEA Putz. Anil. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1868, XL, p. 14.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 403

514 FLAVA Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., 1868, XI., p. 16.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

515 HETEROGENA Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1866. p. 41 ; Pvevis,

p. 189.
Australia.

516 ISOGONA Putz. Ann. Soc, Eat. Belg., 1868, XI., p. 13.

Australia.

517 JUVENisPutz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1866, p. 37; Eevis, p, 183.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

518 LEPiDA Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1866, p. 184.

Melbourne, Victoria.

519 MELANOPYGA Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1866, p. 41.

Melbourne, Victoria.

520 MiCRODON, Putz. R^vis, p. 183.

Melbourne, Victoria.

521 NYCTOSYLOiDES Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., XI., 1868, p. 10.

Queensland.

522 OBLIQUATA Putz. Kevis., p. 188.

Sydney, N. S. Wales.

523 ODONTOMERA Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., XI„ 1868, p. 18.

Rockhampton, Queensland.

524 PECTORALis Putz. Ami. Soc, Ent. Belg., XL, 1868, p. 14.

Rockhampton, Queensland.

525 PUNCTATICEPS Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., XI., 1868, p. 18.

Rockhampton, Queensland.

526 RUBRiPEs Putz. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., XL, 1868, p. 13.

Rockhampton, Queensland.

527 SELLATA Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1866. p. 40.

Australia.

528 suTURALis Putz. Mem. Liege, 1863, p. 39.

Victoria.

529 VAGANS Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1866, p. 38.

South Australia.

530 vEHTicALis Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1866, p. 40.

South Australia.

404 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

Sub-Family. PANAGEIDES.

EPICOSMUS. Chaud.

531 ALTERNANS Casteln. Trans, Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 146.

Eadeina alternans Casteln.

Rockliampton, Gayndah, &c. ; Queensland.

532 AUSTRALASIA Cliaud. Bull. Mosc, 1850, II., p. 419.

Eudema Australasi/e Chaud.

N. S. Wales, Victoria, S. Ausfci^alia.

533 AUSTRALis Dej (Panagasus). Spec. Gen. Coleopt., V. p 601.

Eudema elongatum Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 147.
N. S. Wales.

534 COMPTUS Laf. (Isotarsus.) Ann. Soc, Ent. France, 1851, p. 20.

Eudema Australe. Casteln (not Dejean.) Trans. Roy.
Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 147.
N. S. Wales ; Queensland.

535 CORPULENTUS Chaud. x\nn. Soc.,Ent.Belg.,1878,XXI.,p. 131.

Rockhanipton ; Queensland.

536 iNSiGNis Schauni. Ann. Soc, Eut. France, 1853, p. 435,

t. 13, f. 5.
Eudema convexum Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1864, I., p. 114.
Port Denison, Cleveland Bay, Cape York, &c. ; Queensland.

537 RocKAMPTONENSis CasteUi. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 147.
Eudema Rockhamptonense Casteln.
Rockhanipton ; Queensland.

TINOGNATHUS. Chaudoir.

538 PARViCEPS Chaud. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg.. 1878, p. 138.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

TRICHISA. Motschulsky.

539 AZUREA Chaud. (Epicosmus.) Bull. Mosc, II., p. 348.

Eudema azureum Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 147.
N. S. Wales ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 405

PLATYLYTRON. Macleay.

540 AMPLiPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 328.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

Sub- Family. CHL^NIUES.

CHL.ENIUS. Bonelli.

541 AusTRALis Dej. Spec. V., p. 650.

Australia. (Widely distributed).

542 BiMACULATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 18G4,

I., p. 115.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

543 Darlingensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p.

148.
Darling River ; N". S. Wales.

544 Greyanus White. Voy. Grey. Austr., 1841, II., p. 458;

Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1856, III., p. 290.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

545 maculiper Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 148.

Nevv South Wales. Queensland.

546 maculiger Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 148.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

547 marginatus Dej. Spec, II., p. 305.

Australia. (Widely distributed).

548 OPHONoiDES Fairm. Ann. Fr., 1843, p. 11, t. ], f. 1 ; Chaud.

Bull. Mosc, 1856, III., p. 197.
Australia.

549 peregrinus Laferte. Ann. Fr., 1851, p. 247 ; Chaud. Bull.

Mosc, 1856, III., p. 264.
New South Wales, Queensland.

550 puncticeps Gem. and Harold. Cat., p. 224.

punctatus Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1856, III., p. 200.
Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

406 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

551 SUBCOSTATUS Macleaj. Trans. Eiit. Soc, N. S. Wales, 18G4,

I., p. 114.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

HOLOLKIUS. Laferte.

552 NITIDULUS Dej. Spec, IL, p. 341.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales, and Southei'n ])arts of
Queensland.

ANATRICHIS. Leconte.

553 AusTRALASL^5 Cliaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), LI.,

p. 322.
Moreton Bay, Queensland.

COPTOCARPUS. Chaudoir.

554 AusTRALis Dej. Spec, V., p. 671.

Victoria ; IsT. S. Wales ; Queensland.

555 Championensis Chaud. Ann. Soc Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), p. 365.

Champion Bay, W. Australia.

556 Chaudoiri Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N". S. Wales, 1873

II., p. 329.
<'larence River, N. S. Wales,

557 CONVEXUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 151.

Victoria ; Swan River ; K. G. Sound ; W. Australia.

558 GiBBUS Chaud. Ann. Soc Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), IL, p. 511.

Australia.

559 NiTiDUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, IL,

p. 330.
Cape York ; North Australia.

560 oviFORMis Chaud. Ann. Soc Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), IL, p. 511.

Cape York ; North Australia.

561 planipennis Macleay. Proc Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1878,

IL, p. 216.
Port Darwin, North Australia.

562 RivERiNiE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

IL, p. 329.
Murrumbidgee ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 407

563 THORACicus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 157.

Swan Kiver ; \V. Australia.

OODES. Bonelli.

564 BosTocKi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII,, p. 151.

Nickol Bay ; W. Australia.

565 Denisonensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 150.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

566 FusciTARSis Blanch. Voy. Pole. Sud.,p. 39, t. 1, f. 14.

North Australia.

567 INORNATUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 151.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

568 mPRESSus Chaud. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), II., p. 365.

Swan River; W. Australia.

569 iNTERiORis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 151.

Cooper's Creek ; Central Australia.

570 LATUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII, p. 150.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

571 MODESTUS Casteln. Trans. Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIII, p. 150.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

572 OBLONGUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 149.

Rope's Creek ; N. S. Wales.

573 Parroensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria. VIII., p. 150.

Paroo River ; Centi-al Australia.

574 PROXIMUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 151.

Paroo River ; Central Australia.

575 Reichei Laferte. Ann. Fr., 1851, p. 271.

Swan River.; W. Australia.

576 TRISULCATUS Casteln. Trans. Roy.Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 150.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

577 "Waterhousei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 149.
Arnheim's Land ; N. Australia.
27

408 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

Sub-Family. LICINIDES.
BADISTER. ClairviUe.

578 ANCHOMENOiDES Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 120.
Gayndat ; Queensland.

PHYSOLESTHUS. Chaudoir,

579 AusTRALis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1850, II., p. 412; Moraw.

Beitr. Raf. Jesso., 1863, I., p. 37.
Australia.

580 GRANDiPALPis Maclsay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.Wales, 1871,

II., p. 121.
Gayndah ; Queensland.
681 SUTURALIS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 152.
Paroo River ; Central Australia.

Sub-Family. CNEMACANTHIDES.

PROMECODERUS. Dejean.

582 Albanyensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc , Victoria, VIII., p.

168.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

583 anthracinus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 334.
Lower Murrumbidgee ; N. S. Wales.

584 Bassii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 166.

King's Island ; Bass's Straits.

585 BRUNNicoRNis Dej. Spec, IV., p. 28 ; Latrl. Dej. Cat., 3

ed., p. 46.
Australia.

586 CLiviNOiDES Guer. Rev. Zool., 1841, p. 189.

Austi-alia.

587 CONCOLOR Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, IIL, p. 168.

South Australia.

588 DEGENOR Guer. Rev. Zool., 1841, p. 189.

Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 409

589 DORSALis Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II.,

p. 333.
Murrumbidgee ; N. S. Wales.

590 DYscHiRioiDES Guer. Rev. Zool., 1841, p. 189.

Australia.

591 ELEGANS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 170.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

592 GiBBOSus Gray. Anim. Kingd., II., p. 276, t. 15, f. 1 ; t. 34,

f. 5; Guer. Rev. Zool., 1841, p. 189; Blanch. Voy.
Pole. Sud., p. 18, t. 3, f. 5.
Tasmania.

593 GRACILIS Germ. Linn, Ent., III., 1848, p. 169.

South Australia.

594 HowiTTii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p, 171.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

595 HuNTERiENSis Macleay. Trans Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 332.
Hunter River ; N. S. Wales.

596 iNORNATUs Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

11., p. 333.
Monaro ; N. S. Wales.

597 INTERRUPTUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 331.
Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

598 LUCiDicoLLis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 171.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

599 LUCiDus Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1868, p. 333.

Australia.

600 MAJUscuLUS Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1868, p. 333.

North Australia.

601 MARiTiMUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 168.

Cape Schanck ; Victoria.

602 Masters: Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 332.
Monaro ; N. S. Wales.

410 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP ATJSTRALIA,

G03 MiNUTUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. See, Victoria, VIII., p. 168.

Swan Kiver ; W. Australia.
604 MODESTUS Casteln, Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII. , p. 170.

Tasmania.
G05 MOROSUs Putz, Stett. Eut. Zeit., 1868, p. 333.

Australia.

606 NEGLECTUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 171.

Mountains of Victoi'ia.

607 NiGRicoRNis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 167.
Mountains of Victoria,

608 OBLONGUS Casteln. Trans. Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 170.

Melbourne ; Victoria.
009 OLiVACEUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,
II., p. 334.
Piper's Flats; N. S. Wales.

610 PARVULUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N". S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 331.
Upper Murrumbidgee ; N. S. Wales.

611 PUELLA Putz. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1868. p. 343.

N. S. Wales.

612 PUNCTicOLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N". S. Wales, 1873,

11. , p. 333.
Monaro ; N. S. Wales.

613 PYGMiEus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII. , p. 167.

Mountains of Victoria.

614 Riverine Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

IL, 331.
Lower Murrumbidgee ; N, S. Wales.

615 SCAUROIDES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 169.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

616 SEMISTRIATUS Casteln. Trans.Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 168.

Rope's Creek, Clax-ence River, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

617 STRiATOPUNCTATUS Casteln. Trans.Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 168.
Victoria. Darling River ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 411

618 suBBEPRESSES Guer. Rev. Zool., 1841^ p. 190.

Tasmania.

619 suTURALis Casfceln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 171.

Adelaide ; S. Australia.
G20 TASMANicus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 1G6.

Tasmania.
G21 WiLCoxi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 170.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

PARROA. Castelnau.
G22 BICOLOR Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 174.
Paroo River ; Central Australia.

623 CARBONARiA Castelu. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 174.
Swan River ; W. Australia.

624 GRANDis Casteln. Trans, Roy. Soc., Victoria, VIII., p. 174.

Swan River ; W. Australia.
62.5 HowiTTii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 173.
Paroo River ; Central Australia.

626 viOLACBA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 174.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

ADOTELA. Castelnau.

627 CARENOiDES Putz. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1873, IV., p. 341.

Poi't Denison ; Queensland.

628 CONCOLOR Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 17-5.

Swan River ; W. Australia,

629 ESMERALDA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 175.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

630 NiGERRiMA Macleay Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Yfales, 1873,

II., p. 335.
Percy Islands ; North-east Coast.

631 STRIOLATA Putz. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1873, IV., p. 341.

Roebuck Bay ; W. Australia.

412 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

632 viRiDis Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N". S. Wales, 1867, II.,

p. 99.
Proviecoderus viridis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

CEROTALIS. Castelnau.

633 SEMiviOLACEA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc., Yictoria, VIII.,

p. 175.
Port Lincoln ; S. Australia.

634 SUBSTRIATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 175.
King George's Sound; W. Australia.

635 VERSICOLOR Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII. ,

p. 175.
Victoria.

BRITHYSTERNUM. Macleay.

636 CALCARATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 367.
Peak Downs ; Queensland.

PERCOSOMA. Schaum.

637 SULCIPENNE H. W. Bates. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 317.

Northern Tasmania.

MAORIA. Castelnau,

638 DYScniRioiDES Casteln. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 165.

Crooked River, Gipp's Land ; Victoria.

MECODEMA. Blanchard.

639 BiiAGRAVEi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 161.

Mountains of Victoria.

640 MONTANUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 163.

Mountains of Victoria.

641 PERCOiDEs Casteln. Trans, Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 163.

Mount Wellington ; Tasmania.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 413

Sub-Familv. STOMIDES.

MEONIS. Castelnau.

642 ATER Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 156.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales. Brisbane, Gayndah ; Queens
land.

643 NIGER Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 156.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

644 ovicOLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,11.,

p. 100.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

DARODILIA. Casteln,

645 MANDiBULARis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p.

151.
Lachlan River ; N. S. Wales.

Sub-Family. CRATOCERI.DES.
AMBLYGNATHUS. Dejean.

646 MiNUTUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 179.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia,

Sub-Family. HARPALIDES.

PHORTICOSOMUS. Schaum.

647 Edeli Casteln. Trans. Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIII,, p 178,

Swan River ; W, Australia,

648 FELIX Schaum, Journ of Ent., II., p. 78, t. 4, f. 5,

Victoria, N. S, Wales,

649 GRANDis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 177.

Cooper's Creek ; Central Australia,

650 LATERALIS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoi-ia, VIII., p. 177.

Paroo River ; Central Australia.

651 MINUTUS Casteln. Trans. Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 177.

Paroo River ; Central Australia.

414 CATALOGTrii: OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

652 NuYTSi Casteln. Trans. Roy. See, Victoria, VIII., p. 178.

Mckol Bay ; W. Australia.

653 ROTUNDiPENNis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 177.
Paroo River ; Central Australia.

654 RUGICEPS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 100.
Gayndab ; Queensland.

GEOBAENUS. Dejean.

655 AUSTRALASiiE Guer. Voy. Coquille, 1830, II., p. 59.

Australia.

GNATHAPHANUS. W. S. Macleay.

656 Adelaide Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 194.

Uarpalus Adeiaidce Casteln.

Harpalus marginicoUis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,
VIII., p. 189.

Harpalus Parroensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,
VIIL, p. 184.

Harpalus Melbournensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Vic-
toria, VIII., p. 183.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia ; South Australia ;
Victoria ; N. S. Wales.

657 ALTERNANS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 185.

Harpalus alternans Casteln.
Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

658 iMPRESSiPENNis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 186.
Harpalus impressipennis Casteln.
Rockhamptou ; Queensland.

659 L.EVICEPS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 116.
Fachauchenius Ueviceps Macleay.
Port Denison ; Cleveland Bay, ifec. ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS.

415

6t)0 LiciNOiDES Hope, Ann. Nat. Hist., 1842, IX., p. 427.

Australia.
6G1£melanarius Dej. Spec, IV., p. 311.
Diaphoromerus melanarius Dej.
Harpalus Thouzeti Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 182.
Harpalus Wilcoxi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 187,
Clarence River ; Sydney, &c., N. S. Wales ; Rockhampton,
(fee. ; Queensland.

662 MONTANUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 186.

Harpalus puncti/er Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII,, p. 184.
Harpalus planipennis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.

Wales. 1871, II., p. 101.
Brisbane, Pine Mountain, Gayndah, &c. ; Queensland.

663 piciPES Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 117.
Harpalus picipes Macleay.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

664 PULCHER Dej. Spec IV., p. 282 ; W. S. Macleay Dej. Cat.,

3 ed., p. 51.
Harpalus interstitiales Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.

Wales, 1864, I., p. 117.
New South Wales ; Queensland.

665 RECTANGULUS Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov.. 1878, XII., p. 507,

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

666 Denisonensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 183.
Harpalus Denisonensis Casteln.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

ANISODACTYLUS. Dejean.

667 opacipennis Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, XII., p. 513.

S. W. Australia.

V.

416 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

G68 ROTUNDicOLLis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,
p. 182.
Harj)cdn8 rottmdicoUis Casteln.
Australia. (Widely disti'ibiited).

G69 Waterhousei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoina, VIII.,
p. 182.
Earpalus Waterhousei Casteln.
Adelaide; S. Australia.

HAPLANER. Chaud.

670 velox Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 189 ;

Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, XII., p. 514.
Harpalus velox Casteln,
Melbourne ; Victoria.

DIAPHOROMERUS. Chaudoir.

671 ^reus Dej. Spec, IV., p. 384.

Harpalus Boisduvallii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 196.
Swan River ; W. Australia.

672 AMAROiDES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 192.

Ilarimlus amaroides Casteln.

Harpalus patrueloides Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoiia,

VIIL, p. 183.
Harpalus Vandiemensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 187.
Harpalus Illawarensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 194.
Australia (widely distributed.)

673 ANGUSTULUS Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, p. 479.

Rockarapton ; Queensland.

674 AusTRALASiiE Dej. Spec, IV., p. 295.

Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 417

675 AusTRALis Dej. Spec, IV., p. 385.

Harpahis inor^iatus Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 1G9.

Harpalus Co.'kw Casteln. Trans. Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIII.,
p. 193.

Clai-ence River ; N. S. Wales. S. Australia.
G76 BosTOCKi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 196.

Harpalus Bostocki Casteln.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

677 Dampieri Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 195.

Harpalus versicolor Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 196.
Port Lincoln ; S. Australia. Swan River, K. G. Sound ;

\V. Australia.

678 Deyrollei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 196.

Harpalus Deyrollei Casteln.
Port Lincoln ; S. Australia.

679 Edwardsii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 187.

Harpalus Edwardsii Casteln.
Victoria.

680 femoralis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIIL, p. 196.

Harpalus fevioralis Casteln.

Harpalusplanoimpressus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 187.
Brisbane, Rockampton, &c. ; Queensland.

681 flavipalpis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

L, p. 118.
Harpalus Jlavipaljns Macleay.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

682 Flindersii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 188.

Harjyalus Flindersii Casteln.
Rockhampton; Queensland.

683 Germari Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 190.

Harpahts Germari Casteln.

Harpalus Erichsoni Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 191.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

418 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

684 iNiEQUALiPENNis Castelii. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 18.5.
Harpalus mcequalipennis Casteln,
King Geoi-ge's Sound, Swan River ; W. Australia.

685 iRiDiPENNis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1843, p. 10.5.

Harpalus infelix Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

YIIL, p. 192.
Rockhampton, Gayndah, &c. ; Queensland.

686 Lapeyrousei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 192.
Harpalus Lapeyrousei Casteln.
Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

687 LuciDicoLLis Dej., Spec, IV., p. 312.

Australia.

688 MANDiBULARis Castoln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 197,
Harpahbs mandibularis Casteln.
Port Denison ; Queensland.
089 M(ESTUS Dej. Spec, IV., p. 382.

Harpalus rana Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 186.
Harpalus Yarrce Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 189.
Harpalus Tasmanicus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VTII., p. 191.
Victoria ; Tasmania.

690 OVATUS Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, p. 479.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

691 OBLONGiuscuLUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII,,

p. 183.
Harjmlus ohlongiuscnlus Casteln.
Brisbane ; Queensland.

692 PLANiuscuLus Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, p. 483.

Australia.

693 QUADRicoLLis Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, p. 486.

North Australia,

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 419

694 RANULA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VTII., p. 191.

Harpalus ranida Casteln.
Melboiu-ne ; Victoria.

695 RECTANGULUS Ohaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, p. 479.

South Australia. Tasmania.

696 RUGOSiPEXNis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p.

184.
Sarpalus rugosipennis Casteln.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

697 scuLPTURALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII, p.

185.
Harpalus sculpturalis Casteln.
King Georges Sound, Swan River ; W. Australia.

698 scuLPTiPENNis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p,

185.
Harpalus sculptipennis Casteln.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

HYPHARPAX. W. S. Macleay.

699 FLAViTARSis Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, XII., p. 498.

Gulf of Carpentaria; N". Australia.

700 KiNGil Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 193.

Harpalus Kingii Casteln.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

701 Krefftii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIII., p. 190.

Harpalus Krefftii Casteln.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

702 LATiuscuLus Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, XII., p. 499.

Tasmania.

703 PARVUS Chaud Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, XII., p. 500.

South Australia.

704 Peronii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 188.

Harpalus Peronii Casteln.

Harpalus Novoi-Hollandice, Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc,

Victoria, VIII., p. 197.
Victoria. K. G. Sound ; W. Australia.

420 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

705 EOTUNDiPENNis ChaucL Ann. Mus. Genov., 1878, XIT.,

p. 500.
Australia.

MICROSAURUS. H. W. Bates.

706 iNsuLARis Bates. Cist. Ent., 1878, JI., p. 319.

Tasmania.

THENAROTES. H. W. Bates.

707 Tasmanicus Bates. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 321.

Tasmania.

NEBRIOSOMA, Castelnau.

708 FALLAX Casteln. Trans. Roy. Sec, Victoria, VIII., p. 179.

Kiama ; N. S. Wales.

LECANOMERUS. Chaudoir.

709 ABERRANS Macleay. Trans. Ent Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 101.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

710 iNsiDiosus Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1850, II., p. 447.

Australia.

711 RUFiCEPS Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871

II., p. 100.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

HARPALUS. Latreille.

712 ^NEO-NiTENS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 102.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

713 ANGUSTATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 102.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

714 ATRO-viRiDis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 103.
Gayndah; Queensland.

715 BRUNNEUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoi-ia, VIII., p. 194.

Adelaide ; S. Australia. Swan River ; W. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 421

716 coNVEXiuscuLUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 102.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

717 FoRTNUMi Casfceln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 195,

Adelaide ; S. Australia.

718 Gayndahensis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 102.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

719 GoRYi Gory. Ann. Fr., 1833, p. 241 ; Boisd. Voy, Astrol,,

1835, p. 46.
Australia.

720 iGNOBiLis Bohem. Kes. Eugen., 1858, p. 10.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

721 iNTERiORis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p, 181.

Paroo River ; Central Australia.

722 MARGiNEPUNCTATUS Dej. Spec, IV., p, 396; Boisd. Voy.

Astrol., p. 45.
Australia.

723 PROMPTUS Erich. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 126.

Tasmania.

724 QUADRATICOLLIS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 188.
Sydney; N. S. Wales. Brisbane; Queensland.

725 VERTiCALis Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 126.

Tasmania.

726 VESTiGiALis Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 127.

Tasmania.

ACUPALPUS. Latreille.

727 ANGULATU8 Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 104.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

728 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent: Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 104.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

729 PiCEUS Guer. Voy. Coquille, 1830, II., p. 60.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

422 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

CYCLOTHORAX. Macleay.

730 PUNCTiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 105.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

STENOLOPHUS. Dejean.

731 DINGO Casteln, Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 197.

Ilarpalus dingo Casteln.
Rockhampton ; Queensland.

732 POLiTUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 103.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

Sub-Family. TRIGONOTOMIDES.
LEIRODIRA. Castelnau.

733 AURICOLLIS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 159.
ISTorthern parts of N. S. Wales ; Southern parts of Queens-
land.

734 Latreillei Casteln. Trans. Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 158.
Brisbane, Maryborough, Gayndah, &c ; Queensland.

735 liopleura Chaud. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., XI,, p. 163.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

LESTICUS. Dejean.

736 CHLORONOTus Chaud. Ann. Soc, Ent. Belg., XI., p. 156.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales. Queensland.

ABACETUS. Dejean.

737 ANGUSTiOR Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 105.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

738 ater Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, IS. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 105.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 423

739 Australasia Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIU., p. 26.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

740 AusTRALis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1870, XLII., p. 375.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

741 HAMORRHOUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIII., p. 27.

Australia.

DRIMOSTOMA. Dejean.

742 ALPESTRE Casteln. Trans. Eoy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 199.

Mountains of Victoria.

743 AusTRALE Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 198.

Mountains of Victoria.

744 MONTANUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 198,

Dandenong Mountains ; Victoria.

745 Tasmanicum Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoi'ia, VIII., p. 199.

Tasmania.

746 Thouzeti Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p 198.

Rockbampton ; Queensland.

747 viciNUM Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 199.

Rockbampton ; Queensland.

AMBLYTELUS. Erichson.

748 AMPLiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 106.
Maryborough, Gayndah ; Queensland.

749 CURTUS Fahr. Syst. El., I., p. 202 ; Erichs. Weigm. Arch.,

1842, I., p. 130, t. 4, f, 2.
Australia.

750 MINUTUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,11.,

p. 106.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

751 viTTATUs Motsch. Bull. Mosc, 1864, IV., p. 304.

Australia.

MECYNOGNATHUS". Macleay.

752 Damelii Macleay. Trans. Ent, Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II. ,

p. 336.
Cape York ; N. Australia.
28

424 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

PEDIOMORPHUS. Chaudoir.

753 PLANiuscuLus Chaud. Bull, Mosc, 1878, LIIL, p. 29.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

DELINIUS. Westwood.

754 Castelnaui Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIU., p. 34.

Australia,.

755 EssiNGTONi Westw. Proc. Ent. Soc, 1864, p. 3.

Port Essington ; N. Australia.

Sub-Family. FERONIDES.

ECCOPTOGENIUS. Chaudoir.

756 FERONioiDES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VITI.,

p. 201.
Deep Creek ; Victoria.

ZEODERA. Casteln.

757 ATRA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 200.

Clarence and Richmond Rivers ; N. S. Wales.

CATADROMUS. W. S. Macleay.

758 AcsTRALis Casteln. Etud. Ent., p. 154 ; Hist. Nat., 1840,

I., p. 120.
Australia. (Widely disti-ibuted).

759 coRDicoLLis Motsch. Bull. Mosc, 1864, IV., p. 350, t. 2, f. 24.

Australia.

760 Elseyi White. Proc Zool. Soc, 1859, p. 117, t. 58, f. 3.

Queensland,

761 Lacordairei Boisd. Voy. Astrol. Col., p. 34.

N. S. Wales; Victoria; S. Australia.

HOMALOSOMA. Boisduval.

762 carbonicolor Motsch. Bull, Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 236.

Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 425

763 coRDATA Chaud. Bull. Mosc. 1865, III., p. 69.

Cunninghami Casteln. Trans. Koy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 206.
Southern parts of Queensland.

764 cuRTUM Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1S65, III., p. 78.

North Australia.

765 CYANEA Casteln. Hist. Nat., 1840, I., p. 113 ; Chaud. Bull.

Mosc , 1865, TIL, p. 67.
episcopcclis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 204.
Lane Cove, Currajong, &c; N. S. Wales.

766 CYANEOCINCTA Boisd. Voy. Astrol. Col., p. 67 ; Chaud. Bull.

Mosc, 1869, III., p. 62.
A ustralia.

767 DiLATiCEPS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 76.

Eastern Australia.

768 L^vicoLLE Brulle. Hist. Nat., IV., p. 364.

Australia.

769 MARGiNiFERA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 68.

Wide Bay, Gayndah, &c.; Queensland.

770 Philippi Newm. The Entomol., 1842, p, 401.

Victoria.

771 SEPTEMCOSTATA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 572.

nitidicolle Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 206.

772 STRiATOCOLLE Brulle. Hist. Nat. Ins., IV., p. 346.

Australia.

773 SUBVIRENS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 72.

Australia.

774 SUPERBA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 205.

Hunter River ; N. S. Wales.

775 ViGORSi Gory. Fr. Ann., 1833. p. 233 ; Boisd. Voy. Astrol.,

1835, p. 37 ; Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 70.
Australia.

776 viOLACEA Casteln. Etud. Ent., p. 76.

North Australia. ?

777 viRiDESCENS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 206.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

426 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

778 WiLSONi Casteln. Trans. Roy. See, Victoria, VIII., p. 205.

Brisbane ; Queensland.

TRICHOSTEENUS. Chaudoir.

779 ATLAS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, VIII., p. 203.

Homalosovia atlas Casteln.

Homalosoma SoJandersi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 204.
Homalosoma obesa Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 204.
Ifurus hrevis Motscli. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 236.
Clarence and Richmond Rivers ; N. S. Wales.

780 ANGULOSUs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIIT., p. 39.

Australia.

781 Renardi Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 71.

Homalosoma Hercules Casteln. Ti'ans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 205.
Moreton Bay, Wide Bay, &c. ; Queensland.

NURUS. Motschulsky.

782 NIGER Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIII., p. 37.

Cape York ; N, Australia.

PRIONOPHORUS. Chaudoir.

783 crekatipes. Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III, p. 79.

Acinopus Australis Hope. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1845, IV.,

p. 105.
Secatophus Hopei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 180.
South Australia.

MORPHNOS. Schaufuss.

784 Flindbrsii White. Proc Zool. Soc, 1859, p. 117, t. 58, f. 2 ;

Chaud., Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 80 ; Casteln., Proc

Roy. Soc, Victoria, 1867, p. 91.
antipodus Schauf. Col. Heft., 1867, I., p. 65.
Sturti White. Proc Zool. Soc, 1859, p. 117, t. 58, f. 1.
South Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 427

CRATOGASTER. Blanchard.

785 ATER Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 106.
Tibarisus ater Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

786 MELAS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 20.3.

Tibarisus melas Casteln.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales ; Queensland.

787 NIGER Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 107.
Tibarisus niger Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

788 ROBUSTUS Macleay. Proc Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1883,

VIIL, p. 414.
Tibarisus robustus Macleay.
Queensland.

789 SULCATA Blanch. Voy. Pole. Sud., IV., p. 33, t. 2, f. 11.

Northern Australia.

PARHYPATES. Motschulsky.

790 PROFUNDESTRiATUs Motsch. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 263.

Australia.

791 TENUisTRiATUS Motsch, Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 262.

Australia.

NOTONOMUS. Chaudoir.

792 ACCEDExs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 92.

Australia.

793 .ENEOMicANS Chaud, Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 84.

Feronia Lapeyrousei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 213.
Hunter River ; N. S. Wales.

794 AMABiLis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 215.

Merimbula ; N. S, Wales.

42!!< CATALOdfUE OF THE DESCRUiED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

795 ANGUSTiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 109.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

796 AuBEi Casteln. Trans. Hoy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 21-5.

Hunter River ; N. S. Wales.

797 AusTRALAsi.E Dej. Spec, III., p. 277 ; Chaud. Bull. Mosc,

1865, III., p. 87.
Omaseus Mitchelli Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 216.
I^ew South Wales. Queensland. Victoi^ia.

798 AZUREOMARGiNATUS Castcln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 215.
Lachlan, and Hunter Rivers ; N. S. Wales.

799 CHALYBEUS Dej. Spec, III., p. 234 ; Chaud. Bull. Mosc,

1865, III., p. 90 ; Latrl. Dej. Cat., 3 ed., p. 38.
Percus hipunctatus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 221.
New South Wales. Victoria. S. Australia.

800 CYANEOCiNCTUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 108.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

801 Darlingi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 216.

Pine Mountains ; Queensland.

802 DEPRESsiPENNis Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1874, VI., p. 585.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

803 DiscoDERUs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 87.

A ustralia.

804 DYSCOLOiDES Motsch. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 263.

Neuropates dyscoloides Motsch.

Feronia Victorue Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 212.
Feronia semiviolacea Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 210.
Feronia suhvilis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 213.
Mountains of Gipps Land ; Victoria.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 429

805 EQUES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 207.

Illawarra ; N. S. Wales.

806 GiPPSiENSis Casteln. Trans. Roy. See, Victoria, VIII., p. 208.

Mountains of Victoria.

807 GRAVIS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 90.

Pemos 7uontana Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 221.
Mountains of Gipps Land ; Victoi'ia.

808 GiPPSLANDicus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 211.
Mountains of Gippsland ; Victoi'ia.

809 HuNTERiENSis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 213.
Hunter River ; N, S. Wales.

810 iMPRESSiPENNis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoi-ia, VIII.,

p. 214.
Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

811 INCRASSATUS Chaud. Ann. Mns. Genov., 1874, VI., p. 583.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

812 iNGRATUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 87.

Australia.

813 KiNGii Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 86.

Australia.

814 MARGiNATUS Casteln. Hist. Nat., 1838, I., p. 105.

Pcecilus marginatus Casteln.
Australia.

815 MEDiosuLCATUs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 88.

Omaseus occidentalis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 220.
Adetipa ininctata Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII , p, 157.
Clarence River, N. S. Wales. K. G. Sound ; W. Australia.

816 MILES Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 208

Clyde River ; N. S. Wales.

430 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

817 MOLESTUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 89.

Ternox obsolet'us Motaeh. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 268.
Percus lacustris Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 222.
South Australia ; Victoria.

818 NiTiDicoLLis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 89.

Feronia impressicollis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 212.
Steropus Mastersi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 224,
New South Wales ; Queensland ; S. Australia.

819 oPACicoLLis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 88.

Feronia purpureolimbaius Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc,

Victoria, VIIL, p. 214.
Orhitus 2)urpuri2}ennis Motsch, Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV.,

p. 248.
Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

820 OPULENTUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 210.

Feronia anricolUs Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 211.
Mountains of Victoria.

821 PARALLELOMORPHA Chaud. Bull., Mosc, 1878, LIIL, p. 57.

Queensland.

822 Peronii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 209.

Feronia Plutus Casteln. Trans. Roy Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 209.
Feronia Croesus Casteln Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL,

p. 209.
Mountains of Victoria.

823 Phillipsi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 212.

Mountains of Victoria.

824 POLiTULUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc,, 1865, III., p. 86.

Feronia Tasmanicus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 210.
Tasmania.

BY GEOROE MASTERS.

431

825 PRisTONYciioiDEs Motsch. Bull, Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 263.

Neuropates jmstonychoides Motsch.
Australia.

826 puRPUREiPENNis Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 107.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

827 REGALis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 207.

Kurrajong, Illawarra ; N. S, Wales.

828 RESPLENDENS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 213.

Merimbula 3 N. S. Wales.

829 Satanus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 221.

Omaseus satanus Casteln.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

830 Satrapa Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 208.

Gippsland ; Victoria.

831 siMULANS Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1874, VI., p. 586.

South Australia.

832 SPHODROIDES Dej. Spec, III., p. 236 ; Chaud. Bull, Mosc,

1865. III., p. 91.
Australia.

833 suBiRiDESCENs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 85.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

834 SUBOPACUS Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1874, VI., p. 586,

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

835 TRiPLOGENioiDEs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 85.

Feronia ducalis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 207.
Illawarra ; N. S. Wales.

836 TUBERicAUDA H. W. Bates. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 323.

Tasmania.

837 VARiicoLLis Chaud. Bull. Mosc.^ 1865, III., p. 86.

Feronia comes Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 207.
Clyde River ; N. S. Wales.

^

432 CATALOGUE OF THK DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

838 viOLACEOMARGiNATUS Macleay. Trans. Eiit. Soc, N. S.

Wales, 1871, II., p. 108.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

839 viRiDiciNCTUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 108.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

840 VIRIDILIMBATUS Casteln. Trans. Key. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 215.
Feronia viridimarginatus Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc,

Victoria, VIII., p. 21G.
Brisbane ; Queensland.

PROSOPOGMUS. Chaudoir.

841 Arnheimensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 220.
Omaseus Arnheime')isis Casteln.
Arnheiin's Land ; N. Australia,

842 BoiSDUVALLi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 222.
Abax BoisduvalU Casteln.

843 funebris Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 219.

Pmcihts funebris Casteln.
Mount Gambler.

844 iiarpaloides Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1874, VI., p. 593.

New South Wales.

845 interioris Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 218.

Poecilus interioris Casteln.
Paroo River ; Central Australia.

846 IRIDESCENS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 218.

Poncilus iridescens Casteln.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales. Rockhampton ; Queensland.

847 Reichei Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 222.

Abax Reichei Casteln.
Kiania ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 433

848 RUFiPALPis Casteln. Trans. Eoy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 216.

Omaseiis rujipalpis Castelu.
Mountains of Victoria.

849 STRiATicoLLis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 214.
Feronia striaticollis Casteln.
Clai-ence River ; N. S. Wales.

850 WiLCOXi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 212.

Feronia Wilcoxi Casteln.
Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

PvHABDOTUS. Chaudoir.

851 DiEMENENSis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 210.
Feronia Diemenensis Casteln.
Tasmania.

852 FLORiDus H. W. Bates. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 322.

Tasmania.

LOXODACTYLUS. Chaudoir.

853 AMiEROPTERA Chaud. Bull. Mosc,, 1865, II., p. 97.

Australia.

854 CARiNULATA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, II., p. 96.

Feronia Dingo Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 206.
Feronia yarrte Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 206.
Mountains of Victoria.

SARTICUS. Motschulsky.

855 AuBEi Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 215.

Feronia Auhei Casteln.
Hunter River • N. S. Wales.

856 AZUREOMARGINATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 215.
Fterostichus azureomarginata Casteln.
Lachlan and Himter Rivers : N. S. Wales.

434 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

857 CYCLODEKA Cliaud. Bull. Mosc, 1S65, III, p. 100.

Steropus Waterhousii Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 224.
Steropus Master si Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 224.
Steropus Blagravi Casteln. Trans, Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 224.
South, and Western Australia.

858 DiscopuNCTATA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 97.

Steropus Germari Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria

VIIL, p. 222.
Steropus Bonvouloiri Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 223.
Sartictos ovicollis Motsli. Bull. Mosc, 18G5, II., p. 2G6.
Brisbane ; Queensland. Adelaide ; S. Australia.

859 isciiNA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIIL, p. 68.

North Australia.

860 Lesueuri Casteln. Trans. Roy, Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 210.

Feronia Lesueuri Casteln.
Illawarra ; N. S. Wales.

861 OBESULA Chaud. Bull. Mosc 1865., III., p. 99.

Sarticus orbicollis Motsh. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 266.

Steropus saphyripen7iis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,
VIIL, p. 223.

Steropits esvieraldipennis Casteln, Trans. Roy. Soc, Vic-
toria, VIIL, p. 223.

Steropus Olivieri Casteln, Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoiia,
VIIL, p. 223.

Steroptts liocklmmptonensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc,
Victoria, VIIL, p. 223.

South Australia. Victoi'ia. Rockhampton ; Queensland,

862 QUADKisuLCATA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIIL, p. 67.

North Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 435

863 SAPHYREOMARGiNATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 222.
Steropus sajyhyreornrginata Casteln.

/Steropus cyaneocincta Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 97.
Gayndah ; Queensland. Melbourne ; Victoria.

STEROPUS. Megerle.

864 civiLis Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, Til., p. 167 ; Chaud. Bull.

Mosc, 1865, III., p. 99.
South Australia.

865 KLEGANTULUS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 224.
King George's Sound ; W. Austi'alia.

866 iRiDiTiNCTUs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 100.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

RHYTISTERNUS. Chaudoir.

867 CYATiioDERA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 107.

Ojnaseus Lachlandiensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 219.
Lachlan River ; N. S. Wales.

868 L^EViLATERA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, II., p. 107.

Omaseus centralis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 220.
Darling River ; N. S. Wales,

869 LIOPLEURA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, II., p. 106.

Amastus m^n'co/or Motsch. Bull. Mosc, 1865, VII., p. 246.
Australia.

870 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 109.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

871 MiSERA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IL, p. 108.

Omaseus suhcarhonarius Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 220.
New South Wales. Victoria

872 PLEBEiA Chaud. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1874, VL, p. 598.

Mount Victoria ; N. S. Wales.

436 CATALOUCE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

873 PUELLA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IL, p. 108.

Omaseus Clarenciensis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 220.
Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

CENEUS. Cliaudoir.

874 CHALYBEiPENXis Cliaucl. Bull. Mosc, 18G5, II., p. 109

Pterostichus coracinus Erich. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I.,

p. 148.
Pterostichus viles Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIII., p. 212.
Mountains of Victoria.

875 susPECTA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIIL, p. 54.

Queensland.

EURYSTOMIS. Chaudoir.

876 Castelnaui Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIIL, p. 48.

Queensland.

NELIDUS. Chaudoir.

877 AusTRALis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIIL, p. 50.

Paroo River ; Central Australia.

CHLAENIOIDIUS. Chaudoir.

878 HERBACEA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 18G5, IL, p. 111.

Paecilus resjylenderis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria,

VIIL, p. 217.
Lachlan, Darling, and Paroo Rivers.

879 PLANiPENNls Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, IST. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 109.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

880 PffiCiLOiDES Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LTL, p. 57.

Queensland.

881 PROLixA Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, L, p. 127 ; Chaud.

Bull. Mosc, 1865, IIL, p. 110,
Tasmania. N, S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 437

LEPTOPODUS. Chaudoir.

882 HOLOMELANUS Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 167.

Argutor holomelanus Germ.
South Australia.

883 IRIDIPENNIS Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 217.

Pcecilus iridipennis Casteln.

New South Wales. Victoria. S. Australia.

884 SUBGAGATINA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 218.
Pcecilns suhgagatinus Casteln.

Pterostichus solicitus Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, 1., p. 128.
Pine Mountain ; Queensland. Tasmania.

LOXANDRUS. Leconte.

885 ATRONiTENS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 110.
Pcecilus atronitens Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

886 GAGATiNUS Casteln. Trans. Eoy, Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 218.

Pcecilus gagatimos Casteln.
Tasmania.

887 RUFiLABRis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 219.
Pcecilus riifilabris Casteln.
Pine Mountain ; Queensland.

888 SUBIRIDESCENS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N, S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 110.
Pcecilus suhiridescens Macleay.
Gayndah; Queensland.

ABAX. Bonelli.

889 SULCIPENNIS Macleay. Trans, Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 368.
Richmond River ; N. S. Wales.

438 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

COKONOCANTHUS. Macleay.

890 SULCATUS Macleay. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S, Wales, 1878,

II., p. 216.
Port Darwin ; M ortli Australia.

OPHRYOSTERNUS. Chaudoir.

891 SULCATULUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1873, XLYII., p. 115.

Mox-eton Bay; Queensland.

PCECILUS. Bonelli.

892 KiNGii W. S. Macleay. King. Survey. Austral., 1827, II.,

p. 438.
Australia.

893 L^vis Macleay. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1883,

VIIL, p. 414.
Port Darwin ; N. Australia.

894 SEMiPLiCATUS Casteln. Hist. Nat, I., p. 105.

Australia.

PLATYSMA. Bonelli.

895 MONOCHROUM Cliaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 246.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

PACHIDIUS. Chaudoir.

896 SULCATUS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1865, III., p. 82.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

CYRTODERUS. Hope.

897 AusTALASi^ Hope. Proc. Ent. Soc, 1841, p. 47; Ann. Nat.

Hist, 1842, IX., p. 427.
Australia.

SIMODONTUS. Chaudoir.

898 coNVExus Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1873, XLVIL, p. 112.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

899 cuRTULUs Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1873, XLVIL, p. 113.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 439

900 ELONGATUS Chaiul. Bull. Mosc, 1873, XLVII., p. 111.

South Australia.

901 FOVEiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871^

II., p. 110.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

902 NiTiDiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 111.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

903 OoDiPORMis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. HI.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

904 ORTHOMOiDES Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1873, XLVII., p. 111.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

905 SEXFOVEATA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1873, XLVII., p. 111.

Queensland.

906 TRANSFUGA Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1873,XLVn., p. 112.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

ARGUTOR. Megerle.

907 iENEiPENNis Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1843, IIL, p. 414.

Australia.

908 ANTiPODUS Motsch. Bull. Mosc, 1865, IV., p. 257.

Australia.

909 AusTRALis Dej. Spec, IIT., p. 262.

Australia.

910 INEDITUS Casteln. Trans. Koy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 225.

Pine Mountain ; Queensland.

Sub-Family. ANCHOMENIDES.
DICROCHILE. Gu(5rm.

911 BREvicoLLis Clmud. Bull. Mosc, 1852, L, p. 68.

New South Wales. Victoria. S. Australia.
913 GIGAS Casteln. Trans Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIIL, p. 152.

Northern parts of N. S. Wales ; Southern parts of

Queensland.

29

440 CATALOfiUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

913 GoRYi Boisd. Voy. Astrol., Col., p. 32.

anchomenoides Guev. Ann. Fr., 1846 ; Bull., p. 103 ;

Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1852, I., p. 69 ; Lacord. Gen. Atl.,

t. 11, f. 6, a.
Stomatocfjuhts Ucinoides Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.

Wales, 1863, I., p. 116.
Australia. (Widely distributed).

914 MINUTA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VTII., p. 154.

Victoria ; Tasmania.

915 MONTANA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII., p. 153,

Yankee Jim Creek ; Victoria.

916 PUNCTATOSTRIATA Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 15.3.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

917 PUNCTiPENNis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII.,

p. 153.
Brisbane ; Queensland.

918 QUADRicOLLis Casteln. Trans. Roy. Soc, Victoria, VIII..

p. 153.

SI AGON YX. Macleay.

919 AMPLiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 113.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

920 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 113.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

LESTIGNATHUS. Erichson.

921 CURSOR Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 134, t. 4, £. 3, a-b.

Tasmania.

922 SiMSONi H. W. Bates. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 323.

Tasmania.

PLATYNUS. Bonelli.

923 AMBiGuus Erichs. Weigm. Arch.,' 1842, I., p. 130.

Tasmania.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 441

924 LOPHOiDES Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1854, L, p. 135.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

925 MARGINELLUS Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 130.

Tasmania. Victoria.
92G MARGiNicoLLis Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,
II., p. 112.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

927 NIGRO-.ENEUS Newm. The Entomol., 1842, p. 402.

Australia.

928 NiTiDiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 111.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

929 PLANiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 112.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

COLPODES. W. S. Macleay.

930 AusTRALis Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 131.

Tasmania.

931 DiLATATUS Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 131.

Tasmania.

932 LUGUBRis Motsch. Bull. Mosc, 1864, IV., p. 309.

Australia.

Sub-Family. POGONIDES.

POGJONUS, Dejean.

933 AUSTRALIS Chaud. Bull. Mosc, 1878, LIIL, p. 76.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

934 CARDiOTRACHiLus Cliaud. Bull. Mosc, 1871, XIV., p. 24.

Eastern Australia.

TRECHUS. Clairville.

935 ATER Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 114. '
Gayndah ; Queensland.

442 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

936 ATRiCEPS Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 113.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

937 CONCOLOR Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 114.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

938 DiEMENENSis H. W. Bates. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 322.

Tasmania.

939 RUFiLABRis Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 114.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

ILLAPHANUS. Macleay.

940 Stephensi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 18G4,

p. 156.
Wollongongjj N. S. Wales.

Sub-Family. BEMBIDIIDES.
TACHYS. Schaum.

941 AusTRALis Schaum. Berl. Zeit., 1863, p. 90.

Australia.

TACHYTA. Kirby.

942 LiviDA H. W. Bates. Ent. Month. Mag., 1871, p. 13.

Adelaide ; S. Australia.

BEMBIDIUM. Eiichson.

943 AMPLiPBNNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 119.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

944 ATRICEPS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IT.,

p. 116.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 443

945 BIFOVEATUM Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 117.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

946 BiPARTiTUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 120.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

947 BiPUSTULATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 116.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

948 BisTRiATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S, Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 115.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

949 BRUNNiPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 118.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

950 CONVEXUM Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 115.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

951 FLAViPES Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p, 119.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

952 GAGATiNUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

p. 119.
Gayndah • Queensland.

953 Jacksoniense Guer. Voy. Coquille, 1830, p. 61, t. 1, f. 17.

Sydney 3 N. S. Wales.

954 ovatum Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p. 117.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

955 PUNOTiPENNE, Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 116.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

444 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA.

956 RUBicuNDUM Macleay, Traus, Ent. Soc , N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 118.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

957 SEXSTRiATUM. Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 117.
Gayndah; Queensland.

958 STRIOLATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 115.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

959 SUBVIRIDE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 118.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

960 TRANsvERSicoLLB Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 116.

Gayndah ; Queensland.

DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW FISHES FROM
PORT JACKSON.

By J. Douglas-Ogilby,
Senior Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

SCYLLIUM ANALE. Sp. nOV.

The space between the eyes is greater than that between the tip
of the snout and the anterior margin of either eye. Nasal valves
not confluent, destitute of a cirrus ; nostrils nearer to the mouth
than to the snout. A short labial fold round either angle of the
mouth. Teeth in several rows in both jaws, each with a short
lateral cusp ou either side ; behind those of the lower jaw is a
band of short fringed cirri. Gill-openings of moderate size, the
last smallest ; the two last situated above the base of the pectoral.
The first do)-sal has its origin at the middle of the total length, and
is equal in size to the second. The anal ends rather behind the
origin of the second dorsal, than which it is much larger, its base
being If of the base of that tin; and the interspace between the
end of its base and the origin of the caudal is but § of the base
itself. Yentrals a little in advance of the first dorsal ; their outer
and posterior margins form a very acute angle. Lower caudal lobe
large ; posterior lobe obliquely truncated behind.

Body and fins stone-color ; the upper parts are ornamented with
nine large sub-circular brown blotches, each of which has a marginal
series of round deep-brown spots, and often a central spot. The
sides are similarly, but more faintly Ijlotched and spotted ; these
lateral blotches being for the most part placed opposite to the
intersjiaces between those of the dorsal. The two cranial blotches
are drawn out laterally, and are also joined together by a broad
densely spotted band. The lower parts are dirty white.

446 ox THREE UNDESCRIBED FISHES FROM PORT JACKSON,

The example, from which the alcove description was taken, was
trawled in Middle Harbour on the 22nd ult., and id an adult male,
measuring 22^ inches. The species under consideration bears
considerable similarity to the Scyllium bilrgeri of Miiller and Henle,
but the greater size of the spots, the pattern of coloration, and the
much larger and differently sha])ed anal fin distinguish it from that
species at a glance.

Registered number of type in the Australian Museum, B. 8,447.

Heliastes immaculatus. sp. nov.

D. 13/17. A. 2/14. V. 1/5. P. 18. C. 15. L. lat. 28. L.
^rans. 4/12.

Lengtli of head about 4, of caudal fin 4 J to 4|, height of body
2g in the total length. Diameter of the eye i of the length of
head, equal to that of the snout, and of the interorbital space,
which latter is convex and rather swollen. Jaws equal. The
maxilla does not quite reach to the anterior margin of the eye •
its front edge is strongly arched inwards. Greatest width
of the pre-orbital half a diameter of the eye. Teeth in the jaws
in a single series, conical. Dorsal fin commences somewhat in
front of the vertical from the end of the operculum ; its 4th spine
is the longest, about | the length of the head ; the 5th to 9th rays
longest, much longer than the spines. The anal commences beneath
the 12th dorsal spine ; its second spine is stronger and longer than
any of the dorsal spines. Outer ventral ray elongate, longer than
the head, and reaching to behind the anal spines. Pectoi-als rather
less than length of head. Caudal forked. The scales extend in
front of the eyes, and for more than half the height between the
dorsal spines : eight longitudinal series on each cheek.

(jrround color pale olive-green above, silvery below, the sides
with a bronzy wash. The scales on the lateral line are darker,
giving an appearance of a faint band. The vertical fins have a
violet tinge, and are narrowly edged with pale blue.

The description is taken from a specimen trawled on Shark Reef,
where several examples have been obtained during the last two
months ; none of them exceed six inches in length. Registered
number of type in the A.ustralian Museum collection, B. 7,452.

BY J. DOUGLAS-OGILBY. 447

Pempiieris LINEATUS.

sp

B. VII. D. 5/12. A. 3/35. V. 1/5. P. 17. C. 17. L. lat. 58.

Length of head 4,'„ of caudal fin 4,}, height of body below first
dorsal spine 2f|j in the total lengtli. Eyes very large and promi-
nent, diameter of each 1 of the length of head. Snout short, '1 of
diameter of eye, its profile concave. Interorbital space rather
convex, ^ of diameter of eye ; jaws equal when closed ; cleft of
moutli oblique ; maxillary reaches to behind middle of eye. A
moderately strong spine, with a pair of smaller ones on either side,
at the pre-opei'cular angle. Both jaws with narrow bands of
villiform teeth, the outer row of which is enlarged ; a few much
stronger teeth, on either side of the symphyses, and pointing
directly forwards ; narrow bands on the palatines, and an obtusely-
angular band on the vomer. Dorsal spines weak, the last the
longest, not nearly so long as the anterior rays, and equal to the
distance between the tip of the snout and the hind margin of the
eye : anal commences beneath the 9th dorsal ray ; its rays are
longest anteriorly. The pectoral fin is scarcely the length of the
head. Ventrals reach to beyond the origin of the anal fin : caudal
foi-ked. Scales of the body moderate ; those of the head, and back
to the origin of the dorsal, small ; anal and caudal scaly. Lateral
line with an upward curve to beneath the dorsal spines, whence it
runs straight with a downward slant to the fork of the caudal.

Bright golden-brown washed with purplish-bronze ; nine lighter-
colored longitudinal narrow bands on the sides, parallel to the
lateral line.

A single specimen measuring 7i inches, trawled on Shark Reef
dui-ing the month of July forms the type of this handsome and very
distinct species. Registered number in the Australian Museum
collection, B. 7,334.

448 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Dr. Cox exhibited a Cup made of Cocoanut, which had been used
for baling Kava out of the large bowl in which it is mixed. The
interior was from long use coated with a thin, bj-ight, and iridescent
surface, corresponding to the thick porcellanous deposit which lines
the larger vessels.

Mr. Prince exhibited a fine specimen, 10 inches in diameter, of
the nidamentax'y capsule or "shell" of Aryonauta nodosa, var.
pacifica, washed ashore at Manly. Also a large Orange Cowrie,
Cijprvna aurantia, \^ inches in length, from Fiji.

Surgeon-Major Williams exhibited a collection of arms and
implements from the Soudan, including javelins, shield of hippo-
potamus hide, cxirved and double-edged knives of fine steel, a
throwing stick like the Australian "fighting boomerang," camel-
sticks for driving, hats, rosaries always of 33 pieces, phylacteries
containing a verse of the Koran and worn round arm or neck, a
purse, and a sort of skewer used as a comb.

Mr. MacMahon exhibited specimens of highly micaceous sand-
stone from North Shore.

Mr. Macleay exhibited a fine specimen of a Carboniferous fossil,
Aviculopecten, found on the beach at Double Bay, and supposed to
have been dropped there by a previous possessor.

Mr. Macleay also exhibited a section of a branch of an Orange
Tree, completely perforated by the larva of a longicorn beetle. Also
three specimens of a beetle found in the perforated wood. The
exhibit had been sent by Mr. M. de Meyrick, a Member of the
Society, who stated that many Orange trees had suffered in the
same way in the neighbourhood of Peni'ith. Mr. Macleay said
the injury was caused by the larva of MonoJimmmts Jistulator,
a grub destructive to all kinds of fruit trees, but as far as his expe-
rience went its ravages were confined to old or decaying trees, and

NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 44 9

it would be intoresting to kiiovv if in any instance it had been found
to attack young and vigorous plants. The accompanying beetles
were Heteronierous Insects of the genus Amarygmus, and were not
in any way the cause of the injury to the tree.

Mr. Brazier exhibited specimens of the following rare shells,
Paryphanta Hochstetteri, Trophon Cheesema7ii, Pisania Jlavescens,
and Patmella Jlava from New Zealand. Also two specimens of
an Astreopora from Garden Island, Port Jackson.

Mr. Ramsay exhibited specimens of Menura Victorke, male and
female, with nest and egg, from Port Phillip.

Mr. Douglas-Ogilby exhibited specimens of the fishes described
in his paper.

Mr. A. Sidney Olliff exhibited specimens and sketches oiCryp-
tommatus Janso7ii, Matt., a curious beetle which was found under
the fur of the common rat in Tasmania, and said that he believed
new and interesting species with similar habits might be found in
Australia if the smaller mammals were examined when freshly
killed. Two allied species were known from Peru, one of which
was found in the fur, and also in the nests of mice. The specimens
exhibited were captui-ed by Mr. A. Simson and had been obtained
from Mr. Morton of the Hobart Museum.

WEDNESDx\Y, SOth SEPTEMBER,

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M.A., E.G. S., in the chair.

Mr. Septimus Lindlcy was introduced as a visitor.

MEMBER ELECTED.

Mr. Marriott Woodhouse.

DONATIONS.

" Abstract of Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania."
August 11th, 1885. From the Society.

"The Johns Hopkins University Circulars." Vol. IV., No.
41. July, 1885. From the University.

"Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History." Vol.
VIII., No. 2. July, 1885. From the Society.

" Science." Vol. VI., Nos. 126-132. From the Editor.

*' Report of Progress of the Geological and Natural History
Survey and Museum of Canada." 1882-1884, with maps.
" Catalogue of Canadian Plants." Part II. Gamoi)etal3D. From
the Geological and Natural History Survey and Museum of
Canada.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger." VIII. Jahrg, Nos. 200, 201,202.
From the Editor.

DONATIONS. 451

" Eeport of the Trustees of the Public Library, Museums and
National Gallery of Victoria." 1884. From the Trustees.

" Bulletin de la Societe Royale de Geographic d'Anvers." Tome
IX., 6th Fascicule, 1885. From the Society.

" Transactions of the Entomological Society of New South
Wales." Vol. I., Parts 2 and 3, 1864. "Transactions of the
Zoological Society of London." Vol. V., Part 5 ; Vol. VI.,
Parts 1, 2, 4-8 ;. Vol. VIL, Parts 1-5 ; Vol, IX., Parts 7-10 ;
Vol. X., Part 2. " Transactions of the Entomological Society of
London." 3rd Series, Vol. I., Parts 1-6. "Journal of the Linnean
Society." Zoology, Vol. XT., Nos. 53-56 ; Vol. XII., Nos. 58-64 ;
Vol. XIII., Nos. 65-72 ; Vol. XIV., Nos. 73-4. Botany, Vol.
XEIL, Nos. 66-72 ; Vol. XIV., Nos. 75-9 ; Vol. XV., Nos. 82,
84-8; Vol. XVL, Nos. 89-97. "Transactions." Vol. XXVL,
Part 4; Vol. XXVII., Part 1. "Vegetation of the Chatham
Islands." By Baron F. von Mueller, K.C.M.G. " Mouogratia
del Genere Notidanus." By Eobert Lawley. " On the Structure
and Developement of Peripatus capensis." By H. N. Moseley,
M.A. "On the Structure and relations of the Alcyonarian
Heliopora ccerulea, with some account of the Anatomy of a species
of Sarcophyton, — Notes on the structure of species of the genera
Millepora, Pocillipora and Stylaster, and Remarks on the affinities
of certain Palaeozoic Corals." By H. N. Moseley, M.A. " Certain

vegetable organisms found in coal from Fordel." By J. H.

Balfour, M.D., F.L.S. From Dr. James C. Cox, F.L.S.

" Memoires de la Comite Geologique a St. Peterbourg. Vol. I.,

Nos. 1-4. Vol. II., No. 1, 1883-5. Bulletins 1883-5. From the

Director.

" Catalogue of Books added to the Radcliffe Library, Oxford

University, during the year 1884. From the Oxford University

Museum.

"Victorian Naturalist." Vol. II., No. 5, September, 1885.

From the Field Naturalist's Club of Victoria.

" The Provincial Medical Journal." Vol. IV., No. 44. From

the Editor.

452 DONATIONS,

" Feuille cles jennes Naturalistes." No. 178. From the Editor.

" Abstract of Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania."
September, 1885. From the Editor.

" Systematic Census of Austi-alian Plants." By Baron Ferd.
von Mueller, K.C.M.G. Second Annual Supplement (for 1884).
From the Author.

" Memoirs of the California Academy of Sciences." Vol. I.,
Parts 1 and 2. " Catalogue of Pacific Coast Fungi." " Proceed-
ings." Vols. I., II., IV., v., VI., YLL Part 1. From the
Society,

"Catalogue of the Australian Hydroid Zoophytes." By W.
M. Bale. From the Trustees of the Australian Museum.

" Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard
College Cambridge (Mass.)." Vol. XI., No. 11, Vol. XII , No. 1.
From the Museum.

PAPERS READ.

REMARKS ON THE DECAY OF CERTAIN SPECIES
OF EUCALYPTI.

By K, H. Bennett, Esq.

In a recent issue of the Sydney Mail, [ noticed mention of a
paper lately read by the Rev. Peter McPherson at a Meeting of
the Royal Society, on the decay of our Forest Trees, and I observe,
that gentleman advances the theory that this decay is caused by
the opossums.

From personal observation on this subject I am convinced that
to a great extent, at any rate — such is the case. The portion of
the neighbouring Colony of Victoria (Gipps Land) in which I
resided some five and twenty years ago, at that time swarmed
with these animals. Some idea of their numbers may be formed
when I state that just before I left that locality I knew of a party
of four men, who undertook to procure a quarter of a million skins,
and I subsequently heard from a friend who still resides there that
they obtained the required number in a comparatively short time.
The increase in the numbers of opossums had been going on for
some years pi'ior to the period of which I speak, in consequence of
the great decrease in the numbers of the natives who were formerly
very numerous, and these animals formed their chief article of food.
It was not until the opossums had become exceedingly plentiful
that their injurious efi'ect on the trees was apparent to any great
extent, and my attention was drawn to the dead and dying
Eucalypts ; the cause I soon discovered to be the opossums and I
noticed that almost without exception the trees attacked were
either Red Gum, E. rostrata or Yellow Box, E. mellidora.

454 ON THE DECAY OF CERTAIN SPECIES OF EUCALYPTI.

From my observations it appeared to me that at certain periods
of the year, the leaves of one or other of these trees became more
palatable to the opossums and they would i-esort night after night
to one or more of them in numbers, (I have counted over 30 at
one time) until almost all the leaves were devoured, and what few
remained were jagged and mutilated. The opossums would then
seek fresh trees, and in the course of a month or so, the first ones
would throw out a profusion of tender shoots which would again
attract the opossums until the whole were eaten off and so on for
some two or three months, the growth of shoots becoming less each
time, until the tree succumbed and died of exhaustion.

The side of the tree up which the opossum ascended (always the
same) would be deeply furrowed by their claws, the branches
stained, and in fact the whole tree strongly impregnated with the
foetid odour of the urine of these animals, which it is possible may
also have had an injurious efiect on the trees. As far back as the
period I have mentioned hundreds of ti'ees were killed from the
above cause, and the efiect, then unnoticed by the casual observer
in the boundless expanse of forest, has in the course of years become
apparent to everyone. As I before remarked it was chiefly E.
rostrata and E. mellidora that were attacked, and I have since
seen numbers of the same trees, in N. S. Wales killed from the
same cause, whilst it is worthy of mention that although both are
plentiful in the vicinity of Melbourne, none are observed to die
there in a similar manner, which I am of opinion is due to the fact
that there are no opossums there.

DOUBLE FLOWERS.

By Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L S.

Mr. Bentliam, in his introduction to the Flora Ausiraliensts,
remarks that " Double Flowers are in most cases an accidental
deformity or monster in which the ordinary number of petals is
multiplied by the conversion of stamens, sepals, or even carpels
into petals, by the division of ordinary petals, or simply by the
addition of supernumerary ones." Whatever may be the cause of
the phenomenon (whether from the influence of cultivation, hybrid-
ization through the agency of insects, or atmospheric changes),
such flowers are highly esteemed by florists, not merely on account
of their size and showiness, but because they produce their flowers
annually without any diminution of what is considered their beautv.
This arises from the fact that the plants are not weakened by the
ripening of seed as in the case of single flowers, which in many
species are found to blossom less abundantly every second or third
year. Botanists and Horticulturists difier very much in their
estimate of double flowers, for whilst the former regard them as
" monstrosities" or deviations from their original. type, the latter
look upon them as ornamental and desirable for cultivation.
Whilst, in Europe, the peach, the cherry, and the hawthorn have
long been known for the abundance of double flowers which they
frequently yield, few double flowers have as yet been found amongst
Australian plants, especially in a wild state. Ruhus rosifoUus
(Sin. Ic. PI., t. 60) a species widely spread over the warmer regions
of Africa and Asia, is common to Queensland, N. S. Wales, and
Victoria, and has long been known for its double or semi-double
flowers ; but perhaps of all orders in Australia, no one has such a
tendency to produce them as the Epacrids. Epacris purpurasceas
(R. Br.) was one of the first found in that state, having been
noticed many years since on Elizabeth Farm near Parramatta, and
30

456 DOUBLE FLOWERS,

subsequently by Mr. Statham at the North Rocks. E. ?>iicro2)hylla
(R. Br.) was found double at the North Shore and Manly Beach;
and Mr. C. French has collected in Victoria double flowers of U.
impressa (Latreille), SjorengeUa incarnata (Sm.) and Astroloma humi-
fusum (R. Br.) It seems that the Epacrids have attractions for
bees and other insects, and hence the probability that such flovvers
are peculiarly liable to suffer from hybridization, and that the
stamens being deprived of their pollen are left to develop them-
selves into petals. Next to the Epacrids, some of the Ranunculaceae
seem most subject to deviate from their normal form and to aflord
instances of multiplicate and full flowers, but the causes remain
yet to be investigated, for such flowers have been found in a wild
state on both sides of the Dividing Range. If, as some horticul-
turists affirm, a moderate supply of moisture, a superabundance of
decomposing organic matter, and the greatest possible exposure to
sun-light are calculated to pi'omote an extraordinary development
of the floral envelopes, it may be conceived that certain species of
Ranunculus, even in a state of nature, are liable to such contin-
gencies. The species seen most frequently with double flowers is
Ranunculus lappaceus (Sm.), and very lately Mr. F. Burnell
collected in the neighbourhood of Tirana some specimens of the
small variety 2^i^^'2^'^'>^^iWo^^^s (Benth.), but which some botanists
regard as distinct. This elegant little plant is only a few inches in
height, and is characterised by spreading hairs, and scapes with a
solitary bract. It is very probable that other species of Ranuncuhos
may yet be found double, for R. aconitifolkcs (Willd.), R. illyricus
(Willd.), R. asiaticus (Willd.), R. repens (Willd.), R. acris
(Willd.) and R. palustris (Dec.) — some of which are nearly allied
to Australian species — are well known in Europe for their full
flowers, whilst one of them is subject to so many varieties that it
has obtained the name of the " florists flower." The genus Erio-
stemon, whicli is one of the most admired of the Rutacete, may also
reward the horticulturist with showy flowers under cultivation, for
Baron F. von Mueller has already recorded B. ohoval'is (A. Cunn.)
which is common to N. S. Wales, Victoria, and Tasmania, as being
a very beautiful plant when seen with double flowers in its native

BY REV. W. WOOLLS, PH.D. F.L.S. 457

wilds. The flowers of Boronia pinnata (Sm.) are liable to variation
in size and colour, and appear according to Mr. Beatham to be
sexually dimorphous; and therefore it seems probable that they
may yet be found with the filaments in a transition state. The
Rev. L. P. Atkin, M.A., reports that the native Convolvulus {G .
eruhescens (Sims.) has occasionally double flowers, and the writer
of these remarks has found Wahlenbergia gracilis (A. Dc.) in a
similar condition, which is still more remarkable, as the species so
soon loses its stamens after flowering. But hexe again analogy leads
to the supposition that such might be the case, especially when
species are under cultivation, as the allied genus Campanula has
several varieties with double flowers. In considering this subject
it is evident that much remains to be learned as to the causes of
the phenomenon itself, for though it is usually said that it arises
from " hybridization aided by cultivation," it is evident from the
examples quoted, that in Australia native plants sometimes become
double without any cultivation ; whilst again it is a fact that some
genera are more susceptible of such eccentricity than others. It
would be interesting to ascertain how far the introduction of
foreign bees into Australia may have contributed to produce
double flowers, for, as far as I am aware, none of the early
Botanists have made any allusion to them, Sir W. Macarthur
having been the first to notice the double Epacris purpurascens,
and Baron F. von Mueller the first to record the fact respecting
that and another species of the same genus (Frag. Phyt. Aust.,
Vol. VIII., p. 56). Bees are well known to exercise a wonderful
influence on cultivated plants, and it is probably due to their
carrying the pollen of one kind of flower to another, that, in
certain cucurbitaceous species, some of the favourite varieties of
former days have died out. Some of the monstrosities and strange
appearances in flowers ai-e in point of fact diseases occasioned by
the ravages of insects ; and fasciateci, branches which result from an
abnormal development of the leaf buds, arise from accident or some
\inknown cause. Amongst cultivated plants Xylophylla longifoUa
(Linn.) and Gelosia cristata (Willd.) aff'ord instances of this strange
growth, and amongst the wild flowers in the neighbourhood of

458 DOUBLE FLOWERS.

Sydney Goodenia heterophylla (Sm.) has been noticed in the same
fasciated state. It is clear, therefore, that deviations from their
typical character in flowers are not always due to cultivation, and
that, in all probability, insects play an important part in the
matter. The subject is one of interest to the Florist, and I may
add to the Entomologist, for, as the late Mr. W. S. Macleay used
to say " the affinities of plants may sometimes be traced by the
presence of particular insects"; whilst it may fairly be assumed
that the development of double flowers, as the result of hybridi-
zation and some other caixse, points in a similar direction, viz., the
agency of insects. My object in offering these remarks is to direct
the attention of collectors to the abnormal growth in flowers, as
they are sometimes seen in their native state. Persons engaged in
collecting search only for perfect specimens and pass over any that
deviate much from their types. These deviations, however, are not
devoid of interest, and a greater knowledge of them may lead to a
better understanding of the anomalies to which I have referred.

OCCASIONAL NOTES ON PLANTS INDIGENOUS IN
THE IMMEDIATE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF SYDNEY.

No. 9.
By E. Haviland, F.L.S.

The plant forming the subject of this paper is Lyonsia reticulata.
It belongs to the order Apocynece. The order is not veiy largely-
represented in Australia ; affording but fourteen genera in all the
Australian Colonies; and the genus Lyonsia but ten species ; five
of which are found in N. S. Wales. Two of these, L. reticulata
and L, lilacina, in the County of Cumberland. Lyonsia reticulata
appears to me to be somewhat rare, or at all events not plentiful.
Of course the experience of other botanists may be different to my
own. I have however, for the last two years, made a very diligent
search for it, not only within six or seven miles of Sydney, but
also in the country about Parramatta. Yet I have found but
one plant, and that within a mile of Sydney. Fortunately I have
been able to obtain a good supply of flowers for study from that
plant. Dr. Woolls has since kindly informed me of one or two
other localities where it may be found. If I am correct in my
supposition that the plant is comparatively rare, it confirms my
previous experience, and what I suppose is the experience of
others, that as a rule, self-fertilised plants are so. Darwin points
to this probability, both in his *' Fertilization of Orchids," and his
*' Effects of Cross-fertilisation in the Vegetable Kingdom." In the
first mentioned work he says, " Whether any species which is now
never cross-fertilised, will be able to resist the evil eflects of long
continued self-fertilisation, so as to siirvive for as long an average
period as the other species of the same genera which are habitually
cross-fertilised, cannot of course be told." Lyonsia reticulata is a
strong climber, and appears, where it is found, to attach itself to

460 NOTES ON PLANTS INDIGENOUS TO SYDN^EY,

almost any forest tree ; ascending to a height of forty-feet or
more ; and although the single plant that I have found near
Sydney has attached itself to a comparatively low shrub, Lambertia
formosa, it can be seen by its many convolutions that it is of great
length. It bears small white flowers in panicles. The calyx:
monosepalous, its five lobes densely pubescent, the tube thiok, and
adnate by its lower [jortion with the ovary. Corolla mouopetalous,
its lobes somewhat longer than the tube, very much reflexed and
densely pubescent. Stamens five, attached to the tube of the
corolla. Anthers sagittate. Disk of five veiy distinct lobes or
teeth. Ovar}- two-celled, divided by a thin septum, upon each
■ side of which a peltate placenta bears the ovules.

The flower is in all respects a very curious and interesting one.
The style and stigma, when freed from the closely lying anthers,
have the appearance of having been turned in a lathe, or moulded
in an ornamental manner. The stamens starting from the corolla
tube, cross at once to the base of the style, then forming a ring
round it, ascend, till the five large anthers lie closely together on
the inclined surface of the stigma. The anthers are very long,
being produced both above and below the pollen cells ; and lying
so closely round and upon the stigma, form a compact conical roof,
with the base or eaves spreading out below so far from the stigma,
as to quite protect it and the pollen from rain and dew. In fact,
they adhere so closely to it, that it is a very difficult matter to
separate them without tearing them. Botanically described, the
anthers form an exserted cone ; but I think I may convey a better
idea of their appearance, by [saying that they are like a half-opened
umbrella, the style forming the handle, and the filaments and
anthers the ribs and covering.

I have examined a great many flowers of this plant, in diflferent
stages as regards maturity ; but have not met with an instance in
which the anthers had separated, so as to expose the stigma, until
after fertilisation had been effected. The pollen cells are of course
inside the cone, and rest on the surface of the stigma. In every
instance, in fully opened flowers, I have found the stigma mature
and viscid and covered with pollen from its own anthers, the pollen

BY E. HAVILAND, P.L.S. 461

however not being in great abundance. As this careful protection
of the pollen and stigma exists until the flower has withered, I
can only arrive at the conclusion that the plant is closely self-
fertilised. While however I say this, I wish to repeat, that I
have only had the opportunity of examining the flowers of a single
plant. There is therefore just a possibility of plants existing which
at some stage or other 0[)en their flowers and thus expose them to
cross-fertilisation, Bentham however mentions the exserted coue
of anthers as common to the whole genus.

It is impossible to examine the flowers of different plants ,
without being struck with the difference in their various
pollens. In some cases the grains are powdery, loose and diy,
and liable, one would think, to absorb moisture readily. In
others waxy and more likely to repel it. I am strongly impressed
with the idea, that in cases where the anthers and pollen are so
carefully shielded, as in Lyonsia, there is another purpose to be
served than the self -fertilisation of the plant. There are so many
plants known to be cross-fertilised, and yet which have their
anthers very carefully shielded ; that the conviction is forced upon
one, that the primary intention is to preserve the pollen from
injury by rain or dew, in cases where it is absorbent and likely to
be injured. In the case before us, Lyonsia reticulata, as I have
already said, the backs of the anthers form so complete and
compact a roof to the pollen-cells, that it would seem impossible even
for a heavy shower to injure the pollen. In the genus Cryptandra,
and especially in G. amara, the very small petals are hood-shaped,
completely covering the anthei-s, until after the pollen is
ripe ; while it is quite possible for small insects to obtain access to
it from below. There are too, hundreds of cases in which at
might, when dew is likely to fall, flowers not only close,
but droop ; thus inverting the corolla, and making a roof of it to
protect the anthers and pollen.

Acting on the supposition that the intention is to protect the
pollen of those plants which would be injured by moisture ; I
selected that of three plants, Lyoiisia reticulata, Cryptandra a.mara

462 NOTES ON PLANTS INDIGENOUS TO SYDNEY.

and Correa speciosa, in order to notice the comparative effect of
moisture on their pollen. In the first two the anthers and pollen
are protected, in the last they are fully exposed. I placed each
kind of pollen in a watch-glass, in a dry place, till I supposed that
as nearly as possible they were equally free from moisture ; and
then sprinkled them lightly upon the surfaces of three basins of
water. That of Lyonsia became saturated and sank level with the
water in a few minutes. That of Cryptandra in two hours. That
of Correa remained floating upon the surface till the following day
as though a film of air intervened between it and the water. The
effect upon pollen, becoming saturated so readily as that of Lyonsia,
would no doubt, especially under a warm sun, be to cause it to
swell and burst in an irregular manner, in place of emitting
pollen-tubes in the usual way ; and this would destroy its fertilising
power, for it is essential to the conveyance of the particles of
fovilla3 to the ovule, that the pollen grains be kept intact ; so
that it shall escape by means of the pollen-tubes only. In an
experiment with fresh pollen taken from the same three plants, the
result was the same, with the exception, that the time required
for the saturation of the pollen of Lyonsia and Cryptandra was
longer, but still in the same order as in the previous trial.

I must say, that as these experiments were made under
some difficulty, and in rather a rough way, I do not consider them
conclusive, I merely mention them as a suggestion to any one who
may be inclined to carry them out in a more perfect way. It is
however, my intention during the present summer to make many,
more carefully, in the same direction.

NOTES ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF SOME AUSTRA-
LIAN SHARKS AND RAYS, WITH A DESCRIPTION
OF RHINOBATUS BOUGAINVILLE I, Miill. and Henle.

By J. Douglas-Ogilby,
Senior Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

Having had occasion lately to overlook the collection of Sharks
and Rays in the Australian Museum, I have thought that the
following notes may ])rove of interest to ichthyologists, especially
to those who have made a study of our palseichthyan forms. It
will be seen, that in two instances, [those of Scyllium maculatum
and Rhinohatus granulatus] I differ in my identification from
those who have preceded me in this branch, and from the exami-
nation of numerous specimens, both in the Australian Museum
and in that of the Hon. Wm. Macleay, I am convinced that
neither of these species occur so far south as the New South
Wales coast, where their place is taken by my recently described
Scyllium anale, and by Miiller and Henle's Rhinohatus bougain-
villei, of which latter the habitat was previously unknown, I
have also the pleasure in this paper of adding two new genera to
the Australian fauna, viz., Rhynchohatus djeddensis, Forsk., which
appears to be not uncommon, but has hitherto been mixed up
with Rkinobatus ; and Pieroplaiea of which I came across a fine
specimen caught near Cape Hawke, by Mr. J. Brown, and which
is as yet undescribed. The addition of Tceniura lynima is also
worthy of notice, though its previous discovery, on the south
coast of New Guinea rendered its Australian record a mere
matter of time ; our specimen is from Cape York, and was
collected by Mr. Walter Powell.

464 ON SOME AUSTRALIAN SHARKS AND RAYS,

Carcharias crenidens. Klunz.

Some months ago I received from Mr. Henry Smithurst a small
specimen of this shark which had been taken by hook at the
Burnett River Heads ; it is barely 12 inches long, yet shows no
sign of the umbilical sac, and I conclude therefore that this
species never attains a large size. I doubt the possibility of its
specific separation from C. acutus, Riipp., with which I had
previously identified the small example in question.

ScYLLiUM anale. Ogilby.

This species seems to be common in the neighbourhood of Port
Jackson, but has been confounded with S. maculatum, Bl., from
which it may at once be distinguished by the separation of the
nasal valves. I have examined about a score of examples up to
this time, but have not found a single specimen of Bloch's species
which must, I think, be excluded from the New South Wales list.

Chiloscyllium ocellatum, (Gmel).

The Australian Museum possesses a specimen of this fish
caught in Port Jackson ; it must, therefore, be included in future
in the Fauna of this colony.

Rhinobatus bougainvillei. M. & H.

Preoral space 1| in the distance, between the tip of the snout
and the vent ; snout moderately produced ; interorbital space con-
cave, contained five times in the length of snout. Anterior nasal
valve continued inwards by a short fold. Rostral ridges narrow.

BY J. DOUGLAS-OGILBY. 465

closely approximating in their anterior two-tliirds. Mouth arched'
teeth small, in about 90/80 rows ; lower jaw with a central
depression, on each side of which the teeth are much longer than
elsewhere. A row of short depressed spines along the median
line of the back, continued between the dorsals ; a few short
blunt spines on the shoulders, and at the upper anterior and
posterior angles of the orbits, and a pair on the tip of the snout
above. Skin of the lower surface of the rostrum with minute
spines pointing backwards ; a similar patch on the anterior angles
of the pectorals above and below ; remainder of the cuticle
smooth.

Colors . Yellowish-brown above ; dirty-white below.

This is the common Rhinohatus of the New South Wales coast,
and is found at least as far north as Cape York, where its range
overlaps that of R. granulatus, as is proved by a specimen of the
latter being contained in the same bottle with several of the
former in the Macleay Museum, and all labelled from the above-
mentioned locality.

Rhynchobatus djbddensis. (Forsk).

This fine species seems to be moderately common in the
neighbourhood of Port Jackson, but though differing so plainly
from Rhhiobatics, has nevertheless been somehow confounded with
the common shovel-nosed Eay, described above. The Australian
Museum possesses a stuffed specimen from the harbour, which
measures fully seven feet long.

TiENIURA LYMMA. (Forsk).

As mentioned previously there is in the Museum an authenti-
cated example from Cape York.

466 ON SOME AUSTRALIAN SHARKS AND RAYS.

Pteroplatea AUSTRALIS.
Thanks lo Mr, J. Brown, of Cape Hawke, I am enabled to
include in this paper a record of this fine new species, which will
be described next meeting by Mr. Ramsay and myself. We
propose to name it Pteroplatea australis.

Aetobatis narinari. (Euph).
Must in future be included in the New South Wales fauna, two
specimens having been sent to the Museum from Cape Hawke
along with the preceding species.

CONTRIBUTIONS TOWARDS A KNOWLEDGE OF THE
COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA.

By a. Sidney Olliff,
Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

No. I. — New Species of CARABiDiE.

Lacordairia terrena, sp. n.

Black, shining, somewhat depressed ; prothorax impunctate,
slightly constricted behind, with a deeply impressed median line,
the margins I'eflexed ; elytra moderately strongly striate, the
interstices rather narrow, flat and impunctate.

Head narrow, impunctate. Antennae moderately long, the first
three joints pitchy, the following ones dark reddish testaceous,
the basal joint rather long, the second much shorter, the third
somewhat longer, the following joints of about equal length,
covered with fine yellow pubescence. Prothorax slightly trans-
verse, the anterior angles rounded, the basal fovese well marked.
Elytra moderately broad, slightly convex, with narrow reflexed
margins, a minute fovea on the second stria, just before the
middle. Underside black, with a greenish tinge, shining,
impunctate. Legs black, the trochanters, tips of the tibiae and
tarsi reddish testaceous. Length, 5 mm.

Mount Kosciusko, New South Wales (5700 feet).

A single specimen, which I conclude from its broad anterior
tarsi to be a male, was obtained by Mr. Edward Meyrick in
January last, near the summit of Mount Kosciusko. The species

468 NEW SPECIES OP CARABIDiE,

may at once be known by its small size, robust form ; by its
comparatively narrow prothorax being a little constricted behind ;
by its closely and distinctly striated elytra ; and by the colour of
its antennae and legs.

I am by no means satisfied with the position assigned by Count
de Castelnau to his genus Lacordairia. It appears to me that
notwithstanding the great development of the palpi its affinities
are more with the later tribes of the Geodephaga, such as the
Anchomeninse, than with the Pamboridse from which it is widely
sepai'ated by having the intermediate coxal cavities enclosed by
the sterna and the epimeron not reaching the coxa. The head is
furnished with two supra-orbital punctures. I am not able to
come to any definite conclusion as to the position of the genus as
I have no specimens available for dissection. I hope, however, to
enter more fully into the subject hereafter.

Xanthoph^a pallida, sp. n.

Elongate, pale testaceous, shining ; head rather long, con-
siderably narrowed behind the eyes ; prothorax moderately
strongly constricted behind ; elytra not very strongly punctate-
striate.

Head impunctate ; eyes black, very pi-ominent. Antennae
moderately long, the basal joint thickened, the second very short,
the third about as long as the first, the following joints pubescent
and of nearly equal lengths. Prothorax very slightly longer than
broad, narrowed and moderately constricted behind, with narrow
reflexed lateral margins ; the anterior angles obtuse ; the median
line distinct. Elytra about twice as long as the head and
prothorax together, narrower in front than behind, moderately
strongly and closely punctate-striate, the interstices rather broad,
slightly raised, and sparingly and not very distinctly punctured ;
humeral angles not prominent. Underside and legs coloured as
above ; tips of the mandibles and claws pitchy. I^ength, 1 1 mm. ;
greatest width, 4^ mm.

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 469

King George's Sound, West Australia ; Bateman's Bay, New
Soutli "Wales. Under bark.

This fine Xanthophcea will readily be recognised by its uniform
testaceous colour, smooth surface and narrowly margined pro-
thorax.

Genus Plagiotelum.

Solier in Gay's Hist, de Chile, Zool. IV., p. 132 (1849).

The species which I here refer to this genus, hitherto only
known from Chili and Port Famine, near the Straits of Magellan,
is interesting as being a new and striking example of an
Australian form, finding its nearest ally in a genus from the west
coast of South America.

Plagiotelum opalescens, n. sp.

Testaceous, shining, with bright green reflections ; head and
prothorax bright metallic green, the latter with the sides only
slightly narrowed behind ; elytra iridescent, moderately strongly
striate, the apex dark green.

Head considerably longer than broad, narrowed behind,
impunctate, the antennal impressions distinct ; . epistoma truncated
in front. Antennae reddish testaceous, the basal joint moderately
long, the second very short, the third longer than the following
joints which are covered with fine pubescence. Prothorax a little
broader than long, slightly narrowed behind, finely aciculate near
the sides; anterior angles very slightly produced; the lateral margins
rather strongly reflexed ; the median line not very distinct.
Elytra moderately convex, about twice as long as the head and
prothorax together, a little narrower in front than behind, rather
strongly striate, the interstices moderately broad, slightly raised
and impunctate ; humeral angles rather prominent ; the lateral
margins reflexed. Underside bright metallic green, with bluish
reflections ; the sides of the head and sterna extremely finely

470 NEW SPECIES OF CARABID^,

aciculate. Legs pale reddish testaceous, apical halves of the
femora and the tips of the tibite dusky. Length, 9 mm. ; greatest
width, 3^ mm.

Mount Wellington, Tasmania (.3000 feet).

Differs from Plagiotelum irinum, Solier (1. c. Atlas, pi. 1, fig. 3)
in colour and marking, in having the sides of the prothorax
straighter and less narrowed behind and the elytral strise rather
more distinct. A single specimen of this pretty species was
obtained by Mr. Masters from beneath the loosened bark of
Uucali/ptus.

Catascopus chalydicus, sp. n.

Elongate, metallic green, with steel-blue reflexions ; head and
prothorax tinged with coppery-green ; elyti"a strongly punctate-
striate, the fifth interstice narrow, the seventh costiform.

Head rather broad, strongly aciculate longitudinally on each
side at the anterior margin, strongly and sparingly punctured on
the basal half; clypeus coppery, finely punctured. Prothorax
considerably broader than long, strongly narrowed and constricted
behind, finely aciculate transversely, a few irregular punctures in
front ; median line moderately sti'ong, impressed just behmd the
anterior margin and at the base ; anterior angles slightly
produced ; the lateral margins narrowly reflexed. Elytra rather
broad, about one and a half times as long as the head and
prothorax together, strongly punctate-striate, the punctures
stronger towards the sides, the interstices, except the fifth and
seventh, rather broad and very slightly convex ; the external
apical angle acute. Underside and legs dark coppeiy green. Length,
15 mm. ; gi-eatest width, 5h mm.

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 471

Richmond River, New South Wales.

IMore nearly allied to Catascopus Chaudoiri than to any other
Australian species, but readily distinguished by its brighter colour,
more robust form and strongly punctured elytra.

No. II. — On a New Species of Rhysodid^.

The following species from the collection of the Macleay
Museum represents a family hitherto unobserved in Australia.

Rhysodes lignarius, sp. n.

Elongate pitchy-black, shining ; head rather broad, impunctate,
with a oblique groove on each side extending from the base of the
antennje to the middle of the posterior margin ; the head con-
siderably swollen behind these grooves ; prothorax narrowed
behind, with a strongly impressed median groove, and an equally
strong slightly out-curved groove on each side extending from the
anterior margin to just before the base ; elytra rather strongly
punctate-striate.

Head with a fine reflexed anterior margin ; eyes moderately
j)rominent. Antennae finely pubescent. Prothorax not much
longer than broad, strongly narrowed behind, impunctate, the
dorsal grooves foveolate at the base ; the sides strongly rounded ;
the posterior angles somewhat acute. Elytra at the base a little
broader than the prothorax ; humeral angles moderately promi-
nent ; each elytron with seven rather strongly punctured striae,
the interstices moderately broad, slighthy convex and impunctate ;
the apex distinctly rugose-punctate, not shining. Underside
coloured as above ; the prosternum irregularly rugose-punctate ;

meso- and metasternum verv strongly punctured at the sides, a
31

472 ON A NEW SPECIES OP RHYSODID/E.

longitudinal impression in the middle containing an ii-regular
row of punctures ; abdominal segments strongly punctured. Legs
pitchy ; anterior tibiae with a short spine near the apex. Length,
7|^mm.

Yass, New South Wales (G. Salting). In rotten wood.

Differs from all the species known to me in its broad form, and
in having its comparatively short prothorax decidedly narrowed
behind. Judging by descriptions it may be separated from the
New Zealand species by having each elytron furnished with seven
striae.

A NEW GENUS OF THE SUB-FAMILY LAMPRIMIDES
OF LACORDAIEE.

By William Macleay, F.L.S., &c.

In a Paper read before this Society at the April meeting of this
yeai', entitled " Revision of the Genus Lamprima of Lati-eille," I
described under the name of Lamprima Muelleri a A^ery beautiful
and distinct female insect of the group, mentioning at the time that I
thought it likely that the discovery of the male would probably prove
it to be generically distinct from Lamprima. My surmise turned out
to be correct. Mr. C. French of the Botanical Museum of Melbourne,
from whom I received the specimen originally described, has now
sent me for inspection a male specimen of what I feel convinced is
the same species. It is I think the most beautiful insect I have
ever seen, not surpassed in brilliancy of metallic lustre and size by
the most gorgeous of the Buprestidse. Though closely allied to
Lamprima, it cannot be placed with it, if Dr. Gestro's genus
Neolamprima be admitted as a genus, for that is undoubtedly
much nearer the typical Lamprima, than the present insect. Dr.
Gestro gives as the only distinctive character of his genus Neolam-
prima the long and many-toothed mandibles. One of these characters
only applies to the present insect for which I propose the name of
PlialacrognatJms from its glabrous mandibles.

This genus may be briefly characterised as follows, in the
absence of other species, for I have often found the inconvenience
of too narrowly defining the boundaries of genera in a country
where fresh species are constantly turning up.

" Mandibles very long, porrect, curving upwards, smooth,
glabrous, and unarmed on the lower and inner edges. Basal
joint of antennse scarcely clavate, and as long as the other joints
combined. Fore tibiae of the male without the foliate spur.

474 A NEW GENUS OF THE LAMPRIMIDES OF LACORDAIRE.

Phalacrognathus Muelleri. Macleay.

Lamprima Muelleri. Proc. Linn. Soc, N". S. Wales, Vol. X.,
p. 135, Female.

Male. Head short, angular before the eyes, emarginate in front,
quite smooth, and of a brilliant dark metallic gi^een. The mandibles
which are of a black colour, exceed in length the head and thorax
conjoined, they have a few minute teeth at the inner base close
to the mouth, and a strong horn pointing upwards close to the
head, from thence they extend forwards, curving upwards in two
long smooth parallel shafts, grooved without and fluted within
and terminate in two broad flattened diverging points ; there
is no vestige of hair or pile.

The thorax is much wider than long, moderately convex and of
a dull brassy hue ; the anterior portion of the sides have a broad
nitid margin, the posterior is crenulated as in the female, the base
is narrowly mai'gined and slightly sinuate, the median line is
almost obsolete. The elytra differ fi'om those of the female,
in being entirely without punctures, in greater brilliancy of
metallic splendour, in having the lateral margin crenulated
for some distance behind the shoulders, and more distinctly
emarginate and narrowed tovvards the apex. The anterior tibise
are strongly toothed externally along their whole length and the
extension of the anterior femur on each side of the knee-joint is
very conspicuous.

Long (niand. inch) 24 lines.

This description must of course be read with my previous one of
the female, as it is only the sexual distinctions which Ihavenowgiven.

I have been unable, I regret to say, to examine the trophi so
closely as I could have wished, as it is impossible even in the case
of insects of such large size, to investigate the parts of the mouth
without dissection, and that of course is out of the question with
unique specimens ; but I believe they vary little from those of
Lmiifrima.

Mr. French has given me no nearer approximation to the habitat
of this magnificent insect than " North Australia."

ADDENDUM TO THE MONOGRAPH OF AUSTRALIAN

SPONGES.

By R. von Lendenpeld, Ph.D.

In the Annals and Magazine of Natui^al History, Ser. 5, Vol. 7,
No. 41, May 1881, p. 37.3-374 H. J. Carter describes a Sponge
from Bass' Straits, which should be placed in the Myxospongise,
and which has been omitted by me.

The specimens at the disposal of Carter were dry, and so as no
reference is made to the structure of the sponge it will remain
doubtful to which genus it should be referred, Oscarella or Halisarca
(in my sense.) I place it provisionally in the former. With this
name it should be added to my previously mentioned Australian
species of Oscarellidse,

OSCARELLA BASSANGUSTIORUM. Von Lendenfeld.
Halisarca Bassangustiorum. Carter (I.e.)

I will give Carter's own description in full as the species is a
very doubtful one. (I.e.)

Among the " dredgings " from Bass' Straits are two more or
less thin, light, corrugated, even-margined, sub-circular specimens,
about an inch in diameter each, one of which is dark purple, almost
black, and the other brown in colour. Both are chai-ged with
globular bodies like cells, about 3|-6,000ths inch in diameter ; but
while these are indistinct in one of them, they are well-defined,
spheroidal and capsular in the other. How far these specimens
may have been brought to this state by exposure in the waves and
on a hot dry beach I cannot say ; but to expect Halisarca after
such exposure to present any of its original features is out of the
question. All therefoi'e, that I can add is that the " brown "
specimen in a smaller state appears, again attached to Dictyocy-
lindrus reticulata (to be described hereafter) from the same locality
and charged with the same kind of spherical capsular bodies (? ova)
where it so far manifests all the appearance of Halisarca, that I can
hardly doubt that both are dried specimens of one and the same.

476 ADDENDUM TO THE MONOGRAPH OF AUSTRALIAN SPONGES.

for which I propose the name above given. Neither becomes
gelatinous when soaked in water, although when dry the brown
specimen presents here and there the appearance of dried glue,
which the dai'k specimen does not. I admit that this description
is not satisfactory; but under the circumstances it cannot be
otherwise ; at the same time it is desirable that it should be
recorded to induce future observation.

Loc, Bass' Sti'aits.

Teiciionella prolifera. Carter,

In Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Sei\ 5, Vol, 15,
Nr. 89, p. 119, foot note. Carter gives a new locality for this
sponge, namely, Port Phillip,

Teichonella labyrintiiica. Carter.

In Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Ser. 5, Vol. 15,
Nr. 86, p. 119-120. Carter describes the ciliated chambers of this
species, and gives a new locality for it, namely, Port Phillip.

The description of the canal system is very remarkable. The
chambers are cylindrical as in the Syconid^e, and there is one large
terminal inhalent pore, and one large exhalent pore on the other
end, likewise terminal. In no other sponge has it hitherto been
observed that the inhalent pore or pores was as large or anything
approaching the size of the exhalent pore, the Chamber Osculum.
This statement therefore must be received with caution. At the
same time Carter states that there are numerous small pores in the
wall of the cylindrical chamber. These are homologous to the
ordinary inhalent pores in the ciliated chambers of other sponges.

I consider it as highly probable that these are actually the
inhalents, that inhalent canals exist between the cylindrical
chambers, and that there is no large vent at one end, or if there is
it is likewise an exhalent pore.

Leucandra catapiiracta. Haeckel.

An exceptionally slender specimen, measuring only 2 mm. in
diameter, has been obtained from Port Stephens (Australian
Museum), and this place has to be recorded as new locality for the
species.

III. ADDENDUM TO THE AUSTRALIAN"
HYDROMEDUS^.

By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

la tlie Proceedings of the Linnean Society of N, S. Wales for
1884, Vol. IX., Pt. 3, p. 534 (1), a list of new localities of five
Australian Hydromedusse is given. One of these is a new species.
The list was written by Kirchenpauer and communicated by F.
Bar. Mueller.

Dr. Kirchenpauer has recently published an essay on Sertularidae
" Nordische Gattungen und Arten von Sertulariden von Dr.
Kii'chenpauer in Hamburg " in the Abhandlungen des Natur-
wissenschaftlichen Vereines in Hamburg, Band. VIII, , Abth. I.,
1884 (2).

In this essay, several new Australian species have been described
and I shall give a list with references to all those below.

Since the " Australian Hydromedusge " have been published in
these Proceedings I have made a few slight alterations and several
additions in Addendum Nos. I. and II., this is the third Addendum
of this kind. The classification used here is the amended one,
published recently in the Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche Zoologie,
Band XLI., Seite 616 ff., (3) by myself.

4/8 ADDENDUM TO THE AUSTRALIAN IIYDROMEDUSiE,

I. SUB-ORDO. HYDROPOLYPIN^

5. FAMILIA. BLASTOPOLYPIN.^.

IV. SUB-FAMILIA. SERTULARIN.E.

9. GENUS. SERTULAKELLA.

20. SPECIES. SERTULARELLA POLYZONIAS. Gray (1) 543.

Recoi'ded as Sei'tularella simplex Hutton from Mount Dromedary,
East Coast of Australia, by KircheniDauer.

26. SPECIES. SERTULARELLA JOHNSTONI. Allman (1) 534.
Recorded as Sertularella Johnstoni Gray from the Richmond
River Heads, East Coast of Australia by Kirclienpauer.

29a. SPECIES. SERTULARELLA MUELLERI. Kirclienpauer (2) 49.

A new tricuspidate species from the Chatham Islands to be
added to the Australian species.

29b. SPECIES. SERTULARELLA PURPUREA. Kirchenpauer (2) 49.
A new tricuspidate species from the Chatham Islands to be
added to the Australian species.

29c. SPECIES. SERTULARELLA SUBDICHOTOMA. Kirchenpauer
(2) 46.

A new tricuspidate species from Bass' Straits, which also occurs
in the Straits of Magellan, to be added to the Australian species.

29d. SPECIES. SERTULARELLA INFRACTA. Kirchenpauer (2) 46.
A new tricuspidate species from Bass' Straits, Hobson's Bay and
Richmond River Heads, to be added to the Australian species.

29e. SPECIES. SERTULARELLA RETICULATA. Kirchenpauer (2) 4o.

A new quadricuspidate species from Bass' Straits to be added to
the Australian species.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 479

13. GENUS. THUIARIA.

42a. species. THUIARIA CARTILAGINEA. Kiiclienpauei- (1) 534,
(2) 25.

A new species from the East Coast of Austi-alia neai" Mount
Dromedaiy to be added to the Australian species.

42b. species. THUIARIA AMBIGUA. Kirchenpauer (2) 25.
A new species from the East Coast of Australia, Sealer's Cove,
to be added to the Australian species.

42c. THUIARIA BIDENS. Allmaii (*), (2) 24.

This species has been described by Kirchenpauer (I.e.) from New
Zealand and has accordingly to be added to the Australian species.

42d. THUIARIA SUBARTICULATA. Coughtry. (**)
A species from New Zealand to be added to the Australian
species, (2) 24.

42e. SPECIES. THUIARIA LICHENASTRUM. Kirchenpauer (2) 22.
SERTULARIA LICHENASTRUM. Pallas.
This species from the Indian and Atlantic Oceans has also been
found in Australia and must accordingly be added to the
Australian species.

42f. species. THUIARIA CERASTIUM. Allman. (***)
This New Zealand species is to be added to the Australian
Hydroids.

7. FAMILIA. PLUMULARID.E,

28. GENUS. AGLAOPHENIA.
116. SPECIES. AGLAOPHENIA RAMOSA. Bale.
A new locality is stated by Kirclienpauer (1) 534 for this
species under the name of Aglaophenia ramosa, Busk ; namely,
Mount Dromedary, east coast of Australia.

(*) Journal of the Linnean Society of London, Vol. XII.
(**) Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, Vols. VII.-VIII,
<***) Jounial of the Linnean Society of London, Vol. 12.

480 ADDENDUM TO THE AUSTRALIAN IIYDROMEDUSiE.

II. SUB-OEDO. HYDROMEDUSIN^.

12. FAMILIA. CAMPANULINID^.
II. SUB-FAMILIA. SERTULARIN.E.
61. GENUS. P0LYSERIA8. Merejkowsky. (*)
SertularinfB, the Hydranths, of whicli are disposed in more than
two series along the stem, (Selaginopsis. Kirchenpauer (2) 7).

ISO. POLYSEEIAS MIRABILIS. Merejkowsky.
P0LY8ERIAS HINCKSJI. Merejkowsky.
DYPHOSIA MIRABILIS. Verill.
SELAGINOPSIS MIRABILIS. Kirchenpauer.
This widely distributed species has been obtained by Verill,
from the coast of New England, and has accordingly to be added
to the Australian species.

62. GENUS. SERTULARIA.
222. SPECIES. SERTULARIA ELONGATA. Lamouroux.

Kii'chenpauer (1) 534 mentions this species under the name of
Sertularia lycopodium, de Lamarck, as occurring at the Richmond
River Heads and near Mount Dromedary.

224a. SPECIES. SERTULARIA MILLEFOLIUM. De Lamarck.

This species was obtained by Kirchenpauer (1) 534 from the
East coast of Australia, near Mount Dromedary, and has
accordingly to be added to the Australian species.

In all one Genus and 13 Species have been added to the
])reviously described Australian ones.

I think it not unlikely that one or the other of Kirchenpauer's
new species may be identical with some described recently by W.
Bale in the " catalogue of the Australian Hydroid Zoophytes."

I think it, howevei', better to leave it to Dr. Kirchenpauer and
Mr. Bale to find this out themselves, as they, being in possession
of the types, are much better able to judge than anyone else.

The total number of Australian Genera is herewith increased to
74, and that of the species to 254.

(*) Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 1S77, September.

A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES.

By R. von Lendexfeld, Ph.D.

Part VI.

THE GENUS EUSPONGIA.

II.-SUB-FAMILIA SPONGIN.E.

Spongidfe of a massive bulbous or irregularly digitate or thick
lamellar shape. Vestibule spaces are developed in a few species
only, and where they are present they ai'e reciproc to those
of the AuleninsB, inasmuch as only inhalent poi-es are found in
their walls, whereas in the Auleninas, either inhalent and exhalent
pores, Oscula ai-e found in them, or there is a tendency towards
converting them into Oscula tubes, by the apertures of the exhalent
canals becoming more numerous in the walls of these spaces than
in other parts of the sponge surface. In those species of Sponginte,
which possess them at all, they are connected with the inhalent
canal system only. Such vestibule spaces have been observed in
Euspongia canaliculata and irregularis, and also in Hippospongia
and some species of Cacospongia.

The skeleton is composed of "main" and "connecting" fibres.
The main fibres are disposed in a radial direction and slightly
branched in a pencillate manner. They are 2-12 times as thick as
the connecting fibres and generally cored with foreign bodies
sand-grains, &c. The connecting fibres are always free from
foreign bodies with the exception of Euspongia silicata. They are

482 A MONOGRAPH OP THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

mostly branched. The ramification is regular or irregular in as
much as in some species all the connecting fibres are of uniform
thickness and form a network with very regular meshes by
continually anastomising with one another ; or there are radial
and tangental connecting fibres distinguished. In that case the
tangental fibres are much thicker and extend from one main fibre
to the other ; the radial ones 2-8 times as the thin and vertical on
the former, extend between the adjacent tangental connecting fibres.
Both these kinds of ramification of the skeleton fibre are observed
in Euspongia species and also in Hippospongia. The connecting
fibres in Cacospongia species are not so much branched as in the
other two genera so that the meshes of the network, which they
form are larger.

Sand and other foreign bodies are often found in abundance in
the surface. The sub-dermal cavities are not very highly developed.
The pore-sieves in some species contain a great many small pores,
in others again only one or two larger ones. In some, narrow canals
lead from the pores into the large tangental canals, which form the
sub-dermal cavity, whei-eas in others the pores open direct into
them.

Internal canal system and the ciliated chambers do not possess
any peculiarities. The chambers measure on an average 0'099 —
0-013 mm., in diameter.

Sensitive cells occur in various parts of the sponge.

In the family Spongidse, Schulze (1) acknowledges six genera,
namely Euspongia Bronn, Hippospongia Schulze, Phyllospougia
Ehlers, Cacospongia Schmidt, Carteriospongia Hyatt and Stelo-
spongia Schmidt. The genera Euspongia, Hippospongia and Caco.
spongia belong to our sub-family Sponginse. The other three genera
comprise sponges, which belong to the next sub-family namely the
Chalinopsinje.

(1) F. E. Schulze. Ueber den Bau unci die Entwickelung der Spongien,
VII. te Mittheilung. Die Familie der Spongidse. Zeitschrift fiir wissen-
fichaftliche Zoologie. Band XXXII., Heft 1.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 483

I have not found it necessary to establish any new geneva in this
sub-family so that it is constituted of the three genera mentioned
above. These are all represented by Australian species, there are
no genera known, which have no Australian representatives.

30. GENUS. EUSPONGIA. Bronn (1).

Sponginre with continuous main fibres. Vestibule spaces are
rarely developed and never cause the sponge to attain the appear-
ance of much curved lamella frequently coalescing as in Hippo-
si)ongia. The meshes of the connecting fibre network are so fine,
that they cannot be distinguished with the naked eye. By this
oui--genus differs from Cacospongia. The thickness of the connecting
fibi'es is also less than in the latter species. The avex-age is O'Ol mm.

The diagnosis of the genus is similar to that given by F. E.
Schulze. Although Bronn was the first to introduce the name, he
meant something different with the word Euspongia than Schulze,
according to Bronn, also Hippospongia species would have to be
considered as belonging to the genus Euspongia.

A great many of the sponges described by vai-ious authors as
species of the old genus Spongia belong to our genus Euspongia, as
a reference to the synonyms will show. Also the genera Ditela
O. Schmidt and Coscinoderma Carter belong to this genus.

Altogether 20 species of sponges can be considered as belonging
to this genus. 8 of these are described for the first time in the
following pages. 15 species of the 20 are Australian. One of
these is cosmopolitan.

I divide the genus Euspongia into 7 sub-genera according to the
differences in the mode of ramifying of the connecting fibres. The
characteristics of these sub-geneva are the following : —
Connecting fibres regularly branched of very varying

diameter (Plate 36, fig. 3. ) 1 . Irregularis

Connecting fibres differentiated into thick tangental

and very thin radial ones (Plate 36, fig. 1.)... 2. Triplids.

(1) Bronn. Die Classen undOrdnungen des Thierreiches. Erste Auflage.

484 A MONOGRAPH OP THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The connecting fiV)res are differentiated into primary
thick long and straight ones, and secundry very
short and exceedingly slender ones (Plate 36,
fig. 6.) 3. Laxifihris.

The connecting fibres form a particularly dense net-
work of thick fibres, with narrow meshes, in
the skin, in the interior they resemble Triplicis
(Plate 36, fig. 5) 4. Ditela.

Connecting fibres regularly branched of uniform

thickness (Plate 36, fig. 2. ) 5. Regularis.

•Connecting fibres thick, meshes of network very

small (Plate 36, fig. 4.) 6. Densalis.

Main and also connectiiig fibres contain in their
axes foreign siliceous spicules but no other
foreign bodies (Plate 38, fig. 1 .) 7. Silicifihris.

These sub-genera have been established by me more for the sake

of convenience than to express real difierences in the relationship

of dififerent species. If we were to adopt them as such however,

we would have to consider their mutual relationship as follows : —

3 Laxifibris, 4 Ditela. 6 Densalis. 7 Silicifihris.

\y

2 Triplicis. 5. Regularis.

1. Irregularis.

I. SUB-GENUS IRREGULARIS.
Euspongia species, the skeleton of which consists of main and
connecting fibres. The latter form a regular and fine network.
Never more than three fibres join at one point. If these three
are of uniform thickness the angles between them are the same.

The distance between two adjacent joining points is also fairly
uniform, so that the meshes are all of uniform size and similar
in shape, were the fibres are of uniform thickness. But we find
that the fibres are very irregular in this respect from the very

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 485

finest, measuring only 0-001 to such, measuring 0-Olmm.; all grada-
tions are formed, and the angles at the joining points of fibres of
unequal thickness are not equal. The fibres are formed in this
■way, that the thinner one grows out from an already existing thick
one. The latter is straight at first, so that then the angles at the
sides of the newly formed thin fibre will be 90° each, and the third
angle 180.°

As the young fibre grows in thickness it drav/s the other fibre
out of its straight course, so that the angles on the sides of the
young fibre increases, whereas the other one decreases. The three
fibres issuing from one joining point lie nearly in a plain, so that
the sum total of the three angles is nearly 360.° The distances
between the joining points of thin fibres are smaller than those
between the joining points of thicker ones, and in consequence of
this the network becomes irregular. Polejaefi"(l) gives a figure cf
thicker and thinner connecting fibres in Luffaria. Our sponges
have a very different skeleton, inasmuch as there are a great many
fibres of intermediate thickness, and not a system of thick and a
system of fine ones, as in that Luffaria.

68. SPECIES. EQSPONGIA IRREGULARIS. Nova species.
In this species I distinguish the following four varieties : —
I. Euspongia irregularis silicata.
II. Euspongia irregularis lutea.

III. Euspongia irregularis tenuis.

IV. Euspongia irregularis Jacksonia.

Shape and Size,

The shape of the different varieties and even of different
individuals of one and the same variety, vary very much, so that
no diagnosis of it can be given.

(1) N. PoUjaeff. The Zoology of the Voyage of H.M.S. Challenger.
Part XXXI. Report on the Keratosa, Plate IX., Fig. 5.

486 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The specimens of Euspongia irregularis silicata are lobate or
massive, but never digitate, sometimes bulbous and spherical.
The lobes are slightly flattened and irregular, large and not
numerous. This variety is small, the largest lobate specimen
measures 120 x 90 mm. The lobes may attain a height of 20 mm.,
and a similar width, they measure about 8 mm. in thickness.

Occasionally no massive central part at all is developed, and
then we meet with different forms. These are lobate, but already
approach towards the digitate forms. They are, however, always
compressed, so that the lobate character is retained, however much
they may resemble digitate forms.

The specimens of Eusjoongia irregularis httea are massive and
irregular without any processes at all. The largest measure to
150 mm. in diametei-.

The specimens of Eiispongta irregularis tenuis possess a very
irregular shape with rounded processes. The extensive vestibule
spaces render this variety similar to Hippospongia. Some of the
specimens of this variety attain a large size, measuring 200 mm,
in the largest diameter, generally, howevei', they are much smaller.

The specimens of Euspongia irregalaris Jacksonia are decidedly
digitate. These sponges have an irregular shape and attain a size
150 mm. in their greatest diameter. The digitate processes which
grow out from the central irregular mass all tend upwards,
they are found particularly well developed on the upper side
of the sponge. Most of them are cylindrical and rounded at
the top. Possessing a circular transverse section these are truly
digitate. A few, however, also appear lobate and irregular. They
attain a length of 30 mm. and are generally 8 mm. thick. Those
which grow out from the side of the sponge are curved, so that
their terminal parts are vertical.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 487

ElGIDITY.

The skeletons are elastic and not very hard. Small specimens,
measuring about 50 mm. across are compressed by the weight of
1 kilogramm, about 15 mm. on an avei-age.

Some specimens of Euspongia irregularis tenuis are much softer,
and one measuring 4:0 mm. was compressed 50%, that is 20 mm.,
by the same weight.

This sub-variety might be used for bathing purposes but seems
to be rare. I have only seen one single specimen which came
from Mauritius.

Eusjjongia irregularis Jacksonia is the hardest of all. .

Colour.

Only the varieties Euspongia irregularis silicata and Jacksonia
have been seen by me in the live state ; their colour is light
brownish yellow, but varies apparently according to the size or
age of the sponges. The largest specimens are very dark in
colour, while the small ones are of a light Melange.

In spirits the colour is fairly well preserved but becomes duller
and lighter.

Beach-worn skeletons differ very much in colour. Those of
Euspongia irregularis silicata are dark dirty greyish brown. Those
of Euspongia irregularis lutea are of a remarkable orange-brown
colour, similar to burnt "siena." The skeletons ot Euspongia
irregularis tenuis are very light in colour.

The very soft specimen from Mauritius referred to above is of a
pretty light brown colour. Others are nearly white, or very light
grey.

The skeleton of Euspongia irregtdaris Jacksonia is dark chest-
nivt.^brown. It is, according to this possible, to distinguish the
varieties of this species from one another by the colour of their
beach-worn skeletons.
32

>."'

488 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

Surface.

The surface of Euspongia irregularis specimens of all varieties
is the same. It is covered by small conuli, close to one another
throughout. vSuch conuli are also observed in the surface of the
vestibule cavities. They are not very regularly disposed, so that
the fields between them become slightly ii-regular. They are on
an average 2 mm. apart and 1 mm. high rounded at the top.
Often two adjacent conuli coalesce whereby the irregularity in the
configuration of the surface is much increased. Sometimes there
are zones 3 mm. in breadth without conuli {Euspongia irregularis
JacJcsonia,) running up one side of the digitate processes in a
longitudinal direction. These ai'e homologous to the ones more
minutely described further on of the species Eus2}ongia ca^iali-
culata ; they are, however, not met with in the other varieties in
so distinct a developement, although also in these indications of
aconulose patches are observed.

The oscula are scattered over the outer surface of the sponge in
an irregular manner. In those specimens which possess aconulous
zones we always find the oscula in these zones. The oscula are
are circular and measure from 1-4 mm, in diameter.

Slightly magnified the surface presents the appearance of a very
regular network. The meshes of this network measure from 0-1-0 "4
mm., in diameter and are always of uniform size throughout the
surface.

In Euspongia irregularis siUcata they are the largest — 0*4 mm.,
and in the variety Jacksonia the smallest, measui'ing 0*1 mm., across.
This network is formed by a system of raised lines on the surface,
which are about as broad as the depressed meshes between them.
In these raised lines an abundance of sand grains and other
foreign bodies is generally met with. These give to the whole
the appearance of a sand net. This sand net is very regular.
Long siliceous spicules are found in it in great masses. These of
course are foreign and only collected and not produced by the
sponge.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 489

The depressed portions of the surface between this network are
the pore sieves. Thin unprotected membranes perforated by the
inhalent pores. These pores are very remarkable and different
from the inhalent pores, usually observed in horny sponges, in as
much as they are very large and few in number. One or two in
each field only. They measure 0'03 mm., on an average in
diameter and are circular.

The canals leading down from them into the body of the sponge
shall be described further on.

This net structure of the surface is developed in a similar manner
in the j&elds between the conuli and on the aconulous portions, as
also in the surface of the vestibule spaces.

It is absent only in the surface of the true canals of the sponges
and consequently a very useful structure in determining which
canals are true canals and which are vestibule spaces.

CANAL SYSTEM.

A, Vestibule Spaces.

As mentioned above, some of the varieties of this species possess
very highly developed vestibule cavities, which however are, as
pointed out above, by no means homologous to those described in my
last paper on Auleninae. As no oscula are met with in their surface
they might be considered as portion of the inhalent system. But
the transision forms which connect these vestibule varieties with
irregular digitate forms without vestibules are of such a natiire as
to preclude their acceptance in this sense. RefeiTing to the
formation of these Auloplegma structures described in my paper
mentioned above I would like to draw the attention of the thinking
reader to the different result attained in the two sub-families
Sponginee and Auleniaee by the further developement of this
interesting structure.

490

A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

This can best be explained by the adjoined tabular description : —

(8a.) The apertures in the wall of
the sack are closed, and tlie secundary
Pseudogaster hereby becomes a true
Oscular tube. At the same time the
Pseudosculum is converted into a
true Osculum. (Dendrilla rosea, Ca-
cospongia Exemjihim termhms. )

(7a.) This folding results in the
formation of an irregular sack, not
quite closetl, however, with a Pseudo-
sculum. Into this sack, which is a
Pseudogaster, only the Oscula open.
Whereas the inhalent pores are found
in the outer surface only {Aphrodite
Nardorus)

(7b.) This folding results in the
formation of an irregular system of
wide Lacunas, Pseudogaster, in the
surface of which no Oscula, but in-
halent Pores exclusively are met
(with. (Euspontjia and Hippo-
spongia.)

(6.) This whole structure again folds itself and a secundary
Pseudogaster is formed thereby, in the surface of which inhalent
pores and Oscula are found {Aulena, Halme and Hcdmopsis.)

(5.) The chambers become regular in shape and the wall of
the sack is folded so as to form an ordinary sponge. The
Pseudogaster is converted into an Oscular tube ; the Pseudo-
sculum into a true Osculum (Leuconidw, Teichonidiv.)

(4.) A Pseudogaster is formed by the Sponge attaining the
shape of a closed sack, in the walls of which the irregular
chambers lie. Small pores lead into the chambers from
without. Their larger excretary pores, chamber Oscula open
into the Pseudogaster (Leucoims.)

(3.) The individuals coalesce to form an irregular mass
imbedded in a Mesoderm. Inhalent and exhalent pores
leading direct into the chambers are scattered irregularly
over the surface. (Aidoplegma.)

(2.) Sponges which consist of a colony of Olynthis, the
individuals of which retain their individuality and Oscula.
(Soleniscus.)

(1.) The whole sponge consists of one single irregular
ciliated chamber, with inhalent pores in its simple wall, and
a chamber Osculum, which at the same time is the Osculum
of the sponge. (Olynthus.)

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 491

This tabular view of the developement of the canal system of
course does not indicate that the species mentioned as examples
are descended from one another. But it shows how the common
gastread ancestor developes into the most highly difFerentiai,ed
sponges by a continued process of folding.

The table is the result of the study of the comparative anatomy
of the canal system. Transition forms are met with throughout.
Of particular interest are those described by me (I) of Cacospongia
exemplum which lead from stage 5 to 8a in a peculiar manner and
the peculiar structure of Aphrodite Nardorus, described by me in
the same paper (2). Some statements regarding the developement
of the canal system of Calcareous sponges will be found in Part
III., of this Monograph (3).

Of particular interest also is Dendrilla rosea (4) in as much as
the oscula tube of this species possesses under its wall, small
sub-dermal cavities, similar to those under the outer skin, only
smaller.

At the time I drew attention to this extraordinary structure, I
do not doubt now, that these sub-dermal cavities are a rudimentary
oi-gan indicating that this oscular tube is being formed from an
inverted portion of the outer skin. It represents one of the last
transision forms between the stages 7a and 8a.

No further developement of the stage 7b has as yet been observed,
but it may be assumed that some sponges with a very highly
developed inhalent canal system, and particularly those which
possess sensitive cells in the diaphrgms which pervade the inhalent
canals, have obtained their inhalent canal system by a secundry
plication of the ectodermal wall.

(1) E. r. Leiuh'vfeld. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges, Part V.
The Auleninse. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales,
Vol. X., parts.

(2) R. V. Lendenfeld. L.c.

(3) R. V. Lendenfeld. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges, Part III.
The Calcispongiffi . Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New ^outh Wales,
Vol. IX., p. 108.3 flf.

(4) R. V. Lendenfeld. Ueber Coelenteraten der Stidsee, II. Mittheilung,
Neue Aplysinidse. Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche Zoologie, Band
XXXVIII., Seite 277.

492 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

So long however as no direct proof for this has been brought
forward, it will be well to suppose that the inhalent canals have
been produced before the sub-dermal cavities and the very constant
pore-sieves on the surface ; and that no secundry process of ramifi-
cation, occurring after the sponges possessed pore-sieves, sub-dermal
cavities, &c., has ever lead to the formation of true inhalent canals
below the skin.

Numerous difficulties present themselves in connection with the
formation of the inhalent canals by implication, and here in the
sponges with complicated sub-dermal cavities particulaily Marshall's
hypothesis of an entodermal oi-igin of these canals may come near
the truth.

While this result of the study of the comparative anatomy of
the canal system corroborates the theory established by F. E.
Schulze (1) that the sponges are ontogenetically formed by a con-
tinued process of folding, to which I referred in my last paper on the
Auleninse (2) ; it shows at the same time that some of the oscular
tubes, and very likely all which are very highly developed and
large, are formed by an invagination of the outer skin and are
accordingly clad with ectodermal cells. The limit between
ectoderm and entoderm need therefore not necessarily be situated
on the margin of the osculum.

Whilst in some Auleninse, particularly Halme, the sand-armour
is developed in the outer skin only, we find here, and also in
Euspongia canaliculata no difierence in the structure of the skin
on the outer surface and in the vestibule spaces of the interior :
the formation of these spaces in Eusjjongia and Hippospongia is a
more recent acquirement.

The development of the vestibule is different in the different
varieties of Euspongia irregularis. In Euspongia irregularis
silicata the vestibules form anastomosing and very much curved

(1) F. E. Schulze. Uiitersuchuugen liber den Bau und die Entwickelung
der Spongien IX., Mittheilung, Die Plakmiden. Zeitschrift fiir wissen-
schaftliche Zoologie. Band XXXIV., Seite 438.

(2) R. von Lendeitfeld. A Monopraph of the Australian Sponges, Part V.,
The Auleninai. Proceedings of the Linnean .Society of New South Wales.
Vol. X., part 3.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 493

canals with a circulai- or oval transverse section and an average
widtb. of 3 mm. These join to form a pseudogaster which opens
by a slightly raised pseudosculum in some specimens. In others
no ti'ue pseudosculum has been observed, but generally such are
well defined. They are from three to ten in number. We will
find them much higlier developed and most remarkaVjle in
Eitsjjongia canaliculata. Easpongia irregularis lutea possesses no
vestibule space.

In Euspongia irregularis tenuis on the other hand it is very
highly developed, and formed of similar anastomosing canals as in
the variety silicata. No pseudoscula have been observed in the
specimens of this variety, as the vestibule canals open irregularly
and indiscriminately over the whole surface.

Eusjjongia irregularis Jacksonia is similar, as far as the develope-
ment of the vestibule spaces is concerned, to the variety tenuis.

B. True Canals.

The canal system of all the varieties is the same. In fact if I
found two similar sponges with any difference in their canal
system I would consider them as two distinct species.

In each pore-sieve there are one or two large inhalent circular
or oval pores measuring on an average 0-03 mm. in diameter. Of
course their size greatly depends on circumstances. I have never
observed them to be entirely closed, but I believe that the strong
muscular cells which are disposed in rings around them, so as to
form true sphincters, can contract them to a quarter of their width
when dilated. The largest I have seen measured 0'05 mm., the
smallest 0'012 mm. across.

From these pores narrow canals lead down in an oblique direc-
tion through the thick skin. These canals average a width of 0-04
mm., which measurement corresponds with the measurement of the
dilated pores as seen from the surface very well. The skin is on
an average 0'06 mm. thick and below it the sub-dermal cavities
extend. These cavities are formed by tangentally extended canals
of a circular transverse section, which form frequent anastomoses
and undermine the skin throuarhout the entire surface.

494: A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

These canals vary very much in size. The measure from 0*25-1
mm. in diameter. In the digitate and lobate processes they extend
mainly in a longitudinal direction. Vexy few and scattered larger
inlialent canals extend from these downward into the interior of
the sponge.

They ramify very much, and so, a great many cylindrical canals
ai-e produced, which extend mainly in a longitudinal direction.
They measure 0-05 mm. in diameter, and are surrounded by
ciliated chambers of the ordinary shape and size. The latter open
into wider exhalent, likewise longitudinally disposed, and circular
canals which measure on an average 0-2 mm. in diameter and coal-
esce to form irregularly disposed canals which lead, extending in a
tangental direction, towards the extensive lacunes of the exhalent
system.

I have mentioned above that the oscula are usually surrounded
by acanulovis zones, and we find that these zones are destitute of a
skeleton and are represented in dry skeletons by irregular grooves
and depressions. We find these askeletous parts, which are more
highly developed in Euspongia canaliculata, and which will be
minutely described under that heading, filled with a very lacunose
tissue with fewer chambers, and much larger exhalent canals than
in the askeletous parts of the sponge. These large exhalent canals
join to form a very short oscular tube. Often no oscular tube at
all is developed, and the membranes which divide the lacunae reach
nearly up to the osculum itself.

Skeleton. (Plate XXXVI. , fig. 3.)

The differences of the four varieties are mainly found in
difierences of the skeleton.

The skeleton of all the specimens agree in the following points : —

The main fibres are cored with foreign bodies, and on an average
1 mm., apart. They are not much curved and extend radially
from the base of the sponge upward and outward and are mostly
branched in a penicillate manner.

BY R, VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 495'

The connecting fibres form a very regular network, where they
are of uniform thickness, but the otherwise regular meshes become
irregular when the thickness of the connecting fibres varies; in the
manner described above in the diagnosis of the sub-genus Irregularis.

The network is more dense in the vicinity of the main fibres
than in the other parts.

The connecting fibres are always free from foreign bodies.

I. EUSPONGIA IRREGULARIS LUTEA.

The main fibres are completely filled with foreign bodies About
70% sand grains and 30% broken foreign siliceous spicules.

Their surface is rendered very uneven as the depressions between
the projecting parts of sand grains and spicules are not entirely
filled up with horny substance.

The diameter of the main fi'>res is 0-05 mm. The knobs on the
surface may increase the thickness locally to 0*09 mm. The sand
gi-ains measure on an average 0 02 ram. ; and the siliceous spicules
attain occasionally a length of 0*1 mm.

The meshes of the connecting fibres have an average width of
0*08 mm., near the main fibre and 0'2 mm., in the portions of the
skeleton which are more distant from them. The connecting fibres
are thicker in the vicinity of the main fibres.

50% of the fibres are thick, with an average diameter of 0'02.
mm,

40% of the fibres measure 0-01— 0-017 mm.
Thinner fibres are rare, the finest measure 0-005 mm.

II. EuSPONGIA IRREGULARIS SILICATA.

The main fibres contain a number df foreign bodies in their axial
poition. These are mainly siliceous spicules of other sponges.
Forming 90% of the foreign bodies. The other 10% are chiefly
foraminifera shells, &c., there is hardly any sand.

496 A MONOGRAPH OP THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

As tlie foreign bodies are only found in the centre, the surface
of tlie main fibre is smooth.

The main fibres are generally circular in transverse section, but
occasionally they are flattened to form a perforated horny plate.
No foreign bodies are found in those portions of the main fibres
which are converted into perforated plates.

The thickness of the main fibre is 0"1 mm.

The foreign siliceous spicules occasionally attain a length 0-14 mm

The meshes of the connecting fibres are of the same size near the
main fibres as in the intermediate parts of the sponge ; occasionally
very regular and measuring 0'23 mm.

The greater number, 70% of the connecting fibres are of ^i-eat
and uniform thickness, measuring 0'04 mm. in diameter.

There are places in the sponge where all the filjres are thick
whereas in others the thinner ones prevail. These measure
0"014 in thickness, and where they prevail the net work is much
more irregular.

III. EUSPONGIA IRREGULARIS TENUIS.

The main fibres of this variety are filled with dense masses of
very fine grained sand. Two or more main fibres often extend for
some distance parallel and close together.

Their surface is rough.

They measure 0-06 mm., in thickness. The knobs are small and
close together, The foreign bodies in the main fibres are sand.
No foreign spicules have been observed in the main fibres of this
variety. The average size of the sand grains is 0*012 mm.

The main fibres, where they extend in close proximity, are
joined to each other by bridges of horn-substance, which often are
of great thickness and always free from foreign bodies.

The connecting fibres form a network which indicates an
approach to the difierentiation of tangental primary and radial
secundry connecting fibres as it is expressed in the sub-genus
Triplicis. This approach however is very slight. Occasionally

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 497

little patches of a very dense net work are observed in the
proximity of the main fibres. The meshes in these are very
irregular and average a diameter of 0*02 mm.

The ordinary meshes are likewise very irregular in shape and
size, and more regular where the main fibres are far apart, than
where they are close together. Their size varies O'l to 0'22 mm.

The connecting fibres are remarkable for their small diameter.
The thickest, which form about 50% of the whole measure 0-024
mm., whilst 40% are formed of fibres averaging O'Ol mm. in
thickness. The remainder are still more slender fibres, the
thinnest observed by me in this variety measured 0-004 mm.

IV. EUSPONGIA IRREGULARIS JaCKSONIA.

The main fibres are cored with a dense mass of large sand
grains. These, however, are only found in the central part of the
fibre, so that its surface is perfectly smooth.

The main fibre has a thickness of 0-1 mm.

The sand-grains measure on an average 0-05 mm. All the
sand-grains seem to be of uniform shape, and also very similar in
size. They are all more or less spherical.

The connecting fibres express the peculiar irregularity of the
fibres in this sub-genus, in the most striking manner.

It is diflicult to give measurements. The meshes are of similar
shape and size in all parts of the sponge. Square ones predominate.

They measure from 0-07 to 0*17 mm. The size of the meshes
is in proportion to the size of the fibres.

The fibres vary very much in thickness.

20% of the fibres are very thick, 0-04 mm. in diameter. Fibres
with a thickness of 0-01 mm. form about 30% of the skeleton ;
"whereas the remaining 50% is formed of fibres which measure
only from 0-003 — 0-008 mm, in thickness.

The mutual relationship of these varieties to each other, and
to the other sub-genera is shown in the following table. If we
assume, as is usual in such cases that the connecting links, the

498

A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

intermediate varieties are unchanged descendants of certain stages
of a changing series of generations which finally formed the most
differentiated species, we will have to consider the table as a true
ancestral tree. For example : —

If b are unchanged descendants of B, and B is one of the real
ancestors of the species a being formed, b can be considered as an
ancestor.

In the same manner d is the unchanged descendant of D. D
a real ancestor of e and f, and therefore d can be considered as a
representative of the real ancestor.

I insert this self-evident explanation here to avoid the possi-
bility of my ancestral tables being misunderstood.

Histology.

A muscular membrane extending in a tangental direction below
the sub-dermal cavities has been observed in this species. This
membrane is throughout i)arallel to the outer surface, and composed
of the ordinary spindle-shaped muscular cells which form several
layers in it. At the conuli it rises up to the surface, and there it
joins the muscular system of the outer skin. This skin is per-
forated by the canals which lead from the sub-dermal cavities into

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D.

499

the interior of the sponge, but otherwise it appears quite con-
tinous. There can be no doubt, that by contractions of this
membrane the width of the sub-dermal cavity can be decreased,
and by local contractions the water current regulated.

Subgenus Densalis. Subgenus Silicatis. Subgenus Ditela. Subgenus Laxifibris.

Subgenus Regularis.

Subgenus Triplicis.

Euspongia irregularis, Euspongia irregularis silicata. Euspongia irregularis
lutea, siliceous spicules predominate tenuis, indication of

fibres being equalised. in main fibres. differentiation into

Primaries and Secun-
daries.

Euspongia irregularis.

Jacksonia irregular.

Geographical Distribution.

I. Euspongia irregularis silicata.

South Coast of Australia, St. Vincent Gulf (Haacke) ; East
Coast of Australia, Port Jackson (Von Lendenfeld) ; Fiji
(Ramsay); Chatham Islands (Parker).

II. Euspongia irregularis lutea.
Mauritius (Von Haast).

III. Euspongia irregularis tenuis.

North Coast of Australia, Torres Straits (Haacke) ; East Coast
of Australia, Long Reef (Ramsay) ; Chatham Islands (Parker) ;
Mauritius (Von Haast).

500 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

IV. EUSPONGIA IRREGULARIS JaCKSONIA.

East of Coast of Australia, Port Jackson (Ramsay, von
Lendenfeld).

Bathymetrical Distribution.
I. EusPONGiA Irregularis silicata.
10 metres (Port Jackson); Shallow water (Chatham Island, Fiji
and St. Vincent Gulf).

II. Euspongia irregularis lutea.
Shallow water.

III. Euspongia irregularis tenuis.
Shallow water.

IV. Euspongia irregularis Jacksonia.
10-20 metres.

69. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA CONIFERA. Nova species.
Shape and Size.
This species presents the appearance of half a sphere. The
lower side with which the sponge is attached is perfectly flat and
has a very regular circular contur. The upper side is convex
and bears numerous high cones, on the summit of each of
which there is a circular osculum. The only specimen mea-
sures 180 mm. in breadth and 80 mm. in height. The cones
on the upper side all stand vertical and are of the same shape,
although different in size. The largest are 25 mm. high and
30 mm. wide at the base, the terminal oscula are circular and
measure from 6-10 mm. in diameter,

The shape of this sponge is a most excejitionally regular one.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 501

Skeleton.

The main fibres radiate from the centre of the circular lower
side latei-ally and vertically. They are slightly curved in a very
regular undulating mannei'. Each undulation measures about
1 2 mm. in length and 5 mm. in depth. The main fibi'es are
branched in a penicillate manner, and on an average 0*6 mm. apart
from each other. They are 0-07 mm. thick, and filled throughout
with small sand-grains. Their sui-face accordingly is roughened.
The knobs are comparatively high but not very broad, and very
close together.

There are no foreign bodies in the connecting fibres. The
meshes of their network measure from 0*1 mm. to 0"3 mm. They
are not regular. Extraordinary to say the meshes in the vicinity
of the main fibres are larger than those further away from them.
Where the main fibres are very close to each other the connecting
fibres sometimes are simple, not branched and stand vertical on
the main fibres which they connect. The thickness of the con-
necting fibres varies from O'Ol mm. to 0'04 mm.

The only specimen of this sponge is a dry skeleton, so that
its position must be somewhat doubtful. No description of the
surface, coloui', canal system and histology can therefore be given.

The colour of the skeleton is a pretty light brown.

GE0C4r!APinCAL DiSTPtlBUTION.

North Coast of Australia, Torres' Straits (Macleay).

Bathymetpjcal Distribution.
Probably shallow water.

II, Sub-Genus. Triplices.

The connecting fibres in the species referred to this sub-genus
are differentiated into thicker tangental and finer radial ones.
The former connect the radial main fibres, and are not at all or
only very slightly branched, either straight or curved, in such a

502 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

manner that the concave side looks towards the surface and the
convex side towards the interior. These primary connecting fibres
are joined to each other by secundaiy radial libres which are much
thinner, straight and short, in some species the primary fibres are
not qni:.e straight, but slightly bent at the joining points of the
radial secundaries.

SPECIES. EUSPONGIA CANALICULATA. Von Lendenfeld.

EUSPONGIA ANFRACTUOSA. Carter (1).

I distinguish three varieties of this species, namely : —
T. Eibspo'iigia canaliculata dura,
II. Euspongia canaliculata elastica and
III. Euspongia canaliculata mollissima.
Carter's Euspongia anfractiwsa mentioned above is identical with
my variety E. c. dura.

Shape and Size.

Euspongia canaliculata resembles in appearance certain forms of
Euspongia zimocca F. E. Schulze (2) pretty closely. It is irregular,
massive, spherical, attached by a small, slightly protruding portion
of the broad base and bears on its upper side numerous short
digitate processes, which are hollow.

These are about as long as broad and rounded on the summit.
They measure 10-20 mm., both w?ys.

The size of the whole sponge is the same in the three varieties,
the largest specimens measure 150 mm., in breadth and 100 mm.,
in height.

The skeleton in particular, and to a certain extent also the dry
specimens show deep, and irregular more or less longitudinally
disposed ;;^rooves in the surface, which occasionally reach down to

(1) //. J. Carter. Description of Sponges from Port Phillip Heads, South
Australia, continued. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Series
5, Vol. XV., p. 316.

(2) F. E. Schulze. Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der
Spongien, VII., Mittheilung ; Die Familie der Spongidte. Zeitschrift fiir
wissenschaftliohe Zoologie. Band XXXII., Seite 615.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 503

the central cavity. The developemeut of these grooves or canals and
of the finger shaped pi'ocesses is different in the different varieties,
and hj these external differences the varieties can be readily
distinguished.

In Euspougia canaliculata dura, the digitate processes are
most regular, dome-shaped and large, measuring 20 mm., in
diameter, whilst the grooves are very narrow and not very
numerous.

The skeleton of this variety consequently possesses a comparatively
smooth appearance.

In Euspongia canaliculata dastica the digitate processes aie
longer but more slender, measuring 12 mm,, on an average in
diameter and 18 mm., in height. The skeleton of this variety
presents a much more irregular aspect because the grooves are so
numerous and broad that the sides of the digitate processes appear
entirely cut up by them into isolated erect portions.

In Euspongia canaliculata mollissima the digitate processes are
much smaller than in either of the foregoing varieties and not so
numerous. They do not take up the whole of the upper surface of
the sponge.

The whole of the surface is covered by a network of meandric
grooves, which are of similar dimensions as in Euspongia canaliculata
dura. These grooves foi'm anastomoses and in this way cut the
whole of the svirface up into numerous irregularly shaped fields.
This of course only applies to the skeleton.

Colour.
The colour of the live sponge is brownish grey. It spirits it
becomes lighter. Beach worn skeletons of Euspongi% canaliculata
dura are of a dirty greyish-yellow colour. Those of the other two
varieties are reddish brown the colour of " burnt siena."

Rigidity.
The skeletons of all the three varieties are very elastic, but at
the same time much harder than any variety of Euspongia officinalis
known to me.- In consequence of this rigidity, Eusj^ongia canali-
culata cannot be used for similar purposes as the bathing sponge.
33

504 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

As the variety-name implies JSuspongia canaliculata dura is tlie
hai'dest. 1 kilogramm weight compresses a large specimen only
about 3 mm. Euspongia canaliculata elastica is very much softer.
1 kilogramm compresses it about 8 mm. Euspongia canaliculata
moUissima is a little less elastic than the two other species and
about as hard as Euspongia canaliculata elastica.

Surface.

The surface is the same in the three varieties. There are no conuli,
and it therefore appears very smooth. In this respect our species
differs widely from Euspongia officinalis and many other species.
With a inagnifying glass one perceives that the surface is covered by
a very regular network of a uniform appearance throughout. There
is no difference whatever in the surface of the extensive vestibule
spaces and the external sui-face. This network is similar to the
one described above of Euspongia irregularis. Tt is produced by a
network of I'aised lines on the surface. The meshes are 0'16 mm.
wide, and the lines of the network itself 0*08 mm. broad.

The protruding net is filled with sand-grains, there are however,
no siliceous spicules as in Euspongia irregularis. The sand-
grains measure from 0-15 to 0*28 mm. In the meshes of this
network the pore-sieves are situated, which possess a great many
small pores from 8-20 in number.

These pores are the commencement of the inhalent canals.

Corresponding to the grooves in the skeleton described above,
there are askeletous portions of the sponge. These are accoi'dingly
disposed mostly in longitudinal lines. On their surface, which is
not diff'erent from the surface of other parts, except that it some-
times appears more or less retracted or collapsed, the small circular
Oscula are found which measure 1-2 mm. in diameter. The Oscula
are disposed in lines, and on an average 10-15 mm. apart.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 505

CANAL SYSTEM.
A. Vestibule spaces.

On the summits of the digitate processes round holes are found,
which resemble Oscula very closely Theseare however the apertures
of the system of Lacunae, which must be considered as a vestibule
space, and have nothing to do with the exhalent system. The
vestibule cavity consists of wide canals with circular transverse
section, measuring from 5 to 12 mm. in diameter. These canals
are mostly upright, vertical and form here and there anastomoses,
about ^ to f of the volume of the sponge is taken up by these
vestibule spaces.

They are connected with the outer world only by the Pseudoscula
on the summits of the processes. There are no other apertures, so
that the whole space appeal's as a perfectly closed Pseudogaster. No
Oscula open into these spaces, their walls are pervaded only by the
inhalent pores, and so these cavities appear as an outwai'd
appendage to the inhalent system ; they are perfectly homologous
to the vestibule spaces described above of Euspongia irregularis.

B. True Canals.

The canal system of our sponge is very remarkable. The pore
sieves are pervaded, as mentioned above by a great number of very
small pores. These are circular and can be entirely closed at the
option of the sponge. In consequence of this, the uvimber in each
pore sieve found open and visible is very variable. The greatest
number counted by me in one pore sieve was 20. They are circular
and scattered regularly over the whole of pore-sieve. They measure
when dilated O'Ol mm. in diameter. The pore sieve itself is a very
fine skin O'Ol mm, thick and attached to the sand-net which divides
the pore sieves from each other.

These structures are perfectly similar in the outer, and inner
side of the lamellous body of the sponge. The pores of the
inner surface open into the vestibule, those of the outer surface
into the outer world. Below the pore-sieves extensive sub-dermal

506 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

cavities are met with. (Plate 37, fig. 1.) These are larger below
the inner surface than below the outer surface. The sub-dermal
cavities below the inner vestibule surface are irregular, tangental,
and mostly longitudinal canals of an irregulai'ly oval transverse
section.

Their largest diameter may attain 3 mm. Such immense sub-
dermal cavities are rare.

The sub-dermal cavities below the outer surface are similar,,
irregularly longitudinal canals, which, however, are very much
narrower. These are also much more flattened tangentally
and attain a width of 1 mm. and height of 0*5 mm.

From these extensive cavities canals extend down towards the
interior of the sponge, whieh have an average diameter of
0*1 mm., a cii'cular or oval transverse section, and which extend
likewise in a more or less longitudinal direction. They ramify
continually, and the smallest final ramifications which have the
same shape as the larger canals, measure 0-02 mm. in diameter.
(Plate 37, fig. 1). The ciliated chambers form f of spheres and measure
0-032 mm. in diameter. The exhalent canals are similar in shape,
size and direction to the inhalent ones, and join to form larger
stems, which no longer extend longitudinally but curve towards
the askeletous portions of the sponge attaining a more and more
transverse direction the larger they become. The askeletous
portions of the sponge. (Plate 37, fig. 1), are very much less dense
than other parts and consist mostly of wide Lacunse, separated
from each other by tender membranes as in Euspongia irregu-
laris. These Lacunse join and finally open into the short and
wide oscular tube. They average a diameter of 0*6 mm., the
membranes which divide them from each other are only
0-005 mm. thick in certain places. In portions also of the
askeletous part ciliated chambers are found (Plate 37, fig. 1),
particularly in the depth; no chambers open directly into the large
o.scular tube which measures 1-2 mm. in diameter.

Often the skeleton is interrupted throughout the entire width of
the sponge lamella between the vestibule space and the outer

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 507

surface. In such cases the lacunose tissue formed by the congre-
gatiou of the exhalent canals extends also down to the vestibule
space.

No oscula are found either in the skeletons part or in the walls
of the vestibule cavity.

Skeleton.
(Plate 36, fig. 1.)

The main fibres of the skeleton radiate from the point of
attachment outward and upward. They extend mainly in a
longitudinal direction and branch in a more or less penicillate
manner. The main fibres are joined on the surface to the sand-
armour, and it is clearly visible that their sand-core is a direct
continuation of the sand in the skin.

The main fibres curve gracefully outward in their distal portions
and all their ends are joined to the outer skin. Never is a free
termination of a main fibre formed in the interioi\ This shows
that these main fibres grow in the same manner, as the main fibres
of Halme, namely just below the outer skin.

It is also very remarkable that no main fibres are joined to the
inner skin on the vestibule side of the lamella.

The consequence of this is that the skin can be drawn off on
the inner side, whereas it appears firmly attached on the outer.

In detail the main fibres, although always completely filled
with foreign bodies differ in the different vai'ieties, and these
details shall be described below.

The connecting fibres form, as mentioned above in the diagnosis
of the sub-genus, two systems. Thicker primary tangental, and
thinner secundary radial connecting fibres are distinguishable. The
mode of ramification varies in the varieties, and shall be
described below. The connecting fibres never contain foreign
bodies.

It is most remarkable that round the grooves in the skeleton
filled by the lacunose, askeletous tissue, the connecting fibres
terminate with sharp points. (Plate 37, fig. 1, b.) This is

508 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

evidently a defensive arrangement against foreign intruders which
might attempt to get into the body of the sponge from the wide
exhalent lacunose or from the oscular tube.

I.— EUSPONGIA CANALICULATA DURA (Plate 36, fig. 1.)

The main fibres are slightly and gracefully curved, on an
average 1*3 mm. apart they taper towards the distal end which
supports the dermal armour of sand. They measure O'l mm.
in thickness and have a smooth surface. They are entirely filled
with foreign bodies, which are small sand grains measuring for
the most part 0-025 mm. with a few short fragments of foreign
spicules.

The connecting fibres are differentiated into primary tangental
and secondary radial ones very much more clearly than in the
other varieties. The former are on an average 0"3 mm. apart.
The primary connecting fibres are either straight or gracefully
curved, appearing like ropes supported by the upright main
fibres and slightly depressed in the centre. They do not
show the slightest trace of curvatures or angles at the joining
points. Rarely they devide into two roots in the vicinity of the
main fibres. Generally they are perfectly simple thi'oughout, and
do not ramify at all. At the base they extend in a trumpet-
shaped manner to join the main fibre. They measure 0-03 mm.
in thickness on an average. The thickness, however, seems to be
in correlation with the length, in as much as the longer fibres are
always thicker than the shorter ones.

The secondary connecting fibres are not regular but still more
so than in the other varieties. Many of these fibres are quite
simple, and extend in a more or less radial direction, con-
necting the pi'imary fibres with each other. They generally do
not stand vertical on the primaries, but are more or less oblique-
Many appear ramified and altogether they form an irregular net-
work of fibres of varying thickness which connects the primaries.

By'r. von LENDENFELD, PH.D. 509

Theix' thickness varies from O'Ol to 002 mm. They are attached
to the primaries by a broad trumpet-shaped extended basis.

II. EUSPONGIA CANALICULATA ELASTICA.

The main fibres are slightly and gracefully curved and taper
more abruptly toward the end, than in the foregoing variety.
The main fibres have a smooth surface and measure O'l mm. in
diameter, they are a little closer together than in the foi-egoing
variety. They contain axial foreign bodies, which, however, are
not near so numerous as in Eusponyia canaliculata dura. These
foreign body are mostly sand-grains, measuring on an average 0-02
mm. The connecting fibres are difierentiated into primaries and
secundaries not so distinctly, however, as in the variety described
above. Particularly we find not so great a difierence in thickness.

The primaries are on an average 0-4 mm. apart and form angles
at the joining points of the secundaries. They, therefore, do not
appear like graceful curves pendant between adjacent main fibres,
but i-ather as broken lines, composed of longer or shorter straight
portions which are joined at angles approaching 180° very closely.
They measure 0'028 mm. in thickness. Also here we find those
which extend between distant main fibres thicker than those which
join two more adjacent main fibres.

The secundaries are rarely simple, mostly they ramify and
anastamose so as to form a regular network, the meshes of which
measure 0*3 mm. on an average.

The thickness of the secundaries varies from O'OOS to 0-02.5 mm.
The very thin ones are rare. The intermediate ones predominate.

As the primaries are bent at the joining points and the secun-
daries approacii the thickness of the primaries the difi"erentiation
between primaries and secundaries becomes indistinct.

Particidarly this becomes apparent between main fibres, which
lie close to each other where the network is similar to thai of
the subgenus Irregularis, whereas between the more distant main
fibres the differentiation is clearly visible.

510 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

III. EUSPONGIA CANALICULATA MOLLISSIMA.

The main fibres of this variety are very diflerent from those of
the other varieties. They are on an average 0'9 mm. apart and
0 14 mm. thick. The surface is roughened by a few small knobs.
These fibres are never straight or gracefully curved, but appear
irregularly bent and twisted a peculiarity which characterises the
variety. They contain foreign bodies in great abundance. These
are very small sand-grains, measuring only 0-0 14 mm.

The diflferentiation between primary and secundary connecting
Hbres is still less clearly expressed, than in the foregoing variety,
although, also in this one, the two can be distinguished at least in
certain parts of the skeleton. The primaries are formed of straight
portions which join at angles, not so near 180° as in the
foregoing variety. Occasionally the portions between the joining
points are slightly curved. These fibres ai'e 0'4 mm. apart and
on an average 0-032 mm. thick. Their thickness is, however, subject
to unusual variations and not proportionate to the length of the
fibres as in the other varieties. The secundaries form a very
irregular network, and there are no simple unbranched ones at all.
The meshes average a diameter of 0-2 mm. The fibres vary very
much in thickness from 0008 to 0-03 mm. Some of them are as
thick as the primaries.

It will appear from this that there is a gradation in the develop-
ment of the " triplicis " mode of ramification represented by these
varieties. That the specimens, which are considered by me as
varieties of this species really are very nearly related, can hardly be
doubted when it is considered that their anatomy and even shape
is so very similar. This shows then that the mode of ramifica-
tion of the connecting fibres is not a thing of much systematic
value, as has been asserted by Bowerbank and others, and that
here again, as in so many other cases the idea of constancy in a
certain organ has been broken down by more extensive researches.

The varieties Euspongia canaliculata mollissi7na and elastica
connect the vai-iety dura closely with Euspongia irregularis. A

BY R, VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 511

further developement in the dii'ection indicated has been attained
by Euspongia Matthevm, the representative of the following sub-
genus. The developement of this kind of ramification of connect-
ing fibre is ah^eady indicated in the variety tenuis of Euspongia
irregularis.

It can be made clear by a perusal of the following table where-
in unchanged descendants of the true ancestors are enumerated in
a series which probably repi'esents the true ancestral descent very
olosely : —

Subgenus Laxifibris Subgenus Ditela.

Euspongia canaliculata dura.
Primaries straight.

Euspongia canaliculata elastica.
Primaries slightly bent.

Euspongia canaliculata mollissima.
Primaries much bent.

Euspongia irregularis tenuis, indication of differentiation into
Primaries and Secundaries.

This table also shows the mutual relationship of the different
varieties.

Histology,

The I'emarkable structure of this sponge led me to investigate
its histology more closely and I have arrived at some interesting
results differing to a great extent from the histology of other
sponges as described by F. E. Schulze, Vosmaer, Polejaeff, and
myself

512 a monograph op the australian sponges,

Skeleton.

The fibres are highly colorable, more so than those of other
Spongidte. The connecting fibres consist of perfectly clear and
transparent Spongiolin and do not show a trace of being com[)Osed
of concentric layers.

There is of course no doubt whatever, that they have been
formed like those of other horny sponges, but it is remarkable that
all the layers have precisely the same refractive power.

Only the outermost layer, the youngest, appears slightly diflerent
under a high power in as much, as it absorbs coloring matter less
than the others and also refracts the light not so much as the
central parts. This is visible in a very striking manner in fine
sections. It must be assumed, that the outermost layer, which
consists of newly formed spongiolin is less dense than the older spon-
giolin in the centre and probably there is a certain amount of waterin
it, which is absent in the older central portions. I have some time
ago (1) expi'essed my opinion that the newly formed Spongiolin
is slimy. The structure of the fibres of our sponge are of such a
nature as to corroborate this. The Spongiolin is a hardened
slime, and it hardens by a process of drying, that is losing the
water with which it was originally mixed.

This slime is poured over the fibres or foreign bodies by the
spongoblasts and thei'e it haixlens to spongiolin.

The outer horny layers which enclose the foreign bodies in the
core of the main fibres, however, are clearly stratified. This
difference would point to a difierence in the formation of these
two. It appears that the connecting fibres are produced in a short
time and do not grow in thickness after they have once been
formed, whereas the main fibres occasionally receive a fresh coating
of spongiolin so as to strengthen them.

No increase in strength in the connecting fibres is required as
the sponge grows in size, but the strain on the main fibres is of

(1) i?. 11. Lendenfeld. Ueber Coelenteraten der Siidsee II., Mittheilung,
Neue AplysinidcB. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band
XXXVII., Seite 269.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 513

course increased, so that it also appears advantageous that the
thickness and strength of the main fibres should be increased.
The spongiolin produced at one and the same time will be of the
same nature, so that the layers formed by it are not rendered
visible. For this reason the rapidly formed connecting fibres do
not show any stratification.

The spongiolin produced at difierent times is slightly different
so that successive layers of spongiolin formed at greater intervals
of time will show their limits. This is the case in the main fibres.

The axial thread is very well developed in the connecting fibre
and clearly visible, it consists of a granular mass and has a thickness
of 0*0004 mm. The connecting fibres join generally in such a way
that three fibres radiate out from one point. On close examination
it appears that two of these are portions of one and the same
continuous fibre with a continuous axial thread, whereas the other
grows out from it at the side. The axial thread of the latter
is not connected with the continuous axial thread of the former.
It terminates moreover with a trumpet shaped extension on the
surface of the other fibre. In the same way also the axial
threads terminate, where the connecting fibi-es join the main fibre.
This shows clearly that the three fibres radiating from one joining
point never are equivalent, but that the one is a primary fibre to
the side of which the other has attached itself afterwards and
therefore appears as a secundary. Light is thrown by this peculiarity
on the growth of the connective fibres.

In the description of the skeleton I have mentioned that the
connecting fibres terminate at the sides of the grooves in the
skeleton with sharp points. It is always the primaries which
terminate in this remarkable manner (Plate 37, fig. 1, b.) The
points are very shai'p and abrupt so that the contour is somewhat
similar to a Roman short sword's point. The axial thread termi-
nates a little behind the point.

The points stand very close together and the whole is a
most effective defensive arrangement. I am not aware that such
free and pointed terminations have been observed in other horny
sponge.

514 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

Muscular LAMELLiE.

The skeletons part of the sponge is divided from the askeletous
portion by a membrane, which extends down from the outer surface
to the bottom of the groove. This membrane is situated just in
front of the points of the connecting fibres (Plate 37, fig. 1) and
surrounds the part of the sponge occupied by the large lacunae of the
exhalent canals. This membrane consists of radially disposed
parullei, elongate, spindle shaped cells. These measure 0'032 in
length and 0-0015 mm., in thickness, in the centre. The ends of
these cells are very slender forming extremely find threads. In
tlie middle of the length but not in the axis of the cell the nucleus
is situated, it lies near the side and is very elongate, oval situated
longitudinally. It measures 0"0034 mm., in length and 0-0011 mm.,
in width. The cell is entirely filled by a very granular and highly
colorable pi-otoplasra. The granules are remarkable for their large
size, which may be estimated at 0-00025 mm. The ground substance
in which these granules are imbedded does not refract the light
very much, the granules however are highly refracting. The ground
substance refracts the light simply, whilst the granules show when
examined with the polariser that they refract the light doubly in a
similar manner as the discs in the straited muscles of higher animals.
These granules are scattered throughout the cell in an irregular
manner, but still one notices that they appear to have a tendency
to group themselves in ti-ansverse rows or discs. In this way
the cells of the muscular membrane of our sponge appear as
an interesting transition form from the simple undifferentiated
contractile elements of sponges to the striated muscular cells of
higher Ccelenterates. It will be known to the reader that striated
muscular elements, which are so widely distributed in the latter
and have even been found in Hydroid Polyps (1), do not occur in
sponges. The cells in this organ of our sponge are the nearest

(1) R.v.Lendenfeld. Muscular Tissues in Hydroid Polyps. Proceedings
of the Linnean Society of New South Wales. Vol. IX., Pt. 3, p. 635.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 515

approacli to them. I have been informed by Mr. Haswell, that
he has discovered a similar transition form in certain i-adiating
muscular cells round the stomach of a worm.

That the membranes in question really are muscular is rendered
particularly evident by the great difterences in the degree of
depression of the skin which covers the lacunose askeletous parts of
the sponge, which are an indication of extensive movements. The
latter can only be caused by contractions of this membrane.

This membrane is perforated at the base by the exhalent canals,
which lead from the skeletons portion of the sponge into the
askeletous part, taken up by the lacunse of the exhalent system.

Nervous System.

At its distal margin the muscular membrane described above is
thickened. (Plates 37, fig. 1, i.)

In transverse sections through this distal thickening we find
that no spindle-shaped granular cells take part in its formation
but that it is composed of a highly colourable granular mass
in which large nuclei are contained. The latter are spherical and
measure 0-002 mm. in diameter. From the sides of this structure
granular threads extend in a tangental direction and from its
distal surface slender, straight, or curved spindle-shaped cells
arise. The distal part of these reaches the outer surface. The
cells are curved in such a manner that this part is always nearly
vertical to the surface. To attain a vertical position of the end it
becomes necessary for those spindle-shaped cells, which originate at
the side of the swelling, to curve.

These cells measure 0'02 mm. in length. At the ends they are
0-0005 mm. thick, but in the thickest central part they measure
0-0U015 mm. across. They are filled with granular protoplasin,
which imbibes staining fluids very readily and is turned brown by
the action of osmic acid. In it we firid, in the central swelling, an
oval nucleus 0-002 mm. long and 0-0006 mm. broad, and a few
large and remarkable granules which appear particularly after,
osmic acid treatment as very distinct black spots.

516 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

I am of opinion that this structure must be considered as an
organ of sense comparable to the ring nerve of craspedote Medusae
or the sensitive and ganglia cells, which form a circular zone in
the entoderm of the manubrium of certain hydroid polyps.

The membrane surrounds, as mentioned above the lacunose
portion, and it is crowned by this nervous structure, which
accordingly appears as a sensitive zone round the askeletous area.
The distal swelling of the membrane consists of ganglia cells, the
nuclei of which are apparent, the limits of which however are
indistinct, there is only a slight indication of the formation of
limits.

The spindle-shaped cells in the skin should be considered as
sensitive elements and their basal processes as nerves, which lead
from the sensitive cells to the ganglia cells. These processes are
short in the cells just above the ganglia cells and longer as the
cells are further removed. The tangental granular threads
represent tangental nerves which lead from the ring nerve to other
parts of the surface.

This nervous system, as also that in other sponges, is meso-
dermal, and can therefore not be directly compared to the
analogous structures in higher Coelenterates, but as we find the
embryonic lamellae so very indifferent in these low animals no
great value can be attached to this difference. It is, however a
further illustration of the peculiarity of sponges first pointed out
by Marshall (1) that all their organs are mesodermal, that even
the nervous system which throughout the animal kingdom is
ectodermal or entodermal ( Hydroid polyps, Actinia), is constituted
of mesodermal cells in sponges.

There can be little doubt that there is a connection between the
muscular cells of the membrane and the ganglia cells, although I
have not been able to ascertain what this connection may be.

(1) W. Mamhall. Die Ontogenie von Reniera filigrana, 0. Schmidt.
Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXXVII., Seit 497.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 517

The nervous elements of sponges have been developed from
neuio-muscle cells or also from indifferent mesodermal cells, the
former is rendered more probable by their distribution.

The elements of sponges are derived from the different
embryonic layers as follows : —

Ectoderm :
Flat Ejntliel cells.

Entoderm :
Flat Epithet cells.
Collar cells.

Mesoderm :
Tissue cells.
Flat Endothel cells.
Ova.

Spermatoblasts.
Aiuceboid wandering cells.
Spongohlasts.
Gland cells of the skin.
Muscle cells.
Ganglia cells.
Sensitive cells.
The developement of the different Mesodermal cells may have
been the following :

1 . The amoeboid wandering cells have retained the appearance

and mode of life of those cells which originally grew
inward from the outer coating of the Blastula to form
the mesoderm.

2. From these the ova, spermatoblasts and indifferent tissue

cells have been derived ; also the Spongoblasts and gland
cells of the shin have descended directly from them.

3. From the indijferent tissue cells neuro-niuscular elements

were developed, which again further differentiated to
form the ganglia and sensitive cells on the one hand, and
the true muscular cells on the other ; also the connective
ordinary tissue cells are derived from them.

518

A MONOGRAPH OP THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

This is made clear by the following table : —
Sensitive Cells. Ganglia Cells.

Sensitive.
Cells.

Muscular
Cells.

Connective
tissue Cells.

Endothel Neuromuscular
Cells. Cells.

>Spongoblasts.

Gland Cells
of the skin

Ova. Spermatoblasts. indifferent

Tissue Cells.

Gland Cells.

Amoeboid wandering Cells.
Geographical Distribution.

i. euspongia canaliculata dura.

West Coast of Australia, (Baily) ; East Coast of Australia, Port
Jackson, (Von Lendenfeld.)

II, EuSPONGIA CANALICULATA ELASTICA.

South Coast of Australia, Port Phillip, (Von Lendenfeld.)

III. EuSPONGIA CANALICULATA MOLLISSIMA.

East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson, (Ramsay.)
Bathymetrical Distribution.

i. euspongia canaliculata dura.
Shallow water 1 Western Australia. 20 metx'es Port Jackson.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 519

II. EUSPONGIA CANALICULATA ELASTICA.

10 metres.

III. EuSPONGIA CANALICULATA MOLLISSIMA,

15 metres.

71. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA SEPTOSA. Ridley.

EUSPONGIA SEPTOSA. Ridley (1).
SPONGIA SEPTOSA. Lamarck (2).

Shape and Size.
Euspongia septosa is attached to two or more stones over which,
it forms horizontally expanded lamince which rise into sub-cylindrical
lobes 5 to 7 mm., in diameter.

Colour.

The surface has a dark grey colour, in spirits ; the interior dull
pale brown, subtransparent. Skeleton fibres amber yellow, usually
homogenous in appearance throughout.

Surface.

The surface is broken up by a number of sharp prominent ridges
and points 1 to 3 mm., high ; the intermediate surface is rough.
It has somewhat the appearance of a honey comb.

Canal System 1
Skeleton.
Main fibres set approximately at right angles to surface, thickness
about 0-6 mm. ; primarie connecting fibres approximately vertical
to main fibres, about -035 to -053 mm., in thickness, forming with
some secundarie connecting fibres rounded-angled meshes, 0*14
toO'2l mm., in diameter, between the main fibres which are about

(1) Stuart 0. Ridley. Spongiida. Report on the Zoological Collection
made in the Indo-Pacific Ocean, during the Voyage of H.M.S. Alert, 1881-2.
British Museum of Natural History, Catalogue 18S4, p. 381.

(2) de Lamarck. Sur les Polipiers empatt^s. Annales des Museum.
Tom. 20, p. 373, 1813,

34

520 A MONOGRAPH OF THR AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

0'42 mm., apart. Main fibres cored to some little distance from
surface by a usually single series of small foreign bodies ; connect-
ing fibres uncored.

Rigidity.

Textui-e of sponge in spirit very tough and elastic.
Geograhpical Distribution.

North Coast of Australia, Torres Straits, Alert Island; (Alert.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.
15 metres.

III. SUB-GENUS. LAXIFIBRIS.

The skeleton of this sub-genus is very remarkable and shows, as
indicated above, a further developement of the skeleton of Euspongia
canaliculata dura.

The main fibres resemble those of Hircinia in as much as they
are formed of a trellis work of densely interwoven fibres. The
longitudinal ones are thicker than the transverse ones and one or
two are particularly well developed and contain foreign bodies.

The connecting fibres are differentiated into primary and
secundary fibres.

The primaries are not ramified, long smooth and gracefully
curved. They are never bent at the joining points.

The secundaries are very short and thin, always simple and
straight, and connect the primaries, both are free from foreign
bodies.

72. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA MATHEWSI. Von Lendenfekl.

COSCINODERMA LANUGINOSUM. Carter (1).
COSCINODERMA LANUGINOSUM. Carter (2).

In the discussion of the varieties of Euspongia conaliculata I
have given the reason for not considering peculiarities in the

(1) //. /. Carter. Contribution to our Knowledge of the Spongida.
Annales and Magazine of Natural History. 5th Series, Vol. XII., No. 71,
p. 309.

(2) //. J. Carter. Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of
Port Phillip Heads, South Australia. Annales and Magazine of Natural
History, 5th Series, Vol. XV., No. 88, p. 318.

BY K. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 521

ramification of the connecting fibres of sufiicient value to base
genera thereon. For those reasons and also because the chagrin
like surface is found in other species I do not consider the genus
Coscinoderma Carter (1) as necessary and I place his and also
some species which Polejaefi" (2) assigned to this genus in the
genus Euspongia.

I have examined a dry sponge kindly forwarded to me by 3Ir.
Mathew, R.N., which I named after him as above. Only afterwards
I ascertained that this species is probable identical with Carter's
species above mentioned.

The description of the soft parts is taken from Carter I.e., that
of the skeleton is original. The notes given me by Mr. Mathew
corroborate Carter's description.

This sponge is excellently adapted for bathing purposes and used
for that purpose in the Caroline Islands.

Shape and Size.

Stipitate, expanding from a round stem in the form of a battle
dore-shaped or triangular lamella, with conical processes on the
upper margin. It measures 210 mm., in width and height and
40 mm., in thickness (Carter's largest specimen). Larger specimens
were seen by Mr. Mathew.

Surface.

Surface for the most part even throughout, interrupted only by
a small proliferous projection or out-growth on one side and a line
of vents situated pandean pipe like along the upper border, between
which the structure is denticulated. Pore sieves in the interstices
of the cribriform incrustation which forms a reticulate chagrin like
structure in consequence of the abundance of sand grains etc., in
this net-work. The meshes of this net-work are 0*52 mm., wide.
The lines a little wider.

(1) H. J. Carter. Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida.
Annales and Magazine of Natiiral History. 5th Series, Vol. XII., No. 17,
p. 309.

(2) N. PoUjaeff. The Voyage of H.M.S. Challenger. Part XXXI.
Report on the Keratosa, p. 50 fF.

522 a monograph of the australian sponges,

Colour.

When fi'esh, grey, the same in spirits, but faint yellow
internally. The beachwoi-m skeletons are light grey.

Canal System.

Carter mentions sub-dermal cavities and vents on the margin.
I am not able to judge from his description, but I would not think
it unlikely that the vents are not vents at all but inhalent
pseudoscula, similar to those described above of Euspongia
irregularis and JEuspongia canaliculata. A re-examination of the
specimens will be necessary to decide this.

Skeleton. (Plate XXXVI., fig. 6.)

Carter says that " the wool-like character of the fibre, owing to
its being so small and uniform is peculiar." That Carter put this
" is " in italics firstly led me to believe that the sponges under
consideration are identical. I have certainly never seen any
sponge skeleton similar to the skeleton of this species in this
respect.

The main fibres, as mentioned above in the diagnosis of the
sub-genus, consist of a trellice work of fibres, and form a very
dense network with small irregular meshes. In other words a
perforated column. In this structure continuous thick fibres can
be traced for short distances which are cored with foreign
bodies, chiefly very fine grained sand. The whole structure
measures O'lO mm. in thickness. The fibres which form it,
are 0' 01-0 -09 mm. thick and the meshes average a width of
0-08 mm.

These very peculiar main fibres were not seen by Carter, but as
they are far apart and difiicult to find I do not attach much
importance to that.

These main fibres ramify irregularly, and it appears that
occasionally, particularly at the joining points, the trellice work of
which they consist becomes more loose and irregular, and in such
localities there are no main fibres accordingly.

BY R. VON LENDENPELD, PH.D. 523

The piimaiy connecting fibres are very long. I have traced
some to a length of 5 mm. They extend from one main fibre to
the other, they are vertical to the main fibres. The reason
why they are so long, is because they do not connect the
adjacent main fibres, but they extend often between two
fibres far apart from each other. The consequence is that they
cross each other in every direction. The most approximate points
of any two crossing fibres are joined by a short secundary
fibre which is straight, and very thin. These secundaries
are all of uniform length, namely, 0*05 mm. Their thickness is
0*0058 mm. and also very uniform. All the primary connecting
fibres are of the same thickness, namely, O'OIS mm.

It will appear from the above that the ramification is a most
complicated and unusual one. Teased out specimens and also
sections are very puzzling, and it is only by means of making
sections in three directions at right angles to each other, that I
was able to attain a clear insight into the structure of the skeleton
of Euspongia Mathewsi.

Nothing is known of the Histology of this species.

Geographical Distribution.

South Coast of Australia, Fremantle (Carter) • Port Phillip
(Carter) ; tropical part of Pacific Ocean, Caroline Islands; Ponape
(G. T. Mathew).

Bathymetrical Distribution.
42 Metres. Port Phillip.

IV. SUB-GENUS. DITELA.

The interior portion of the skeleton consists of radial main
fibres, primary tangental and secundary, radial connecting fibres.
This part of the skeleton is very similar to the skeleton of
Uuspongta canaliculata dura. The primaries are always simply
curved or straight. They are never bent at the joining points.
The secundaries are always quite simple and vertical to the
primaries.

524 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSLRALIAN SPONGES,

In the surface there is a very dense and irregular network
which does not resemble the network of the interior at all. This
is similar to the skeleton of Euspongia officinalis and to the
interior of the skeleton of the species of the genus Densalis.

73. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA REPENS. Von Lendenfekl.

DiTELA REPENS. Solenka. (1)

Selenka did not describe this species very minutely, but his
excellent figure makes it sufficiently certain that the sponge to be
described below, and Selenka's Ditela repens are identical.

SHAfE AND Size.

In outer appearance this sponge, particularly the skeleton of it,
resembles some forms of chalinid sponges very closely, and it
forms also in other respects a transition form between my sub-
families Sponginfe and Chalinospinae. It is digitate, creeping and
irregular. The digitate parts coalesce occasionally to form a
lamellose extension, usually however they only grow together in a
few places where they touch, They attain a length of 100 mm.,
are cylindrical, terminally rounded, and from 12-20 mm. in
diameter. There thickness is generally very uniform throughout.
My specimens are more regular than the one depicted by Selenka.

Surface.

The surface of the skeleton, and also of the animal, is slightly
conulated. The conuli are small and low, on an average, 1 mm.
apart and 0*4 mm. high. They are disposed very regularly, N^o
sand is found in the skin, which is strongly protected by the
dense Ditela network of fibres in it.

The oscula measure from 2-4 mm., are circular and occasionally
veiy slightly raised over the surface. They are situated terminally,
but also occur on the surface, particularly of large and irregular
digitate pieces in great numbers.

(1) E. Selenka. Ueber einige neue Schwammme aus der Siidsee. Zeit
schrift fur wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band 17, Heft 4, 1867, p. 567.

by r. von lendenfeld, ph.d. 525

Rigidity.

The skeletons of these sponges are very tender and soft, and can
be pressed between the leaves of a book like a flower.

COLOUR.

In spirits yellow, The skeleton has a brownish hue.

Canal System.

Seienka had only dry specimens, and I only saw some half
decayed ones picked up on the beach, so that I cannot give any
reliable account of the configuration of the canal system.

Skeleton. (Plate 36, fig. 5.)

The skeleton is very regulai*. It consists of main fibres
"which extend in a longitudinal dii-ection along the Oscular tube
which, in the shape of a hollow cylinder, takes up the centre of the
digitate processes. From time to time, these fibres emit branches,
which gracefully curve towards the surface, spreading like a
fountain, and terminating in the superficial skeleton.

These main fibres are on an average 1 mm. apart and measure
0-04 mm. in thickness. They are filled with large sand-grains
averaging 0-008 mm., which are so abundant as to cause the
surface of the fibre to become very rough. The knobs are large
and high.

In the interior of the sponge a very regular net-work of con-
necting fibres is met with. These are difierentiated into pri-
maries and secundaries. The former are simple, straight or
slightly curved, very rarely branched, and never bent at their
joining points with the secundaries. They are vertical to the
main fibres, and connect the approximate fibres.

They are always free from foreign bodies and measure 0*015 mm.
in thickness. They are particularly far apart. The interval
averages 0'2 mm.

These primaries are connected by the secundaries. The latter
are always straight, unbranched and simple, and generally more or

526 A MONOGRAPH OP THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

less vertical to tke primaries. Their thickness varies from 0-0033
to 0-01 mm. They are, like the primaries not at all numerous, so
that the whole network in the interior attains such wide meshes
that I would not place this sponge in the genus Euspongia at all,
where it not for the very dense network of connecting fibres which
forms a thick superficial layer.

This latter is totally different from the network in the interior.
It is formed of an ordinary dense uniform and irregular network,
and forms a layer nearly 0-5 mm. thick on the surface.

The fibres which form this network possess an average thickness
of 0017 mm. (0-01-0-015 mm. Selenka I.e.), and the meshes of it
are 0-05 mm. wide and rather irregular.

O. Schmidt (1) established his genus Ditela for a sponge with
such a special superficial skeleton, he afterwards (2) however,
united Ditela again with Spongia. It belongs doubtlessly to
Euspongia (3.) The sub-genus of this name which I have esta-
blished above for this species is not identical with O. Schmidt's
(1. c. I.), original genus Ditela, as the interior skeleton of the two
difier, but I have adopted it for the sake of simplicity, as a name
witli which we are familiar, and of which we know that it means
a sponge with a special superficial skeleton.

Nothing is known of the histology of this sponge.

Geographical Distribution.

South Coast of Australia, Port Phillip, (F. Mueller, Selenka,
Yon Lendenfeld.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.
Shallow water?

(1) O.Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres, 1862. Seite 24.

(2) 0. Schmidt. Supprement der Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres,
enthaltend. Die Histiologie und Systematische Erganzungen, 1864. Seite 27.

(3) F. E. Schulze. Untersuchungen iiber den Ban unci die Entwickhing
der Spongien. Siebente Mittlieilung. Die Familie der Spongidte. Zeitschrift
fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXXII., Seite 620.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 527

V. SUB-GENUS. REGULARIS
The connecting fibres are of similar thickness in one and the
same portion of the sponge, and the differences in their diameter
is never so great as in the foregoing species. The variations do
not as a rule exceed 10% of the average measurement.

The meshes of the network formed by these fibres are also
accordingly much more regular. They are small and the connecting
fibres are very thin as compared to those of the species in other
sub-genera.

73. SPECIES. EUSI'ONGAI COMPACTA. Carter.

EUSPONGIA COMPACTA. Carter (1).

Shape and Size.

Thin, horizontal or vertical, extending concentrically from a
pedunculated or contracted irregular base, terminating at the
circumference in an irregularly fissured round margin. Consistence
that ot very compact felt. Size, about 11 by 6 mm., in its longest
diameter, and 2 mm., thick.

Colour.
Dark fawn when fresh, light fawn or grey after exposui-e when
dry ; dermal tissue colorless.

Surface.
Surface uniformly plain on both sides, interrupted only by the
pedunculated attachment ; minutely reticulated in relief from the
subsidence of the dermal tissue upon the subjacent fibrous structure,
which terminates in little conuli, each of which beai"S a sand thread,
osculi numerous, small, circular, each provided with an annular
diaphragm ; disposed singly or in scattered groups on one side,
more plentiful and more or less in juxtaposition on the other ;

(1) H. J.Carter. New Sponges, Obsei'vations oa old ones, and a proposed
new Group. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 5th Series, Vol.
X., No. 56, p. 106, 1882.

)28

A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

when single and isolated, presenting a stelliform ax-rangement of
the superficial branches of the exhalent canal system, but when on
the margin, running in straight lines towards the latter. Pores in
the interstices of a soft fibrous reticulation i?i the dermal tissue which
tympanizes the interstices of the subdermal fibrous reticulation.

Canal System 1

Skeleton.
Internal structure composed of fine keratine fibre, densely
reticulated ; traversed plentifully by the branches of the exhalent
canal system.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, (T. Jukes.)

Bathymetrical Distribution 1

73. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA OFFICINALIS. F. E. Schiilze.
Ditela nitens. 0. Schmidt. (1)
Euspongia officinalis. Graeffe. (2)
Euspongia officinalis. Polejaeff. (3)
Euspongia officinalis. Ridley. (4)
Euspongia officinalis. F. E. Schulze. (5)
Feiner Badeschwamm, Eckhel. (6)

(1) O. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Leipzig, 1S62.
Seite 24.

(2) E. Graeffe. Uebersicht der Seetliierfauna des Golfes von Triest nebst
Notizen iiber Vorkommen^ Lebensweise, Erscheinungs und Fortpflanzungs-
zeit der einzelnen Artcn. Arbeiten aus dem zoologischen Institute der
Universitat Wien und der zoologischen Station in Triest. Bd. 7, Heft 2,
1882, p. 3.

(3) iV. PoUjaeff. Report on the Keratosa. Report on the scientific
results of the voyage of H.M.S. Challenger^ during the years 1873-76.
Zoology, Vol XL, part 31, 1885, p. 53.

(4) Stuart 0. Rklhy. Spongiida. Report on the zoological collections
made in the Indo-Pacific Ocean during the voyage of H.M.S. Alert, 1881-2.
British Museum of Natural History Catalogue, 1884, p. 379.

(5) F. E. Schulze. Untersuehungen iiber den Ban unci die Entwickelung
der Spongien, Siebente Mittheilung. Die Familie der Spongidse. Zeitschrift
fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Bd. 32, Heft 4, 1879, p. 616.

(6) Eckhel. Der Badeschwamm. Triest, 1877.

BY R, VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 529-

S])ongia adriatica. O. Schmidt. (7)

Spongia adriatica. 0. Schmidt. (8)

Spongia agaricina. Ehlers. (9)

Spongia agaricina. Esper. (10)

Spongia agaricina. Pallas. (H)

Spongia discus. Duchassaing et Michelotti. (12)

Spongia graminse. Hyatt. (13)

Spongia lapidescens. Duchassaing et Michelotti. (14)

Spongia iignea. Hyatt. (15)

Spongia mollissima. O. Schmidt. (16)

Spongia nitens. O. Schmidt. (17)

Spongia officinalLs. Bowerbank. (18)

Spongia officinalis. Carter (19)

(7) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Leipzig, 1862,
p. 20.

(8) 0. Schmidt. Supplement der Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres,
enthaltend die Histiologie und Systematische Ergiinzungen. Leipzig, 1864,
p. 24.

(9) E. Ehlers. Die Esperschen Spongien in der Zoologischen Sammlimg
der K. Universitiit Erlangen. Progrannn zum Eintritt in den Senat der
Ktinighch Fridrich- Alexander Universitiit in Erlangen. Erlangen, 1870,
p. 11.

(10) E. T. G. Esper. Die Pflanzenthiere. Theil II., p. 216, 1791-1830.

(11) P. S. Pallas. Elenchus zoophytoruni. Hagas Comit, 1766, 1768,
p. 397.

(12) P. Duchassaing de Foubressin et Giovanni Michelotti. Spongiaires
de la Mer Caraibe. Memoire public par la Soci(5t6 Hollandaise des Sciences
& Harlem 1864, p. 37.

(13) A. Hyatt. Revision of the North American Porifera, with remarks
upon foreign species. Part II. Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural
History, Vok II., 1877, p. 46.

(14) P. Duchassaing et Michelotti. Spongiaires de la Mer Caraibe.
Memoire puljlie par Societe Hollandaise des Sciences ;1 Harlem 1864, p, 34.

(15) A. Hyatt. Revision of the North American Porifera, with remarks
upon foreign species. Part II. Memoirs of the Bostoii Society of
Natural History, Vol. II., 1S77, p. 45.

(16) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres Leipzig 1862,
p. 23.

(17) 0. Schmidt. Supplement der Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres,
enthaltend die Histiologie und Systematische Ergiinzungen. Leipzig,
1864, p. 27.

(18) /. »S'. Bou-erhank. A Monograph of the British Spongiadse, Vol. I.,
Roy. Society for 1864, p. 205.

(19) H. J. Garter. Some sponges from the West Indies and Acapulca
in the Liverpool Free Museum, described with general and classiticatory
remarks. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. Series 5, Vol. IX.,
No. 52,, p. 270, 1882. J

530 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

Spongia officinalis. Ehlers, ("20)

Spongia officinalis. Esper. (21)

Spongia officinalis. Hyatt. (22)

Spongia officinalis. Linne. (23)

Spongia officinalis. Pallas. (24)

Spongia quarnerensis. 0. Schmidt. (25)

Spongia vei-miculata. Duchassaing et Michelotti. (2G)

Spongia virgultosa. O. Schmidt. (27)

Of the numerous varieties of this species, which are found in all
parts of the world, two belong to the Australian fauna.

They are the following : —

I. EUSPONGIA OFFICINALIS DURA. V. Lendenfeld.
Identical with Spongia Lignea Dura. Hyatt (I.e.)

II. EUSPONGIA OFFICINALIS CAVERNOSA. Ridley.

Shape and Size.

It is a difficult thing to describe the shape of this species as it i=
so veiy variable.

Massive rounded, irregularly labose, lamellose. The different
varieties differ also in their outer appearance.

(20) E. Ehlers. Die Espersclien Spongien in der Zoologischen Samm-
lung der K. Universitiit Erlangen. Programm zum Eintritt in den Senat
der Kuniglichen Fridrich-Alexander Universitiit in Erlangen, 1870, p. 12.

(21) E. T. G. Esper. _ Die Pflanzentliiere. Theil II., p. 218.

(22) A. Hyatt. Revision of the North American Porifei'a, with remarks
upon foreign species. Part II. Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural
History, Vol. II., 1877, p. 41.

(23) Linnd. Systema Naturae.

(24) P. S. Pallas. Elenchus zoophytorum. Hagas Comit, 1766, 1768,
p. 87.

(25) 0. Schmidt. Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Leipzig, 1862,
p. 22.

(26) P. Duchassaing et Michelotti. Spongiaires de la Mer Caraihe.
Mt^moire public par la Society Hollandaise des Sciences k Haidem, 1864,
p. 35.

(27) O. Schmidt. Die Spongien der Kilste von Algier, mit Nachtriigen
zu den Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres (drittes Supplement) Leipzig,
1868, p. 4.

BY R. VON LEXDENFELD, PH.D. 531

EUSPONGIA OFFICINALIS CAVERNOSA,

is bulbous, turnip-shaped (described by Ridley (I.e.), from a single
dry specimen), with several tubular processes on its upper surface,
10-35 mm long, and 8-10 mm. in their greatest diameter. These
processes however are ragged in outline at their distal ends and
evidently in life opened through their fringed apertui'e, now
obscured fiom the falling together of the sides. Their sides are in
some cases fenestrate. The body of the sponge is rudely globular,
and is drawn up above into monticular elevations, which are
terminated by the tubes just described ; the base is somewhat
flattened and has been attached at more points than one. The
horizontal diameters are 45 and 55 mm. The vertical height to
base of uppermost tube is 30 mm.

From this description which is copied verbatim from Ridley
(I.e.), it appears that this variety is most similar to my species
Euspongia conifera. I will leave it however to Mr. Ridley to
decide this, whether they ai'e identical or not.

Euspongia officinalis dura,
Spongia lignea levis. Hyatt (I.e.)

I have but one dry specimen and also Hyatt's description, which
is not accompanied by an illustration, is very meagre. The shape
of this variety is irregularly massive, horizontally expanded, with
indications of irregular conic elevations on the sides and upper
surface. My specimen measures 140 x 160 x 80 mm.

Rigidity.

Some of the varieties of this species are exceedingly soft and
elastic, to this peculiarity of them theii- utility must be ascribed.

The variety Euspongia officinalis dura, is as the name implies
very hard. By the pressure of 1 kilogramme the specimen of
which the dimensions have been given above is compressed only

532 a monograph op the australian sponges,

Colour.

The colour of the varieties hitherto examined in the live state,
varies according to F. E. Schulze (I.e.), from bright straw-yellow
to rust-red and dirty dark brown. The skeletons have the colour
of " burnt siena"*

Surface.

The surface differs according to variety and locality, conuli are
always present and scattered pretty regularly over the surface. No
conuli are found in close proximity to the oscula (indication of an
askeletous part as in Utispongia canaliculata, described above).
The conuli attain a height of 1 mm., and are of a similar thickness
at the base. In the fields between them, there is a very dense
network in the interstices of which the pore-sieves are found.
The pores are not numerous. The oscula are never raised and
scattered irregularly or else situated in lines. (Compare F. E.
Schulze's exhaustive description and his excellent figures, I.e.)

There are very few foreign bodies in the skin.

Canal System.

The skin is pretty thick and there are very slender canals, which
lead from the inhalent pores into the subdermal cavities. The
latter consist of irregular cylindrical and tangental canals which
are not very wide, and separated by broad masses of tissue (F. E.
Schulze, I.e., Tafel XXXVI., fig. 2).

The final ramifications of the inhalent canal system are narrow
and give off comparative wide special canals to the ciliated chambers
{F. E. Schulze, I.e., Tafel XXXVL, fig. 12.)

The chambers open direct into the exhalents or ai'e connected
with them by short and narrow special canals hardly wider than
those which lead from the inhalents to the chamber pores.

The exhalents join to form oscular tubes in the usual manner.

In the variety Etts})ongia officinalis cavernosa, there are according
to Ridley (I.e.), very extensive lacunae. These are connected with
the apertures at the summits of the tubes. As Ridley's specimen

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 533

was dry it is difficult to ascertain whether these cavities are
vestibule-lacunae or Oscular tubes. I am inclined to consider them
as the former, judging from their similarity with the homologous
structures in Euspongia irregularis and canaliculata described
above.

Skeleton.

The main fibres are straight and not very thick, they contain a
greater or smaller amount of foreign bodies.

The connecting fibres form a regular network, as mentioned in
the description of the sub-genus.

The meshes are regular and small. The average thickness of the
fibres is according to F. E. Schultze (I.e., p. 635), 0-03-0-038 mm.
It varies according to the varieties.

I. EUSPONGIA OFFICINALIS CAVERNOSA.

The skeleton consists of (1), stouter main fibres, which are
approximately straight and parallel to each other, about 0"04-0"07
mm. apart, more or less vertical to the sui'face (I presume this a
mistake, it ought to be 0-4-0 -7 mm.) according to position. Thickness
about 003-0"04 mm., and (2) of connecting fibres, similar to the
main fibres, and more or less vertical to them, but often very
obliquely placed, thickness about 0-013-0 -03 mm. ; distance apart,
very variable from 0-14 upwards.

II. EuSPONGIA OFFICINALIS DURA.

The main fibres are very thick and pretty close together,
being on an average 0-5 mm., apart and measuring 0-2 mm., in
thickness. The main fibres of no other variety are so thick. They
are completely filled with foreign bodies 80% sand grains averaging
0-05 mm., and foreign spicules. These are mostly short fragments.
The surface of the main fibres is uneven. The knobs are not high.

The connecting fibres form a very regular network. The meshes
average 0*33 mm., in width. The thickness of the fibres is 0-033

534 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The excessive hardness of this variety is due to the exceptional
thickness of the main fibres.

Histology.

The histology of some of the Mediterranean varieties has been
worked out in such a manner by P. E. Schulze (I.e.) that it would
be necessary to translate them verbatim here. As however every
one, who intends to study the sponges must ij)se facta possess and
read F. E. Schulze's works, it will suffice here simply to refer to the
work of that author cited above.

Geographical Distribution.

Mediterranean, (compare particularly Eckhel's map) ; North
Atlantic Ocean, (Eckhel, Hyatt and others) ; South Atlantic
Ocean, (Ridley) ; North Pacific Ocean, (Carter and Hyatt) ;
Indian Ocean, (Pallas).

In the Australian Seas.

I. EUSPONGIA officinalis CAVERNOSA.

North Coast of Australia, Torres Straits. (Alert.)

II. EuSPONGIA officinalis DURA.

West Coast of Australia (Bailey) ; South Coast of Australia,
Port Phillip (Hyatt).

Bathymetrical Distribution.
20-200 metres, in the Mediterranean (Eckhel).

I. EuSPONGIA officinalis CAVERNOSA.

19 metres,

II. EuSPONGIA officinalis DURA.

Shallow water.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 535

76. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA BAILYI. Nova species.

Shape and Size.

This sponge has the shape of a cup or goblet. This shape
is very constant and characteristic. Sometimes there are two cups
joined to each other. Generally, however, there is only a single
one. The cup stands upright on the sea bottom to which it is
attached by one or more points of the more or less expanded base.
Sometimes the cup is high and narrow, twice as long as broad ;
sometimes it is broad and horizontally expanded, barely as high as
broad.

The cup attains a height of 170 mm. and a breadth of 190 mm.
It is in the specimen 170 mm. high, 105 mm. deep. Generally
about two-thirds of the height of the sponge in depth. The
lamella forming the cup thins out towards the margin very
rapidly so that the margin, which always is very regularly circular,
appears quite sharp.

Surface.

The outer surface is very rough and uneven. There are high
irregidarly longitudinal ridges, and also other outgrowths of
varying shape. The skeleton presents a great irregularity of the
outer surface. The inner side of the cup is very smooth, and the
skeleton possesses on that side numerous round holes, averaging
3 mm. in diameter, which probably indicate the position of the
oscula.

As only dry skeletons are at my disposal, I am not able to give
a detailed description.

E.IGIDITY.

The sponge is pretty soft and elastic. By the pressure of 1
kilogramm on the side of the cup it is depressed (large specimen)
about 10 mm. Small pieces of the cup wall, of the size of a cubic
centimetre can be compressed by the weight of 1 kilogramm to a
thickness of 1 mm.
35

536 a monograph of the australian sponges,

Colour.

In the live state unknown. The colour of the beach worn
.specimens is light brown.

Canal System.

The structure of the skeleton indicates that there are skeletons
and askeletous portions, in as much, as rounded grooves are found
in great abundance between the ridges of the outer surface.

Skeleton.

The main fibres are straight, on an avei-age 0*7 mm., apart and
extend from the base upward and outward, terminating always in
the tags on the outer surface of the cup.

They measure 0-1 mm., in thickness and are smooth. They do
not contain any foreign bodies, and their surface is accordingly
quite smooth.

The connecting fibres form a very regular network, the meshes
of which average 025 mm. Their thickness is 0-04 mm.

Nothing is known of the histology of this sponge.

Geographical Distribution.
"West Coast of Australia, (Baily.)

Batiiymetrical Distribution.
Shallow water?

77. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA LEVIS. Nova species.
Shape and Size.

• Euspoiigia levis is a lamellar species and resembles in outer
appearance, to a certain extent, forms of the genus Antheroplax.

From a central mass, which is attached by a small portion of the
base, numerous lobate lamellae arise, which are straight or slightly
curved and generally possess a serx-ate margin. The serrations are
often so marked, that digitate processes are formed on the free

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 537

margins of the curved lamellae. These processes may be flattened
or cylindrical, but they never reach a large size. The lamellae
enclose each other to a certain extent, so that a flower shaped
form is produced.

The largest specimens measure 80 mm. in width and GO mm., in
height. The lamellte have a very uniform thickness of 8-10 mm.
The digitate processes may attain a length of 75 mm.

Colour.
The sponge is, alive and in spirits, of a brownish grey colour.

Surface.

The surface is pex'fectly smooth. There are no conuli. With a
magnifying glass a very regular network of sand grains can be
detected similar to the one which is described in this paper of
Euspongia canaliculata.

In the meshes of this network we find the pore-sieves, which
are slightly depressed and perforated by numerous small pores.

The oscula are disposed in an irregular line on the free margin
of the lamella. A few are also met with on the broad sides. They
measure about 1 mm., across, are circular, and slightly elevated
above the surrounding surface. The oscula are numerous.

Canal System.

Below the outer skin a reticulation of anastomosing tangental
canals are met with, which repi'esent the subdermal cavity. The
pore-sieves with their numerous pores cover the sub-dermal cavities
in the shape of a thick skin, which is pervaded by numerous narrow
canals as in Euspongia silica ta.

The skin has a thickness of 0-22 whilst the pores and canals
possess an average width of 0-03 mm. The pores can apparently
be entirely closed by the sponge, although some of them are always
seen open.

The greatest number observed in one pore-sieve was 16.

These canals are not very large, they measure on an average
0'2 mm. in diameter and are oval or irregular in transverse section.

538 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

They are not very numerous, and there is only one single layer of
them. The firm substance between them is about as voluminous
as the canal space.

Towards the centre of the lamella large exhalent lacunose canals
are met with, which unite to form an oscular tube, tending
upward and terminating with the cii'cular osculum on the lamella
margin.

Between these two canal-systems smaller canals, averaging
0'05 mm. in diameter are met with, these have mostly a circular
transverse section and extend in a longitudinal direction. Some
of them are exhalents, others inhalents. Between them the
ciliated chambers, which are spherical and represent about three-
quarters of spheres, are met with. They measure 0-037 mm. in
diameter.

Skeleton. (Plate 36, Hg. 2.)

The skeleton resembles that of Euspongia officinalis pretty
closely. The main fibres are slightly branched and disposed longi-
tudinally. They are free from foreign l)odies, and on an average
0"1 mm. thick.

The connecting fibres form a very i-egular network. No
secundary and tertiary fibres as in Etispongia canaliculata can be
distinguished. All the connecting fibres are free from foreign
bodies and 0-016 — 0.032 mm. thick. The most connecting fibres
measure about 0-025 mm.

The meshes of the connecting fibre network are on an average
Q-l mm. wide. They become smaller in the vicinity of the main
fibi-es.

Here and there we find large sand grains measuring 0-2 —
0*4 mm. enclosed and embodied in the skeleton. These
resemble the sand-grains forming an essential part of the skeleton
of Aulena villosa, very closely. They are found occasionally in the
network of the connecting fibres, but generally in the main fibres.

In the outer skin occasionally similar sand grains are met with,
and there is no doubt that the sponge grows around these and so
they become imbedded in it. Where the large sand grain has been

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 539

attached near the termination of a main tibre it is simply taken
up by it, this is the usual way in which the main fibres attain
their core of foreign bodies. Between the main fibre terminations
however, in the fields, we never find the foreign bodies in the
surface being taken into the body of tlie sponge in other species of
Eiispongia, It appears that in this species the sponge selects from
the numerous foreign bodies in its surface these large ones and
allows them to be imbedded in its body, whereas all the other
smaller ones present in abundance remain always in the outer skin.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson (von Lendenfeld,
Ramsay) ; Broughton Island (Ramsay).

Bathymetrical Distribution.
5-10 metres (in Port Jackson).

The specimens from Broughton Island are larger than those
from Port Jackson.

VI. SUB-GENUS. DEN SALTS.

The species ref errable to this genus are characterised by the small
size of the meshes in the net-work formed by the connecting fibres,
and the gi-eat thickness of them.

Whereas in the sub-genus Regularis the connecting fibres are
about a tenth in thickness of the width of ilie meshes in the net-
work, here they are only a sixth or less. The consequence of this
is, that the skeleton becomes very dense,

78. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA PARVULA. Nova Species.
Shape and Size.
Eiispongia parvula is a very small and inconspicuous sponge.
It consists of conic or tapering digitate processes which grow out
from a lamellose base attached by one side, The largest specimen
measures 50 mm., in height and 30 mm., in width ; the digitate
processes reach a length of 25 mm., and are at the base 8 mm.,
wide. They are not regularly circular in transverse section but
laterally compressed. Their ends are pointed.

540 a monograph of the australian sponges,

Surface.

The surface is conulated, the conuli attain a height of 1 mm.,
and are 3 mm., apart.

There is very little sand in the skin. The fields are subdivided
by a net- work of ridges as usual into secundary fields which contain
the pore-sieves.

KiGIDITY.

The skeleton is soft and not very elastic. The digitate processes
can be compressed to a tenth of their thickness by the weight of
1 kilogramm.

Colour.

The colour of the live sponge is dark bluish grey. This colour
is retained in spirits.

Tlie canal system does not present any peculiarities. It is similar
to that of Euspongia officinals in every respect.

Skeleton.

The straight main fibres measure 0*09 mm., in thickness. They
are about 3 mm., apart. This is the reason why the sponge is so
soft.

They are cored by sand grains which average 0-02 mm. The
foreign bodies are scarce and scattered, the surface is smooth.

The connecting fibres measure 0-09 in thickness. They are as
thick as the main fibres and the meshes average a width of 0-3
mm. They are rather irregular.

The specimens are not sufficiently preserved to enable me to
give an account of the histology of this species.

Geographical Distribution.
INIauritius, (Yon Haast.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.
Shallow water ]

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 541

79. SPECIES EUSPONGIA RETICULATA. Nova species.
Shape and Size.

This species presents a very irregular appearance. It consists
of irregularly curved and continually anastomosing digitate, and
lamellose portions, which combine to form a perfect network.

The whole structure attains a size of 250 mm. in length and
100 mm. in height and width (the largest specimen.) The lamellose
and digitate portions have an average thickness of 15 mm., while
the interstices between them average a width of 20 mm.

The apertures, by which these large cavities open on the outer
surface of the whole structure are irregular, and generally a little
narrower than the internal cavities.

Surface.
The surface of the exposed portions, the outer surface appears
conulated. The surface of the caverns in the interior is smooth.
As I only possess skeletons of this species, a detailed description
cannot be given.

Rigidity.

The skeleton of this sponge is hai'd and elastic. A large
specimen is compressed by the weight of 1 kilogramm only about
5 mm. Small pieces are hardly compressed at all by that weight.
Even the weight of 80 kilogramm only compresses the skeleton to
half its size.

Canal System.

The cavities in the interior can be considered as vestibule
spaces, but it appears as if these were secundary vestibules as also
in the lamellae themselves, we find indications of lacunse and wide
canals, which are very similar to the vestibule cavities in Exispongia
irregularis tenuis, described above.

No indication of the position of the^ Oscula can be found in the
skeleton, and also askeletous portions do not appear to exist. There
are no grooves in the skeleton.

The canal system proper, must be composed of very fine canals
as the skeleton appears very dense.

542 A. MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

Skeleton. (Plate XXXVI., fig. 4.)

The main fibres are continuous from the base, apparently to the
extremities of the net sti'ucture of this sponge. This species in
every respect pi-esents many peculiarities, which stamp it to a
transition form between the genera Euspongia and Hippospongia.
Also the main fibre show in some places indications of a similarity
with those of Hippospongia.

The main fibres are on an average 0'5 mm. apart, often however
two or three extend for a long distance parallel and remain close
together.

The fibres are completely filled with sand. The grains of this are
small. The surface is roughened by numerous knobs, which often
attain a height equal to half the diameter of the fibre.

The sand grains average 0-U09 mm. The thickness of the main
fibre is 0'038 at the thinnest, and 0-14 mm. at the thicker parts.

The connecting fibres form a network of meshes measuring on
an overage 0-2 mm., in width in the interior of the sponge. Here
they are 0"05 mui., thick. The connecting fibres do not contain
any foreign bodies.

On the surface another kind of network is met with. The
meshes are narrower and the fibres thinner, and the whole structure
is more irregular. This surface skeleton is however by no means
always present and may be a pathological structure, caused
locally to make its appearance where cammensols have taken up
their abode.

Nothing is known of the histology of this species.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia. Port Jackson, (Ramsay.)

Bathymetrical Distriuution.
30-40 metres.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 543

VII. SUB-GENUS. SILICIFIBRIS.
The skeleton of the species belonging to this sub-genus is similar
in shape to that of the Regularis species. The main fibres are
perforated where they are, as it is generally the case, slightly
flattened.

The connecting fibi'es are of uniform thickness and form a pretty
regular network.

The peculiarity of the sponges belonging to this sub-genus is,
that they have a very great proclivity for foreign siliceous spicules,
which are not only found in great abundance in the main fibres but
also in the connecting fibres.

It will be remembered that in none of the other sub-genera,
foreign bodies are found in the connecting fibres.

SO. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA GALEA.

Nova Species.

Shape and Size.

This species presents the shape of a graceful cup. It is
250 mm. high and measures at the top 260 mm. in diameter.
The margin of the cup is regularly circular. The cup is nearly
cylindrical the base being nearly as broad as the top. It is
perforated at the bottom. Also the sides ai-e perforated here
and there. The wall of the cup measures 100 mm. in thickness at
the thickest part and becomes thinner towards the margin, which
is sharp.

Surface.

The outer surface is rendered very uneven and irregular by the
appearance of numerous longitudinal iri-egular and round ribs
which extend over it. Only a skeleton is at my disposal. The
inner side of the cup is not near so uneven as the outer. The
skeleton indicates that there were askeletous portions, by the
presence of smooth grooves.

644 a monograph of the australian sponges,

Canal System.

The whole structure is excessively lacunose and light. The
wall of the cup is pervaded in every direction by wide and
anastomosing lacunae, which indicate that this species possesses
very highly developed vestibule cavities. No trace of oscula is
visible.

Skeleton.

The main fibres are straight, and here and there flattened and
perforated. They measure 0-07 mm. in thickness and are 1 mm.
apart. Their surface is rough and even slightly spiny. They are
cored with longitudinally disposed foreign siliceous spicules.
0"1 mm. on an average in length.

The connecting fibres form a net-work, the meshes of which
average 0'2 mm. in width, the thickness of the connecting fibres i»
0'06 mm. on an average. The connecting fibres only contain very
few foreign spicules, much fewer than the connecting fibres of
silicata.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia. (Ramsay.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.
Shallow water 1

79. SPECIES EU-SPONGIA FOLIACEA. Ridley.

EUSPONGIA FOLIACEA. Ridley (1).
? SPONGIA FOLIACEA. Esper (2).
? PLATYCHALINA FOLIACEA. Ehlers (3).

(I) Stuart 0. Ridley. Spongida. Report on the Zoological Collections,
made in the Indo-Paoific Ocean during the Voyage of H.M.S. Alert, 18S1-2.
British Museum of Natural History, Catalogue 1884, p. 378.

I:2)E. T. C. Enper. Die Pllanzenthiere. Theil J. Seite 201, 1791.

(3) -E. Ehlers. Die Esperschen Spongien in der Zoologischen Sammlung
der K. Universitiit Erlangen Programm zum Eintritt in den Senat der
Koniglich Fridrich-Alexander Universitiit in Erlangen. Erlangen 1870.
Seite 21.

by r. von lendenfeld, ph.d. 545

Shape and Size.

JSusjJongia foliacea is a ceratose species, differing from the
common species of Euspongia, only in its flattened form. There
are numerous small pores scattered all over one side (the front) of
the sponge. Size ?

Colour 1

Surface.

On the surface there are conic deviations. With the exception
of a few fragments of spicules of diflerent thickness, found singly
and rarely in a few fibres, more numerous in the surface, there are
no spicules at all. They seem to he foreign bodies taken in, in
small quantities into the surface-tuft.

Canal System"?
Skeleton,

The fibres of the main skeleton agree in their consistency and
non-rectangular arrangement with those of Euspongia, and as
stated already, foreign bodies are the exception even in the surface
tufts. The diameter of the fibres is -4 to '7 mm., except in delicate
Ditela network of the surface and interstices, where it is only
•0085 to -022 mm.

This desci'iption is hai'dly suflicient.

Geographical Distribution.
North Coast of Australia ; Torres' Straits, West Island ; (Alert.)

Bathymetrical Distribution 1

82. SPECIES. EUSPONGIA SILICATA. Nova Species.

Shape and Size.

The specimens which I refer to this species are small, hori-
zontally extended, lohed and vertically compressed. The largest

546 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

specimen attains a size of 70 mm. in length, 40 mm.in bi-eadtli and
20 mm. in height. The thickness of the lamellose sponge rarely
exceeds 14 mm.

Surface.

The surface of the sponge is perfectly smooth in the living
state. There are, however, in hardened specimens, which always
shrink a little ; slight depressions in the fields between the termi-
nations of the main fibres in the skin, which then, of course,
appear as conuli. (Plate XXXVIII., fig. 1).

A few tangental connecting fibres radiate from the terminations
of the main fibres and these support the skin in which they
extend, they are not difierent from the fibres in the interior.
There are only very few foreign bodies in the skin, so that the
slightly raised ridges on the surface, which form the usual network
dividing the pore-sieves from each other, do not appear like dense
masses of sand, as in some of the species described above. The
few foreign bodies ai-e scattered irregularly over the surface, they
are always tangentally disposed, foreign siliceous spicules often
quite unbroken. (Plate XXXVIIL, fig. 1.) In the pore-sieves
there are a great many small pores. (Plate XXXVIII., fig. 3).

The oscula are small and numerous, scattered irregularly over
the surface or also grouped in lines. They are circular and
measure 1 mm. in diameter. They appear very slightly raised
over the surface.

Rigidity.
This sponge is very hard and elastic. A lamella, 10 mm. in
thickness and 400 m mm- large is compressed, 3 mm, by the
weight of one kilogramm.

Colour.
In the living state this species is of a greyish rose colour. In
spirits it appears darker grey on the surface and lighter grey in
the interior. Tlie dry skeleton is light brown.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 547

Canal System.

From the pores in the pore-sieve mentioned above, which
measure, when dilated, O'Ol mm. in diameter, and which are
circular, cylindrical canals lead down to the sub-dermal cavities.
(Plate XXXVIIL, fig. 2 c). There always are a great number of
j)ores, as many as 30 in one pore-sieve. The canals which lead
down from them extend tangentally and obliquely, and join to form
larger canals which likewise extend tangentally. ( Plate XXX VIII.,
tig. 1). These finally open into the sub-dennal cavity, which is
formed by large tangental irregular canals, separated from the
outer surface by a very thick skin 0-15 mm. in thickness. (Plate
XXXVIIL, fig. 2).

This part of the canal system is very similar to corresponding
parts of the canal system in certain Gumminse (1).

The sub-dermal cavities measure 0*14 mm., on an average in
width, although there ai-e here and there spaces 0-6 mm., wide.

From this net work of tangental canals which forms the sub-
dermal cavity, canals extend obliquely downward which x'apidly
ramify in an irregular manner. These branches supply the sponge.
Their size of course is very variable but they rarely exceed 0*2 mm.,
in diameter and mostly have a circular transverse section.

The ciliated chambers are attached to the final ramifications of
these canals without the formation of any special canals leading to
the chamber pores as in Uuspongia officinalis. The chamber pores
are also much smaller and apparently more numerous.

The small exhalents join to form large canals which are irregular
and may attain a width of 0' 7-0 -9 mm. These join and form the
oscular tubes which are generally vertical to the surface and
straight, with a circular transverse section. They are about
1*2 mm. wide, and extend nearly right through the lamellose
sponge. Into the sides and particularly into the lower portion of
this oscular tube, these exhalent canals open.

(1) F. E. Schulze. Untersiichungen iiber den Ban und die Entwicklung
der Spongien. Dritte Mittheiluug. Die Familie dor Chondrosidas. Zeitschrift
fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band XXIX., Seite 87.

548 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

As mentioned above, the osculum is about 1 mm wide, so that
the tube appears contracted towards tbe osculum.

Skeleton. (Plate XXXVIII., fig. 1.)

The skeleton consists of compressed main fibres and a very regular
net work of connecting fibres of uniform diameter.

The main fibres ai'e often expanded so as to appear flat, and then
the margins of the flattened expansions are perforated by oval holes
and in this way there is no abrupt distinction between main and
connecting fibres as they are connected by this intermediate
structure.

The thickness of the main fibres where it is not expanded, is
0'066 mm. The main fibres are on an average 0"6 mm. apart, and
extend from the points of attachment of the sponge upwards and
outwards. They are disposed in a radiating manner round these
points to a certain extent.

They are however very irregular, and much bent and curved in
various ways.

They are cored with foreign siliceous spicules averaging a length
of 0-07-0 '09 mm. These spicules are always broken, and it appears
taken into the fibre without any discrimination. They protrude
to a certain extent beyond the surface of the fibre, causing it to
appear rough, or even spiny. The spicules are disposed mostly in
a longitudinal direction occasionally very oblique however. Then
one of their ends protrudes. This end is generally the more
pointed one of the two. Some of the spines thus disposed point
outward, towards the sui-face, others again inward towards the
centre of the sponge. The spicules are also, where they i)rotrude
entirely enclosed bya sheath of horny substance. (Plate XXXVIII.,
fig. 1).

The connecting fibres form a regular net-work. The meshes
average a diameter of 0-09 mm.

The thickness of the connecting fibres is 0"025 mm.

The connecting fibres contain in their axes similar foreign siliceous
spicules as the main fibres (Plate XXXVIII., fig. 2) these are
always disposed longitudinally.

by r. von lendekfeld, ph.d. 549

Histology.

The study of some well preserved specimens of this sponge has
led to some interesting discoveries, which show that this species
possesses some peculiarities in its structure hitherto not observed in
other sponges.

Gland Cells.

In the skin between the canals, which lead down from the pores,
amoeboid cells are found, which present the usual shape, but appear
more granular. Others again with a still more granular protoplasms
are found attached to the ectoderm cells covering the outer surface
and the inhalent canals.

There are all desirable transition forms from these amoeboid
wandei'ing cells to true gland cells (Plate XXXVIII., fig. 2 a)
attached by their thin end to the ectodermal epithelia. These are
club-shaped and resemble those gland cells described by Merejowsky
(1) of Halisarca very closely. They differ from those described by
me of Aplysillidaj (2) only in so far as they possess only a single
process to connect them with the surface.

No nucleus is visible in these cells, which are completely filled
with granules when fully developed.

The remarkable thing is, that these cells are found not only on
the outer surface but all along the narrow inhalent canals.

It makes one the impression that some of the amgeboid wander-
ing cells are converted into these gland cells, wherever these gland
cells may be required. The whole of the protoplasm of the
amoeboid cells seems to be converted into the slimy secretion, the

It is further of interest to note that these gland cells are
expelled from the sponge in toto, and that they then spread out on
the outer surface where apparently they are converted into slime.

(1) C. Merejlcoicslcy. Etudes sur les- Esponges de la Mer Blanche.
Mt^moires de rAcademie Imperiale des Sciences de St. P6tersbourg, VII.
Serie, No. 7.

(2) R. von Lendenfeld. Ueber Ccelenteraten der Siidsee. II. Mittheilung.
Neue Aplysinidse. Zeitschrift fiir wissenachaftliche Zoologie. Band
XXXVIII., Seite 268.

550 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

I have sections where the whole mass of granules representing
one gland cells can be seen on their way out from the mesoderm,
through the Ectodermal Epithelium. In other sections again the
masses of granules are seen on the outer surface.

These cells accordingly secret the slime by being converted into
it, like some of the cells in the milk glands of mammals. At the
same time this accounts for my observation made some years ago
(1) that the gland cells disappear after they have secreted slime
for some time. They are regenerated as long as there are a.iy
amoeboid wandering cells, but when there are no more of these
the production of slime must cease.

It appears that these gland cells are being formed as an
emergency occurs, and need not necessarily always be present. It
would otherwise be surprising that F. E. Schulze and others did
not see them.

Sensitive Cells.

In the skin there are some isolated spindle-shaped cells, which I
am inclined to consider as nervous elements. (Plate 38, fig. 2 d)
They are very slender and taper downward to a fine granular
thread which can be traced for some distance. Remnants of a
Palpocil. (Plate 38, fig 2 e), were observed several times.

Ganglia cells do not appear to be present.

Geographical Distribution.

East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson (Ramsay, von Lendenfeld);
North Coast of Australia, Torres Straits, (Macleay); Northern
Territory of South Australia, (Haacke.)

Batiiymetrical Distribution.
40 metres. Port Jackson : shallow water?

(1) R. von Lendenfeld. L.c.

BY R. VOK LENDENFELD, PH.D. 551

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Note. — In all cases where no mention is made in the explanation of the
method in which the plates were drawn, Zeiss's new reflecting camera has
been employed, so that the relative dimensions are very reliable.

Plate 36.

Fig. L — Eic^jwngia canaliadata. E. v. L. Var. dura.
Skeleton.
Distal pai't of a transverse section through the massive part of the

sponge.
50:1 magniiied.

Fig. 2. — Eusj^onqia levis. R. v. L.

Skeleton.

Transverse section through the outer surface.

50:1 magnified.

Showing sand-grains in the skin (a), and large solitary sand-
grains in the network of the clear horny threads (b), (c) are
the spaces for the sub-dermal cavities.

Fig. 3. — Euspongia irr-egidaris. R. v. L. Var. Jacksonia.
Skeleton .

Portion of the network formed by the connecting fibres.
50:1 magnified.

Fig. 4 — Euspongia reticulata, R. v.L.
Skeleton.

Portion of the network formed by the connecting fibres.
50:1 magnified.

Fig. 5. — Euspongia repeals. R. v. L.
Skeleton.

Portion of the network

Transverse section through the outer surface.
50:1 magnified.

Fig. 6. — Euspo7igia Matthewsi. E. v. L.
Skeleton.

Portion of the network,
50:1 magnified.
36

552 A MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES.

Plate 37.

Fig 1. — Euspongia canaliculata. 11. v. L. Var. daatica.

Transverse section through the outer portion of one of the digitate
processes.

Combined picture.

450:1 magnified.

{P) Pore-sieve, (p) Inhalent pores. (a) Askeletous portion of tlie
sponge, (.s) Slieletous portion cf the sponge. {M) TJadiating
main fibre charged witli sand, etc. {S) External sand armour
in the outer skin in direct connection with the sandy core of
the main fibre. ( V) Connecting fibres free from foreign bodies.
(6) Sharp pointed ends of the connecting fibres at the limit of
the skeletous portion of the sponge {c) Axial thread in the
connecting filjres. (0) Ci roups of ova. (E) Endothel cell-
capsules, including the ova-groups, {d) .Sub-dermal cavities
belonging to the inhalent system, (e) Inhalent canals, (f)
Exhalent canals, (i) Lacuna; of the exhalent system in the
askeletous portion of the sponge. {G) Ciliated chambers,
(/i) Muscular membrane dividing the skeletous from the
askeletous portion of tlae sponge, consisting of highly granular
spindle-shaped cells. (*) Ganglion on the distal end of tlie
muscular membrane, {k) Tangental nerves issued from tlie
ganglion. [1] Sensitive cells in connection with the ganglion.

Plate 38.

Fig. 1. — Euspongia sUicata. R. v. L.

Transverse section through the outer portion of the sponge.
Alcohol, Alum-carmin.
100:1 magnified.

(a) Primary inlialent canals, {h) Sub-dermal cavities, (c) Conuli.
(m) Main fibres.

Fig. 2. — Euspontjla silicata. R. v. L.

Transverse section through the outer skin.

Alocohol Alum-carmin.

1000:1 magnified.

(d) gland cells, [h) Inhalent pores, (c) Narrow, primary, inhalent
canals leading from the pores into the sub-dermal cavity, {d)
Sensitive cells. (The hypothetical palpocils (<?) are not visible
in the sections.) (f) Flat ectodermal cells. [g) Muscular and
connective cells, spindle-shaped or multiplolar. (h) Amaboid
wandering cells.

BY R, VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 553

Fig. 3. — Etispoiigia silicata. R. v. L.

Portion of the skin seen from without.

Alcohol Alum-carniin.

135:1 magnified.

(C) Conuli. (p) Pores.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Brazier exhibited a specimen of Minyas, n. sp., an Actiuid
of the N.W. Coast of Australia, from the Australian Museum.

The Rev. J. N. Manning exhibited a remarkably perfect fossil
fish from the brick-yard of Mr. Abel Harver, St. Peter's, Cook's
River, The rock in which this specimen is preserved is undoubtedly
a portion of the Wianamatta Shales. It was regarded as a
Ganoid by most members ; but Mr. Ogilby maintained it to
be of Cyprinoid affinities.

Mr. Macleay exhibited a male and female specimen of
Phalacrognathus Muelleri, the insect described in his paper ; also a
male and female specimen of iVecro(Zes osculans, an insect described
by Vigors in 1825 as an inhabitant of India, but which has lately
been found in Queensland and New Guinea. Mr. Macleay also
exhibited a specimen of petrified wood from Mr. W R. Campbell's
Trigamon Station, Gwydir District, which appeared to be identical
with the existing Myall tree.

Mr. Sidney OllifF exhibited some of the insects mentioned in his
Paper — one a Rhysodes, a genus entirely new to Australia.

Dr. von Lendenfeld exhibited two pliotographs of Glacier-
polished Rocks in the Mount Lofty Group, near Adelaide. They
are Siluro-Devonian and show the striae well. They are the same
to which reference was made at a recent Meeting of the Society.

E. P. Ramsay, Curator of the Musuem, exhibited large specimnes
of Boltenia australis, which had been secured through the kind-
ness of Capt. Hixon, R.N. They were a portion of a mass of about a

5-? 4 NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

ton weight, found growing on the chain of a buoy placed off
Dobroyde Point on the 9th of July 1884, and taken up on
September 30, 1885. The largest specimen measured 3i inches
by 4 inches, the stalk 10^ inches in length, the color is of a rich
orange red.

The Hon. James Norton, M.L.C., exhibited specimens of a
Weeping Eucalyptus (Ironbark) with deep rose coloured flowers
and branches of apparently the same species with white flowers —
both varieties ai-e from Canley Vale.

The President drew attention to the report upon Tasmanian
Fisheries recently presented to Parliament by Mr. W. Saville-
Kent, F.L.S., F.Z.S., in which it is stated that the true Salmon,
S. solar, had not as yet been established in the island, that it is
px'obable that none of the ova imported in 1864 arrived at
maturity, and that the large fish which have been reputed to be
Salmon are in reality Brown Trout (Salmo far 16), " corresponding
in all essential points with that variety known in England as the
Great Lake Trout, or Salmofario, y-av., ferox or lacustris.'"

Considerable discussion followed, in which much hesitation was
expressed as to the absolute determination of the points here men-
tioned, Mr. Ogilby declaring that the Salmo fario and all its forms-
(*S'. trutta, S. levenensis, S. ferox, S. gallivensis, &c.), differ only in
consequence of variation in diet, time of bi'eeding, depth of
water, &c.

P.L.S. Vol.10

't^^-

f^^<^&^ ^^^isTri c.^^Q^.

®_®i

0^1^

'&'

Pl,26

V.XendLenfeld del.

J Sed^fuid htk.

p. L.S.VoL.IO

Pl,27

„.-Ta>r

S Sedjfuld Idh..

p. L.S. Vol, 10

' Lendenfelai del

S Sedq field idk

p. L.S.VoL.lO

V

Pl,2 9

j:«

.1 w

^•^'% .;,S

"4'

' L ethdeivfeld. del.

!<Vv

n

m

''r(

m

^''

yw

/ "^

S. .5

idLoflHd.

luh

p. L.S.VoL 10.

■mu

Pl 30

I.eizdenfeU del

SSed^field Ibth.

P.L.S. Vol.10

Pl 31

Lendeni'eLd del-

S. Sed^fceU Luh.

P L.S Vol 10

p. L. 5. Vol. 10

Pl.33

LendenfelcL dei.

S Sedq field LUh

P L.S.VoL 10

Pl.34

V LenAaifeOl del.

S.Sed^fi^td lith

P.L.S.VoL.IO

Pl.35

Leruienfeld del.

S Sed^fveld LUh

P L S Vol 10

6du.

PL. S. Vol.10

1^?*

,:^

<c.^-te^

Vi' )^

' -ib

■;^^^ ^P:

'S

Pl38

\ ^

:^^\

Leivd.en.feLd. del

S Sedgfoeld lith

WEDNESDAY, 28th OCTOBER, 1885.

C. S. Wilkinson, Esq., F.L.S., Vice-President, in the Chair.

MEMBER ELECTED.

Mr. Bond, Macquarie Place.

DONATIONS.

" Micro- Chemical Observations on the Blood in Health and in
Typhoid Fever." By Thomas Shearman Ralph, M.R.O.S. From
the Author.

" New Zealand Journal of Science." A^ol. II, No. 11, September
1885. From the Editor.

" Proceedings of the Royal Society (London)." Vol. XXXVII,
Nos. 232-237, May 1884, April 1885. From the Society.

" Bulletins de I'Academie Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et
des beaux-arts de Belgique." 52 me., Annee, 3 me., S6rie, Tomes
VI, VII, and VIII. " Annuaire.s." 1884 and 1885. From
I'Academie.

" Jours de solitude." Par O. Permez. From the Author
(according to testamentary disposition).

" Jahreshefte des Vereins fiir vaterlandische Naturkunde in
Wurttemberg." 1884. From the Society.

" Memoires de la Societe Royale des Sciences de Liege." Tome
XII, 1884. From the Society.

''Annales de la Societe Entomologique de Belgique." Tomes
XX VIII. and XXIX., 1884, 1885. From the Society.

" Bijdragen Tot de Dierkunde." Vol. XIL, No. 5. From La
Societe Royale de Zoologie, Amsterdam.
. 37

556 DONATIONS.

" Transactions of the Entomological Society of London." Part
2, 1885. From the Society.

■ "The Canadian Record of Science." Vol. I., No. 3, 1885.
From the Natural History Society of Montreal.

" Memoirs of the Califoniia Academy of Sciences." Vol. I,
Parts 1. and 2. "Proceedings." Vols. I, II, IV, V, VI,
VII, Part I. " Catalogue of Pacific Coast Fungi." From the
Academy.

" Journal of the New York Microscopical Society." Vol. I.,
Nos. 6 and 7, June and July, 1885. From the Society.

"Journal of Conchology." Vol. IV., No. 11, 1885. From
the Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland.

" Synonymy and Remarks upon the specific names and
authorities of four species of Australian Marine Shells, originally
described by Dr. Gray, in 1825 and 1827." By John Brazier,
Esq., C.M.Z.S. From the Author.

"Victorian Naturalist." Vol. II., No. 6, October 1885. From
the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

" Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes." No. 179. From the Editor.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger." VIII. Jahrg., Nos. 203 and 204.
From the Editor.

"The Provincial Medical Journal." Vol. IV., No. 44, August
1885. From the Editor.

" Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society, London." Ser.
II, Vol. V, Part 4. From the Society.

"The British and Colonial Druggist." July, 1885. From the
Editor.

" Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London." Part 2,
1885. From the Society.

" Comptes Rendus des Seances de 1' Academie des Sciences."
France. Tome CI., No. 7, 1885. From the Academy.

" Memoires de la Society Nationale des Sciences naturelles et
mathematiques de Cherbourg." Tome XXIV, 1884. From the
Society.

" Tidscbrift voor EnkDmologie." Vol. XXVIIL, Parts 1 and 2.
From the Entomological Society of the Netherlands.

PAPERS READ.

STUDIES ON SPONGES.

(Plates 39-44.)

By R. von Lendenpeld, Ph.D.

1.— THE VESTIBULE OF DENDRILLA
CAVERNOSA. Nova Species.

Among the Australian Sponges which belong to the genus
Dendrilla, there is one which is remarkable for the peculiar
laxity of its structure. The sponge is digitate and of a dull
yellowish coloui*. The skeletal fibres are dark brown to black.
The sponge does not change its colour like some related species
when exposed to the air. It attains a height of 400 mm., and the
very irregular digitate processes average a width of 25 mm. The
conuli on the outer surface are irregular, distant (average 8 mm.),
and 2 mm. -4 mm. high.

Oscula are scattered over the surface. They are found on the
sides of the digitate processes, but never appear situated terminally-
The oscula are circular, 3 mm. in diameter.

The whole sponge appears, as mentioned above, to be entirely
hollow, A large cylindrical cavity takes up the whole interior of
each digitate process. The processes themselves hereby attain a
tubular appearance.

Below, in the central, irregular mass from which the processes
grow out, the cylindrical cavities of the digitate processes join
(fig. 1), to form an extensive cavity traversed here and there by
bridges of tissue. This whole cavity is a pseudogaster, no oscula
are found in its surface ; it is a vestibule belonging to the inhalent
system.

558 STUDIES ON SPONGES,

Inhalent pores covered with the usual sieves are found throughout
the surface of the Pseudogaster. These are perfectly similar to
the inhalent pores on the outer exposed surface of the sponge.

These extensive lacunae are not in direct communication with the
outer world, we find moreover, at the distal terminations of the
tubes in the digitate processes very fine and perforated membranes
(fig. 1), dividing them from the water without.

It is easy to observe these membranes, which occasionally attain
a size of 200 square millemeters, and we find that the pores in
them may be so wide open that bridges as wide only as the pores
themselvs are left between them. In other cases again the
pores ai'e found to be entirely closed, and every intermediate
stage in the dilatation of the pores can be observed.

Two adjacent pores are always dilated nearly to the same width.
It is never observed that one pore is nearly closed and the next one
wide open. Generally we find the pores in these membranes on
the terminations of some of the processes wide open, those in
others nearly or completely closed. Occasionally I have also
observed that the pores at one end of one and the same membrane
are dilated much more than at the other. This however, is rare.
If the sponge is killed rapidly by immersion in very strong spirits
then the pores remain open. If however the sponge dies slowly by
exposure to the air, or if it is placed in weak s])irits then the pores
are generally found closed.

Thei-e can be no doubt that the width of these pores is subject
to very great variations, and that by means of these the current
of water in the lacunae can be regulated by the sponge.

The physiological value of these vestibule cavities divided
from the outer water by membranes, with small pores, which can
be dilated and contracted is not quite clear. At the breeding
time of the sponge, from September to December (or longer),
these cavities contain the embryos which swarm about in them in
great numbers. Then they appear as breeding cavities. The
mother sponge can let them out or keep them in, according to
weather, the pores in the membranes are dilated or contracted.
When the water outside is bad, it can be kept from the embryos^

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 559

by closing the pores, and in every way the whole cavity
appears as an excellent nursery. It is, however, not often
that one finds this cavity tilled with embryos, generally there are
no larvae at all in it, and it seems that they are kept there for a
short time only,

I am not inclined to believe that these cavities were originally
produced to serve as a nursery, but we could easily understand
how, after pseudoscula once had been formed by a process
of secundary folding as in Halme and other sponges ; (1)
these had been turned into a nursery, and how a poresieve,
similar to the structures covering the entrances of the inhalent
system had been formed over it, so as to adopt it better to its new
function.

But even if we attach less value to the breeding functions of
this cavity, we still find that the formation of such a membrane
was of great importance to the sponge, because it could by its
means regulate the water current to a great extent.

Vestibule cavities belonging to the inhalent system and similar
to those of our sponge have been described by me from Euspongia
canaliculata (1. c.) These have no covering membrane, In
several siliceous sponges belonging to the genus Syphonocholina I
have found similar perforated membranes which are homologous to
the membranes described above.

Histological Structure.

I have examined the vestibule membrane, as I shall in future
designate the structure here described, very minutely, and the
results of a study of section series and surface views, are the
following : —

Seen from the surface under a low power the membrane appears
perforated by numerous circular holes which are distributed very
regularly. (Fig. 2.) Their diameter is, as mentioned above, of
course subject to very great variations. Their centres are on an

(1) R. von Lendenfeld. A Monograph of the Australian sponges, Part
VI. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of N.S.W., Vol. X.

560 STUDIES ON SPONGES,

average 0'4 mm. apart. When fully dilated they reach a width of
0*2 mm. After staining every pore appears surrounded by a dark
ring. (Fig. 2.) More highly magnified (fig. 3) this ring dissolves
itself into a number of irregular roundish and multipular cells
which are situated a little distance away from the free margin.
Between the margin and these cells granular threads, vertical to
the contour of the margin are found, some of these contain a highly
stained slightly elongate nucleus. The nuclei of the cells which
form the ring, always are spherical.

Behind the cells of the ring, spindle-shaped muscular fibres are
found in abundance. They extend tangentally and often a number
of them combine to form a regular bundle of parallel fibres.

Tran verse sections (figs. 4, 5) enable us to attain a clearer
insight into these structures. The membrane has a thickness of
O'l mm. The pores (fig. 4) are not cylindrical but conic holes.
The diameter of the pore decreases towards the interior, and it is
the lower side where the pores are closed when the muscular fibres
in the membrane contract.

The whole of the membrane is covered by very low and flat
epithelium cells. (Fig. 5.) These are doubtlessly ectodermal.
The interior of the membrane is occupied by a gelatinous ground
substance, in which cells of various kind are imbedded.

Just below the surface gland cells are met with. These are
present in great numbers on both sides of the lamella. They are
similar to the homologous elements in other si^ecies of Aplysillidse
described by me (1), contain a large spherical nucleus in their
bulbous pi'oximal portion, which is connected with the surface by
a number of slender processes (tig. 5). These are simple or slightly
ramified and always vertical to the surface. On the internal margin
of the pore such gland cells are not met with. Here a diSerent kind
of cell is found below the ectodermal epithelium. These cells are
slender and spindle-shaped and form a ring round the pore. In

(1) i?. fon Lendenfefd. Ueber Ccelenteraten der Siidsee II., Mittheilung.
Neue AplysiuidaB. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Band
XXXVIII.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 561

their shape they resemble those elements of other sponges and
higher coelenterates very closely which are considered as sensitive
elements. The nucleus is different from the nucleus of the gland
cell. It is oval and slightly smaller, 0-0038 mm. long and
O'OOS mm. broad. The slender distal portion of the cell seems to
project slightly beyond the surface. (Fig. 5.) In the centre the cell is
barely thicker than the nucleus. Proximallj' it extends to form a
process in the shape of a very fine granular thread. This becomes
more and more indistinct the further we follow it down. I have,
however, traced it to a distance of 0'03 mm. from the nucleus.

In the parts of the membrane, distant from the pores, amaeboid
wandering cells (fig. 5 a), and tangental muscular cells arc found
(fig. 5 m.) The latter extend in every direction and are always
spindle-shaped.

The greatest interest attaches to the cells (fig. 5 g), which
constitute the ring visible already with a low magnifying power.

The nuclei of these cells are regularly spherical and larger than
the nuclei of the amceboid wandering cells measuring 0004 mm.,
in diameter. The body of the cell is irregularly bulbous and
extends in the shape of fine processes in every direction. It appears
that some of these processes connect these cells with the spindle-
shaped sensitive cells described above, they appear as nerve fibres.
The cells themselves are situated very close together and their
processes often touch. I consider them as ganglia cells, and the
whole structure as a circular nerve or ganglion surrounding the
pore

Although the nuclei become very clearly visible after staining
the protoplasmatic body of the cell always remains more or less
indistinct, so that particularly the processes and outlines of the
ganglia cells cannot be described with great accuracy.

It appears that changes in the water are perceived by the
sensitive and ganglia cells round the pores, and that the latter
under circumstances incite the muscular cells in the membrane to
contract, whereby the diameter of the pore may be changed.

562 STUDIES ON SPONGES,

IL-EAPHYRUS HIXONII.

A NEW GIGANTIC SPONGE FROM PORT JACKSON.

In 1862 Oscax' Schmidt described two sponges (1) as Papillina
suberea and nigricans from the Mediterranean. In 1866 Bower-
bank (2) described a sponge as Raj)hyrus griffithsii which has also
been figured (3.) Oscar Schmidt (4), afterwards colmbined tliis
Raphyrus ot Bowerbank with his own Papillina suberea, an
arrangement which has been also adopted by Norman. (5)

According to this the genera Raphyrus (Bowerbank), and
Papillina (O. Schmidt), would appear identical. Among the
Australian Sponges there are forms which doubtlessly belong to
the genus Papillina (O. Schmidt), whereas others again appear
very different from these and coincide with Bowerbank's Raphyrus.
All however, contain besides the bulb ac, the pin-shaped spicules,
also tr. tr. sp. I assume that these also occur in the European
species, but escaped the observation of Bowerbank and O. Schmidt.
I think that both these genera should be retained. In Papillina
the internal cavities are irregular and large, in Raphyrus tliey are
very similar to the cells of a honeycomb, smaller and very regular.

The species to be described below, belongs to the latter genus, it
is fairly abundant in Port Jackson, Numerous specimens mea-
suring 20 X 30 C. m., have been dredged, their shape was bulbous
and irregular ; recently a specimen of unusual dimensions was
brought up with the dredge. It is the largest Australian Sponge
hitherto observed by me.

It is named after Captain Hixon, the President of the Marine
Board.

(1) 0. Schmidt, die Spongien des Adriatischen. Meers 1862. Seite 69.

(2) J. Boiverbank. Monograph of the British Sponges. (Ray. Society.)
Vol. II., p. 354.

(3) ./. Boiterliank. Monograph of the British Sponges. (Ray. Society.)
Vol. III., pi. LXIV.

(4) 0. Schmidt. Grundziige einer Spongienfaima des Atlantischen Gebietes,
1870. Seite 77.

(5) A. M. Norman. Monograph of the British Sponges, by tlie late
J. S. Bowerbank. Ray. Society.) Vol. IV, Supplementary, p. 182.

BY P,. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 563

RAPHYrJ S HIXONII. Nov. spec.

. Sh/tk and Size.

The smaller specimens are irregular, bulbous, witli several vents
on the upper convex surface. The large specimen (fig. 6), is
massive, expanded above and was attached to the sand of the
sea bottom by a fiat expanded base, measuring 300 mm. across. It
extends above very much. The upper surface is uneven, and hori-
zontal (fig. 6.) Seen from above the out-line appears very irregular
with lobate projections beyond a circular circumference. The
sponge measui-es about 600 mm. in width, and 350 mm. in height.
There are massive semi-spherical projections over the sides and
upper surface. The latter are particularly regular and well-
defined These protruberances extend 50 mm. over the depressions
between them and are 120 mm. wide. In the large specimen
there are nine such protruberances on the upper side. In the
centre of each a vent is situated. In the smaller specimens
these vents are scattered over the smooth and uniform surface of
the convex upper side. In the large specimen they are found in
the centres of the upper protruberances.

These vents are not Oscula but only Pseudoscula. They lead
into short conic tubes, pseudogasters.

In the large specimen (fig. 6), there are according to the
above, nine such Pseudoscular tubes 260 mm. long and at the
mouth 30 mm. wide. They are straight, but not regularly conic
as occasionally there are extensions half-way down, whereby their
diameter may be locally increased to 50 mm. All these tubes are
vertical and open on the upper, laterally expanded surface (fig.
6), on the summits of the protruberances.

The sponge weighed when fresh, about 200 kilogramm. Now
that it has been dried, it weighs about 14 kilogx'amm.

PtIGIDITY. ^

Alive in spirits and dry, the sponge is very hard, a pressure of
70 kilogramm in no way aflects a surface of 50 HH C. m.

564 STUDIES ON SPONGES,

Colour.

The colour in the living state is a very bi'ight red, similar to
Rosanilin-red. In spirits the sponge becomes pale flesh-coloured,
and dried it appears brown. The spirits extract a deep orange-
coloured pignut, very similar to that extracted by spirits from
many other Monactinellidae.

Surface.

The surface is reticulated throughout in a very regular and
uniform manner, and appears thereby similar to Bowerbank's
Raphyrus Griffithsi, and also to some species of Halme among
horny sponges. Young and old specimens always show the same
reticulation on the surface, there seem never to be Papillie in the
place of the meshes, as it is the case in young specimens of the
genus Papillina (O. Schmidt), which, according to that author, is
identical with Raphyrus. As stated above, however, I consider
these genera distinct.

The reticulation is produced by a very regular network of ])Y0-
jecting lines on an average 2 mm. wide. In the meshes between
these there are slight depressions, about 4-6 mm. deep. The
meshes themselves have a width of 3-4 mm. The membrane
which is thus expanded below the sui-face in the meshes is very
soft, whereas the projecting lines are exceedingly hard. This
membrane is also slightly concave. In it we find very small pores
in groups, which are the commencement of the inhalent system.

This network covers the whole of the surface of the sponge
and extends downwards into the conic pseudoscular tubes to their
bottom.

Oscula are found scattered irregularly over the whole of the
surface; they are circular and measure from 2-10 mm. in
diameter. These oscula are as freqvient on the exposed parts of
the sponge as in the sides of the conic pseudoscula.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 565

Canal system.

The whole sponge consists like the Auleninee described in Part
V. of the Monagraph of Australian Sponges in the last number of
the proceedings of this Society, of a reticulate structure in its
interior. (Fig. 8.) Lamellous fibres, with an average thickness
of 1 mm. form a network, which on any section appears very
regular. These fibres coxisist of a very hard tissue, with few and
small canals and a great abundance of spicules. In the meshes
between them (fig. 8) there is a very much softer tissue with
wider canals or irregular lacunes. Here only few and insignificant
spicules are found.

Below the poresieves in the concave membranes which extend in
the meshes of the surface-network, lai-ge irregular cavities (fig. 16)
are met with. The pores ai-e situated, as stated above, in small
groups. The sieve membrane is very thin and delicate. The
pores can appai-ently be entirely closed by the sponge. The sub-
dermal cavity extends far down and gives off branches which
ramify to supply the ciliated chambers or extend to form lacunae in
other meshes of the interior of the sponge. Most of the lacunae
found throughout the interior of the Sponge belong to the inhalent
system. Some of the final ramifications of the inhalent system
are met with in the fibres of the internal network.

The ciliated chambers are small and difficult to see, they are
spherical and measure 0'02 mm. in diameter ; from the chambers
very narrow canals originate and unite to form larger exhalent
canals. The chambeis seem to be situated in gi^oups. Such
groups occur only in the tissue of the hard fibres, as also in the soft
pulpa which occupies the meshes.

The exhalent canals do not form extensive lacuna? at all. The
larger branches and stems are found only in the soft tissue of the
meshes. The oscular tubes follow the net-work in their lower
part, and are therefore much curved. They are narrow and long
and ramify in an irregular manner.

566 studies on sponges,

Skeleton.

The skeletou consists of the hulh ac. and tr. ac. spicules ah-eady
desciibed by Bowerbank and O. Schmidt of their genera Raphyrus
and Papillina, to which two other kinds of spicules, observed in
our species, must be added.

Surface Skeleton.

The surface of the hard projecting ridges in the surface net is
occupied by a number of small spicules, which form a layer about
0-06 mm. thick. (Fig. 16.) These spicules (figs. 13, 14) are very
variable in their shape, straight or curved, with large and irregular
spines all over the surface and particularly at the ends. They
could be termed tr. tr. sp. They are of very uniform size and
measure 0'03 mm. in length and 0*007 mm. in thickness. Besides
forming a dense armour on the projecting ridges they are found
scattered also in the concave membranes of the meshes.

Skeleton of the Hard Fibres.

The main support of the whole sponge is constituted by a
reticulate mass of truncate and bulbous spicules, which are mostly
situated longitudinally, and disposed in such a manner as to jjoint
towards the free surface (fig. 16) in the projecting ridges, or towards
the pulpa in the meshes in the interior.

These spicules are not cemented together by any horny substance.
They are very abundant, and form hard, dense masses (fig. 16)
throughout the fibres of the interior. Scattered, these spicules are
also found rarely in the soft pulpa of the meshes in the interior.
These spicules are of uniform size 0-5 mm. long and 0 02 mm.
thick. They are cylindrical and al>ruptly pointed (fig. 9.) The
bulb of the majority of spicules measures 0'03 mm. in diameter.
Sometimes it increases to a diameter of 0"0036 mm., and may have
indications of points at its greatest diameter (fig. 10.)

One of these points may grow out to form a spine 0'09 mm. long
(fig. 11.) This however, is rare.

On the other hand the bulb may be absent altogether. Tr. ac.
spicules are not unfrequent.

by r. von lendenfeld, ph.d. 567

Skeleton of the Pulpa.

The soft tissue in the meshes contains besides scattered spicules
of both the preceding kinds, also small clusters of very slender
and gracefully curved ac. ac. sp. (fig. 15.) The clusters of these
are found scattered irregularly throughout the soft tissue, and
comprise from 7 to 12 spicules crossing each other in a perfectly
irregular manner (fig. 16.)

These spicules attain a length of 0-2 mm., and a thickness of
C*003 mm. They bear short and sharp spines (fig. 15.)

Histology.

In the soft tissue of the internal meshes, extraordinary granular
cells are met with in great abundance (fig 17.) These are highly
colourable and probably homologous to those elements, which I have
described of Aphrodite Nardorus. (1) There yfQ find likewise a
great number of similar cells of a very peculiar appearance in the
walls of the lacunes which belong to the inhalent system.

The shape of these elements in Raphyrus Hixonii, is subject to
very great variations. The cells are spherical, about 90% of them,
or irregularly lobate, 2% ; or spindle-shaped, 6% ; or also show
indications of dividing as represented in the figure, 2% (fig. 17.) A.
nucleus is indicated by a more transparent patch in the centre, but
not clearly visible. In coloured specimens the whole cell, or rather
the granules take up so much colouring matter, that the whole
structure is rendered intransparent. The reason that the nucleus
in the fresh state and in spirit specimens appears light and trans-
parent, is that the substance of the nucleus is free from gramiles.

The granules are large and refract the light very strongly. The
differences in shape between these cells, lead me to assume that
they are a peculiar kind of amoeboid wandering cell.

(1) R. V. Lendenfcld. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges. Part V.
The Auleninre. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of N. S. W. Vol. X.,
part 3.

■568 STUDIES ON SPONGES,

I further assume that in this case, as also in Aphrodite, these
cells are in connection with the digestive functions of the spongei
and take up and absorb microscopic food-particles, which may get
into the lacunae of the inhalent system, and there come in contact
with the epithelium.

Geographical Distribution,
East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson (Ramsay.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.
40 metres.

The type specimens of this sponge are in the Australian iMuseum,
Sydney.

III.— HALME TIMGENS.

A SPONGE WITH REMARKABLE COLOURING POWER.

Among the sponges sent by Dr. Haacke from Thursday Island,
is a new species of my genus Halme.

Halme tingens. Nov. spec.

Sponge composed of reticulate lamella, massive 200 x 300 x
100 mm. large. No dermal lamella. Meshes on an average
12 mm. wide. Lamella curved 2-3 mm. thick, covered with small
conuli. Very little sand in the skin. Skeleton composed of very
distant fine fibres. Radial main fibres charged with foreign bodies
<ind tangental connecting fibres free from such. Colour in spirits
at first white, then violet.

The spirit extracts a yellow colour from the sponge, which
appears to remain in solution in the spirits. This sponge was
dredged by Dr. Haacke at Thursday Island.

It is an intermediate form connecting the sub-family Auleninfe
with the genus Hippospongia.

Halme tingens is very peculiar inasmuch as it colours paper
and other substances with a dark violet tint. If paper is
inserted in a bottle containing this sponge and spirits, it will be

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 669

found that the paper, after a day or two, is stained a deep violet
blue. A colour which will not disappear when the paper is
washed with water or ether. Concentrated acids and strong
alkalis affect the colour. Acids make it red like litmus. Alkalis
turn the red colour blue again.

I do not know anything about the chemical nature of the colour.
It is very remarkable that the spirits are only stained light yellow
by the sponge. It appears that the colour is precipitated on the
paper, &c., after it has been extracted fi'om the sponge by the
spirits.

It appears that a great quantity of paper, &c., can be stained
by a very small piece of the sponge, and I think that possibly
this discovery might be turned to practical account for the purpose
of dyeing blue-violet.

IV. TWO CASES OF MIMICRY IN
SPONGES.

In the cases in question two species of horny sponges imitate
two species of Siliceous sponges. As both the two imitating and
also the two imitated sponges are new species, it will be necessary
to give a short description of them first.

GENUS. CHALINOPSIS.

Sponges which belong to the family Spongidte, sub-family
Chalinopsinae which imitate the shape of Chalinidge, more or less
closely, and which have a light and tender skeleton composed of
radial main and tangental connecting fibres without conuli and
without vestibule spaces. The skeleton is more or less grey in
the dry state. Sponges of digitate shape.

CHALINOPSIS IMITANS. Nova species.
Digitate processes regular smooth and cylindrical, very long and
slender, slightly branched. Oscula very small. Digitate pro-
cesses tapering to a more or less sharp point. The sponge is
attached by a short thick stem.

570 STUDIES ON SPONGES,

Thickness of digitate processes 8 mm., length 600 mm. The
whole sponge hard and elastic.

Locality : East Coast of Australia, Illawarra.
This species is represented in fig. 19.

CHALINOPSIS DICHOTOMA. Nov spec.

Digitate processes cylindrical of not very uniform diameter,
repeatedly branched in a dichotomous manner. The whole sponge
attached by a thin stem.

Oscula large and very numerous. Digitate processes 1 2 mm.
thick, tending to extend in one plain, particularly at the points of
ramification. Irregular digitate and conic processes on the surface.
Sponge 400 mm. long.

Locality : West Coast of Australia, Western Austi-alia.

This sponge is represented in fig. 21.

GENUS. DACTYLOCHALINA.

Sponges belonging to the Monactinellse. Skeleton composed of
a hexactinellid network of horny fibres. Meshes i)retty small.
An extremely fine network of slender threads with very small
meshes on the surface.

Very small and slender spicules ac. ac. straight or slightly
curved are found in the axis of the horny fibres. These spicules
are not numerous. They are more scarce in the connecting than
in the main fibi-es. They are found also in the fibres of the fine
surface-net.

Sponges with digitate processes.

DACTYLOCHALINA CYLINDRICA. NoV SpeC.

Digitate processes neai-ly straight, slightly branched, growing in
a penicillate manner parallel from the expanding branches at the
base. They coalesce here and there, where they accidentally touch.
They are slightly undulating, regularly cylindrical and 7 nun.
thick. They terminate with rounded ends. Oscula small,
common stem short and thick. Length of sponge 500 mm.

BY K, VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 571

Locality ; East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson.
This sponge is represented in fig. 20.

Dactylochalina reticulata. Nov. spec.

Digitate processes irregular, repeatedly branched and anasto-
mosing, 12 mm. thick, more or less cylindrical, with an uneven
surface, and much curved. Tapering at the tips to a pointed
terminus. Length of the sponge 200 mm.. Oscula large, scattered
over the surface.

Locality : East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson,
This sponge is represented in fig. 22.

When working out the sponges I was so deluded by the external
similarity of these sponges, as actually to put Chalinopsis imitans
and Dactylochalina cylindrica, and also Chalinopsis dichotoma and
Dactylochalina reticulata specimens together. Only afterwards I
ascertained by examining sections of different specimens under the
microscope, that I had confounded sponges belonging to two
different orders with one another.

All the representatives of my sub-family Chalinopsinae of the
family Spongidse, are more or less similar to species of Chalinidse-
Monactinellid sponges. The most striking similarity however, is
shown by the four species described above.

The similarity could be accounted for in various ways. We
might assume that the Chalinopsidse where the links connecting
the Ceraospongia with the Monactinellidse. In this case we would
have to assume that either the horny sponges have descended from
the silicious, and that the Chalinopsinse were horny sponges which
had been just produced by the loss of the silicious spicules in the
fibres of the similar Chalinidee, or that vice, versa the Chalinidte are
descended from horny sponges, and that these forms are the ones
just commencing to obtain spicules. - We might also assume that
these sponges were not at all related with each other.

I have some years ago advocated the view, that silicious sponges
descended from horny ones, the evidence however, which has since
38

572 STUDIES ON SPONGES,

then been brought forward seems to indicate that the silicious
sponges are the ancestors of the horny ones, a view advocated
by Vosmeer and Polejaefi'.

I think that the Chalinojisinas are very nearly allied to the
Chalinidse, but I do not think that they are so nearly related to
each other as the similarity of their outer appearance would
indicate. It seems most probable that the two species of Chalinopsis
described above are descendants of digitate Chalinidae, they have
lost the defensive spicules which are no doubt of great value to
Dactylochalina, but they have retained the outer appearance. It
is probable that the Dactylochalina species have undergone changes
since then, and that these species of Chalinopsis have had to change
their own shape accordingly so as always to remain similar to
a defensive sponge. I would therefore call the similarity in these
two cases, although it has originated in true relationship, Mimicry,
because the structure of the important internal organs has changed,
■whilst no difference is perceptible in the outer appearance -VYhich is
so very variable in sponges.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate, .39.

Fig. L — DendriUa cavernosa. R. v. L.
Section through the sponge.
Jth of the natural size.

Fig. 2. — DendriUa cava-nona. R. v. L.

Pore membrane covering the vestibule lacunai. Seen from the

surface.
1 :20 magnified.
Alcohol, Htematoxylin specimen.

Fig. 3. — DendriUa cavernosa. R. v. L.

Pore membrane covering the vestibule lacuna;. Seen from above.

Margin of one of the pores.
1:20 magnified.
Alcohol, Hiematoxylin specimen.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 673

Fig. 4. — Dcndrilla cax^ernosa. R. v. L.

Transverse section through the pore membrane. Showing one

pore.
1:80 magnified.
Alcohol, Hsematoxylin.
Fig. 5. — Dcndrilla cavernosa. R. v. L.

Transverse section through the pore membrane showing the

margin of a pore.
1 :800 magnified.
Alcohol, Htematoxylin specimen.

(a.) Amreboid wandering cells.

(m.) Muscular cells.

(g.) Ganglia cells.

(d) Gland cells.

(s.) Sensitive cells.

(p.) Flat epithel cells.

Plate 40.
Fig. 6. — Raphyrus Hixonii. R. v. L.
Photographed from life.
En profil.
^ of the natural size.

Plate 41.
Fig. 7. — Raphyrus Hixonii. R. v. L.

Transverse section through the outer portion of the sponge

1:50 magnified.

Alcohol, Hismotoxylin.
Fig. 8. — Raphyrus Hixonii. R. v. L.

Some of the digestive amoeboid wandering cells in the soft tissue
of the internal meshes.

Spirit specimen.

1:400 magnified.

Plate 42.
Fig. 9. — Raphyrus Hixonii. R. v. L.

Transverse section through the outer portion of the sponge.

1:15 magnified.

Alcohol, Hsematoxylin.
Fig. 10. — Raphyrus Hixonii. R. v. L.

Bidb ac. spicule.

Most frequent shape in the supporting skeleton of the network.

1:150 magnified.

574 STUDIES ON SPONGES.

Fig. \\. — Raphyriis Hixonii. E. v. L.

Bulb ac. spicule. The head showing a spine.

1:250 magnified.
Fig. 12. — Raphyrus Hixonii. R. v. L.

Bulb ac. spicule, with a large spine. The head.

200:1 magnified.
Fig. 13. — Raphyrm Hixonii. R. v. L.

Bulb ac. spicule, the truncate end showing the extended terminus
of the axial canal.

1:500 magnified.
Fig. 14:. — Rajjhyrufi Hixonii. R. v. L.

Tr. tr. sp. spicule of the dermal armour. Straight kind.

1 :700 magnified.
Fig. 15. — Raphyrus Hixonii. R. v. L.

Tr. tr. sp. spicule of the dermal armour. Curved kind,

1:700 magnified.
Fig. 16. — Rajjhyrus Hixonii. R. v, L.

Ac. ac. sp. spicule of the soft tissue.

1:400 magnified.
Fig. 17. — Raphyrus Hixonii. R. v. L.

Tr. ac. spicule.

150:1 magnified.

Plate 43.
Fig. 18. — Chalinopsis imifatus. R. v. L.

Photographed from a skeleton.

J of the natural size.
Fig. 19. — Dactylochalina cylindrica. R. v. L.

Photographed from a skeleton.

\ of the natural size.

Plate 44.
Fig. 20. — Chalinopsis dichotoma. R. v. L,

Photographed from a skeleton.

^ of the natural size.
Fig. 21, — Dactylochalina reticulata. R, v, L,

Photographed from a skeleton,

J of the natural size.

DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW OR RARE AUSTRALIAN
FISHES.

By E. Pierson Ramsay, F.R.S.E., and J. Douglas-Ogilby.

Pteroplatea australis. sp. nov.

Disk rather less than twice as wide as long ; tail three-eighths of
the length of the disk, without spine or rudimentary fin, but with
faint indications of a cutaneous fold above and below. Spiracle
provided with a tentacle. Teeth with a long median and two
short lateral cusps. Skin smooth. Dark-brown, almost black
above ; white beneath ; tail with two interrupted white rings about
midway.

This fine species, belonging to a genus hitherto unknown from
Australia, was forwarded some years ago by Mr. J. Brown from
Cape Hawke, N. S. "Wales, and measures twenty-three inches
across the disk.

It is possible that this may be identical with the Mediterranean
P. altavela, but in the absence of books of reference it is impossible
to settle the question satisfactoi'ily owing to the insufficient descrip-
tion given in the British Museum Catalogue.

Registered number in the Australian Museum A. 9357.

Cirriiitichthys aprinus, C. (k V.

B. VI. D. 10/12-13. A. 3/6-7. V. 1/5. P. 7/7 or S/G"
0. 15. L. lat. 42. L. trans. 4/11.

Length of head rather more than 4, of caudal fin 5 J, height of body
2| in the total length. Diameter of eye \ of the length of the
head, and ^ of that of snout. Interorbital space concave, from § to
f of the diameter of eye. Cleft of mouth oblique. Maxilla reaches
to the vertical from anterior margin of eye. Preorbital and post-
temporal serrated. Vertical limb of preopercle strongly serrated ;

57G DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW OH RARE AUSTRALIAN FISHES,

tlie posterior two-thirds of the lower limb armed with teeth which
grow gradually smaller from behind ; the anterior portion entire.
A weak oj^ercular spine. Yilliform teeth with a greatly enlarged
outer row in both jaws ; lower jaw with two or three strong, and.
slightly curved lateral caninoid teeth ; vomer with a semi-circular,
palatines with narrow divergent bands of villiform teeth. Dorsal
spines moderately strong, the fifth, sixth, and seventh, about equal
and longest, equal to the distance between the snout and the liind
margin of the eye ; the first ray considerably, the second sometimes
moderately filiform. Anal commences beneath the third dorsal
ray, its second spine is much the longest and strongest, about equal
to the longest dorsal spines. Simple pectoral rays much longer
than the branched, ordinarily the second and third are the longest,
but sometimes the fourth, and even the fifth, are equal to them ;
they are about H of the total length. Tn some the ventrals reach
beyond, in others not so far as, the vent. Caudal emarginate. Scales
moderate ; cheeks and opercles scaly ; basal half of the fins more
or less so.

Colors. Red above, white below the lateral line. Six broad
dark vertical bands on the body, tlie first from the anterior dorsal
spines to the root of the pectoral, and the two last on the free tail.
Head spotted with vermilion and black, and with two narrow lines
across it, the anterior of which passes through the eye ; a narrow
deep yellow line on the outer margin of the dorsal membranes ;
soft dorsal with blue-edged golden spots; the elongate ray banded
red and white ; the other fins pinkish ; caudal without bars. Irides
brassy; eyelids vermilion. In one specimen the red ground-
colour is replaced by greenish-olive.

Our three examples are of nearly similar size, the largest being
4| inches ; they were trawled off Shark Reef, Port Jackson ; they
difier from Cirrhites graphidopterus, Bleek, which he makes
identical with G. aprinus, C. & V., and of which the Australian
Museum possesses one of the types, in the greater height of the
body only. The genus Cirrhitichthys, Bleeker, is identical with
and takes precedence of A^eocirr/iiYes, Castelnau.

BY E. PIERSON RAMSAY, F.R.S.E., AND J, DOUGLAS-OGILBY: 577

Sebastes scaber. sp, nov.

D. 12. 1/9. A. 3/5. V. 1/5. P. 18. C. 14. L. lat., circ. 37.

Length of bead 2^, of pectoral fin 3J, height of body 3f in the
total length. Diameter of eye 3' in length of head, rather more
than the length of the snout ; interorbital space | a diameter of the
eye. Maxilla reaches to below the last third of the orbit. Four
strong spines at the pre-opercular angle. A single spine at the
antero-superior angle of the eye ; a row of strong spines from the
supraorbital ridge to nearly opposite the origin of the dorsal fin ;
two opercular spines ; a strong spine on the humez'al bone.
A moderate nasal tentacle. Teeth on the jaws and vomer ; none
on the palate. The sixth dorsal spine is the longest, about equal
to the diameter of the eye ; the thirteenth spine twice as long as
that which precedes it ; soft dorsal rather higher than the spinous.
Anal much higher than the dorsal, the second spine being very
strong, and one-half longer than the longest dorsal spine ; it com-
mences beneath the twelfth dorsal spine ; the pectorals reach to
opposite the first anal ray. Upper part of the head and interor-
bital space scaly. Lateral line armed with sharp curved spines
pointing backwards.

Colors. Roseate with irregular dusky blotches.

The specimens from which the description has been drawn up
were taken by the trawl on Shark Reef during August last ; both
are very small, the larger being but 2\ inches in total length.

Registered numbers in the Australian Museum B. 8450,-51.

Platycephalus arenarius. sp. nov.

D. 7/13-14. A. 13-14. Y. 1/5. P. 13/7. C. 18.

Length of head 3^, of caudal fin 6?, height of body 9^ in the
total length. Diameter of eye 6^ in the length of head and
Ifo in that of snout. Interorbital space slightly concave, ? of the
diameter of the eye. Median ridge faint, interrupted between
and for some distance behind the eyes, appearing again on the
occiput as a short sharp ridge. Width of head inside preopercular
spines f of its length. Maxillary extends to below first third of

57S DESCRIPTIONS OP NEW OU RAKE AUSTRALIAN FISHES,

eye. Supra-orbital margin with a single minute anterior spine ;.
two slightly divergent smooth occipital ridges with offshoots
towards the central ridge ; outside of these is an almost obsolete
ridge, also smooth, which terminates at the origin of the lateral
line in a minute spine. Two parallel smooth ridges originate in a
pair of short pi-eorbital spines, and terminate in a pair of rather
divergent strong preopei'oular spines, the lower of which is a third
longer than the upper ; no visible opercular spines. An angular
crenulated subopercular flap, beneath the preopercular spines.
Anterior nostril with a simple tubular tentacle. Lower jaw the
longer. Maxilla with a broad band of villiform teeth in front,
gradually narrowing posteriorly ; an edentate patch at the
symphysis, bordered by larger teeth, the largest behind ; mandibles
with a lateral row of small curved teeth, and villiform patches in
front ; two small patches on the vomer ; a row on the palatines.
First dorsal spine so minute as hardly to be visible ; the second
the longest l^^o i^ the length of head ; soft dorsal highest anteriorly-
Ventrals long, reaching to the third anal ray, X^^ in the length of
the head. Anal commences opposite the soft dorsal. Caudal
truncate. Lateral line smooth.

Colors. Light yellowish-brown above, white below. Spines
and rays of dorsals with chesnut bands, webs immaculate. Last
five webs of anal dark, remainder and rays white. Ventral and
pectoral rays banded. Ground color of caudal pure white, the
upper half with three or four oblique parallel brown bands, the
lower with two much broader black stripes.

Sand Flathead of Sydney ; the specimen described is ten inches
in length and was trawled in Middle Harbour.

Lepidotrigla pleuracanthica, Rich.

B. VIL D. 9/13. A. 10. P. 11/3. V. 1/5. L. lat. 58.
L. trans. 5/11.

Length of head 4 L, of caudal fin 5-^-, height of body 6/0 in the
total length. Diameter of eye '^ in length of head, and /o of that
of snout. Interorbital space deeply concave, | of the diameter of
eye. Nasal profile abrupt, slightly concave. Three strong and

BY E. PIERSON RAMSAY, F.R.S.E., AND J. DOUGLAS-OGILBY. 579-

several small spines on the antero-superior angles of the orbits ; a
finely serrated ridge from thence to the postero-superior angles,
where there is a short strongly toothed bony protuberance, Pre-
orbital slightly serrated and emai-ginate. A short blunt spine at
the pi-eopercular angle which is produced. Two opercular spines,
the lower much the longer. Scapula with two parallel serrated
ridges, the upper of which terminates in a spine ; a single strong
supra-scapular spine. The maxilla extends to the vertical from the
first third of the eye. The two anterior dorsal spines serrated in
froQt ; the thii'd the longest, equal to the distance between the
snout and the posterior edge of the orbit. Anal commences
oj)posite to the fifth dorsal ray. The pectorals reach to the second
anal ray, and are 3| in the total length. The ventrals reach to
the vent. Caudal emarginate ; scales small, with 58 on the lateral
line, each of which bears a strong curved tooth, having at its base
below a second smaller rather divergent spine. The keeled row
along the base of the dorsal is well developed, and consists of 20
scales, some of which, especially those in front, are bifid.

Colors. Bright red, with a few dusky markings above and
lighter ones below the lateral line. A broad orange band across
the white of the belly, in front of the bases of the ventrals ;
mandibular region also orange. Spinous dorsal red with brown
and yellow marblings, and a large black quadrangular spot,
bordered with gold on the outer half of the fourth to sixth spines ;
second dorsal red with a light margin, and a row of pale blue
spots across the web. Anal light I'ed, the last web and the
margin white. Pectoi-als, outside pink densely marbled with
green, yellow, and black, inside dark green at the base, deepening
gradually to black near the extremity, and with a broad azure,
marginal band. Ventrals red, lighter at the base, free rays tipped
with gold. Caudal red with a light band across the anterior half
and a light tip ; a dusky subterminal band. Lower lip with four
white spots. Irides bright blue. Roof of the mouth orange.

The specimen was trawled in Port Jackson in April last, and
measures 6'35 inches.

580 REMARKS ON THE TRACIIICIITHYS OF PORT JACKSON,

REMARKS ON THE TliACHIGHTHYS OF PORT

JACKSON.

By J. Douglas-Ogilby,

Senior-Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

It having become necessary during the past month that I should
examine the Beryciform fishes in the Australian Museum, I took
the opportunity to pay special attention to the specimens of
Trachichthys therein contained, and as my researches have con-
vinced me that there is bu.t one species found in these waters, I
think it but right to lay the premises upon which I base my
conclusion before this society in order that those who are interested
may judge for themselves whether my rejection of T . jachsoniensis
as a valid species is justified or not.

I have at pi'esent available for examination six examples taken
in Po)'t Jackson ; they are catalogued as follows : —

a.

A. 12916

KiribilliPt.,N. Shore.

Presented by Mr. H. Cadell.

b.

B. 2313

Port Jackson.

,, „ T>r. Eichler.

c.

B. 5924

North Shore.

„ Mr. H. Cadell.

d.

B. 5925

5> ,,

e.

unregistered

Port Jackson.

,, ,, ,, J. James, Coodg

I shall designate each of these specimens by the alphabetical
prefix attached thereto.

The Hon. Wm. Macleay, (Descr. Cat. of Aust. Fishes, Vol. i,
p. 146), lays special stress on the greater number of spiniferous
ventral plates, which however he allows to be variable (9-11), and
in the greater height of the body. I shall endeavour to show in
the following paper that these characters are unreliable, and that
consequently T. jachsoniensis must sink toa synonym of the original
T. australis.

BY J. DOUGLAS-OGILRY. 581

Beginning then with specimen / which measures but four
inches and is the smallest of our series I find that it possesses
eight ventral plates, and the height of the body is not quite one-
half of the length, without caudal (as 1 to 2-10) ; this then is a
typical T. australis of Shaw, Cuvier, and Giinther. Passing on
now to specimen c, which measures over six inches we find that it
also possesses eight ventral plates, but that the height of the body
is rather more than half the length without caudal (as 1 to 1'90),
being therefore intermediate between the two forms. Specimen d
bears nine ventral plates, and its height is exactly halt the length
without caudal, thus not fulfilling the special requirements of either
form, but going far to show how little dependence can be placed on
such a variable character as the number of ventral plates ; this
example was taken at the same time and place as the preceding,
and is a trifle the larger. Specimen h is but little larger than /'/
it bears but eight plates, but the last is twice as large as any of the
others, and appears like two normal plates soldered together ; I
have therefore placed it among those bearing nine plates ; the
height of the body is more (1 to 1-88) than half the length with-
out caudal ; this is therefore a typical T. jacksoniensis ; it measures
barely 5^ inches. Finally our last specimen, a, from the same
locality as c and c/, exceeds Mr. Macleay's limits, having no less
than twelve ventral plates, while the height of the body is exactly
one-half its length without caudal.

To facilitate reference to their individual differences! heregivealist
of the examples showing the length, number of ventral plates, and
comparative height of each : —

Total length in inches ...
Number of ventral plates
Height to length (s. c.)

a. \ h. c. \ d. e. f.

5-90 I 4-10 6-10 6-20 5-45 4.00

12 I ?9 8 1 9 Jl 8

1:2-00 i 1:1-88 1:1-90 1:200 1:1-85 1:210

I have gone thus carefully into the details of each individual, in
order that, while stating it to be. my conviction, that from the
above facts the forms cannot be specifically separated, I can at the
same time leave each one at liberty to settle the question for
himself.

582 REMARKS ON THK TRACHICIITIIYS OF PORT JACKSON.

In the Traus. N. Zeal. Inst., vii., p. 245, Dr. Hector describes
a New Zealand form under the name of Trachichthys intermedius,
which possesses ten ventral plates, and the height of whose body
is about 2-50 in the length, without caudal. This specimen,
therefore, completes the chain of gradation between the high-
bodied T. jacksoniensis, and the long-bodied T. elongations, and
leaves me no choice but to consider all these as forms of the same
species, which must of course be known as Trachichthys austraUs.

Dr. Giinther says that T. elongatus diffei^s from T. australis in
form as much as a Dace from a Crucian Carp ; perhaps if we were
to substitute Prussian Carp for Dace we would have a more
parallel case, yet none would now-a-days think of separating
Garassius gihelio, (or even G. ohlongus) from G. vulgaris ; nor, do
I think, that the forms of Trachichthys australis can be separated.

CATAI.OGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF
AUSTRALIA.

By George Masters.

Part II.

Family. DYTISCID^.

Sub-Family. HALIPLIDES.

HALIPLUS. LatreiUe.

961 AusTRALis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 400.

South Australia.

962 BiSTRiATUS Wehncke. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1880, XLI., p. 75.

Adelaide, South Australia.

963 FUSCATUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 401.

South Australia.

964 GIBBUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 402.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

965 TESTUDO Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 400.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

Sub-Family. PELOBIDES.

HYDEACHNA. Fabricius.

966 Australasia Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, 1., p. 402.

Pelobius Aiistr alas ice Clark.

N. S. Wales, Victoria, S, Australia,

967 nigra Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 403.

Pelobius niger Clark.

N. S. Wales, and Queensland.

584 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

Sub Family. DYTISCIDES.

HYPHYDRUS. lUiger.

968 AusTRALis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 405.

South Australia.

969 Blanchardi Clark. Journ. of Ent., 18G2, I., p. 404.

Victoria.

970 coNTiGUUS E. Wehncke. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1877, p. 150.

Rockharnpton ; Queensland.

971 DECEMMACULATUs E. Welincke. Stett. Ent. Zeit, 1877,.

p. 151.
Caj)e York ; N. Australia.

972 HUMERALis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 403.

Victoria.

BIDES8US. Sharp.

973 AMABiLis Clark. Journ. of Ent., I., 1862, p. 240; Sharp

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 350.
Hydroporus amabilis Clark.
Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

974 BASALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 124 ; Sharp, Trans. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 356.
Hydro-porus basalts Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

975 BiFORMis Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 362.

Australia.

976 BiSTRiGATUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 419 ; Sharp,

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 351 ; E. Wehncke. Ent.

MB., 1876, I., p. 92.
Hydroporus histrigatus Clark
Hydroporus luridus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.

Wales, 1871, II., p. 124.
Moreton Bay, Gayndah, &c. ; Queensland.

977 COMPACTUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 421 ; Sharp,

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 362.
Hydroporus compacius Clark.
South Australia.

BY GEOKGE MASTERS. 585

978 Dameli Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 357.

Queensland.

979 DENTicuLATUs Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 359.

Australia.

980 DISPAR Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 363.

Australia.

981 GEMELLUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, L, p. 421 ; Sharp,

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 362.
Hydroporus gemellus Clark.
South Australia.

982 GoDEFPROYi Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 356.

Australia.

983 iMPRESsus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 360.

Australia.

984 iNORNATus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 360.

Western Australia.

985 MASTERS! Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 123 ; Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 357.
Hydroporus Mastersii Macleaj.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

986 MIGRATOR Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 345.

Australia.

987 MUNDUs Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 362.

Australia.

988 ORTHOGRAMMUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), p. 357.

N. W. Australia.

989 Shuckhardi Clark. Journal of Ent., 1862, I., p. 420 j

Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 361.
Hydroporus Shuckhardi Clark
Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

990 signatus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II„ p. 356.

Austi'alia.

NOTOMICRUS. Sharp.

991 l^vigatus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 107.

Australia.

i>ob CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

592 suTURALis Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 261.
Australia.

HYDROCOPTUS. Motscliulsky.

993 SUBFASCIATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubh Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 261,

t. IX., f. 108.
Australia.

HUXELHYDRUS. Sharp,

994 SYNTHETicus Sharp. Tr. Dubh Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 369.

North Australia.

995 Browni Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 385, t. XL,

f. 140-141.
King George's Sound, W. Australia.

STERNOPRISCU.S. Sharp.

996 CLAVATUs Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 386.

Sydney.

997 Hansardi Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 417 ; Sharp.

Tr. DubL Soc, Ls82 (2), II., p. 385.
Hydroporus Hansardi Clark.
Moreton Bay.

998 Meadfooti Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 419 ; Sharp.

Tr. DubL Soc, 1882 (_T), II., p. 385.
Hydroporus Meadfooti Clark.
Victoria.

999 MULTiMACuLATus Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 417 ;

Shari). Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 385.
Hydroporus multimaculatus Clark.
South Australia.

1000 obscurus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 385.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

1001 oscillator Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), p. 388.

Adelaide ; S. Australia.

1002 signatus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 386.

Murray River.

1003 tarsalis Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II.. p. 386.

Sydney.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 587

1004 Tasmanicus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 388.

Tasmania.

1005 Wehnckii Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, (2), II., p. .387.

Australia.

PAROSTER. Sharp.

1006 iNscuLPTiLis Clark. Journ of. Ent., 1862, I., p. 411;

Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 391.
Hydroporus insculptilis Clark,
South Australia.

1007 NiGRO-ADUMBRATUS Clark. Jouni. of Eut., 1862, I., p. 410;

Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 391.
Hydroporus nigro-adumbratus Clark.
South Australia.

1008 PALLESCENS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 391,

pi. XII., f. 143.
W. Australia.

CHOSTONECTES. Sharp.

1009 Bakewellii Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 413;

Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 408.
Hydroforus Bakewellii Clark.
Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

1010 GIGAS Bohem. Ees. Eugen., 1858, p. 18 ; Sharp, Tr. Dubl.

Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 408, pi. XII., f. 148.
Hydroporus gigas Bohem.
Hypkydrus hitmeralis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I.,

p. 405 ; E. Wehncke, Ent. MB., 1876, I., p. 92.
New South Wales and Queensland.

1011 JOHNSONI Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 405; Sharp,

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 408.
Hyphydrus Johnsonii Clark
Victoria.

1012 LATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 409.

Victoria.
39

006 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1013 NEBULOSUS Macleay. Trans. Eut. Sec, N. S Wales, 1871,

XL, p. 123; Sharp, Tr. Dubl. See, 1882 (2), II., p. 148.
Hydroporus nehulosus Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1014 Sharpi (Wehncke MSS.) Sharp. Tr. Doubl. Soc, 1882 (2),

II., p. 409.
N. S. Wales.

ANTIPORUS. Sharp.

1015 Blakei Clark. Journ, of Ent., 1862, I., p. 411 ; Sharp.

Tr. Diibl. Soc. 1882 (2), II., p. 412.
Hydroporus Blakei Clark.
Australia.

1016 COLLARIS ?Tope. Proc. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1841, p. 48 ; Sharp.

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882, App., p. 790.
S-pdroporus collaris Hope.
thoracicus Schaum. White. Cat., p. 43.
Port Essington ; N. Australia.

1017 CURTULUS Sharp. Tr, Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 412.

Sydney.

1018 FEMORALis Bohem. Res. Eugen., 1858, p. 19; Sharp. Tr.

Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2) II., p. 411.
Hydroporus femoralis Bohem.
Sydney.

1019 GiLBERTi Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 414; Sharp.

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 411.
Hydroporus Gilberti Clark.
"Victoria.

1020 GRAViDUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 413 ; Sharp.

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882, p. 411.
Hydroporus gravidiis Clark.
Port Essington ; N. Australia.

1021 iNTERROOATiONis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, L, p. 408 ;

Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 411.
Hydroporus interrogate onis Clark.
South Australia.

BY GEOKGE MASTERS. 589

MACROPORUS. Sharp.

1022 Gardxeri Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 408 ; Sharp.

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 417.
Hydroporus Gardneri Clark.
Yictoria.

1023 HAMATus Clark. Jour, of Ent., 1862,1, p. 407; Sharp.

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 417.
Hydroporus hamatus Clark.
Victoria.

1024 HowiTTii Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 466; Sharp,

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 417.
Hydroporus Howittii Clark.
Victoria, and S. Australia.

1025 LATERALIS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 417.

W. Australia.

1026 RUFiGEPS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 418-

Australia.

1027 SOLIDUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 418.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

HYDROPORUS. ClairviUe.

1028 BiFASciATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, IST. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 121.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1029 BRUNNiPENXis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 122.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1030 FOSSULiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 122.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1031 FOVEiCEPS Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 122.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

590 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1032 POLiTUS Macleay. Trans. Ent, Sec, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 124.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1033 siNUATOCOLLis Clavk. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 418.

South Australia.

1034 UNDECIMMACULATUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 412.

Port Essingtou ; N. Australia.

NECTEROSOMA. Macleay.

1035 ARCUATUM Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), TL, p. 41.5.

Australia.

1036 Darwinii Babingt. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1841, II., p. 13 ;

Sharp. Tr, Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IT., p. 413.
Hydroporus Darioinii Babingt.
Australia.

1037 DISPAR Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848,111., p. 173; Sharp. Tr.

Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 415.
Hydroporus dispar Germ.
South Australia.

1038 PENICILLATUS Clark, Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 415;

Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IT., p. 413.
Hydroporus p)e.nicillatus Clark.
Victoria.

1039 REGULARS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 ^2), IT., p. 415.

Australia.

1040 ScHMELTZi Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), p. 414, t. XII.,

f. 150.

1041 viTTiPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 125.

Gayndah ; Queensland.

1042 WoLLASTONi Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 416.

Hydroporus Wollastotd Clark.

?JlavicolleMac\esij. Trans Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IT., p. 125 ; E. Wehncke. Ent. MB., 1876, I., p. 92.
Victoria, N. S. Wales, Tasmania, Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 591

HYDROCANTHUS. Say.

1043 AusTRALASLE E. Wehncke. Deutsche. Ent. Zeit. 1876,

p. 224.
North Australia.

PLATYNECTES. Sharp.

1044 ^NESCENS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. See, 1882 (2 , II., p. 538.

Australia.

1045 BAKEWELLii Clark. Journ. of Ent,, 1863, IL, p. 19.

Agabus Bakewellii Clark.
South Australia.

1046 Damelii Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 542.

Australia.

1047 decempunctatus Fab. Syst. Eut., p. 232 ; Sharp, Tr.

Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 538, pi. XIV., f. 175.
Agabus decempunctatus Fab.
Australia.

1048 LATissiMUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, IL, p. 18 ; Sharp,

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 538.
Agabus latissimus Clark.
Australia.

1049 LIMBATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 539.

Australia.

1050 LUGUBRis Blanch. Voy. Pole. Sud. IV. p. 49, t. 4, f. 4.

Agabus hogubris Blanch,
Tasmania.

1051 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N, S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 126.
Agabus Mastersi Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1052 OBSCURUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 539.

Tasmania.

1053 RETicuLosus Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, IL, p. 19

Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 538.
Agabus reticulosus Clark.

592 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1054 SPILOPTERUS Germ. Linn. Ent., TIL, p. 172.

Agahus spilopterus Germ.

South Australia.
1055. Tasmania Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, XL, p. 18.

Agabus Tasmanue Clark.

Tasmania.

CELINA. AwU.

1056 AusTRALis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 14.

New South Wales, Victoria and S. Australia.

LANCESTES. Sharp.

1057 LANCEOLATi'S Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 16 ;

Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 603, pi. XVL,

f. 194.
Colymhetes lavceolatus Clark.
New South Wales, Victoria, S. Australia and Tasmania.

KHANTUS. Lacordaire.

1058 PULVEROsus Steph. 111. Brit., IL, p. 69, t. 12, f. 2.

Australis Aube. Spec, p. 236.
Australia (widely distributed).

COLYM BETES. Clairville.

1059 MONOSTiGMA Hope. Proc. Ent. Soc, 1842, p. 47.

Port Essington ; N. Australia .

1060 PULCHER Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, IL, p. 16,

South Australia.

COPELATUS. Erichson.

1061 ACUDUCTUS Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, IL, p. 21.

South Australia.

1062 ATER Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 566.

Swan River; W. Australia.

1063 Australia Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, IL, p. 20.

Moreton Bay, Gayndah, ifcc ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS, 593

1064 AusTRALis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863,11., p. 14 ; Sharp

Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), p. 564.
Australia.

1065 Clarki Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 585.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

1066 DA.MELII Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 593.

Cape York ; N, Australia.

1067 ELONGATULUS Maclcay. Trans. Ent. N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 126.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1068 EXTENSUs Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2). II., p. 566.

Brisbane ; Queensland.

1069 FERRUGiNEUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 565.

Port Denison ; Queensland.

1070 GRACILIS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 564.

Rockampton ; Queensland.

1071 iPREGULARis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 126.
Gayndah, Rockampton, Port Denison, &c., Queensland.

1072 LABRATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 565.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1073 LiviDUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 565.

Adelaide, Melbourne, &c.

1074 MARGiNATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882(2), II., p. 579.

Australia.

1075 MELANARius Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 567.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

1076 NiGRiTULUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc. 1882, (2), II., p. 567.

Austialia and Tasmania.

1077 NiGRO-LiNEATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), p. 577.

A ustralia.

1078 SIMPLEX Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 21.

Tasmania.

1079 Victoria Clark. Journ. of Ent. 1863, IL, p. 22.

Victoria.

594 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

MATUS. AuW.

1080 Damelii Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Sec, 1882 (2), II., p. 600.

Sydney.

1081 WiNGii Clark. Jour, of Ent., 1863, II., p. 15 ; Sharp. Tr.

Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 600.
Batrachomatus Wingi Clark,
Gayndah, Rockampton, &c. ; Queensland.

HYDERODES. Hope.

1082 COLLARIS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 634.

Australia.

1083 CRAssus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 633.

Australia.

1084 SnucKHARDi Hope. Coleop. Man., II., p. 166, t. 3, f. 5 ;

Clark, Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 22.
Victoria.

SANDRACOTTUS. Sharp.

1085 Bakewellii Clark. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond, 1864, p. 210 ;

Sharp, Tr. Dubl Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 687.
Hydatictis Bakewellii Clark.
Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

1086 GUTTATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 688.

Australia.

CYBISTER. Curtis.

1087 Gayndahensis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 127.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1088 Godefproyi E. Wehncke. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1876,

XXXVIL, p. 357.
Cape York ; N. Australia.

1089 SiMONi Regimbart. Bull. Soc Ent. Fr., 1877, p. CLI.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 595

HOMCEODYTES. Sharp.

1090 ATRATUS Fab. Syst. El., I., p. 259 ; Schaum, Stett. Ent.

Zeit., 1847 ; Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 703.
Dytiscus atratus Fab.
Australia.

1091 GoRYi Aube. Spec, p. 81 ; Sharp, Tr. Dabl. Soc, 1882,

App., p. 771.
Cybister Goryi Aube.
Australia.

1092 iNsuLARis Hope. Proc Ent. Soc. Lond., 1842, p. 47 ;

Sharp, Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882, App., p. 771.
Cybister insularis Hope.
Tasmania.

1093 scuTELLARis Germ. Linn. Ent., III., p. 171; Sharp, Tr.

Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 703.
Cybister sctctellaris Germ.
South Australia and Victoria.

SPENCERHYDRUS. Sharp.

1094 LATECiNCTUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 702,

pi. XVIII., f. 219.
Australia.

1095 PULCHELLUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 701.

Australia.

1096 sEMiFLAvus Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 702.

Australia

LACCOPHILUS. Leach.

1097 ciNGULATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II.. p. 214.

Australia.

1098 Clarki Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2) IL, p. 313.

Australia.

1099 quadrimaculatus Sharp. Tr. Dubl Soc, 1882 (2), II.,

p. 313.
Australia.

596 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1100 RELiGATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. See, 1882 (2), II., p. 316.

Australia.

1101 UNIFASCIATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), fl., p. 303.

Eockhampton ; Queensland.

HYDROVATUS. Motschulsky.

1102 FASCIATUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 326.

Australia.

1103 NiGRiTA Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc , 1882 (2), II., p. 333.

An,stralia.

1104 OPACUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 331.

Australia.

1105 ovALis Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 327.

Brisbane ; Queensland.
HOG PARALLELUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), II., p. 330.
Australia.

1107 POLITUS Sharp. Tr. Dubl. Soc, 1882 (2), IL, p. 332.

Australia.

ERETES. Castelnau.

1108 AuSTRALis Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 134.

Eunectes austraiis Erich.

Ericksoni White. Cat. Hydroc. p. 10.

Tasmania.

1109 PUNCTiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 127.
Eunectes 2ncnctipen7iis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

HYDATICUS. Leach.

1110 BiHAMATUS Aube. Spec. p. 174; Eschsch. Dej. Cat., 3 ed.,

p. 61.
Goryi Aube. Spec, p. 175.

scriptics Blanch. Voy. Pole. Sud., IV., p. 46, t. 4, f. 1.
N. S. Wales and Queensland.

1111 BowRiNGi Clark. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1864 p. 214, t. 14, f. 3.

Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 597

1112 coNSANGUiNEUs Aub6. Spec, p. 160.

N. S. Wales and C^ueensland.

1113 Damelii E. Webncke. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1876, p. 195.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

1114 RUFicoLLis Fab. Mant. I., p. 189 ; Oliv. Ent., Ill, 40, t.

2, f. 10.
Tasmania.

1115 viTTATUsFab. Syst. Ent. App., p. 825; Oliv., Ent., III.,

40, p. 20, t. 1, f. 5 ; Aube. Spec, p. 208.
limbotus Dehaan. Dej. Cat., .3 ed., p. 61.
quaclrivittatus Blanch. Voy. Pole. Sud., IV., p. 48, t. 4,

f. 3.
Northern parts of N. S. Wales and Queensland.

Family. GYRINID^.

ENHYDRUS. Castelnau.

1116 ASSiMiLis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 217.

Australia.

1117 HowiTTii Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, 11., p. 215.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

1118 LATiOR Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 217.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

1119 OBLONGUS Boisd. Voy. Astrol. Ent. p. 52; Aub6, Spec

p. 653 ; Dej. Cat., 3 ed., p. 66.
Australis Brulle. Hist. Nat. Ins. V., p. 237.
Southern parts of Queensland.

1120 Reichei Aube. Spec, 654; Clark, Journ. of Ent. 1863,

II., pp. 216.
South Australia and Victoria.

1121 RivuLARis Clark. Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 218.

Victoria.

MACKOGYRUS. , Reghnbart.

1122 ANGUSTATUS Regim. Ann. Soc Ent. Fr,, 1882 (6), II.,

p. 448.
Austi-alia.

598 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1123 CANALicuLATUS R6gim. Ann. See. Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), II.,

p. 450.
Australia.

1124 ELONCxATULUS Regim. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), II.,

p. 447.
Australia.

1125 LONGiPES Regim. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), II., p. 452.

Australia.

1126 PARADOXUS Regim. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1882 (6), II.,

p. 455, pi. XIL, f. 64.
Australia.

1127 SiMONi Regim. Ann. Soc. Ent, Fr., 1882 (6), II., p. 447,

pi. XII., f. 60.
New South Wales.

GYRINUS. Geoffroy.

1128 coNVEXiuscuLUS Macleay, Trns. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 128.
N. S. Wales and Queensland.

1129 iRiDis Hope. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1842, IX., p. 428; Proc.

Ent. Soc,, 1842, p. 48.
Australia.

1130 OBLiQUATUS Aube, Spec, p. 661.

Australia. (Widely distributed.)

1131 STRiGosus Fab. Syst. EL, I., p. 276; Suffr. Stett. Ent. Zeit.,

1847, p. 101.
Australia.

1132 VENATOR Boisd. Voy. Astrol., II., p. 52 ; Aube. Spec,

p. 662 ; W. S. Macleay. Dej. Cat. 3 ed., p. 66.
A ustralia.

DINEUTES. W. S. Macleay.

1133 AusTRALis Fab. Syst. Ent., p. 235; Oliv. Ent., III., 41,

p. 12, t. l,f. 4; Schaum. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1847, p. 54.
dentatus Suffrian. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1842, p. 256.
Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 599

1134 CALiGiNOSus Regim. Ann. Soc. Ent, Fr., 1882 (6), II.,

p. 397.
Australia.

1135 GouLDi Hope. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1842, IX., p. 427; Proc.

Ent. Soc, 1842, p. 48.
North Australia.

1136 RUFiPES Fab. Syst. El., I., p. 276.

Australis Aube. Spec, p. 785.
Australia.

Family. HYDROPHYLLID^.

HYDROPHILUS. Geoflfiroy.

1137 ALBiPES Casteln. Hist. Nat., II., p. 51.

Australia.

1138 Gayndahensis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 129.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1139 LATi palpus Casteln. Hist. Nat., II., p. 51.

Victoria and N. S. Wales.
1 i40 RUFicoRNis Klug. Ins. Madag,, p. 159 ; Latrl. Dej. Cat.,
3 ed., p. 148.
resplendeyis Eschscb, Dej. Cat., 3 ed., p. 148,
Australia.

STERNOLOPHUS. Sober.

1141 NiTiDULUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871. ~

II., p. 129.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

HYDROBIUSv Leach.

1142 ASSiMiLis Hope. Proc. Ent. Soc, 1842, p. 48; Ann. Nat.

Hist., 1842, IX., p. 428.
Australia.

600 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1143 MARGINICOLLIS Hope. Proc. Ent. See, 1842, p. 48 ; Ann.

Nat. Hist., 1842, IX., p. 428.
Australia.

HYDATOTREPHIS. Macleay.

1144 Mastersi Macleay, Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 130.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

PHILHYDRUS. Solier.

1145 elongatulus Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 130.
Gayndali ; Queensland.

1146 maculiceps Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N". S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 130.
Gayndab ; Queensland .

1147 MARMORATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc.,K S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 130.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

HYDROBATICUS. Macleay.

1148 LURIDUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 131.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1149 tristis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N, S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p. 131.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

HYGROTROPHUS. Macleay.

1150 involutus Macleay. Trans. Ent, Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 132.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1151 nutans Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p. 132.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 601

BEROSUS. Leach.

1152. AUSTRALI.E Muls. Opusc. Ent., 1859, IX., p. 58.
Australia.

HYDROCHUS. Leach.

1153 AusTRALis Motsch. Schrenck. Reis., 1860, p. 104.

Australia.

1154 PARALLELus Macleav. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 133. '
Gayndah ; Queensland.

HYDR.ENA. Kugelann.

1155 LURiDiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc., N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 133.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

CYCLONOTUM. Eriohson.

115G Masters: Macleay. Traus. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,
II., p. 133.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1157 PYGM.EUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 133.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

CERCYON. Leach.

1158 DORSALis Erich. Wiegm. Arch. 1842, I., p. 153.

Tasmania.

Family. ST APH YLIN ID^.

Sub-Family. ALEOCHARIDES.

MYRMECOCEPHALUS. Macleay.

1159 CINGULATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,
II., p. 134 ; Fvi., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 296.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

602 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

IIGO Fauveli Solsky. Hor. See. Ent. Ross., 1867, V., p. 113.
Falagria Fauveli Solsky.

hicingulatus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,
1871, II., p. 134; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877,
• X., 296; 1878, XIII., p. 596.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BOLITOCHARA. Mannerheim.

1161 DiscicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus, Civ. Gen., 1879. XIII.,

p. 595.

Australia.

SILUSA. Erichson.

1162 M EL ANOG ASTRA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 590.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1163 FALLENS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 590.

W. Australia.

ALEOCHARA. Gravenhorst.

1164 BRACHiALis Jekel, Col. Jekel., 1873, p. 39.

N. S. Wales.

1165 H^MORRHOiDALis Guer. Voy. Coquille. Ins., II., p. 63, t. 1,

f. 24; Erichs. Gen., p. 176.
Australia. (Widely distributed.)

1166 Mastersi Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 136.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1167 punctum Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 593.

N. S. Wales.

1168 semiruber Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 293.

Australia.

1169 speculifera Ericlis. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 134.

Tasmania.

CORREA. Fauvel.

1170 oxytelina Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 592.

Adnlaide ; S. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS.

603

POLYLOBUS. Solier.

1171 APicALis Fvl. Ann. Mas. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 285.

Victoria.

1172 ATERRiMUs Fvl. Ami. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII , p. 586.

Australia.

1173 ciNCTUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 284.

Victoria,

1174 FLAVICOLLIS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 135; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 284.
Homalota flavicollis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1175 INSECATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 585.

Queensland.
1170 PALLiDiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,
1871, II., p. 135.
Homalota pallidipennis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1177 PAVicoRNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 586,

Victoria.

MYRMEDONIA. Erichson,

1178 AusTRALis Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 135.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1179 CLAviGERA FvI. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 588,

Sydney ; N. S. Wales,

1180 iNSiGNicoRNis Fvl. Ann, Mus. Civ, Gen., 1878, XIIL,

p. 589.
Australia.

PELIOPTERA, Kraatz.

1181 sPECULARis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 579.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales,

CALODERA, Mannerhehn,

1182 ABDOMiNALis Fvl. Ami. Mus, Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL,

p. 580. ,^(

Australia. / **^

40

^?.

604 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1183 AusTRALisFvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 287 ;

1878, XIII., p. 580.
Australia.

1184 CORACINA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Sec, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II.,- p. 135 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 287.
Tachyusa coracina Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1185 CRiBELLA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ, Gen., 1877, X., p. 287 ;

XIIL, p. 581.
W. Australia.

1186 iN^QUALis Fvl. Aun. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 286 ;

XIII., p. 580.
Victoria.

1187 MACiLENTA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 581.

Victoria.

1188 RUPicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 581.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

MYRMECOPORA. Saulcy.

1189 SENILIS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 582.

Victoria.

GNYPETA. Thomson.

1190 FULGiDA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 583.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

OXYPODA. Maiinerheim.

1191 ANALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p. 135 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 283.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1192 BISULCATA Redtenb. Reis. Novar., 1867, II. , p. 27.

Sydney; N. S. Wales,

1193 VARIEGATA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 584.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1194 viNCTA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 584.

N. S. Wales.

BT GEORGE MASTERS. 605

HOMALOTA. Mannerheim.

1195 AusTRALis Jekel. Col. Jekel., 1873, I., p. 47.

N. S. Wales.

1196 GENTiLis Fv]. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 578.

Australia.

1197 PiCEicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 577.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1198 POLiTULA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 577.

Adelaide ; S. Australia.

1199 ROBUSTicoRNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 576.
Sydney ; N. S. Wales,

PLACUSA. Erichson.

1200 TENUicoRNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 575,

Australia.

1201 TRiDENS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 574.

Sydne}"; N. S. Wales.

PHL(EOPORA. Erichson.

1202 GRATiosA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 587.

W. Australia.

1203 L^viuscuLA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 587.
Victoria.

OLIGOTA. Mannerheim.

1204 ASPERivENTRis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen,, 1878, XIII.,

p. 573.
Victoria.

GYROPH.ENA. Mannerheim.

1205 CRiBROSA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 569.

Sydney; N. S. Wales.

BRACHIDA. Mulsant et Rey.

1206 ANNULATA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII,, p. 572.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

606 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1207 ATRiCEPS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XITL, p. 571.

Victoi-ia.

1208 BASiVENTRis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL,

p. 571.
Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1209 SUTURALis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 570.

Adelaide ; N. S. Wales.

DINOPSIS. Matthews.

1210 AusTRALis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 567.

Victoria.

Sub-Family. TACHYPORIDES.
LEUCOCRASPEDUM. Kraatz.

1211 SiDNEENSE Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 281 ;

1878, XIII., p. 566.

Sydney ; N, S. Wales.

CILEA. Jacquelin-Duval.

1212 ATRICEPS Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871,

11., p, 136; Fvl, Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,

p. 279.
Conurus atriceps Macleay.
Gayndali ; Queensland.

1213 DisciPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 563.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1214 RUBRicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 137 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen,, 1877, X., p. 279.
Tachyporus rnhricollis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1215 RUFiPALPis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 136 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 278.
Conurus rufipalpis Macleay.

1216 TRiSTis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p. 136 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 279.
Tachypoi'us tristis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 607

AMBLYOPINUS. Solsky.

1217 Jansoni Matth. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 275.

Myotyplus Jansoni Matth.
Tasmania.

TACHYNODERUS. Motschulsky.

1218 AusTRALis Fvl. Ann, Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 277.

Queensland.

1219 ELONGATULUS Macleay. Trans. Ent, Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 136 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 276.
Gonurus elongatulus Maclay,
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1220 H^MORRHOUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 277.

Tasmania.

CONURUS. Stevens.

1221 AusTRALis Evichs. Gen., p. 221.

Tasmania.

1222 discus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 565.

Victoria.

1223 FUMATUS Erichs. Gen., p. 221.

Tasmania.

1224 iMPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 564.

King Geoi'ge's Sound ; W. Australia.

1225 PERSONATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 566.

New South Wales.

1226 STiGMALis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 280 ;

1878, XIII., p. 564.
Australia.

1227 TRIANGULUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ., Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 565.

Australia.

Sub-Family. STAPHYLINIDES.
TANYGNATHUS. Erichson.

1228 Australasia Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 562.
Victoria.

60S CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

ACYLOPHORUS. Nordmann.

1229 ASPERATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878. XIII., p. 561.

Victoria.

QUEDIOPSIS. Fauvel.

1230 ABDOMiNALis Fvl. Ann, Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.

p. 561.
Victoria.

1231 LUGUBRis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 5G0.

Victoria.

HETEROTHOPS. Stephenson.

1232 BiMACULATA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 557.
Sydney ; New South Wales.

1233 PLAvicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 559.
Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1234 LATiCEPS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 558.

Queensland.

1235 LUCTUOSA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 275.

Australia.

1236 PiciPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 276;

XIIL, p. 558.
Victoria.

1237 SEMicuPREA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 557.

Queensland.

1238 TIBIALIS Fvl. Ann. Mas. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 559.

Victoria.

QUEDIUS. .Stephens.

1239 yENEUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 274.

Victoria.

1240 ANALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p. 142 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1977, X., p. 274.
Staj)hylinus analis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. bUy

1241 CHALYBEiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 141 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,

p. 271.
Philonthtis chalyheipennis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1242 CUPRINUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 274.

N. S. Wales.

1243 DICHROUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 553.

Victoria.

1244 DivERSiPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ, Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 554.
Swan River ; W. Australia.

1245 iRiDivENTRis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X, p. 272.

N. S. Wales.

1246 LURiDiPENNis Maclcay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 142 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,

p. 274.
Staphylinus luridipennis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1247 LURiDus Fvl. Ann. Mus.;Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 272.

W, Australia.

1248 METALLicus Fvl Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 556.
Queensland.

1249 NiGRicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 271.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.^

1250 PiCEOLUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 554.

Victoria.

1251 POLiTULUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 140 ; Fvl. Ann.^Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 272.
Philonthus politulus Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1252 RUBRicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 554.
Victoria.

610 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1253 SEMivioLACEUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 556.
Australia.

1254 SiDNEENSis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X„ p. 269.

New South Wales.

1255 SUBCINGULATUS Maclcay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales,

1871, 11., p. 141 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,

p. 270.
Philonthus subcingulatus Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1256 suLCicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 269.

Australia.

1257 THORACicus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 271 ;

■ XIII., p. 553.
Australia.

1258 VERSICOLOR Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 273;

XIII., p. 553.
Queensland.

1259 viRiDESCENS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 555.
W. Australia.

1260 XANTHOLiNOiDES Macleay. Trans. Ent. Sec, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 141 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877,

X., p. 275.
PJiilonthus xantholinoides Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

ANTIMERUS. Fauvel.

1261 SMARAQDiNUS Fvl. Ann Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 550.

Victoria.

CREOPHILUS. Mannerheim,

1262 ERYTHROCEPHALUS. Fab. Syst. Ent., p. 205 ; Oliv. Ent., III.,

42, p. 12, t. 2, f. 9 ; Erichs. Gen., p. 351.
Australia. (Widely distributed.)

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 611

1263 LANio Erichs. Gen., p. 352.

Ocidatus var. Grav. Mon., p. 127,

Tasmania.

OCYPUS. Stephens.

1264 AusTRALis Redtenb. ReLs. Novar., 1867, II., p. 28.

Sydney 3 N. S. Wales.

PHILONTHUS. Curtis.

1265 ANTiPODUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen,, 1877, X., p. 263.

Australia.

1266 MACELLUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 264;

1878, XIIL, p. 547,
Victoria.

1267 OREOPHiLUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 265.

Australia.

1268 PACiFicus Erichs. Gen., p. 501.

Tasmania.

1269 PiLiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 140; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 264.
Gayndali ; Queensland.

1270 sANGUiNicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. 1877, X., p. 265.

Victoria.

CAFIUS. Stephens.

1271 AREOLATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p 251 ;

1878, XIII., p. 541.
Victoria.

1272 CATENATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 256 ;

1878, XIIL, p. 541.
N. S. Wales.

1273 LiTTORALis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 254.

Australia.

1274 SABULOsus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X. p. 253.

A ustralia.

1275 SERiATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 255 ;

1878, XIII., p. 541.
Victoria.

612 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1276 VELUTiNUs Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 256 ;

1878, XIII., p. 541.
New South Wales.

HESPERUS. Fauvel.

1277 AusTRALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, JST. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 139 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,

p. 260 ; 1878, XIII., p. 543.
PhilontJms Australis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1278 H^MORRHOiDALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 140 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ., Gen., 1877,

X., p. 260.
Philonthus hfEmorrhoidalis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1279 MiRABiLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 260;

1878, XIIL, p. 543.
Queensland.

1280 SEMiRUFUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 543.

South Australia.

BELONUCHUS. Nordmann.

1281 BREvicoLLis Fvl. Ann, Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 267.

Australia.

1282 Dhorni Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 266.

South Australia.

XANTHOLINUS. ServiUe.

1283 ATRICEPS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871^

II., p. 138.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1284 CERViNiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Eat. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 138.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1285 CHALCOPTERUS Erichs. Gen., p. 312.

Swan River : W. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 613

1286 CHLOROPTERUS Erichs. Gen., p. 311.

Tasmania.

1287 ccELESTES Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 540.

Victoria.

1288 CRiBRATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 540.

Victoria.

1289 CYANEiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 139.
Gayndali ; Queensland,

1290 DUBius Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 139 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 247.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1291 ERYTHROPTERUS Erichs. Gen. p. 320.

Australia.

1292 H^MORRHOus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Cuv. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 538.
Queensland.

1293 PH^NicoPTERUs Ei'ichs. Gen., p. 320.

Australia.

1294 RUFiTARSis Fvl, Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 241 ;

1878, XIII., p. 538.
Australia.

1295 siDERALis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 539.

W. Australia.

1296 socius Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., 247; 1878,

XIII. , p. 540.
Australia.

LEPTICANUS. Erichson.

1297 NOViE-HOLLANDi^ Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,

p. 236 ; 1878, XIIL, p. 537.

Victoria.

METOPONCUS. Kraatz.

1298 CYANiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 137 ; Fvl., Ann. Miis. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 237.
Leptacinus cyanipennis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

614 CATALOUGE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1299 LURiDiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 137; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1S77,
X., p. 237.

Leptacinus luridipennis Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1300 PiCEUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 138.
Xantholinus piceits Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

DIOCHUS. Erichson.

1301 Divisus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 235.

New South Wales.

1302 OcTAvii Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, p. 235; 1878,

XIII., p. 535.
Australia.

Sub-Family. P^DE RIDES.
LATHROBIUM. Gravenhorst,

1303 ANGUSTiCEPS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 522.
Queensland.

1304 AusTRALicuM Solsky. Bull. Soc. Nat. Mosc, 1864, p. 447.

Australia.

1305 BREviCEPS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 521.

Queensland.

1306 CRiBRUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 523;

var : rujiventre Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878,
XIIL, p. 524.
Victoria; Queensland.

1307 FERREUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 288.

Australia.

1308 ORATELLUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 229;

1878, XIIL, p. 522.
New South Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 615

1309 LIMBATUM Fvl. Ann. Mas. Civ. Gen, 1878, XIII., p. 524.

Queensland.

1310 LONGiCEPS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X„ 330

N. S. Wales.

1311 MICROS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 523.

Rockhampton ; Queensland.

1312 MUTATOR Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 525.

Victoi'ia.

1313 NOTATicoLLE Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 229 ;

1878, XIIL, p. 523.
Queensland.

1314 PENNATUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 522.

Queensland.

1315 PiCEUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 144 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 228.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1316 POLiTULUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 144 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 228.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

HYPEROMA. Fauvel.

1317 LACERTiNUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 532.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

SUNIOPSIS. Fauvel.

1318 siNGULARis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 530.

W. Australia.

SCIMBALIUM. Erichson.

1319 ARCUATUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 529.

Australia.

1320 AUSTRALE Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 231 ; 1878,

XIIL, p. 528.
Austi'alia.

1321 DUPLOPUNCTATUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL,

p. 527.
Victoria.

616 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1322 FERRUGiNEUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,
p. 526.
Queensland.
132.3 MiCROCEPHALUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen,, 1877, X.,
p. 232 ; 1878, XIIL, p. 527.
South Australia.

1324 OPACULUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ., Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 530.

Queensland.

1325 RUPUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 529.

South Australia.

1326 siMPLARiUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 528.

South Australia.

1327 SPARSicOLLE Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL,

p. 528.
South Australia.

DOLICAON. Castelnau.

1328 ELONGATULUS Macleay, Trans. Ent, Soc, X. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 143 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877,
X., p. 225.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1329 NiGRiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N, S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 144 ; Fvl, Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 225.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1330 PARicoLOR Fvl. Ann, Mus. Civ. Gen.. 1878, XIIL, p. 517.

Australia.

1331 QUADRATicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 143; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877,
X., p. 225.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

PINOBIUS. Macleay.

1332 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 148 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 225.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEOEGE MASTERS. 617

DICAX. Fauvel.

1333 ARCULUS Fvl. Ann. Mas. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 520.

Victoria.

1334 CEPHALOTES Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL,

p. 519.
Australia.

1335 LONGiCEPS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 519.

N. S. Wales.

1336 RUBRiPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL,

p. 519.
Victoria.

CRYPTOBIUM. Mannerheim.

1337 APiCALE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,11.,

p. U3; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 234;
1878, XIIL, p. 534.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1338 FRACTUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 534.

Victoria.

1339 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 142 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 233 ;
1878, XIIL,p. 534.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1340 piCEUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 533.

Queensland.

STILICUS. LatreiUe.

1341 ovicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 145 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 217.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

SCOP.EUS. Erichson.

1342 DIGITALIS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 515.

Victoria.

1343 ROTUNUicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 145 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 218.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

618 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1344 RUFicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 218.

Australia.

LITHOCHARIS. Lacordaire.

1345 IGNITA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 221.

Australia.

1346 TRiSTis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 144 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 221.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

DOMENE. Fauvel.

1347 Australia Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 514.

Queensland.

SUNIUS. Stephens.

1348 AusTRALASiiE Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X. p. 216;

1878, XIIL, p. 513.
New South Wales.

1349 CYLiNDRicus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Sue, K S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 145 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 216; 1878, p. 513.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1350 GUTTULA Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 217 ;

1878, XIIL, p. 514.
New South Wales.

1351 PECTINATUS Fvl. Ann. Mas. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 513.

New South Wales.

P.EDERUS. Fabricius.

1352 ANGULicOLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 146 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ., Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 224.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1353 AusTRALis Guer. Voy. Coquille. Zool., IL, p. 63, t. 1, f. 23

New South Wales.

1354 ciXGULATUs Macleay. Trans Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 146 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 228.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS.

619

1355 CRUENTicOLLis Germ. Liun. Eut., 1848, III., p. 174.

South Australia.

1356 SPARSUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 516.

N. S. Wales.

1357 THJiuicoRNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 224 ;

1878, XIIL, p. 517.
Australia.

PALAMINUS. Erichson.

1358 Australia Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 508,

Queensland.

(EDICHIRUS. Erichson.

1359 INTRICATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. 1877, X., p. 211.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

1360 P^DEROiDEs Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 147 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen , 1877, X., p. 211.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1361 RUBRicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 508.

Australia.

PROCIRRUS. Erichson.

1362 Castelnaui Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 509.

Australia.

1363 ViCTORLE Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 509.

Victoria.

PINOPHILUS. Gravenhorst.

1364 iENEiVENTRis Fvl. Ami. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 214 ;

1878, XIIL p. 511.
Australia.

1365 cuRTicoRNis Fvl. Ann, Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 215,

Queensland.

1366 GRANDiCEPs Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 146 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 212.
Gayndah ; Queenslaitd.
41

620 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1367 Macleayi Duvivier.

brevis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 147; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 213.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1368 marginellus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 511.

Victoria.

1369 Mastersii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 146 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 212.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1370 OPACUS Redt. Reise, Novara., 1868, Zool., II., Col. p. 30.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1371 RUBRiPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 511.

N. S. Wales.

1372 rufitarsis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen.. 1877, X., p. 214;

1878, XIIL, p. 510.
Tasmania.

1373 trapezus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 510.

Victoria.

NOTOBIUM. Solsky.

1374 AusTRALicuM Solsky. Bull. Mosc, 1864, II., p. 447.

Victoria.

Sub-Family. STENIDES.

8TENUS. LatreiUe.

1375 atrovirens Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 503.

Queensland.

1376 caviceps Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 207 ;

1878, XIL, p. 223.
Australia.

1377 cceruleus Ch. Waterh. Ent. Month. Mag., XIV., p., 24;

Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 209; 1878,
XIIL, p. 506.
N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 621

1378 cuPREiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871. XL, p. 149; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 209 ; 1878, XTII., p. 502.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1379 Gayndahensis Macleay. Trans. Ent, Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 148; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877,
X., p. 209.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1380 guttulifer Ch. Waterh. Ent. Month. Mag., XIV., p. 24 ;

Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 209.
New South Wales.

1381 macellus Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 504.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

1382 maculatus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 148; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 208; 1878, XIII, p. 504.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1383 OBESULus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 506.

Queensland.

1384 OLivACEUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, New South Wales,

1871, II„ p. 148; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 209 ; 1878, XIIL, p. 503.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1385 PUNCTicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 149; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen, 1877,
X., p. 209 ; 1878, XIIL, p. 502.
Gayndah ; Queensland.
13§6 PUSTULiPER Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 505.
New South Wales.

1387 siMiLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IL,

p. 149 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 209.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1388 viRiDi-iENEUS Macleay. Trans.- Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 149 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 209.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

622 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

MEGALOPS. Erichson.

1389 DENTicoLLis Fvl. Ami. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, p. 500.

Australia.

1390 NODiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 150; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p, 206.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

Sub-Family. OXYTELIDES.

OSORIUS. Latreille.

1391 SANGUiNiPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 192.

Australia.

BLEDIUS. Mannerheim.

1392 ATERRiMUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 204;

1878, XIIL, p. 499.
N. S. Wales.

1393 CAPiTALis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 204.

Queensland.

1394 CONVEXIFRONS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 498.
S-wan River ; W. Australia.

1395 iiAMiFER Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 499.

W. Australia.
1366 MANDiBULARis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,
1871, II., p. 150 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 204.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1397 PHYTOSiNUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen, 1878, XIIL, p. 499.

Australia. •

SARTALLUS. Sharp.

1398 siGNATUS Sharp. Ent. Month. Mag., 1871, VII., p. 217;

Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 205.
South Australia.

OXYTELUS. Gravenhorst.

1399 APiCALis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 494.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 623

1400 BRUNNiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 150; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 199.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1401 COLLARIS Erichs. Gen., p. 789.

Tasmania.

1402 CRiBRicEPS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 496.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1403 DisciPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 197.

Tasmania and N. S. Wales.

1404 FLAviPEs Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 494.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

1405 iMPENNis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Oiv. Gen., 1877, X., p. 198;

1878, XIII., p. 493.
Victoria.

1406 IMPRESSIFRONS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 150; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X.,
p. 200.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1407 MELAS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 196 ; 1878,

XIII., p. 492.
Tasmania.

1408 MYOPs Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 199.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

1409 OBSCURIFRONS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 494.
Australia.

1410 occiDENTALis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen.. 1877, X., p. 199.

W. Australia.

1411 OCULARIS Fvl. Ann Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 198.

Australia.

1412 piCEicoLLis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XII., p. 495.

New South Wales.
1414 RUBECULUS Fvl. Ann.Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 497.
Victoria.

624 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1415 RUFiNODis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 493.

Australia.

1416 SCABRELLUS Fvl. Ann. Mns, Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 496.

A ustralia.

1417 SEMiRUFUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ, Gen., 1877, X., p. 202 ;

1878, XIII., p. 493.
W. Australia.

1418 SPARSus Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 203;

1878, XIIL, p. 493.
Victoria.

1419 STRiATELLUs Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 49 7

W. Australia.

1420 SUB^NEUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 199.

W. Austi-alia.

1421 VARius Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 201.

Victoria.

1422 vuLNERATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 197;

1878, XIIL, p. 492.

Victoria.

TKOGOPHLCEUS. Maimerheim.

1423 ANCEPS. Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 194.

Australia.

1424 CARBONARius Fvl. Ann. Mus, Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL,

p. 490.
Victoria.

1425 PUNCTATUS Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 194;

1878, XIIL, p. 490.

Australia.

SHARPIA. Fauvel.

1426 Banksi Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 488.

Victoria.

Sub-Family. OMALIDES.
AMPHICHROUM. Kraatz.

1427 AusTRALE Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 191 ;

1878, XIIL, p. 486.
N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 625

1428 CRiBRiCEPs Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII., p. 486.

South Australia.

1429 spiNiPEs Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 487.

W. Australia,

OMALIUM. Gravenhorst.

1430 Gayndahense Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 151 ; Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X..
p. 190.
Gayndah ; Queensland,

1431 phiorinoides Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII.,

p. 485.
• Victoria.

Sub-Family. PHLCEOCHARIDES.

PHLOEOCHARIS. Mannerheim.

1432 ANTiPODUM Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII,, p. 483,

Australia.

Sub-Family. PIESTIDES.

ELEUSIS, Castelnau.

1433 AusTRALis Fvl. Ann, Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIII,, p, 482.

Queensland.

1434 PLANicoLLis Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S, Wales, 1871,

IL, p. 151 ; Fvl., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1877, X., p. 186.
Isomalus planicollis Macleay,
Gayndali ; Queensland.

LISPINUS. ^richson.

1435 SiDNEENsis Fvl. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1878, XIIL, p. 481

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

626 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

Family. PSEPHALIDJE

Sub-Family. PSELAPHIDES.
NARCODES. King.

1436 VARiA King. Trans Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.

p. 38.
Pulchra King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

p. 39; 1865, I., p. 299.
Parramatta; N. S. Wales.

CTENISTES. Eeichenbach.

1437 IMPRESSUS Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Loncl., 1874, p. 485.

W. Australia.

1438 Kreusleri King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866,

I., p. 300.
Gawler ; 8. Australia.

1439 PARVUS Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 486.

Victoria.

1440 SIMPLEX Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 486.

Victoria.

1441 VERNALis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 40 ; 1864, I., p. 102.
hesperi King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 40.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

TMESIPHORUS. Leconte.

1442 FORMiciNus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

II., p. 370.
Mundarlo ; N. S. Wales.

1443 KiNGi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 15 J.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS.

627

1444 Macleayi King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

p. 40; 1864, p. 102.
Illawarva, Parramatta, Petersham, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

TYROMORPHUS. Raffray.

1445 NiTiDus Raff. Rev. d'Ent., 1883, II., p. 241, t. 5, I 17-18.

Australia.

TYRUS. Aub.5.

1446 Bispixosus Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1865, III., p. 271,

t. XVI., f. 4.
Australia.

1447 FORMOSus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

p. 41, t. 5, f. 4, a.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1448 HowiTTii King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866, p. 301-

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1449 HUMERALis Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1856, III., p. 272,

t. 16, f. 5.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1450 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 152.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1451 MiRANDUS Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1874, p. 488.

Victoria.

1452 PALPALis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 42, t. 5, f. 5a.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1453 piceus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

301.
Parramatta, South Creek, Camperdown, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

1454 speciosus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I,,

p. 168.
Clyde River ; N. S. Wales.

1455 Victoria King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 168.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

628 CATALOUGE OF THE DESCRIBED COLFOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

TYRAPHUS. Sharp.

1456 BREVis Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc., Loncl., 1874, p. 491.

W. Australia.

1457 MAJOR Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 491.

Champion Bay ; W. Australia.
1455 PLANUS Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 489.
W. Australia.

RYTUS. King.

1459 CORNIGER King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 308.
Clyde River; N. S. Wales.

1460 E.MARGINATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 303.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1461 PUNCTATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 303, t. 7, f. 6.
subulatus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S, Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 103.
Parramatta, South Creek, Prospect Hill, &c ; N. S. Wales,

1462 Victoria King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 304.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

FARONUS. Aub^.

1463 PUNCTATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 168.

Currajong ; N. S. Wales.

GONATOCERUS. Schaufuss.

1464 COMMUNIS Schauf. Soc Ent. Belg., 1880, p. 30.

Australia.

PSELAPHUS. Aub.5.

1465 ANTiPODUM Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1856, IIL,

p. 274, t. 16, f. 8.
Melbourne : Victoria.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 629

1466 BREviPALPis Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 8.

var. siinplidor Schauf. Soc. Ent. Belg., 1880, p. 8.
Gawler ; South Australia.

1467 CLAVATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 169.
Clyde River ; N. S. Wales, Victoria and S. Australia.

1468 CLAvicoRNis Schauf. Soc. Ent. Belg., 1880, p. 7.

Gawler ; S. Australia.

1469 GEMiNATUS Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1856, III.,

p. 273, t. 16, f. 9.
Melbourne , Victoria.

1470 LiNEATUs King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1862, I.,

p. 43.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales, Victoria and S. Australia.

1471 MUNDUS Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 491.

Victoria.

1472 PUNCTATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 169.
Rockhampton ; Queensland.

1473 TENUIS Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 493.

Victoria.

GERALLUS. Sharp.

1474 NANUS Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 494.

W. Australia.

1475 PERFORATus Schauf . Soc. Eat., Belg., 1880, p. 34.

Tasmania.

1476 PORCELLus Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 33.

Australia.

1477 PUNCTiPENNis Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 33.

New South Wales.

1478 SUBASPER Schauf . Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 34.

Tasmania.

TYCHUS. Leach.

1479 HowiTTii King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, L,

p. 170.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

630 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1480 NiaRicoLLis King. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1863, I,

p. 103.
Parramatta, Sydney, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

1481 OBLiQuus King. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 170.
Parramatta, Blue Mountains, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

CURCULIONELLUS. Westwood.

1482 ANGULicoLLis Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1870, p. 127.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

SINTECTUS. Westwood.

1483 CARiNATUS Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1870, p. 130.

Australia.

DURBOS. Sharp.

1484 PRiscus Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 495.

Champion Bay ; W. Australia.

BATRISUS. AuW.

1485 ANGULATUS Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1856, IIL,

p. 273, 1. 16, f. 6-7.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1486 AusTRALis Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 243.

Tasmania.

1487 BARBATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1862, L,

p. 44, t. 5, f. 6, a.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1488 coNSPiC'jus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863, L,

p. 171.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1489 CYCLOPS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 306.

Ipswich ; Queensland.

1490 Edwardsi King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

p. 172.
Victoria.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 631

1491 Elizabeths King. Trans. Ent, Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

p. 104.
Elizabeth Bay ; Sydney.

1492 GiBBOSUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

p. 307.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1493 GiRAFFA Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 31.

Austi-alia.

1494 HAMATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc , N. S. Wales, 1862, I,

p. 45, 1. 5, f. 6 c.
Parramatta and Blue Mountains, N. S. Wales.

1495 NOBiLis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 17.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1496 TIBIALIS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 171.
Maitland ; N. S, Wales.

1497 URSiNUS Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 31.

Australia.

BRYAXIS. Leach.

1498 MQVATA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 310.
Elizabeth Bay ; Sydney.

1499 AFFiNis Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 25.

New South Wales.

1500 AMPLivENTRis Shauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 29.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1501 Armitagei King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

p. 104.
Parramatta and Prospect ; N. S. Wales.

1502 atra King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, p. 309.

Dandenong Eanges ; Victoria.

1503 atriceps Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 152.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

632 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1504 ATRivENTRis Westw. Trans. Ent. See, Lend., 1856, III.,

p. 270, t. 16, f. 3.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1505 AURORA Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 20.

New South Wales.

1506 BASALis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 172.
Clyde Eiver ; N. S. Wales.

1507 BISON Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 23.

King George's Sound : W. Australia.

1508 BREVis Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 22.

Tasmania.

1509 BREViuscuLA Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 27.

Australia.

1510 CAPiTATA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

p. 311.

Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1511 CHAMELEON Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 23.

King's George's Sound ; W. Australia.

1512 CLAVATULA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1863,

p. 104, t. 7, f. 12.
Sydney : N. S. Wales.

1513 coNCOLOR Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 496.

Victoria.

1514 DOMiNORUM King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 173.
Clyde River ; N. S. Wales.

1515 DiVERsicoLOR Schauf. Soc Ent. Belg., 1880, p. 22.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

1516 ELECTRicA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. 8. Wales, 1862, t,

p. 48, t. 16, f. g. b.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1517 Elizabeths King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1863,

I., p. 105, t. 7, f. 8-9.
Elizabeth Bay ; Sydney.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 633

1518 EUPLECTODES Shai'p. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 504.

W. Australia.

1519 ExiGUA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.Wales, 1862, I.,

p. 50.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1520 FLAViPES Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 26.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1521 GEMiNATA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 311.
Parramatta ; N". S. Wales.

1522 GLOBULiFER Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 28.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1523 HiRTA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 152.
Gayndah ; Queensland.-

1524 HORTENSis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1862, I.,

p. 47.
Parramatta ; N". S. Wales.

1525 HYALiNA Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 26.

Australia.

1526 HYALiNiPENNis Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880. p. 25.

Tasmania.

1527 iNSiGNis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 172.
Currajong ; N. S. Wales.

1528 Isidore Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 24.

King George's Sound ; W, Australia.

1529 L^viCEPs Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880. p. 27.

Australia.

1530 LATiCLAVA Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 19.

Tasmania.

1531 LUNATICA, King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1862, I.,

p. 48, t. 16, f. 8 b.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1532 MELANOCEPHALA Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 18.

Tasmania.

634 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1533 OPTATA Sharp. Trans. Ent. See, Lond , 1874, p. 496.

Victoria.

1534 piCTA Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 21.

VAx.,fro7italis Schauf. Soc. Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 21.

var., verticalis Schauf. I.e., p. 22.

var., ebeni/er Schauf. I.e., p. 22.

var., cethiops Schauf. I.e., p. 22.

Tasmania.

1535 PLECTA Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc., Loud., 1874, p, 502.

Victoria.

1536 POLiTA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1862, L,

p. 49 ; 1865, I., p. 309.
Parramatta ; IS". S. Wales.

1537 PUMiLio Schauf. Soc. Ent.,, Belg., 1880, p. 28.

Australia.

1538 QUADRICEPS Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1856, IIL,

p. 270, t. 16, f. 2.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1539 RECTA Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 496.

W. Australia.

1540 SPRETA Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 501.

Victoi-ia.

1541 soBRLVA Schauf. Soc Ent., Belg., 1880, p. 19.

Tasmania.

1542 sTRiGicoLLis Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1865, IIL,

p. 269, t. 16, f. 1.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1543 SULCATA Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 503.

W. Australia.

1544 TALPA Schauf. Soc Ent. Belg., 1880, p. 20.

Tasmania.

1545 TRANSVERSA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N". S. Wales, 1855, I.,

p. 311.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 635

1546 ViCTORiiE King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

p. 310.
Victoria.

1547 viTREA Schauf. Soc. Ent. Belg., 1880, p. 19.

Tasmania.

SCHISTODACTYLUS. Raflfray.

1548 PHANTASMA Raff. Rev. d'Ent., 1883, II., p. 244, pis., V.,

figs. 20-22 and IV., fig. 23.
King George's Sound, \V. Australia.

CYATHIGER. King.

1549 PUNCTATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865, I.,

p. 174, t. 14.
Petersham and Blue Mountains ; N. S. Wales.

BYTHINUS. Leach.

1550 IMPRESSIFRONS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1865,

I., p. 173.
Clyde River; N. S. Wales.

1551 NIGER King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1866, L, p. 312.

Victoria.

EUPLECTUS. Leach.

1552 DEPRESSUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 185C, I.,

p. 313.
Currajong ; N. S. Wales.

1553 Excisus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1866, I.,

p. 313.
Dandenong Ranges ; Victoria.

1554 LINEARIS King. Trans, Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 46, t. 5, f. 7, b.
Parramatta ; JST. S. Wales.

1555 Odewahni King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866, I.,

p. 314.
Gawler; S. Australia.
42

636 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP ArSTRALIA,

1556 SCULPTUS King. Trans. Ent. See, K S. Wales, 1863, I.,

p. 49.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1557 SUBTERRANEUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1866,

I., p. 314.
Liberty Plains; N. S. Wales.

MARGARIS. Schaufuss.

1558 iMPERiALis Schauf. Nung. Ot., Dresden, 1877,11., p. 454.

Rockhampton.

SOMATIPION. Schaufuss.

1559 GLOBULiFER Schauf. Nung. Ot. Dresden, 1877, II., p. 458.

King George's Sound, W. Australia.

Sub-Family. CLAVIGERIDES.
ARTICEROS. Dalman.

1560 ANGUSTicoLLis Westw. Trans. Ent. See, 1856, III., p. 275,

t. 17, f. 1.
Victoria. Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1561 AURiFLUUs Schauf. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., 1883, XVIII.,

p. 194.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1562 BosTOCKi Pascoe. Proc. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1866, p. 15.

Swan Piver ; W. Australia.

1563 BREViCEPS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1869, II.,

p. 56.
Ropes Creek ; N. S. Wales.

1564 BREviPEs Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 512.

W. Australia.

1565 cuRVicoRNis Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1856, III.,

p. 275, t. 17, f. 2.
Victoria.

1566 Deyrollei Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 514.

Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 637

1567 DiLATicoRNis Westw. Ti-ans, Ent. Soc, Lond., 1856, III.,

p. 276, t. 17, f. 4.
Victoria.

1568 DuBOULAYi Waterh. Ent. Month. Mag., 1865, I., p. 149.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

1569 FoRTNUMi Hope. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1845, IV., p. 106,

t. 7, f. 1 ; Lacord. Gen. Col., II., p. 182.
South Australia.

1570 GiBBULUS Sharp. Trans. Ent, Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 513.

W. Australia.

1571 KiNGius Sharp Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 512.

W. Australia.

1572 Odewahni Pascoe. Proc. Ent, Soc. Lond., 1866, p. 15.

S. Australia.

1573 Pascoeus Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 511.

W. Australia.

1574 REGIUS King. Trans Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, II., p. 55.

Liverpool ; N. S. Wales.

1575 Selysi Schauf. Soc. Ent. Belg., 1880, p. 5.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

1576 setipes Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 18,65, III., p. 276,

t. 17, f. 3.
Victoria. Gawler ; S. Australia.

1577 Sharpi Masters.

tumidus Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 511

(nom. prseocc.)
West Australia.

1578 SPINIFER Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 513.

N. W. Australia.

1579 TUMIDUS Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1869, p. 318.

Swan River ; W. Austi'alia.

1580 Westwoodii Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1874, p. 510.

W. Australia.

638 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

Family. PAUSSID^,

ARTHROPTERUS. W. S. Macleay.

1581 Adelaide Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

IL, p. 347.
S. Australia.

1582 ANGULATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1873,

IL, p. 346.
Kockhampton ; Queensland.

1583 ANGULicoRNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N". S. Wales,

1873, IL, p. 342.
Ipswich ; Queensland.

1584 ANGUSTicoRNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 154,
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1585 BisiNUATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1873,

IL, p. 341.
Lane Cove, near Sydney.

1586 BREVicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N", S. Wales, 1873,

IL, p. 351.
New South Wales.

1587 BREVis Westw. Proc Linn. Soc, Lond, 1850, IL, p. 101 ;

Ann. Nat. Hist., 1851, VIL, p. 491.
New South Wales.

1588 cylindricollis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1873, IL, p. 340,
Rockhampton ; Queensland.

1589 cylindricus Masters.

suh-cylindricus Westw. Thesaurus. Ent. Oxon., 1874,

p. 76, t. 15, f. 2 (nom. prseocc.)
Australia.

1590 Darlingensis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1873, IL, p. 349.
Darling River ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 639

1591 DENUDATUS Westw. Proc, Linn. Soc, Lond., 1849, II.,

p. .50.
Australia.

1592 DEPREssus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 350.
Tweed Pdver ; N. S. Wales.

1593 ELONGATULUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N". S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 154.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1594 POVEicOLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, II.,

p. 347.
Near Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1595 HiRTUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II.,

p. 349.
Monaro ; N. S. Wales.

1596 HoPEi Westw. Arcan. Ent., II., p. 8, t. 50, f. 5.

S. Australia.

1597 HoAviTTii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 351.
Victoria.

1598 HowiTTENsis Masters.

Howittii Westw. Thesaurus. Ent. Oxon., 1874. p. 75,

t. 15, f. 3 (nom. prseocc.)
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1599 HUMERALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 344.
Wellington and Dabee ; N. S. Wales.

1600 LATiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 352.
Flinders Range ; S. Australia.

1601 Macleayi Don. Ins. Nov. Eoll., t. 3; Westw. Arcan

Ent., II., p. 8, t. 50, f. 4.
N. S. Wales.

640 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1602 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 153.
Gaynclah ; Queensland.

1603 Melbournii Westw. Thesaurus. Ent. Oxon., 1874, p. 77,

t. 15, f. 5.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1604 MONTANUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 343.
Monaro ; N. S. Wales.

1605 NiGRicoRNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc.,N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 343.
Wide Bay ; Queensland.

1606 Odewahnii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 348.
S. Australia.

1607 ovicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 345.
S. Australia.

1608 parallelocerus Westw, Proc. Linn. Soc, Lond., 1850,

II., p. 100 ; Ann. Nat. Hist., 1851, VII., p. 491.
Australia.
1009 PiciPES Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873, II.,
p. 343.
South Country, near Yass ; N. S. Wales.

1610 POLiTus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1873, II.,

p. 352.
Liverpool Plains, N. S. Wales.

1611 PUNCTATissiMUS Westw. Thesaurus. Ent. Oxon., 1874,

p. 75, t. 15, f. 3.
Adelaide ; S. Australia.

1612 PUNCTicoLLis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 347.
Liverpool Plains; IST. S. Wales.

1613 QUADRicoLLis Wcstw. Thesaurus. Ent. Oxon., 1874, p. 75,

t. 15, f. 8.
Adelaide ; S. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 641

1614 Riverine Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.Wales, 1873.

II., p. 342.
Lower Murrumbidgee ; N. S. Wales.

1615 EocKiiAMPTOXENsrs Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.

Wales, 1873, II., p. 350.
Rockhampton ; , Queensland.

1616 scuTELLARis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1873, II., p. 348.
South country; N. S. Wales.

1617 SUBAMPLIATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Walas,

1873, II., p. 344.
Bombala, Monavo District ; N. S. Wales.

1618 suBCYLiNDRicus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N". S. Wales,

1873, II., p. 346.
Bogolong, near Yass ; "N". S. Wales.

1619 SUBSULCATUS Westw. Proc'jLinn. Soc, Lond., 1849,11.,

p. 56.
Australia.

1620 TuRNERi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1873,

II., p. 349.
Lane Cove, near Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

16-21 Waterhousei Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,
1873, IL, p. 341. '
S. Australia.

1622 Westwoodii Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, IL, p. 153.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1623 WiLSONi Westw. Proc Linn. Soc, Lond., 1849, IL, p. 56.

S. Australia.

1624 Wyanamatt^ Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

IL, p. 345.
Camden ; N. S. Wales.

642 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

PHYMATOPTERUS. Westwood.

1025 Macleayi Westw. Trans. Ent. See, Lond., II., p. 95,
t. 10, f. 7.
distinctus Thoms. Mus. Scient,. 1860, II., p. 69.
Australia.
1626 PICEUS Westw. Ent. Mag., V., p. 503; Arcan. Ent., II.,
p. 9, t. 50, f. 3 ; Lacord., Gen. Atl., t. 14, f. 1.
New South Wales.

Family. SCYDM^NID^

SCYDM^NUS. Latreille.

1627 coRTicis King. Trans. Ent. Sec, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.

p. 94.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1628 GULOSUS King. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 94.

Sydney, Parramatta, Camden, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

1629 KiNGi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 155.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1630 NEGLECTUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, 1.,

p. 95.
Parramatta; N. S. Wales.

1631 OPTATUS Sharp. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874, p. 515.

W. Australia.

1632 Parramattensis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1864, I., p. 95, t. 7, f. 5.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

HETEROGNATHUS. Khig.

1633 Armitagei King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales. 1864, I.,

p. 98.
Pennant Hills ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 643

1634 ASSiMiLis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 97.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1635 CARiNATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 07.
Parramatta ; N. S, Wales.

1636 GENICULATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1864,

I , p. 98.

South Creek ; N. S. Wales.

1637 GRACILIS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 97, t. 7, f. 3.
Parramatta, South Creek, Brownlow Hill, &c. ; N. S.
Wales.

163S Macleayi King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,
p. 99.
Illawarra ; N. S. Wales.

1639 PRiNCEPS King. Trans, Ent. Soc, K S, Wales; 1864, I.,

p. 98.
Parramatta, Lane Cove, &c. ; N". S. Wales.

PHAGONOPHANA. King.

1640 KiNGi King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 92, t. 5, f. a, 1-4.
N. S. Wales and Queensland.

SCYDM/ENILLA. King.

1641 PusiLLA King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 93, t. 6, f. b., 1-2.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

PSEPHAROBIirS. King.

1642 ELONGATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 94, t. 6, f. c. 1-2.
Parramatta : "N". S. Wales.

644 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

MEGALADERUS. Stephens.

1643 mcoNSPicuus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

I., p. 96, t. 6, f. 1-3.

Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

Family. SILPHID^.

Sub-Family. SILPHIDES.

NECRODES. Leach.

1644 oscuLANS Vigors. Zool. Journ., 1825, I., p. 537, t. 20, f.^2.

hifasciatus Spin. Dej. Cat., 3 ed., p. 132,
Upper Dawson River ; Queensland.

PTOMAPHILA. Hope.

1645 LACHEYMOSA Schreib. Trans. Linn. Soc, 1802, VI., p. 194,

t. 20, f. 5.
Australia ; (widely distributed.)

1646 PERLATA Kraatz. Deutsche. Ent. Zeit., 1876, p. 356 ;

Sturm, Cat., 1843, p. 87.
N. S. Wales and Queensland.

DIETTA. Sharp.

1647 SPERATA Sharp. Ent. Month. Mag., 1876, XIII., p. 78.

N. W. Australia.

CHOLEVA. Latreille.

1648 AusTRALis Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 343 ;

Mvirray, Mon,, p. 461.
Catops Australis Erichs.
Tasmania.

1649 OBSCURUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871

XL, p. 155.
Cojtops ohscurus Macleay.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 645

Family. TKTCHOPTERYGID^.

ACTINOPTERYX. Matthews.

1650 AusTRALis Matthews. Cist. Ent., 1872, V., p. 93.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

PTILIUM. Gyllenhall.

1651 SiMSONi Mots. Cist. Ent., 1878, II., p. 327.

Tasmania.

Family. SCAPHIDID^.

SCAPHIDIUM. Olivier.

1652 ATRiPENNE Gsstro. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1879, XIV., p. 5G1.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

1653 BIMACULATUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales,

1864, I., p. 119.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

1654 CORONATUM Reitter. Verh. Ver. Briinn, 1880, XVIII.

p. 40.
Australia.

1655 ExoRNATUiM R. Oberthur. Col. Nov., 1883, I., p. 6.

Clarence River ; N. S. Wales.

1656 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 156.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1657 PUNCTiPENNE Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 156.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1658 QUADRiPusTULATUM Oliv. Ent., II., 20, p. 4, t. 1, f . 2 ;

Fab., Syst. El., II., p. 575.
N. S. Wales, Victoria, Tasmania.

646 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

SCAPHISOMA. Leach.

1659 Albertisi Reitter. M T. Miinch. Ent. Ver., 1881, V.,

p. 141.
Australia.

1660 BiFASCiATUM Reittei'. M T. Munch. Ent. Ver., 1881,

v., p. 140.
Australia.

1661 Gestroi Reitter. M T. Miinch. Ent. Ver., 1881, V.,

p. 140.
Australia.
166-2 POLiTUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 156,
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1663 punctipenne Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 156.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

Family. HISTERID^.

Sub-Family. HOLOLEPTIDES.

HOLOLEPTA. PaykuU.

1664 Australis Mars. Men., 1853, p. 146, t. 4, f. 4.

King George's Sound, &c. ; W. Australia.

1665 flagellata Kirby. Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond., XII., p. 395.

Australia.

1666 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871>

XL, p. 157.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1667 Sidnensis Mars. Mon., 1860, p. 587, t. 2, f. 1.

Sydney, &c. ; N. S. Wales.

APOBLETES. Marseul.

1668 errans Mars. Mon., 1860, p. 865, t. 2, nr., 10, £. 11.

Tasmania.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 647

PLATYSOMA. Leach.

1669 Bakewellii Mars. Abeille, 1864, 1., p. 309.

Australia.

1670 BoNvouLoiRi Mars. Mon., 1861, p. 147, t. 3, nr., 11, f. 7.

Australia.

1671 BiFossoPYGUM Mars. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XTII., p. 69.

Australia.

1672 Clarenci^ Mars. Ann, Ent. Belg., 1870, XIII., p. 72.

Clarence Eiver ; N. S. Wales.

1673 COMES Mars. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1879, XIV., p. 261.

Cape York N. Australia.

1674 COMPLETUM Mars. Ann. Ent., Belg., 1870, XIII., p. 71.

Pine Mountains ; Queensland.

1675 CONTIGUUM Mars. Abeille, 1864, I. p. 303.

Australia.

1676 coNTRiTUM Mars. Ann Mus. Genov, 1879, XIY., p. 270.

Australia.

1677 coNVEXiuscuLUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, XL, p. 157.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1678 Dahdah Mars. Mon., 1861, p. 148, t. 3, nr. 11, f. 8.

Australia.

1679 DiscREPANS Mars. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1879, XIV., p. 269.

Australia.

1680 Georgii Mars. Ann. Ent., Belg., 1870, XIII., p. 67.

King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

1681 L^VE Mars. Mon., 1853, p. 263, t. 7, f. 8.

Tasmania.

1682 latisternum Mars. Mon., 1853, p. 262, t, 7., f. 7.

Tasmania.

1683 PLANiCEPS Macleay Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 157.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

648 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1684 RETROSPECTUM Mars. Ann. Mus., Genov., 1879, XIV.,

p. 268.
Australia.

1685 STRANGULATUM Mai's. Ann. Ent., Belg., 1870, XIII., p. 67.

Australia.

1686 STRiATiPECTus Mars. Ann. Ent., Belg., 1870, XIII., p. 67.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1687 SUBDEPRESSUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales,

1870, IL, p. 157.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

Sub-Family. HISTERIDES.
PAROMALUS. Erichsoii.

1688 HONORATUS Mars. Ann Mus. Genov.. 1879, XIV., p. 277.

Australia.

1689 MiLiTARis Mars. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1870, XIIL, p. 98.

Australia.

1690 UMBiLiCATUS Mars. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1870, XIIL, p. 97.

Sydney ; IST. S. Wales.

1691 Victoria Mars. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1870, XIIL, p. 97.

Victoria.

EPIERUS. Erichson.

1692 PARRA Mars. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1870, XIIL, p. 92.

Australia.

CHLAMYDOPSIS, Westwood.

1693 DuBOULAYi Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1869, p. 318.

Champion Bay ; W. Australia.

1694 iNQUiLiNA Lewis. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1885, p. 472.

Australia.

1695 STRiATELLA Westw. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1869, p. 318.

Swan River ; W. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS, 649

TERETRIUS. Erichson.

1696 Melburnius Mars. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1870, XIII., p. 121.

Victoria, and N. S. Wales.

ACRITUS. Le Conte.

1697 HCEDiLLUs Mars. Ann. Ent. Belg., 1870, XIII.. p. 120.

Australia.

TRYPAN^US. Erichson.

1698 SoMERSBTi Mars. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1879, XIV., p. 281.

Cape York ; N. Austi-alia.

TRIBALLUS. Erichson.

1699 KoENiGius Mars. Mon, Abielle, 1864, p. 334.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

SAPRINUS. Erichson.

1700 ATER Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 118.
Port Denison ; Queensland.

1701 AusTRALis Boisd. Voy. Astrol. Col, 1835, p. 148 ; Dej.

Cat., 3 ed., p. 141.
Tasmanicus Mars. Mon., 1855, p. 386, t. 16, f. 27.
Australia.

1702 CYANELLus Mars. Mon., 1855, p. 387, t. 16, f. 28.

Australia.

1703 CYANEUS Fabr. Syst. Ent., I., p, 52 ; Mars. Mon., 1855,

p. 385, t. 16, f. 26, var. spedosus Boisd. Voy. Astrol.
Col., p. 148 ; Dej., Cat., 3 ed., p. 141.
Swan Biver ; W. Australia.

1704 Gayndahensis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 158.
Gayndah. ; Queensland.

1705 IRINUS Mars. Mon., 1862, p. 443, t 12, f. 5^

Australia.

650 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTRRA OP AUSTRALIA,

1706 L^TUS Erichs. Jahrb., 1834, p. 179; Mars., Mon., 1855,

p. 388, t. 16, f. 29; 1862, p. 444, t. 12, f. 6.
cyaneus Payk. Mon., p. 56, t. 5, £. 2.
Tasmania.

1707 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 168.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1708 rupicola Mars. Ann. Ent. Soc, Belg., 1870, XIII., p. 118.

Murray River.

1709 viRiDicupREus Blanch. Voy. Pole. Sud., p. 57, t. 4, £. 10.

Raffles Bay ; N. Australia.

GNATHONCUS. Jacquelin Duval.

1710 iNCisus Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 152.

incisisternus Mars. Men., 1862, p. 497, t. 17, IV., f, 1.
Tasmania.

ABR^US. Leach.

1711 AusTRALis Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 159.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

Family. PHALACRID^.

LITOCHRUS. Erichson.

1712 BRUNNEUS Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 239.

Tasmania.

Family. NITIDULID^.

BRACHYPTERUS. Kugelann.

1713 METALLicus Reitter. Verh. Ver. Briinn,, 1874, p. 509.

Australia.

1714 TESTACEUS Bohem. Res. Eugen., 1858, p, 39.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 651

BRACHYPEPLUS. Erichson.

1715 AURiTUS Murray. Mon., p. 288, t. 34, f, 10.

Sydney; N. S. Wales.

1716 BASALis Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 149.

Tasmania.

1717 BINOTATUS Murray. Mon., p. 290, t. 24, f. 5.

Yictoria.

1718 BLANDUS Murray. Mon., p. 291.

Victoria.

1719 CASTANIPES Murray. Mon., p. 293.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1720 Haagi Reitter. Verb. z-b.. Wien., 1877, XXVIL, p. 165.

Queensland.

1721 Macleayi Murray. Mon., p. 292.

N". S. Wales.

1722 MuRRAYi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

XL, p. 159.

Gayndali ; Queensland.

1723 PLANUS Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 149.

Tasmania.

ID.ETHINA. Reitter.

1724 Deyrollei Reitter. Verh. Ver. Briinn, 1875, XIII., p. 108.

Australia.

MACRURA. Reitter.

1725 brunnescens Reitter. Verh. Ver. Briinn, 1875, XIII.,

p. 110.
Australia.

1726 DENSiTA Reit. Verh. Ver. Brunn, 1875, XIIL, p. 110.

Australia.

1727 NIGRA Reitter. Verh. Ver. Brunn, 1873, XIIL, p. 81.

Australia.

CARPOPHILUS. Stephens.

1728 aterrimus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

IT., p. 161.
Gayndah ; Queensland.
43

652 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1729 AuSTRALis Murray. Men., p. 376.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1730 Bakewelli Murray. Mon. p. 366.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1731 coNVExiuscuLus Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II, p 159.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1732 EXCELLENS Reitter. Verh. Ver. Brunn, 1875, XIII., p. 101.

Australia.

1733 FRivoLus Murray. Mon., p. 392.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1734 GENTiLis Murray. Mon., p. 392.

Victoria.

1735 LURiDiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 160.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1736 OBSCURUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 160.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1737 PiLiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales., 1871,

II., p, 160.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1738 PLANATUS Murray. Mon., p. 353.

Victoria.

NITIDULA. Fabricius.

1739 CONCOLOR Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc,, N. S. Whales, 1871,

II., p. 162.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1740 LATENS Blanch. Voy. Pole. Sud., 1853, IV,, p. 56, t. 4, f. 8.

Australia.

LASIODACTYLUS. Perty.

1741 Albertisi Reitter. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1880, XV., p. 457.

Australia.

1742 MARGINATUS Reitter. Verh. Ver. Briinn., 1873, XII., p. 92.

Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 653

1743 NOTABiLis Olliff. The Entom., 1883, XYL, p. 99.

Cape York ; N. Australia.

STAUROGLOSSICUS. Murray.

1744 TERMiNALis Murray. Mon., p, 399.

Victoria.

CRYPTARCHA. Shukhard.

1745 AusTRALis Reitter. Verb. Ver. Brunn., 1873, XII., p. 148.

Australia.

1746 FLAViPENNis Reittcr. Yerh. Yer. Briinn., 1875, XIII.

p. 121.
Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

1747 FLAVOGUTTATA Reitter, Yerh. Yer. Briinn., 1875, XIII.,

p. 121.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

1748 L^viGATA Reitter. Yerh. Yer. Briinn., 1875, XIII., p. 120.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

1749 NiTiDissiMA Reitter, Yerh. Yer. Briinn., 1873, XII., p. 156,

Australia.

SORONIA. Erichson.

1750 AMPHOTiFORMis Reitter. Yerh. Yer. Brunn, 1880, XYIIL,

p. 1.

Adelaide ; S. Australia.

1751 SUPERBA Reitter. Yerh, Yer. Briinn, 1873, XII., p. 48.

Australia.

1752 VARIEGATA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales., 1871,

II., p. 161.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

THALYCRA. Erichson.

1753 AusTRALis Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 187.

S. Australia.

654 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

PRIA. Stephens.

1754 RUBicuNDA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 161.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

CYCHRAMPTODES. Reitter.

1755 MuRRAYi Reitter. Deutsche, Ent. Zeit., 1878, p. 383.

Adelaide ; S. Australia.

HAPTONCURA. Reitter.

1756 iMPERiALis Reitter. M T. Miincb. ent, Yer., 1877, I.,

p. 128.
Australia.

1757 LiLiPUTANA Reitter. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1880, XV., p. 456.

Australia.

1758 suBQUADRATA Reitter. M T. Miincli. ent. Ver., 1877, I.,

p. 22.
Cape York ; N. Austi-alia.

PROMETOPIA. Erichson.

1759 QUADRiPUNCTATA Reitter. Verh. Yer. Briinn, 1880,

XYJII., p. 127.
Cape York ; N. Aiistralia,

CIRCOPES. Motschulsky.

1760 ADELOPlFORMis Reitter. Ann. Mus., Genov., 1880, XY.,

p. 458.
Australia.

GAULODES. Erichson.

1761 COSTATUS Ericlis. Germ. Zeitschr., lY., p. 316.

Australia.

POCADIUS. Erichson.

1762 PiLiSTRiATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871,11., p. 162.
Gayndat ; Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 655

CYCHRAMUS. Kugelann,

1763 NIGER Macleay. Trans. Eut. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 163.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

IPS Fabricius.

1764 JANTHiNUS Keitter. M T. Miincli., Ent., Ver., 1877, L,

p. 130.

1765 POLiTUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 163.

Gayndah ; Queensland.

AMPHICROSSUS. Erichson.

1766 SIMPLEX Reitter. Ann. Mas. Genov., 1880, XV., p. 458.

Australia.

1767 suBOPACus Reitter. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1880, XV., p. 458.

Australia.

PALLODES. Erichson.

1768 LiMBicoLLis Reitter. Verb. Ver. Briinn., 1880, XVIII.,

p. 4.

Family. TROGOSITID^.

EGOLIA. Erichson.

1769 VARIEGATA Erichs. Wiegm, Arch., 1842, I., p. 151, t. 5, f. 6 ;

I-acord. Gen. Atl.. t. 19, f. 1.
Tasmania.

TROGOSITA. Olivier.

1770 MAURiTANiCA Linne. Syst. Nat., I., 2, p. 674.

Australia. (Introduced.)

LEPERINA. Erichson.

1771 ADUSTA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1860, I. (2), p. 100.

Victoria and South Australia.

656 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1772 BuRNETTENSis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 164.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1773 ciRROSA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1860, 1. (2), p. 100.

Southern parts of Queensland.

1774 DECORATA Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842,1., p. 150; Lacord.

Gen. Atl., t. 19, f. 5.
Tasmania and Victoria.

1775 FAScicuLATA Redtenb. Reis. Novai-., 1867, II., p. 37, t. 2,

f. 3.
Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1776 Gayndahensis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 164.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1777 LACERA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1860, T., p. 101.

Victoria.

1778 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 163.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1779 OPATROiDES Leveille. Ann. Mus., Genov., 1884, Lve. (2),

p. 637.
Australia.

1780 TURBATA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p. 29.

New South Wales.

NEASPIS. Pcascoe.

1781 scuLPTURATA Reitter. Deutsche. Ent. Zeit, 1876, IV.

p. 74.
Melbourne ; Victoria.

1782 SUBTRIFASCIATA Reitter. Deutsche. Ent. Zeit., 1876, IV.,

p. 73.
Australia.

1783 viLLOSA Pascoe. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1872 (4), X., p. 318

Australia.

PELTIS. Geoffroy.

1784 MONILIATA Pascoe. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1872 (4), X., p. 318.

Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 657

ANCYRONA. Reitter.

1785 Gestroi Reitter, Ann. Mus., Gen., 1880, XV., p. 459.

Australia.

PELTONYZA. Reitter.

1786 Deyrollei Reitter. Deutsche. Ent. Zeit., 1876, IV., p. 72.

Australia.

Family. COLYDID^.

SPAR ACTUS. ErJchson.

1787 interruptus Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 215.

Tasmania.

DITOMA. Herbst.

1788 cosTATA Macleaj. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 165.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1789 SERRicoLLis Pascoe. Jour, of Ent., 1860, I., 2, p. 101.

Australia.

MERYX. LatreiUe.

1790 AREOLATA Pascoe. Jour, of Ent., 1860, I., p. 92, t. 7, f. 4.

Tasmania.

1791 ILLOTA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1860, I., p. 99, et., 302.

Australia.
171)2 RTJGOSA Latrl. Gen. Crust., III., p. 17; IV., t. 11, f. 1.
• Tasmania, Victoria and N. S. Wales.

HOLOPLEURIDIA. Reitter.

1793 iMPERiALis Reitter. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1877, XXXVIII.,

p. 325.
Cape York ; N. Australia.

CEBIA. Reitter.

1794 SGABROSA Reitter. Stett., Ent. Zeit., 1877, XXXVIII.

p. 329.
Cape York ; N. Australia.

658 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

ILLESTUS. Reitter.

IZi'o Grouvellii Reitter. M. T. Miinch. Ent. Ver., 1877, I.,
p. 133.
Australia.

1796 PRODUCTUS Reitter. M T. Munch. Ent. Ver., 1877, 1., p. 134.

Australia,

1797 REPANDUS Reitter. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1877, XXXVIII.,

p. 329.
Cape York ; N. Australia.

DERETAPHRUS. Newman.

1798 Bakewellii Paseoe. Jour, of Ent, 1862, I., p. 463.

K S. Wales.

1799 coLYDioiDES Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 463.

N. S. Wales.

1800 Erichsoni Newm. Zoologist., 1855, App., p. 211.

S. Austi-alia and Victoria.

1801 Fossus Newm. The Entomol., 1842, p. 403.

Australia.

1802 GRANULiPENNis Reitter. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1877, XXXVIIL,

p. 342.
N. S. Wales.

1803 iGNARius Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 462.

N. S. Wales.

1804 Pascoei Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, IT.,

p. 165.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1805 PICEUS Germ. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 223; Lacord. Gen.

Atl., t. 20, f. 3.
S. Australia.

1806 PUTEUS Newm. The Entomol., 1842, p. i04.

Australia.

1807 viDUATus Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 404.

S. Australia.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 659

1808 WoLLASTONi Newm. Zoologist., 1855, App., p. 210.

Moreton Bay ; Queensland.

BOTHRIDERES. Ericlison.

1809 ANAGLYPTicus Geim. Linn. Ent., 1848, III., p. 223.

S. Australia.
181(1 EQUiNUS Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 464.
Melltourne ; Victoria.

1811 ILLUSUS Newm. The Entomol., 1842, p. 404.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1812 Kreppti Macleay Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 166.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1813 LOBATUS Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 466.

Sydney ; N. S. Wales.

1814 Masters! Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 161.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1815 MERUS Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p, 466.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1816 Musivus Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 465.

Victoria.

1817 Pascoe I Macleay. Trans. Eat. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 166.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1818 rectangularis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1864, I., p. 119.
Port Denison : Queensland.

1819 servus Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 466.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1820 stjturalis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, M. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 167.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1821 t^niatus Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, 1., p. 465.

Victoria.

660 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1822 VERSUTUS Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 467.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1823 viTTATUs JSIewm. The EntomoL, 1842, p. 404.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

PATHODERMUS. Fairmaire.

1824 RUFOSQUAMOSUS Fairm. Ann. Soc. Ent, Fr., 1881 (6), I.,

p. 81.
Queensland.

DASTARCUS. Reitter.

1825 DECORUS Reitter. Stett. Ent. Zeit., 1877., XXXVIII.,

p. 349.
Cape York ; N. Australia.

NEPHARIS. Castelnau.

1826 ALATA Casteln. Rev. et Mag. de Zoologie., September, 1869,

p. 356, t. 18, f. 4-5.
Hiketes thoracicus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

November 1869, II., p. 78.
King George's Sound ; W. Australia.

1827 COSTATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869. II.

p. 77.
Liverpool ; N. S. Wales.

PENTHELISPA. Pascoe.

1828 FULiGiNOSA Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I„ p. 215, t. 5,

f. 4.
Tasmania.

1829 OBSCURA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 468.

Melbourne ; Victoria.

1830 SECUTA Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I, p. 467.

Melbourne : Victoria.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 661

Family. KHYSODID^.

RHYSODES. Dalmaii.

1831 LiGNARius Olliff, Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 188.5 (3),

X., p. 471.
Lambing Flat ; N. S. Wales.

Family. CUCUJID^.

Sub-Family. PASSANDRIDES.

PASSANDRA. Dalman.

1832 Deyrollei Gvouvelle. Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr„ 1885 (6), Y.

p. XXXI.
Australia.

1833 MARGiNATA Grouv. Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1877 (5), VIL,

p. CLIX. ; Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1878 (5), VIIL, p. 261,
t. 8, £. 2.
Australia.

HECTARTHRUM. Newman.

1834 BREViPOSSUM Newm. Ann. Nat. Hist., 1839, II., p. 392.

cylindricum, (var.) Smith. Col. Ins. Brit. Mus., 1851,

p. 21.
australicum, (var.) Waterli. Ent. Month. Mag., 1876,

XIII., p. 119.
Australia, (widely distributed.)

ANCISTRIA. Erichson.

1835 RETUSA Fab. Syst. El., II., p. 555.

Prionophora cylindrica Westw. Cab. Orient. Ent., }>. 85,

t. 41, f. 6.
Wide Bay, Cape York, &c. ; Queensland. Tasmania.

PROSTOMIS. Latreille.

1836 Atkinsoni Waterh. Ent. Month. Mag., 1877, XIY, p. 26.

Alps of Yictoria and Tasmania.

662 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1837 CORNUTUS Waterh. Ent. Month. Mag., 1877, XIV., p. 26.

South Australia and Tasmania.

BESSAPHILUS. Waterhouse.

1838 CEPHALOTES Waterh. Ent. Month. JNlag. 1877, XIV., p. 27.

Tasmania.

Sub-Family. CUCUJIDES.

CUCUJUS. Fabriciiis.

1839 coLONiARius Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885

(2), X., p. 207.
Illawarra ; N". S. Wales.

IPSAPHES. Pascoe.

1840 BicoLOR Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885 (2),

X., p. 209.
New South Wales and Victoria.

1841 MCEROSus Pascoe, Journ. of Ent., 1863, II., p, 40, t. 3, f. 9.

New South Wales and Tasmania.

PLATISUS. Erichsou.

1842 ANGUSTicoLLis Reitter. Verh. z-b. Wien, 1878, XXVIIL,

p. 189.
Platisus ohscurus Lacord. Gen. Col., 1854, II., p. 403,

t. 21, f. 1.
Australia and Tasmania.

1843 iNTEGRicoLLis Reitter. Verh. z-b. Wien, 1878, XXVIIL,

p. 188.
Australia.

1844 OBSCURUS Erich. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, L, p. 216.

New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania.

L^MOPHL/EUS. Castehiau.

1845 AMABiLis Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885 (2),

X., p. 211.
New South Wales and Queensland.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 663

4

1846 ARTiCEPS Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885 (2),

X., p. 213.
New South Wales and Queensland.

1847 BISTRIATUS Grouvelle. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1878 (5), YIIL,

p. 72, t. 2, f. 8.
New South Wales and Tasmania.

1848 CONTAMINATUS Grouvelle. Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr„ 1877 (5),

YII., p. 219; Ann Soc. Ent. Fr., 1878 (5), VIII,
p. 265, t. 8, f. 7.
Wide Bay ; Queensland.

1849 CONTERMINUS Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885

(2), X., p. 214.
Wide Bay ; Queensland. Kiama ; N. S: Wales.

1850 INSIGNIS Grouvelle. Ann. Mus., Genov., 1883, XVIIL,

p. 279, t. 7, f. 5.
Cape York ; N. Australia.

1851 Leachii Grouvelle. Ann. Soc Ent. Fr., 1876 (5), VI.,

p. 499, t. 9, f. 18.
New South Wales,

1852 LEPiDUS Grouvelle. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1883, XVIII.,

p. 280, t, 7, f. 6.
Cape York ; N. Australia.

1853 Macleayi Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885 (2),

X., p. 216.
Placonotus longicornis Macleay. Trans, Ent. Soc, N. S.

Wales, 1871, II., p. 168.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1854 PARVULUS Grouvelle. Ann. Mus. Genov., 1883, XVIIL,

p. 289, t. 7, f. 15=
Northern Queensland.

1855 Ramsayi Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885 (2),

X., p. 212.

Wide Bay ; Queensland.

1856 RiGiDus Olliff. Proc Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885 (2),

X., p. 216.
Kins; George's Sound : W. Australia.

664 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1857 Tasmanicus Grouvelle. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1876 (5), VI.,

p. 498, t. 9, f. 17.
Tasmania.

1858 TESTACEUS Fab. Mant. Ins., 1787, I., p. 166.

cucujus testaceus Fab.

Lfemophlceus testaceus Sturm. Ins., XXI., p. 46, t. 383, f. A

Lo'moiMceus Zimmermanni Le Conte. Proc. Ac. Phil.,

1854, p. 75.
N. S. Wales, and Tasmania.

1859 TUBERCULATUS Grouvelle. Bull. Soc. Ent., Fr. 1877, (5),

VII., p. L ; Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1878, (5), VIII., p. 71,
t. 2, f. 6.
Australia.

Sub-Family. BRONTIDES.
DENDROPHAGUS. Schonherr.

1860 AusTRALis Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 217.

Australia and Tasmania. (Widely distributed.)

BRONTES, Fabricius.

1861 AusTRALis Erichs. Weigm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 217.

Tasmania.

1862 DENTicuLATUS Smith. Col. Ins. Brit. Mus., 1851. I., p. 14.

Australia.

1863 LUCIUS Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I. p. 321.

? nigricans Pascoe. Journ. of Ent., 1862, I., p. 321.
Queensland, N. S Wales, Victoria.

1864 Macleayi Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1885, (2^,

X., p. 218.
Port Darwin ; N. Australia. Piichmond River ; N. S.
Wales.

1865 MiLiTARis Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 217.

N. S. Wales, Victoria, Queensland, Tasmania.

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 665

Sub-Family. HEMIPEPLIDES.

INOPEPLUS. Smith.

1866 DIMIDIATUS Waterh. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1875, p. 191.

N. S. Wales and Queensland,

1867 TREPiDUS Pascoe. Journ. of Ent, 1862, I., p. 322.

Cape York ; N. Australia,

Sub-Family. TELEPHANIDES.
CRYPTAMORPHA. WoUaston.

1868 Desjardinsii Guer. Rfegn. Anim., 1829, V., p. 196.

Fsamrmecios Desjardinsii Gruer,
Australia. (Widely distributed).

1869 OPTATA Olliff. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885 (2),

X., p. 221.
Tasmania.

1870 TRiGUTTATA Waterh. Ent. Month. Mag., 1876, XIII.,

p. 123.
South Australia and Tasmania.

Sub-Family. SILVANIDES.

SILVANUS. Latreille.

1871 ATRATULUS Grouvelle. Bull. Soc, Ent. Fr. 1877 (5), VII.,

p. CLIX. ; Ann. Soc Ent. Fr., 1878 (5), VIII., p. 266,
t. 8, f. 9.
Australia.

1872 BREVicoRNis Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 218.

Tasmania.

1873 CASTANEUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 168.
Gayndah ; Queensland ; N". S. Wales.

1874 CONGENER Olliff. Proc Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1885 (2),

X., p. 223.
South Australia.

666 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OP AUSTRALIA,

1875 SuRiNAMENsis (Dermestes). Linn. Syst. Nat., 1767, I.,

pt. 2, p. 565; Stephens, 111. Brit. Ent., 1830, III.,
p. 104.
Australia (Introduced.)

MYRABOLIA. Reitter.

1876 Haroldiana Eeitter. Col. Hefte., 1876, XV., p. 56.

Australia.

1877 Grouvelliana Reitter. Verb. z-b. Wien.. 1877, XXVIL,

p. i79.
Tasmania.

NAUSIBIUS, Redtenbacher.

1878 DENTATUS (Silvanus) Marsham. Ent. Brit., p. 108.

Nausihius dentatus Jacq. Duv. Gen. Col., II., pi. 50, f. 250.
Australia. (Introduced.)

Family. CRYPTOPHAGID^.

CNECOSA. Pascoe.

1879 FULViDA Pasc. Journ. of Ent., 1865, II., p. 466, t. 18, f. 2.

Sydney ; N. S. "Wales.

Family. T.ATRIDID^.

LATRIDIUS. Herbst.

1880 cosTATUsEricbs. Wiegm. Arcb., 1842, L, p. 242.

Tasmania.

CORTICARIA. Marsbam.

1881 POLiTA Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II,

p. 169.
Gayndab ; Queensland.

1882 suBTiLissiMA Eeitter. M T. Miinch. Ent. Ver., 1877, I.,

p. 139.
Australia,

BY GEORGE MASTERS.

66-

CONINOMUS. Reitter.

1883 BiFAsciATUS Reitter. M T. Miincli. Ent. Ver., 1877, I.,

p. 138.
Australia.

Family. MYCETOPHA GID^.

TRYPHYLLUS, Latreille.

1884 FASCiATUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 170.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

DIPLOCCELUS. Gu^rin.

1885 ovATtTS Macleay Trans, Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 170.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1886 PiLiGER Reitter. Verh. Ver. Brunn, 1880, XVIIL, p. 6.

Australia.

Family. DERMESTID^.

DERMESTES. Linn^.
18S7 CADAVERiNus Fabr. Syst. Ent., p. 55 ; Oliv. Ent., II. (9),
p. 7, t. 2, f. 9, a-b.
Australia. (Introduced.)

1888 FELiNUS Fabr. Mant., I. p. 34.

ater Be Geer. Ins., IV., p. 223, t. 18, f. 7.
piceus Thunb. Nov. Ins. Spec, I., p. 8.
Australia.

1889 LARDARius Linn^. Faun. Suec, p. 140 ; Curtis, Brit. Ent.,

XV., t. 682 ; Erichs., Nat. Ins., III., p. 346 ; Sturm.,
Ins., 1847, p. 65, t. 349.
Australia and Tasmania. (Introduced.)
44

668 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1890 MURiNus Linne. Faun. Suec, p. 144; Ericbs. Nat. Ins.,

Ill, p. 429.
Queensland. (Introduced.)

1891 VULPINUS Fabr. Ins., I., p. 64; Erichs., Nat. Ins., III.,

p. 426.
Australia. (Introduced.)

MEGATOMA. Herbst.

1892 APicALis Macleay. Trans. Ent. See, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 170.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1893 MORio Ericbs. Wiegm. Arcb., 1842, I., p. 152.

Tasmania.

1894, TENuiFASCiATA Reitter. Verb. Ver, Briinn, 1881, XIX.,
p. 36.
Tasmania.

CRYPTORRHOPALUM. Gu.5rin.

1895 CONFERTUM Reitter. Verb. Ver. Brunn., 1881, XIX., p. 56.

S. Australia.

1896 Erichsoni Reitter. Verb. Ver. Bninn, 1881, XIX., p. 56.

Tasmania and Victoria.

1897 OBSCURUM Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 171.
Gayndab ; Queensland.

1898 VARIABILE Reitter. Verb. Ver. Briinn., 1881, XIX., p. 56.

Soutb Australia,

THAUMAGLOSSA.

1899 CONCAVIFRONS Reitter. Verb. Ver. Brunn., 1881, XIX.,

p. 43.
Tasmania,

BY GEORGE MASTERS. bb5*

TROGODERMA. Latreille.

1900 APiciPENNE Reitter. Deutsche. Ent. Zeit., 1881, XXV.,

p. 232.
Australia.

1901 RiGUUM Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I, p. 152.

Tasmania.

ANTHRENUS. Geofiroy.

1902 AusTRALis Hope. Trans. Ent. Soc, Loncl, 1845, lY.,

p. 105.
South Australia.

1903 MUSEORUM Linne. Faun. Suec, p. 145; Erichs. Nat. Ins.,

Ill, p. 457.
Australia. (Introduced. )

1904 NIGRICANS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 171.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

TRINODES. Latreille.

1905 GLOBOSUS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 171.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1906 PUNCTiPENNis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 171.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

Family. BYERHID^.

MICROCH^TES. Hope.

1907 AusTRALis Boisd, Voy. Astrol. Col., p. 149 ; Dej. Cat.,

3 ed., p. 145.
Australia.

670 CATALOGUE OF THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA,

1908 COSTATUS Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 172.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1909 FAScicuLARis Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1871, II., p. 171.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

1910 MINOR King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869, II.,

p. 73.
Sydney, Parramatta, &c ; N. S. Wales

1911 SCOPARIUS Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 153.

Australia and Tasmania, (Widely distributed).

1912 sPH^Ricus Hope. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1834, I., p. 13,

t. 1, f. 2.
Swan River ; W. Australia.

PEDILOPHORUS. Steffahny.

1913 HETEROMERUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1869,

II., p. 74.
Gawler; S. Australia.

BIZENIA. Kmg.

1914 FORMicicoLA King. Trans. Ent. Soc,' IST. S, Wales, 1869,

II., p. 74.
Liverpool ; N. S. Wales.

LIMNICHUS. LatreiUe.

1915 AusTRALis Erichs. Wiegm. Arch., 1842, I., p. 153.

Tasmania.

1916 FRONTALIS Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 172.
Gayndah ; Queensland,

BY GEORGE MASTERS. 671

Family. GEOHYSSID^.

GEORYSSUS. Latreille.

1917 AusTRALis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1864, I,

p, 158, t. 14.
Parramatta ; N. S. Wales.

1918 KiNGi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1871, II.,

p. 172.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

Family. PARNID^.

LUTROCHUS. Erichson.

1919 AusTRALis King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 159, t. 14.
Parramatta Piver ; N, S. Wales.

ELMIS. Latreille,

1920 METALLicus King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 160.
Murray Piver.

1921 MONTANUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S.' Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 160.
lllawarra ; N. S. Wales.

1922 NOVEMNOTATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, K S. Wales, 1864,

I., p, 159.
Parramatta Piver ; N. S. Wales.

1923 POLiTUS King. Trans. Eut. Soc, N, S. Wales, 1864, I.,

p. 160.
Parramatta River ; N. S. Wales.

1924 PUNCTULATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1864,

I., p. 161.
Parramatta River ; N. S. Wales.

672 CATALOGUE OP THE DESCRIBED COLEOPTERA OF AUSTRALIA.

LIMNIUS. Muller.

1925 QUATUORMACULATUS King. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,

1864, I., p. 161.
Pavramatta River ; N. S. Wales.

Family. HETEROCERIDJE.

HETEROCERUS. Fabricius.

1926 Australasia Waterh. Trans. Ent. See, Lond., 1874,

p. 536.
W. Australia.

1927 Mastersi Macleay. Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, 1871,

II., p. 173.
Gayndah ; Queensland.

ELYTHOMERUS. C. 0. Waterhouse.

1928 ELONGATULUS Wateih. Trans. Ent. Soc, Lond., 1874,

p. 535.
Queensland.

PLAGIOSTOiMATA OF THE PACIFIC.

Part III.

By N. de Miklouho-Maclay and William Macleay., F.L.S., &c.

Plates XLV. and XLYI.

1. Heterodontus zebra. Grey.

PI. XLV.

Cestracion Zebra Grey. Zool. Misc., p. 5.

Heterodontus zebra Grey. Chondropt., p. 61 ; Bleek, Verb.
Bat., Gen. 26 ; Act. Soc. Sc, Neerl., I. Amboyna, p. 71.

This .species has been for many years considered as simply a
.synonym or variety of Heterodontus Phillipjyi, and as such it has
been recorded in Gunther's Catalogue of Fishes. We, however,
in our first paper on the " Plagiostomata of the Pacific," gave it as
our opinion (1) that the Indian and Japanese Cestracions would
prove on examination to be a distinct or possibly two distinct
species. Some years after that paper was written we published
Part II. of the *' Plagiostomata of the Pacific," (2) in which we
gave a detailed description and figure of a Heterodontus, which the
Australian Museum had received from Japan.

We recognised that specimen as the fish figured under the name
of Cestracion Fhillipjn in Perry's United States Expedition to
Japan, and we thought it not unlikely that it might be the C.
zebra of Grey. In the absence, however, of any proof of its
identity with that species, and finding it to be undoubtedly
distinct from Fhillippi, we gave it the name of Ja2wnicus.

We have now to record the existence of another species of
Heterodontus which is undoubtedly the C. zebra of Grey. It is an
inhabitant of the China Sea ; was captured at Swatow, and was

(1) Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. Wales, Vol. III., p. 313.

(2) Proc, Linn. Soc, N. S, Wales, Vol. VIII. , p. 426.

674 PLAGIOSTOMATA OF THE PACIFIC,

procured by Mr. Ramsay from the Chinese Court at the Inter-
national Fisheries Exhibition in London, in the year 1884. The
specimen is a young female, and has the characteristic specific
marking, as is the case with the young of all the species, very
distinct.

The head difiers but slightly from that of H. japonicus. The
teeth could not be very satisfactorily examined without a lateral
incision through the cheek, which, as the specimen is unique, could
not be permitted, but the anterior teeth and a portion of the lateral
pavement-like teeth were quite visibly through the orifice of the
mouth.

The front teeth are each armed with 5 cusps; the three middle
cusps are the largest, but the exterior ones, though small and
obtuse, are quite distinct (fig. 4. j The centre rows of these front
teeth have the central cusp large and perpendicular, while in the
lateral rows, it is, in proportion to the other cusps, smaller and
recumbent. (Fig. 5.)

In the extreme lateral row on each side of these front teeth the
united cusps take the form of a longitudinal crest. The lateral
pavement-like teeth are narrow, and show a median longitudinal
line," In the upper jaw the cuspid teeth are in 15 rows, the lateral
in four ; in the lower jaw, 11 of the one and 4 of the other.

Nasal flap long. The upper labial fold covering partly the
lower fold, turns round the corner of the mouth, and enclosing the
lower labial fold, forms a second lower fold, of which only a margin
is visible. This peculiarity is seen where the upper fold is turned
up as in fig. 7. These folds are thin skinned and with thinly
scattered tentacles.

The dorsal fins are very falcate, the first about double the size of
the second; the spines are large, acutely pointed, and sword-shaped,
the sides being very flat and compressed and prominently
ridged on the dorsal edge ; the anal fin is small and falcate ;
the caudal is longer and more falcate than in H. japonicus.
The colour is a pale brownish-yellow, with numerous bars of dark
brown disposed in alternate broad and narrow bands from the snout
to the extremity of the tail, in all over twenty in number, that on

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY AND WILLIAM MACLEAY. 675

the snout triangular, the next forming, over the eyes, two broad
bars separated by a narrow belt of ground colour, two others of the
same kind on the nape, then one rather narrower, a double one
again at the dorsal spine, extending on the pectoral fin, and so on,
broad double and single bands alternating to the middle of the tail ;
these bands in no case extend across the belly.

2. Myliobatis punctatus. N. sp.
PI. XLVI. Figs. 1-6.

More than one specimen of this remarkable Ray was captured
by one of the authors of this paper (N". de Miklouho-Maclay) during
a visit to the Admiralty and Lub, or Hermit Islands, in the year
1879. To preserve a specimen of this fish was under the circum-
stances impossible, but drawings and copious notes were made on
the spot. A jaw was prepared, which however, was afterwards
unfortunately lost.

The most remarkable feature in this fish, is undoubtedly the
prolongation of the cephalic fins into a triangular pointed depressed
snout, as represented in fig. 4. The following measurements were
taken from a male adult specimen.
From the tip of the snout to the extremity of the

ventral fin ... ... ... ... ... ... 1130 mm.

Length of tail from dorsal fin ... ... ... ... 640 „

Diameter of the disk ... ... ... ... ... 1430 ,,

Longitudinal diameter of the Spiracle .. . ... ■ ... 50 „

Length of longer spine .. . ... ... -,. ... 140 ,,

„ shorter „ ... ... ... ... ... 82 „

The colour of the upper surface is greenish-grey with white spots
of different sizes, irregularly distributed, the under surfaces dirty
white, getting darker on the pectoral fins. The snout is long and
triangularly pointed. The eyes small with a vertical oval pupil.
Spiracles very large. Two barbed spines on the tail, one side of
the longer one is flatter than the other, which is marked with
longitudinal furrows and ridges ; the shorter spine is rounder, both
are barbed alike. (Figs. 5, 5' and 6.)

The nostrils are in a horizontal line with the eyes.

676 PLAGIOSTOMATA OF THE PACIFIC,

Two curtain-like flaps overlap the lateral labial folds, which are
distinct when the mouth is open ; the lower border of the labial
flaps is slightly notched. The teeth-plates of the upper jaw are
nearly twice as wide as the lower. (48 mm. the upper, 27 mm. the
lower.) These plates consist of many longitudinal rows of teeth,
of which the middle ones are largest.

On the back of the mouth there are rows of papillae on the
palate, seven in the first row and four in the second ; there are
similar but smaller papillae on the sides of the teeth of the
lower jaw. (Fig- 4.)

The gill openings are of uniform size, but the distance between
the two anterior is nearly double that between the posterior. The
claspers are relatively small and cylindrical.

3. DiSCOBATIS MARGINIPINNIS.

This Ray was taken at Sorry or Wild Island, one of a group of
islands surrounding the Nares Harboui", on the north-west coast of
the large Admiralty Islands, during the same expedition as that in
which the Myliohatia just described was taken, and like it, no
specimen has been preserved. However, from drawings made on
the spot, a tolerably accurate diagnosis can be made out. It is
evidently of the family Trygonidcti, and belongs to that section of
them, which is without a spine on the tail, but it difiers so much
from the known genera of that section as to necessitate placing it
in a new genus with the following characters.
DiscoBATis. Nov. gen.

Tail shorter than the disk, cylindrical, without fin or spine,
thick at the base and tapering to the apex. Disc circular. Body
quite smooth, ventral fins without notch. Teeth small and closely
impacted as in the Trygonidse generally.

DiSCOBATIS MARGINIPINNIS. JST. Sp.

PI. XLYI. Fig. 7-15.
Upper surface, light brown with blue spots, irregularly
distributed. Large spiracles (Fig. 9). Iris yellow, flap of the
same yellow also, but with a dark margin. Under surface white,

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY AND WILLIAM MACLEAY. 677

with a yellow margin, which, however, does not run all round the
disc, but leaves the upper part of the same free. (1) The gill
openings of equal size.

Tail, thick and stiff, with a medium blue line on the upper side,
and two lateral ones on the sides, half as long as the body.

Dimensions of a (J : —

From the upper margin of the disc to the end of tail... 541 mm.
„ „ „ „ to the lower border

of the disc ... 335 mm,

Dentition.— Th.Q teeth of D. marginipiymis are, at the first glance
of nearly the same shape and size in both jaws ; they are closely
ini|)acted. and present, as in other Trygonidoe, a kind of mosaic
pavement " symmetrically arranged." (Fig. 13.) Inspected more
closely, the teeth of each jaw consist of three portions — a
median and two lateral ones, which are more distinct in the lower
jaw, being divided from each other by a vertical row of teeth with
longer and more pointed cusps. (These two rows seem to be
characteristic of the species.)

The number of rows of teeth and of teeth in each row, is nearly
the same in each jaw. (There are about 32 or 33 transversal rows
in each jaw, and from 10-13 teeth in the median vertical rows,
wliilst in the rows of the lateral portions from 6-8 only.) These
numbers being of course dependent upon the age, and very likely,
upon the sex of the specimen can not be regarded as characters
of the species.

Each tooth has a rhomboidal base supporting a more or less
distinct median cusp directed backwards. (Fig. 14.)

The cusps of the teeth of the lower jaw are more obtuse than in
the upper, with the exception of the already mentioned two
vertical rows which show the largest teeth of the lot with the
longest cusps. (Fig. 15.)

Habitat : Pacific Ocean, near the Admiralty Islands. Native
names — Bai at Sorry and La at Andra (another Island on the
north-coast of the large Admiralty Islands but further east.)

(1) Examination of Fig. 10 will give a better idea of the shape of the
mouth and nostrils than descriptions.

678 PLAGIOSTOMATA OP THE PACIFIC

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XLV. and XLVI.

Lettering followed tJiroughout all the figures on both Platen : —
a. — Superior oral fold.
a'. — Continuation of the superior oral fold, enclosing the lower oral

fold and forming a second inferior oral fold.
h. — Inferior oral fold,
y.— Internal nasal flap.
n. — External orifice of the nasal groove.
Sp. — Jjpiracle.

Plate XLV.
Hetcrodontus zebra. Grey.

Fig. 1. — Young 9 from above. (From a photo.) A little more than twice

the natural size.
Fig. 2. — The same from the side.

Fig. 3. — Ventral aspect of the anterior part of the head of the same.
Fig. 4. — One of the anterior 5-cusped teeth. (About four times the

natural size.)
Fig. 5. — One of the lateral cuspidated teeth. (About four times the

natural size. )
Fig. 6. — Lateral view of the anterior part of the head. (About twice the

natural size.)
Fig. 7. — The same view, but with the internal nasal flap ffj lifted up.
Fig. 8.— Outline of the upper portion of the head from the front, to show

the supra-orbital ridges.

Plate XLVI.

Fig. 1-6. — Miliobatin punctatus. Mel.

Fig. 1. — The same from above.

Fig. 2. — Ventral aspect of the same.

Fig. 3. — Lateral view of the head.

Fig. 4. — Ventral view of the head, to show the general shape of the snout

and of the mouth, and the papillae on the palate and the sides of

the mouth, half natural size.
Fip:. 5. — The larger of the' two barbed spines. (Natural size.)
Fig. 5'. — A portion of the same twice enlarged, to snow the shape of the

lateral l>arbs.
Fig. 6. — The smaller of the two barbed spines. (Natural size.)
Fig. 7-15. — Discobatis marginipinnis. Mel.
Pig. 7. — The same from above.
Fig. 8. — Ventral view of the same.
Fig. 9 — The eye and spiracle from the side.
Fig. 10.— Mouth and nostrils. The skin below tlie mouth appears tuber-

culated.
Fig. 11. — The same as Fig. 10, 1)ut the nasal iiap on one side is uplifted, to

show the mouth and its communication with the nasal cavity.
Fig. 12. — View of the mouth from the inside, to show the notched pal5.tal

fold.
Fig. 13. — Teeth of the upper and lower jaw. Slightly enlarged.
Fig. 14. —Front teeth, enlarged about four times.
Fig. 15. — Teeth of the lower jaw with longer and more pointed cusps.

IV. ADDENDUM TO THE AUSTRALIAN '
HYDROMEDUS^.

HYDRA HEXACTINELLA. Nova Species.

Plate XLVITI., Fig. 1-4.

By R. von Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

In my paper, Monograph of the Australian Hydromedusse,
Part III. (Vol. IX., page 345 of these Proceedings), I mentioned
three species as the Australian representatives of the genus Hydra.
I found afterwards that the specimens described as distinct, under
the names of Hydra oligactis and Hydra fusca respectively, are
identical, and I place these in my amended catalogue (Zeitschrift
fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, Band XLT., Seite 627) in the first
species Hydra oligactis, Pallas, The reasons for this are given in
the first Addendum to the Australian Hydromedusse (Vol. IX.,
page 908, of these Proceedings.)

In Australasia we accordingly find the genus Hydra I'epresented
by two species : —

1. Hydra oligactis, Pallas, Victoria,

2. Hydra viridis, Linne, New Zealand.

To these two, a third species from New South Wales must now
be added, which brings the total number of Australian species
belonging to this order, up to 255,

HYDRA HEXACTINELLA. Nova Species.

This species can be distinguished ^rom all other Hydras by the

constancy in the number of arms, which is invariably six. These

tentacles are all equal in length and thickness, and the angles

between them are perfectly equal, measuring 60°. Such a

680 ADDENDUM TO THE AUSTRALIAN HYDROMEDUSiE,

regularity has been observed in no other species. It appears that
in this respect our Hydra is more highly developed than the
■ others as the number of antimeres has been defined. The specific
name is derived from this chai-acteristic.

The body is perfectly cylindrical, and extends under circum-
stances to a length of 15 mm., whereby it becomes about 0-1 mm.
thick. "When contracted it measures 1 x 0-5 mm. In the extended
state the body curves in a very graceful manner. The surface of
attachment is 0*4 mm. in diameter. The whole of the body is
colourless. Only the entodermal cells lining the narrow gastral
cavity have a slight yellowish tinge, visible only in transmitted
light.

The arms when fully extended attain a length of 5 mm,, and a
thickness of 0-02 mm. They are usually curved backward in a
very graceful manner as shown on the plate.

Histology.

On the arms there are two kinds of cnidoblasts (fig. 2) with
different cnidocells. In this respect our species is very similar to
those Hydras which were examined by Jickeli, to whose figure
(Morphologisches Jahrbuch, Band VIII., Tafel XVII., 12), I
refer the reader.

Elements like those described by Jickeli (I.e.) as ganglia cells
have been seen by me in the ectoderm of the tentacles of Hydra
hexactinella. They appeared more clearly visible after staining
with Beale's calamine than with haematoxylin, (Osmic acid in both
cases.) I have not been able to distinguish a nucleus in these
structures, the ganglionic nature of which appears to me a little
doubtful. I find (fig. 2 g) that these cells cause by their presence
the formation of a protuberance of ii-regular outline, being as they
are, interposed between the thin covering ectoderm and the
iinyielding supporting lamella below. I think it not quite
impossible that these large highly colourable bodies are the nuclei
of sensitive cells similar to the palpocils of Sarsia-polyps.

I have not observed these structures in the fresh state. They
can only be studied with advantage in osmic acid specimens.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 681

Seen from the surface these problematic ganglia cells generally
appear circular (fig 4), but sometimes, although rarely, processes
are found (fig. 3), apparently radiating from them. These would
support the hypothesis put forth by Jickeli, that the structures in
question are ganglia cells.

Should we however, assume these structui"es to be only nuclei,
then we must consider the veiy minute bodies in them as nucleoli.

This species has been discovered in a pool at Moore Park where
it grows in abundance, by Mr. Whitelegge, who has kindly preserved
specimens for me for description.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL VIII.

Fig. l.~ Hydra hexactinella. R. v. L.

3:1 magnified.
Fig. 2, -Optical longitudinal section tlirough portion of a tentacle of
Hydra hexactinella, osmic acid, Beale's carmine.

magnified 250:1.

(g) ganglia (?) cell.
Fig. 3 and 4.— Ganglia (?) cells seen from the surface. Osmic acid, Beale's
carmine

magnified 400:1.
Fig. 3.— With two nervous (?) processes.
Fig. 4. — The usual kind without processes.

682 SECOND NOTE ON "MACRODONTISM" OF THE MELANESIANS,

A SECOND NOTE ON "MACRODONTISM" OF THE
MELANESIANS. (1)

By N. de Miklouho-Maclay.
(Plate XLIX.)

In the resume of the results of Anthropological Observations
during a trip to Melanesia in 1879-80, (2) I have stated inter alia,
that I had the opportunity of making further observations re
"Macrodontism" in the Admiralty Islands and the Lub Archipelago.

Whenlfirst (in 1876) discovered thispeculiarity at the Admiralty
Islands, the natives, who had been before then very little in
contact with white men, were exceedingly shy, and it was only a
chance and a matter of some tact and great patience to induce the
natives to let me examine, measure, and sketch their teeth. A closer
inspection was completely out of question, they would resist or
run away at once. It was therefore not easy to come to a decided
opinion about the nature of the enlargement of the teeth.

At the Islands of Lub, I succeeded at last in obtaining a piece
of an enlarged tooth, the microscopical and chemical examination of
which might decide the question of the nature of " Macrodontism."
For various reasons, I decided to send the above-mentioned
specimen to Prof.Virchow at Berlin, but, to my greatest annoyance,
the small parcel given in charge of a gentleman going from Sydney
to Europe, was lost by his carelessness (was forgotten in the cabin,
when changing the steamer at Point de Galle). I was informed
about the loss of this interesting specimen only on my return from
the cruise amongst the Islands of Melanesia (1879 and 1880),

(1) My first note "On Macrodontism," appeared in the Proceed, of the
Linn. Soc. of N.S.W., Vol. III., p. 169.

(2) A resiim^ of the results of Anthropological and Anatomical Researches
in Melanesia and Australia (March 1879 — January 18S1) in the Proceed, of
the Linn. Soc. of N.S.W., Vol. VI., p. 171.

BY N. DE MIKLOUnO-MACLAY. 683

during winch, as alread}' mentioned, I succeeded in making further
investigation on " Macrodontism."

As it was now my third visit to these Islands (Admiralty and
Lub Islands), the natives treated me as an old acquaintance,
especially as I could speak a little of their dialect. Living on
shore, my face, manners and ways became quite familiar to the
natives, who remembered my two former visits very well. Finding
by experience that my proceedings (anthropological measurements,
sketching, photographing, etc., etc.), were quite harmless, the
natives began to regard them with much less distrust and antipathy
than before, and many large-toothed people had their teeth ex-
amined, measured, and sketched without making any objection.
This time I examined a greater variety of the large teeth and
succeeded in getting some pieces of the same, and soon arrived at
a different opinion to my former one (1), namely, that the enlarge-
ment of the teeth is due not to a real enlargement of the tooth (an
hypertrophy of the dentinum), but is simply an excessive accumic-
lation of tartar, the formation of which is increased by the constant
supply of lime from the chewing of the areca-betel-lime combina-
tion (2). The examination of a large tooth, which I purchased, left
no doubt that the same was covered with a kind of black, hard
incrustation, which could be gradually removed with a sharp
scalpel in the shape of more or less thin layers, leaving the
apparently unaltered tooth in the centre. In another specimen, the
tooth could be removed like a kernel from a nutshell.

I showed one of the specimens of the enlarged testh to Mr. P.
E. Pedley, who expressed his conviction that the dark brown crust
on the teeth could not be anything else, but a salivary calculus,
peculiarly stained by the special food of the natives.

(1) Log. cit. Proceed. Linn. Soc. of N.S.W., Vol. 1, p. 172.

(2) The root of the Piper betel is used by the natives of Admii-alty Islands
to a greater extent than in other places, where the leaves and fruits are
mostly in demand. The proportion of different ingredients used by areca-
betel-lime-chewers, appeared to me very different in different countries, which
differences in the combination of course alters the immediate effect of the
chewing, and producesintime different results on the bodies of the indulgers.
Moreover, in some places (for instance, the Malay-Peninsula and some
Islands of the Malay Archipelago) Tobacco and Ganibier (Nauclea gambir)
are added to the Areca nut and the Betel.

45

684 SECOND NOTE ON "MACRODONTISM " OF THE MELANESIANS,

Some months after my return to Sydney (in Jamiaiy, 1881), I
I'eceived from Berlin tlie "Sitzungsberichte der Berliner Gesellschaft
fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologic vmd Urgeschichte," for 1881, in
which a letter appeared from F. A. de Roepstorfl", Government Resi-
dent on the Nicobar Islands (1). The subject of the letter is : the
remarkably large teeth of the Nicoharese. In this letter the writer
says, that having read my account about the large-toothed
Melanesians, (2) and examined the adjoined plate (3), he was
surpri&ed to find that amongst the Nicobar Islanders this
peculiarity is also not a rare occurrence. Mr. Roepstorff forwarded
to Prof. Virchow some large teeth, which he acquired from the tribe
of the Shom-Moat of the Nancowry Group. The chemical
analysis proved that the incrustation which covered the teeth of
these men was a kind of tartar (Zahnconcremeut) consisting
chiefly of brown-stained lime. (4) Prof. Virchow referring to this

(1) Sitzungsberichte der Berliner Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethno-
logic und Urgeschiclite. Sitzung am 18 Juni, 1881, p. 218.

(2) Loc. cit. Sitzung am 16 Dec, 1876.

(3) Loc. clt. Plate XXVI.

(4) Die von Herni Salkowski angestellte chemi.sehe Analyse ergab
folgendes Resultat : —

' ' Die f eingepulverte Substanz schwiirzt sich beim erhitzen unter Verbrei-
"tung des Geruches nach verbrannteni Hoi'n, sie lost sich sowohl vor, wie
"nachdem Gliihen unter Hinterlassung eines unbedeutenden Kiickstands
"und unter Aufbrausen (Kohlensaure) in Salzsiiure. Die Salzsilure
" Losung cnthtilt als Hauptbestandtheile Kalk und Phosphorsiiure, daneben
"Magnesia, Eisenoxyd, sehr geringe Mengen von Alkalien, Spurcn von
•' Schwcfelsiiure und Kieselsiiure. Die Salpetersaure Losung giebt mit
" Silberlosung keine mcrklichc Triibung, its also frei von Chloridcn resp.
" Salzsiiure."

Die quantitave Bestimmung der Hauptbestandtheile ergab folgende
Zusammensetzung :

Wasser 5 '95 p. ct.

Orgainsche Substanz 9"10 ,,

Uiiorganischcr unlcislicher Riickstand

(Kieselsiiure, Eisenoxyd) 0"S7 ,,

Phosphorsaures Eisenoxyd 2"26 ,.

Kalk 45-24 ,,

Magnesia 0'6S ,,

Phorphorsaure 30'73 ,,

Kohlensiiure 4"S7 ,,

99-70 p. ct.
( Verhandhingen der Berliner Gesellschaft Jiir Anfhroj}olor/ie, Ethnologie
und Urgeschichte, Jahrgang, 1881. Sitzung von 18 Juni, p. 219.}

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 685

communication of Mr. Roepstorff made the remark (I), that
although the large size of the teeth of the Nicobarese depends,
according to the chemical analysis, upon the formation of a new-
kind of tartar (Weinsteiu), it remains still a question, whether it is
possible to explain in the same way the large teeth of the
Melanesians described by me, and that in the latter case furthe^
clearing up is necessary.

The pi-esent note shows, that in my opinion, the enlargement of
the teeth of the natives of the Admiralty and Lub-Islands is of
a similar nature to that which occurs amongst the Nicobar
Islanders, and is very likely produced by the same cause. A
striking example of the size attained by teeth, incrusted with this
kind of tartar, is represented on the adjoined plate. (Figs. 9, 10,
11, 12.)

The very remarkable size of the two lower incisors f carefully
measured) causes one to wonder, how they can find room in the
mouth.

The " Lechen-tshuven " (2) are regarded by the natives, as far as
I could observe, as a kind of beauty, and possessors of such are
appai-ently very proud of them and treat them with care, (3)

The above explains sufficiently why the designation " Macro-
dontism" must be dropped. It may be replaced by the name
Odontolithiasis, which is certainly a more suitable one. (4)

(1) Loc. cit. Sitzung am 18 Juni, 1881, p. 219.

(2) The natives on the Island Sorry' (or Wild Islands) in Nares Harbour,
call the large teeth ''Lechen-tshuven.'" Very likely the name in the
other dialects of the Admiralty Islands for the same will be different.

(3) Care is necessary, because the enormous teeth have not corres-
pondingly enormous fangs.

(4) I am indebted to Prof. W. J. Stephens for the suggestion of this
very appropriate name, from obovs tooth, and Xidiaais, stony deposit.

686 SECOND NOTE ON " MACRODONTISM" OP THE MELANESIANS.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLIX.

(All the figures, with exception of Fig. 9 and Fig. 10, of natural size.)

Fig. 1-Fig. 4.— Crust of tartar of two upper incisors. The external surfaces
dark brown, smooth as if polished.

Fig. 1. — The same from the front.

Fig, 2. — The same from behind.

Fig. 3.— The same from the side.

Fig. 4, — The same from above, showing distinctly that the crust has been
covering two incisors.

Fig. 5, Fig. 8. — One of the upper incisors, covered with a dark brown
crust of tartar, leaving only a portion of the fang (f) free.

Fig. 5. — The same from the front.

Fig. 6. — The same from behind.

Fig. 7- — The same from the side.

Fig. 8. — The same from below, showing two smooth surfaces.

Fig. 9. — Half-opened mouth in profile of Burumo, a native of the Island
Sorry' in Nares Harbour, showing very large salivary calculi
covering the incisors. (About one-half of the natural size.)

Fig. 10. — Mouth of the same, en face.

Fig. 11. — Upper surface of the crust of tartar, enclosing the middle incisors
ot the upper jaw. Exact measures in millimeters.

Fig. 12. Upper surface of the crust of tartar covering the lower incisors.
The exact measures are marked in millimeters. The thickness of
the larger calculus was exactly 8 mm. Tlie upper outlines of the
teeth were covered with detritus of food, Leptothrix huccalis, <i;c.

NOTE ON THE "KEU" (1) OF THE MACLAY-COAST,
NEW GUINEA.

By N. de Miklouho-Maclay.

My last paper, " List of Plants in use by the Natives of the
Maclay-Coast, New Guinea," was already printed, when I discovered,
quite unexpectedly, amongst old letters a forgotten note of the late
Dr. R. H. C. C. SchefFer, Director of the Botanical Garden of
Buitenzorg, which referred to some matters communicated by me
in the above paper. As it was too late to make an addition to the
same, I found myself obliged to bring this addendum to the above
mentioned paper in the form of a separate note.

I have stated in the " List of Plants of the Maclay-Coast," that
the " Keu " plant collected by me at that coast, has been identified
by Di'. Scheffer with the Piper methystictmi of the South Sea
Islands. The note of Dr. Scheffer referred to, brought to my
memory the fact, that some days after I received the leaves of
the P. methysticum ivom Samoa (in Dec. 1874 (2), and had given
them to Dr. Scheffer for comparison with the " Keu " plant, I
found in my ethnological collection some bundles of the " Keu "
which had been presented to me by the natives of the different
villages, on my departvire, as a supply of " Keu " for my own use.
The bundles consisted of young plants of " Keu " with roots, stems,

(1) "K^u" is the name given m the dialect of Bongu of the Maclay-
Coast, to a species of Piper which is used for the prepai-ation of a stimu-
lating and somewhat intoxicating beverage. As it will be seen from this
paper, the name of "Keu " is applied to more than one species of Piper (of
which one is the Piper methysticum of Polynesia). The names for the same
beverage, as well as for the plants used for its preparation in the other
dialects of the Maclay-Coast are : — Keuva, Isse, Kial, Ayo, Segu and others,

(2) Vide my paper : '• List of Plants in use by the Natives of the Maclay-
Coast." Proceed. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., Vol. X., p. 346.

688 NOTE ON THE "KEU" OF THE MACLAY-COAST, NEW GUINEA,

branches and leaves, which being bent and tied togethei' when fresh,
had been reduced intentionally to small, compact packages suitable
for transport. Immersion for a few hours in water made the
bianchlets and leaves regain partly their former elasticity, so that the
leaves could be spread without breaking and used for examination.
Finding that the botanical character of the leaves of the " Keu "
plants taken from difi'erent bundles, presented some diflferences, I
sent the whole concern (bundles, flattened leaves, &c.), to Dr.
Scheffer for complete examination, with the request to tell me by-
andby his opinion : whether all the " Keu " specimens belonged to
the same species (^Piper methysttcum) or not. The same forenoon
I received a short note from Dr. Schefter, written in haste in the
Botanical Garden, with the statement that the bundles of " Keu "
contained two different species of Piper and both different from the
Piper methysticum, but that through the absence of flowers and
fruits, it was impossible for him to determine the species. (1) A
few days later Dr. Scheffer came to see me, we had a talk about
the "K6u" and, being then (Dec. 1875) on the eve of departure
for a new trip to New-Guinea, I promised him to bring some com-
plete specimens (with flowers and fruits) of the different kinds of
" Keu " with me. I collected therefore during my stay at the
Maclay-Coast, in 1876-77, with some other plants, also the " Keu "
plant with blossom and fruits, which, according to the promise, I
forwarded on my arrival at Singapore to Dr. Scheffer My pro-
tracted and very serious illness at Singapore in 1878, during which
time it is not unlikely that some letters and papers went astray,
may account for the fact, that T never received an answer from
Dr. Scheffer. On my ai'rival in Sydney, in 1878, 1 quite forgot
to wi-ite to Dr. Scheffer to ask him about the result of his inspection
of the " Keu " plants and soon afterwards heard with much regi-et
about his death. Although the 2 new ("?) species of Piper men-
tioned by Dr. Scheffer in his note, have possibly not been described

(1) The portion of Dr. Scheffer's note referring to the " K^u " was :
"... Parmi votre collection de la Nouvelle-Guinee se troiivent dtux
" esp^ces de Piper, qui sont toutes deux diffe rentes de I'espi^ce d'Apia. La
* ' nervature est tout autre. Par I'absence de fruits et de fleurs c'est impos-
*' sible de les determiner." . , .

BY N. DE MIKLOUUO-MACLAY. bOy

by liim, the fact that there are on the Maclay-Coast other kinds
of Piper, allied to P. methysticum, remains, I think proved. (1.)

As the mode of preparation of the " Keu-beverage " is somewhat
different fi'om that of the " Kava" or " Ava" of the Polynesians,
which operation has been described more than once by travellers (2)
it appears to me that a short account of the way in which the "Keu "
is prepared by the natives of the Maclay-Coast, is here not out
of place.

The "Keu " plant is used not only in its fresh state, but often
after it has been kept for weeks and months ; leaves, branches,
stem and roots are chewed. In case the latter are too hard and
large, they are split and beaten with astone before chewing. Portions
of leaves, of broken b ranches, chips of stem and roots are distri-
buted, amongstboys and young men, who, with their strong healthy
teeth, soon reduce them to a soft greenish pulp, which is more or

(1) I shall mention but a few of them. In W. Mariner's account of the
Tonga Islands [An account of the natives of the Tonga Islands from com-
munications ot Mr. W. Mariner, by John Martin. Second edition,
London, 1818, Vol. II., pp. 173-176] thei-e is a very complete description of
the preparation of the "Kava," with all the ceremonies connected with
the drinking of it, at the Tonga Island, at the beginning of this century.
Capt. J. E. Erskine, R.N., (Journal of a Cruise among the Islands of the
Western Pacific. London, 1S53, p. 49) gives also an account about the cere-
mony of the " Ava " drinking at Samoa. Of course, in each book about the
South Sea Islands, in each account of travels on the Islands of the Pacific,
there are more or less complete descriptions of the preparations, drinking
and effects of this peculiar bevei-age. These descriptions show that different
modifications in the use of the "Kava" in the same place have gradually
taken place, which however can be explained by the fact that the use of this
beverage is generally disappearing with the advance of missionaries, white
traders and settlers, and the introduction of spirits.

(2) I wrote to Baron F. von Mueller about the discovery of Dr. SchefFer's
note and received a few days ago his answer. The portion of the Baron'a
letter, referring to the distribution of Piperaceai, runs (translated from the
German) as follows : — " I wish to remai-k, that Casimiz de CandoUe, in his
" new work on the Piperacece, does not mention any other species of the
*' genus Piper from New Guinea, but Piper methysticum ; Piper Rumpfii is
"nearly allied to P. methysticum, but is only known at Ternate. We
" know as well described not more than 5 Piperacete from New Guinea ;
" but as about 70 species have been fountbin the Sunda-Island, it is to be
" expected" that numerous species will be collected by and by in New
"Guinea. In fact I have already several in my collections, but the
"specimens are very fragmentary, so that nothing or very little can be
"done with them. Beccari's Piperacete remain still unpublislied; it is
' ' possible, however, that he has collected only a few of tliem. "

690 NOTE ON THE " KEU " OF THE MACLAY-COAST, NEW GUINEA,

less saturated with saliva. In the meantime one of the old men
has already made the necessary arrangement for filtering the
"Keu" drink. Two large "gambas,"(l) specially kept for this
purpose, are used. The upper with a hole in the centre serves as a
funnel, the lower and larger as a reservoir. The hole on the
bottom of the funnel is covered with a layer of young " unan "
(a species of Imperata) which has been made soft by rubbing.
Having rinsed his hands the old man, remaining seated behind his
" gambas," collects the balls (remarkably large) of masticated
" Keu," which are presented to him by the young people, who
pass before him in a procession. Sometimes the ball is
presented, not on the palm of the hand as usual, but on the out-
stretched tongue of the chewer.

The balls are deposited by the operator on the bottom of the
upper " gamba," which serves for the funnel, a little water is
added and the filtration helped by stirring. After a while, when the
greater part of the fluid has been filtered through the *' unan,"
the remaining masticated " Keu " is carefully lifted out of the
funnel in the shape of a big ball, and more water poured on it.
The ball is compressed with both hands, the greenish infusion
draining between the fingers of the operator and running through
the funnel into the reservoir. Still more water is poured on the
kneaded ball until the paler colour of the infusion shows that this
part of the operation is at an end. The empty funnel is lifted
and put aside. The reservoir is nearly filled with a dirty-greenish
looking fluid of the consistence of a not very thick syrup. Some-
times a little more water is added and the " K6u " stirred
thoroughly.

The " Keu" is drunk soon after it is made, so that in such a short
time no fermentation could be produced by the saliva contained in

(1) The name " gamba " in the dialect of Bongu is given to the shell of
the cocoanut, which is split horizontally. A short but strong stroke, with
an elongated stone (especially kept for that purpose) given by an
experienced hand, splits the nut horizontally, leaving a level border.
According to the purpose of the " gamba-makcr," the nut can be split in the
middle or higher up, and accordingly the " gamba " can be made flat or
deep. "Gambas " are used by natives as dishes, plates, etc., etc.

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 691

the mixtiire (1). The "Keu" beverage of the Maclay-Coast
being, in comparison with the Polynesian " Kava," a very con-
centrated drink, is taken, very likely, for this reason in com-
paratively small quantities. Each " Keu "-drinker carries in his
" gun " (2) his own neatly carved " Keu-gamba," or cup made of
the shell of the small kind of cocoanut (with the yellow nuts), which
may hold from 2-4 tablespoons full (from about 40-80 grammes) of
fluid, and it happens very seldom that more than one cup is drunk
by the same man. To lessen the bitter after-taste of the " Keu," a
small quantity of " Munki-la " (3) is taken after the swallowing
of the " Keu." (4)

Without doubt, the strength of the " Keu "-beverage depends upon
the part of the plant used for chewing (the root gives the strongest
kind of " Keu "), very likely upon the age of the plant, and of
course on the amount of water employed. Therefore the beverage
used at different time and in different places is evidently different
in its strength, and naturally will produce on the drinker a different
effect. As far as I have seen the effects of the " Keu " upon the
" Keu " drinkers on the Maclay-Coast, I find that I have not

(1) Prof. H. N. Moseley says the same about the "Kava " as it is made
at the Fiji Islands. "The infusion of the pepper-root is not allowed to
"stand so as to ferment, but some change probably is effected in the active
" principles by the action of the saliva, for grated " Kava," which is now
"used in Tonga, by order of the missionaries, as a substitute for the
"chewed preparation, is not so good as the latter." (H. N. Moseley.
Notes by a Natui'alist, on the Challenger, London, 1879, p. .312.) From all
the accounts of preparing the ' ' Kava ' ' by other travellers in the South
Sea Islands I have read, not one reports that the " Kava " is left to stand
so long as to ferment. I have tasted an infusion of grated " Kava " made
by the missionaries at Samoa. It was a kind of aromatic water of bitter
taste — a rather very indifferent than nice bevei'age.

(2) " Gun " is a bag carried by the natives slung on a plaited band over
the left shoulder. It is an ever-constant companion of tlie Papuan of the
Maclay-Coast, in which he carries all the necessaries of his every-day life.

(.3) " Munki-la " is a kind of pap made of the grated kernel of cocoanut
steeped in the so-called "cocoanut milk." It is a favourite dish of the
natives of that coast.

(4) I have intentionally abstained in this paper from describing all the
ceremonies connected with the drinking of the "Keu." I will however
mention, that at the Maclay-Coast it is used only by men, and not daily or
many times a day, as it has been the custom on some islands of Polynesia,
but on special occasions as reception of visitors, old friends^ at feasts, &c.

692 NOTE ON THE "KEU" OF THE MACLAY-COAST, NEW GUINEA,

sufficient reason for calling the " Keu " fin the concentration
used at that coast) a very intoxicating drink. It is more a
soporific.

Regarding the immediate effects of the " Keu," I will translate
a portion of letter written by me some 12 years ago, and puljlished
in the " Isvestia" of the Imperial Russian Geographical Society. (1)

"The natives who have drunk their usual portion of "Keu"
" enter soon into a melancholic sleepy state, staggering they retire
" from their companions, sit down in some comparatively shady
" corner, and stare intently on something round, spit freely, on
" account of the bitter taste of the " K6u " remaining a long time
" in the mouth and fall at last into an agitated but heavy sleep.
" It is difficult then to wake them and to make them understand
" anything. The greater number of men take only such a quantity
" of " Keu " that after dozing for 10 or 20 minutes, they awake
" quite themselves again. With the drinking of the " Keu " the
" meal (during a feast) begins. Nothing is eaten before, and the
" indulgers of greater quantities of " Keu " take only the same and
" eat nothing, because they fall asleep for hours. I never saw the
" " Keu" make the natives noisy, or quarrelsome — very likely the
" stuff acts too quickly, at all events the effects of the " Keu " are
" very different from those of alcohol."

Wishing to know by my own experience the taste and the effects
of the " K6u " and finding with Capt. (now Admiral) I. E. Erskine,
E.N., that "its preparation is not so disgusting as the accounts
of some travellers had led me to expect," (Loc. cit., p. 49), I took
once, during my first stay at the Maclay-Coast (in 1871 and 72), a
dose (equal to an average portion usually taken by natives), about
sixty grammes. The stuff was without a special scent, of a bitter
and astringent taste, and a bitter and slightly aromatic after-taste.
About 10 minutes after taking the " Keu, " I felt giddy and my
legs objected to hold me. I was glad to find that I could sit down
where I was standing, and felt that I could not resist sleep. After
half-an-hour's sleep I was all right again. I did not care to repeat
the trial.

(1) "Isvestia" of the Imp. Russ. Geograp. Soc, Vol. X., IST-l, p. 85.

BY N. DE MIKLOUIIO-MACLAY. 693

The natives on the Maclay-Coast never complained to me about
any bad effects of prolonged excessive nse of the Keu-drink, effects
something like the Tahitian " arevareva." (1)

As the use of the " Kava," on the islands of the Pacific, is, as
far as we know, a very ancient custom, it appears to me of
importance, for Ethnology and Ethnography, that the distribu-
tion of this custom on the islands shoiild be carefully recorded,
especially, as the same is gradually disappearing before the
invasion of the white man. (2) Such records of the use of
the plant, of the mode of preparation of the beverage, the
ceremonies connected with the drinking of the same, may lead
to the solving of interesting ethnographical questions.

According to Gerland (3), the use ot the *' Kava" has been
known on all the Islands of Polynesia, with the exception of
Mangareva Ar"" , and New Zealand (4) ; in both cases, as
Gerland supposes, because, the emigrants to these Islands, when
emigrating have not imported the plant with them and have not
found the same in their new homes.

(1) The daily use of the drug " Kava" is sometimes followed by a kind
of skin disease, called in Tahiti "arevareva." The effect on those who
are addicted to tlie use of "Kava" for any length of time is to produce
obscurity of vision, red conjunctiva, and yellow colouration of the teeth,
while the skin, where thick, becomes dry, scaly, cracked and ulcerated,
and the body becomes emaciated and decrepit. (" Kava " in the Encyclo-
pEcdia Britannica, Vol. XIV. of the 9th edition, p. IS.) The scars
produced by the ulcers of " arevareva " were regaided on many islands of
the Pacific as "marks of honour," because only people of rank could
indulge freely in the use of "Kava." [Waitz and Gerland. Anthro-
pologic der Naturviilker, 6er Theil. Die Volker der Siidsee. Dritte
Abtheilung. Leipzig, 1872, p. 60.)

(2) Mariner, when he was at Wahoo (Sandwich Islands), in the
beginning of this century saw the "Kava" drunk twice as a luxury, and
was told that several of the old men still preferred it to spirit. Four years
later Campbell (Voyage Round the World) never saw the " Ava" employed
(at the Sandwich Islands) but as a medicine to prevent corpulency, ardent
spirits being adopted as a luxury instead of it. (AV. Mariner's account of
the Tonga Islands, compiled and arranged by John Martin, M.D. London,
1818, Vol. I., p. XLIX.)

(3) Waitz Gerland. Loc. cit., 6ter. Th., pp. 59, 60, 61.

(4) In New Zealand the name " Kawa '' is given to another species of
Piper — the Piper excelsum. Waitz Gerland, Loc. cit., p. 60.

694 NOTE ON THE "kEU" OF THE MACLAY-COAST, NEW GUINEA,

On the Islands of Micronesia, according to Gerland (1), the use
of the " Kava " has been known at the Islands Kusaie, Ponape,
and Truck, and was called the " Saka " beverage, but on these
Islands the root was not chewed but ground between stones.

In Melanesia the use of the " Kava " has been recorded : in Fiji,
introduced from Tonga (2), in some Islands of the New-Hebrides
(as Tanna, Tate, Aneityum and Crera), where this custom is also of
Polynesian origin. (3)

How the use of the " Keu " became known to the natives of the
Maclay-Coast, remains still to be found out.

As already mentioned in a former paper (4), the use of the
Keu-beverage is not adopted in all the villages of that coast,
although the plant is known. In the same paper, I had the
opportunity of stating the information from the Rev. W. G.
Lawes, that the Piper methysticu m grows wild on the south-east
of New-Guinea without the natives knowing or making use of it.
Rev. G. Brown wrote to me a few days ago about a similar case in
New Britain and New Ireland, and the Solomon Islands, where the
Piper methysticum (or an allied species) grows wild, but the
natives don't know the use of it. (5)

It is not uninteresting, that in Polynesia the plant and the
beverage prepared from it, are called " Kava " (^Tonga, Rarotonga,
New Zealand, Marquesas), and " Ava " (Samoa and Hawaii), in
Micronesia, " Saka," in Fiji-" Yagona," whilst at the Maclay-
Coast, the same, or an allied plant is known under many names,
as " Keu," " Keuva," " Isse," " Kial," " Ayo," " Segu," and very
likely many more.

(1) Waitz Gerland. Loc. cit., Vter. Theil., zweite Abtheil., jd. 78.

(2) Er.skine. Loc. cit., p. 263.

(3) WaUz-Gerland. Vlter. Th. Dritte Abtheil, p. 578.

(4) List of plants in use by the natives of tlie Maclay-Coast

(5) Here the portion of Rev. G. Brown's letter to me referring to the
subject : — " I have not seen the natives of New Briton, New Ireland, or
" the Solomons use the " Kava," nor do they know its use though it grows
" there. I got large roots of it, and natives from other islands said it was
"the true " Kava," but not being cultivated it was coarse, and as they
" soon began to use the Betel nut as the other natives, they did not use it."

BY N. DE MIKLOUHO-MACLAY. 695

Before I close this note, I may add, that since 1857, the root of
the Piper methysticum has been recommended in Europe for
medicinal xise, and it appears that it will become a valuable medi-
cine. (1) The fluid extract made with alcohol as a menstrum,
has been used in bronchitis, rheumatism, gout, gonorrhoea,
gleet, &c. : the chief medical use of " Kava" is however to cure
chronic cysticis and gleet. (2). More investigation and experi-
ments on the effects of the " Kava " extract are still desirable.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Brazier exhibited a specimen of Paryphanta Hochstetteri, a
shell which he had exhibited at the August meeting, showing the
remarkable effect produced by the heat a few days ago. The
shell was completely splintered into about 50 pieces, nothing
remaining but the whorls and the umbilicus. He said that he had
often observed Bulimi throwing off the epidermis from heat, but
had never before seen an instance of a shell flying to pieces from
that cause.

Mr. Ogilby exhibited a specimen mounted by Mr. Whitelegge
ior the microscope, of Branchiostoma hassanum, Gunther, dredged
off North Head.

Mr. Palmer exhibited a species of Coccinella, which had in a
few days cleared his peach trees of an attack of Aphides, which

(1) I am indebted to Mr. F. Wright for having drawn my attention to
this fact.

(2) Details about the constituents of- the drug and its medicinal use,
&c., &c., mde:—T\\e National Dispensatory, by A. Still«5 and J. Maisch,
3rd. ed., London, 1884, pp. 964, 965. A companion to the U. S. Phar-
macopeia, by Oscar Olberg and Otto Wall. London, 1884, pp. 696, 697.
Novel Coi;nter Adjunct bearing chemist's own name and address, with notes
•on recent materia medica. Evans Lescher and Webb, 1884.

byo NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

threatened their destruction. Also specimens of Anoplognalhus
inustus in the cocoon, but completely formed, and a beautiful
chrysalis, probably of a Danais, suspended from a fern leaf,

Mr. Palmer also exhibited two Mogos or Stone Axes of a very
rough description, found a little below the surface in a cavity of
the sandstone on the Blue Mountains.

Dr. von Lendenfeld exhibited specimens of the sponges and
discoloured labels referred to in his paper on Hahne tingens.

Mr. C. S. Wilkinson exhibited a small fish brought by Mr. H.
T. Wilkinson, J. P., from Lord Howe Island ; also from the sanje
Island a fine specimen of Dolium variegatum which Mr. Brazier
stated had not hitherto been found so far to the east of Australia,
Mr. Macleay and Mr. Ogilby considered the fish to be a new genus,
and Mr. Macleay undertook to examine and describe it.

Mr. Wilkinson also exhibited a seed-pod of the Cassia fistula
from the Solomon Islands.

WEDNESDAY, 25th NOVEMBER, 1885.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M.A., F.G.S., in the chair.

DONATIONS.

" Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections." Vols. XITI.-
XXVII. "Smithsonian Report," 1880, 1881, 1882. "Reports
of Professor Heniy," 1866-1878. " Review of American Birds."
Part 1, By Spencer F. Baird. " Catalogue of North American
Birds." By Spencer F. Baird. "New sj)ecies of North Ameri-
can Coleoptera." By John L. Leconte, M.D. Parts 1 and 2.
" List of the Coleoptera of North America." By John L.
Leconte, M.D. " Catalogue of the Fishes of the East-coast of
North America." By Theodore Gill, M.D., Ph.D. " Arrange-
ment of the Families of Manunals." By Theodore Gill, M.D.,
Ph.D. "Arrangement of the Families of Mollusks." By
Theodore Gill, M.D., Ph.D. " Catalogue of the Orthoptera of
North America." By S. H. Scudder. "Check-list of the
Invertebrate Fossils of North America," Miocene. By F. B.
Meek. " Check-list of the Invertebrate Fossils of North
America," Eocene and Oligocene. By T. A. Conrad. " Sketch
of the Life and Contributions to Science of Prof. Joseph Henry,
LL.D," (4 copies.) " An Account of Progi*ess in Botany in the
year 1881." By Prof. William G. Farlow. " Nereis Boreali-
Americana ; or. Contributions to the Marine Algje of North
America." Part .3. By William- Henry Harvey, M.D., F.L.S.
"A Memoir on the Extinct Sloth Tribe of North America." By
Joseph Leidy, M.D. " Tuckahoe ; or, Indian Bread." By Prof.
J. Howard Gore. " First Annual Report of the Bureau of

G98 DONATIONS.

Ethnology," 1879-1880. By J. W. Powell, Director. "Report
on the Pharniacopceias of all Nations." By Dr. James M. Flint,
(2 copies.) "The Botany of Bermuda." By General Sir John
H. Lefroy, F.R.S., (2 copies.) " Catalogue of Publications of the
Smithsonian Institution," (1846-1882.) "Bulletin of the U. S.
National Museum," Nos. 1, 2, 3, 25 and 26. From the Smith-
sonian Institution.

" Bulletins de I'Academie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Peters-
bourg." Tome XXIX., Nos. 2, 3 and 4. " Memoires." Tome
XXXII., Nos. 4-13. From the Academy.

"Acta Societatis Scientiarum Fennicse." Tome XIII., 1884.
" Ofversigt af finska Vetenskaps Societ6tens." Forhandlingar
XXV., 1882-1883. From the Society.

" Victorian Naturalist." Vol. II., No. 7, November 1885.
From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

" Report of the Board of Governors of the Public Library,
Museum and Art Gallery of South Australia." 1884-1885.
From the Director.

" Feuille des jeunes Naturalistes." No. 180, 1st October, 1885.
From the Editor.

" Comptes Rendus des Seances de FAcademie des Sciences."
Paris, January 1885-August 1885. " Bulletin Astronomique."
Tome I., 1884. From the Academy.

"The Provincial Medical Journal." Vol. IV., No. 46, 1st
October, 1885. From the Editor.

" Annual Report of the Trustees of the Australian Museum for
1884." From the Trustees.

"Science." Vol. VI., Nos. 137-140, September 9th, October
4th, 1885. From the Editor.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger." No. 205, 5th October, 1885. From
the Editor.

From the Naturhistoriches Museum zu Hamburg " Bericht des
Direktor." 1885.

From K. F. Koehler's Antiquarium in Leipzig " Catalog."
No. 428.

PAPERS READ

A LIST OF THE TROGOSITID^ OF AUSTRALIA, WITH
NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.

By a. Sidney Ollifp, F.E.S.,

Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

Like the "List of the Cucujidse" the following P^Cper, although
embracing all the species at present known to me as inhabiting
Australia, must be considered only as an instalment of what careful
searching will no doubt reveal. Of the twenty-eight species here
enumerated ten are added to the Australian fauna ; of these eight
ire described as new, the remaining two probably introduced
pecies, Latolceva cassidoides and LopJiocateres Ivani, being for the
hrst time recorded as Australian.

The most important paper on this family which has appeared since
the publication of the Munich Catalogue is Herr Edmund Reitter's
" Systematische Eintheilung der Trogositidse " published in the
somewhat inaccessible " Yerhandlungen" of Brunn. As I believe
my copy of this paper, which I received through the courtesy of
the author, is the only one to be found in Sydney I have reproduced
the diagnoses of the Australian species and added the characters
of the genera after a careful examination of the specimens in my
own possession.

Of the genera, as yet detected in Australia, the largest and at
the same time the most characteristic- is Leperma, of which eleven
species have already been described. The second is Ancyrona, but
as the genus is widely distributed and liable to accidental diifusion
I attach but little impoi'tance to this fact.
46

(00

A LIST OF THE TROGOSITID^ OF AUSTRALIA,

The following table showing the geographical distribution of the
family is chiefly based on an examination of the specimens in the
collections of the Hon. William Macleay and the Australian
Museum . —

Name of Species.

11
i

11
III"

Wide Bay & More-
ton Bay Dist.
Rich, and Clar.

Hunter R Dist.

Sydney Dist.

Illawarra and ~
Monaro Dist.

N, S. Wales.

s

^

s

2
1

3
<

s

1

•a

i
2

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.

Egolia variegata, Erich

Tenebrioides mauritanica, Linn.
,, punctulata, Reitt ...

:

:

...

:

:

;

:

...

...

...

*

Cymba moiiilata, Pasc

*

.*

:

*

':

*

*

:.

«

...

,, seposita, Olli^

,, adusta, Pasc

,, opatroides, Lev. ...

,, conspicua, Olli^.

,, tui'bata, Pasc

,, Mastersi, Macleay.

„ cirrosa, Pasc

,, burnettensis, Macleay...

„ lacera, Pasc

fraterua, Ollif.

'..

...

...

:.

:'

:

*

*

*

*

...

*

*

*

*

*

".!.

Peltonyxa Deyrollei, Reitt.

*

«

*

*

Neaspis variegata, Macleay. . .

*

,, villosa, Pasc

*

*

...

Latolseva cassidoides, i?ei«.

Ancyrona laticeps , OlUff.

ffigra, Olliff.

,, Ges1)roi, Reitt

, latebrosa, Olliff.

*

*

;

*

1

„ arnica, Olliff.

,, vesca, Olliff.

...

.*

*

*

...

...

*

...,

Peltoschema fibcornis, Reitt.

*

...

■;■

:-:j:::l

J

Family. TROGOSITID^E.

Sub-Family. I. NEMOSOMIN^.

Egolia.
Erichson, Wiegm. Archiv, I., p. 180 (1842).

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.E.S. 701

1. Egolia VARIEGATA.

Egolia variegata, Erichson, "Wiegm. Archiv. I., p. 151, \)\. 5,
fig. 6 (1842).

Lacordaire, Gen. Col. Atlas, pi. 19, fig. 1.
Tasmania.

Sub-Family. II. TROGOSITIN.E.
Tenebrioides.
Filler and Mitterp. {teste Eeitter).

2. Tenebrioides mauritanica. (A.M.)
Tenebrio mauritanica, Linneiis, Syst. Nat. I., p. 674 (1767).
Trogosita mauritanica, Jacq. Duv., Gen. Col., II., pi. 42,

fig. 208.

Cape York, Endeavour River, Duaringa, Queensland ; Clarence
River, Sydney, New South Wales ; Victoria ; Tasmania.

This cosmopolitan species has completely established itself in
many parts of Australia, where it is found in granaries, corn bins,
flour, &c., as commonly as in Europe. Mr. Macleay (Proc. Ent.
Soc, N. S. W., I., p. XXI., 1863) has recorded the fact of his
finding large numbers of this insect in one of his insect cabinets,
where they appeared to be doing considerable damage.

3. Tenebrioides punctulata.

Tenebrioides punctulata, Reitter, Verh. ver. Briinn, XIII.,
p. 74 (1875).

South Australia.

I have not been able to see the description of this species. In
the " Zoological Record" for 1875 it is stated to come from Cuba
and Portorico as well as from the above locality.

Sub-family. III. LEPERIN^.
Cymba.
Seydlitz, Fauna Baltica, p. 34 (1872).

702 a list of the trogositid^ of australia,

4. Cymba monilata.

Peltis monilata Pascoe, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4) X, p. 318
(1872).

Australia.

As this species is unknown to me, I merely follow Reitter in
referring it to the genus Cymha, of which the type is the European
Peltis procera of Kraatz.

Leperina.

Erichson, Germ. Zeitschr. Y., p. 453 (1844).

This very natural genus is largely represented in Australia. The
species are found under bark and are rather local, but usually
abundant where they occur.

I would here point out that these insects should be killed with
the fumes of chloroform or ammonia and pinned immediately, as
their scales and elytral fascicles are very easily abraded. Speci-
mens which have been preserved in alcohol are generally untit for
identification.

Section 1 — Elytra without fascicles.

5. Leperina decorata. (A. M.)

Trogosita decorata, Erichson, Wiegm, Archiv., I., p. 150 (1842).

Leperina decorata, Lacordaire, Gen. Atlas, pi. 19, fig. 5.

Leperina gayndahensis, Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales
II., p. 164 (1871).

Gayndah, Wide Bay, Queensland ; Clarence River, N. S.
Wales ; Port Lincoln, South Australia ; Victoria ; Tasmania.

I have satisfied myself after a careful examination of a long
series that the specimens from Gayndah in the collection of the
Australian Museum are only abraded examples of this abundant
species.

6. Leperina seposita, sp. n. (A. M.)

Oblong, pitchy black, somewhat shining ; head and prothorax
strongly and closely punctured, the latter with a small patch of
rusty red scales at the posterior angles, the sides strongly rounded,

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.B.S. 703

a moderately deep longitudinal impression on each side of the
median line ; elytra costate, the intei'stices broad, very strongly
and closely punctured, and furnished with four or more rather large
patches of rusty red scales.

Head i*ather broad, irregularly strigose-punctate and somewhat
depressed in the middle. Antennae pitchy red, the basal joint
considerably enlarged and rather strongly punctured, Prothorax
rather strongly emarginate in front, the sides strongly rounded
and narrowly reflexed, the posterior angles obtuse, a small patch of
rusty red scales at the anterior angle, another at the middle, and a
third much larger patch at the posterior angle. Scutellum broad,
rounded behind, closely and strongly punctured. Elytra about
twice as long as the head and prothorax together, the sides almost
parallel for two-thirds of their length, then gradually rounded to
the apex : each elytron with three distinct costse, the first two
extending to the apical margin, the third effaced posteriorly ; there
is a slight indication of a fourth costa at the humeral angle, the
interstices are strongly, irregularly, and very closely punctured ;
the lateral margin and each of the interstices is furnished with a
row of rather large patches of scales, these patches vaiy from four
to six in number and are easily abraded. Underside coloured as
above; presternum strongly and not very closely punctured ;
meso and metasternum equally strongly and much more closely
punctured ; abdominal segments finely and very closely punctured.
Legs pitchy, closely punctured. Length, 7|-11 mm; greatest
width 3-4 mm.

King George's Sound, West Australia.

Easily distinguished from all the other species of the genus by
the patches of scales on its elytra ; by its strongly rounded pro-
thorax ; and by its closely punctured surface. It belongs to the
section of the genus in which the elytral fascicles are absent.

7. Leperina adusta. (A. M.)

Leperina adusta, Pascoe, Journal of Entom. I., p. 100 (1860).
Bombala, Gunniag, Mouaro, New South Wales ; Melbourne,
Victoria ; South Australia.

704 A LIST OF THE TROGOSITID^ OF AUSTRALIA,

As ill the case of Leperiaa opatroldes the ground colour of the
elytra in this species varies from a pale grey to a rich rust colour^
An example from Gunning has the prothorax a little broader and
the markings larger than the other specimens.

8. Leperina opatroides, (A. M.)

Leperina opatroides Leveille, Ann. Mus. Genov. (2) I., p. 637
(1884).

Cape York, Somerset, North Australia.

If I have correctly identified this species, which M. Leveille
records from Yule Island and New Guinea, as well as from the
above localities, the scales on the elytra composing the ground
colour vary in tint. In some specimens they are pale grey and in
others a rich brown.

9. Leperina conspicua, sp. n. (A. M.)

Oblong, slightly narrower in front than behind, dark piceous,
covered with black scales ; prothorax about twice as broad as
long, with three irregular patches of white scales on the disc, the
sides thickly covered with broad white scales ; elytra crenate-
striate, the interstices rather broad, with elongate patches of
white scales on the disc and at the margins behind the middle,
a narrow fascia of white scales near the apex.

Head moderately closely covered with black scales, with which a
few reddish brown ones are intermingled. Antennae reddish
brown, the club three jointed. Protliorax deeply emarginate in
front, the sides rounded and very slightly constricted at the base,
with three oblique patches of white scales on the disc, two just
before the middle and one somewhat smaller and narrower just
before the base, the lateral margins rather broadly banded with
white scales, Scutellum transverse, rounded behind, black. Elytra
rather more than twice as long as the head and prothorax
together, slightly narrower in front than behind, finely orenate-
striate, the interstices rather broad, the disc ornamented with
elongate patches of white scales which are contained within the
interstices, a small white spot near the humeral angle, a narrow

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.E.S. 705

curved fascia near the base and a row of five or six spots situated
at the margin on each side behind the middle also composed of
white scales ; the suture free from scales. Underside ferruginous,
moderately closely covered with fine scales and pubescence ; sterna
finely rugose-punctate, the abdominal segments finely and closely
punctured. Legs ferruginous. Length 7^-9 mm. ; greatest
width 4-4| mm.

Lizard Island, North Australia.

Of this very distinct species I have three specimens before me,
all agreeing in the position and general appearance of the elytral
spots, but differing to some slight extent in their number and size.
One specimen has the markings on the prothorax composed of pale
reddish brown instead of white scales, Leperina conspicua may be
distinguished from the preceding species, not only by its difierent
colour and markings, but also in having the anterior angles of the
prothorax less rounded internally, the elytral interstices slightly
broader and the suture fi'ee from scales.

Section 2 — Elytra with six or more fascicles.

10. Leperina turbata. (A.M.)

Leperina turhata, Pascoe, Journal of Entom. II, p, 29 (1863.)
Leperina fascicidata, Redtenbacher, Reise Novara II, p. 37,
pi. 2, fig. 3 (1867.)

Port Denison, Moreton Bay, Queensland ; Clarence Ptiver, Pope's
Creek, Illawarra, New South Wales ; Norfolk Island.

Herr Reitter (Verb. ver. Briinn XIV., p. 36, 1876) placed this
species as a synonym of Leperina Signoreti, Montr, from New
Caledonia, a species with which it certainly has no connection. M.
Leveille (Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr. (5) VII, p. CXII) has already pointed
out this error.

11. Leperina Mastersi. (A.M.)

Leperina Mastersi, Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales II,
p. 163 (1871).

Gayndah, Queensland.

706 A LIST OP THE TROGOSITIDiE OF AUSTRALIA,

Nearly allied to Leperina turhata, which it resembles in form and
colour ; head more closely and less strongly punctvired ; prothorax
moderately strongly and not very closely punctured, the sides dis-
tinctly constricted just before the posterior angles, the median line
only slightly elevated ; the elytral fascicles much less raised, and
the abdominal segments not as strongly punctured as in the allied
species.

12. Leperina cirrosa. (A.M.)

Leperina cirrosa, Pascoe, Journal of Entom. I., p. 100 (1860).

Percy Island, Endeavour River, Port Denison, Rockhampton.
Maryborough, Wide Bay, Moreton Bay, Queensland.

This species is remarkable for the great length of the white
scales on the sides of the prothorax and the large size of the
elytral fascicles.

13. Leperina burnettensis. (A.M.)

Leperina burnettensis, Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales,
II., p. 164(1871;.

Rockhampton, Gayndah, Queensland.

Closely allied to Leperina cirrosa — indeed I think it very
possible that when more specimens are available for comparison
they will prove to be extreme varieties of a single very plastic
species. The two specimens before me, one of which is the type,
diflfer from Leperina cirrosa in their smaller size, in having the
fascicles on the prothorax and elytra comparatively smaller and
the appressed white scales on the sides of the former shorter and
less numerous ; the abdominal segments are rather more closely
and regularly punctured.

14. Leperina lacera. (A.M.)

Leperina lacera, Pascoe, Journal of Entom, p. 101 (1860).
Gayndah, Queensland ; Jerrawa, Jugiong, Clyde River, Monaro,

New South Wales ; Melbourne, Victoria ; Adelaide, South

Australia.

This species varies considerably in size (8-13 mm.) and in the

punctuation of the prothorax. In some specimens the disc on

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.E.S. 707

each side of the smooth median line is strongly and closely
punctured whilst in others the disc is shining and the punctures
much less dense. A small specimen from Gayndah in the collec-
tion of the Australian Museum appears to bear the same relation
to this species as Leperina hurnettensis does to L. cirrosa. It has
the scales on the prothorax and the elytral fascicles less con-
spicuous than those of the typical form. As it is not in a very
good stace of preservation I prefer to regard it as a variety at all
events for the present.

15. Leperina fraterna, sp. n. (A. M.)

Oblong, piceous, thickly covered with black scales, intermingled
with white and pale reddish-brown ones ; prothorax a little more
than one and a-half times as broad as long, the sides strongly
rounded ; elytra finely costate, with three fascicles on each side
composed of black spatuliform scales, the first near the humeral
angle, the other two situated in the first interstice — one about the
middle and the other just before the apex.

Head rather strongly and closely punctured, with a small black
fascicle on the inner margin of each of the eyes. Antennae dark
ferruginous. Prothorax irregularly and rather closely punctured,
with a smooth and slightly elevated median line, two indistinct
fascicles on each side considerably before the middle ; anterior
angles rounded. Scutellum rounded behind. Elytra narrower in
front than behind, finely costate, the interstices rather broad,
moderately strongly and very irregularly punctured, with several
small fascicles situated in the first, second and third interstices.
Underside ferruginous; presternum impunctatein the middle, finely
rugose at the sides ; mesosternum metasternum and abdominal
segments strongly, closely and very irregularly punctured. Legs
dark ferruginous. Length 9-12 mm. ; greatest width 3f-5 mm.

Salt River, "West Austi'alia.

Very near Leperina lacera, but separated by its narrower and
more elongate form, strongly rounded prothorax and in having the
fascicles on the elytra less conspicuous ; the sides of the prothorax

708 A LIST OP THE TROGOSITIDiE OP AUSTRALIA,

are clothed with a few clingy white scales very unlike the dense

mass of appressed scales with which the prothorax of L. lacera is

provided.

Sub-Family. IV. PELTIN.E.

The following are the chief characters of the genera of this sub-
family.

A. Antennaj with nine joints Peltonyxa

B. Antennae with ten joints.

a. Claws very slightly dentate Nea>ipls

b. Claws dentate

aa. Body almost glabrous. Presternum very slightly

dilated behind the coxae, the apex rounded Latohi'va

bb. Body densely pubescent or clothed with scales. Pro-
sternum dilated behind the coxae, the apex triangular. A ncyrona

C. Antennte with eleven joints.

a. Antennae with a gradually formed three-jointed club. Lophocatn-es

b. Antennas filiform, only slightly thickened towards

the extremity Peltoschema

Peltonyxa.

Reitter, Verh. ver. Briinn XIV, p. 46(1876).

Body elongate, very slightly pubescent. Head truncate in front,
slightly emarginate on each side, with a transverse impression on
the disc between the antennae. Antennae nine jointed, the first
joint very much, the second slightly thickened, the club three-
jointed. Prothorax scarcely emarginate in front, the anterior
angles only slightly produced. Elytra punctate-striate. Prosternum
between the coxae narrow, the apex not dilated.

16. Peltonyxa Deyrollei. (A.M.)

Peltonyxa Deyrollei, Reitter, Verh. ver. Briinn, XIV., p. 46
(1876).

Lane Cove, Sydney, New South Wales.

Herr Reitter's descx'iption of this species is as follows : —
" Elongata, levissime subconvexa, fusco-ferruginea, subtus ferru-
gineo-testacea, subopaca,vix perspicuepubescens ; capite thoraceque
obsolete punctatis, hoc lateribus pauUo dilutiore, elytris elongatis,
striato-punctatis, interstitiis alternis elevatis. Long. 4.2 mm."

by a. sidney olliff, f.e.s. , 709

Neaspis.
Pascoe, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), X., p. 317(1872).

17. Neaspis variegata,. (A.M.)

Soronia variegata, Macleay, Trans. Ent. Soc, N. S. Wales, II.,
p. 161 (1873).

Neaspis suhtrifasciata, Reitter, Verb. ver. Briinn, XIV., p. 47
(1876).

Gayndah, Ipswich, Queensland ; Clarence River, Lane Co^'e,
Sydney, Bowenfels, Port Hacking, Illawarra, Bombala, Giindagai,
New South Wales ; Melbourne, Victoria.

I have little doubt that the above synonymy is correct. The
type of Soronia variegata in the collection of the Australian
Museum agrees in every particular with the description of Neaspis
suhtrifasciata. This insect is abundant in the neighbourhood of
Sydney.

18. Neaspis villosa.

Neaspis villosa, Pascoe, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), X., p. 318
(1872).
Australia.

19. Neaspis sculpturata.

Neaspis sculpturata, Reitter, Verb. ver. Briinn XIV., p. 48,
pi. 2, fig. 29 (1876).

" Elongato-ovalis, nitida, nigra, lateribus prothoracis elytro-
rumque, antennis, pedibvis, corpore infra ferrugineis, supra setulis
albidis et nigris brevibus subsquamulosis minus dense variegatis,
capite thoraceque parce fortiter, minus profunda punctatis,
interstitiis punctorum subtilissime dense punctulatis ; lateribus
thoracis elytrorumque subtiliter lanuginoso-ciliatis, his dense
gequaliter punctato-striatis, interstitiis angustissimis leviter elevatis
et dense inten-uptis, alternis paullo magis elevatis. Long. 4.5 mm."

Melbourne, Victoria.

LATOLyEVA.

Reitter, Verb. ver. Briinn XIV., p, 49 (1876).

710 A LIST OP THE TKOGOSITID.E OP AUSTRALIA,

Body broadly ovate, almost glabrous or clothed with short
inconspicuous pubescence. Head somewhat dentate in the middle.
Antennas ten jointed, the club three jointed and loosely articulated.
Presternum behind the coxte very slightly dilated, rounded at the
apex.

20. Latol.eva cassidoides. (A, IM.)

Latolceva cassidoides, E,eitter, Verh. ver. Briinn XIV., p. 50
(1876).

Cape York, Endeavour River, Queensland.

Specimens from the above localities appear to agree with this
Malaccan species, which is probably of very wide range. The
following is Herr Reitter's description : —

Breviter-ovalis, depressa, nitida, ferruginea, oculis nigris, parce
hand perspicue nigro pubescens, capite crebre fortiter punctato,
prothorace antice angustato, minus dense sat profunde punctato ;
elytris subparallelis, apice rotundatis, lateribus minus valde expla-
natis, dorso elevato-sublineatis, interstitiis sat profunde biseriatira
punctatis. Long. 7, h\t. 4 mm.

Ancyrona.

Reitter. Verh. ver. Briinn XIV., p. 51 (1876).

Body broad, densely pubescent or clothed with scales. Head
scarcely dentate in the middle. Antennte ten jointed, the club
three jointed and loosely articulated. Prosternum behind the
coxse triangularly dilated.

Section 1. Elytra punctate- striate or striate-jmnctate.

21. Ancyrona laticeps, sp. n. (A.M.)

Elongate-ovate, depressed, narrower in front than behind, fer-
ruginous, shining, thickly covered with long woolly pubescence;
head and prothorax strongly and rather closely punctured, the
former very broad ; elytra with feebly raised costaj, the interstices
broad and provided with two rows of rather large punctures.

Head transverse, more than one and a-half times as broad as
long, rather closely covered with elongated punctures. Antennte

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.E.S. 711

testaceous, the club composed of three loosely articulated joints.
Prothorax at the base considerMV)ly more than twice as broad as
long, narrowed and rather deeply emarginate in front ; anterior
angles rounded, prominent ; lateral margins reflexed, rather broad,
moderately strongly and closely punctured. Scutellum transverse,
rounded behind, finely punctured. Elytra about twice as long as
the head and piothorax together, narrower in front than behind
the suture slightly raised ; each elytron with six feebly raised costte
which extend to just before the apex, the interstices broad and
provided with two rows of rather large punctures ; latei-al margins
broad, reflexed, finely and closely punctured, clothed with long
yellowish pubescence. Underside reddish testaceous, shining, very
feebly and sparingly punctured ; under-mai-gins of the elytra pale
ferruginous. Legs reddish testaceous, knees and claws darker.
Length 5-6|mm. ; greatest width 3-3|^ mm.

Wide Bay, Queensland ; Lane Cove, Sydney, New South Wales.

The elongated form of this species, in conjunction with its long
erect pubescence, its ovate and rather deeply punctured elyti-a, and
its broad head, will serve to distinguish it from all the known
species of the genus.

22. Ancyrona ^gra, sp. n. (A. M.)

Ovate, somewhat depressed, slightly broader in front than
behind, pale ferruginous, shining, densely clothed with short yellow
pubescence ; head and prothorax moderately strongly and not very
olosely punctured; elytra distinctly but not very strongly punctate-
striate, the alternate interstices feebly raised.

Antennas reddish testaceous, the club composed of three loosely
articulated joints. Prothorax at the base more than twice as long
as broad, considerably narrowed and rather deeply emarginate
in front ; lateral margins rather broad, strongly reflexed and
finely punctured. Scutellum rounded behind, finely punctured.
Elytra about twice as long as the liead and prothoi-ax together,
distinctly and not very strongly punctate-striate, the interstices
nariow and alternately raised ; lateral margins moderately broad,
reflexed, finely punctured and clothed with short yellow pubescence.

712 A LIST OP THE TROGOSITIDiE OF AUSTRALIA,

Underside reddish testaceous, sterna and abdominal segments
extremely finely and sparingly punctured. Legs reddish testaceous.
Length 4 mm. ; greatest width 2J- mm.

Lane Cove, Sydney, New South Wales.

Readily known by its small size, by the punctuation of its
elytra (which are arcuately narrowed behind) and by its finely
pubescent surface.

23. AncVrona Gestroi.

Ancyrona Gestroi, Reitter, Ann, Mus. Genov., XV., p. 459
(1880).

Somerset, North Australia ; also recorded from New Guinea.

24. Ancyrona latebrosa, sp. n. (A.M.)

Broadly ovate, ferruginous, somewhat shining, thickly clothed
with short grey and black pubescence ; head and prothorax finely
and not very closely punctured ; elytra moderately strongly
punctate-striate, the alternate interstices slightly elevated : each
elytron with an indistinct black fascia near the base, and another
narrower and even less distinct fascia just before the apex.

Head transverse. Antennae reddish testaceous, the club com-
posed of three loosely articulated joints. Prothorax at the base
about twice the width of the head, considerably narrowed and
moderately emai-ginate in front ; the anterior and posterior angles
rounded ; the lateral margins broad, reflexed and finely punctured.
Scutellum ti-ansverse, rounded behind, clothed with pubescence.
Elytra about twice the length of the head and prothorax together,
modei-ately strongly punctate-striate, the interstices narrow and
alternately raised ; lateral margins modei-ately broad, reflexed.
Underside of the head and prosternum ferruginous, the latter very
finely and sparingly punctured ; mesosternum, metasternum and
abdominal segments testaceous, finely and not very closely
punctured. Legs testaceous. Length 5 mm. ; greatest width
2i^mm.

Wide Bay, Queensland.

A very distinct species apparently belonging to the same section
of the genus as the Japanese Ancyrona Leiaisi of Reitter.

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.E.S. 71S

Section 2 — Elytra irregularly jmnctured.

25. Ancyrona AMIGA, sp. n. (A. M.)

Ovate, depressed, dark ferruginous brown, shining, finely,
rather closely and irregularly punctured ; head and prothorax
moderately closely covered with grey scales and very fine
pubescence ; each elytron with an indistinct reddish testaceous
marking near the suture extending from the base to just behind
the middle, where it is bent inwards, the scales forming regular
rows on the disc.

Head rather small, transverse. Antennae ferruginous, the club
compact, three jointed, Prothoi'ax at the base more than twice as
broad as long, deeply emarginate in front, finely and irregularly
punctured ; anterior angles acute ; the lateral margins broad,
slightly reflexed, finely punctured and aciculate. Scutellum
transverse, rounded behind, finely and rather closely punctured.
Elytra more than one and-a-half times as long as the head and
prothorax together, the sides nearly parallel for two thirds of their
length then arcuately narrowed to the apex ; lateral margins
broad, slightly reflexed. Underside and legs pale ferruginous.
Length 4| mm. ; greatest width 2f mm.

Albany, West Australia ; Port Lincoln, South Australia.

This very distinct Ancyrona may be known at once from the
other species here enumerated by its having the elytra finely and
irregularly punctured (not punctate-striate) and the scales on the
disc arranged in rows.

26. Ancyrona vesca, sp. n. (A.M.)

Ovate, moderately depressed, dark ferruginous brown, somewhat
shining, very finely, closely and irregulai'ly punctured ; latei-al
margins pale ferruginous ; head and prothorax closely covered with
small grey scales and very fine pubescence ; each elyti-on with two
indistinct reddish testaceous spots near the suture, one at the base
the other just behind the middle, the scales forming irregular rows
on the disc.

714 A LIST OF THE TROGOSITID.E OP AUSTRALIA,

Head transverse. Antennse pale ferruginous, the club moderately
compact, three jointed. Prothorax at the base more than twice
as broad as long, deeply emarginate in front ; anterior angles
acute ; lateral margins very broad, reflexed, finely punctured and
pubescent. Scutellum very small, transverse, very finely and
closely punctured. Elytra about one and a half times as long as
the head and prothorax together, slightly narrowed behind, finely
and closely punctured on the disc, more finely and closely
punctured near the sides ; lateral margins broad, reflexed and
finely punctured. Underside and legs rather pale ferruginous.
Length 2f-3Jmm. ; greatest width 2-21 mm.

Moriai'o, New South Wales ; South Australia ; King George's
Sound, West Av;stralia.

Allied to the preceding species but easily separated by its smaller
size and more ovate form, by its more arcuately rounded prothorax
and by its pale coloured lateral margins.

Peltoschema.

Eeitter, Yerh. ver. Brxinn, XVIII., p. 4 (1880).

This genus is only known to me by the abstract of Herr
Reitter's description published in the " Zoological Record," for
1880, judging from which it appears to differ from all the
Australian forms in having the prothorax bilobed and the anteu.i jb
eleven jointed and filiform.

27. Peltoschema filicornis.
Peltoschema filicornis, Reitter, Verb. ver. Briinn, XVIII.. p. 5
(1880).
Australia.

LOPHOCATERES.

Olliff, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1883, p. 180 and Cist, Ent. III.,
p. 58 (1883).

Body elongate, free from scales. Head almost truncate in
front. Antennee eleven jointed, the eighth joint somewhat
broader than the preceding ones, the three terminal joints
forming a gradual and moderately compact club. Elytra finely

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIPF, P.E.S. 715

costate. Prosternum projecting behind the coxae. Tibise armed
on their outer margins with short sharp spines ; the posterior
tibite with a row of inconspicuous bhint teeth at the apex
projecting over the first joint of the tai'sus.

In Herr Reitter's revision of the Trogositidae the Ostoma Ivani
of Allibert was placed in Grynocharis, which was regarded as a
division of Ostoma, but subsequently (Verh. ver. Briinn, XX.,
p. 36, 1882), it was referred by the same author to Gaurambe also
treated as a division of Ostoma. In my opinion Lophocateres
has quite as good claim to generic rank as Ancyrona, Latolceva and
other groups recently separated from the old genus Ostoma.

28. Lophocateres Ivani. (A.M.)

Ostoma Ivani, Allib. Rev. Zool., 1847, p. 12.

Peltis j)usilla, Klug, Ins. Madag., p. 1.59.

Sydney, New South Wales ; in rice and other grain.

This species although not very common is spread over the whole
world. It has been recorded from South America, Madagascar,
Siam and China. In Europe it is known from Spain, and I have
myself captured it in a herbarium in London. At Leyden I have
seen specimens in dried apples where chey were found in all stages
by my friend Mr. C. Ritsema.

47

716 NOTES FROM TME AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM,

NOTES FEOM THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM.

A New Butterfly of the family LYCiENio^ from the Blue
Mountains.

By a. Sidney Olliff, F.E.S.,

Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

The very distinct species described below was taken by myself
during the second week in September, at Katoomba, on the Blue
Mountains, at an elevation of 3,350 feet above the sea level.
Among other butterflies found at the same time, I may mentoin
Xenica hobariia, Westw., as, 1 believe, it has not previously been
recorded from New South "Wales. Mr. Meyrick has taken this
species at Fernshaw, Victoria, in December.

ClIRTSOPIIANUS cyprotus, sp. n.

^ Dull coppery fulvous, with purple reflections ; the apical third
of the costa and the hind-margins narrowly bordered with dark
fuscous. Forewing with a broad bright purple median fascia-like
spot, extending from vein 1-7, narrowed at both extremities, the
posterior margin produced into acute teeth along the veins ; both
wings purple at the base, hindwing more broadly. Underside
ashy grey. Forewing with a very small black double dot at the
end of the discoidal cell, and two transverse series of five or six
crescentic dots near and parallel to the hind-margin. Hindwing
with the following black dots — a series of four near the base, one
near the base of the subcostal nervui-e, two transverse parallel
series, one just behind the cell, the other half way between the cell
and the hind margin, a similar and less distinct series nearer the
hind-margin. Cilia grey, with obscure blackish dots on the veins.
Exp. 36 mm.

BY SIDNEY OLLIFF, P.E.S. 717

9 Bright purple. Forewing with the costa from base rather
widely bordered with dark fuscous, towards apex very broadly,
coalesciug with a moderately broad hind-marginal border. Hind-
wing narrowly bordered with dark fuscous, on the costa much
more broadly. Underside as in male. Exp. 38 mm.

Katoomba, New South Wales (3,350 feet).

I consider the genus Ghrysophanus to be defined as distinct from
Lyccena by the possession of naked eyes, consequently erinus, Fabr.
and heathi, Cox, (1) hitherto placed in Lyccena, are correctly
referable to ChrysopJianus, and are, in fact, nearly allied to the
present species ; the spinose tarsi and anterior tibias probably afford
a good secondary character.

(1) Entom. VI , p. 402 (1873).

718 A REMARKABLE FISH FROM LORD HOWE ISLAND,

A REMARKABLE FISH FROM LORD HOWE ISLAND.
Plate XLVII.

By William Macleay, F.L.S, etc.

Mr.- H. T. Wilkinson, Visiting Magistrate of Lord Howe Island,
brought with him from that place, a few weeks ago, a Fish which
had been picked up dead on the beach there. It was handed to
me for identification, or, if new, for description, by his brother
Mr. 0. S. Wilkinson, Government Geologist.

I cannot find a record anywhere of the existence of any such
fish, and indeed so curious is it in many particulars, that I cannot
even venture to point out its afiinities. I have given it the generic
name of Ctenodax, from a fancied resemblance to the teeth of the
Odacina, but it cannot be placed in that group, nor indeed in any
gi'oup of the Labridce, and I am not at all sure that it belongs even
to the order Acanthoptery gii pharyngognathi. In the meantime,
imperfect though my diagnosis is, I give a drawing and description
of it, so that others may have the opportunity of forming an
opinion of what is undoubtedly a very extraordinary Fish.

Genus. Ctenodax.

Of elongate subcylindrical form. Scales small, firm, rigid,
ctenoid, keeled, and spinous. Dorsal fin long, the spinous portion
low, the spines only connected by a membrane at the base. Head
rounded at the muzzle. Teeth in a single row. Lower jaw
pointed and deeply emarginate at the symphysis. A bony ridge on
the vomer. The tongue pointed and cup-shaped. Mouth oblique.
Eye large. Lateral line continuous and nearly straight. Ventral
fins 5, short and close together. Caudal fin small and forked, two
sti'ong converging keels on the tail. Gills, 4. Branchiostegals, 3.

BY WILLIAM MACLEAY, F.L.S., &0. 7l»

Ctenodax "Wilkinsoni.

D. 14/10. A. 1/10. L. lat. 90. L. tr. 7/U.

The height of the body at the ventral fins is one-seventh of th©
total length ; the length of the head is nearly one-fourth of the
same. The form is elongate, very slightly compressed and tapering
towards the tail. The scales are closely adherent to the skin
and to one another, so that it is extremely difficult to separate
one for examination, but the drawing by Dr. von Lendenfeld
(fig. 5), gives a good idea of the general character of them.
Each scale has about eleven longitudinal ridges with 5 or 6
recumbent spines on each ridge ; laterally the scales overlap one
another as shown in fig. 6, but the free posterior edge of eaeh
only very slightly overlaps the one behind it. The scales in
the aggregate as shown in fig. 4, assume an appearance of being
square, with a multiplicity of parallel longitudinal lines
crossed at right angles by similar transverse lines. The spinous
dorsal fin, which commences over the middle of the ventrals is
composed of short, strong, isolated spines, connected at the base
only by a membrane ; the soft dorsal which is continuous with it,
is shorter and higher, and densely scaly. The anal fin is like the
soft dorsal, but is placed a little nearer the tail, the spine is
minute. The caudal fin is small and forked ; two very strong
keels or ridges on the tail converge towards the middle of the fork
of the fin.

The pectoral fins are rather small, about twice the length of the
ventrals, which are placed close together. The eye is large, lateral,
much nearer to the upper than under surface of the head, and
slightly nearer the snout than the extremity of the operculum.
That and the preoperculum are unarmed and densely covered with
scales. The snout is rounded and without scales. The mouth is
oblique ; the maxillary extending to beneath the anterior margin
of the orbit.

The teeth are in a single row, long, slender, and so packed
together as to resemble the solid teeth of the iScaridce, excepting

720 A REMARKABLE PISH FROM LORD HOWE ISLAND.

at their apices which are free and minutely pointed. Fig. 2 shows
distinctly the teeth of the lower jaw. In the upper jaw there are
at the symphysis some round, smooth, nodular-like protuberances
extending some distance back on the vomer. The color is uniform
sooty black. Length, 7 inches.

I have been compelled, in the foregoing description, to confine
myself entirely to external characters ; a complete and satisfactory
investigation could not be made without injury to the specimen.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLVII,

Fig. 1. — Ctenodax Wilkinsoni. Nat. size.

Fig. 2. — Side view of mouth magnified.

Fig. 3. — Front view of ditto ditto.

Fig. 4. — Some scales of side slightly magnified.

Fig. 5. — Single scale magnified.

Fig. 6. — Three scales of transverse row in natural position magnified.

RECENT CHANGES IN THE FOREST-FLORA OF THE
INTERIOR OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

By R. v. Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

At my request Mr. Ridston, Foi-est Ranger of Condoblin,
compiled his experience on the above subject, and wrote a report
thereon to the Department of Mines. The Under-Secretavy has
kindly allowed parts of it, which I consider to be of general
scientific intei^est, to be read before this Society. These, together
with other observations, are used to exi)lain certain interesting
changes in the forest flora of the interior.

In 1863 there was little or no pine scrub (Callitris) in the
Lachlan district. In 1883 the pine had taken possession of the
district and was rapidly superseding the .^ngiosperm trees, which
previously formed the forest in that district. It appeared to be
only a question of time, when the forest would be converted into
a pine forest. In 1885, when engaged in collecting timber
specimens, Mr. Ridston could not obtain a single sound tree of any
size with the exception of the pine. I myself visited the Mooramba
district at the beginning of 1885 and found theie a prevalence of
pine which was, according to the statements of old residents, a new
acquisition in that district.

The pine seemed to grow equally well in damp hollows and
on dry hills.

It appears, however, that the pine has now reached its maximum
development in that district, as patches of it are completely dying
out in consequence of the ravages of a beetle, Diadoxus
erythrurus or rather its larva. According to the statements of
old I'esidents, this beetle and its effects on the pine have never
before been observed, and it would therefore appear that there is a

722

RECENT CHANGES IN THE FOREST-FLORA OF N.S.W,

certain correlation between the beetle and the pine. There can be
little doubt that the spread of this beetle is dependent to some
extent on the prevailing climate.

The mean rainfall in Sydney from 1840-1863 was about 48
inches, whilst that of the period from 1863-1880 was about 55
inches. The mean rainfall for the period 1880-1884 was only
about 40 inches.

As sufficient observations have not been made in the interior,
we can only consider the Sydney x'esults ; and although it is
doubtful whether there is much similarity in the rainfall of
Sydney and the Interior, still it appears likely that a series of dry
years in Sydney indicates an isochrone drought in the interior.

If we compare the observations mentioned above we shall arrive
at the following result : —

1840-1863.

Avercage rainfall 48 inches.
(Sydney.)

No Pine Scrub.
Beetle ?

1863-1880.

Average rainfall 55 inches.
(Sydney.)

Pine Scrub spreading.
No Beetle,

1880-1884.

Average rainfall 40 inches.
(Sydney.)

Pine Scrub disappearing.
Beetle prevalent.

It seems from this, that the drought is favourable to the spread
of the Diodoxus erythrurus and that this beetle then destroys the
pine, whilst the wet years prevent the development of this species,
which seems to attack the pine only, and enables the pine scrub
again to spread.

This little contribution to the influence of climate on the flora
and fauna may perhaps hereafter be of use to scientists investi-
gating this most important subject.

THE AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER RHIZOPODA.
By R. v. Lendenfeld, Ph.D.

Part I.

It is intended to enumerate the Australian species and describe
such as may be new, in this paper.

1. Amoeba villosa. Wallich.

I have seen a great number of Amoeba3 recently from various
parts of the Botany Swamps, and they all seem to be very similar
to the species described as A. villosa, by "Wallich. These Australian
specimens are very large and creep about very rapidly between the
roots of Sphagnum. The posterior end — that is the one behind
in motion — generally possesses the short villi-like pseudopodia
characteristic of the above species. These, however, appear not to
be present invariably ; often ordinary lobate pseudopodia are seen
on all sides.

The outer layer of protoplasm is hyaline ; in the interior there
are small and highly refractive granules in great abundance, and
others of larger size and spherical in shape. These are very
numerous in the large specimen, but the younger ones appear more
transparent.

The nucleus is large and spherical ; being, however, very soft,
its shape is liable to great variations as the animal moves along.
The whole inner portion is occupied by a transpai'ent vacuole which
is enclosed in a very clear reticulation. The chromatin threads of
the superficial reticulation do not extend to the interior of the
nucleus, which is occupied by achromatin only.

Osmic acid specimens and also acetic acid specimens show this
particularly well.

724 THE AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER RHIZOPODA,

2. Arcella vulgaris. Ehrenberg.

This species occurs in all freshwater lagoons and creeks suitable.

It appears that the Australian forms are more rounded at the
margin and do not possess so sharp a margin as it is figured for
instance by Biitschli in Bronn's Classen und Ordnungen des
Thierreichs, Band I., Tafel II., fig. 9a.

3. LiEBERKUEHNiA AusTRALis. Nova Species

This species differs from the species described by Cienkovsky,
Liebei'kuehnia pakidosa, particularly by its being very much more
slender — nearly 6 times as long as broad.

The nucleus is spherical, the pseudepodia straight and unljranched.
The hyaline shell is conical and abruptly cut ofi" at the narrow end.
The aperture is situated at the broader end of the conic shell.

Not very frequent at Botany Swamps.

4. EcHiNOPYxis AUSTRALIS. Nova species.

This species appears like an Arcella with spines. There is no
hexagonal reticulate sculpture on the shell, which is brownish-grey
in color.

The spines are situated in a circle on the margin of the flattened
shell, in length about J of the diameter of the shell, from 7-10 in
number, and obtusely pointed.

The last part resembles Arcella vulgaris in every I'espect.

Botany Swamps, not very frequent.

5. Lecquereusia spiralis. Lecq.

This species has been found in the Botany Swamps, attached to
Sphagnum, in November by me.

6. DiFFLUGiA PYRiFORMis. Perty.

This species is frequent in Botany Swamps.

It is very remarkable that of these 6 species only two seem to be
specifically Australian, and even these may be identical with
species from elsewhere.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 725

No peculiar or remarkable form of freshwater Rhizopod has
been found" in Australia.

Of course it is not possible to say whether the species enumerated
are indigenous or not.

We could easily imagine that some specimens of one or the other
might have been brought in the freshwater in ships or in other
ways. We can, however, not assume that there were no freshwater
Rhizopoda in Australia before the advent of Europeans, and so it
seems that some of these species are indigenous.

It is impossible that they should travel through the wide
expanse of salt water which divides Australia from the other
Continents.

We cannot suppose that they can have developed inde-
pendently of each other, because they are so very similar in detail,
and must therefore assume that they are animals of very great
geological age, and that they have remained unchanged all the time,
since the laudbridge between Australia and any other Continent
disappeared.

The fact that no Rhizopods peculiar to Australia have been
found, seems to indicate that no recent spontaneous generation has
occuri'ed.

AN ALGA, FORMING A PSEUDOMORPH OP A SILICIOUS SPONGES,

AN ALGA, FORMING A PSEUDOMORPH OF A
SILICIOUS SPONGE,

R. V. Lendenpeld, Ph.D.

(Plate XLVIIL, Fig. 5.)

(From the Australian Museum Laboratory.)

The sponge in question is a new species of Dactylochalina, and
I will give a short description of it here, before entering on the
subject proper of this paper.

Dactylocpialina australis. Nova species.

The outer appearance of the sponge is very similar to that of
Dactylochalina reticulata, R. v. Lendenfeld, described ina previous
paper in this number of the Proceedings.

The whole sponge in Dactylochalina australis, is formed of
cylindrical elongate parts, 8-10 mm. in diameter, with a circular
transverse section and numerous large oscula. These are circular,
and have an average diameter of 3 mm. The surface of these
digitate structures is not smooth and regular as in other species,
but appears rather rough and irregular in consequence of the
presence of irregular protuberances and numerous sharp curves.
The oscula are slightly raised. The length of these digitate pro-
cesses is 150-250 mm.

A number, 6-20, of such cylindrical digitates grow out from a
common base. They never form anastomoses.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 727

The skeleton consists of a network of tine horny fibres, in the
axis of which spicules ac- are contained. These ai'e larger than in
most other species ; they are pretty numerous, straight, and
decidedly spindle-shaped, gradually pointed.

Dactylochalinaaustralishas been found in Port Jackson (Ramsay,
V. Lendenfeld), Port Phillip (v. Lendenf eld), and Western Australia
(Baily). Among the numerous specimens of Dactylochalina
australis nova species examined by me, there were three which,
although similar in shape, could be distinguished from the others
by their greater rigidity. These came from Western Australia.
On microscopic investigation, it was found that these specimens
(dry) were not sponges at all, but Algae. The whole structure is
mainly formed of continually ramifying cylindrical branches, which
form occasional anastomoses, and terminate on the surface of the
digitate sponge with rounded ends. This structure is of a very
uniform nature throughout. The thickest stems and branches are
found in the interior ; they measure 0-15 mm. in diameter. The
final ramifications have a thickness of 0*08 mm.

The meshes of the network formed by these threads, are about
0-5 mm. wide, and somewhat similar to the interstices between the
horny fibres in species of Dendrilla, but totally diflerent from the
shape of the meshes in the Chalinid sponges.

The threads themselves are formed of the ordinary vegetable
cells, which are remarkable for their extremely thick wall.

On burning portions of the specimens, and examining the ash,
the same spicules are found in great numbers, which are present in
Dactylochalina australis the sponge, whose shape this Alga so
closely resembles.

In every detail the shape of the sponge is copied ; the protuber-
ances on the surface, and the oscula are there, but not a trace of
the horny skeleton of the sponge can be detected.

In the specimens examined no spores were found, so that I am
not able to identify the Alga. It seems to be one of the Floridese.
There can be no doubt — this is proved by the presence of the silici-

728 AK ALGA, FORMING A PSEUDOMORPII OF A SILICIOUS SPONGE.

ous spicules — that these structures are Pseudomorplis of the Dactj-
lochalina australis. I assume, that the Alga is a pai-asitic species
growing in the sponge, and extending throughout the whole body of
it. The sponge is thereby resorbed by the Alga. The soft parts and
horny fibi-es disappear, whilst the silicious spicules are left, and
appeal', on close examination, adhering to the outer side of the stem
and branches of the Alga. In this way this Alga forms a true
Pseudomorph of the sponge.

I do not think it in any way comparable with other more simple
Alga-parasites found in sponges, which cause the formation of the
filaments in the Thicinidse, and others.

EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURE.
(Plate XLVIII., Fig. 5.)
Section throiigh a portion of the Pseudomorph magnified.

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF ONCHIDIUM.
By John Brazier, C.M.Z.S.

OxciiiDiUM Chameleon. Nov. sp.

Animal large, variable in colour, from dark brown to yellowish
brown and blackish brown. Back regularly rounded, granulose or
papillose all over. No eyes to be seen in the papilla with either
the lens or microscope ; marked with two longitudinal yellowish
lines, rather broad, one on each side of the dorsal surface and nearly
extending to the posterior end where they meet in the form of
the letter V., tough and coriaceous. Eyes globular blue black, on
rather short ringed constricted tentacles. Muzzle thick and
strong, somewhat crescentic shaped and corrugated, slightly
divided in the middle. Foot rough, of a dirty yellowish brown
colour, the forepart rounded, the hinder part narrow and pointed,
the under surface of the mantle edge tinged with light yellow and
blue black. Spirit specimens show it of a blue black only.

Long, 61 ; breadth at head, 15 ; in middle, 17 ; at tail, 14 milli-
meters, when crawling.

Long, 38 ; breadth at head, 23 ; in middle, 21 ; at tail, 15 milli-
meters, when dormant.

Long, 23 ; bi-eadth at head, 8 ; in middle, 11 ; at tail, 9 milli-
meters, spirit specimens.

Hah : Lane Cove River, Port Jackson, N. S. Wales.

730 STRUCTURE OF THE DORSAL PAPILLA OF ONCHIDIUM.

PRELIMINARY REPORT ON THE HISTOLOGICAL
STRUCTURE OF THE DORSAL PAPILLA OF
CERTAIN SPECIES OF ONCHIDIUM.

By R. von Lendenfeld, Pn.D.

(From the Australian Museum Laboratory.)

The structure of the tubercles was studyed by means of section
series, through specimens of Onchidium chameleon, Brazier,
described above, and Onchidium Diimelii, Semper. The specimens
were collected by Mr. Whitelegge in Port Jackson, hardened with
osmic acid and stained in various ways.

The results of this investigation are the following : —

1. Onchidium chameleon has small papillae and has no eyes, 0.
Damelii has generally three large eyes on each papilla, these are
situated laterally.

2. My investigations carried on with excellent material, corro-
borate the descriptions given by Semper (1) of the eyes of Onchidia
perfectly.

3. The eyes of Onchidium Damelii belong to Semper's group I.,
eyes with an epithelial retina.

4. The epithelium of the tubercles is of identical structure in
the species with, and the species without, dorsal eyes, and formed

(1) C. Semper. Ueber Sehorgane von dem Typus der Wirbelthieraugen
auf dem Riicken von Schnecken — Reisen ini Archipel der Philippinen
Zweiter Theil.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 731

of an outer layer of low cylinder cells, between which there are
slender sensitive cells, particularly abundant round the eyes or on
the sides of the tubercles (blind species.)

5. The otolith-like concretions in tlie numerous vesicles of the
dorsal skin are composed of carbonate of lime and homologous to
parts of the shell of other related pulmonates.

6. The eyes multiply by division, semi-detached eyes, and such
with a simple spherical pigment layer, but with two lenses are not
rare.

7. The lens consists apparently of one single cell which retains
its nucleus and vitality, and may divide into two. A sphincter-
shaped circular accommodation muscle is clearly visible.

8. The retina is of a much more complicated nature than
Semper, who only had spirit specimens at his disposal, was able to
discover. The radiating fibres of the nervus opticus are inter-
spersed with small ganglia cells. Below these follow cells with
peculiar plano-concave bodies in them, which are highly refractive.
These cells are broad and cylindrical. The final branches of the
Opticus extend downward between them to a layer of multipolar
cells below. Below this layer of granular (osmic acid) ganglia cells,
cylindrical and very regular hexagonal cells are found ; the axis
of each is situated in the direction of the entering light. These
hexagonal cells are attached to the pigment-skin at the outer limit
of the retina. Pigment granules extend up the sides of the
partition walls of these hexagonal cells for some distance. The
walls themselves are thickened below, and in this way concave
spaces are formed, one at the bottom of each hexagonal cell.
These spaces are completely surrounded by pigment.

In the centi'e of each, a rod (Stabchen) is situated. This has a
conical shape, is attached with a broad base to the bottom of the
concave space, and tapers rapidly at first and more gradually after-
wards, to a fine point. Its faces Appear concave. The upper
pointed end of the rod is continued in the shape of a very fine
thread extending through the centre of the hexagonal cell and
joining the ganglia cell-layer.
48

76)i STRUCTURE OP THE DORSAL PAPILLA OF ONCHIDIUM,

9. Nothing is to be added to Semper's statements regai-ding the-
nervi optici.

10. It is remarkable that the Onchidium Damelii never retracts
her tubercles or feelei's, however near the forceps or scissors
approach them until they are actually iia contact. This might lead
one to assume that this animal is farsighted.

11. The concave lenses on the upper ends of the facets, below
the large spherical main lens, appear as a secondary arrangement
produced for the purpose of counteracting the bad effect of an oval
or spherical lens in air.

The lens was originally, probably, adapted for seeing in water,
and therefore had such a great curvature and short focus. When
the Onchidium took to living on land this lens was too strong — for
use in air — and then the little concave cells might have been
produced to counteract the excessive power of the main lens.

OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN
POLYCBJETA.

By William A. Haswell, M.A., B.Sc,

Lecturer on Zoology and Comparative Anatomy, Sydney
University.

Part I.

[With Plates L.— LV.]

L SYLLID^.

Kinberg (1) has described two species of this family {Tho'e
fusi/orniis and Eurymedv^a picta) obtained in Port Jackson
during the voyage of the " Eugenie." These are, as far as I am
aware, the only species of Syllidoi that have been described from
the Australian coast. I have not been able to obtain access to the
more detailed descriptions of these Annelids given in the " Annu-
lata " of the " Eugenics Resa," (the two copies of that work
which I have had the opportunity of examining being both
incomplete), but by a careful analysis of the short definitions in
the preliminary paj^er above referred to I have convinced myself
that the species in question are both distinct from any of the six
described in the present memoir.

Of these six species one (Sijllis corruscans), is very remarkable
in several respects, and most especially in the presence in the
section of its alimentary canal which I here call the gizzard, of
striated muscular tissue of a very marked type — a tissue which
has never before been described as occurring in the Annelida.

(1) " Annulatanova." Ofvers. of K. Vet-Akad. Fcirh, 1864.

734 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCH/ETA,

Syllis corruscans. N. sp.
(Plate L., figs. 1—3 ; and LV., fig. 5.)

The colour of this large species is rich greenish-brown on the
dorsal surface (after preservation in alcohol, sage green) ; red on
the parapodia and the cirri, and reddish green on the under surface.
There are two broad bands of emerald green on the first three
segments, running obliquely backwards and outwards and narrow-
ing posteriorly. The head and palpi are bright crimson.

The length is usually about 3| inches, the greatest breadth J of
an inch. There are 150 to 200 segments; on an average the
segments are about four times as broad as long. In the anterior
portion of the body the breadth of the segments is about seven
times the length ; towards the middle of the length of the body
it is about five times, the breadth of the body decreasing and the
length of the segments increasing at the same time. Each of the
segments of the middle and posterior regions of the body is
marked on the dorsal surface with several impressed transverse
lines.

The head is short, twice as broad as long ; the palpi are broad
and somewhat dorso-ventrally compressed ; they are continuous
with one another for a short distance at the base, rather longer
than the head, and are habitually directed downwards ; the praes-
tomial tentacles are subequal, the mesial very slightly longer
than the lateral, a little longer than the palpi, obscurely
ringed. The anterior pair of eyes are pyriform, with the
apex directed inwards and slightly backwards. The hinder
pair are rounded, situated behind and internal to the first,
close to the posterior border of the head. There are two
subequal peristomial tentacles which are much shorter than those
of the prsestomium, and, like them, indistinctly ringed. The
dorsal cirri are longer than the tentacles, usually about equal in
length to the breadth of the body (some being a little longer,
some a little shorter), not very distinctly ringed. The number of
joints varies from ten to twenty ; in some instances a considerable

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 735

extent of the ciri-us exliibits no joints. The parapodia are well
developed, bilobed, the ventral lobe the broader, with about fifteen
compound seta), the dorsal lobe with six to eight stout, simple acicula.
The ventral cirri are leaf-like and short, scarcely I'eaching as far as
the exti-emity of the parapodia. The compound setas are not dis-
tinguishable from those of aS'. Schviardiana described below. The
anal cirri are rather stouter than the dorsal cirri immediately
preceding them, as long as the last seven or eight segments,
tipped with a small brown mark.

There is a single triangular tooth. The oesophagus in the
retracted condition extends to the twelfth segment, the gizzard to
the sixteentli.

This beautiful annelid is not uncommon in the littoral zone in
Port Jackson, and is brought up very frequently in the dredge
from various depths (up to 15 fathoms).

There are a good many points of resemblance between this
species and Syllis solida, Grube, from the Phillipines : but in the
latter species the palpi are relatively short, while the dorsal
cirri are relatively long, and the transverse lines on the dorsal
su.rface are apparently absent.

Characteristic of the hypoderm in this species (Plate LV., fig. 5)
is the presence of innumerable multitudes of unicellular glands
of flask-like form, with more or less prolonged necks, which
pierce the cuticle to open by a minute pore on the exterior.
Most of these glands are full of granular matter, which becomes'
intensely stained with hsematoxylin ; some of them, however,
are occupied by an open reticulum. The ordinary hypoderm
cells are arranged in an outer layer of vertically-elongated cells,
the outer ends of which are broad, while the inner ends are
drawn out into fine threads, and an inner layer of fibre-like
cells which form a network of fine threads with nuclei and
pigment granules.

The longitudinal muscular fibres of the body-wall form an
almost continuous layer, interrupted only along the bases of the
parapodia and along the line of the ventral nerve cord.

736 OBSERVATIONS OS SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCH^TA,

There is a circlet of about twenty compressed papillre in the
oesophagus. The tooth is hyaline, tviangalar, acutely pointed.
The part of the lining membrane external to the papillae is light
red in the living state, that of the part following light pink. The
cuticle of the oesophagus is extremely thick and hard, the epithe-
lium composed of very narrow, fibre-like cells. The structure of the
following division of the alimentary canal will be fully described
by me elsewhere (1). It has usually been regarded as a glandular
organ (Driisenmagen, proventricule, stomach), but is really much
more properly called a gizzard. It has a compai-atively thin
cuticle, like that of the outer surface, and an epithelium consisting
of non-ciliated colummar cells, with conical and spindle-like
"cellules de remplacement" at the base. The remainder of the
thick wall of the organ is composed of muscular tissue — an
external and an internal layer of the ordinary non-striated fibres
arranged circularly and longitudinally, and a middle layer, which
is by far the thickest, composed of striated fibres arranged in a
radiating manner. There is, in addition, a set of non-striped
fibres, which do not form a complete layer, but are disposed as a
series of rings between the outer ends of the striated fibres. The
wall of the organ presents on either side a raphe, where the
striated fibres are absent and the layers of non-striated fibres
blend. The striated fibres present a nucleated protoplasmic core,
and the striations in their substance are of a very marked
character. What are ordinarily described as the transverse rows
, of glands, are these rows of columns of striated muscle. They have
been described and figured as glands by many observer.s,
Claparede (2), Langerhans (3), and Ehlers (4) among the number;
their muscular character, was observed by Eisig. (5), who, how-
■ever, overlooked the striations.

(1) I have previously given the present species the temporary designation
of Syllis a.

(2) " Ann(ilides Ch6topodes du Golfe de. Naples."

(3) " Zur Wurmfauua von Madeira" and " Canarische AnneUden."

(4) " Die Borstenwurmer."

(5) "Ueber das Vorkommen eines Schwimmblasenahnlichen Organ bei
Anneliden." Mittheil. aus der Zool. Stat, zu Neapel, II. Band.

BY WILLIAM A. IIASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 737

There are two cfeca in the succeeding part of the alimentary
canal, each of which becomes branched, the branches themselves
showing a tendency to divide. The epithelium differs from that of
the gizzard in its much greater thickness, being composed of several
layers of cells, of which the superficial layer is ciliated ; the
epithelium of the caeca is looser and more irregular, and the cilia
appear to be absent.

The only other noteworthy point in the structure of the
alimentaiy canal is the presence in the epithelium of the hinder
portion of the intestine of multitudes of greenish concretions
similar to those noticed by Claparede, in Syllis gracilis.
Precisely similar bodies occur, often in large quantities, in the
epithelium of the dorsal portion of the cseca of Folynoe and
Aphrodita, and they occur also abundantly in the narrow glands
of CJdoroima and the so-called tubiparous glands of Serpida and
Sahella. It is not unlikely that these concretions are in all these
cases of a uric character, and that the organ in which they occur
acts as the nephridium of the annelid. (1)

The nerve-fibres of the ventral cord are arranged in three
distinct bundles, one smaller mesial, and two larger lateral. The
large ganglion-cells are grouped on the dorsal aspect of the ganglia.
Towards the middle line of the dorsal aspect of the cerebral
ganglia, is a group of very large ganglion-cells arranged in con-
verging lines enclosed in fibrous tissue, each group connected with
the fibrous matter of the ganglia by bands of fibres. External to
this, and nearly surrounding the whole of the fibrous matter of
the ganglia, is a layer of very small cells which form specially large
groups in the neighbourhood of the eyes.

The eye has a homogeneous crystalline lens, apparently formed
of a thickening of the cuticle, a retina composed of short rod-like
elements which do not stain readily with hsematoxylin, and a layer

(1) It is necessary to draw a clear line of distinction between the terins
"segmental organ" and "nephridium." Tlius the nephridia of Polynoe
are not the segmental organs, as Mr. A. G. Bourne maintains, but probably
the dorsal division of the intestinal caeca, the segmental organs being
generative ducts.

738 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCH^TA,

of columnar cells, which, thickly pigmented internally, are
continuous externally with fibres passing into the substance of the
cerebral ganglia.

The segmental organs are curved brown tubes opening on the
venti-al surface close to the parapodia. The function discharged
by these organs in Syllis seems not to have been positively
ascertained. No doubt they act as generative ducts, but neither
INIecznikow, Ehlers, nor Claparede, who have all noticed or
described the organs, mentions having observed them giving passage
to ova or spermatozoa.

This species increases like many of the Syllidce, by a combination
of budding and fission ; and exhibits some remarkable peculiarities
iu connection with the processes of reproduction. In specimens
obtained from between tide-marks in Port Jackson, about the
month of August, I found none in the act of proliferation ; nearly
all, however, showed a marked division of the body into two
regions — a long dark-coloured female region, in which the body
cavities of most of the segments contained ova, and a much
shorter, posterior orange-coloured male region, in which the sexual
glands wei-e imperfectly developed testes. The passage from the
one region to the other takes place somewhat abruptly about the
100th segment, the body at this point becoming narrower, and
both the parapodia and the dorsal cirri smaller. In specimens
taken at the same time in deeper water, the posterior orange-
coloured region was found to be considerably longer ; in most it
had developed on its first segment two pairs of large eyes, and
frequently was found altogether detached from the female. The
following is a description of the curious male form thus produced
by budding from the posterior end of the female : —

The colour is reddish orange, finely mottled with dark brown along
the middle of the dorsal surface. The length is an inch, the breadth
a fifth of an inch. There are forty-five segments, but some of the
posterior segments appear to be wanting in the specimens I have
examined. The head is very broad, broader than the body-segments,
and very short; its anterior border is concave. In the middle of this
concavity, on the ventral aspect, is a shoi't ciliated process, and on

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC, 739'

either side of this, just below and in front of the eye, is a broad
lobe, which seems to represent a rndimentaiy palp. At the antero-
external angle of the head is a short, horn-like tentacle. The eyes
are just behind these tentacles, placed close to the lateral border of
the head ; their breadth is about a fifth of that of the head.

The first pair of parapodia are very well developed, and are
neai-ly a fourth of the breadth of the head ; they are furnished
with about twenty setfe, all of which, except two or three on the
dorsal aspect, are compound. Like the following segments, the
first has a very long, ringed dorsal cirrus, which is very much
longer than the breadth of the body. In the following segments
the parapodia are very large and provided with two bundles of
setse, those of the dorsal fasciculus numerous, simple, very slender,
and longer than the breadth of the segments ; those of the ventral
fasciculus compound.

The cavity of the body is full of bright i-ed spermatozoa. The
alimentary canal presents no trace of its ordinary divisions, having
the form of a simple tube.

Syllis Kinbergiana. N. sp.

(Plate LI., Figs. 1-3.)

The colour of this species is light yellow, with greenish trans-
verse lines. On each segment is a pair of veiy light yellow or
greenish-white dots, which are most distinct in the middle and
posterior regions of the body. There is a patch of white on the
dorsal surface just behind the head. The head is light red, the
eyes crimson. The ordinary length is 2^ inches; the breath ^oth
of an inch. The head is short, its breadth greater than its length,
bilobed, the two halves rounded on the dorsal aspect. The palpi
are triangulai-, rather pointed, twice the length of the head,
separated from one another by a narrow interval. The median
tentacle is twice the length of the palpi, a little longer than the
lateral tentacles. The dorsal cirri are usually slightly longer than
the breadth of the segment. Their joints are very indistinct and the
number very irregular ; usually there are about a dozen joints in

740 OBSERVATIOXS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCH^TA,

each cirrus, but the number varies with the length of the aj)pendage.
The segments of the body are, as as a general rule, about 2h times
as broad as long ; their lateral borders are strongly convex. Each
of them is crossed on the dorsal surface, about its middle, by a
narrow transverse impressed line, due to the presence in that
position of a narrow transverse band of muscle. The parapodia
are not prominent; they are bilobed, the lobes pointed; there is a
stout ventral cirrus which is a little larger than the parapodium
proper, with 15 to 25 compound setse. On the dorsal side of those
are three shorter acicula.

The oesophagus is surrounded by a circlet of papillae and armed
with a single triangular, hyaline tooth. When retracted the
papillae are opposite the third segment ; the oesophagus, which is
short, extends from the fourth to the eighth segments; the gizzard,
which is also short, from the eighth to the eleventh.

There are two short cajca. The epithelium of the intestine is
full of small, solid greenish granules.

The hypoderm is fuil of oval unicellular glands, sometimes quite
clear, sometimes full of granules. All the specimens seen were
males.

This species is not uncommon among mussels and ascidians on
the shores of Port Jackson.

When compared with Grube's description of S. i(,mhricolor
one is struck by certain points of resemblance. Thus Grube
describes his specimen as marked on the dorsal surface with
grey transverse lines, and behind with impressed points, which
might perhaps be the expression in spirit specimens of the
markings described above ; but the apparent absence of acicula
and the smaller numbers of the setae in the S. umhricolor seem
to distinguish that species from the present one.

The present species is also nearly related to two European
species — S. gracilis and aS'. hamata ; but differs from both of them
in the form of the sette and the greater shortness of the gizzard ;
from the former also, apparently in the greater length of the cirri.
It is likewise allied to S. simillima of Claparede. From S.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC, 741

hacilUpara it differs, among other points, in the form of the
uniceUular glands (bacilliparous glands) of the hypoderm.
Another near relative is 8. hyalina, Grube {S. macrocola, Maren-
zeller) which, however, wants the very characteristic colouration
and markings.

There is also some resemblance to 8. hexagonifera of Claparede
("Glanures," p. 73, pi. V., fig. 2), but, besides the differences in the
markings, the present species has the palpi much shorter and
stouter as well as more divergent, the cirri relatively thicker, the
eyes larger and closer together, and the head broader in proportion
to its length.

SyLLIS TiENLEFORMIS. N. Sp.

Plate L., figs. 4 and 5.

The body of this species is long and flattened into the form of a
ribbon ; there are extremely long filiform cirri. The colour is
light red, with numerous narrow transverse brown bands, and
there are narrow bands of the same colour between the joints of
the cirri and tentacles. The head is as long as broad, bilobed
behind, with a nearly straight anteiior border, and with the antero-
lateral angles rather prominent. There are four large eyes ; the
anterior pair are circular, and placed close to the antero-lateral
angles of the head ; the posterior pair are reniform in outline,
slightly larger than the anterior pair, and placed quite close to them
and almost directly behind them, but very slightly on their inner
side. The palpi are thick, as long as the head, strongly bent out-
wards in their ordinary position. The praestomial tentacles are
long and very distinctly jointed ; the middle one is four times the
length of the head, the lateral one nearly equal to it. The peris-
tomial tentacles and the dorsal cirri are similar, much longer than
the breadth of the body, strongly ringed. There are two rather
shoi't, jointed anal cirri. The -feet are uniramous, with three
acicula, and about a dozen compound setse ; the latter have a short
blade bifid at the apex. There is a short conical ventral cirrus
about equal in length to the parapodia.

742 OBSERVATIOXS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCH-ETA,

This very beautiful species is met with occasionally in trawling
at depths of a few fathoms in Port Jackson. It is extremely
fragile, and it is difficult to preserve specimens intact for examina-
tion. Though in general appearance unlike most species of Syllis,
it presents, nevertheless, all the characters of that genus.

Syllis Sciimardiana. N. sp.
Plate LI., figs. 4-8.

The colour of this small species is light reddish yellow ; the eyes
reddish brown. The dorsal surface is mottled with reddish brown,
leaving on each segment three light spots, of which the outer pair
sometimes have a dark dot in their centre. The length is
fths of an inch ; the breadth ^th. of an inch. There are 75
segments. The body is broadest about the middle of its lengthy
tapering towards each end. The proportion of the breadth of the
segments to the length is on an average nearly as 4 to 1.

The head is prominent, I'ounded, a little broader than long ; its
dorsal surface has two rounded elevations on which the eyes are
situated. The palpi are longer than the head, widely separated
except close to the base. The anterior pair of eyes are very
slightly larger than the posterior, rounded, situated nearer to
the base of the lateral tentacles than to the posterior border of the
head ; the posterior pair are oval, with the long axis oblique,
situated behind and internal to the larger pair. The median
tentacle is about three times as long as the head, and consists of
twenty-seven joints. It is inserted by a constricted base rather
behind the posterior pair of eyes and close to the posterior border
of the head. The lateral tentacles are very slightly shorter than
the median and have twenty-five joints. They are attached
immediately in front of the anterior pair of eyes. There ai-e two
pairs of peristomial tentacles — that situated nearest the dorsal side
the longest, longer than the middle prsestominal tentacle.

The parapodia are short, but divided into a neuropodial and a
notopodial portion. The latter contains five or six stout, simple
acicula. one rr more ot which may be obscurely bidentate at the

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 743

apex. The neuropoclium contains ten to fifteen compound setfe
similar to those of S. nigroimnctata (vide infra), but more slender
and wilh the terminal part much nan-ower in proportion, and
three to five acicula. The ventral cirri are short and unjointed,
scarcely projecting beyond the ends of the parapodia.

The dorsal cirri are very long, six times the length of the para-
podia ; as long as, or a little longer than, the breadth of the body,
with about 35 to 40 very distinct and regular joints.

The oesophagus is long, extending back as far as the fifteenth
segment. There is a circlet of about thirty papillae and a conical
yellow tooth. The gizzard is long and narrow, extending over
eight segments. The glandular part of the alimentary canal is
short, extending through two segments, and has two pairs of
cfeca, the anterior pair the larger and slightly branched.

This species is to be distinguished from S. erythro'psis, Grube
(" Annulata Semperiana," p. 121), to which it shows some points
of resemblance, by the presence of the acicula and the greater
number of setse in the parapodia. From S. vittata Grube [S.
aurita Claparede, teste Marenzeller), it is distinguished by the form
of the setae and the absence of the transverse violet lines.

The bases of the dorsal cirri are full of rounded bodies which
are readily discharged by rupture.

The wall of the gizzard presents some 40 transverse rows of
radiating muscle-columns, which, on a superficial view, shew a
granular interior with reddish nuclei. Each of these columns has
a square outer end where it fits in with its neighbours to produce
the curious mosaic-like appearance presented by the wall of this
part of the alimentary tube. The centre of the outer part of each
column is occupied by a little clump of very granular protoplasm
containing the reddish nuclei referred to above. The transverse
striations are few (only some five or six in each muscle-cylinder)
but very well marked.

The epithelium of the intestine in its whole length contains large
numbers of greenish concretions similar to those found in the caeca
of Polynoe, the nephridia of Serpula, and the paired glands of

744 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCII.ETA,

Chloraevia. In most species of Syllis these bodies are found only
in the posterioi' regions of the intestine, in which position they
were noticed by Claparfede, in the case of S. gracilis.

All the three specimens which I have seen were females full of ova.
The ovaries are situated laterally near the bases of the parapodia.

Syllis nigropunctata. I^. sp.
Plate LII., figs. 1-3.
The length is ^^^ ths of an inch ; the greatest breadth about .Jo th
of an inch. The ground colour is dull yellow ; the dorsal surface
of the segments is finely mottled with grey, which leaves on each
segment two rounded spots of the ground colour, sometimes with
a dark dot in the centre of each ; at the sides of the segments are
two and three black spots : towards the posterior extremity of the
body these markings become much less conspicuous. The body is
dorso-ventrally compressed. The number of segments is from 95
to 125. The head is rather broader than long, trilobed, the
lateral lobes being very obscure, while the median one is large and
rounded. The palpi are nearly twice as long as broad, rounded,
■widely divergent in the distal three-fourths, but closely approxi-
mated at the base. The median tentacle is about four times the
length of the head, cylindrical, regularly ringed, with 22-25
joints inserted between the posterior pair of eyes, close to the
posterior border of the head ; the lateral tentacles are shorter than
the median one, with 20 joints. The anterior pair of eyes are
directed forwards upwards and outwards ; they are sitiiated a little
behind the base of the lateral prsestomial tentacles, and are of
reniform outline ; the posterior pair of eyes are situated behind
and internal to the anterior pair, they are considerably smaller
than the latter and are of circular form. The second segment is
rather broader than the third. Its tentacles (peristomial tentacles)
are two in number on each side, and much shorter than the
tentacles of the head. The segments become broader from the
anterior end of the body to the fifteenth segment and then very
gradually become narrower towards the tail. The lateral borders
of the segments are very strongly convex.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 745

The parapoclia are well developed except in the first few
segments. Each has two prominent lobes. The ventral cirrus
is rather shorter than the pai^apodia, not distinctly divided by
joints ; the dorsal cirrus is very long, as long as the body is
broad, similar to the peristomial tentacles ; moniliform at the
extremities, with the joints (usually about 30 to 40) very distinct,
except at the base. The dorsal cirri become very short towards the
anal end of the body ; the anal cirri ai-e considerably larger than
the dorsal cirri of the posterior segments of the body. The setae,
all compound, are about ten in number in each parapodium ; the
distal end of the shaft is very finely ciliate on one margin ; the
apical portion of the seta (blade) ends in two well-pronounced
teeth and its border is ornamented with fine cilia. There are
several stout aciculi, very slightly curved at the apex.

The oesophagus extends as far back as the seventeenth segment ;
it contains a single hyaline tooth and a circlet of papillae. The
gizzard extends over the following nine segments ; the proven-
triculus over four segments ; the caeca are two pairs, the anterior
the larger. The intestine presents very deep inter-segmental con-
strictions.

The segmental organs are narrow brown tubes opening on the
ventral aspect. The external orifice is a rounded opening situated
at a point a little internal to the base of the ventral cirrus ; from
this point the tube runs inwards and backwards, then curves out-
wards to open by a wide aperture into the cavity of the segment.
The tube is lined with somewhat irregular cells, having internal
rounded ends, with the summits of which the long cilia are con-
nected. It is very rare to find the cilia in active movement in
specimens examined under the compressorium.

Found under stones between tide marks, at Neutral Bay, Port
Jackson.

This species bears some likeness to Syllis variegata, Grube, but
is much broader in proportion, has shorter tentacles and cirri, the
palpi more divergent, and the head more pointed.

This species, like many of the family, increases by a process of
budding and fission. About the 95th segment of the body in a

746 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCII.ETA,

male specimen, having in all 125 segments, there is a sudden slight
increase of the breadth, and the first of the broader segments
bears two pairs of prominent brown eyes ; just behind the eyes,
on the same segment, is a parapodium similar to those of the
other segments.

In the hypoderm a peculiarity of this species is the arrangement
of the glands. Instead of, as in S. Kmbergiana and S. corruscans,
being simple, rather large, rounded or flask-shaped cells, they are
very small and of irregular vermiculate shape, each opening by a
minute tube piercing the cuticle.

Gnathosyllis zonata, JST. sp.

(Plate LI1„ figs. 4-G.)

The single specimen which I have seen contains fifty segments,
but is incomplete — a considerable part, apparently, of the
posterior portion of the body having been lost. The colour is
light orange, with numerous narrow transverse pnrple bands, two
on the dorsal surface of each segment, and very narrow purple
rings on the cirri ; the head and palpi are bright orange.

The head is short and broad, the breadth about twice the
length. The eyes in the specimen had their pigment arranged in
a scattered, reticulate form, but I am not certain that this may not
have been the result of j^ost mortem change, as the specimen was
dead when examined. The palpi are rather short, scarcely longer
than the head. The median tentacle is about four times the length
of the head, with well-marked joints ; the lateral tentacles are very
little shorter than the mesial. There are two peristomial tentacles,
the one about the length of the praestomial tentacles, the other
longer. The segments are very short, very many times broader
than long. There are aboiit ten compound setse in each
parapodium on the ventral aspect, and on the dorsal four yellow
acicula with very slightly curved apices. The dorsal cirri are
mostly as long as the breadth of the body.

The (esophagus is lined with about twelve papillce and a i)air of
simple jaws. When exserted this portion of the alimentary canal

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 747

extends as far V)ack as the twelfth segment. The gizzarxl extends
to the thirty-first segment : in structure it agrees with the gizzard
of Stjllis, but transverse striations were not observed in the
radiating muscular fibres.

This species seems referable to Sohmarda's genus Gnathosyllis
("Neue Wirbellose Thiere," I., ii., 69), but differs from the type
species (G. diplodonta) in the form of the jaws, the much sm tiler
size of the palpi, and many other points.

sp.

II. STAUROCEPHALUS.

Statjrocephalus australis. N.
(Plate LIII, figs. 1-5.)

The colour is light red. The body is nearly cylindrical, but a
little compressed from above downwards There are nearly ninety
segments, which are, on an average, eight to ten times as broad as
long. The parapodia with their setse are nearly equal in length to
half the breadth of the body. The head is prominent, rounded in
front ; there are two pair of eyes of which the first pair are much
the larger, reniform in outline, and placed far apart from one
another towards the lateral borders of the head, while the hinder
pair are circular in outline and situated internally to as well as
behind the front pair. The superior pair of antennte are attached
just inside the larger pair of eyes, they consist of 11-13 joints and
are twice the length of the head. The lower pair are slightly
shorter, and have a long basal joint and a short oval distal one.

The parapodia are bilobate; the notopodium is armed with a
number of fine, simple, tapering setae, which are finely serrated
along one side, and with one or two stouter setse with a peculiar
beak-like extremity ; the neuropodium has about twenty compound
set£e, with a slender, veiy slightly curved, terminal joint, obscurely
notched at the apex and serrated internally. The dorsal cirri
extend rather beyond the extremity of the parapodia ; they are
two-jointed, the terminal joint being small and pointed. The
ventral cirri ai'e very short, not extending beyond the extremity
of the parapodia. There are two long anal appendages with a few
49

748 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCII.ETA,

indistinct joints. There are two paivs of jaws ; the anterior
composed of two rows of teeth, of which those of the one set ai'e
short and stout with strong denticles, while those of the other are
longer and narrower with a row of setiform denticles along one
side. The jaws of the posterior pair are smaller ; each consists of
a single curved piece.

The hypoderm is full of rovmded bacilliparous glands.

This species occurs between tide-marks on the shores of Port
Jackson amongst mussels. It has some I'esemblance to ;S. Chiaji
of Claparede, (1) but differs in the greater number of joints in the
superior antennae and in the form of the " avicular" setee. The
Staurocephalus loveni of. Kinberg, (2) which was found in Port
•Tackson at a depth of twelve fathoms, differs from the above-
described form in having the eyes small, and the second pair of
antennae twice as long as the first.

III. EULALIA.

EuLALiA (Eumida) quadrocula. N. sp.
(Plate LIIL, figs. 6-9.)

The length of this species is 10^ inches ; the greatest breadth,
^ths of an inch. The colour is green, very dark on the dorsal
surface, lighter underneath and on the parapodia.

The head is small, a little longer than broad, rounded in front.
There is a median tentacle about half the length of the head,
situated far back between the posterior pair of eyes, and two
pairs of lateral tentacles about the same length as the median,
placed near the front of the head ; there are two pairs of eyes,
the anterior pair situated near the front of the head at the base of
the lateral tentacles, the posterior near the posterior border of the
head, in both cases about half way between the mesial tentacle and
the lateral border.

The first segment of the body bears one pair of tentacular cirri
which are a little more than half the breadth of the body, stout at
the base, pointed at the apex ; the second segment bears two pairs

(1) " Ann. Ch6t. du Golfe de Naples," p. 115.

(2) Annulata nova, p. 574.

BY WILLIAM A. IIASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 749

similar in form to the preceding pair, but the dorsal a little longer
and narrower ; the third segment has one pair like those of the
preceding segment, and a small ventral cirrus similar to those of
the following segments, but no setse.

The body contains about 270 segments, which are usually about
three times as broad as long. The dorsal cirri are phylloid, a little
broader towards the middle of the body than in front, the breadth
about twice the length, the length not equal to half the breadth
of the body, ovate, the free end gradually pointed. The parapodia
are bilobed, with' a phylloid ventral cirrus, armed with one stout
brown aciculum, and about thirty compound setse. The latter have
a slightly expanded distal end produced into a beak-like process,
with two or three short spines or teeth ; and a blade which is very
delicate, curved and tapering, lined on its concave border with a
row of very fine short cilia.

Thei'e is an exsertile proboscis, the epithelium of which is green
and is produced into pyriform papilla;.

The species was obtained with the dredge in Port Jackson.

It is related to E. microceros of Claparede (1), but is distin-
guished from it by the presence of four eyes and by the dorsal
cirri of the second and third segments not being prolonged and but
little longer than the ventral.

IV. PSAMATHE.

PSAMATHE 1 CRINITA. N. Sp.

Plate LIIL, figs. 10-12.)

The length of this species is three-quarters of an inch : the
breadth an eighth of an inch. The colour is dull yellow, with
narrow transverse bands of dark brown on each segment.

The head is squarish, with a single, very short median tentacle,
and two lateral ones, the inner of which is situated at the
antero-lateral angle of the head, and is about twice the length of
the latter, while the outer is placed below the inner, and is about
half its length ; both are slender and unjointed. There are two

(1) Op. cit., p. 247, pi. xvi., fig. 4.

750 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCH^TA.

pairs of large, rounded brown eyes, placed close together at the
sides of the head, the anterior very slightly larger than the
posterior. There seem to be eight peristomial tentacles — three
shorter than the dorsal cirri, the rest of about the same length.
There are thirty-six segments in the body, each, as a rule, about
three-and a-half times as broad as long. The parapodia are very
prominent, being, with the setae, nearly as long as the bi'eadth
of the body. They are deeply divided, the neuropodium being
more prominent than the notopodium, and terminating in a
slender pointed process : there is a stout acicukim, finely striated
transversely, in each division, and a large number of tapering
compound setse, the basal parts of which are finely striated
transversely, and the distal divisions bordered with fine cilia along
one margin, and slightly hooked at the apex. Thei'e is a short
central cirrus not so long as the parapodia. The dorsal cirri are
very long, three or four times as long as the body is broad ; they
are not jointed, but are supported on a short ringed peduncle.

The eversible proboscis is lined with two or three transverse
rows of club-shaped papillae. There are no teeth. The gizzard is
long ; its walls are marked by narrow transverse lines, and are
composed of transversely and longitudinally arranged non-
striated muscle-fibres.

One specimeia of the species was obtained with the dredge in
Port Jackson.

It would appear to be more nearly related to Psamathe than to
any other described form ; pi'obably, however, ought to be regarded
as the type of a distinct genus.

IV. SIPHONOSTOMA.

SiPHONOSTOMA AFFINE. N. sp.

(Plate LIV., figs, l-fx)

The body is about an inch in length, and a tenth of an inch in
greatest breadth : it is broadest in front, becoming narrower

BY WILLIAM A. IIASWELL, M.A., U.SC. 751

behind, a decrease in breadth taking place suddenly at about the
twentieth segment : the total number of the segments is about
forty. The colour is light i^ed ; the hinder part crimson.

The head is broader than the immediately succeeding segments.
Immediately in front of the mouth on the ^entral surface are
inserted a pair of thick longitudinally folded palpi which are three
times the length of the branchiae.

Thei-e are two i)airs of eyes ; the anterior pair are large, of sub-
triangular outline, placed close together one on either side of the
middle line of the dorsal surface of the head. The second pair
which ai'e external to, as well as behind the first, are mere specks
of black pigment. The head is surrounded by a circlet of about
twenty-five short cylindrical green branchise, and external to those
at the sides and behind, by two fan-like fasciculi of very slender
setfe, about forty on each side ; these extend nearly as far
forward as the extremities of the palpi ; they are simple and hair-
like, but transversely jointed. The second and all the following
segments have short parapodia armed with about half-a-dozen to a
dozen slender setse similar to those surrounding the head, and
arranged in two fasciculi ; on the ventral aspect of the parapodium
is a dark-coloured, stouter, hook-like, seta considerably shorter
than the others, likewise transversely jointed. The papillae are
numerous, frequently as long as the setae, with a long and slender
hyaline stalk and a head which varies in form, but is usually long
oval or spindle-like.

The anterior lai'ger pair of eyes are complex, with a thick^
darkly pigmented choroidal capsule, lined internally by a thick
retina, composed of elongated radially disposed cones : they are
embedded in the substance of the cerebral ganglion.

Opening just behind the head on the dorsal surface near the
lateral margin, are a pair of very long narrow cylindrical glands
which extend throughout a considerable portion of the body. They
have delicate walls and are filled with cells with colourless walls

752 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCH^TA

containing in their interior rounded particles of some gi-eenish
matter.

Similar glands have been observed in Chlontuna and in
Stylaroides ; they are regai'ded by Claparede as equivalent to
the segmental oi'gans of Terehella and Amphlcteis.

This species, which is obtained with the trawl in Port Jackson,
is apparently nearly related to Siphonostoma dij)lochaitos, Otto
(Chloraema Edioardsii Quatrefages), but, besides the possession of
four eyes, is distinguishable by the less strongly hooked ventral
setas.

V. HALLA.

Halla Australis. N. sp.

(Plate LIV., figs. 6 and 7, and Plate LV. figs. 1-4.)

The colour of this species is rich orange when first taken, but,
on being kept for a few hours in an aquarium, it becomes stained
particularly on the branchiae, with dark purple. When the
annelid is placed in alcohol a rich purple pigment is extracted. The
length is from thi-ee to four inches, and the breadth from a
fifteenth to an eighth of an inch. The number of segments is
great, exceeding 200. The segments, on an average, are about four
times as broad as long ; the parapodia are prominent, their length
being about a third of the breadth of the segment.

The head is uniformly rounded, a little longer than broad, twice
the length of the peristomium, but rather narrower. There ai-e
three short, stout, conical, unringed tentacles, the middle one
slightly larger than the lateral, scarcely half the length of the
head. There are two pairs of eyes placed near the posterior
boundary of the head. The anterior pair are larger than the
posterior, oval, with the long axis directed inwards and forwards,
widely separated ; the posterior pair are much smaller, rounded,
placed close together between the anterior pair and a little behind
them.

BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL, M.A., B.SC. 753

The dorsal cirri (brauchite) of the anterior segments are stout
and short, but rather longer than the parapodia ; towards the
middle of the body they become much larger, compressed, leaf-like,
about a third of the breadth of the body. The parapodia contain
a bundle of about twelve slender, flexible, tapering setae, feathered
on one side near the apex, and towai'ds the ventral side three
shorter acute acicula.

There are seven pairs of jaws, the first, the largest, without
teeth ; the second small, slender, acutely pointed ; the third
with five teeth, three large and two small ; the fourth with six
teeth ; the fifth with seven ; the sixth with six or seven ; the
seventh very long, narrow, untoothed.

Specimens of this remarkable annelid are brought up, not
unfrequently, with the dredge from depths of a few fathoms in
Port Jackson. The genus has hitherto only contained one described
species — the Nereis parthenopeia of Delle Chiaje (1), afterwai-ds
described under the name of Halla by Costa. Judging from
Claparede's figures oiH. parthenopeia in the " Annelides chetopodes
du Golfe de Naples," the Austi^alian species is to be distinguished
from it by having the parapodia relatively more prominent, one
of its lobes (the ventral one) being much longer than the other,
and by the ventral cirrus being relatively shorter. The setse of
the European species also seem to want the long whip-like
extremities.

The hypoderm consists of very irregular cellswith in tei-nal fibre-like
processes ; and there are no glands. The alimentary canal is distin-
guishable into tliree regions — a short pliarynx, a muscular dentary
region, and a rather narrow intestinal region — without marked con-
strictions. The two first divisions arelined with columnar stratified
epithelium without cilia. The epithelium of the intestine is com-
posed of large irregular cells witli, clear contents and small nuclei.

(1) " Memorie sulla storia e notomia degli animali senza vertebre," III.
p. 164.

754 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCII^TA,

The eyes are rather complex in structure, like the eyes of many
annelids, but have no lens, consisting of a thick-walled spheroidal
capsule opening on the exterior ; the wall of the capsule is
composed of a layer of pigmented cells continued internally
into radiating elongated cones the bases of which are external, while
the curved, pointed apices line the central cavity. In complexity of
structure the eye of Halla, though ranking higher than that of
many Polych^eta, yet falls considerably below that of such forms as
Toniopteris (ly and Alciope (2) ; it bears a very strong resemblance
to tlie eye of Pecten as described by Van Haren Roman (" Voyage
of the Willem Barents," Die Lamellibranchiaten, p. 17.)

Embedded in the substance of the nerve cord in all the speci-
mens I have examined, in the third to the eighth segments, are a
series of eight or ten oval vesicles, ijjth of an inch in diameter.
These are enclosed in a capsule of fine fibrous tissue with small
nuclei, except at one point where a bundle of nerve fibres
enters the interior. The capsule is filled with finely granular
material, and contains a second smaller spherical vesicle,
about a fourth of the size of the larger one. This smaller
vesicle is more homogeneous than the larger one, and contains in
its interior a spherical solid body, which stains darkly with
hsematoxylin. I have been unable to determine the nature of these
bodies. In structure they have the appearance of very large cells
with nuclei and nucleoli, and might be supposed to be encysted
unicellular parasites, but the constancy of their presence, and,
more particularly, the passage into their interior of a bundle of
fibres from the nerve-cord, seem to point to their being essential
parts of the animal : they may be a rudimentary form of otocyst.

(1) Vide Vejdovsky, " Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Tomopteriden "
Zeitschr.f. wiss. Zool XXXI. Bd., p. 81.

(2) Greef, "^ Ueber die Augen insbesondere die Retina der Alciopiden,"
Sitzungsb. derGesellsch. zur BeforderungdergesammtenNaturwissenschaften
zu Marburg, 1875, pp. 116-138.

BY WILLIAM A. HASAYELL, M.A., B.SC 755

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate L.

Fig. 1 — Head of SyUis corruscans from above, slightly compressed.

Fig. 2.— Extremity of everted proboscis.

Fig. 3. — Head of male.

Fig. 4. — Head of SyUi>i henuefonnis from above.

Fig. 5. — Compound seta of the same, x 210.

Plate LI.

Fig. 1. — Parapodium of Syllis Kmherqiana viewed from the dorsal aspect.

Fig. 2.— Tooth of the same.

Fig. 3. — Compound setce ,

Fig. 4. — Anterior portion of the body of Syllis Schmardiana from above.

Fig, 5. — Head of the same species from above, more highly magnified.

Fig. 6. — Head of the same from below.

Fig. 7. — Parapodium of the same.

Fig. 8. — Compound seta.

Plate LII.

Fig. 1 . — Syllis nigropunctata ; head viewed from above.

Fig. 2. —Parapodium.

Fig. 3.— Compound seta.

Fig. 4. — Gnathosyllis zonata ; head viewed from above.

Fig. 5. — Jaws of the same.

Fig. 6. — Compound seta.

Plate LIII.

Fig. 1. — Head of Staurocephalus australis.

Fig. 2.— Teeth.

Fig, 3, — Parapodium.

Figs, 4 and 5, — Simple setae.

Fig. 6, — Head of Eidalia (Eumida) quadrocula.

Fig. 7. — Parapodium of the same.

Fig, 8, — Compound seta.

Fig. 9. — Simple seta.

Fig. 10. — Head of Psamathe (?) crinita.

756 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN POLYCHiETA,

Fig. 11. — Parapodium of the same.
Fig. 12. — Compound seta of the same.

Plate LIV.

Fig. 1. — Siphonostoma a (fine, lateral view of head.

Fig. 2. — The same, ventral view of head.

Fig. 3. — Dorsal view of head shewing eyes.

Fig. 4. — Hooked seta.

Fig. 5.— Papilla.

Fig. 6.— Head of Holla australis.

Fig. 7. — Jaws of the same.

Plate LV.

Fig. 1. — Parapodium of Halla australis.

Fig. 2.— Vertical section of the mucous membrane of the oesophagus of

Halla australis.
Fig. 3. — "Vertical section of wall of intestine,
Fig. 4. — Otocyst (?) of the same, seen in section.
Fig. 5.— Vertical section of the hypoderm of Syllis corruscans.

NOTES FROM THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM.

DESCRIPTION OF TWO NEW FISHES FROM PORT
JACKSON.

By E. P, Ramsay, F.R.S.E., and J. Douglas-Ogilby,
Nannocampus ruber ; sp. nov.

D. 11 ; 0. 6 ; Oss. rings, 19 + 50.

Head and snout very short, their length being contained 3^ times
in the distance between the gill-openings and vent ; the snout is
I of the length of the head ; its lower side is as broad and convex
as the upper, and bears a sub-gular spine. Body almost round, the
ridges being obsolete. Length of body including head g of that of
tail. Vent a little in front of dorsal tin ; caudal small. Colors
when fresh, red with some minute white spots.

The specimen was obtained by the trawl off Shark Reef on the
11th ult. ; it is a female, and measures 4^ inches. Registered
number B 9199.

Seriola simpex ; sp. nov.

D. 7. 1/32 ; A. 2. 1/20 ; V. 1/5 ; P. 21 ; C. 18.

Length of head 4iJ„ height of body 3f in the total length. Diameter
of the eye ^ of the length of the head^ and equal to that of snout.
Dorsal profile much more convex than the ventral ; snout rather
obtuse ; abdomen not compressed. Lower jaw rather the longer ;
maxilla reaches to behind the middle of the eye. Teeth in several

758 NOTES FROM THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM.

rows, small, conical, pointed, and slightly curved in both jaws, each
standing quite apart from those which surround it ; villiform bands
on the vomer, palatines, and tongue. Spines of the first dorsal
short, moderately strong, the fourth the longest, ^ the height of the
anterior dorsal rays ; last dorsal and anal ray rather more elongate
than those immediately preceding them ; the free anal spines very
minute ; pectoral short, about one-half the length of the head ;
ventrals not quite two-thirds of the same ; caudal forked. Scales
minute ; lateral line rather wavy in its anterior half. Colors, bluish-
bronze above, silvery below ; snout, occiput, and fins yellowish,
except the ventrals, which are brown on the inner, and white on
the outer surface.

The specimen from which our description has been drawn up
measures 8.50 inches ; it was labelled Seriola lalandii. but the
height of the body and shortness of snout at once separate it from
that species. It is probably from Port Jackson. Registered
number B 9205.

NOTES FROM THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM.

ON SOME REMARKABLE CRYSTALS OF SIDERITE.

By F. Ratte,

" Ing. des Arts et Manuf." (Paris.)

(Plate LVI.)

The object of this note is to record the occurrence of a group of
crystals of siderite or carbonate of iron, arranged in so perfect
and regular a manner that the case must be considered to be very
i-are.

It is well-known that this mineral is frequently found in
lenticular, curved, distorted or even saddle-shaped crystals. These
irregularities arise from the modification termed " equiaxe " when
the solid angles appear rounded and the faces and the edges
curved. One of these crystals isolated, is shown at the foot of
fig. 1 (cZ), among some lenticular crystals of calcite, and others
exist on the speciuien which are not shown on the figure.

The group alluded to is formed of three principal crystals, each
presenting the shape of a complete saddle, only about 100° or so
being wanting to make it cup-shaped. These three crystals are
I'egularly grouped so that their axes of symmetry are at about
120" respectively. A few lenticular and curved crystals spring
from the centre of the group.

This remarkable group is attached to a perfect crystal of quartz
terminating in two six-sided pyramids which has itself been
enveloped by a larger crystal of quartz. This specimen has been
secured for the Australian Museum, and is from the auriferous
quartz reefs of Sandhurst, Victoria.

7 GO NOTES FROM THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM,

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Fig. L— Group of three saddle-shaped crystals of slderite on quartz :
a, b, c refer to each of the three crystals in this and the follow-
ing figures.
d, saddle-shaped crystal of siderite, isolated among lenticular
crystals of calcite, natural size.

Fig. 2. — Another view of the same.

Figs. 3 and 4. — The same group of crystals of siderite enlarged twice the
natural size, showing one of the extremities of the smaller
crystal of quartz.

In these last two figures the lines .v, y, x', y', represent the edge of the larger
crystal of quartz.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Brazier exhibited specimens of Onchidium diameleon,
described by him in his Paper, and so named on account of its
many changes of colour.

Mr. Douglas-Ogilby exhibited a specimen of Nannocampus
ruber, previously described by himself and Mr. Ramsay.

Mr. Kyngdon exhibited specimens of Penteune, a fossil fruit
found at a depth of 240 feet, under a layer of basalt at the
Forest Reef, in the Great Extended Gold Mine, near Bathurst.

Mr. Whitelegge exhibited a number of water insects (No-
tonecta), with small moUusks attached to their legs, and suggested
this as a probable way of the distribution of mollusca and fish
ova over the country. He also exhibited some fresh water
Polyzoa killed with the tentacles fully extended by means of
chloroform.

Dr. von Lendenfeld exhibited a specimen of the Alga-Pseudo-
morph, described in his paper, together with a specimen of the

NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 761

sponge itself, and a true Alga which has a similar shape to the
sponge, which however is not identical with the Pseudomorph,

To illustrate his paper on the Rhizopoda Dr. v. Lendenfeld
exhibited a specimen of Amoeba villosa, admirably preserved in
dilute osmic acid by Mr. Whitelegge.

To illustrate his paper on Onchidium, sections through the
dorsal eyes of O. Damelii were exhibited by Dr. v. Lendenfeld.

Mr. Macleay exhibited a species of Monacanthits taken in a
trawl at Ball's Head, with the view of ascertaining if any of the
members present had any knowledge of the Fish. No one seemed
to know it.

He also exhibited for Mr. Wilkinson, specimens of a Fossil
Crustacean from Forrest River, Cambridge Gulf, which Mr,
Haswell pronounced to be a Thalassina, a genus which burrows in
the mud of Mangrove Swamps.

Mr. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., Curator of the Australian Museum,
exhibited the following fossil bones recently obtained from the
tertiary deposits in the caves of Wellington Valley.

1. No. B., 6148. — The premaxillaries and scalpriform incisors
of a new species of Phascolomys, P. cu7-virostris, Owen ; Mr.
Ramsay considered that a new genus should be created for the
reception of the animal represented by this fossil, on account of
the peculiar depressed and indented anterior position of the
palate and peculiar curvature of the lower borders of the pre-
maxillaries.

2. B. 5936. — This fossil represents the palate and molars of
the skull of a new species of kangaroo Palorchestes re2)haim,
Owen, the form of the foremost premolar (usually represented by
the formula 4 d) is different in shape, being broadly triangular
with rounded cusps and the other teeth are relatively larger and
the molar series longer than in other known species.

3. B. 5939. — This is the left Os innominatum, and

4. B. 5938 is the right femur of probably the same animal
P. rephaim, Owen, while

5. B. 6442, is probably a collar bone or clavicle of the same.

WEDNESDAY, 30th DECEMBER, 1885.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M.A., F.G.S., in the
chair.

Dr. Katz, Mr. T. W. E. David and Mr. Edward S. Smithurst
were introduced as visitors.

MEMBERS ELECTED.

The following gentlemen were duly elected members of the
Society :— T. W. Edgeworth David, Esq., B.A., F.G-.S., Geological
Surveyor, Department of Mines ; Boughton Kyngdon, Esq.,
Sydney ; H. R. Labatt, Esq., Appin ; H. E. Cohen, Esq., Sydney.

DONATIONS.

" Zoologischer Anzeiger," VIII. Jahrg. Nos. 206, 207, 208.
From the Editor.

" Comptes Eendus des Seances de I'Academie des Sciences."
Paris, Tome CI., Nos. 11, 12, 13, 14 and 15, 1885. From the
Academy.

"Transactions of the Entomological Society of London." Part
III., 1885. From the Society.

" Nova Acta Regise Societatis Scientiarum TJpsaliensis." Vol.
XIT., Ease, II., 1885. From the Royal Society of Sciences at
Upsal.

"Abstract of Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania,''
November 16th, 1885. From the Society.

DONATIONS. 763

"The Plants of New South Wales." By the Rev. W. WooUs,
Ph.D., F.L.S. From the Author.

"Feuille des jeunes Natural! stes," No. 181, 1st November,
1885. From the Editor.

" Mittheilungen aus der zoologischen Station zu Neapel."
Sechster Band, Heft IT., 1885. From the Director.

" Annales de la Societe Royale Malacologique de Belgique."
Tome XV., Fasc. I., 1880. Tome XIX., 1884. Proces Verbaux
des Seances, January, 1885-July, 1885. From the Society.

" Bulletin de la Societe Zoologique de France." Nos. 5 and 6,
1882; Nos. 1-6, 1883; Nos. 1-6, 1884; Nos. 1, 2 and 3, 1885.
From the Society.

"Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society," London. Ser.
II., Vol. v.. Part 5. October, 1885. From the Society.

" Monatliche Mittheilungen des Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereins
des Regierungsbezirkes Frankfurt." III. Jahrg., Nos. 5 and 6,
August and September, 1885. From the Society.

"Note from Davos Dorfli." By A. W. Waters, F.G.S.
" Chilostomatons Br} ozoa from Aldinga and the River Murray
Cliffs, S. Australia." By A. W. Waters, F.G.S. " On the use
of the Avicularian Mandible in the determination of the Chilosto-
matous Bryozoa." By A. W. Waters, F.G.S. From the Author.

" Verhandlungen des Naturhistorischen Vereins der preussischen
Rheinlande und Westfalens." Parts 1 and 2, 1884, From the
Society.

"Bulletin de la Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou."
No. 1, 1885. From the Society.

" Victorian Naturalist." Vol. II., No. 8. December 1885. From
the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria.

"Science." Vol. VI., Nos., 141-145, October 16th-November
13th, 1885. From the Editor.
50

764 DONATIONS.

" Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia.' Part II., 1885. From the Academy.

*' The Canadian Record of Science." Vol. I., No. 4, 1885. From
the Natural History Society of Montreal.

" Studies from the Biological Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins
University." Baltimore, U.S.A., Vol. III., No. 4, 1885.
<' University Circulars." Vol. V., Nos. 43-44, 1885. From the
University.

" Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History." Vol-
1., No. 6, October 1885. From the Museum.

" Annuaire Geologique Universel." Par le Dr. Dagincourt.
From the Author.

"The New Zealand Journal of Science." Vol. II., No. 12,
November 1885. From the Editor.

"Journal of the Linnean Society." London. Zoology. Vol.
XIX., Nos. 103-108, September 1884, May 1885. Botany, Vol.
XXL, Nos. 134-137, August 1884-April 1885. List of Members,
1884-1885. From the Society.

PAPERS READ.

DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA.

By E. Meyrick, B.A., F.E.S.

XII. Qj]cOPHORlD-E — (Continued. )
59. Haplodyta, Meyr.

Head sniootli, sidetufts small, spreading. Antennifi in ^
moderately ciliated (1), basal joint with sti'ong pecten. Palpi
moderate, second joint reaching base of antennae, with appressed
scales, somewhat loose beneath, terminal joint rather shorter than
second, slender, recurved. Thorax smooth. Forewings elongate,
hindinargin very oblique. Hindwings somewhat narrower than
forewings, narrowly elongate-ovate, apex round-pointed, cilia 1 1.
Abdomen moderate. Posterior tibite clothed with long line hairs
above. Forewings with vein 7 to hiudmargin, 2 from somewhat
before angle of cell. Hindwings normal.

Differs from Machaeritis by the second joint of palpi reaching
base of antennpe, and the hindwings not acutely pointed, but
otherwise nearly allied to it.

la. Head ochreous 401. ioclialca.

1^>- „ gi"ey.

2a. Thorax ochreous 400. heteropla.

2b. „ grey 399. thoracta.

399. Ilajjl. thoracta, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. griseis, nitidis ; post, saturatius griseis ; capite
ac thorace concoloribus griseis.

766 DESCRiPTioys op Australian micro-lepidoptera,

(J. 13-16 mm. Head, palpi, antenna;, thorax, abdomen, and legs
rather dark shining bronzy-grey. Forewings elongate, rather
narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargiii
extremely obliquely rounded ; shining bronzy-grey, finely irrorated
with paler ; extreme costal edge sometimes whitish towards
middle : cilia light shining Ijronzy-grey. Hindwings rather dark
grey; cilia grey.

Blackheath, N-ew South Wales (3,500 feet) ; Fernsliaw, Vic-
toria ; Deloraine, Tasmania ; nine specimens in Noveml)er and
December.

400. lInj)J. lieteropla, n. sp.

Minor, alls ant. aereo-ochreis, nitidis ; post, saturatius griseis ;
capite ac thorace discoloribus.

(J. 13-14 mm. Head, palpi, antenna?, abdomen and legs dark
grey. Thorax shining bronze. Forewings elongate, rather
narrow, costa moderately ai-ched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin
extremely obliquely rounded ; shining ochreous-bronze ; cilia light
shining bronze. Hindwings rather dark grey ; cilia grey.

Bathurst (2,300 feet), New South Wales ; four specimens in
November.

401. Ha.pl. iocJtalca, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. ferrugineo-ochreis ; post, saturate griseis ; capite
ac thorace concoloribus ochreis.

(J. 12-13 mm. Head and thorax yellow-ochreous, somewhat
ferruginous-tinged. Palpi, antennae, abdomen and legs grey.
Foi'ewings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex
round-pointed, hindmai-gin extremely obliquely rounded ; yellow-
ochreous, ferruginous-tinged : cilia yellow-ochreous. Hindwings
dark grey ; cilia grey.

Mount Kosciusko (4,700 feet). New South Wales ; Deloraine,
Tasmania ; two specimens in December and January.

60, Macii^ritis, Meyr.
Head smooth, sidetufts small, loosely appressed. Antenna; in
^ somewhat serrate, moderately ciliated (1), basal joint with
strong pecten. Palpi moderate or rather short, second joint not

BY E.

MEYRICK, B.A. 767

reaching base of antennte, with appressed scales, somewhat loose
beneath, terminal joint shorter, slender, recurved. Thorax smooth.
Forewings elongate, hindmargin very oblique. Hindwings nar-
rower than forewings, ovate-lanceolate, apex acute, cilia 1-1 1.
Al)domen moderate. Posterior tibife clothed with long hairs above.
Forewings with vein 7 to hindmargin, 2 from before angle.
Hindwings normal.

A development of Coesyra, from which it is distinguished only
by the different form of the hindwings, which are lanceolate
instead of elongate-ovate, and the relatively broader cilia,
la. Forewings with ground colour white.

2a. Markings ochreous 405. melanospora.

2b. ,, dark fuscous 406. samphoras.

lb. Forewings with ground colour not

white.
2a. Forewings with ground colour clear

yellow 402. calligenes.

2b. Forewings withground colournot clear

yellow.
3a. With two convergent dark streaks

from inner margin 403. grammopltora.

3b. Without convergent dorsal streaks.
4a. With a well-defined dark spot at anal

angle 404. heniocha.

4b. Without dai'k anal spot.

5a. Ground colour yellowish, mixed with

light grey 408. hemera.

5b. Ground colour whitish-ochreous, irro-

rated with dark fuscous.
6a. Costa suffused with dark fuscous

towards base 407. psatliyra.

6b. Costa not suffused with dark fuscous.
7a. Forewings anteriorly clear whitish-
ochreous 409. indocta

7b. Forewings evenly irrorated with dark

fuscous throughout 410. aeyrella.

768 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

402. Mach. caUiyenes, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. dilutius flavis, strigula aut maculis costse ad
basim, fasciis duabus, altera maculam flavam continente, tei'tia
etiam marginis postici vix purpureis nigro-irroratis ; post, satu-
ratius griseis.

$ <^. 10-13 mm. Head and palpi light ochreous-yellow, palpi
with lower half of second joint and sometimes base of terminal
joint dark fuscous. Antennae grey. Thorax light yellow, anterior
half dark purplish-fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs dark grey,
posterior tibiaj and apex of joints ochreous- whitish. Forewings
elongate, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, hind-
mai-gin very oblique, hardly rounded ; ochreous-yellow ; markings
whitish-purplish, closely irrorated with black ; a streak along
basal fifth of costa, usually separated into two spots ; a narrow
slightly outwards-curved fascia from \ of costa to middle of inner
margin ; a broader fascia, narrowed on costa. from f of costa to
anal angle, containing a spot of ground colour in disc (sometimes
open posteriorly) ; a narrow fascia along hindmargin from apex
to below middle, attenuated beneath : cilia ochreous-yellow, on
anal angle irrorated with purplish-black. Hindwings rather dark
grey ; cilia grey.

Appears to form a connecting link with Go^syrn., to which it
closely approaches.

Larva 16-legged, moderate, cylindrical ; dull brownish-ochreous ;
dorsal vessel smoky-grey ; head, second, and third segments black.
Feeds in a portable case on lichen-dust on fences ; case arch-like,
both ends affixed to fence, forming a semicircular erect hoop ;
cylindrical, granulated with lichen-dust, mouths ragged and
flapped ; lax*va emerging at either end ; feeds in August and
September. This singular form of case is unique, so far as
known to me.

Sydney, New South Wales ; Fernshaw, Victoria ; Launceston,
Tasmania ; Port Lincoln, South Australia ; occurs tolerably
commonly from October to January ; the larva round Sydney in
abundance.

BY E. MEYKICK, B A. 769

403. Mack, grammojyhora, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. albido-ochreis, strigula costa? basali, strigis ex
dorso duabus in discum confluentibus, fascia postica bis interrupta,
alteraque submarginali nigro-conspersis ; post, griseis.

(J 9. 9-10 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax whitish-ochreous ;
palpi with second joiiit except apex, and base of terminal joint
dark fuscous. Antennae dark fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs
darK grey, ringed with whitish-ochreous. Forewings elongate,
narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin
extremely obliquely rounded ; whitish-ochreous, with some scat-
tered black scales ; markings formed by an irroration of blackish
scales ; a streak along basal \ of costa, terminating in a dilated
spot; an outwardly oblique streak from inner margin at J, and an
inwardly oblique streak from before anal angle, meeting in disc
before middle ; a streak from | of costa to anal angle, more or
less distinctly divided into three spots ; a streak near hindmargin
from costa before apex to anal angle : cilia whitish-ochreous, Ijasal
half irrorated with dark fuscous. Hindwings grey ; cilia whitish-

gi-ey.

Sydney, New South Wales, in Septembei-, October and
December ; rather common.

404. Macli. heniocha, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. albido-ochreis, punctis disci tril)us, macula
parva costto postica, alteraque dorsi ante angulum analem nigre-
scentibus ; post, griseo-albidis.

^2- ^"^^ °^"^- Head, palpi, thorax, and abdomen whitish-
ochreous ; palpi with second joint dark fuscous except towards,
apex. Antennae grey. Legs whitish-ochreous, anterior pair dark
grey. Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately
arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin very obliquely rounded ;
whitish-ochreous ; markings blackish ; a short streak on base of
costa ; a dot in disc at g, a second almost beneath it on fold, and a
third larger in disc at f ; a cloudy spot on costa beyond |, and

770 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

another on inner margin before anal angle ; traces of a transverse
line near hindmargin : cilia whitisli-ochreous. Hindwings and
cilia grey-whitish.

Sydney, New South Wales, from September to March ; rather
common.

405. Mach. melanosjiora, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. albis, ochreo-sparsis, punctis disci tribus, quarto
anguli analis, quinto costse ante apicem ochreis ; post, albido-
griseis.

(J 9. 10-14 mm. Head, palpi, antenna?, and thorax white;
palpi with second joint externally dark fuscous except at apex.
Abdomen whitish. Legs grey, posterior pair whitish, tibite
yellowish-tinged. Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa
moderately arched, apex tolerably pointed, hindmargin extremely
oblique, hardly rounded; white, more or less thinly irrorated with
ochreous ; markings ochreous, ill-defined : a small spot in disc at
^, a second obliquely beyond it on fold, and a third larger in disc
at § ; a small spot on anal angle, tending to be connected with
third discal spot ; a small spot on costa towards apex : cilia
white, with two irregular lines of dark fuscous points. Hind-
wings whitish-grey ; cilia whitish.

Toowoomba, Queensland ; Sydney, New South Wales, in
December and March ; rather cominon.

406. Macli. samphoras. n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. canis, dorsum versus griseo-suffusis, punctis
disci quattuor, macula costfe post medium, striga anguli analis,
lineaque postica transversa sub apicem suffusa saturatius fuscis ;
post, griseis.

(J $. 11-14 mm. Head white. Palpi white, second joint dark
fuscous. Antennae grey. Thorax white mixed with grey.
Abdomen grey. Legs grey, posterior pair paler. Forewings
elongate, narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed,
hindmargin extremely oblique, hardly rounded ; white, dorsal half
suffused with light grey ; markings dark fuscous, rather ill-
defined ; a small spot in disc at I, a second obliquely beyond it on

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 771

fold, a third in disc above middle, and a fourth in disc at §,
connected with anal angle by a rather thick streak ; an elongate
spot along costa about |, tending to connect inwards with third
discal spot ; a curved line from costa near apex to anal angle,
sharply indented inwards beneath costa, connected with a cloudy
apical suffusion : cilia white, with two or three cloudy series of
fuscous points. Hindwings grey ; cilia grey-whitish.

Murrurundi and Sydney, New South Wales ; Campbelltown,
Tasmania ; locally rather common, from September to December^

407. Macli. 2)sathyra, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. dilutius ochreis, saturate fusco-irroratis, costee
basi saturate fusco-suffusa, maculis disci tribus saturate fuscis ;
post, griseis.

(J. 10-12 mm. Head light ochreous. Palpi whitish-ochreous,
second joint dark fuscous. Antennae fuscous. Thorax light
ochreous, mixed with dark fuscous. Abdomen fuscous. Legs
dai'k fuscous, ringed with pale ochreous, posterior tibiae pale
ochreous. Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately
arched, apex tolerably pointed, hindmai'gin extremely obliquely
rounded ; pale brownish-ochreous, coarsely irrorated with dark
fuscous ; base of costa suffused with dark fuscous ; three small
round dark fuscous spots, first in middle of disc, second on fold
rather before first, third in disc at f : cilia pale greyish-ochreous
irrorated with dark fuscous. Hindwings rather dark grey ; cilia
light grey, ochreous-tinged.

This and the three following species are closely allied ; M.
2)sathyra may be known by the more ochreous ground colour,
coarser irroration, and marked dark sufiusion of base of costa,
with the darker hindwings.

Hobart, Tasmania (1000 feet), in December; five specimens.

408. Mack, hemera, n, sp,
Parva, alis ant. flavidis, suffuse griseo-mixtis ; post, griseis.
(J. 11-12 mm. Head light yellowish mixed with grey. Palpi,
antennae, thorax, abdomen, and legs rather dai'k grey. Fore-
wings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex

772 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

tolerably pointed, hindmargiu extremely obliquely rounded ;
ochreous-yellowish, mixed and suffused with light fuscous- grey ;
cilia yellowish, mixed with light grey. Hindwings grey : cilia
whitish-grey.

Readily recognised by the mixed yellowish and grey ground-
colour and absence of markings.

Port Lincoln, South Australia ; two specimens in November.

409. Mack, indocta, n. sp.

Parva, alls ant. albido-ochreis, partim fusco-irroratis, punctis
disci tribus obscuris saturate fuscis ; post, albido-griseis ; antennis
annulatis.

^ 2- 10-13 mm. Head, palpi, antennse, thorax, abdomen, and
legs whitish-ochreous ; antennaj annulated with dark fuscous ;
anterior and middle legs banded with dark fuscous. Forewings
elongate, narrow, costa moderately arched, apex acute, hind-
margin extremely oblique, slightly rounded ; whitish-ochreous,
posteriorly finely irrorated with light fuscous ; three obscure dark
fuscous dots, sometimes obsolete, first in middle of disc, second on
fold rather before first, third in disc at | : cilia pale whitish-
ochreous, finely irrorated with fuscous. Hindwings whitish-grey ;
cilia ochreous-whitish.

Very like the following, but the whitish-ochreous ground colour
much clearer towards base, the hindwings lighter, and specially
characterised by the annulated antennie.

Brisbane, Queensland ; rather common in September.

410. Jfaclt. cegreUa, n. sp.

Parva, alls ant. albido-ochreis, saturatius fusco-irroratis, punctis
disci tribus oliscuris saturate fuscis ; post, griseis.

(J 9. 11-13 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, and abdomen pale
whitish-ochreous, somewhat fuscous-tinged. Antenn;e grey. Legs
dai"k fuscous, ringed with whitish-ochreous, posterior tibiae whitish-
ochreous. Forewings elongate, narrow, costa moderately arched,
apex acute, hindmargin extremely obliquely rounded ; pale

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A.

773

whitish-ochreous, greyish-tinged, closely irrorated with fuscous-
grey ; three obscure dark fuscous dots, tirst in middle of disc,
second on fold rather before lirst, third in disc at ^ : cilia pale
whitish-ochreous, irrorated with fuscous-grey. Hindwings grey ;
cilia ochreous- whitish, greyish-tinged.

Variable in intensity of irroration, but always much greyer
than the preceding.

Sydney, Blackheath (3,500 feet), and Bathurst (2,100 feet),
New South Wales ; Deloraine, Campbelltown, George's Bay and
Hobart, Tasmania ; Wirrabai'a and Port Lincoln, South Australia ;
generally very common from August to January.

61. AocHLETA, Meyr.
The characters of this and the other endemic New Zealand
genera are given in full in Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, and need
not be repeated.

411. Aochl. psychra, Meyr.

(Aochleta psychra, Meyr. Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 21.)

Media, alis ant. albidis, griseo-sparsis, postice partim griseo-
sufFusis, punctis disci duobus minimis ocelloque nigris ; post.
albidis.

Castle Hill, New Zealand.

62. Semiocosma, Meyr.
412. Seiii. pp.roneaneMa^ Walk.

(GeUchia peroneaneUa^ Walk.. 658; Gryptolechia lichenella, ib.
769 ; OecopJiora IhUtonU, Butl., Cist. Ent. II, 511 ; Semiocosma
peroneanella, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 22.)

Media, alis ant. dilute viridibus, signis plerisque contortis
serieque punctorum marginis postici nigris ; post, albidis, apicem
versus griseis.

Hamilton to Dunedin, New Zealand, in December and January.

413. Sem. j^^carellaj Walk.
( (Ecophora picareMa, Walk. 699 ; Psecadia teras, Feld. pi.
CXL., 28 ; Semiocosma picareUa, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883,
23.)

774 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

]\Iajor, alis ant. niveis, strigis tribus transversis contortis, signis
duobus posticis serieque puuctorum marginis postici uigris ; post,
griseis, disco albido-sufFuso.

Dunedin, New Zealand, in January.

414. Seni. attacte/ia, Walk.

(Izatha attactella, Walk. 787 ; Semiocosina aUactella, Meyr.,
Trans. K Z. Inst., 1883, 46.)

Major, alis ant. albidis, griseo-sparsis, vitta inter rupta nigra,
signis disci plerisque serieque punctorum marginis postici saturate
fuscis ; post dilute griseis.

New Zealand.

415. Sem. copiosfiUa, Walk.

(Gelechia copiosella, Walk. 1028 ; SeimocosmacopioseUa, Meyr.,
Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 47.)

]Media, alis ant. nigrescentibus, cinereo-nebulosis ; post, saturate
fuscis.

Auckland, New Zealand.

416. Sem. epiphanes, Meyr.

(Semiocosoma epipihanes, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 24.)
Media, alis ant. canis, griseo-conspersis, macula basali postice

angulata alteraque costse magna signis nigris notata saturate

fuscis ; post, griseo-albidis.

Wellington, New Zealand, in January.

417. Sem. 27rasoph>/ta, Meyr.

( Semiocosma 2)rnsoj-)]iyta, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 25.)
Media, alis ant. canis, virescenti-sufFusis, strigula ad basim,

squamis disci sparsis, punctis costse lineaque marginis postici

nigris ; post, griseis, basim versus albidis.

Taranaki and Wellington, New Zealand, in January and

February.

418. Sem. austera, Meyr.

Semiocosma austera, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 25.)

BY K. MEYRICK, B.A. 775

Media, alis ant. fuscis, fascia antica liueaque postica curva vix
pallidioribus, signo disci arcuato saturation ; post, saturate
fuscis.

"Wellington, New Zealand, in January.

63. Leptocroca, Meyr,

Head with appressed scales, sidetufts moderate, roughly spread-
ing. Antennje in ^ with long fine cilia (4), basal joint rather
elongate, with strong pecten. Palpi long, second joint somewhat
exceeding base of antennse, thickened with dense appressed scales,
slightly loose beneath, terminal joint shorter than second, moderate,
recurved. Thorax smooth. Forewings elongate, hindmargin
oblique. Hindwings as broad as forewings, elongate-ovate, cilia
|. Abdomen moderate. Posterior tibise clothed with long hairs
above. Forewings with vein 7 to costa, 2 from angle of cell.
Hindwings normal.

Distinguished from its nearest allies by the very long ciliation
of antennae in ^.

419. Lept. sanguinofetita, n. sp.

Major, alis ant. carneis, vitta supra medium inferius tridentata,
lineaque subinarginali nigrescentibus ; post, griseo-albidis.

^5. 23-28 mm. Head and thorax flesh-colour. Palpi reddish-
whitish, terminal joint and basal half of second externally dark
fuscous. Antenna? dark fuscous. Abdomen grey-whitish. Legs
dark fuscous, posterior pair and apex of joints grey-whitish.
Forewings elongate, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed,
hindmargin very oblique, hardly rounded ; flesh-colour, somewhat
irrorated with grey ; a thick irregular blackish streak above
middle from base to apex, above more or less suffused, beneath
with three short irregular projection's at ^, before middle, and at
I ; a submarginal interrupted blackish line, sometimes indistinct :
cilia light flesh-colour, Hindwings and cilia grey-whitish.

A conspicuously distinct species.

776 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

Newcastle and Sydney, New South Wales ; Melbourne,
Victoria ; six specimens in June and July, principally at lamps.

63.* Latiiicrossa, Meyr.

420. Lath. lencocetifra, Meyr.

[Latiiicrossa leucocentra, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 26.)
Minor, alis ant. saturate fuscis, niaculis costfe duabus parvis

serieque punctorum marginis postici albidoochreis, punctis disci

tribus niveis ; post, saturate fuscis.
Dunedin, New Zealand, in January,

63.** TiiAMNOSARA, Meyr.

421. Thamn. chirista, Meyr.

(Thamnosara chirista, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 27.)
Minor, alis ant. alljido-fuscis, saturate fusco creberrime
irroratis ; post, griseis.

Christcliurch, New Zealand, in Deceniber.

64. Gymnobatiira, Meyr.

422. Gymn. coarctatella, Walk.

{Cryptolechia coarctatella, Walk. 768 ; Gymnohathra coarcta-
id/a, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 28.)

Media, alis ant. rufo-ochreis, punctis disci tribus saturate griseis
interdum obsoletis ; post, oclireo-albidis, basim versus griseo-
sufFusis ; $ alis abbreviatis.

Wellington to Dunedin, New Zealand, in January.

423. Gymn. sarcoxantha, Meyr.
(Gymnobathrasarcoxanlha, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 29.)
Media, alis ant. dilute ochreis, punctis disci tribus saturate
ochreo-fuscis ; post, ochreo-albidis.

Christcliurch to Dunedin, New Zealand, in January and March.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 777

424. Gymn. parca, Butl.

(CEcophora pai-ca, Butl., Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., 1877, 405 ;
CEcophora limbata, Butl., Cist. Ent. II., 560; Gi/mnobaihi-a parca,
Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 29.)

Minor, alis ant. ochreis vel flavis, intei'dum griseo-mixtis, costa
pallidiori, punctis disci tribus saturate griseis ssepius obsoletis ;
post, griseis.

I have lately seen Butler's original types of (Ec. Umhata, which
are certainly a common form of this species ; his description is
exaggerated.

Wellington to Lake Wakatipu, New Zealand, in December
and January.

425. Gymn. tholodeJIa, Meyr.

{Gymnobathra tholodella, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 30.)
Minor, alis ant. fuscis, ochreo-conspersis, punctis disci tribus
saturatioribus ; post, griseis.

Hamilton to Dunedin, New Zealand, from January to March.

426. Gymn. calliploca, Meyr.

(Gymnobathra call iploca, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 30.)
Minor, alis ant. albido-ochreis, fusco-sparsis, punctis disci tribus,

costfe quinque posticis serieque marginis postici saturate fuscis ;

post, dilute griseis.

Dunedin, New Zealand, in January,

427. Gymn. flavidella, Walk,

(Gelechia Jlavidella, Walk. 655 ; GJcojjhra utiieUa, Feld. pi.
CXL, 46 ; Gymnobathra Jlavidella, Meyr, Trans. N. Z. Inst.,
1883, 31.)

Minor, alis ant. dilute flavis, punctis disci tribus nigricantibus,
triangulo marginis postici inferiori dilute fusco, antice nigro-mar-
ginato, umbramque costam versus emittente, ciliis fuscis; post,
albis, postice roseo-griseis.

778 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

Auckland to Christchurch, New Zealand, in January and
February.

428. Gi/mn. hamatella, Walk.

((Ecophora hamatella, Walk. 700; Gymnohathra hamatella,
Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883. 31.)

Minor, alis ant. albido-ochreis, interdum ochreo-sufFusis, fusco-
sparsis, linea transversa antica recta, altera postica angulata,
punctis disci duobus strigulaque transversa, ciliis etiam saturate
fuscis ; post. (J griseis, ^ albidis.

Christchurch and Akaroa, New Zealand, from January to
March.

429. Gymn. hyetodes, Meyr.

(Gymnohathra hyeiodes, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 32.)
Media, alis ant. ^ fuscis, 5 ochreo-iiavis, punctis disci tribus

obscuris fasciaque postica recta nebulosa saturatioribus ; post.

^ saturate griseis, ^ ochreo-flavis.

Wellington, New Zealand, in February.

430. Gymn. philadelpha, Meyr.

(Gymnobatliraphiladelpha, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 33.)
Media, alis ant. griseis, leviter albido-sparsis, ciliorum apice
albo ; post, griseo-albidis, apice leviter griseo.
Mount Hutt, New Zealand, in January.

65. OSCOPHORA, Z.

Head smooth, sidetufts moderate, loosely appressed. Antennae
in (J somewhat serrate, moderately and evenly ciliated (1), basal
joint moderate, with strong pecten. Palpi moderate, second joint
not exceeding base of antennae, with appressed scales, somewhat
loose beneath, terminal joint shorter than second, moderate,
curved. Thorax smooth. Forewings elongate, hindmargin very
oblique. Hindwings somewhat narrower than forewings, elongate-
ovate, cilia |-1. Abdomen moderate, sometimes somewhat flat-
tened. Posterior tibiae clothed with long tine hairs. Forewings
with vein 7 to costa, 2 from or somewhat before angle of cell,
rarely stalked with 3. Hindwings normal.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 779

Although this is the principal genus of the family in New

Zealand and Europe, and probably elsewhere, it does not occupy a

prominent position in Australia, where it is notwithstanding

fairly represented. In the following tabulation the New Zealand

species, which form a connected group not specifically allied to

Australian forms, are not included, as they have been separately

tabulated elsewhere.

la. Forewings without discal dots.

2a. Costa white 446. eurrhoa.

2b. „ not white.

3a. Forewings yellow 431. liemisj^haerica.

3b. ,, grey 445. 2)olioc7'ana.

lb. Forewings with discal dots.

2a. Face clear white 438. eremcea.

2b. Not white.

3a. Head fuscous or grey.

4a. Second discal spot directly beneath first... 442. epimicta.

4b. ,, „ „ obliquely before first... 439. zophodes.

3b. Head whitish-ochreous or yellowish.

4a. Head mixed with reddish-fuscous 434. uniformis.

4b. ,, not mixed with fuscous.

5a. Hindwings yellow-ochreous 436. hyiwclialea.

5b. ,, not ochreous.

6a. Forewings clear whitish-ochreous, with
dark markings.

7a. Thorax posteriorly whitish-ochreous 443. sulfurea.

7b. „ wholly dark fuscous 432. anthemodes.

6b. Forewings not whitish-ochreous.

7a. Forewings dark fuscous, with whitish

ochreous spots 444. lychnosema.

7b. Forewings not dark fuscous.
8a. Anterior half of costa broadly whitish-
ochreous 433. ochroma.

8b. Anterior half of costa not whitish-
ochreous.
9a. Basal third of costa dark grey.
51

780 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO- LEPIDOPTERA,

10a. Second discal spot obliquely before first,

confluent 440. nuhifera.

1 Ob. Second discal spot slightly beyond first ...441. lymphatica.

9b. Basal third of costa not dark grey 437. lagara.

431. Oec. hemisphaerica, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. ochreo-flavis, fascia post medium perangusta
fere recta serieque punctorum submarginali nigrescentibus ; post.
griseis.

^9. 11-12 mm. Head ochreous-yellow. Pal^^i yellow, lower
half of second joint dark fuscous. Antenna; dark , fuscous
Thorax dai'k purplish-fuscous. Abdomen yellowish, above
greyish-tinged. Legs dark fuscous, posterior pair and apex of
joints yellowish. Fore wings elongate, costa moderately arched,
apex rounded, hindmargin very obliquely rounded ; rather deep
ochreous-yellow ; a very small blackish spot at base of costa ; a
slender almost straight, slightly outwards-curved, blackish fascia
from I of costa to inner margin Ijefore anal angle, beyond this a
faint brownish sufiusion ; an indistinct curved line of blackish
dots very near hindmargin : cilia ochreous-yellow. Hindwings
grey ; cilia whitish-grey.

Brisbane, Queensland ; rather common in September.

432. Oec. antheDwdes, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. albido-ochreis, basi saturate fusca, nebula dorsi
antica, fascia etiam postica obliqua cum altera marginis postici
inferius connexa dilutius fuscis, punctis disci his imjiositis duobus
saturate fuscis ; post, saturatius griseis.

(J $. 9-12 mm. Head whitish-ochreous. Palpi whitish-ochreous,
second-joint externally dark fuscous except at ajDex. Antennae
dark fuscous. Thorax dark purplish-fuscous. Abdomen grey.
Legs dark fuscous, apex of joints and posterior pair whitish-
ochreous. Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately
arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin very obliquely rounded ;
whitish-ochreous ; base of wing narrowly dark purplish-fuscous ;
a cloudy dark fuscous dot on fold before middle, connected with

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A, 781

inner margin by an obscure brownish-ochveous cloud ; a triangular
fuscous spot on costa beyond middle, its apex touching a cloudy
brownish-ochreous patch on anal angle, which generally extends
along hindmargin to apex ; a dark fuscous dot in this patch in
disc beyond middle : cilia whitish-ochreous, more or less suffused
with pale greyish. Hindwings rather dark grey ; cilia grey.

Fernshaw and Warragul, Victoria; Mount Wellington (1100
feet), Tasmania ; locally rather common, from November to
January.

433. Oec. ochronm, n. sp.

Parva, alls ant, dilutius fuscis, saturatiori-irroratis, dimidio
costne antico la3tius albido-ochreo, punctis disci quattuor, duobus
costse posticis albido-ochreo disjunctis, serie etiam subinarginali
nigrescentibus ; post, dilute griseis.

(J $. 10-15 mm. Head, palpi, and antennse whitish-ochreous ;
basal half of second joint of palpi dark fuscous. Thorax fuscous,
shoulders whitish-ochreous. Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs dark
grey, posterior tibi:e and apex of joints whitish-ochreous. Fore-
wings elongate, costa moderately arched, apex rounded, hind-
margin rather strongly oblique, rounded ; light fuscous, irrorated
with dark fuscous ; a dark fuscous spot on base of costa ; a
moderately broad whitish-ochreous streak along basal half of
costa, lower edge twice sinuate, sinuations filled with dark fuscous ;
a cloudy dark fuscous spot on costa beyond middle, and another
at I, between which is a cloudy whitish-ochreous spot ; four cloudy
dark fuscous discal spots, first before middle, second on fold
directly beneath first but more obscure, third above middle, fourth
beyond middle ; a curved series of obscure dark fuscous spots very
near hindmargin : cilia whitish-fuscous, towards tips more whitish.
Hindwings pale grey ; cilia grey- whitish.

Sydney, New South Wales, in March and June ; eight specimens
on a fence.

434. Oec. uniformis, n. sp.

Media, alls ant. albido-ochreis. rufescenti-conspersis, punctis disci
duobus obscuris saturatius fuscis, linea postica angulata obscura
rufescenti ; post, dilute griseis.

lS2 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

2- 19 nun. Head and tliorax whitish-ochreous, mixed with
reddish-fuscous. Palpi whitish-ochreous, terminal joint and apex
of second suffused with dark fuscous. Antenna? whitish-ochreous,
finely annulated with dark fuscous. Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs
whitish-ochreous, ringed with grey. Forewings elongate, rather
narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin
very obliquely rounded ; whitish-ochreous, densely irrorated with
reddish-fuscous; an obscure dark reddish-fuscous dot in disc
before middle, and a second beyond middle ; a very obscure
angulated darker posterior transverse line : cilia whitish-
ochreous, densely irrorated with reddish-fuscous. Hindwings pale
grey ; cilia grey-whitish.

Bathurst (2,400 feet) and Mount Canobolas (4,000), New South
Wales ; two specimens in April.

43.5. Oec. jjseudospretella, Stt.

Media, alis ant. ochreis, saturate fusco conspersis, maculis disci
tribus parvis serieque postica submarginali saturate fuscis ; post,
dilute griseis.

A well-known species, of Avhich the larva feeds in skins, seeds,
dry refuse, &c.

Glen Innes (3,000 feet), Bathurst (2,300 feet), Blackheath
(3,500 feet), and Cooma (2,500 feet), New South Wales; Mel-
bourne, Victoria ; Launceston, Campbelltown, George's Bay and
Hobart, Tasmania ; Mount Graham and Port Lincoln, South
Australia ; Hamilton to Dunedin, New Zealand ; common in
houses, fi'om November to March ; introduced from Europe.

436. Oec. liji-pochnJca^ n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. albido-luteis, marginibus omnibus strigisque
duabus posticis obliquis obscure ochreis ; post, flavescentibus.

(J 2. 13-17 mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous, bronzy-
tinged. Palpi and antennae fuscous. Abdomen pale ochreous.
Legs fuscous, posterior tibite yellowish. Forewings elongate,
rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex acute, hindmargin
extremely oblique, straight orsomewhat sinuate ; very pale wdiitish-

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 783

yellowish ; inai-kings very cloudy, Ijrownish-ochreous, bronzy-
shining, forming an obscure suffusion towards all margins, and two
inwardly oblique streaks in disc about middle and f , terminating
in marginal sutfusion : cilia pale bronzy-ochreous. Hindwings
and cilia yellow-ochreous, fuscous-tinged.

Sydney, New South Wales ; several specimens in February and
March.

437. Oeo. Ingara, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. ochreo-albidis, griseo-mixtis, punctis disci circiter
quinque, costas etiam duobus posticis saturate griseis ; post, dilutius
griseis.

(J. 11-13 mm. Head very pale whitish-ochreous. Palpi whitish,
second joint dark grey. Antennae grey. Thorax grey-whitish,
mixed with grey. Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs dark grey,
posterior pair and apex of joints ochreous- whitish. Forewings
elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-
pointed, hindmargin somewhat sinuate, extremely oblique ; ochre-
ous-whitish, irregularly irrorated with grey ; markings dark
grey, ill-defined ; a small round spot in disc at |, a second
obliquely before it beneath fold, a third on fold obliquely beyond
first, sometimes an additional one above third, a fourth beneath
and beyond middle of disc, a fifth obliquely beyond and above
fourth ; two cloudy spots on costa at % and \ : cilia ochreous-grey-
Avhitish. Hindwings light grey ; cilia ochreou's-whitish.

Rosewood, Queensland ; Sydney, New South Wales ; several
specimens, from October to December.

438. Oec, erenuaa, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. acutis, griseis, cano-sparsis, punctis disci tribus
obscuris saturatioribus ; post, griseis ; capite cano.

(J. 14-16 mm. Head white, sometimes with a grey spot on
crow^n. Palpi dark grey, terminal joint mixed with whitish.
Antennae white, sharply annulated with dark grey. Thorax dark
grey, patagia mixed with white. Abdomen grey. Legs dark
grey, hairs of posterior tibije ochreous-whitish. Forewings
elongate, rather narrow, costa gently arched, apex acute, hind-

784 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

margin somewhat sinuate, extremely oblique ; fuscous-grey,
irrorated with white ; three small cloudy somewhat darker spots,
first in disc at J, second on fold directly beneath first, third in
disc at I : cilia whitish-grey. Hindwings grey ; cilia grey-
whitish, with a cloudy grey line near base.

Toowoomba (2,000 feet), Queensland ; Glen Lines (3,500 feet),
New South Wales ; Mount Wellington (2, .500 feet), Tasmania ;
several specimens in December and January.

43'j. Oec. zophodes, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. acutis, griseis, punctis disci tril)us lineaque
postioa sinuata obscuris saturatioribus, tertio duplici ; post,
dilutius griseis ; capite griseo.

9. 20-21 mm. Head, palpi, antennse, thorax, abdomen, and
legs fuscous-grey ; hairs of posterior tibije ochreous-whitish.
Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex
acute, hindmargin somewhat sinuate, extremely oblique ; fuscous-
grey, with a few whitish and dark fuscous scales ; markings
cloudy darker fuscous, very indistinct ; a spot in disc at J, a
second on fold obliquely before and suffused ly connected with first,
and a third in disc at §, transversely double and more blackish ; a
transA^erse line from | of costa to anal angle, sinuate inwards
beneath costa : cilia pale fuscous. Hindwings light grey ; cilia
paler.

Blackheath (3,500 feet). New South Wales ; two specimens in
November.

440. Oec. nnhifera, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. griseis, ochreo-albido conspersis, fascia antica
angusta, macula costje post medium, punctis disci duobus lineaque
postica superius indentata saturate griseis ; post, griseis ; capite
albido-ochreo.

$ $. 16-17 mm. Head Avhitish-ochreous. Palpi dark grey,
somewhat mixed with whitish. Antennro grey. Thorax rather
dark grey. Abdomen grey. Legs dark grey, hairs of posterior
tibiiij whitish. Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa mode-
rately arched, apex acute, hindmargin hardly rounded, extremely

BT E. MEYKICK, B.A. 785

oblique ; grey, densely irrorated or suffused with ochreous-
whitish ; markings cloudy, dark grey ; a streak along costa and
inner margin towards base ; a narrow inwardly oblique fascia
about I, tending to be interrupted into two spots in disc ; a short
indistinct inwardly oblique streak from costa at 5 ; a small spot
below middle of disc, and another in disc at | ; a thick cloudy
line from costa near apex to anal angle, sharply indented beneath
costa : cilia light grey. Hindwings grey ; cilia light grey.

Glen Innes (3,-500 feet). New South Wales ; two specimens in
December.

441. Oec. lijmphatica, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. griseis, ochreo-albido conspersis, costse dimidio
antico, punctis disci tribus quattuorve, striga anguli analis, macula
costse post medium, lineaque postica superius indentata saturate
fuscis, macula costte ante lineam posticam ochreo-albida ; post,
griseis ; capite albido-ochreo.

(J $. 14-18 mm. Head pale ochreous or whitish-ochreous.
Palpi dark fuscous, terminal joint ochreous-whitish. Antennae,
thoi-ax, abdomen, and legs fuscous-grey ; hairs of posterior tibiae
ochreous-whitish. Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa,
moderately arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin hardly rounded,
extremely oblique ; fuscous-grey, irrorated or partially suffused
with ochreous-whitish ; markings cloudy, dark fuscous ; a streak
along basal half of costa ; a small spot in disc at J, a second on
fold somewhat beyond first, and a third in disc at |, connected by
a streak with anal angle ; a fourth less distinct above fold near
anal angle ; an inwardly oblique spot from costa at § ; an
ochreous-whitish costal spot beyond this ; a thick line from costa
at I to anal angle, indented beneath costa : cilia light fuscous-grey.
Hindwings grey ; cilia pale grey. --

Bowenfels (2,500 feet), and Mount Kosciusko (4,300 feet). New
South Wales ; Deloraine and Hobart, Tasmania ; leather common
from November to January.

786 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICKO-LEPIDUPTKRA,

442. Oec. epimkta, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. dilutius fiiscis, saturatiori-irroratis, punctis
disci tribus saturate fuscis ; post, dilute griseis ; capite fusco.

(J. 12-13 mm. Head, palpi, anteniife, and thorax light fuscous,
mixed with dark fuscous. Abdomen light grey. Legs dark
fuscous, apex of joints and posterior pair pale greyish-ochreous.
Forewings elongate, costa moderately arched, apex rounded,
hindmargin very obliquely rounded ; light fuscous, irrorated with
dark fuscous ; a small dark fuscous spot in disc before middle, a
second on fold directly beneath first, and a tliird in disc at | : cilia
pale greyish, with one or two cloudy dark fuscous lines. Hind-
wings pale grey ; cilia grey-whitish.

Deloraine, Tasmania ; live specimens in November.

443. Oec. snlfurea, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. sulfureis, fascia ad basim, triangulo dorsi medio,
striga intus perobliqua costje postica, signo anguli analis, macula
apicis, punctis etiam disci quattuor cum his partim conjunctis
saturate griseis ; post, saturatius griseis.

$ $. 14-19 mm. Head and palpi pale ochreous-yellovv, palpi
with lower half of second joint dark fuscous. Antennse dark
fuscous. Thorax dark purplish-fuscous, posterior margin whitish-
ochreous. Abdomen grey. Legs dark grey, hairs of posterior
tibiae pale yellowish. Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa
gently arched, apex tolerably pointed, hindmargin extremely
obliquely rounded ; whitish-ochreous, yellowish-tinged ; markings
dark grey ; a straight rather narrow blackish-grey fascia almost at
base ; an irregular dot in disc at |, a second on fold directly
beneath first, and two transversely placed and generally confluent
in disc at | ; a triangular blotch on middle of inner margin, its
apex touching second discal dot ; an elongate spot along costa
about |, sometimes anteriorly produced into a streak reaching
first discal dot ; an irregular streak from third discal dot to anal

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 787

angle ; a somewhat angular apical blotch, produced along hind-
margin as a narrow streak to dorsal blotch : cilia grey. Hind-
wings rather dark grey ; cilia whitish-ochreous.

Sydney, New South Wales ; Adelaide and Port Lincoln, South
Australia ; Albany, West Australia ; locally common in October
and November.

444. Oec. li/chnosema, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. saturate fuscis, basi, puncto disci post medium,
maculaque costte postica transversa luteis ; capite luteo.

(J. 11-12 mm. Head and palpi pale yellowish-ochreous, base
of palpi dark fuscous. Antenn?e dark fuscous. Thorax pale
yellowish-ochreous, anterior margin broadly dark fuscous.
Abdomen dark grey. Legs dark grey, apex of joints and hairs of
posterior tibife whitish-ochreous. Forewings elongate, rather
narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin
very obliquely rounded ; grey, densely irrorated with dark
fuscous, purplish-tinged ; markings pale yellowish-ochreous ; a
narrow basal spot ; a small spot in disc beyond middle ; a
moderately large transverse spot from costa at |^, reaching more
than half across wing : cilia grey, irrorated with dark fuscous.
Hindwings rather dark grey ; cilia grey.

Sydney, New South Wales ; George's Bay, Tasmania ; four
specimens, from November to January.

445. Oec. 2Joliocrana, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. dilute griseis, fusco-irroratis ; post, griseo-
albidis ; capite ochreo-albido.

(J. 13-15 mm. Head and palpi ochreous-whitish, second joint
of palpi suffused with dark fuscous except at apex. Antennfe
fuscous. Thorax pale grey. Abdomen grey-whitish. Legs dark
fuscous, posterior pair and apex of joints ochreous-whitish.
Forewings elongate, narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-
pointed, hindmargin extremely obliquely rounded ; pale grey,
irrorated with fuscous : cilia grey-whitish, irrorated with fuscous.
Hindwings and cilia grey-whitish.

Blackheath (3,500 feet). New South Wales; common in
October.

785 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

446. Oec. eurrlion, n. sp.

Minor, alls ant. ochreis, costa anguste nivea ; post, albido-
griseis, apice ochreo-tincto.

(J 9. 15-17 mm. Head white, crown more or less ochreous-
grey. Palpi white, second joint mixed with ochreous and grey,
terminal joint anteriorly grey. Antennai whitish. Thorax
brownish-ochreous. Abdomen ochreous-whitish. Legs dark grey,
posterior pair ochreous-whitish. Forewings elongate, rather
narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin
extremely obliquely rounded; yellowish-ochreous; a narrow white
streak along costa from base to 5 : cilia whitish-ochreous. Hind-
wings very pale whitish-grey, apex suffused witli Avhitisli-ochreous ;
cilia very pale whitish-ochreous.

Sydney, Blackheath (3,500 feet), and Bathurst (2,300 feet).
New South Wales ; Launceston, Tasmania ; rather connnon from
January to April.

447. Oec. scholrm, Meyr.
{Oecophora scholcea, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 35.)
Media, alls ant. dilute griseis, rufescenti-conspersis, maculis

costiB tribus anticis, punctis disci duobus, tertio plicae post
primum disci posito, lineaque postica transversa angulata saturate
fuscis ; post, griseis.

Wellington to Invercai-gill, New Zealand, from Deceml)er to
February.

448. Oec. letharga, Meyr.

(Oecophora letharga, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst, 1883, 35 )
Minor, alis ant. albido-griseis, fusco-conspersis, maculis costte
tribus anticis nebulosis, punctis disci duobus, tertio plicse ante
primum disci posito, lineaque postica transversa angulata saturate
fuscis ; post, griseis.

Dunedin, New Zealand, in January.

449. Oec. chlnritis, Meyr.
{Oecophora chloritis, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 36.)

15V E. MEYRICK, B.A. 789

Minor-, alis ant. all)i(lo-flavidis, costfe basi ac puncto sub plica
posito nigris, fascia antica angusta plicani non superante, linea
anguli analis oljliqua, lineaque transversa postica obsoleta griseis ;
post griseis.

Lake Wakatipu, New Zealand, in December.

450. Oec. ejnmylin, Meyr.

(Oecophora epim.yJia, Meyr,, Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 36.)
Minor, alis ant. dilute griseis, maculis costte tribus, quarta

plicae, punctisque disci duobus obscuris saturatioribus ; post.

griseis ; capite griseo.

Castle Hill, New Zealand, in January.

451. Oec. contextella, Walk.

(GelecMa contextella, Walk. 656 ; Oecophora contexteKa, Meyr.,
Trans. K Z. Inst., 1883, 37.)

Minor, alis ant. canis, griseo-sparsis, fascia ad basim, altera
post medium, maculis costse duabus, lineaque postica sinuata
saturate griseis, striga obliqua sub plica posita signoque disci
arcuato nigris ; post, dilute griseis ; capite ochreo-albo.

Christchurch to Invercargill, New Zealand, in December and
January.

452. Oec. hemiviochla, Meyr.

{Oecophora hemimochla, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 38.)

Minor, alis ant. albidis, griseo-conspersis, striga sub plica posita
obliqua, punctis disci duobus, striga anguli analis obliqua,
maculaque subapicali nigricantibus ; post, albido-griseis ; capite
ochreo-albo.

Hamilton to Wellington, New Zealand, in January and
March.

453. Oec. griseata, Butl.

{Oecophora griseata, Butl, Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., 1877, 405;
Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 39.)

790 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

Media, alis ant. dilatatis, albido-ochreis griseisve, punctis disci
duobus, signo sub plica posito oblique, macula costfe media
nebulosa alteraque anguli analis saturate fuscis ; post, griseo-
albidis griseisve.

Christchurch to Invercargill, New Zealand, fi'om December to
March.

454. Oec. plicgojjhylla, ]\Ieyr.

{Oecox>hora phegojihylln, Mcyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 39.)
Media, alis ant. dilatatis, ochreo-rufis, puncto disci strigaque

dorsi indentata ochreo-albidis, partim flavo-suffusis ; post, saturate

griseis.

Lake Wakatipu, New Zealand, in December.

45.5. Oec. oporrra, Meyr.

(Oecophora oj)orcea, Meyr., Trans. N. Z., Inst., 1883, 40.)
Media, alis ant. saturate flavis, linea costse basali nigrescenti,
interdum punctis disci tribus rufis ; post, griseis ; thorace flavo.
Castle Hill, New Zealand, in January.

456. Oec. horcea, Meyr.

{Oecophora horcea, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 40.)
Minor, alis ant. albido-ochreis, flavido-sufFusis, striga costae
basali nigrescenti, signo plicte, altero anguli analis, punctisque
costae duobus obscuris saturate fuscis ; post, griseis ; thorace
antice saturate fusco, postice flavido.

Hamilton to Bealey River, New Zealand, in January.

457. Oec. armigerella, Walk.

{Oecophora armigereUa, Walk. 698, Meyr. Trans. N. Z. Inst.,
1883, 41.)

Minor, alis ant flavis, striga costse basali nigrescenti, interdum
punctis disci duobus lineaque auguli analis obliqua saturate
fuscis ; post, griseis ; thorace flavo, humeris anguste nigres-
centibus.

Dunedin to Invercargill, New Zealand, from December to
February. *

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 791

458. Dec. apanthes, Meyr.

(Oecophora apanthes, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 41.)
Minor, alls ant. dilute albido-ochreis, vix flavido-sufFusis, striga

costae basali nigrescenti, macula apicis parva, interdum punctis

disci tribus lineaque anguli analis obliqua saturate fuscis ; post.

albido-griseis ; thorace dilute albido-ochreo, macula humeri

interior! saturate fusco.

Hamilton, New Zealand, in January.

459. Oec. anoima, Meyr.

(Oecophora aucema,M.ejr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 42.)
Minor, alls ant. albido-ochreis, levissime griseo-irroratis,
striga costse basali, strigula anguli analis obliqua, interdum etiam
signo plicae saturate fuscis ; post, griseis ; thorace saturate fusco,
macula lateris parva pallida.

Lake Wakatipu, New Zealand, in December.

460. Oec. macarella, Meyr.

(Oecophora macarella, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 43.)
Minor, alis ant. dilute flavis, costse basi nigrescenti, interdum

signo plicos lineaque anguli analis obliqua obscuris saturate fuscis;

post, albido-griseis ; thorace saturate fusco, margine postico

anguste flavido.

Christchurch, New Zealand, in January.

461. Oec. Jiiaranta, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. angustis, dilute albido-ochreis ; post, griseo-
albidis.

(J. 12 mm. Head, palpi, antennte, thorax, abdomen, and legs
whitish-ochreous. , Forewings elongate, narrow, costa moderately
arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin extremely obliquely
rounded ; pale whitish-ochreous ; extreme base of costa dark
fuscous : cilia pale whitish-ochreous. Hindwings grey-whitish ;
cilia very pale whitish-ochreous.

Invercargillj New Zealand ; one specimen in December.

792 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

462. Oec. homodoxa, Meyr.

(Oecophora homodoxa, Meyr. Trans. N. Z. Inst., 18S3, 43.)
Minor, alis ant. albido-griseis, saturatiori irroratis, signo plicae

ante medium alteroque anguli analis vix saturatioribus ; post.

griseis.

Lake AVakatipu, New Zeakmd, in December.

463 Oec. siderodeta, Meyr.

{Oecophora siderodeta, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 43.)
Minor, alis ant. angustis,ochreis, saturate fusco-suffusis, interdum

fasciis tribus obliquis obscuris, dorso sa?pius basim versus palli-

diori ; post, saturate griseis.

Christchurch to Lake Wakatipu, New Zealand, from December

to February.

4G4. Oec. hojilodesma, INIeyi'.

( Oecojyhora hoj^lodesiua, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 44.)
Minor, alis ant, angustis, dilute flavis, costse dimidio antico,

fasciis tribus obliquis quartaque marginis postici griseis ; post.

griseis.

South Rakaia, New Zealand, in March.

465. Oec. chrysogramma, Meyr.

( Oecojjhora chrysogramma, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 44.)
Minor, alis ant. angustis, saturate flavis, l>asi, fasciis duabus

obliquis, macula costse postica transversa, strigaque marginis postici

saturate purpureo-fuscis ; post, saturate fuscis.
Wellington, New Zealand, in December.

65.* Crbmnogenes, Meyr.

466. Cretnn. aphrontis, Meyr.

(Cremnogenes aphro7itis, Meyr., Trans N. Z. Inst., 1883, 46.)
Minor, alis ant. ochreo-flavis, partim griseo-sufFusis, puncto

disci nigro ; post, saturate griseis, basim versus dilutioribus ;

a,ntennis ^ brevius ciliatis.

Arthur's Pass, NeAv Zealand, in January.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 793

467. Cremn. ejnchalca, n. sp.

Minor, alls ant. rereo-ochreis, rarius punctis disci cluobus lineaque
postica transversa obscuris griseis ; post, griseis ; antennis ^
longius ciliatis.

^ 12-15 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax shining bronzy-ochreous.
Antennse dark bronzy-fuscous, ciliations 2^, wliorled. Abdomen
dark bronzy-grey. Legs bronzy-ochreous, anterior jaair suffused
with grey. Forewings elongate, costa moderately arched, apex
round-pointed, hindmargin very obliquely rounded ; shining
bronzy-ochreous, usually without markings ; rarely a dot on fold,
a second in disc beyond middle, and a postei'ior transverse angu-
lated line obscurely grey : cilia pale bronzy-ochreous. Hindwings
grey, with purplish reflections ; cilia pale greyish-ochreous.

Might readily be mistaken for a form of C. aphrontis, but for the
entirely different antennal ciliations of the ^, which are as in the
following species.

Arthur's Pass (5,000 feet), New Zealand ; several specimens in
January.

468. Cremn. oxyiyia, Meyr.

(Cremnogenes oxyina, Meyr., Trans. N. Z. Inst., 1883, 45.)
Minor, alis ant. ^ saturate fuscis, ferrugineo-mixtis, ^ rufo-

ochreis, fusco-mixtis, interdum striga dorsi indentata pallida ;

signo sub plica posito punctoque disci nigricantibus; post, saturate

fuscis.

Lake Wakatipu, New Zealand, in December.

66. Crossophora, Meyr.

Head smooth, sidetufts moderate, loosely spreading. Antennae
in (J serrate, with long fine cilia (3-4), basal joint with strong
pecten. Palpi moderate, second joint not reaching base of
antennas, with appressed scales, somewhat loose beneath, terminal
joint shorter than second, moderate, curved. Thorax smooth.
Forewings elongate, hindmargin very oblique. Hindwings some-
what narrower than forewings, elongate-ovate or ovate-lanceolate,
cilia \-\\. Abdomen moderate. Posterior tibise clothed with long

794 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

hairs. Forewings with vein 7 to costa, 2 from al)out angle of cell.
Hindwings normal, veins 3 and 4 sometimes stalked, rarely coin-
cident.

Differs essentially from Ofcoj'ihora, of which it is a development,
only by the long antennal ciliations of ^.
la. Hindwings yellowish or ochreous.

2a. Forewings with a white bar 474. semiota.

2b. „ without white markings 473. cenopa.

lb. Hindwings grey or whitish.

2a. Head pale ochreous 469. phtJiorodoxa.

21). „ white.

3a. Discal dots blackish 472, thetias. .

3b. „ ,, ochreous.

4a. Thorax with anterior margin dark fuscous... 470. niphadia.

4b. ,, wholly white 471. asijneta.

469. Cross. 2yfi'i^'orodoxa, n. sp.

Media, alls ant. griseis, saturatiori alboque conspersis, punctis
disci tribus serieque postica angulata saturatioribus, strigula
anguli analis alba maculam posticam saturatiorem excipiente ;
post, dilutius griseis ; capite luteolo.

^ 5, 16-20 mm. Head pale ochreous. Palpi dark fuscous
mixed with white. Antennse whitish-ochreous or fuscous. Thorax
white, with an anterior dark fuscous band. Abdomen grey. Legs
dark fuscous mixed with ochreous- whitish. Forewings elongate,
rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, hind-
margin extremely obliquely rounded ; grey, coarsely irrorated
with dai'k grey and whitish ; five or six obscure darker spots on
costa ; an obscure darker dot in disc before middle, a second
obliquely before it on fold, and a third more blackish in disc
beyond middle, surrounded with whitish and connected with anal
angle by a whitish line, followed by a suffused darker spot ; an
angulated transverse series of cloudy blackish spots very near
hindmargin and apical part of costa : cilia grey mixed with whitish,
with a series of cloudy darker spots. Hindwings grey, paler
towards base ; cilia grey, base ochi^eous-whitish.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 795

The only species of the genus possessing an ochreous head.
Sydney and Blackheath (3,000 feet), New South Wales, in
October and November ; two specimens.

470. Cross. ?d]:>hadia, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. niveis, plus minusve ochreo-sufFusis, puncto
subcostali ad basim nigricante, punctis disci tribus serieque sub-
marginali fuscis ; post, albido-griseis ; capita niveo.

(J 5. 13-18 mm. Head and antennae white. Palpi white,
second joint externally dark fuscous towards apex. Thorax
white, anterior margin narrowly suffused with dark fuscous.
Abdomen and legs whitish, anterior legs dark grey. Forewings
elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-
pointed, hindmargin extremely obliquely rounded ; white, some-
what suffused with pale brownish-ochreous towards margins and
apex ; a blackish dot near base beneath costa ; a brownish-
ochreous or fuscous dot in disc before middle, a second obliquely
before it on fold, and a third in disc at f ; a row of obscure
fuscous dots immediately before hindmargin and apical part of
costa : cilia veiy pale whitish-ochreous. Hindwings whitish-grey,
base paler ; cilia ochreous-whitish.

Brisbane and Toowoomba (2,000 feet), Queensland ; Sydney,
New South Wales ; live specimens in September and October.

471. Cross, asyneta, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. niveis, maculis duabus disci in fasciis obliquis
perobscuris impositis, tertia ad dorsum media, nebula costae ante-
apicali lineaque sulmiarginali ochreis ; post, griseo-albidis.

(J 5. 13-15 mm. Head, palpi, antennse, and thorax white;
second joint of palpi with a broad suffused dark fuscous band.
Abdomen grey- whitish. Legs whitish, anterior pair suffused with
dai'k fuscous. Forewings elongate, rather narrow,' costa moderately
arched, apex tolerably acute, hindftiargin extremely obliquely
rounded : white, with cloudy yellow-ochreous markings ; a small
round spot in disc before middle, and a second at | ; these spots
tend to be connected with costa and about anal angle by cloudy
52

796 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

streaks, forming narrow oblique fasciae : a small indistinct spot
towards middle of inner margin ; an indistinct subtriangular
costal suffusion towards apex ; a row of small very indistinct
somewhat confluent spots before hindmargin : cilia ochreous-
whitish. Hindwings grey-whitish ; cilia ochreous-whitish.
Sydney, New South Wales, in October ; three specimens.

472. Cross, thetias, n. sp.

Minor, alls ant. albidis, punctis disci triljus serieque sub-
marginali nigricantibus ; post, exalbidis.

(J. 13 mm. Head, palpi, antennae, thorax, abdomen, and legs
whitish ; second joint of palpi externally grey ; anterior margin
of thorax narrowly grey ; anterior and middle legs suffused with
grey. Forewings elongate, narrow, costa slightly arched, apex
round-pointed, hindmargin extremely obliquely rounded ; white,
slightly greyish-tinged ; a blackish dot in disc before middle, a
second on fold slightly beyond first, and a third in disc at f ; a
row of blackish dots before hindmargin and apical part of costa,
terminating in two larger dots on anal angle : cilia whitish.
Hindwings grey- whitish ; cilia whitish.

Sydney, New South Wales ; one specimen in November.

473. Cross, amopa, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturatius purpureo-griseis ; post, luteolis,
apice vix griseo.

^ 5. 16-17 mm. Head mixed with pale yellowish and grey.
Palpi grey, edges whitish-yellowish. Antenna? dark grey. Thorax
purplish-grey, sometimes with some whitish-yellowish scales
towards centre. Abdomen whitish-yellowish. Legs dark fuscous,
posterior pair whitish-yellowish. Forewings elongate, narrow,
costa posteriorly gently arched, apex tolerably acute, hindmargin
slightly sinuate, extremely oblique ; rather dark purplish-grey :
cilia purplish-grey, towards anal angle yellowish-tinged. Hind-
wings pale greyish-yellowish, towards apex somewhat greyer ;
cilia whitish-yellowish.

Quorn, South Australia, in October ; three specimens.

BT E. MEYRICK, B.A. 797

■474. Cross, semiotn, n. sp.

Parva, alls ant. saturate purpureo-fuscis, nitidis, fascia antica
augusta costam non attingente alba ; post, subfulvis.

(J. 11 mm. Head, palpi, antenute, thorax, and abdomen dark
bronzy-grey. Legs dark grey, apex of joints and liairs of posterior
tibias ochreous- whitish. Fore wings elongate, narrow, costa gently
arched, apex tolerably acute, hindmargin hardly sinuate, extremely
oblique ; dark shining purplish-fuscous ; a rather cloudy straight
somewhat oblique ochreous-white bar from inner margin before
middle, reaching more than half across wing, apex suffused : cilia
purplish-grey. Hindwings and cilia shining smoky-ochreous ;
veins 3 and 4 coincident.

It is not improbable that the coincidence of veins 3 and 4 of the
hindwings may prove to be an individual characteristic, and not
constant in the species ; at any rate it does not at present seem
necessary to separate the species generically from C. ceyiopa, to
which it is in other respects apparently nearly allied.

Sydney, New South Wales ; one specimen in October.

67. OcHLOGEXES, Meyr.

Head with appressed scales, sidetuf ts small, appressed. Antennae
in (J moderately and evenly ciliated (1), basal joint moderate,
without pecten. Palpi rather short, second joint not nearly
reaching base of antennae, somewhat dilated with appressed scales,
slightly loose beneath, terminal joint shorter than second,
moderate, curved. Thorax smooth. Forewings elongate, hind-
margin very oblique. Hind -wings f, ovate-lanceolate, cilia 1|.
Abdomen moderate. Middle tibiae with median whorl of pro-
jecting scales ; posterior tibise clothed with long hairs above.
Forewings with vein 7 to costa, 2 nearly from angle of cell.
Hindwings normal.

Also a development of Oecophora.

475. Odd. advectella, Walk.
(Gelechia advectella., Walk. 647.)

798 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

Parva, alls ant. albis, fusco-conspersis, punctis nebulcsis
plerisque, tribus etiam disci iusignioribus iiigris ; post, griseis,
basim versus dilutioribus.

(J 9. 9-12 mm. Head and thorax ochreous- whitish, irrorated
with blackish. Palpi ochreous-white, basal half of second joint and
base of apical joint black. Antennae whitish, sufFusedly annulated
with dark grey. Abdomen ochreous-grey-whitish. Legs dark
fuscous ringed with whitish, posterior pair whitish. Forewings
elongate, narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed,
hindmargin extremely obliquely rounded ; white, finely irrorated
with fuscous ; markings formed by a coarse black irroratiou,
consisting of numerous small cloudy irregularly scattered spots,
and three rather larger and more conspicuous in disc, first before
middle, second on fold obliquely before first, third at | : cilia
whitish, with a sharp black median line, base irrorated with black.
Hindwings grey, becoming much paler towards base ; cilia grey
whitish.

Duaringa, Queensland ; Newcastle and Sydney, New South
Wales ; Launceston, Tasmania ; in September, January, and
July, not uncommon on trunks of Eucalyptus.

68. DissELiA, Meyr.

Head smooth, sidetufts rather large, appi^essed. Antenun3 in ^
serrate, moderately strongly ciliated (1^), basal joint rather
elongate, with strong pecten. Palpi rather short, second joint not
reaching base of antennae, with smooth appressed scales, terminal
joint shorter than second, moderate, curved. Thorax smooth.
Forewings elongate, hindmargin very oldique. Hindwings slightly
narrower than forewings, almost ovate-lanceolate, cilia 1 ; in (J .
with an expanded spherical tuft of very long fine radiating hairs
at base above. Abdomen somewhat flattened. Posterior tibire
clothed with long fine hairs above. Forewings with vein 7 to
costa, 2 from angle of cell. Hindwings normal.

Nearly allied to Oecophora and Crossopliora, probably developed
from the former ; diffex'ing from all others 1)y the spherical tuft
of hairs on the hindwings of ^.

BY E. MEYRICK, B A. / yy

476. Diss, akiirota, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. cauis, griseo plus iniuusve suff'usis, puuctis disci
tribus serieque submarginali saturate griseis, interduni obsoletis ;
post. (J luteolis, apice griseo, 2 griseis.

^9. 18-22 mm. Head white. Palpi white, second joint
externally grey. Antennae grey. Thorax white, sometimes pale
greyish anteriorly. Abdomen in ^ whitish-yellowish, in § grey-
whitish. Legs dark grey, ringed with whitish, posterior pair
whitish-yellowish. Forewings elongate, narrow, costa moderately
arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin extremely obliquely
rounded ; white, more or less suffusedly irrorated with grey ; a
dark grey dot in disc at -^-, a second on fold rather before first,
and a third in disc at |, sometimes all obsolete ; a submarginal
row of dark grey dots along hindmargin and apical part of costa,
often obsolete : cilia whitish-grey or whitish-yellowish. Hind-
wings in J" pale ochreous-yellowish, apex suffused with grey, in §
wholly grey ; cilia in ^ whitish-yellowish, in 5 grey-whitish,
round apex suffused with grey.

WoUongong and Mount Kosciusko (4,000 feet), New South
Wales ; Launceston, Deloraine, Campbelltown, and George's Bay,
Tasmania ; rather common from October to January.

69. Macrobathra, Meyr.

Head smooth, sidetufts small, closely appressed. Antennse in
(J slender, moderately and evenly ciliated (1), basal joint very
elongate, very slender, without pecten or with one or two scales
at base. Palpi long or very long, second joint somewhat
exceeding base of antennae, with appressed scales, smooth or
somewhat loose beneath, terminal joint longer than second,
slender, strongly recurved. Thorax smooth. Forewings elongate-
lanceolate. Hindwings about | of forewings, broadly lanceolate,
cilia 1^-2. Abdomen short, dilated and somewhat flattened.
Posterior tibige clothed with long fine hairs above. Forewings
with vein 7 running to costa, 2 from before angle, lower fork of 1

800 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

obsolete towards base of wing. Hindwings with veins 3 and 4
stalked, rarely from a point, posterior margin of cell angulated
outwards on origin of 5.

A very distinct and easily recognisable genus of considerable
extent, and destined to be largely increased. Although related
to Oecophora, it has no immediate connection with that or any
other known genus. The very long simple basal joint of antennae,
the terminal joint of palpi exceeding the second in length, the
obsolescence of the lower fork of vein 1 of the forewings, and the
angulated posterior margin of cell and usually stalked veins 3
and 4 of the hindwings are peculiarly characteristic points. The
species are all elegantly marked with pale spots or fasciae on a
dark ground, and often fly in the sunshine, though some appear to
be of very retired habit. Many of the larvae are known ; all
feed on Leguminosce, and all except one exclusively on species of
Acacia, usually between spun leaves or phyllodia. No species are
known outside Australia.
la. Forewings with silvery-metallic mark-
ings 500. constrictella.

lb. Forewings without metallic markings.

2a. With two entire anterior fasciie 499. melanargyra.

2b. Without two entire fasciae.

3a. Thorax with posterior half white or

yellowish.
4a. Markings of foi'ewings distinctly yellow.
5a. With a single yellow band.

6a. Band nearly parallel-sided 478. monostadia.

6b. ,, much broadest on costa • 479. euryxantha.

5b. With additional markings.

6a. Basal area coppery-fuscous 480. chrysotoxa.

6b. ,, „ pale yellowish 481. mesoj)ora.

4b. Markings white or whitish.

5a. Basal area whitish 482. anemarcha.

5b. „ „ dark fuscous.

6a. Median costal spot longitudinally

elongate 484. desmotoma

BY E, MEYRICK, B A. 801

6b. Median costal spot not elongate

7a. Antennae wholly white 491. argonota.

7b. „ annulated with dark fuscous.

8a. Abdomen grey.

9a. With a white streak along part of inner

margin 497. crijinaJea.

9b. Without dorsal streak.

10a. Dorsal triangular spot touching fascia

and anal angle 490. niphadohola.

1 Ob. Dorsal triangular .spot small, separate ... 486. trithyra.

8b. Abdomen yellowish or ochreous.

9a. Cilia of forewings with a white spot

below apex 487. euryleuca.

9b. Cilia of forewings without subapical spot.
lOa. Cilia of hindwings more or less whitish-

ochreous 48.5. melayiomitra.

lOb. Cilia of hindwings wholly grey 489. chhrosoma.

3b. Thorax almost wholly dark fuscous.

4a. Antenna? with apical half white 492. alternatella.

4b. „ ,, „ not white.

5a. Markings of forewings yellow.

6a. A.nterior fascia entire 477. Immaxitodes.

6b. ,, ,, not reaching inner

margin 507. chrysospila.

5b. Markings of forewings not yellow.

6a. Crown of head white 488. melanota.

6b. „ ,, wholly whitish-ochreous.. 505. hrontodes.

6c. ,, „ yellow-ochreous.

7a. Forewings without pale fascia 503. po^yhyrea.

7b. ,, with white anterior fascia.

8a. Abdomen pale yellowish-ochreous 493. xuthocoina.

8b. „ grey.

9a. Forewings with posterior spots rosy 495. rhodospila.

9b. ,, ,, „ „ not rosy.. 494. leucopeda.

6d. Crown of head fuscous or dark fuscous.

802 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA.

7a. Forewings with defined whitish post-

mediau dorsal spot 506. Diijrloplitlialnia.

7b. Forewings without defined whitish post-
median dorsal spot.

8a. Median costal spot longitudinally elon-
gate 4:83. lieminepliela.

8b. Median costal spot not elongate.

9a. With pale anterior fascia.

10a. Abdomen ochreous-yellowish 501. ceraunohola.

10b. „ dark grey.

Ha. Forewings with a delined grey sti-eak

along inner margin 498. Jteiiiitropa.

lib. Forewings without grey dorsal streak ... 4 9 G. stjiiastra.

9b. Without pale fascia.

10a. Posterior costal spot dot-like, sharply

define! 504. nephelomorpha.

10b. Posterior costal spot small, cloudy 502. anemodes.

i'tl. Macr. hniiiaxitodes, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. luteis, macula basali saturate fusca, fascia
postica latiore sub medio interrupta maculaque subapicali cum
hac conj ancta purpureo-f uscis ; post, griseis.

(J 9. 12-14 nuj]. Head and palpi whitish-ochreous, palpi with
base and apex dark fuscous. Antennoa dark fuscous, ringed with
whitish-ochreous. Thorax dark fuscous. Abdomen pale greyish-
ochreous. Legs dark fuscous, ringed with whitish-ochreous,
posterior pair whitish-ochreous. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ;
pale ochreous-yellowdsh ; a small dark fuscous basal patch, its
outer edge straight, not oblique ; a rather broad straight purplish-
fuscous fascia from I of costa to anal angle, narrower beneath,
interrupted below middle ; a narrow fuscous patch extending
along upper half of hindmargin, confluent beneath with fascia
above interruption ; cilia pale ochreous-yellowish, with a fuscous
spot below apex. Hindwings grey ; cilia whitish-grey, yellowish-
tinged.

Sydney, New South Wales, in October, November and March ;
five specimens.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 803

478. \/<icr. m\>m)stadla, ii. sp.

Minor, alis aut. cupreo-fuscis, fascia antica lata recta dilute
flava albo-marginata ; post, saturate fuscis.

$ 2- I'^-lS iiiiii- Head fuscous on crown, face pale whitish-
ochreous, terminal joint anteriorly dark fuscous. Antennae dark
fuscous, sharply annulated with ochreous-whitish. Thorax pale
whitisli yellowish, anterior margin and a small posterior spot dark
fuscous. Abdomen pale yellowish-ochreous. Legs dark fuscous,
ringed with yellow-whitish, posterior pair yellow-whitish. Fore-
wings elongate-lanceolate ; coppery-fuscous ; a broad pale ochreous-
yellow laterally whitish-margined anterior transverse band, ex-
tending on costa from 1- to middle, sides nearly parallel, hardly
oblique : cilia fuscous. Hind wings dark fuscous ; cilia pale
whitish ochreous.

Duaringaand Toowoomba (2,000 feet) Queensland, in December ;
two specimens.

479. JIacr. euryxantha. n. sp.

Minor, alls ant. saturate purpureo-fuscis, fascia latissima
mediana inferius angustata flava, antice cano-marginata ; post,
saturatius fuscis.

2- 15 mm. Head pale yellowish, crown more ochreous-yellow,
behind fuscous. Palpi whitish-yellowish, terminal joint anteriorly
dark fuscous, Antennae dark fuscous, sharply annulated with
whitish. Thorax pale yellowish, sides ochreous-yellow, anterior
margin dark purplish-fuscous. Abdomen ochreous-yellow, pos-
teriorly suffused with fuscous. Legs dark fuscous, posterior pair
ochreous-yellowish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; dark purple-
fuscous ; a very broad ochreous-yellow anteriorly white-margined
band, extending on costa from ^ to f, on inner margin from
I' to |, nearly twice as broad 01,1 costa as on inner margin,
sides straight : cilia fuscous. Hind wings rather dark fuscous ;
cilia light fuscous.

Duaringa, Queensland ; one specimen received from Mr. G.
Barnard,

/^^^

%

1^

804 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

480. Macr chrysotoxa, n. sp.

Media, alls ant. cupreo-fuscis, triangulo costiB antico dorsum
attingente flavo, linea postica transversa incurvata luteola ; post,
saturate fuscis.

-J 9. 16-19 mm. Head fuscous on crown, face whitish-yellowish.
Palpi whitish-yellowish, terminal joint anteriorly dark fuscous.
Antennae dark fuscous, spotted with whitish. Thorax yellow,
anterior margin dark fuscous, expanded centrally into a quadrate
spot. Abdomen grey, mixed with whitish-ochreous. Legs dark
fuscous, ringed with whitish-yellowish, posterior pair pale
yellowish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; coppery-fuscous ; a
triangular yellow patch extending on oosta from near base to
middle, its posterior angle narrowly produced further along costa,
its apex touching inner margin about \ ; sometimes a small
whitish-yellowish spot in disc below middle ; a whitish-ochreous
rather inwards-curved transverse line from beyond | of costa to
anal angle : cilia fuscous, with whitish-ochreous spots on ex-
tremities of posterior line. Hind wings dark fuscous ; cilia light
fuscous, on costa becoming whitish-yellowish towards tips.

Larva elongate, cylindrical ; grey-whitish ; subdorsal very
broad, purplish-fuscous ; a small fuscous spot on each segment on
side ; head blackish-fuscous ; second segment with anterior half
ochreous-yellow, posterior half blackish-fuscous. Feeds between
tubularly united leaflets of Acacia dectcrrens, forming a gallery of
silk and refuse. Pupa amongst refuse, affixed by tail.

Brisbane and Toowoomba (2,000 feet), Queensland ; Newcastle
and Sydney, New South Wales ; Melbourne and Warragul,
Victoria ; Launceston and Hobart, Tasmania ; common from
September to April.

481. Macr. viesopora, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. luteolis, fascia aiitica angusta saturate fusca,
dimidio apicali cupreo-fusco maculis costte angulique analis
obscuris luteolis notato ; post saturatius fuscis

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 805

2. 14 mm. Head whitish-yellowish. Palpi whitish-yellowish,
terminal joint anteriorly dark fuscous. Antenna3 dark fuscous,
spotted with whitish. Thorax whitish-yellowish, anterior margin
dark fuscous, dilated towards middle. (Abdomen broken.) Legs
whitish-yellowish, anterior and middle pair suffused with dark
fuscous. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; whitish-yellowish ; a
narrow ill-detined rather dark fuscous fascia from I of costa to
^ of inner margin ; a somewhat inwards-curved dark fuscous line
from I of costa to | of inner margin, beyond which the apical
area is wholly coppery-fuscous, except a cloudy spot on costa
towards apex, and a small very indistinct spot on anal angle ;
cilia light fuscous, on costal and anal spots yellow- whitish. Hind-
wings rather dark fuscous ; cilia whitish-fuscous.

Blackheath (3,500 feet). New South Wales ; one specimen in
January.

482. Macr. anemarclia, n. sp.

Minor, alls ant. luteo-albidis, macula dorsi antica transversa
interdum obsoleta, fascia postica fere interrupta, altera marginis
postici saturate fuscis ; post, saturate fuscis.

5. 16-17 mm. Head yellow-whitish. Palpi whitish, terminal
joint anteriorly dark fuscous. Antennte dark fuscous, annulated
with white. Thorax yellow- whitish, anterior margin dark fuscous,
centrally expanded into a quadrate spot. Abdomen grey. Legs
dark fuscous, ringed with whitish, posterior tibiaj whitish. Fore-
wings elongate-lanceolate ; yellow- whitish ; costa sometimes fuscous
towards base ; sometimes a transverse dark fuscous streak from
fold to inner margin about \, dilated above, often entirely absent;
a moderate ill-defined dark fuscous fascia from | of costa to | of
inner margin, more or less distinctly interrupted below middle,
narrowed on costa ; a rather narrow irregular ill-defined dark
fuscous fascia along hindmargin from apex almost to anal angle :
cilia whitish-fuscous, on costa and beneath apex white, dark
fuscous on fasciie. Hindwings dark fuscous ; cilia fuscous.

Launceston, Tasmania; four specimens in January, frequenting
Acacia decurrens.

806 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

483. Macr. Jienmifiplip/a, n. sp.

]\Iedia, alls ant. saturatius jureo-griseis, niaculis costje tribus
niveis ; post, saturate fuscis.

(J 9. 17-20 mm. Head, palpi, antennae, and thorax greyish-
bronze, sides of face white. Abdomen yellow-ochreous. Legs
dark fuscous, I'inged with whitish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ;
shining greyish-bronze, with clear white markings ; a very small
spot at base of costa ; a small oljlique spot on costa at ^ ; an
elongate semi-oval spot extending along central third of costa ;
a wedge-shaped inwardly oblique streak from costa near apex,
reaching half across wing ; sometimes a small spot on anal angle :
cilia light fuscous, on costal spot white. Hindwings dark fuscous ;
cilia pale fuscous, towards base and on costa light ochreous-
yellowish.

Lauuceston and Hobart, Tasmania ; common from November
to January ; exclusively attached to Acacia dealbata, on which
the larva must undoubtedly feed ; it appears to be never found
amongst the closely allied Acacia dectirrens, even when both trees
grow in the same localities.

484. Macr. desmotoma, n. sp.

Minor, alls ant. saturate gereo-fuscis, fascia antica latiori
obliqua, macula costee media elongata, altera ad dorsum obscura,
tertia costse ante apicem triangulari, punctoque anguli analis
canis ; post saturate fuscis.

(J 9. 14-17 mm. Head white, crown dark fuscous. Palpi
white, terminal joint with dark fuscous lateral lines. Antennae
dark fuscous, spotted with white, beneath white. Thorax whitish,
anterior margin dark fuscous, centrally expanded into a quadrate
spot. Abdomen yellow-ochreous. Legs dark fuscous, banded
with whitish-ochreous, posterior pair yellow-ochreous. Forewings
elongate-lanceolate ; dark bronzy-fuscous ; markings white,' be-
coming greyish or ochreous-tinged on dorsal half ; a moderately
broad oblique fascia from | of costa to before middle of inner
margin ; a wedge-shaped spot extending along costa from before

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 807

middle to f ; a small cloudy spot on or near inner mai'gin at | ;
a small triangular spot on costa towards apex, and a dot on anal
angle ; cilia pale yellow-ochreous, barred with fuscous on apex and
middle of hindmargin. Hindwings dark fuscous ; cilia pale
yellow-ochreous, becoming fuscous towards apex.

Larva slender, cylindrical, pale yellowish-green ; spots small,
black ; dorsal greyish ; subdorsal broad, dark fuscous ; head and
second segment brownish-ochreo-is. Feeds in spun-up leaflets of
Acacia deciirrens.

Brisbane and Toowoomba (2,000 feet), Queensland ; Newcastle
and Sydney, New South Wales ; Melbourne, Victoria ; from
September to April, very common.

485. Jfacr. mpjanomitra, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturate fuscis, fascia antica latiore directa,
maculis triangularibus costse duabus, tertia dorsi, puncto etiam
anguli analis, niveis ; post, griseis, ciliorum basi luteola.

(j" 2- 12-17 mm. Head white, crown dark fuscous. Palpi
white, terminal joint with dark fuscous lateral lines. Antennas
dark fuscous, annulated with white. Thorax white, anterior
margin narrowly dark fuscous, centrally expanded into a
quadrate spot, and with a small posterior dark fuscous spot.
Abdomen pale greyish-ochreous. Legs dark grey, banded with
white, posterior pair whitish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; dark
fuscous ; liase of inner margin slenderly white ; a moderately
broad not oblique white fascia from \ of costa to I of inner mai'ginj
outer edge somewhat bent ; a triangular white spot on middle
of costa, nearly meeting a similar spot on inner margin before
anal angle ; a smaller triangular white spot on costa at I, and
a dot on anal angle, sometimes connected by an obscure line : cilia
pale whitish-ochreous, on hind margin greyish towai'ds tips, barred
with dark fuscous at apex and above anal angle. Hindwings grey ;
cilia whitish-ochreous, towards tips more or less greyish.

808 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

This and the two following species are closely allied and very
similar ; M. melanomitra is best separated from M. trithyra by
the partially whitish-ochreous cilia, but differs also in the bi'oader
fascia, and more triangular costal spots.

Bowenfels (2,500 feet), New South Wales ; iSIount Lofty,
Wirrabara, and Quorn, South Australia ; in October and January ;
common.

486. Macr. trithyra, n. sp.

Parva, alls ant. nigricantibus, fascia antica modica obliqua,
maculis costse duabus subquadratis, altera lineam emittente, tertia
dorsi subtriangulari ; post, saturatius eereo-fuscis, ciliis omnino
griseis ; abdomine griseo.

$. 11-13 mm. Head white, crown blackish. Palpi white, ter-
minal joint blackish. Antennte black, spotted with white. Thorax
white, anterior margin and a small posterior spot blackish.
Abdomen dark grey. Legs blackish, banded with white. Fore-
wings elongate-lanceolate ; blackish ; markings white, sometimes
slightly ochreous-tinged ; a moderate oblique fascia from \ of
costa to 5 of inner margin ; a subquadrate spot on middle of costa,
and a slightly larger one on inner margin hardly beyond it, sub-
triangular ; a larger quadrate spot on costa, near apex, connected
by a fine irregular line with a dot on anal angle : cilia dark grey,
towards anal angle paler, on costal spot white. Hindwings rather
dark bronzy -fuscous ; cilia grey.

Differs from the preceding by the wholly grey cilia of hind-
wings and abdomen.

Sydney and Cooma (3,000 feet). New South Wales ; Mount
Lofty, South Australia; four specimens in December and January.

487. Macr. euryleAica, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturate fuscis, fascia antica lata obliqua,
maculis costse ac dorsi obscuris, tertia costse postica majore
angulum analem attingente, quarta etiam ciliorum subapicali
niveis ; post, saturatius fuscis, ciliis stramineis.

(J 9. 15-18 mm. Head white, crown blackish. Palpi white,
terminal joint with dark fuscous line on each side. Antcnnse

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A.

809

blackish, spotted with whitish. Thorax white, anterior margin
very narrowly dark fuscous. Abdomen ochreous-yellowish. Legs
whitish, tarsi and middle tibiae obscurely banded with dark
fuscous, posterior pair whitish-ochreous. Forewings elongate-
lanceolate ; dark fuscous, posteriorly somewhat ochreous-tinged ;
markings shining white ; a broad oblique fascia from ^ of costa to
before middle of inner margin, outer edge somewhat bent ; a small
ill-defined spot on middle of costa ; an indistinct cloudy larger
spot on inner margin before anal angle ; a considerably larger
irregular spot on costa towards apex, sufiusedly connected with
anal angle : cilia fuscous, towards anal angle whitish-yellowish,
on costal spot white, and with a clear white spot beneath apex.
Hindwings rather dark fuscous ; cilia whitish-yellowish, becoming
fuscous-tinged round apex.

Differs from the two preceding by the broader fascia, the
different character of the posterior spots, and especially by the
subapical white spot in cilia.

Sydney and Shoalhaven, New South Wales, in December,
January, and March ; four specimens.

488. Macr. melanota, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. nigrescentibus, fascia antica niodica obliqua,
maculis costse duabus rotundatis, tertia dorsi triangulari punc-
toque anali niveis ; post, saturatius griseis ; thorace nigricante.

5. 17 mm. Head white, sides of crown fuscous. Palpi
whitish-ochreous, terminal joint with blackish line on each side.
Antennje black, spotted with whitish. Thorax purple-blackish.
Abdomen yellow-ochreous. Legs whitish-ochreous, banded with
blackish, tibise more white. Forewings elongate- lanceolate ;
blackish-fuscous ; markings clear white, margins partially nar-
rowly ochreous ; a moderate obliqu-e fascia from \ of costa to \ of
inner margin ; a small rounded spot on middle of costa ; a rather
larger flattened triangular spot on inner margin before anal angle,
closely followed by an anal dot ; a moderate suboval inwardly

810 DESCRIPTIONS OP AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

oblique spot on costa at f : cilia dark fuscous, on costal spot
white, beneath anal angle ochreous-whitish. Hindwiiigs rather
dark grey ; cilia fuscous.

Very like the following, but with the thorax wholly Ijlackish.

Toowoomba (2,000 feet), Queensland ; one specimen in Decem-
ber, taken amongst Acacia clecurretis.

489. Macr. clilorosoma, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. nigrescentibus, fascia antica modica obliqua,
niaculis costte duabus rotundatis, tertia dorsi triangulari punc-
toque anali canis ; post, saturate fuscis ; thoracis dimidio postico
cano ; abdomine luteo.

5. Iti mm. Head ochreous-white, back of crown blackish,
Palpi ochreous-white, terminal joint with blackish line on each
side. Antennae )>lack, spotted with white. Thorax white,
anterior margin blackish, dilated towards middle. Abdomen
pale yellow-ochreous. Legs dark fuscous, banded with white.
Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; blackish ; markings white, slightly
ochreous-tinged ; a moderate oblique fascia from \ of costa to \ of
inner margin ; a small rounded spot on middle of costa ; a rather
larger acute- triangular spot on inner margin before anal angle,
closely followed by an anal dot ; a moderate semi-oval rather
inwardly oblique spot on costa at * : cilia dark fuscous, on costal
spot white, beneath anal angle whitish-ochreous. Hind wings dark
fuscous ; cilia fuscous.

Duaringa, Queensland ; one specimen received from Mr. G.
Barnard.

490. Macr. nipJiadohola, 11. sjx

Parva, alis ant. nigrescentibus, fascia antica modica obliqua,
maculis cost;e duabus subtriangularibus, tertia dorsi fasciam
anticam punctumque anguli analis attingente ochreo-all)is ; post,
saturate sereo-fuscis.

$. 12 mm. Head white, back of crown blackish. Palpi white,
terminal joint black except anterior edge. Antennte lilack, spotted
with white. Thorax white, anterior margin and a posterior spot
blackish. Abdomen grey. Legs dark fuscous, sufiusedly banded

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 811

with whitish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; blackish ; markings
ochreous-white ; a moderate oblique fascia from ^ of costa to I of
inner margin ; a small subtriangular spot on middle of costa ; a
flattened-triangular spot extending on inner margin from fascia to
anal angle, followed immediately by an ill-defined dot ; a small
subtriangular spot on costa near apex : cilia dark fuscous, on
costal spot and beneath anal angle ochreous-white. Hindwings
dark bronzy-fuscous ; cilia fuscous.

Differs from both the preceding by the grey abdomen ; charac-
terised by the triangular dorsal spot touching both fascia and
anal dot.

Rosewood, Queensland ; one specimen in September.

491. Macr. argonota,n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. nigris, fascia antica angustiori obliqua, macula
costge media parva, altera ante-apicali majori transversa obliqua,
tertia dorsi triangulari ; post, griseis ; antennis albis.

5. 15 mm. Head white on face, crown black. Palpi white,
terminal joint black except anterior edge. Antennse white, basal
joint black. Thorax white, anterior margin black, dilated
towards middle. Abdomen grey, with a pale ochreous basal
band. Legs black, banded with white. Forewings elongate-
lanceolate ; black ; markings snow-white ; a rather narrow
oblique fascia from ^ of costa to 5 of inner margin ; a small sub-
quadrate spot on middle of costa ; a somewhat larger acute-
triangular spot on inner margin before anal angle ; a larger
transverse-oblong inwardly oblique spot on costa at I : cilia dark
fuscous, on costal spot white, beneath anal angle ochreous-white.
Hindwings and cilia grey.

Specially characterised by the white unspotted antennse.

Larva moderate, cylindrical, slightly tapering towards ex-
tremities, head small ; ochreous-pink," segmental divisions deeper
pink, with a slender pale yellowish transverse line on anterior
margin of segments, and minute scattered pale yellowish
dots ; head and second segment black, anterior half of second
53

812 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

segment fuscous. Feeds among irregularly spun-together pliyllodia
and flowers of Acacia myrtifolia, in September. Pupa in a fine
cocoon between phyllodia.

Sydney, New South Wales ; one specimen bred in October.

492. Macr. alternatella, Walk.
{Gelechia alternatella, Walk. 644.)

Minor, alis ant. saturate purpureo-fuscis, fascia antica angusta
obliqua postice ochrea, puncto costse medio, altero anguli analis,
macula costse postica obliqua albis ; post, saturate sereo-f uscis, ^
macula magna antica lutea ; antennarura dimidio praeter apicem
niveo.

$ 2. 13-16 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous, face ochreous-
whitish. Palpi whitish-ochreous, terminal joint with blackish line
on each side. Antennae blackish, apical half white except tip.
Abdomen yellow-ochreous, posteriorly mixed with dark grey. Legs
dark fuscous, banded with white. Fo rowings elongate-lanceolate ;
very dark purplish-fuscous ; markings white, slightly ochreous-
tinged ; a narrow oblique fascia from ^ of costa to g of inner margin,
becoming yellow-ochreous towards posterior edge ; a dot on middle
of costa ; a slightly larger dot on anal angle ; a narrow inwardly
oblique spot from costa about f , reaching half across wing : cilia
dark fuscous, on costal spot white. Hindwings dark bronzy-
fuscous, in (J with a large pale ochreous-yellow oval patch extend-
ing from near base to beyond middle and reaching nearly to
margins ; cilia fuscous.

In addition to the partially yellow hindwings of ^, the minute-
ness of the median costal dot is a notable characteristic.

Larva slender, cylindrical, slightly tapering posteriorly, very
active J dull whitish; subdorsal broad, deep fuscous; spiracular
ochreous-brown, composed of three partially interrupted lines ;
head and second segment brownish-ochreous. Feeds between
joined leaves and shoots of Platylobium formostmi, Bossicea, and
probably other Leguminosce, in May and August.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 813

Brisbane, Queensland; Sydney and Orange (3,000 feet), New-
South Wales ; Mount Lofty, South Australia ; common from
August to November, and February to April.

493. Macr. xuthocoma, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. nigrescentibus, fascia antica angusta obliqua
dorsum non attingente, maculis costse duabus subquadratis punc-
toque anguli analis ochreo-albis, fasciis tribus (tertia costam non
attingente) maculaque postica his interpositis obscurissimis pur-
pureo-plumbeis ; post, saturatius f uscis ; capite ochreo.

9. 15 mm. Head whitish- ochreous, crown laterally suffused with
ochreous-yellowish. Palpi ochreous-yellowish, terminal joint
blackish. Antennae dark fuscous. Thorax purple-blackish.
Abdomen pale yellowish-ochreous. Legs blackish, banded with
white. Fore wings elongate-lanceolate; blackish; a narrow oblique
ochx-eous-white fascia from costa at 5, not reaching inner mai'gin ;
two rather small subquadrate ochreous-white spots on costa,
rounded beneath, first in middle, second at ^ ; an ochreous-white
dot on anal angle ; an oblique fascia very near base, a direct
fascia before middle, a streak from inner margin before anal
angle reaching half across wing, and a small spot above anal dot
very obscure purplish-leaden : cilia dark fuscous, on costal spot
white. Hindwings rather dark fuscous ; cilia fuscous.

Sydney, New South Wales ; one specimen in March.

494. Macr. leucopeda, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. nigrescentibus, fascia ad basim obscura plumbea,
altera antica angusta obliqua nivea subtus grisescente, maculis
costse duabus, tertia etiam anguli analis niveis, macula dorsi
postica transversa argenteo-grisea ; post, griseis ; capite ochreo.

(J 9. 10-13. mm. Head yellow-ochreous, face ochreous-whitish.
Palpi whitish-ochreous, terminal joint with a blackish line on each
side. Antennae dark fuscous, obscurely spotted with whitish.
Thorax dark fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs dark fuscous, banded
with white. Fore wings elongate-lanceolate ; blackish-fuscous ; a
very obscure oblique purplish-leaden fascia very near base ; a

814 DESCRIPTIONS OP AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA

narrow oblique silvery-white fascia from | of costa to g of inner
margin, becoming purplish-leaden at lower extremity; a small
subquadrate silvery-white spot on middle of costa ; a pale silvery-
grey metallic rather outwardly oblique spot from inner margin at
^, reaching half across wing ; a triangular silvery-white spot on
costa at I, and a similar spot on anal angle, sometimes meeting :
cilia dark fuscous, on costal spot white. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Larva rather elongate, somewhat tapering posteriorly ; head
amber ; second segment black, anterior mai^gin white ; third to
twelfth segments chocolate, anterior margin of each broadly clear
white, posterior margin narrowly ochreous ; anal shield black.
Feeds on Acacia discolor, uniting the leaflets into a tube along
midrib of leaf, in February. Pupa free, in a chamber within the
tube. I have frequently met with this larva, but never on any
other species of Acacia.

Sydney, New South Wales, in September, January, and March ;
rather common.

495. Macr. rhodospila, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. nigriscentibus, fascia ad basim obscura plumbea,
altera antica angusta obliqua nivea subtus grisescente, macula costee
media nivea altera postica tertiaque anguli analis albido-roseis,
macula dorsi postica transversa plumbea ; post, griseis ; capite
ochreo.

^. 12 mm. Head yellow-ochreous, face ochreous-whitish. Palpi
whitish-ochreous, terminal joint black except anterior edge.
Antennai dark fuscous, obscurely spotted with whitish. Thorax
dark fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs blackish, banded with
white. Foi-e wings elongate-lanceolate ; blackish ; a very obscure
oblique leaden-grey fascia very near base; a narrow oblique
silvery- white fascia from | of costa to I of inner margin, becoming
leaden-grey at lower extremity ; a small subquadrate silvery-white
spot on middle of costa ; a leaden-grey metallic outwardly oblique
spot from inner margin at f , reaching half across wing ; a
triangular rosy- white spot on costa at I, and a similar spot on anal
angle, opposite but not meeting : cilia dark fuscous, on costal spot
rosy-white. Hindwings and cilia grey.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 815

Larva cylindrical, tapering at exti-emities ; ochreous-brown,
posterior margin of all segments rather broadly white ; head and
second segment black, posterior margin of both white ; anal
segment black. Feeds between spun-together phyllodia and stem
of Acacia suaveolens, in August.

The question of the distinctness of this species from the
preceding is very perplexing ; there is practically no difference
between the imagos except in the pronounced rosy suffusion of
the posterior spots in M. rhodospila, which may not prove
constant, and would in any case be very probably perceptible only
in bred specimens ; but on the other hand the larvje and food-
plants are entirely different. Further observations are required
on the present species ; but meanwhile I think it impossible to
describe the two forms under the head of one species.

Sydney, New South Wales ; several larvae found, and one
specimen bred in September.

496. Macr. synastra, n. sp.

Parva, alis ant. saturate ?ereo-fuscis, basi albido-mixta, fascia
antica angusta obliqua subtus grisescente, maculis costse duabus
tertiaque anguli analis minima niveis, macula dorsi postica obscura
grisea, punctis disci tribus nigris ; post, saturatius fuscis.

$ 9. 11-13 mm. Head brassy-fuscous, face whitish. Palpi
ochreous-whitish, apex of second joint infuscated, terminal joint
blackish. Antennae black, spotted with white. Thorax bronzy-
fuscous, apex of patagia sometimes whitish. Abdomen dark grey.
Legs blackish, banded with white. Fore wings elongate-lanceolate;
dark bronzy-fuscous ; markings snow-white ; base slightly mixed
with whitish ; a narrow oblique fascia from costa at \, not quite
reaching inner margin, becoming more or less greyish beneath ; a
subquadrate spot in middle of costa ; a wedge-shaped rather
inwardly oblique spot on costa at f ; a very small triangular spot
on anal angle nearly meeting this ; a very obscure irregular
oblique purplish-grey spot on inner margin at f ; three small
round black discal spots, first beneath apex of median costal spot,

816 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

second on fold before middle, third in disc at f : cilia fuscous,
-with two obscure darker lines, on costal spot white. Hindwings
rather dark bronzy -fuscous ; cilia fuscous.

George's Bay, Tasmania ; eight specimens in December and
January.

497. Macr. cryinalea, n. sp.

Parva, alls ant. saturate fuscis, fascia antica angusta obliqua, in
doi^so (J cum basi, ^ cum macula proxima per strigam connexa,
maculis costse duabus, tertia dor.si postica, quarta anguli analis
minima niveis, ad dorsum ochreo-tinctis ; post, fuscis, ^ area disci
antica nigro-conspersa,

$ <^. 12 mm. Head fuscous, face whitish. Palpi whitish,
terminal joint with blackish line on each side. Antennae blackish,
spotted with whitish. Thorax ochreous-white, anterior margin
dark fuscous, centrally expanded into a quadrate spot. Alidomen
grey. Legs dark fuscous, banded with white. Foi-ewings
elongate-lanceolate ; markings snow-white, becoming ochreous-
white towards inner margin ; a narrow oblique fascia from |- of
costa to I of inner mai'gin, in J" connected with base by a thick
streak along inner margin ; a small subquadrate spot on middle of
costa ; a small triangular spot on inner margin at f , in § connected
with anterior fascia by a narrow streak along inner margin ; a
triangular spot on costa beyond ^, and a very small spot on anal
angle opposite it : cilia fuscous, on costal spot white. Hindwings
fuscous, towards' base semi-hyaline, in ^ with a discal patch
extending from near base to near middle strewn with black scales ;
cilia fuscous.

There can be no doubt that the two specimens described, which
were taken together, are really the sexes of the same species ; the
difference of marking in the forewings is remarkable, if really a
constant sexual character ; the hindwings of ^ are peculiar.

Port Lincoln, South Australia ; two specimens in November ;
amongst Acacia dodonceifolia.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 817

498. Macr. hemitropa, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturate fuscis, fascia subbasali cum striga
dorsali postice dilatata connexa dilutiori, fascia antica angusta
obliqua infra obsoleta carneo-alba, maculis costse duabis tertiaque
anguli analis albis ; post, saturatius fuscis.

9. 15 mm. Head fuscous, face oqlireous-wliitish. Palpi
ochreous-whitish, base and apex of second joint dark fuscous, ter-
minal joint dark fuscous except base. Antennae blackish. Thorax
and abdomen dark fuscous. Legs dark fuscous, banded with
ochreous-whitish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; dark fuscous ;
a lighter greyish-fuscous fascia very near base, continued along
inner margin to anal angle as a thick streak, posteriorly dilated
into a triangular spot reaching half across wing ; markings white,
tinged with flesh-colour ; a rather narrow oblique fascia from costa
at \, becoming obsolete in dorsal streak ; a moderate irregularly
subquadrate spot on middle of costa ; a wedgeshaped inwardly
oblique spot from costa at \, meeting a similar smaller spot from
anal angle : cilia fuscous, on costal spot white (apex of wing
damaged). Hindwings fuscous, towards apex darker ; cilia
fuscous.

"Wirrabara, South Australia 3 one specimen in October from
Acacea acinacea.

499. Macr. melanargyra, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. nigrescentibus, fascia antica modica, altera
media angusta albido-griseis, ad costam niveis, macula costte
postica punctoque anguli analis niveis ; post, saturate fereo-f uscis.

9. 14 ram. Head and thorax pale shining grey, face white,
back of crown black. Palpi white, apex of second joint Vjlack, ter-
minal joint with black line on each side. Antennse black, spotted
with white. Abdomen dark grey. - Legs blackish, banded with
white. Forewings elongate-lanceolate, blackish ; markings snow-
white, both fasciae suffused with pale shilling grey except on costa ;
a moderate fascia from | of costa to I of inner margin, somewhat
narrowed on costa ; a narrow slightly curved fascia from middle of

818 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

costa to I of inner margin ; a moderate subtriangular inwardly
oblique spot on costa at g ; a very small spot on anal angle : cilia
blackish-grey, on costal spot white, apical third white between
apex and anal angle. Hindwings dark bronzy-fuscous ; cilia dark
fuscous.

Brisbane, Queensland ; one specimen in September.

500. Macr. constrictella, Walk.

(Gelechia constrictella, Walk. 647.)

Minor, alis ant. saturate aireo-fuscis, fasciis tribus angustis
dilute aureis metallicis ; post, saturatius fuscis.

(J 5. 13-16 mm. Head shining fuscous, face silvery- whitish.
Palpi dark bronzy-fuscous, anterior edge white, second joint white
towards base. Antennae blackish, spotted with white, apical half
wholly white except tip. Thorax dark bronzy-fuscous,
patagia metallic golden-white. Abdomen purplish-grey. Legs
blackish, banded with white. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ;
dark bronzy-fuscous ; three slender pale golden-metallic fasciae,
forming white dots on costa ; first from costa at ^, rather oblique,
not reaching inner margin ; second from middle of costa to | of
inner margin; third from g of costa to anal angle : cilia dark fus-
cous, with a snow-white spot above third fascia. Hindwings and
cilia rather dark fuscous.

Sydney, New South Wales ; Mount Lofty, South Australia ; five
specimens in December and March.

501. Macr. ceraunobola, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. saturate fuscis, fascia antica angusta dorsum non
attingente, maculis costte duabus, puncto disci sub medio alteroque
anguli analis erecto canis, striga plica? interrupta punctoque disci
postico nigris ; post ?ereo-fuscis, basim versus grisescentibus.

(J ^. 19-20 mm. Head bronzy- fuscous, sides of crown yellow-
ochreous, face ochreous-whitish. Palpi ochreous-whitish, terminal
joint with dark fuscous line on each side. Antennae dark fuscous,
spotted with whitish. Thorax dark fuscous, apex of patagia
whitish. Abdomen pale yellow-ochreous. Legs dark fuscous.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A.

819

banded with oclii'eous-whitish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ;
dark fuscous, slightly jturplish-tinged ; base of inner margin
slenderly whitish, margined above by a black streak ; a narrow
oblique white fascia from costa at 5, becoming obsolete on fold,
anteriorly margined by a blackish suffusion ; a small subquadrate
white spot on middle of costa ; a white dot below middle of disc,
connected with anterior fascia by a blackish streak along fold ; a
black dot in disc at | ; a rounded-triangular white spot on costa
beyond | ; a small erect linear white mark on anal angle : cilia
rather dark fuscous, becoming greyish-ochreous beneath anal angle,
on costal spot white. Hindwings grey, posteriorly becoming
bronzy-f uscous ; cilia i)ale greyish-ochreous, more fuscous round
apex.

Larva undescribed ; feeds between spun-together flowers and
phyllodia of Acacia glaucescens, in October.

Sydney and Blackheath (3,500 feet). New South Wales ; Mel-
bourne, Victoria ; Hobart, Tasmania ; in November and January,
five specimens.

502. Macr. anemodes, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturatius fuscis, linea antica transversa nigra,
maculis costse duabus obscurioribus albido-ochreis, punctis disci
duobus nigrescentibus ; post, fuscis, basim versus dilutioribus.

(J $. 16-18 mm. Head and thorax rather dark fuscous. Palpi
fuscous, terminal joint dark fuscous, apex whitish. Antennae dark
fuscous. Abdomen pale greyish-ochreous. Legs dark fuscous^
ringed with whitish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; rather dark
fuscous ; base of inner margin slenderly ochreous-whitish, mar-
gined above by a black streak ; an irregular black line from I of
costa to ^ of inner margin, followed towards costa by a few
whitish-ochreous scales ; a small obscure whitish-ochreous spot on
middle of costa, sometimes almost obsolete ; a black dot on fold
before middle, and a dark fuscous dot in disc at |, tending to be
preceded by an obscure whitish-ochreous dot ; a small triangular
tolerably defined whitish-ochreous spot on costa at 5 ; sometimes
an obscure whitish-ochreous dot on anal angle : cilia fuscous,

820 DESCRIPTIONS OP AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA

beneath anal angle paler, on costal spot ochreous-whitish. Hind-
wings light grey, posteriorly suffused with bronzy-fuscous ; cilia
light fuscous.

Larva elongate, cylindrical, somewhat tapering posteriorly ;
rather light yellowish-green ; spots minute, black ; head ochreous ;
second segment greenish-ochreous. Feeds in loosely spun terminal
shoots of Acacia sp. — ,in October. Pupa in a firm cocoon covered
with refuse. The Acacia on which I found these larvse is in the
opinion of Prof. Tate of Adelaide an undescribed s))ecies ; it is
phyllodineous, and forms large bushes fifteen feet high by the side
of creeks in Wirrabara Forest.

Wirrabara, South Australia ; the larvse found plentifully, and
five specimens bred in December.

503. Macr. porphyrea^ n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturate purpureo-fuscis, punctis costaj duobus
tertioque disci postico minimis albido-ochreis ; post, griseis ; capite
ochreo.

(J 5. 15-16 mm. Head yellow-ochreous. Palpi yellow-ochreous,
terminal joint dark fuscous, apex whitish. Anteun:e blackish.
Thorax dark purplish-fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs dark fuscous,
banded with ochreous-white. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; dark
purplish-fuscous ; thi-ee minute ill-defined whitish-ochreous dots ;
first on costa in middle, second in disc at |, third in costal cilia at
\ ; cilia fuscous, tips and two obscure posterior lines grey-whitish.
Hind wings grey, base paler ; cilia light grey.

Larva undescribed ; feeds among irregularly spun-together flowers
and phyllodia of Acacia myrtifolia, in September.

Sydney, New South Wales ; two specimens bred in Octobei*.

504. Macr. nephelomorpha, n.sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturatius ^reo-fuscis, striga antica obliqua
nigra dorsum non attingente, puncto costal medio saepius obsolete
maculaque postica minima ochreo-albidis, punctis disci tribus
nigrescentibus ; post, fuscis, basim versus dilutioribus.

(J 9. 13-17 mm. Head and thorax rather dark bronzy-fuscous.
Palpi ochreous-whitish, fuscous-tinged, terminal joint with blackish

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 821

line on sides except at apex. Antennae blackish, obscurely spotted
with pale. Abdomen grey. Legs dark fuscous, obscui-ely ringed
with ochreous-whitish. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; rather dark
broazy-f uscous or ochreous-brown, irregularly irrorated with dark
fuscous, sometimes purplish-tinged ; an obscure oblique blackish
streak from costa at ^, reaching to fold ; an obscure blackish dot in
middle of disc, a second on fold obliquely before first, and a third
in disc at § ; an ochreous-whitish dot on middle of costa, some-
times absent ; a very small distinct ochreous-whitish spot in costal
cilia at * : cilia fuscous, below anal angle lighter. Ilindwings
bronzy-fuscous, lighter towards base ; cilia fuscous.

Larva undescribed ; feeds in spun-up leaflets of Acacia decurrens,
in September.

Toowoomba (2,000 feet), Queensland ; Sydney, New South
Wales ; Hobart, Tasmania ; from October to January ; ten
specimens.

505. Macr. brontodes, n. sp.

Minor, alls ant. saturatius fuscis, fascia antica directa interdum
obsoleta, maculis costse duabus tertiaque dorsi obscura albido-
ochi'eis, annulo disci postico saturate fusco ; post, fuscis ; capita
albido-ochreo.

5. 14-15 mm. Head and palpi pale whitish-ochreous, terminal
joint of palpi with blackish line on each side. Antennse dark
fuscous, obscurely spotted with whitish-ochreous. Thorax dark
fuscoixs. Abdomen fuscous. Legs dark fuscous, suffusedly banded
with whitish-ochreous. Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; fuscous,
purplish-tinged, densely irrorated with dark fuscous ; markings pale
ochreous or whitish-ochreous, suffusedly margined with dark fus-
cous ; a moderate direct fascia from -|- of costa to ^ of inner margin,
nearly obsolete on costa, sometimes tliroughout ; a small irregular
spot on middle of costa ; a very obscure spot on inner margin at 5,
separated from costal spot by a dark fuscous suffusion ; an obscure
dot in disc at |, surrounded by a distinct dark fuscous ring ; a
small subtriangular spot on costa at * ; an obscure ochreous-
whitish dot on anal angle : cilia whitish-ochreous, with two cloudy

822 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

fuscous shades, on middle of hindmargin and above apex broadly
bari-ed with fuscous, on costal spot whitish. Hindwings fuscous ;
cilia light fuscous, towards base whitish-ochre ous.

Rosewood, Queensland ; three specimens amongst dense scrub in
September.

506. Macr. myriophtl talma, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturate purpureo-fuscis, fascia antica angusta
obliqua, maculis costtie duabus parvis, etiam dorsi duabis minoribus,
puuctoque disci postico albido-ochreis, nigro-cinctis ; post, saturatius
fuscis ; capite fusco, utrinque lutescente.

(J 5. 14-16 mm. Head shining fuscous, sides whitish-ochreous.
Palpi whitish-ochreous mixed with blackish, terminal joint with
blackish line on each side. Antennae dark fuscous, obscurely
spotted with whitish-ochreous. Thorax dark purplish-fuscous.
Abdomen grey. Legs dark fuscous, banded with ochreous-whitish.
Forewings elongate-lanceolate ; dark purple-fuscous ; markings
whitish-ochreous, margined with black, well-defined ; a naiTOw
fascia from \ of costa to g of inner margin, obsolete at lower
extremity ; a small S))ot on middle of costa, and a smaller one
opi)Osite it on inner margin ; a dot in disc at | ; a small triangular
spot on costa at g, and a much smaller spot on anal angle opposite :
cilia fuscous, on costal spot whitish-ochreous. Hindwings rather
dark fuscous ; cilia fuscous.

Larva undescribed ; feeds in spun-up leaflets of Acacia puhescens,
in August.

Brisbane, Queensland ; Sydney, New South Wales ; Melbourne,
Victoria ; in September, November, and March, rather common.

507. Macr. chrysospila, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. purpureo-fuscis, macula basali parva, fascia
antica augustiori dorsum non attingente, maculis costse duabus,
tertia dorsi, qiiarta anguli analis parva, puncto etiam disci postico
flavis, nigrescenti-cinctis ; post, saturatius griseis.

(J 9. 14-16 mm. Head pale shining fuscous, sides ochreous-
yellow. Palpi whitish-yellowish, somewhat mixed with dark

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 823

fuscous, terminal joint with dark fuscous line on each side.
Antennae dark fuscous, spotted with whitish-yellowish. Thorax
bronzy- fuscous, with a small yellowish posterior spot. Abdomen
fuscous, becoming pale ochreous-yellowish towards base. Legs
dark fuscous, banded with whitish-yellowish. Forewings elongate-
lanceolate ; purplish-fuscous, margins suffusedly irrorated with
dark fuscous ; markings ochreous-yellow, suffusedly margined with
dark fuscous ; a small basal spot ; a rather nari'ow irregular
oblique fascia from I of costa, not reaching inner margin ; an
irregular spot about middle of costa, and a second on inner margin
opposite ; a small round spot in disc at | ; a trapezoidal spot on
costa at I, and a smaller triangular spot on anal angle : cilia
fuscous, beneath anal angle paler, on costal spot yellow. Hind-
wings leather dark grey • cilia pale fuscous.

Brisbane, Queensland ; four specimens in September.

70. Satrapia, Meyr.

Head smooth, sidetufts small, closely appressed. Antennae in
(J with long fine cilia (4), basal joint moderate, with moderate
pecten. Palpi rather short, second joint not nearly reaching base
of antennae, slender, smoothly scaled, terminal joint shorter than
second, slender, curved. Thorax smooth. Forewings broadly-
lanceolate. Hindwings half as broad as forewings, lanceolate,
acvite, cilia 2|-3. Abdomen moderately broad. Posterior tibiae
clothed with long fine hairs above. Forewings with vein 7 to
costa, lower angle of cell obsolete. Hindwings normal.

Nearly allied to Oecopliora, of which it is a development. Tlie
larva of the single species is a leaf-miner, and has the legs in a
partially rudimentary condition.

508. Satr. thesaurina, n. sp.

Parva, alls ant. aurantiacis, fascia antica costam non attingente
nigra, antice per lineam griseam metallicam in costam productam
marginata, lineis disci longitudinalibus tribus griseis metallicis,
fascia marginis postici nigrescente ; post, saturate fuscis.

824 DESCRIPTIONS OP AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

(J 9. 10-12 mm. Head, palpi, antennae, thorax, abdomen, and
legs shining rather dark grey ; palpi internally whitish ; patagia
orange. Forewings lanceolate ; orange ; two metallic grey dots
transversely placed very near base, upi>er connected with base of
costa, and lower with middle of base of wing, by black dots ; a
thick black erect streak from middle of inner margin, reaching |
across wing, dilated at base, anteriorly margined with metallic grey,
its apex connected with ] of costa by an oblique metallic grey line ;
three parallel linear longitudinal metallic grey streaks in disc,
anteriorly terminating in black erect streak, posteriorly reaching
to near hindmarginal border ; a narrow blackish hindmarginal
border, extending from apex to below anal angle, rather dilated at
extremities : cilia dark fuscous. Hindwings and cilia dark
fuscous.

Larva with abdominal legs rudimentary, almost obsolete ;
elongate, gradually tapering posteriorly from sixth segment ; dull
light ochreous-reddish ; head small, black ; second segment broader
than head, narrower than third, dark fuscous, anteriorly lighter
and more ochreous ; anal segment small, black. Mines a short
tubular gallery, open at both ends, adjoining midrib, in leaves of
Eucahjjjtus tereticornus {MyrtacecB), emerging from anterior end to
feed and eating holes in the leaf, ejecting excrement from posterior
end ; often three or four larvse in one leaf. Pupa free within the
gallery. Larva feeding in September and October.

Sydney, New South Wales ; Melbourne, Victoria ; Adelaide,
South Australia ; in October and November ; rarely captured, but
bred in plenty from the larva, which is locally abundant.

APPENDIX ].

The foregoing species complete the original scheme of the family ;
but as the publication has extended over a period of three years, a
considerable number of additional species have come into my hands
since the completion of the genera to which they are referable.
These will now be added in the form of an appendix ; the species
will continue to be numbered in ordinal succession, but a second
number will be added in bi-ackets, which will indicate the position

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A, 825

of each species in relation to those ah'eady described. I propose
to include in a second appendix additional localities and notes on
the species previously mentioned.

Palparia, Wing.

509. (4a.) Palp, theophila, n. sp.

Major, alis ant. margine postico sinuato, ochreo-roseis, ciliis
griseis ; post, roseo-albis.

(J. 25-27 mm. Head yellow-ochreoiis, partially rosy-suffused.
Palpi with tuft of second joint dense, as long as terminal joint ;
dull rosy, upper edge of tuft and terminal joint whitish. Antennae
white. Thorax yellowish-rosy. Abdomen white. Legs rosy-white.
Forewings moderate, costa strongly arched, apex acute, not produced,
hindmargin slightly sinuate, oblique ; bright rosy, slightly ochreous-
tinged ; extreme base yellowish ; costal edge yellow-whitish : cilia
of hindmargin grey, base purplish-rosy. Hindwings rosy-white ;
cilia white.

Nearest to P. rectlorella, but immediately separated by the deep
rosy colour and grey hindmarginal cilia ; the hindwings in P.
rectiorella should have been described as pale whitish-yellowish,
whereas in P. theophila they have no yellowish tinge.

Deloraine, Tasmania ; two specimens from Leptospermum in
November and December.

510. (7a.) Palp, mesophthora, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. margine postico vix sinuato, dilute roseo-griseis,
costse punctis quattuor posticis lineisque duabus transversis obscuris,
interdum etiam nebula basali magna macula ve dorsi media saturate
fuscis ; post, albidis, apice leviter roseo-griseo.

(J 5. 19-22 mm. Head, palpi, antennae, and thorax whitish-
ochreous, fuscous-tinged ; palpi with tuft of second joint reduced
to a very short triangular apical projection, second joint externally
fuscous, apex whitish, terminal joint nearly as long as second.
Abdomen and legs whitish, anterior and middle legs suffused with
dark fuscous. Forewings elongate, costa gently arched, sinuate in

826 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

middle, apex round-pointed, hindmargin slightly sinuate, oblique ;
light reddish-grey, finely and thinly irrorated with dark fuscous ;
costal edge ochreous-whitish except at base ; a vei'y small cloudy
dark fuscous spot on middle of costa, and three equidistant cloudy
dark fuscous costal dots between this and apex ; sometimes a
moderate round dark fuscous spot in middle of inner margin ;
sometimes anterior half of wing obscurely sufi"used with rather
dark fuscous ; traces of an obscure curved cloudy dark fuscous
line from centi'al costal spot to anal angle, and a similar waved
line from last costal dot to anal angle ; a hindmarginal row uf
dark fuscous dots : cilia whitish-ochreous, base reddish-tinged,
somewhat mixed with dark fuscous, and with a dark fuscous spot
at apex. Hindwings whitish, apex pale greyish ; cilia whitish,
towards apex rosy-tinged.

A variable species, most allied to P. micrastrella, but not
capable of being confused with it.

Deloraine and Mount Wellington (2,500 feet), Tasmania ; three
specimens amongst Leptosi)erriium in November and December,

511. (8a.) Palp, hesycluea, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. dilutissirae griseo-ochreis, lineis transversis
nebulosis subcurvis tribus saturatioribus, punctis costjB posticis
tribus saturate fuscis ; post, exalbidis.

5. 22 mm. Head, palpi, antennse, and thorax whitish, finely
irrorated with pale greyish-ochreous ; tuft of palpi dense, nearly
as long as terminal joint. Abdomen and -legs whitish, anterior
tibise and tarsi fuscous. Forewings moderate, dilated posteriorly,
costa slightly arched, apex round-pointed, hindmargin rather
sinuate, somewhat oblique ; very pale whitish-ochreous, greyish-
tinged ; three indistinct cloudy greyish-ochreous ti-ansverse lines,
somewhat curved ; first from \ of costa to middle of inner margin,
second from middle of costa to f of inner margin, third from f of
costa to anal angle ; thi'ee dark fuscous dots on costa between
middle and apex : cilia ochreous-whitish, round apex and
upper half of hindmargin with a cloudy dark fuscous terminal
line. Hindwings and cilia whitish, slightly ochreous-tinged.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 827

Allied to p. euryphanella, but differing conspicuously in the
very pale fore wings, without fuscous tinge, and whitish hind wings.

Mount Kosciusko, (4700 feet). New South Wales ; one specimen
in January.

512. (11a.) Palj). lithocosma, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. angustis, subfalcatis, ochreo-rubris, fascia lata
media angulata grisea niveo-marginata ; post, dilutius griseis.

9. 21 mm. Head grey, sidetufts whitish. Palpi with second
joint long, tuft rather short, dense, terminal joint about half second ;
second joint reddish-fuscous, upper edge white, terminal joint
whitish. Antennse grey. Thorax grey, patagia whitish. Abdomen
light grey. Legs reddish-grey, hairs of posterior tibise whitish.
Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex
strongly produced, acute, hindmargin sinuate, very oblique ;
ochreous-red; a pale ochreous-yellowish suffusion forming a very
obscure angulated anterior fascia ; two snow-white, anteriorly
fuscous-edged, posteriorly ill-defined, transverse lines, acutely
angulated in middle, bent inwards below middle, first from \ of costa
to fold before middle, second from \ of costa to anal angle, included
space brownish-grey; second line margined posteriorly by a light
ochreous-yellowish suffusion : cilia grey, reddish-tinged. Ilind-
wings rather light grey ; cilia whitish-grey.

Allied to P. falcifera, but very different.

One specimen, as to the locality of which I have not yet
received information, in the collection of Dr. Lucas, of Melbourne.

Enchocrates, Meyr.

513. (I4a.) Encli. incrophyUa, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. dilute ochreo-griseis, costa, venis, lineisque tribus
ti'ansversis valde curvatis obscuris carneis, punctis disci duobus
serieque marginis postici saturate fuscis ; post, griseo-albidis.

(J. 20-21 mm. Head, palpi, antenna, and thorax pale ochreous-

greyish ; antennae rosy-tinged towards base. Abdomen light gi'ey.

Legs whitish, anterior pair dark grey, tibiae rosy, middle tarsi

grey except apex of joints. Forewings oblong, moderately broad,

54

528 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

costa moderately arched, strongly towards base, apex rounded,
hindmargin oVjliquelj rounded ; pale ochreous-grey ; costal edge,
inner margin, and all veins obscurely lined with dull flesh-colour ; a
fuscous dot beneath costa at J ; a dark fuscous dot on fold before
middle, and a second in disc at | ; three very obscure dull flesh-
colour transverse lines, first from }j of costa, becoming obsolete
beneath, second from middle of costa to anal angle, very strongly
angulated in middle, third from f of costa to anal angle, strongly
curved above middle ; a row of well-defined dark fuscous dots along
hindmargin and apical part of costa ; cilia whitish-grey, tips pale
rosy round apex. Hind wings and cilia grey-whitish.

A much duller insect than E. glaucopis, easily distinguished by
the absence of the bright rosy tints and of the i)ale yellowish dorsal
spot with its attendant markings.

Sydney, New South Wales ; Mount Loity, South Australia
(Mr. E. Guest) ; in June ; two specimens.

EocHROis, Meyr.
I have altered this name to its present form, on the ground that
Eochroa has been previously employed by Felder for a genus of
Lepidoptera.

514. (24a.) Eochr. tritoxantha, n. sp.

Media, alls ant. fusco-purpureis, area l)asali flava, puncto disci
postico luteolo ; post, griseis.

(J. 18 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax deep yellow. Antennae dark
fuscous, spotted with white. Abdomen grey. Legs darkgrey, apexof
joints white, posterior pair whitish. Forewings moderately elongate,
costa gently arched, apex round pointed, hindmargin rather strongly
sinuate, oblique; fuscous-purplish, becoming fuscous towai'ds costa
posteriorly ; basal third deep yellow, bounded by a line from ^ of
costa to middle of inner margin ; costal edge whitish-ochreous on
posterior half; a whitish-ochreous dot in disc at | ; cilia whitish,
with a dark grey apical spot, basal half dark grey on upper half of
hindmargin, and a grey spot on anal angle. Hindwings grey ;
cilia whitish-grey.

Very distinct from any other ; in form of wing nearest E.
acutella.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 829

Deloraine, Tasmania ; one specimen from Leptosperinum in
December, taken after dark.

ZoNOPETALA, Meyr.
515. (30a.) Zon. synarthra, n. sp.

Media, cana, thorace antice nigro, alis ant. costte basi, fascia
antica, altera postica angustiore antice oclireo-marginata, punctoque
disci postico transverso nigris ; post. luteolis,postice griseo-suffusis.

(J ?. 15-21 mm. Head white. Palpi white, lower half of
second joint blackish. Antennae dark fuscous. Thorax white,
anterior half blackish. Abdomen pale yellowish-ochreous. I.egs
dark fuscous, posterior pair pale yellowish-ochreous. Forewings
moderate, costa moderately arched, apex round pointed, hindmargin
hardly rounded, oblique; white, sometimes faintly yellowish-tinged;
markings blackish ; a small spot on base of costa ; two straight
fasciae, their posterior edges irregularly dentate ; first moderate,
from I of costa to beyond middle of inner margin ; second narrow,
anteriorly generally suffusedly margined with whitish-ochreous,
from ^ of costa to anal angle ; a transverse linear dot in disc
between these, nearer second ; beneath this a cloudy grey dot ; a
cloudy grey spot on hindmargin beneath apex ; a dot on costa
before apex, and a hindmarginal line, interrupted above anal angle :
cilia whitish-ochreous, basal half on hindmargin white spotted with
grey, with a blackish apical spot. Hindwing.s whitish-ochreous,
apex greyish, in 2 wholly grey except towards base ; cilia whitish-
ochreous, with a cloudy grey basal line.

Diflfers from all by the conspicuous separate black discal dot ;
the nearest species is Z. decisana, in which alone the discal dot is
present, but united at its lower extremity with the anterior fascia,
and the posterior markings are reddish-brown.

Mount Kosciusko (4,700 feet), New South Wales, in January ;
Quorn, South Australia, in October ; locally rather common.

516. (31a.) Zon. erythrosema, n. sp.
Media, carnea, alis ant. macula disci antica jjartim rubro-
marginata fasciaque postica sinuata antice sufi"usa nigricantibus ;
post, griseis.

830 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAIT MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA,

(J. 18 mm. Head whitish. Palpi rosy-whitish, basal half of
second joint blackish. Antennae grey. Thorax pale flesh-colour.
Abdomen grey. Legs grey, posterior pair whitish. Forewings
moderate, costa moderately arched, apex rounded, hindmargin
almost straight, oblique ; light rosy-pink ; a modei-ately large
irregular angular black spot somewhat before middle, resting on
fold, margined posteiiorly and beneath by a red line ; a moderate
blackish fascia from | of costa to anal angle, sinuate inwards
above middle, anteriorly sufl'used into fuscous, posteriorly sharply
defined and somewhat whitish-edged ; a patch on hindmargin
beneath apex somewhat mixed with grey : cilia pale flesh-colour
mixed with grey. Hindwings grey ; cilia whitish-grey.

A very distinct species, intermediate between the two main
groups of the genus.

George's Bay, Tasmania ; one specimen in January.

Heliocausta, Meyr.

517. (36a.) Hel. atoecha, n. sp.

Minor, alis ant. saturate carneis, pallido-sparsis, punctis disci
tribus serieque marginis postici perobscuris griseis ; post, flavidis,
9 partim griseo-mixtis, ciliis luteis.

(J 9. 16-18 mm. Head and thorax reddish-brown, strewn with
whitish-ochreous. Palpi ochreous-whitish, rosy-tinged. Antennae
whitish, sharply annulated with dark fuscous. Abdomen whitish-
yellowish. Legs yellow-whitish, anterior tibiae and tarsi dull rosy.
Forewings moderate, costa moderately arched, apex roundpointed,
hindmargin straight, rather oblique ; reddish-bi'own or deep flesh-
colour, strewn with whitish-ochreous scales ; markings formed by
a few dark grey scales, very obscure ; a dot in disc at |, a second
rather beyond first on fold, and a third in disc at | ; a small spot on
costa at ^, a second in middle, and a row of hardly distinguisable
dots on apical third of costa and hindmargin : cilia pale rosy,
towards tips whitish. Hindwings pale ochreous-yellowish, in 9
somewhat mixed with grey before apex and towards dorsal margin;
cilia pale ochreous-yellowish.

BY E. MEYRICK, B.A. 831

Nearest to H. Umhata, which it closely resembles in the fore-
wings, but immediately distinguished by the entire absence of the
dark border to the hindwings, and the pale yellowish cilia.

Sydney, New South Wales ; four specimens on a fence in
October.

518. (4.3a.) Hel. eudoxa, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. griseo-luteis, puncfco plicte, altero disci maculam
parvam superjacente, linea postica costam non attingente, sti-iga
marginis postici nebulosa in dorsum medium perducta saturatius
fusco-purpureis ; post, flavis, ciliis saturate griseis.

^2- 21-25 mm. Head bright yellow. Palpi whitish-ochreous.
Antennas fuscous. Thorax light greyish-ochreous, more or less
sufiused irregularly with dark fuscous-purplish except on patagia.
Abdomen fuscous, margins yellowish. Legs whitish-ochreous,
anterior and middle pair suffused with fuscous above. Forewings
moderate, costa moderately arched, apex obtuse, hindmargin
nearly straight, somewhat oblique, rounded beneath ; greyish-
yellowish or whitish-grey ; costal edge pale yellowish ; markings
dull fuscous-purplish ; a narrow obscure suffusion along inner
margin from middle to anal angle ; a dot on fold beneath middle,
and a larger one in disc at § ; a small cloudy spot beneath second
dot ; a waved line from near hindmargin above middle to anal
angle ; a cloudy line along hindmargin dilating gradually to apex :
cilia whitish, basal half rosy or purplish-tinged, towards anal angle
and at apex greyish. Hindwings ochreous-yellow, basal hairs
greyish ; cilia dark grey, tips paler.

Closely allied to B. parcdyrgis (of which I have now a series),
but readily separated by the forewings being more or less greyish,
not clear yellow-ochreous, and by the absence of the broad purple
band which in H. 2Mrali/rgis extends along the hindmargin and
posterior part of inner margin so as^to absorb the other markings.
Whether the species will remain as readily separable when forms
from intermediate localities are known, is yet to be seen.

Larva stout, broadly flattened, broadest in middle ; ochreous-
whitish, towards sides slightly tinged with purplish-rosy ; head

832 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN MICRO-LEPIDOPTERA.

dark brown ; second segment blackish-fuscous, anterior margin
ochreous-whitish : third and foui'th segments with dark fuscous
marks towards sides. Feeds on Eucalyptus leucoxylon, between
a leaf and a piece cut from another leaf, forming an oblong
slightly dilated chamber, in October. Pupa in a case formed
of two oblong pieces of leaf joined by the edges, made by cutting
out the larval habitation, and attached at each end by threads
to the trunk ; enclosed in a firm cocoon within the case. This
larval habit is similar to that of H. parahjrgis.

Quorn, South Australia, in October and November ; two speci-
mens captured and a third bred.

519. (4 la.) ffel. epidesma, n. sp.

Media, alis ant. flavis, basi, fascia post medium subconica,
altera marginis postici supra latiore cum hac infra confluente
saturatius cupreo-fuscis ; post, saturatius cupreo-fuscis.

9. 19 mm. Head ochreous-yellow. Palpi whitish-yellowish,
second joint becoming fuscous towards base. Antennte, thorax,
aV)domen, and legs dark fuscous ; posterior tibipe and apex of tarsal
joints yellowish. Forewings moderately elongate, posteriorly
somewhat dilated, costa gently arched, apex obtuse, hindmargin
almost straight, rather oblique.; ochreous-yellow ; base narrowly
coppery-fuscous ; two rather dark coppery-fuscous fasciae ; first
from costa beyond middle, rather narrow at first, dilating gradually
throughout, on inner margin extending from middle to anal angle ;
second hindiuarginal, rather broad on costa, gradually attenuated
to anal angle, where it coalesces with first : cilia coppery -fuscous,
terminal half grey-whitish. Hindwings rather dark coppery-
fuscous ; cilia as in forewings.

In general appearance intermediate ]>etween Hel. hemiteles and
Phil, bimaculana, but recognisable by the form of the fasciae.

Melbourne, Victoria ; one specimen received from Dr. Lucas.

REMARKS ON AUSTRALIAN PTINID^ AND
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW GENERA AND SPECIES.

By a. Sidney Olliff, F.E.S.

Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum.

In this Paper I have drawn up descriptions of some new-
Australian species of Ptinidte belonging to the subfamily in
which the antennte are inserted upon the front of the head. I
have not attempted to make use of the tabular characters
proposed by M. Boieldieu in his " Monographie des Ptiniores," as
I find the Australian species of Ptinus do not permit of sub-
division on colour and marking alone.

Ptinus exulans, Erich., is known to me from Jerrawa, Bowenfels,
Sydney and Tasmania. It varies slightly in the size and shape of
the white spots.

Ptinus fur, Linn. — I have seen specimens of this ubiquitous
species from Melbourne and Tasmania.

Mezium affine, Boield. and Gihhiuin scotins, Fabr. have both
been taken in the neighbourhood of Sydney, the former in some
numbers, but they are undouTjtedly introduced species.

Ectrej^hes formicarum, Pasc. — This species is known to range
from Adelaide to West Australia. I have seen specimens from
Gawler, Adelaide and Nichol Bay and it has been recorded from
Freemantle.

All the following species, with the exception of Ptinus adeps
and P. imulus which were kindly placed at my disposal by Mr.
Masters, are in the collection of the Australian Museum.

834 REMARKS ON AUSTRALIAN PTINID.E,

Ptinus adeps, sp. n.

Ovate, rather broad, not very strongly convex, shining black,
tinged with metallic green, moderately thickly clothed with long
black pubescence ; prothorax not very strongly constricted
behind ; elytra finely punctate-striate, with a moderately large
transverse spot of white pubescence near the humeral angles and
a narrow fascia behind the middle.

Head rather strongly produced in the middle, finely, irregularly
and very closely punctured. Antennae pitchy, finely pubescent.
Prothorax slightly longer than broad, feebly constricted behind,
strongly and not very closely punctured, the basal impression
moderately deep. Scutellum small, rounded behind, finely
pubescent. Elytra very feebly rounded at the sides, finely
and closely punctate-striate, the interstices rather broad and
ijnpunctate. Underside and legs finely pubescent. Length 3-3:|^ mm.

Wide Bay, Queensland ; Morpeth, Sydney, New South Wales.

This species and Ptinus albomaciilatus, Macleay, from Gayndah,
are very closely allied ; the latter may be distinguished by its
slightly larger size, blue-black c;)lour and by its much more
strongly punctured elytral strite.

Ptinus eminens, sp. n.

Elongate-ovate, moderately convex, pitchy black, shining,
densely clothed with rather long black pubescence ; prothorax not
very strongly constricted behind ; elytra rather strongly and
irregularly punctate-striate, with four large transverse patches of
yellow pubescence, two near the humeral angles and one on each
side behind the middle.

Head produced into a point between the antennte, finely and
closely punctured. Antennte castaneous, clothed with fine grey
pubescence. Prothorax slightly longer than broad, rather finely
and closely punctured, deeply impressed at the base. Scutellum
small, rounded behind, densely covered with grey pubescence.
Elytra nearly parallel for two-thirds of their length, then
arcuately rounded to the apex, rather strongly and irregularly

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.E.S. 835

punctate-striate, the interstices narrow and very finely rugose :
each elytron with two patches of yellow pubescence, one near the
humeral angle not much broader than long, the other behind the
middle and strongly transverse, the first of these patches edged
with grey pubescence externally. Underside and legs castaneous,
densely clothed with grey pubescence. Length 2| mm.

King George's Sound, West Australia ; four specimens found
between the fronds of the grass tree {Xanthorrhea.)

A very distinct species, quite unlike anything known to me.

Ptinus attritus, sp. n.

Elongate-ovate, moderately convex, dark metallic brassy green ;
prothorax very densely clothed with long velvety dark brown
pubescence except on the median line ; elytra rather strongly
punctate-striate, moderately thickly covered with long black
pubescence : each elytron with a small tuft of yellow pubescence
near the base, a broad indistinct patch of grey pubescence near
the humeral angle extending hindwards towards the suture and a
conspicuous yellow fascia behind the middle.

Head produced into a point between the eyes, finely and closely
covered with grey and brownish yellow pubescence Antennae
castaneous, clothed with grey pubescence. Prothorax longer than
broad, rather abruptly constricted behind, finely and closely
punctured, no distinct median line, the pubescence divided down
the middle thus giving the prothorax a furrowed appearance.
Scutelliim small, rounded behind, finely pubescent. Elytra rather
strongly punctate-striate, the interstices broad, impunctate : each
elytron with a moderately broad oblique fascia behind the middle
composed of yellow pubescence, bordered below with grey
pubescence, a tuft of grey pubescence just beyond its extremity
near the lateral margin. Legs pitchy, covered with grey
pubescence. Length 2-2^ mm.

Port Lincoln, South Australia ; King George's Sound, West
Australia.

In its general outline and tufted upper surface this species seems
to approach Ptinus niveicollis, Boield. from St. Domingo, but in
every other respect it is widely diffei-ent,

836 REMARKS ON AUSTRALIAN PTINIDiE,

Ptinus imulus, sp. n.

Elongate-ovate, rather convex, pitchy black, somewhat shining ;
prothorax thickly clothed with black pubescence, two small
indistinct patches of yellow pubescence at the base ; elytra finely
punctate-striate, an indistinct patch of grey pubescence near the
humeral angles and a distinct transverse fascia considerably
behind the middle composed of yellowish pubescence.

Head very feebly produced between the antenna?, very finely
punctured and pubescent. Antenna? dark ferruginous, finely
pubescent. Prothorax not very strongly constricted behind, very
finely, irregularly and closely punctured. Elytra with the sides
arcuately rounded, finely punctate-striate, the interstices moder-
ately broad, impunctate. Legs ferruginous, finely pubescent.
Length 2 mm.

King George's Sound, West Australia.

Ptinus egenus, sp. n.

Elongate-ovate, moderately convex, dark ferruginous, shining,
moderately thickly covered with long yellow pubescence ; pro-
thorax with the sides somewhat thickened in the middle, not
very strongly constricted behind ; elytra moderately strongly
striate -punctate, with a small patch of grey pubescence at the
humeral angles.

Head very feebly produced between the antennse, finely
punctured and pubescent. Prothorax rather longer than broad,
extremely finely and not very closely punctured on the disc, a
few strong punctures along the anterior margin ; the sides
slightly thickened just before the constriction ; basal impression
rather deep. Scutellum small, rounded behind, finely pubescent.
Elytra with the sides arcuately rounded, striate-punctate, the
interstices rather broad, impunctate. Underside and legs dark
ferruginoiis, very finely pubescent. Length 3 mm.

Lane Cove, Sydney, Bombala, Illawarra, New South Wales.

This species should be placed between Ptinus iectus, Boield.
and Ptinus exulans, Erich. Its shining upper surface, finely
punctured pi'othorax and much less closely striate-punctate elytra
will serve to distinguish it.

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.E.S. - 837

Ptinus longus, sp. n.

Elongate, narrow, moderately convex, pitchy black, shining,
rather thickly clothed with long yellow pubescence ; prothorax
rather strongly constricted behind ; elytra dark piceous, with the
sides nearly parallel, distinctly punctate-striate, a yellow patch
composed of short pubescence extending from behind the middle
to just before the apex, ornamented on the anterior border and at
the apex with grey pubescence, a small spot at tlie humeral angle
and a common fascia near the base also composed of grey scales.

Head rather strongly, irregularly and closely punctured.
Antennae ferruginous, finely pubescent. Prothorax slightly
longer than broad, moderately strongly rugose-punctate, rather
abruptly constricted and strongly impressed behind. Scutellum
small, rounded behind, finely pubescent. Elytra nearly parallel
for two-thirds of their length, then arcuately rounded to the
apex, finely but distinctly punctate-striate, the interstices
moderately broad, impunctate. Underside and legs dark ferru-
ginous, densely covered with grey pubescence. Length 3k mm.

Wide Bay, Queensland.

My knowledge of this very distinct species is confined to a
single male example.

D I PHOBIA, gen. nov.

Body elongate-ovate, convex. Head small, constricted on each
side behind the antennae. Eyes small, lateral. Antenme eleven
jointed, filiform, the basal joint considerably enlarged, the second
about as long as the first but not enlarged, the following joints
slightly decreasing in length towards the apex. Prothorax
elongate, anterior margin slightly eleva-ted, with a strong curved
impression behind the middle terminating on each side at a point
where the prothorax is rather strongly constricted. Elytra oval,
with short elongate impressions at the base. Legs leather long ;
femora somewhat thickened ; tibiee unarmed ; tarsi five jointed.

838 REMARKS ON AUSTRALIAN PTINID^E,

This genus connects Diplocotes, Westw. (Thes. Ent. Oxon, pi. 3,
fig. 6) with Ftinus, but is sufficiently distinguished by its elongate
and deeply impressed prothorax (which is nan-owed and strongly
constricted behind) and by its filiform eleven jointed antennae.

DiPHOBIA FAMILIARIS, Sp. n.

Elongate-ovate, strongly convex, pitchy lilack, somewhat
shining. Head rather finely and closely punctured, with an
indistinct median line ; the anterior margin bisinuate. Antennai
clothed with short grey pubescence ; first four joints finely rugose.
Prothorax considerably longer than broad, slightly narrowed
behind, sparingly clothed with short bristly grey hairs, distinctly
striolate, the curved impression more strongly impressed in the
middle than near the margins ; the sides rounded in front, rather
strongly constricted at the apical two-thirds. Elytra globose,
impunctate, with indistinct traces of stride, four moderately strong
basal impressions ; the suture feebly raised. Underside coloured
as above ; sterna moderately strongly and closely punctured ;
abdominal segments less strongly and sparingly punctured. Legs
pitchy. Length 2-i-3 unn.

South Australia. Under bark ; apparently an alnxndant
species.

Immature specimens have tlie elytra and legs of a reddish
testaceous colour.

Enasiba, gen. nov.

Body elongate, convex. Head transverse, constricted just in

front of the eyes. Eyes small, lateral. Antenn:e eleven jointed (?),

(1) the basal joint longer than broad, the second about half as long

as the first, ol)Iiquely truncated Viehind, the third nai-rower in

front than behind, fourth to sixth joints similar to the third in

shape, but considerably larger, seventh and eighth moniliform

smaller than the preceding, ninth globose and enlarged, tenth

smaller, slightly longer than broad. Prothorax elongate, anterior

(1) The unique spechnen upon which this genus is founded appears to
have lost the terminal joint of each of its autenn;e.

BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF, F.E.S. 839

margin rounded, with a transverse slightly curved impression
behind the middle terminating on each side at a point where the
pro thorax is rather strongly constricted. Elytra elongate-ovate,
with large impressions at the base. Legs long ; femora slender ;
tibinj and tarsi unarmed, the latter live jointed.

Allied to Dij)hobia and Dvplocotes, but distinguished by its
peculiar antennje, narrower and more elongate prothorax (which is
provided with a median line) and long slender legs.

Enasiba tristis, sp. n.

Elongate, strongly convex, dark piceous, shining, finely and not
very closely pubescent. Head rather long, narrow, slightly
emarginate in front, finely, irregularly and rather closely
punctured, with a moderately strong transverse impression about
the middle. Antennae clothed with short grey pubescence,
shining. Prothorax much longer than broad, slightly broader in
front than behind, rather strongly and somewhat irregularly
striolate ; the sides feebly rounded in front, constricted at the
apical two-thirds ; a strongly impressed median line. Elytra
elongate-ovate, very finely aciculate longitudinally and very finely
striate-punctate, six rather large basal impressions. Underside
coloured as above. Legs dai'k reddish testaceous. Length 4 mm.

King George's Sound, West Australia.

DlPLOCOTES FOVEICOLLIS, Sp. n.

Elongate-ovate, strongly convex, castaneous, shining. Head
rather finely and closely punctured ; the anterior margin
bisinuate. Antennae clothed with fine grey pubescence, joints 2-9
moniliform. Prothorax much longer than broad, narrowed
behind, moderately strongly striolate, the curved impression not
verv strongly marked, with a large circular fovea in the middle ;
the sides produced into an obtuse angle just before the middle,
sti-ongly constricted just behind the middle ; posterior angles
acute. Elytra pale castaneous, extremely finely pubescent, finely

840 REMARKS ON AUSTRALIAN PTINID^.

punctate-striate, the interstices narrow, with a few fine irregular
punctures ; the basal margin somewhat raised. Underside
coloured as above. Legs pale castaneous. Length 2| mm.

New South Wales.

Allied to the common South Australian Diplocotes Howittanns,
Westw. (Thes. Ent. Oxon. pi. 3, fig. 6) but diflfers in having its
strongly constricted prothorax provided with a deep fovea on the
disc behind the middle and its elytra more ovate, rather less
strongly punctate-striate and very finely pubescent.

NEW SPECIES OF LAND AND FRESH WATER MOL-
LUSCA FROM MACLAY-COAST AND TRITON BAY,
NEW GUINEA, COLLECTED BY BARON MACLAY,

By J. Brazier, C.M.Z.S., <kc., &c.

1. Helix (Geotrociius) Gorenduensis. Nov. sp.

Shell imperforated, trochus-shaped, rather thin, obliquely finely
striated and transversely wrinkled, flesh-tinted a cream colour ;
ornamented with pinkish opaque spots and dots ; spine rather
■conoid, whorls 5, convex the last more convex the first three apical
whorls dark rose pink, the fourth a little lighter in colour, the fifth
slightly keeled in front, cream coloured, and marked with opaque
pinkish spots and dots ; base convex, sculptured same as above ;
aperture triangular, very much produced and contracted in fi-ont,
constricted behind the aperture, interior bright pink, peristome
blackish purple, slightly reflected ; the right margin descending in
front ; columellar margin flattened and expanded, tinged with
brown, margins joined with a thin pink callous entering spirally
into the interior of the ai)erture.

Diam., Maj. 25. Min. 20. Alt. 15 millim.

Hah. — Gorendu, Maclay-Coast, New Guinea, 1876.

Two specimens of this very pretty species were found by Baron
Miklouho-Maclay. One was dead and weather-beaten, the other
was found with the animal alive. The Baron informs me that the
animal was black, and that the back of the neck was brown.

2. Helix (Geotrochus) Maclayiana. Nov. sp.
Shell covered with a thin yellowish brown epidermis, umbilicated,
depressly conoid, rather solid, obliquely plicately striated, every-
where minutely malleated, encircled with numerous spiral broken
purplish-chesnut lines and whitish opaque patches ; spire some-
what obtuse ; whorls 4| moderately convex, the two apical whorls
smooth, white, the last large, convex, descending in front ; suture

842 NEW SPECIES OF LAND AND FRESH WATER MOLLUSCA,

impressed having a narrow white line ; below the suture blotches
of purplish chesnut ; base convex having four spiral purplish
lines slightly broken up into blotches ; aperture very oblique, large,
ovate, interior pui-plish-brown ; peristome thickened, white,
reflected ; margins approximating, the right rather thin at the
upper part ; columellar margin thickened, broadly expanded and
reflected covering half of the umbilicus.

Diam. Maj. 39. Min. 30. Alt. 24 millira.

Hah — Maclay-Coast, New Guinea, 1876.

Only one specimen of this species was found. It has a thick
solid white reflected lip 5 mm. broad, and the interior of an intense
purplish chestnut. It also resembles, in its marking, Helix
Brazierce, Braz from Yule Island, and Helix Taumantias, Tapparone
Canefri from the Fly and Katow Rivers, New Guinea.

3. Helix (Rhysota) Achilles. Nov. sp.

Shell umbilicated, subdiscoid, granulose, obliquely striated,
rather obtusely angled, depressed at the upper part, very light
brown, slightly keeled at the periphery ; whorls 5^ moderately
convex, first 3 J finely granulated, the last two riigosely granulated,
regularly increasing in size, the last very large ; suture impressed
deeper towards the last whorl, marked with a narrow broad
chesnut line fading away as the apex is reached ; base chestnut
brown from the periphery, spirally granulose, the grains getting
finer towards the umbilicus ; umbilicus large deep ; aperture
angularly lunar, white within, peristome white, margins distant, the
right rather thin, columellar margin regular, thickened and joined
to the upper with a thick coating of callous on the body whorl.

Diam., Maj. 50. Min. 43. Alt. 26 millim

Hah.- — Maclay Coast, New Guinea, 1876.

One specimen was found. This form is quite peculiar to New
Guinea. The whole surface of the shell is granulated in a regular
criss-cross way.

BY J. BRAZIER, C.M.Z.S., &C., &C. 843

4. Melania Walloriensis. Nov. sp.

Shell sharply subulate, narrow, whorls 11, flattish, longitudinally
obliquely ribbed, ribs numerous and close together on the upper
whorls, on the last 3 they are wider apart ; suture deep ; aperture
oblong, ovate, peristome thin ; columellar margin callously expanded.

Length 40 : diameter 11 : aperture 10 long, 6 wide, millim.

Sab. — The inland sea called Kamaka-Wallor 500 feet above sea
level, Papua Kowiay on the N. W. Coast of New Guinea, Dutch
Territory, Triton Bay ; discovered by Baron N. de Miklouho-Maclay
in 1874.

The single specimen is all bleached and weatherbeaten white. It
resembles some of the subfossil species.

5. Paludina Kowiayiensis. Nov. sp.

Shell ovately conical, narrowly and deeply umbilicated, very
thin, fragile (generally covered with a lime deposit), light horny
brown, sometimes spotted with ojjaque brown, sculptured with
very j&ne oblique lines of growth and closely spirally linearly
striated, striations rather Avide apart, (only seen with the lens) ;
whorls 51, convex, the last roundly convex, (the spiral lines are
more numerous and distant on the first 4^) ; apex acute ; suture
distinct ; base with an obtuse keel round the umbilicus, aperture
pyriformly circular ; [jeristome thin, the margins connected with a
thin callous deposit ; interior bi'own.

Diam., Maj. 19. Min. 10. Alt, 21 millim.

Mab. — The inland sea called Kamaka-Wallor, 500 feet above
sea level, Papua Kowiay on the N. VV. coast of New Guinea,
.Dutch territory, Triton Bay ; discovered by Baron de Miklouho-
Maclay.

Two specimens found ; one dead and worn, the other living,
covered with a lime deposit. The operculum was not preserved
with the specimen.
55

844 NEW SPECIES OP LAND AND FRESH WATER MOLLUCSA,

The othei* species collected by tlie Baron on the Maclay-Coast
were Helix (Chloritis) discordialis, Fer., one specimen : Neritina
brevispina, Lam., (the variety called by Sowerby Neritina corona,
Linn,, a blackish shell with three yellow spiral bands, one on the
angle and two below), two specimens : Neritina Touleyetana,
Recluz, two specimens: Mitra cucumerina, Lam., one specimen.

SECOND ADDENDUM
TO THE MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES.

By R. von Lendenpeld, Ph.D.

Halme laxa. N. sp.

Shape and Size.

This sponge is similar to the digitate vai'iety of Holme nidus
vesparimi, but it grows to a much larger size. The central
bulbous mass measures 60 mm. in diameter, and is attached by a
base about 40 mm. wide. From this 5-10 or more digitate
processes grow upward. These attain a very much larger size in
the vai'iety digitata than [in the variety minima. The whole
sponge is, as the name implies, very loose in its structure. It is
hollow throughout, the wall on an average 10 mm. thick. This
wall is perforated by a great number of large holes which lie so
close together that only narrow bridges of sponge tissue are left
between them. The width of the meshes varies in the varieties.
The average width however, is never less than 10 mm., whilst
the thickness of the intervening walls does rarely exceed 1'5 mm.
The shape of the meshes is more regular in fresh specimens
than in dried ones, in consequence of the extreme laxity of the
whole structure. Nevertheless, even in the fresh state, the meshes
appear very much larger and more irregular than in any other
species. They are of uniform shape throughout the whole body of
the sponge.

Surface.

The surface is smooth, rendered slightly uneven in consequence
of the irregular curvatures of the sponge lamellse.

846 ADDENDUM TO THE MONOGRAPH OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPONGES,

The oscula are small and circular, measuring about 1 mm. in
diameter, pretty numerous and scattered irregularly over the
surface. They are more numerous towards the interior than
towards the outer surface.

Colour.

Alive very light pink, nearly white ; in spirits this colour is
retained. Dry skeletons are grey in consequence of the prevalence
of sand.

Canal System.

A. Vestibule space.

The vestibule space is developed as in Hahne tingens,
described in another paper of these Proceedings, and reminds
one of Hippospongia. There is no dermal lamella at all. The
lamellae terminate distally with sharp margins. An intei--
esting structure is the cavity which pervades the whole of the
sponge. This has a width equal to a third of the diameter of the
whole sponge. It must be considered as the first step towards the
development of a pseudogaster, although it is divided from the
outer water only by the loose network described above.

B. Canal system proper.

The subdermal cavities are very extensive, and the canals in
the interior very large, many measuring 1 mm. in diameter. Tlie
ciliated chambers are very small and abundant.

Skeleton.

The network of horny fibres has very wide meshes; foreign bodies
are not very abundant and form the core only of the main fibres.
The main fibres have a thickness of 0.25 mm., the meshes an
average width of 0.9 mm., and the connecting fibres which are free
from foreign l^odies, measure 0.012 mm. in thickness. The fibres
are of a dark brown colour and consist of very uniform spongiolin,
which does not show any indication of being stratified.

BY R. VON LENDENFELD, PH.D. 847

It is very remarkable that silicious spicules are found in great
abundance in this sponge. Near the skin the main fibres form
branches in a penicillate manner, and the branches are constituted
nearly exclusively of spicules, which vary much in shape and
size, but still I think it not unlikely that this sponge may
belong to the silicious sponges, and that the spicules are not
foreign bodies as I assume. The spicules in the surface are
mostly slender and long, averaging 0.2 mm. in length and
0.003 mm. in thickness. In the interior numerous short and
stout spicules are found together with slender ones such as those
on the surface. These are Tr. Ac, and measure 0.08 x 0.007 mm.,
and are often inserted into the horny fibx^es as in the true
Echispidse. This species is one of those forms which, like certain
species of Dactylochalina and Chalinopsis, are intermediate,
between the horny and the silicious sponges.

I. Variety, Halme laxa minima.

Small a^d irregular, the digitate processes hardly longer than
high, and the whole sponge flat and extended, more or less
incrusting. The network of the sponge lamella is formed of
lamellae not more than 1 mm. thick, whilst the meshes barely
exceed a width of 10 mm.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson, (von Lendenfeld.)

Bathymetrical Distribution,
30 metres.

II. Variety, Halme laxa digitata.

Grows to a large size, the digitate processes attaining a height
of 300 mm., by a width of 70 mm. They are however, not so
numerous as in the foregoing variety. The meshes of the network
are much wider, averaging a diameter of 20 mm.

848 addendum to the moxograph of the australian sponges,

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, Port Jackson, (von Lendenfeld.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.

Shallow water.

Halme gigantea. N. sp.

Shape and Size.

I distinguish three varieties of this species. These differ from
each other, particularly in their outer shape and in the size of the
meshes of the network of the sponge. The sponge consists of
a basal mass, attaining a diameter of 100 mm., and attached by a
broad base. From this, peculiar elongate more or less conic
processes grow upward. These processes differ very much in their
shape from the regularly cylindrical digitate processes of the
foregoing species. Their greatest width is half-way up, from
there they taper to a narrow point. They attain a length
of 400 mm. and a greatest width in the centre of 60 mm.
Very often three or more of these processes coalesce for a part of
the distance to form thick lamellfe, which may attain a size of 150
by 120 mm. From the terminations of these laraellse the distal
parts of the conic processes project, so that the lamella itself
attains a highly serrated margin, with 4 or 5 incisions not less
than 80 mm. deep. Like the foregoing species, this one also is
hollow. The cavity measures about J of the diameter of the
sponge. The sponge lamella itself forms a network with meshes
which are mvxch more regular and smaller than in the foregoing
species. Their width varies as mentioned above in the different
varieties, from 4 to 12 .mm. The distal margin of the sponge
lamella is slightly thickened and not sharp as in Halme laxa.
There is, however, no trace of a dermal lamella. The meshes are
more or less hexagonal.

Surface.
Smooth, slightly uneven.

by r. von lendenfeld, ph.d. 849-

Colour.
Light brown, skeletons yellowish-grey.

Canal System.
A. Vestibule canals.

The central continuous cavity is a primitive form of pseudo-
gaster. The reticulation is pretty regular below the outer surface,
where the lamellae are always more or less vertical to the surface.
Towards the interior however, they become slightly irregular.
The straight prismatic spaces of the outer portion, lead into more
oblique canals before they enter the pseudogaster.

B. Canal system proper.

The subdermal cavities are small and inconspicuous. The
canals in the interior rarely exceed the width of 0.2 mm. This
species therefore appears more dense than the foregoing.

Skeleton.
The skeleton of this species is similar to the foregoing.

I. Variety, Halme gigantea micropora.

With long and slender processes ; the meshes of the network
on an average 6 mm. in width.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, Illawarra, (Ramsay.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.

0)

II. Variety, Halme gigantea intermedia.

More irregular in shape, the digitate processes terminally more
rounded ; the pores or meshes of the network on an average
7-8 mm.

850 addendum to the monograph op the australian sponges,

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, (Ramsay) ; Broughtou Islands.

Bathymetrical Distribution.

(?)

III. Variety, Halme gigantea macropora.

Similar to the foregoing but with pores or meshes of the sponge
reticulation about 10 mm. wide. In this variety sometimes
bulbous extensions in the processes are met with. With these,
extensions of the pseudogaster correspond. In these swellings,
moreover, the pseudogaster has a diameter equal to half that of the
sponge.

Geographical Distribution.
East Coast of Australia, (Ramsay.)

Bathymetrical Distribution.
(0

NOTES FROM THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM.
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW CORIS.

BY

E. P. Eamsay, F.R.S.E., and J. Douglas-Ogilby.

CoRis REX. sp. nov.

D. 9/12; A. 3/12; V. 1/5; P. 13; C. 14; L. lat. 98; L.
trans. 11/38.

Length of head 4i, height of body 3*0 in the total length.
Ei/es — small, diameter ] of the length of head, % of that of snout,
and I of the convex interorbital space. Upper jaw rather the
longer ; the maxilla extends to the vertical from the posterior
nostrii. Teeth — in both jaws in a double series, the inner of
which is minute ; a pair of strong canines in front of either jaw,
those of the lower jaw fitting between the ujiper ones when the
mouth is closed ; the upper jaw has a strong curved tooth behind
eacli anterior canine ; about ten lateral teeth on each ramus ; these
decrease in size gradually from the front ; a pair of posterior
canines at each angle of the mouth. Fins — The dorsal commences
midway between the base of the pectoral and the hind limb of the
preopercle ; its spines are moderately strong, subequal in length, as
long as the snout : the anal commences opposite the soft dorsal ;
its third spine is longest, not nearly so long as the last dorsal
spine : pectox-als well developed, equal to the distance between the
front margin of the eye and the point of the opercular flap :
outer ventral ray elongate, rather longer than the pestorals, and
reaching to the vent : caudal slightly rounded. Lateral line —
curved beneath the ninth and tenth dorsal rays : its tubules
simple. Conors— reddish-brown, inclining to salmon-color below;
a broad purplish-brown band between the seventh and eighth
dorsal spines and the anus ; this is margined on either side by a

852 ^OTEs from the Australian museum.

narrower greyish band, the anterior of which partly surrounds an
oblong vei-tical gamboge-yellow patch, which lies immediately
behind and beneath the posterior margin of the pectoral fin ; the
lower limb of the preopercle, the interopercle, and the head above
the eye are pale sea-green ; lips, cheeks, hinder limb of pre-
opercle, and the opercle pale red, except the opei'cular flap, which
is blue : posterior half of the body ornamented with twelve
narrow whitish M-shaped vertical streaks, the central part, which
occupies the greater portion of the height, being semicircular with
the convexity forward. Dorsal blue with a narrow pale basal
band ; anal and caudal fins bluish with pale blotches at the base
and an irregular reddish median line : pectorals bright red at the
base, opalescent in the middle, and broadly tipped and margined
with deep blue : ventrals immaculate.

This magnificent fish was taken on the 13th instant, by Mr. G.
Billington off Bondi Heads. It measures 16-50 inches, and is in
fine condition, but shows no signs of breeding. Its stomach
contained numerous remains of crustaceans and molluscs, all
considerably broken up ; among the latter Mr. Brazier has
identified Uronalpinx tritoniformis, Mitra hadia, Gibhula strangei,
and a species each of Natica and Glancuhis. The specimen has
been presented by its captor to the Australian Museum, where its
registered number is B. 9902.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 853

Notes and Exhibits.

Mr. Ogilby exhibited a specimen of the fish Coris rex.

Mr. Brazier exhibited the shells from the Maclay-Coast
described in his paper.

Baron Maclay exhibited a fragment of Jet from New Guinea,
which had been found by Mr. Wilkinson to possess a specific
gravity of 1*24, and was presumed by him, mainly on the ground
of its resemblance to Jet of this country, to indicate, probably, the
existence of coah Baron Maclay added that, as far as he knew, the
first discovery of coal in New Guinea was mentioned in the report
of Van Delden as far back as 1828. Further details about the
same coal on the small Island Lakahia, on the N.W. coast of New
Guinea, are to be found in the account of the expedition of the
Dutch Government steamer "Etna" in 18-58, edited by the Royal
Institute in 1862 (on page 131-143). The opinion of the
scientific commission of the " Etna " is that the coal on the island
Lakahia belongs to a recent formation, and is a " lamellated "
(" bladerige ") coal.

Mr. Prince exhibited a large number of Volutes, differing very
considerably in general appearance, but all belonging to F. piperita,
though including the supposed species V. lluckeri, V. Macgilli-
vrayi, V. Cathcarti, and V. Rut ilia.

Dr. Cox exhibited specimens sent from the Hunter by Mr. J.
S. Skeat, including teeth and bones of horses from deep alluvium ;
and from the Upper Carboniferous near Maitland, representatives
of the following genera : — Spirifer, Pleurotomaria, Productus,
Avlculopecten, Bellerophon, Sanguivolites. The beds from which
these fossils were obtained overlie the West Maitland Coal Seams.
Also excellent casts of fishes taken in gelatine, and coloured after
life. Also a very splendid example ^of the flower and fruit of
Eucalyptus ficifolia, of West Australia.

Mr. Masters exhibited some Moths, apparently Pyralidae,
bred from caterpillars found feeding on a Coccus which
infested the common Zamia. The caterpillars in the course of a

854 NOTES AND EXHIBITS,

few days, completely cleared the plant of the scale, devouring
the Coccus and forming with the scales or empty skins, complete
coverings for themselves, which they carried about on their backs.
They fed at night, and during the day fixed themselves securely to
the mid-rib of the frond.

Mr. Whitelegge exhibited living specimens of Cordylophora, a
fresh water Hydroid Zoophyte, from Parramatta. Also, some very
beautifully mounted specimens of the same under the microscope.
Dr. Lendenfeld expressed his belief that this exhibit was probably
a new form.

]Mr. Macleay exhibited a remarkably fine specimen of Eunice sp ?
taken in Sydney Harbour by James Hill, Esq., of Vaucluse.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING.

27th January, 1886.

The President, Professor W. J. Stephens, M.A., in the Chair.

President's Address.

At the end of the Eleventh Year of the Society's ojierations, it
becomes my duty, as President, to lay before you a general
account of our proceedings during the last twelve months, and to
invite you to take a momentary retrosj)ect over the ground which
has been traversed since our course commenced.

First, however, I have to discharge the melancholy obligation
of recalling to your minds the memory of those members who
have passed away from among us since our last annual reunion.

Mr. Robert Archiljald Alison Morehead died on Friday,
January 9, at the age of 72 years. Throughout his whole
residence in New South Wales he had taken a warm interest in
the question of popular education, was a Member of the National
Board, and of the Council of Education after the Legislation of
IS^^Q, and was a Trustee of the Sydney Grammar School from its
foundation. He was, let me add, one of the original Members or
founders of this Society.

Mr. William Augustine Duncan, C.M.G., died on Thursday,
June 25, in his 75th year. His literary faculty was fertile and
of a high order, and the exercise of his powers was directed
by a pure and sincere conscientiousness. Like Mr. Morehead,
he was a Member of the National Board, and afterwards of the

856 president's address.

Council of Education. He was a Trustee of the Free Public
Library from the first, and, on the resignation of Dr. Badhaiu,
was elected Chairman of the Board. Like Mr. Morehead he
was one of the original Members of this Society. He had col-
lected a very valuable and extensive library, in which almost
every book had some peculiar characteristic or interest of its own.

Mr. David Henry Campbell died at his residence, Cunningham
Plains, on Sunday, August 23, aged 55 years. Outside his large
circle of friends he was principally known by the action in which
he distinguished himself during the outbreak of bushranging
about 20 years ago, when in a spirited defence of his house at
Goimbla against an attack of the Gilbert and Ben Hall gang, he
shot dead one of their number, the l^ushranger O'Meally.

The only legislative changes which have taken place in the
Constitution of the Society are the following : — (1.) The entrance
fee for new members has been abolished, and the Annual Sub-
scription raised to Two Guineas, in consideration of the very
largely increased advantages which are now placed at the
disposal of membei's ; and (2) Ladies may be admitted by
election as Associates of the Society for an Annual Subscription
of One Guinea, with all privileges in the way of study, use of
library, laboratory, &c., except the right to attend the Monthly
Meetings of the Society. This enlargement of the Society's
sphere is admittedly only tentative, and may probably be
increased hereafter liy the admission of all members to full
rights without distinction of sex, following the improved practice
of the Sydney University in this respect.

But a gi-eat alteration in the accommodation provided for the
use of the Society presents itself to our eyes, in this spacious
house which has been presented to us by Mr. Macleay. In the
course of 1884 an Act of Pai'liament was, as you all are aware,
obtained for the Incorporation of the Society, mainly through
the good offices of the Hon. W. B. Dalley, M.L.C. Although thus
raised to a position of permanence and dignity, we had nevei-
theless no certain abode of our own, but lived under shelter

president's address. 857

of a roof found for us by the liberality of Mr. Macleay.
These quarters, though convenient and comfortable enough, were
unfortunately situated upon the noisiest portion of the Tramway,
the vicinity of which is as disadvantageous for study as its
accommodation is serviceable to general traffic. Finally therefore
Mr. Macleay carried his course of benefaction to the Society a
long stage further, by building for us upon his own land an
excellently planned and commodious Home, containing a hall,
with library attached, in which our meetings are now held, a
spacious laboratory, and two large rooms for committees and
other purposes. How roomy, airy and light this abode of Science
is, and how pleasant its surroundings, all who are now present,
or were Mr. Macleay's guests on the day when he made over this
noble donation for the benefit of generations to come, can readily
testify. Of that day an account has been prepared which will
serve as a slight record of his unceasing effort for the good of the
Society, and of our hearty and serious appreciation of his
generosity. It is my pleasing duty to add that Mr. Macleay has
consented to have a portrait of himself taken in marble, which
shall be placed in this hall as a conspicuous and enduring
memorial of our sincere and frank gratitude.

There are one or two epochs in our brief history which may
fairly claim our consideration for a moment, exhibiting as they
do the extraordinary growth which has been made since the days
of our infancy and cradlehood. Only yesterday we celebrated
the birthday of the Australian Nation, and honoured with
pardonable exultation the vigoi'ous adolescence of this Britain
of the Pacific, for which we discern in her early achievements an
•earnest of a future, not only of domestic prosperity, but also, and
more emphatically, of Imperial significance, attended with results
which will influence widely and deeply the ages that are to come,
and forward the long-hoped-for and long-delayed approach of the
commonwealth of humanity. To-d£l,y our theme is humbler.
Yet this Society also shares in the development of the greater
Society in which its roots are implanted, out of whose natural
fertility it draws its vital strength, and to which in due course it

858 president's address.

returns all that it has received, with increase untold. Our
progress depends essentially upon the prosperity of the people,
and that prosperity cannot but deri^^e continued expansion and
progressive enrichment from the advance of Science in
Australia.

Now the first Monthly Meeting of the Society was held Monday
January 25, 1875, under the Presidency of Mr. Macleay, who at
the commencement of Autumn (May 18) set sail in the Chevert
for New Guinea. On the return of that Expedition, Mr. Macleay
resumed his chair at the next meeting, November 25, and read a
paper containing a general account of his doings and collections
On the voyage and in New Guinea. It may reasonably be said
that this date marks the first epoch in our history. The quantity
of new and interesting material then thrown down, at the feet and
before the eyes of the Society, had, as might have been expected,
a wonderfully quickening effect upon its previously rather sluggish
energies ; and so the voyage of the Chevert became the primary
and material cause of its subsequent health and vitality. For at
this very Meeting the President, while sketching out the distribution
of his collections for the purpose of scientific examination, found
himself compelled to admit "that he could not think of any one
who was likely to do justice to the collections of the Crustacea,
echinodermata, annelida, polyzoa, polypifera, and other still
lower forms of animal life." Such a sorrowful confession is not,
we trust, likely to be again provoked. Many Members of the
Society have shown themselves well qualified to deal with these
subjects, and do deal with them accordingly. But indeed it was
impossible to attempt so decided an advance into a strange country
without the auxiliary force of books, in which we might find the
observations of previous investigators recorded, their errors
corrected, and their real discoveries confirmed. This assistance
was for a long time out of the reach of Australian Naturalists, and
it therefore became a habitual practice to refer every new
object to persons resident in older countries, who, besides their
own knowledge, had at hand the science of the whole world
recorded in an accessible and convenient form. Now, however,

president's address. 859

the circumstances are to a large extent altered. The excellent
Collections of the Australian Museum, the Free Public Library,
the Royal Society, and (though as yet to a limited extent) of the
Sydney University, as well as — though last, not least — of the
Linnean Society, have given New South Wales a fair chance in
the field. It may be observed, by the way, that concerted action
on the part of these institutions might under present circumstances
result in filling the inevitable blanks which even their united
resources still disclose to the critical inquirer. But in any case it
cannot but be a ground for lively satisfaction that the collections
which have been made in the late Expedition to New Guinea,
organized by the Geographical Society of Australasia, are to be
examined, classified, and described by local authorities.

It is understood that the Mammalia, Birds, and Reptiles will be
undertaken by Mr. Ramsay, the Fishes by Mr. Ogilby, the Insects
by Mr. Macleay, the Crustacea by Mr. Haswell, the Mollusca by
Mr. Brazier, the Ccelenterata, if possible, by Dr. v. Lendenfeld,
and the Flora in general, as a matter of course, by the indefatigable
Baron von Mueller. Some other branches have, I believe, not yet
been allotted, but will, I do not doubt, be entrusted to Australian
experts.

It is not necessary to occupy your time with a mere list of the
various papers which have been read before the Society in the
course of the last year, since that information will be published in
a more convenient form in the Annual Volume of our Proceedings.
But it may possibly conduce to a useful economy of time and
trouble in hunting up the bibliography of any of our subjects, if
I lay before you a short sketch, entei'ing into no more detail than
is absolutely requisite, of the work which has been accomplished
during the past year in our own Society, and during the preceding
one in the other Scientific Societies of Australia. I regret that it
is not now, nor is it ever likely to- be possible, that we at our
Annual Meeting should review the whole contemporaneous territory
from one panoramic centre. This could only be done by taking
newspaper accounts of meetings and of paj^ers as authoritative
56

860 president's address.

records, an assumption which niiglit indeed be generally safe, but
would also sometimes, for certain, lead the incautious reader into a
maze of confusion and contradiction.

In the plan which 1 follow, I have adopted the order of
succession as brought out by the date of each author's first paper
during the year, and without any reference to the relative number,
length or value of his contributions. It might, I admit, very
naturally be urged that a classification by subjects would be more
convenient and useful for reference. But it is found that many
practical difficulties lie in the way of this procedui^e, and I have
therefore been induced to prefer the arrangement according to
authors' names, which in this case, as in that of libraries also, seems
to present fewer incongruities and puzzles than any other.

Dr. von Lendenfeld has continued his Monograph of the Austra-
lian Sponges, commenced in 1884. Of the previous portion. Part L
(Vol. IX. p 121) contains a general introduction. Historical and
Bibliographical, to the subject ; Part II. (ib.p. 310) an account of the
Morphology and Anatomy of Sponges in the widest sense ; and
Part III. (ib. p. 1,083) deals with the Calcispongiae. Other papers
connected with the study of their organisms will be found at
pages 434, 493, 495, 641, 896, 977. In January, 1885, he read
Part IV. (p. 3. pi. IV.) upon the Myxospongite ; Part V. (p. 282,
pi. XXVI-XXXV), commences the Ceraospongiaj, which are
continued (to Eu$pongia) in Part VI. (p. 481, pi. XXXVI-
XXXVIII.) Other papers upon the Sponges occur as follows :
On the Phoriospongise, p. 81 ; On Carter's Australian Sponges,
p. 151 ; On a Sponge Destructive to the Oysters in the Clarence
River, p. 326 ; Addendum, No. I. to Monograph, p. 475 ; Notes
on Sponges Dendrilla, Raphyrus, Holme, (Src, in the Australian
Museum, p. 557, pi. XXXIX-XLIV. ; On a Vegetable Pseudo-
morph of a Siliceous Sponge, p. 726, pi. XLVIII. 5. ; Addendum
No. 2 to Monograph, p. 845.

It will be observed that there are still wanting, to complete this
important Monograph, the history of several families of the
Horny Sponges, and of the Orders Monacticerae, Hyalospongige
and Monactihyalae. (See vol. IX., p. 340). In view of the

president's address. 861

author's proposed migration to London the prospect of completion
appears more remote than might have been desired. But I am
given to understand that arrangements have been made for the
continuation of the work outside of Australia, and since the
subject covers a vast and unexpected extent of new ground, and
cannot possibly be placed in more competent hands, it is to be
earnestly hoped that no avoidable delay may defer its early
execution.

Dr. von Lendenfeld has also appended to his previous work on
the Australian Hydromedusas a third Addendum (p. 477) with
an amended classification, and a fourth (p. 679) on a new species
of Hydra ; together with a note on Gorgonia rosacea, Esch.
{Liriope sp. Gegenb. &c.)

"He has also continued his enquiries into the (supposed) Glacial
Period in the Southern Hemisphere ; and on the tokens of
Olaciation which he had himself observed on the plateau of Mount
Kosciusko (pp. 44, 330, pi. VII. VIII. See also Vol. IX., p.
806, On the time of the Glacial Period in N.Z., His views on this
subject have been vigorously combatted by Capfc. F. W, Hutton, in
apaper on the supposed Glacial period in Australia, p. 334. He has
also contributed short papers on Section Cutting, p. 23 ; on Animha
parasitica, a protozoan infesting Sheep, p. 35, pi. VI. The Austra-
lian fresh water Rhizopoda, p. 723. Meteorology of Mount
Kosciusko, p. 39 ; on Flight, p. 73 ; On Recent Changes in the
Forest Flora of N.S.W., p. 721, and, in conjunction with Mr.
Brazier, on Onchidiwm chamoileon, and the structure of the
Dorsal skin in Onchidmm, p. 730.

The Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L.S., &c., has written upon the
Geographical distribution and economic uses of the Proteaceee of
Australia (p. .54) pointing out the occvirrence of existing genera,
as Bayiksia, Ilakea, Grevillea, in the Tertiary Beds of Northern
Europe, and the present limitation of all those with dehiscent
fruits to Africa and Australia, though no species is common to
the two regions. West Australia counts 15 genera of 389 species,
while New South Wales has 17 genera of only 124 species.
Queensland has 59 species, Victoria 51, South Australia 33, North

862 president's address.

Austi'ulia 33, and Tasmania 23 He lias also a paper upon the
occurrence of Double-Flowers in a wild state (p. 445). Rubus
rosifolius, Epacris purpurascens, E. onicrophylla^ E. impressa,
Sprengelia incarnata, and Astroloma humiifusa ; several sp of
Eaimnculus ; Eriostemon obovalis, and (?) Boronia pinnata :
Convolvulus erubescens ; and Wahlenbergia gracilis have all been
found doubled. The author is inclined to attribute this
phenomenon, at least in part, to the agency of insects.

The Hon. W. Macleay, M.L.C., F.L.S., kc, writes— On 5 new
Fishes, OUyorus gibbiceps, Murrayia Jeukinsii, Galaxias sp. and
Gadopsis sp. from the Upper Murrumljidgee, p. 267. On Cienudux
Wllkinsoni, a new genus represented by a single specimen from
Lord Howe Island, not referable to any recognised family, p. 71 8,
pi. XLVII. Also, in conjunction with N. de M. Maclay, the
Pliigio-stomata of the Pacific, No. III., with descriptions of
Ileterodontus zebra, 3fyliobatis i^unctatus, and Discobatlsmarginatua,
p. 673, pi. XLY & XL VI, On a New Snake, Furina Ramsay i,
from the Barrier Ranges, p. 61. On some New Reptiles, Ilimdia
2)icta, Tetradactylus yuttulatus, Navdoa crassa, Tropidotiotus ater,
and lloplocephalus assimilis, from tlie Herbert River, Queensland,
p. 64. Also, R,evision of genus Lamprima Latreille with descrip-
tions of new species, p. 129. New Australian Lucanidce,
IIomolampi-ivia n. g. Rhyssonotus n. sp., and PJialacrognathus
n.g., pp. 199, 473.

jMr. A. Sidney Olliff, F.E.S., Assistant Zoologist Australian
Museum, contributes : Cori*ection of Classification of certain
Ceylonese Clavicornia, belonging to the Nit'uhiUd(t', Troyositidif,
Cucujkke, Lathridiidce, and Dermestidoi, p. 69. Citcujidce of
Australia, p. 203. New species of Carabidai and Rlbysodidoi, p.
467. Trogositida', of Australia, p. 699. New species and genera
of Australian Ptinidce, p. 833. A new Butterfly, belonging to the
Lycaenidte, p. 716.

Mr. F. Ratte, Eng. Arts et Manuf., Paris. On a Devonian
fossil from the Murrumbidgee Limestones, allied to Worthenia
De Koninck, p. 79, pi. IX. On an uncommon form of Ciystallisa
tion in Siderite, p. 759, pi. LVI.

president's address. 863

Mr. Brazier, C.^NI.Z.S., Synonymy of some Marine Shells
described by Gray, viz. : Stromhus AiistruUs, Bulla Australls and
BuUina liueata, p. 85. New species of Land and Freshwater
MoUusca from Maclay Coast and Triton Bay, N. Guinea, p. 841 ;
and, in conjunction with Dr. von Lendenfeld, as mentioned above,
on Onchidium chavueleon, p. 729.

Mr. W. A. Haswell, M.A., B.Sc, <tc. ITotes on Aus-
tralian Amphvpoda (p. 95, pi. X. — XVIII.), including the
genera Taliirus, Allorchestes, Neohule, Aspidojjhoreia, Stegocephalus
Ampelisca, Lysianassa (Anonyx), Eusirus, Leucothea, Atylus,
Dexamine, Megamcera, Moera, Xetwcheira, Hajylocheira, Harmonia.
Cyrtophium, Dexiocerella, Lcematophilus, andProto. Also (p. 273)
a Series of Jottings from the Biological Laboratory of Sydney
University. L On Polydora (Leucodore) polyhranclda, in
conjunction with P. ciliata, which is a mischievous parasite upon
Oysters in the Hunter River. 2. On staining with Hematoxylin,
and on embedding in Paraffin for histological purposes. 3. The
minute structure of Polyno'e. Also, 4. (p. 331.) On an Austra-
lian species of Bonnellid ; and 5. Aquatic Respiration C?) in
Freshwater Tortoises. Also a paper on some Australian
Polychgeta of the genera Syllis, Gnathosyllis, Eulalia, Siphonostoma.
Halla, and Staurocejjhalus, p. 733, pi. L-LV.

Captain F. W. Hutton, F.G.S., &c.— A Revision of the Toxo-
glossate MoUusca of New Zealand, Pleurotoma, Drillia,
Mattgilla (I), Clathurella, Daphnella, and Terehra, p. 115.
Also a paper, referred to before, on the supposed Glacial Period in
Australia, p. 334, in which he criticises Dr. v. Lendenfeld's
arguments upon the same subject.

Mr. J. Douglas-Ogilby, Assistant Zoologist, Australian
Museum — Notes on some rare Port Jackson Fishes, viz., Plecfro-
ponia nigro-rubrum, Cuv. et Val., Callionymus calcaratus, Macl.,
Am,rnotretis Macleayi, and Exocoetus mehMOcercus, p. 119; New
Fishes from Port Jackson, viz., Petraites gen. nov., sp.,
heptoiolus, Platycfiphalus macrodon, Percis Novce Cambrue, and
Latris Ramsayi, p, 225. Neoanthias Guntheri, p. 231. A new
Dijolocrepis, from Port Jackson, p. 270. Three new Fishes from

864 PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS.

Port Jackson, viz., Scyllium anal.p, HeUastes immaculatus and
Penipheris lineatus, p. 445. Distribution of some Australian
Sharks and Rays, viz., Carcharias crenidens, Scyllhim anale, S.
onaculatum, Chiloscyllium ocellatum, Rliinohatus Bougainvillei,
R. Djeddensis, Tamiura Lymma, Pteroplatea Anstralis, and
Aetohatis Nannari, p. 463. On the Geiius Trachichthys, p. 580.
And, in conjunction with Mr. Ramsay, descriptions of new
or rare Australian Fishes, viz., Pteroplatea Australis, n. sp., Sebastes
scaber, n. sp., Platycepltalns arenarius, n. sp., and Cirrhitichthys
(jrajyUidoptHrus, and Lepldotrigla pleuracanthica, species pre-
viously known, p. 575. Two new Fishes from Port Jackson, Seriola
simjylex and Nannocampus ruber, p. 757, Coris rex, n. sp., p. 851.

N. de Miklouho-Maclay contributes a Second paper on the
Zoology of the Maclay Coast, New Cuiuea, containing a descrip-
tion of Macroims Tibol, n. sp., p. 141, pi. XIX. On two new
species of Dorcopsis, from N. Guinea, p. 145, pi. XX. On the
Brain of llalicore Australis, p. 193, pi. XXIV. Plants used by
natives of the Maclay Coast, cultivated and wild, with notes by
Baron F. v. Miiller, p. 346. Second Note on Macrodontisiii,
referring the apparent enlargement of the teeth to the accumu-
lation of a special kind of tartar, p. 682, pi, XLIX, The Keu of
the Maclay Coast, a sp. of Piper, closely allied to P. methysticum,
Kava or Ava, p. 687 ; and, as already mentioned, in conjunction
with Mr. Macleay, The Plagiostomata of the Pacitic, No. III.,
p. 673.

Mr. A. G. Hamilton contributes a paper on the Fertilisation of
(hodenia hederacea, in which, referring to Mr. Haviland's Notes
on Goodenia, Vol IX., p. 449, he gives his reasons for concluding
that the plant is self-fertilised, p. 157, pi. XXT. This conclusion
is controverted by Mr. Haviland in a subsequent paper, p. 237.

Mr. K. H. Bennett : Notes on the habits of Falco suhniger^
Glareola grallaria, p. 162. Remarks upon the destruction of
Eucaltjptm rostrata and E. mellidora by Phalangers ('Possums), p.
453.

president's address. 865

The Rev. J. jMilne Curran, F.G.S., gives an account of the
Geology of Dubbo, with special reference to the Mesozoic Car-
boniferous Beds. He regards the succession in the descending
scale as follows : — 1 Hawkesbury, 2 Clarence, 3 Ballinore, 4
Newcastle Upper Coal Measures, p. 170, pi. XXIT. XXTII.
Also, Notes on the Geology and Subterranean Water Supply of
the North-western Interior, p. 233, pi. XXV. ^ in which he deals
especially with the underground courses and waters of the
Macquarie River.

Baron von Mueller, K.C.M.G., ikc, &c., records the occurrence
of a remarkable Haloragis (H. monof^perma ) from New South
Wales, and gives a list of plants which have been recently traced
far to the South of their previously known range in New South
Wales, p. 197. He also contributes a short paper on Edible
Fruits from the Maclay Coast, N. Guinea, p. 35.5.

Mr. George Masters commences a new and complete Catalogue
of Australian Coleoptera. Part I., containing the Cicindelidce,
and Garahidce, p. 359 ; part IL, inchiding the Dytisci'Jce,
Gyrinidce, StcqiJiylinidci' , l-'aelaphidce Paussidce, Scydmoeniuos,
jSilphidce, Trichopterygldif, Scaphididce, Histeridca, Phalacrid(e,
Nitidulidce, Trogositidce, Colydidce, Rhysodidce, Cucujidce, Crypto-
phagida?^ L(dridiid(B, Mycetopliagidce, Dermestidw, Byrrhidce, Georys-
sidce, Partiidce, and Jfef.eroceridcH, 970 species, p. 583.

Mr. E. Haviland, F.L.S., discusses the Fertilisation of the Genus.
Goodenia, as has been already mentioned, p. 237, and continues,
his Notes on Plants Indigenous near Sydney, p. 458. In this
part. No. 9, he examines the pollination of Lyonsia reticulata
(Apocynaceae), and arrives at the conclusion that this plant is
closely self -fertilised.

Mr. E. P. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., &c.. Curator of the Australian
Museum, decribes Birds from Mount Astrolabe, New Guinea, p.
243, and a new species of Colluricincla, C. Boiveri, from Cairns,
Queensland, p. 244, and in conjunction with Mr. Douglas-Ogilby,
as mentioned before, several new species of fishes, pp. 575, 757,
851.

866 phesiuent's addrkss

Mr. Gervase F. Mathew, R.N., &c., contributes Notes on the
Natural History of the Clareniont Islands, p. 251, and An
Afternoon among the Butterflies of Thursday Island, p. •259.

Mr. E. Meyrick, B.A , F. E.S., continues his Descriptions of
Australian Microlepidoptera, p. 765.

The Eighteenth Yearly Volume of the Journal and Proceedings
of the Royal Society of New South Wales, for 1884, is the last
as yet published. From it we learn that the usual Address was
delivered at the commencement of the Session, May 7, 1884, by
the President, the late Professor Smith, C.M.G., M.L.C., Arc.

After a brief relation of the scientific labours of M. Pasteur,
then recently elected an Honorary Member of the Royal Society of
N.S.W., in the room of Charles Darwin, he passed to a description
of his recent visit to Europe, in which he gave a general account
of Dr. Dohrn's zoological station at Naples, of Vesuvius, and of
various European Universities, of electric lighting in England, of
apparatus acquired by him for the Sydney University, and at
greater length on the red sunsets and the eruption of Krakatoa,
which he did not consider to be the cause of these phenomena.

Mr. W. Shellshear, Assoc. M. Inst. C. read (June 4) a paper
on the Improvement of the Bar Harbours and River Entrances of
the Coast of N.S.W., illustrated by 6 maps, p. 25.

Dr. A. Leibius, M.A., F.C.S., read (July 2) a paper on (1) The
Gold of Mount Morgan, and improved methods of extraction
from its ferruginous matrix ; (2) The Preparation of Fine Gold ;
and (3) on the volatilisation of gold in the furnaces of the Sydney
Mint, p. 37.

Professor Liversidge, F.R.S., read on the same day a paper on
Native and Crystalline Gold ; Tourmaline from Uralla ; Scheelite
from Hillgrove ; Axinite, Idocrase, and Chrome Iron 'from
Nundle ; Concretion of Iron Pyrites from Sunny Corner, with
partings of silica, &c., &c. , p. 43.

The Rev. P. Macpherson, M.A., also on the same day, described
the Blackfellow's Ovens, or Kitchen Middings, near Meredith,
between Geelong and Ballarat, with speculations on their

president's address. 867

antiquity, and the density of the population which was in
occupation of that district at the time of their formation, p. 49.

Mr, Lawrence Hargrave (August 6) read a paper upon " The
Trochoided Plane," deiined as a flat surface, the centre of which
moves at _ uniform speed in a circle, the plane being normal
to the surface of a Trochoidal Wave, having a period equal to
one revolution of the said centre. In this arrangement he finds
the key to the flight of birds, and the consti'uction of flying
machines, p. 61.

Mr. H. C. Russell, B.A., F.R.A.S., describes (Nov. .5) anew
form of actinometer, depending on the conversion of water into
steam by solar heat, p. 73. Also (Dec. 17.), on a new self-
registering Anemometer and Pluviometer for the Sydney Obser-
vatory, p. 118.

Mr. D. A. Porter, of Tamworth, read a paper (November 5) on
Varieties and Localities in New South Wales of Quartz, Tour-
maline, Topaz, Corundum, Beryl, Diamond, Idocrase. Axinite,
and Wolfram, p. 75.

Mr. C. Moore, F.L.S., Director of the Botanic Garden, read
(December 3) Notes on the Genus Doryanthes (Giant Lily), with
an account of D. Excelsa, D. Palmeri and a new species D.
Larkini, p. 81,

Mr. W. K. Abbott, of Abbottsford, Wingen, contributes
(December 3) a long, elaborate, and highly interesting paper on
The Water Supply in the Interior, in which, among other matters,
he discusses the Geological Formation of the Plains, which he
ascribes to the ancient existence of Salt or Bitter Lakes, com-
parable to the Caspian, and explains the modes in which water
may be advantageously obtained or preserved in various districts,
p. 85.

Mr. W. H. Caldwell, M. A., Balfour-Student in the University,
and Fellow of Gonville and Caius' College, Cambridge, gave
(December 17) an extempore account of his work in ascertaining
the mode of development of the embryos of Marsupials,
Monotremes, and the Ceratodus. He gave a description of the

868 president's address.

Marsupial Ovum, of the Eggs, in the proper sense of the wordy
with large yolk, of the Monotremes, and of the quasi Amphibian
Structure and Embryology of Ceratodus, p. 117.

[Note. — By the kindness of Mr. Webb, Secretary to the Society,
I am enabled to add that during the session of 188.5, the reports,
of which are not yet pul)lished by authority, the Presidential
Address was delivered by Mr. H. C. Russell, B.A., F.R.A.S., (fee,
(S.M.II. May 7), who also wrote on Local Variations of the
Earth's Surface {S.M.H., July 2) ; and on a new form of
Anemometer (S.M H. December .3.) Mr. Hargraves continued
his Notes on Flying Machines (S.Jf.fT. June 4 and December 3).
]Mr. G. H. Knibbs discussed a system of accurate measurement,
by Steel Ribands (SJf.H., June i). The Rev. R Macpherson :
Some causes of the Decay of Australian Forests (S.M.II. August
6). and Stone Implements of Aborigines (S.M.II. November 6)
Mr. J. P. Josephson — Floods in the Hawkesbury (B T.,
September 4). A paper on the Ringal of N.W. Himalaya was
communicated by Baron von Miiller (S.3f.II., October 8). Notes
on Mounting for the Microscope, by Dr. Morris (S.M.II., Novem-
ber .5). On the Adeiong Reefs, by S. H. Cox, F.C.S., etc.
(S.M.R., November 6)]

The last Yearly Volume of the Royal Society of Tasmania
contains, among other interesting matter, a series of papei-s" by
Mr. R. M. Johnston, F.L.S., &c. (pp. 199, 220, 232, 233), and
Professor Tate, F.G.8., F.L.S., (fee, at greater length (pp. 207, 226)
upon the Fossils of the supposed Miocene Beds of Table Cape,
which demonstrate their Eocene character, and indicate in some
instances even more remote relations. Mr. Johnston also writes,
p. 219, on a new sp. of Vitrina, from Geilston ; and on Entomos-
traca, including new species of Cypris, from the same place. Also,
p. 231, on a new sp. of Odax ; and, p. 252, on six Fishes new to
Tasmania, Olifjorus ffigas, Erythrichthys nitidus, Latris ciliaris,
Centriscus sco/opax, Cossyphus iinimaculatus, and Labrichtltys
3rorto7ii, n. sp. Also, p. 233, on two sipecies oi IIymenoj)hylluni,
new to Tasmania ; and, p. 225, on a Lejndostrobus cone from
Campania, Tasm. Professor Tate has also a paper on " The

president's address. 869

Conmiunity of species of Aquatic Pulinonate Mollusca between
Australia and Tasmania, p. 214. Baron von Mueller, K.C.M.G ,
communicates a note on von Ettingshausen's observations upon
the Tertiary Flora of Australia, p. 203, and a census of the Flora
of Deal Island, Kent's Group, p. 282. Mr. T. Stephens, F.G S.,
etc., contributes a note upon the operations of Boring for Coal
then (June, 1884) in progress at Tarleton on the Mersey, and
near the Cascades Brewery at Hobart, and expresses his doubts
as to a successful result. And Mr. Morton, Curator of the
Royal Society's Museum, gives an account of the appearance of
Oestrus ovis in Tasmania.

Volume XXI of the Royal Society of Victoria (for 1884)
contains, besides the address of the President, Mr. R. J. Ellery,
F.R.S., F.R.A.S., papers as follows :—

By Mr. G. S. Griffiths (p. 1) On the evidences of a Glacial Epoch
in Victoria during Post Miocene times. In this paper the author
dwells principally upon the phenomena of the Boulder drifts and
Alluvium of the country, and argues that the theory of Dr. Croll
ofters a satisfactory, and indeed the only, explanation both of the
Glacial Epoch, and of the great oscillations of sea level which are
evidenced by the large Tertiary marine formations of Southern
Australia. An interpretation of the Triple series of Victorian
Golddrifts in accordance with these views closes the paper.

By Mr. James Stirling, F.L.S., Omeo (p. 29), a continuation of
his review of the Phanerogamia of the Mitta Mitta source basin,
with a list of all its known flowering plants and their localities.
Also (p. 123) Notes on the Meteorology of the Australian Alps,
with some observations as to their former glaciation, in reference
to the paper by Mr. Griffiths, mentioned above.

By Mr. W. Culcheth, M. Inst. C.E., F.R. Met. Soc. On the
Shingle deposits of New Zealand, with special reference to the
movement of shingle under wave action, and the resulting
phenomena, p. 52.

By Mr. J. Lockhart Morton, on Artiticial Cooling of Hospitals,
itc, p. SQ.

870 president's. ADDRESS.

By Mr. G. H. Ridge, giving an account of the Krakatoa
eruption, as witnessed by Captain Gibbs of the American Barque
W. H. Besse, p. 39.

By Mr. P. H. MacGillivray, M.R.C.S., F.L.S , Continuation of
Papers on new or little known Polyzoa, of the families Bicellaridcc,
Catemcellidoi, CeUeporidce, Cellular idee, Disco porellidce, Flusiridce,
(j'e/ti-ellaridce, MembraniporidiB, Myriozoidce, Salicornaridce, and
TuhuliporidcB. Part VII., p. 92. Part VIII., p. 106. Also (p.
120) Note on the reproduction of the Ornithorliynchus, describing
ova both attached and free in the uterus, and other matters of
interest.

By Mr. A. W. Howitt, F.G.S. Supplementary Notes on the
Diabase Rocks of the Buchan district, p. 101.

The Seventeenth Volume of the Transactions and Proceedings
of the New Zealand Institute (1884) contains, besides the
Anniversary Address l)y the President, Sir W. F. D. Jervois,
G.C.M.G., C.B., &c., the following papers : —

By T. J. Parker, B.Sc. Lond., Professor of Biology, Otago
Univ., on a Specimen of Balirnoptera nmscnlus, stranded near
the Wainiea River, p. 3.

By W. M. Maskell, F.R.M.S., on an Aphid, Chermes (Aniso-
2ohlfiba) ]nni, infesting pine trees. The name Kermaphis is
suggested as preferable to Chermes, p- 13 ; on Ixodes eudyjytidis,
n. sp. parasitic upon the Penguin, p. 19 ; on Coccidfe in N.Z.,
with descriptions of new species, p. 20.

By A. T. Urquhart, on the Spiders of N.Z., Epeiridse,
Thlaosomides, Theridiidfe, Thomisidye, SalticidfB, Lycosidte, p. 31.

By Prof. F. W. Hutton, on the Limneid^ of N.Z. p. 54.

By T. W. Kirk, on Argonauta gracilis, n. sp., p. .58 ; and on
Variations in the Colouring of some N.Z Birds, p. 60.

By E. Meyrick, B.A., Supplement to Monograph on N.Z.
Geometrina, p. 62 ; and on N.Z. Microlepidoptera, p. 68.

By W. Colenso, F.L.S., on Some new N.Z. Insects, belonging
to Bacillus, Deinacrida, Myrmeleon, Rhyssa, Lissonota, p. 157.

By W. Arthur, C.E., on some N.Z. Fishes, with n.sp. of Zeus
and Leptoscopus, p. 160.

president's address. 871

By Frederick Chapman, on Moa Keniaiiis in tlie Mackenzie
Country. This paper gives a lively account of the appearance
of Moa skeletons scattered about on the surface and more or less
decomposed, but in situ, and each with the monumental pile of
Gizzard stones, which in many cases has outlasted the coiiiplete
disappearance of the bird whose existence it commemorates,
p. 172.

By U. B. Martin, Objections to the Introduction of Beasts of
Prey to destroy the Rabbit, p. 179.

By D. J. Hudson, showing that the hypothesis of spontaneous
generation is unsupported by experiment, p. 182,

By A. Reischell, Notes on the Ornithology of Dusky Sound,
N.Z., communicated by Dr. Hector, p. 187.

James Park, Description of Octojnis, sp. nov., p. 198.

By John Meeson, B.A., The Plague of Rats in Nelson and
Marlborough. These rats, which were almost entirely males, are
considered by the author to be of the species Kiore Maori (^Mus
Maornim Hutton), p. 199.

By James Hector, C.M.G., M.D., F.R.S. Revision of the
Delphinid;e of the N.Z. Seas, p. 207.

Botany.

By T. Kirk, F.L.S., on the Flowering Plants of Stewart
Island, p. 214. On the Ferns and Fern allies of the same, p. 228.
On Aralia lyallil, n. sp., p. 293. On N. Z. Beeches, p. 297.

By T. F. Cheeseman, F.L.S., Curator of the Auckland Museum,
on new species of Ranunculus and Mynsotis.

By W. Colenso, F.L.S., New species of Ranunculus, Hoheria,
Hydrocotyle, Panax, Loranthus, Alseuosmia, Olearia, Gna'plialium,
Gnitiola, Ourisia, Fagus, Microtis, Caladenia, Tlielyinitra,
Callixene, Astelia, Juncus, Uncinia, Carex, Hymenopliyllum, and
several of the lower cryptogams, p. 237. Also list of Fungi lately
discovered in N. Z., p. 265.

S72

PRESIDENT S ADDRESS.

By D. Petrie, M.A., new sp. of Coprosyna and Lepidlum,
p. 269, of Uncinia, p. 271. Carmichce/ia, p. 272.

By J. Adams, B. A., The Botany of Te Aroha Mountain, p. 275.
By J. Buchanan, F.L.S., new sp. of Erigpron.

CtEOLOGY.

Captain F. W. Hutton, F.G.S.. discusses the age of the
Orakei Bay Beds, which he refers to the Pareora system p. 307.
The same author describes 79 new species of Tertiary shells,
p. 313. Professor Julius von Haast, C.M.G., &c., criticizes the views
of the Geological Survey of N.Z. with respect to the age and
arrangement of the rocks forming the Southern Alps in Canterbury
and Westland, p. 332 ; and is answered (p. 337) by Dr. Hector,
Director of the Survey, who, in the course of his argument, states
that the Mount Potts and the Clent Hills beds form almost the
lowest and the highest members of a great Permio-jurassic system,
the sequence of which has been very clearly worked out in other
parts of New Zealand. The Permian base of this system has
never been found resting with any approach to conformity on the
Maitai series, which is Lower Carboniferous, the Upper Car-
boniferous or the Lower Coal measures of N.S.W. being still
undiscovered in N.Z.

The Red Sunsets have been discussed in two papers by John
Meeson, B.A., p. 3.57 ; and William Ringwood, p. 386, who both,
after a careful summing up of such evidence as is obtainable, agree
that the approximate cause was the presence of Volcanic dust in
very high regions of the atmosphere, and that this was mainly,
if nob altogether, derived from the eruption of Krakatoa.

The New Zealand Journal of Science, which has just died of
inanition to the regret of a loyal but insufficient proportion of
paying subscribers, closes with a somewhat bitter but humourous
farewell to its supporters under the heading " Moriturus te
Salutat " in explanation of the causes which led to the premature
decease of this promising journal, at the age of two volumes, or
four years.

president's address. 873

The Seventh Annual Volume of the Royal Society of South
Australia contains Papers and Notes as follows : —

By James Stirling, F.L.S., Cor. Member, on a Geological
Sketch Section through the Australian Alps, from Dargo to
Mount Pilot, p. 1, pi. I-II.

By W, f?amuel Dixon, in a letter to Prof. Tate, expressing his
conviction that no coal beds exist upon the Fitzgerald River, the
sandstones of which are probably contemporaneous with the
Murray Cliffs, p. 9.

By E. Meyrick, B.A., a List of South Australian Microle
pidoptera, with localities of each, p. 10.

By Clement L. Wragge, F.R.G.S., F.R. Met. Soc, p. 17 ; and
by W. A. Jones, p. 56, on The Red Sunsets, which are ascribed to
Dust by the first, to Vapour by the second.

By Professor R. Tate, F.G.S., F.L.S., &c., A Remarkable and
Valuable Paper on the Basin of the Lower Murray, containing
.(1) Historical and Bibliographical Introduction; (2) Physical
Features of the Murray Plateau ; (3) The Floods of the Murray,
Proposals for Improvement of its Course, and on the Quality of
the Water ; (4) The alluvium or River Flats ; (5) Origin of the
Gorge (Murray Cliffs) ; (6) Sections ; and (7) Palaeontology of
the Older Tertiary or Murravian ; (8) Sections of the Newer
Tertiary ; (9) Leading Botanical Features. Also, Descriptions
• of New Species of South Australian Plants, p. 67 ; Additions to
the Flora of Extra-Tropical South Australia, p. 72 ; and
Botanical Notes, p. 74, pi. III.

By J. G. O. Tepper, F.L S., Corr. Member, on Two rare (new?)
Insects (described but not named), pp. 47-48, pi. Ill- A. ; and on
the Plants of Kangaroo Island, p. 50.

The First Volume of Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Queensland, for 1884, contains the Inaugural Address, by the Hon.
A. C. Gregory, CM G., F.R.G.S., &c., and a paper on the
Mount Moi'gan Deposits, p. 141, by the same author, and the
following papers of general interest —

874 president's address.

By F. M. Bailey, F.L.S., Government Botanist, Contributions
to the Queensland Flora, being supplements I. II. and III. to
the Synopsis, pp. 8, 84, 148, p\. I; and a contribution towards a
Flora of Mount Perry, p. Gl.

By E. Palmer, M.L.A., Hot Springs and Mud Eruptions on
the Lower Flinders Biver, p. 19, pi. II.

By C. W. De Vis, M. A., on the Occurrence of the Moa in Aus-
tralia, p. 23, pi. III-l V ; on Geratodus Fosleri in the Condamine
postpliocene, p. 40 ; on New Fishes belonging to Tlierajwn, p. 56 ;
Serranus, Genyoroge, Letlirinus, Cossyphus, Salarias, and Choerops,
p. 144 ; on a New Jlyla, p. 128 ; on New Lizards of the Genera
Silubosaurus, Oedura, Amphibolurii>f, p. 53 ; Myophila n.rj.
Lygisaurus n.y. Macrops n.g., p. 77, and Heteropus, p. 166 ; on
n. sp. of Hojiloceplialus (pp. 100, 136, pi. XV.) of Rldjndura.,
Microsca, Mtlitlireptus, Oedura (p, 158), of lLalmaturu» (p. 107),
and OnyclLogalea, p. 157.

By J. Falconet', C.E., on Springs, with particular leference to
the water supply in Queensland, p. 28, pi. V-X ; and on the
Queensland Gold Deposits, p. 131.

By H. F. Wallman, on Mineral Pseudomor^jhisni, p. 32.

By Mr. Jaines Thorpe, on the Bowen Cyclone, January 30,
1884, p. 35, pi. X.

By Henry Tryon, on Certain Aboriginal Rock Drawings which
he considers as Totems, p. 45, jdI. XL ; and communication on
the Savo Megapode, from A. H. Kissack, Esq., p. 181.

By the Rev. E. Spicer, M.A., on an Ant which produces
audible Sounds.

By Kendal Broad) tent, on the Migration of Birds at Capg
York, p. 93.

By Mr. J. Bancroft, Esq., ]\I.D., on the Food of the Aborigines
of Central Australia (chiefly Nardoo, Grass Seed, Purslane Seed,
Sundry Bulbs), p. 104. '^Ou Indian "Wheats in Queensland,
p. 176.

president's address. 875

By Baron F. von Mueller, K.C.M.G., tfcc, on Dendrohium
cincinnahcm, sp. n.

By Charles Knight, F.R.C.S., F.L.S., Wellington, KZ., on a
new Species of Parmelia from Mount Kosciusko, p. 114, pi, XVI.

By A. J. Dufiield, Esq., Ethnological Notes on New Ireland
and its Archipelago, p. 115, pi XVII.

By L. A. Bernays, Esq., F.L.S., Exotic Fruits new to Queens-
land, p. 136.

By James Pink, Esq., F.R.H.S., A Plea for the Practice of
Hybridisation in Plants, p. 161.

The principal work in Botanical Science, outside the Societies,
has been as follows — ^The Eucalyptographia of Baron v. Mueller,
of which two volumes are now complete, furnishes descriptions of
a hundred well-defined species of Eucalyptus, and though some
fifty more remain for investigation, it is not probable that they
will present any marked instances of deviation from the types
already recoi'ded. Improved, however, as the classification of this
extensive and puzzling genus already is, some still more natural
system, based on carpologic considerations is regarded by the
author as both desirable and within reach. It is evident that the
grouping of species according to the shape and opening of the
anthers may lead sometimes to very erroneous conclusions. Mr.
J. E. Brown, F.L.S., in his splendid work on " the Forest Flora
of South Australia " aftbrds two illustrations of this remark. His
tig-ure oi Eucalyptus paniculata Smith, is made to represent a small
White Gum, of little value, in South Australia, and also the lofty
White Ironbark of N.S.W., the toughest and most durable of all
Ironbarks. Again, E. leucoxylon, of which three figures are given
with white, and one with red flowers, includes a Blue or White
Gum of S. Australia and Victoria, as well as our Red-flowered
Ironbark, remarkable for the dark colour of its timber and deep
corrugations of its bark. This tree is probably Cunningham's
E. sideroxylon, and no one who has seen the two trees growing in
their native forests can suppose that they are identical, or even
nearly allied. It is therefore much to be hoped that Baron von
57

876 president's address.

Mueller will work out, with his accustomed energy, the more
promising classification which he suggests, based on the characters
of the fruit. No one else has qualifications comparable to his for
this difficult and important task.

The same author has also largely increased the number of species
catalogued in his Census of Avistralian Plants, so that they now
amount to nearly 9,000, The number of species now recorded for
New South Wales, exclusive of the lower Cryptogams, is 3,154 ;
of which many are also common to Queensland, and many to
Victoria.

He has also published during the last year another number of
his " Descriptive Notes on Papuan Plants." There are about
1000 now recorded. "Of these the writings of Blume, Miguel,
and Schiller gave about 380 ; Beccaris ' Malasia' added to them
about 140, largely new to science ; the 'Papuan Plants' up to
date made additions to the extent of about 420, mostly known
from India and Australia before (including 34 evasculares) ;
De Candolle's ' Monographia ' and some other recent works give

about 60 more From these and other data we

are justified to conclude already that the Botanic (though far less
Zoologic) features of the Papuan lowlands are mainly Malayan
. whilst the known presence of Araucaria and Epacridce
in temperate altitudes vindicate already for the upland Flora of
New Guinea to some extent an Australian character, whilst the
vegetation of the North-east portion of the Australian Continent
is largely Malayan also." One may hope that the collections of
the Geographical Society's Expedition, which are now in Baron
von Mueller's hands, will still further enlarge our knowledge of
this interesting borderland between two floras so distinct as those
of Australia and South-eastern Asia.

To Mr. R. D. Fitzgerald, F.L.S., we are indebted for another
instalment (Vol. II., Part 2) of his great work on Australian
Orchids. It shows no falling away from the high standard of
the preceding numbers, and has a kind of accidental interest from
the fact that it contains the figures and descriptions of the
smallest and the largest of Australian Orchids. Bulbopliylhim

president's address. 877

minutisi<iinuni Miiller, a plant so small that it might escape the
notice of the casual observer, was found by Archdeacon King in
1849, and cultivated by the late "William Sharpe Macleay in the
garden within whose boundaries we are now assembled. It is
one of our rarest orchids, and yet was once grown here in the
midst of the city. Galeola Ledgerii Mueller, on the other hand,
is the largest, found only in the dense cedar scrubs of the
Eastern Coast. It is a climber, attaining a height of 30 feet,
and a spike of its flowers has been found to measure six feet in
length and three in breadth. Cryptostylis ovata, now peculiar
to West Australia, may possibly be a form of C. longifclia,
modified by long separation, as there are no orchids in N. and
N.W. Australia. Mr. Fitzgerald's observations on the Fertilisa-
tion, Variation, and Distribution of species are as interesting as
his illustrations are beautiful.

Mr. J. E. Brown's Forest Flora of South Australia, referred to
above, is still progressing ; and Mr. F. M. Bailey, F.L.S., author
of the Synopsis of the Queensland Flora is adding supplements to
that work from time to time.

The Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L.S., etc., has lately published a
small hand-book to " The Plants of New South Wales," pp. 122.
The nomenclature and arrangement are adopted from the Census of
Baron v. Mueller, but a preliminary essay, and the notes and
observation-s, which are both instructive and intei*esting, are
original. It is far the best book that we have upon the subject ;
and, although only intended to supply a temporary want, is
likely to become and to remain a popular guide to the Botany
of New South Wales.

I am not aware that anything of note has occurred in Zoological
matters outside the Societies in Australia, with the one important
exception of Mr. Caldwell's investigations, a short abstract of
which was given by himself before the Royal Society, N.S. W.
(See above, p. 867.) Further information and details we shall
receive in due course. I suppose all of us have heard, and heard
with regret, of the illness which temporarily incapacitated that
brilliant and vigorous student in the pursuit of his chosen object,

0/0 PRESIDENTS ADDRESS.

and I feel it a happy privilege to be warranted to state before
this meeting tliat he is now, by the last advices, rapidly recovering
his natural health and energy.

In Geology there is in like manner little to report outside of
the Societies. But I may mention that the exploration of the
Wellington Caves, including several newly- discovered ramifica-
tions, has been continued during the past year by the Australian
Museum, with funds provided by Parliament, and that among the
fossils collected are^ as determined by Professor Owen, bones of a
new species of Thylacoleo, of Phascolomi/s curvirostris, n. sp. and
Falorchestes Rephaim, n. sp.

A new step has also been taken by the Department of Mines,
which will be hailed with enthusiasm by all who have or desire
to have any knowledge of Australian Geology and Palaeontology.
The labours of von Ettingshausen on the Tertiary Flora, those of
De Koninck on the Palasozoic Fauna, and, generally, the most
valuable and standard books on Australian Palaeontology, are at
the present time, as I am given to understand, in preparation for
the Australian reader, who hitherto has had small opportunity of
access to these treasures. The Government has arranged for the
translation of the Text, which will be printed and published here,
and for the reproduction of the Plates, which is to be effected in
England, or at any rate in Europe, under the supervision of the
original authorities. Some of these plates indeed — as for example
those which illustrate von Ettingshausen's Tertiary Flora — are
already printed, and, I believe, in the colony.

May T be allowed in conclusion to offer a few remarks, of
(juite private interpretation, upon a subject which must interest
not only all Scientific enquirers, l)ut also all who are capable
of rational freedom, and are yet not at all disposed to
dance in the Freethought Carmagnole. A few weeks ago I
read, with astonishment and dismay, an article by Mr.
Gladstone upon the "Geology of Genesis." It was published
in the Ninctcentlh Century of November, under the title " Dawn
of Creation and of Worship," and was professedly a polemical
discussion of M. Reveille's "Prolegomenes de I'histoire des

president's address. 879

Religions." The sense of astonishment was perhaps unreason-
able. I must acknowledge that by this time oue ought to have
outgrown any possibility of having that feeling aroused by any
new posture of that ingenious, versatile and eccentric orator.
But the dismay which I felt had a better foundation. There
has been for at least the last thirty years in the liberal, learned
and intellectual society of which Mr. Gladstone has been one of
the conspicuous ornaments, a general, if tacit, consent to
discountenance, or to ignore, the futile attempts either to
overthrow the precise conclusions of Science in order to protect
Religion from an imaginary peril, or to force human knowledge
and revelation into a Procrustean conformity, as if they were
moulded upon the same type and had to be reduced to an identical
measurement. For the Scientific, as such, have no enmity except
to false Science ; the Religious, none except to false Religion.
And experience had shown so fully to the enlightened society in
which Mr. Gladstone lives, the mischief which arises from the
provocation of a quarrel which no natural hostility underlies,
that the oppositions and accommodations of mischiefmakers
between Genesis and Geology, had been hushed and almost
forgotten, when all at once the most conspicuous person in
Britain, almost in Europe, steps out into the field in paste-
board armour as a fresh champion in the name of Procrustes.
Now T think that both sides must acknowledge, under these
circumstances, some feeling of dismay. Mr. Gladstone has learnt
little from all that experience. He evidently supposes that
ascertained facts may, by the exercise of sufficient ingenuity,
be twisted into contradiction with themselves, or that the writer
of the first chapter of Genesis was a Geologist by revelation.
Such ways of thought may well excite ridicule, although they
deserve an indignant repudiation. Now in the December
number of the Nineteenth Century, with some sui'prise, I
saw that Huxley had donned his armour too, and had come out
into the field against Gladstone. It must have been the fame of
the champion and not ^his challenge or his cause that brought
Huxley to the front. For the arguments against which he had

880 president's address.

to contend are lower tlian childish. How can you seriously dea.
with an antagonist who divides animals into poetical or senti-
mental alliances, as air population, water population, and earth
population 1

And this brings me to two points of some importance to us all.
First : The absolute necessity of getting rid of sentimentality
and nebulosity of language in scientific subjects. In Science,
precise definition is the only virtue of language. However
elegant the phrase, if it be ambiguous, or even obscure, it is
mischievous, and that in proportion to its elegance. The second
point — which, like the first, is patent enough — is, that men may
live habitually in the society of scientific and accurate thinkers,
may acquire all the phraseology and cram of science, which is
generally called knowledge, may be able to discourse leaniedly
upon scientific subjects, and even to prosecute particular lines of
inquiry with success, without ever having gained the Scientific
spirit, or even formed a true conception of the Logic of
Philosophy.

On the motion of the Hon. P. G. King, M.L.C, a unanimous
vote of thanks was accorded to the President for his valuable
Address.

The Treasurer, the Hon. J. Norton, M.L.C, reported on the
financial condition of the Society, showing a credit balance of
£140 Os. 8d.

On the motion of Dr. Cox, a vote of thanks was carried by
acclamation to the Hon. W. Macleay, M.L.C, F.L.S., &c , in
recognition of his eminent services to the Society, and with
especial reference to his munificent donation of the Hall in which
the meeting was held.

The President reported that Dr. von Lendenfeld had made the
Society a donation of a painting in oils, with key, representing a
number of new Sponges and Medusge which he had examined and

OFFICK-BEAKERS. 881

described in the Proceedings of the Society, The thanks of the
meeting were conveyed by the President to the donor, who made
a suitable response.

OFFICE-BEARERS AND COUNCIL FOR 1886.

President:
Professor W. J. Stephens, M.A., F.G.S.

Vice-Presidents:

Rev. J. E. Tenison- Woods, F.L.S., F.G.S.
Dr. James C. Cox, F.L.S., &c.
C. S. Wilkinson, F.L.S., F.G.S.

Honorary Secretaries:

Hon. William Macleay, F.L.S.
E. P. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., &c.

Honorary Treasurer:
Hon. James Norton, M.L.C.

Director and Librarian:
J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc.

Council:

John Brazier, C.M.Z.S. Edward Haviland, F.L.S.

Dr. Thomas Dixson. Hon. P. G. King, M.L.C

J. G. Griffin, C.E., &c. E. Meyrick, B.A,. F.E.S

W. A. HASWELL,M.A.,B.Sc.,cfec. P. R. Pedley, Esq.
H, R. Whittell, Esq.

INDEX TO VOL. X.

PAGE

r.\GB

Abacetus ...

422

A iiomotanis

.. 371

Abax

437

Anonyx Edwardsii ...

98

Abr;eus ...

650

Anthias Richardsoni

.. 232

Abronia augusta ...

353

Anthreiius

.. 669

Acritiis

649

Antimerus

.. 610

Acrogenys

368

Antiporus

.. 588

Actinopteryx

645

Aochleta psychra ...

.. 773

Acupalpus...

421

Aphrodite nardorus

.. 306

Auylophonis

608

Aplysilla violacea ...

.. 153

Adelotopiis

'380-383

Aplysina las vis

.. 153

Adotela

411

purpurea ...

.. 153

^igialophilus ruficapillus

255

Apobletes...

.. 646

^]nigma ...
Aetobatis narinari ...

366

A|iotomus

.. 383

466

Arcella vulgaris

.. 724

Aglaoplienia raniosa

479

Areca catechu

.. 350

Agonochila

375

376

Argutor ...

.. 439

Aleochara ...

602

Arthropterus

638-641

A lepas parasita

279

Aiticeros

636, 637

AUorchestes australis

96

Artocarpus incisa ...

.. 348

crassicornis

95

integrifolia

.. 348

Gaimardii

96

Asana

71

longicornis

95

Aspidophoreia

97

niger

96

Astrolonia humifusum

.. 456

rupicola

95

Attagenus defectus

72

Amblygnathus

413

Atylus homochir ...

.. 101

Aniblyopiims

607

Aulena flabellum ...

.. 318

Andjlypodia centaurus

265

nigra

.. 319

Amblytelus

423

villosa

.. 309

Ammotretis Macleayi

124

Badister...

.. 408

Amceba parasitica ...

35

Bajalus laxus

5

viUosa

723

Barringtonia sp. ...

.. 349

Ainpelisca australis

97

Bassia cocco

349, 357

Ainphichroum

624,

625

Maclayana ...

349, 357

Aniphicrossus

..

655

Bati'isus

631 , 640

Anasis

364

Belonuchus

.. 612

Anatrichis

406

Bembidium

442-444

Ancistria retusa ...

206

661

Berosus ...

.. 601

Ancyrona ... 657,

709

710

Bessaphilus cephalotes

207, 662

Ancyrona segra

700

711

Bidessus ...

584, 585

arnica

700

713

Bizenia

.. 670

Gestroi ...

700

712

Blastopolypinfe

.. 478

latebrosa

700

712

Bledius

.. 622

laticeps 700, 710,

711

712

Boehmeria nivea

.. 353

vesca ... 700,

713

714

Boidse

66

Anisodactylus

415

416

Bolitochara

.. 602

u.

INDEX.

PAGE

AOB

Boltenia australis ...

553

Chalinopsis imitatus

.. 569

Bonellia viridis

...

331

Chalinula Coxii

.. 3-27

Boronia pinnata

457

Charudrias orientalis

.. 254

Bothrideres

'650

660

Clielodina longicoUis

.. 332

Brachida

605

606

Chiloscyllium ocellatum

464

Brachypeplus

651

Chlainioidius

.. 4.36

Brachypterus

650

Chhenius ...

.. 405

Branchiostoma bassannm

695

Chlamydopsis

.. 648

Brithy sternum

412

Choleva

.. 644

Brontes australis . . .

'219

664

Chondrilla australiensis

17

denticulatus

219.

664

corticata

18

liicius

219

664

nucula ...

.. 152

Macleayi . . .

218

664

papillata

17

niilitaris ...

220

664

secunda...

15

Bruchigavia Jamesonii

var.

Chondrosia Ramsayi

11

Gouldi ...

256

Chondrosidffi

10

Bryaxis

"631-635

Chostonectes

587, 588

Bulla australis

89

Chrysophanus cyprottis

716, 717

BuUina liueata

92

Cilea

.. 606

Byrrhidae

669

Cincindela...

360, 361

By thinus

635

Cincindelida?

.. 359

Cacospongia exemplum

307

Cinnamomum sintoc

.. 351

gracilis

155

Circopes ...

.. 654

Cafius

'en

612

Cirrhiticlithys aprinus

.. 575

Caladium esculentuni

347

Citrus sp. ..

.. 349

Calamus, sp,

353

Clathurella Sinclairii

.. 118

Callionymus calcaratus

121

Clivina

402, 403

Calodera

603

604

Olupea sagax

.. 343

Calophyllum inophyllum

353

Cnecosa ...

.. 666

Calosoma ...

362

Cocos nucif era

.. 347

Campanulinidns

480

Collyriocincla Boweri

.. 244

Camptodes bifascies

71

Colpodes ...

.. 441

Canarium commune

349

Colydidaj ...

.. 6.57

gutur

"353

357

Colymbetes

.. 592

Caprodon Schlegelii

232

Coninomus

.. 667

Carabidas

362

Conopterum

.. 385

Carcharias crenidens

464

Conurus ...

.. 607

Carenidium

386

Convolvulus erubescens

.. 457

Carenum

'388

395

Copelatus ...

592, 593

Carpophilus

651

6.52

Coptocarpus

.. 406

Carteriospongia caliciformis. . .

155

Coptoglossus

.. 376

Casnonia ...

364

Cordylophora

.. 854

Catadromus

424

Coris rex ...

.. 851

Catascopus

'376

377

Coronocanthus

.. 4.38

chalydicus

470

Correa oxytelina ...

.. 6U2

Cebia

6.: 7

speciosa

.. 462

Celauida

385

Corticaria ...

.. 666

Celina

592

Cratogaster

.. 427

Ceneus

436

Cremnogenes aphrontis

.. 792

Cercyon ...

601

epichalca

.. 793

Cerotalis ...

412

oxyina

.. 793

Ch;etorhynchus papuana

244

Creophilus

610, 611

Chalinopsis dichotoma

570

Cristiceps fasciatus...

.. 226

Crossophora asyneta

795

niphadia

795

cenopa...

796

phthorodoxa

794

semiota

797

thetias

796

Cryptamorpha Desjardinsii

220

665

optata

221

665

triguttata

221

660

Cryptandra amara ...

461

Cryptarcha

653

Cryptobium

617

Cryptommatus Jansoni

449

Cryptophagida3

666

Cryptorrhopalum ...

668

Ctenistes ...

626

Ctenodax Wilkinsoni

719

Cucujidai ... ... 71

203

661

Cucujus colonarius ...

207

,662

incommodus

71

Curculioiiellus

630

Cyathiger...

635

Cybister ...

594

Cychramptodes

654

Cychramus

655

Cyclonotum

601

Cyclothorax

422

Cymba monilata ...

■700

702

Cymindis ...

369

Cyrtoderus

438

Cyrtophium dentatum

107

minutum

109

parasiticum

...

108

Dactylochalina australis

726

cylinddca

570

reticulata

571

Danais affinis

264

Daphnella lymneiformis

118

Darodilia ...

413

Darwinella australiensis

153

Dastarcus...

660

Delinius ...

424

Demetrias ...

371

Demigretta Greyi . . .

255

jugularis

255

Dendrilla cavernosa

557

rosea

152

Dendrocellus

365

Deiidrophagus australis

'2 18

, 664

Deretaphrus

658

,659

Dermestes...

667

, 668

Dermestidie

72

,667

Dexamine Miersii ...

102

Dexiocerella deiitata
hevis ...
lobata
Diabaticus

Diadoxus erythrurus
Diaphoromerua
Dicax

Dicrochile...
Dietta

Dittiugia pyriformis
Diueutes ...
Dinopsis ...
Diochus ...
Diphobia f amiliaris . . .
Diplocoelus
Diplocotes foveicoUis
Diplocrepis costatus
Discobatis marginipinnis
Disselia aleurota
Distypsidera
Ditoma

Doleschallia bisaltidse
Dolicaon ...
Dolium variegatum . . .
Doinene
Dorcopsis Becarrii ...

Macleayi
Drillia amcena

bulbacea

gypsata

Iffivis

maorum

Neo-Zelanica

protensa ...

ula ...
Drimastoma
Uromius ...

Di-ypfca

Durbos
Dyschirius

Dysidea chaliniformis
f ragilis
hirciniformis
Kirkii
Dysticidaj ...
Eccoptogenius
EcFiinopyxis australis
Ectinochila
Ectrephes formicarum
Egolia

Egolia variegata
Eleusis
Elmis

PAGE

109

111

110

"

371

721

416-419

617

'439

440

_,

644

724

598

599

606

614

838

667

839

270

676

677

799

361

362

657

264

616

696

618

146

149

116

116

117

117

116

117

...

117

117

423

372

365

630

...

401

154

154

154

154

583

...

424

724

376

833

655

■700

, 701

...

625

671

1>.\GK

PAGE

Elythoitierus

.. 672

Gnathaphamis

414, 415

Enasiba tristis

.. 839

Gnathoncus

.. 650

Encliocrates picrophylla

. . 827

Gnathosyllis zonata

.. 746

Enhydrus ...

.. 597

Gnathoxys

.. 400

Eochris tritoxantha. . .

.. 828

Gnetum, sp.

.. 353

Epacris impressa ...

.. 45B

Gnypeta ...

.. 604

microphylla

.. 455

Gonatocerus

.. 628

purpurascens

.. 455

Goodenia hederacea

157, 237

Epinosmus

.. 404

heterophylla

.. 4.58

Epierus ...

.. 648

ovata

157, 237

Eretes

.. 596

Gorgonia rosacea . . .

.. 241

Eriostemon obovalis

.. 456

Gymnobathra calliploca

.. 777

Eucalyptocola

.. 376

coarctatella

.. 776

Eiulaiia ...

364, 365

flavidella

777

Eulalia quadrocula . . .

.. 748

hamatella

. 778

Eulebia ...

.. 372

hyetodes

.. 778

Euplectus ...

635, 6.36

parca

777

Eury medusa picta ...

.. 733

philadelpha

.. 778

Euryscaphua

.. .397

sarcoxantha

776

Eurystomis

.. 436

tholodella

777

Eusii'us affinis

101

Gyrinida3 ...

.. 597

dubius

.. 100

(iyrinus ...

.. 598

Euspoiigia Bailyi ...

.. 535

Gyrophajna

.. 605

caiialiculata

502

H^matopus longirostris

.. 254

compacta

.. .527

Halicore australis ...

.. 193

conifera

.. 500

Haliplus...

.. 583

foliacea

.. 544

Halisarca australiensis

.. 151

galea ...

.. 543

Halisarcidaj

4

in'Bgularis

.. 485

Halla australis

.. 752

levis

.. 536

Halme gigantea

.. 848

Mathewsi

.. 520

globosa
laxa

.. 303

officinalis

.. 528

.. 845

parvula

.. 539

micropora ...

.. 304

repeiis ...

.. 524

nidus vesparum

.. 288

reticulata

.. 541

simplex

.. 301

septosa ...

.. 519

tingens

.. 568

cilicata

.. 545

Halmopsis australis

.. 320

Eutoma ...

386-388

Haloragis monosperma

197

Exocoetus melanocercus

.. 123

Haplaner

.. 416

Falco subniger

.. 162

Haplocheira ty pica . . .

.. 106

Faroiius ...

.. 628

Haplodyta heteropla

.. 766

Furina Eamsayi

61

iochalca

.. 766

Gambetta pulverulentus

255

thoracta

.. 765

Gaulodes

.. 654

Haptoncura

.. 654

Geobwnus

.. 414

Harmonia crassipes

.. 106

Georyssidaj

.. 671

Harpalus ..

420, 421

Georyssus

.. 671

Hectarthrum brevifossuni

205, 661

Geoscaptus

.. 399

Heliastes imniaculatus

.. 446

Gerallus

.. 629

Heliocausta atcecha...

.. 830

Gibbium scotias

. 833

epidesma

.. 832

Gigadema

.. 366

eudoxa

.. 831

Glareolagrallaria ...

.. 168

Helix achilles

.. 842

Glottis canescens ...

.. 255

gorenduensis

.. 841

Helix Maclayiana ...

PAGE

841

Inopeplus

trepidus

220

665

Helluo

368

Ipomsea batatas

348

Helluodema

368

Ips

655

Helluosoma

367

Ipsaplies bicolor

'209

662

Hesperus

612

nuLTosus ...

209

662

Heteroceridffi

672

Keu

350

687

Heterocerus

672

Laccophilus

595

596

Heterodontus zebra

673

Laccojiterum

395

396

Heterognathus

642

643

Laclinoderma

372

Heterothops

608

Lacordairia

363

364

Hinulia picta

65

terrena...

467

Histerida'

Hololeius
Hololepta
Holopleuridia

646

Laeniatopl

ilus hystrix

110

406
646
657

L^emophlceus
Lscmophlseus amabilis

662

G64
211

Holopsamma crassa

fuliginosa
lasvis ...

154
154
154

articeps

bistriatus

coiitaminatus

213
216
214

laminajfavosa

154

conterminus

214

turba . .
Holostoma alatum . . .

154
342

insignis
Leachii
lepidus

217
216

Homalosoma

424-426

...

217

Homalota ...

605

Macleayi

216

Homceody tes

Homolani prima crenulata

595
200

parvulus
Kamsayi
rigidns

217
212

Hoinothes ..

371

216

Hoplocephalus assimilis
Huxelhydriis
Hydaticus
Hydatotrephis

596

68
586
597

tasmanicus

testaceus

tuberculatus

213
215
213

600

Lamprima senea

130

Hyderodes

...

594

aurata ...

131

Hydrachna

583

insularis

1.37

Hydnena

601

Krefftii ...

134

Hydra hexactinella

679

Latreillei

132

Hydrobaticus

600

Micardi ...

132

Hydrobius

'599

600

minima ..

138

Hydrocanthus

591

.Muelleri

'135,

473

Hydrochus

601

nigripennis

137

Hydrocoptiis

586

rutilans ...

1.34

Hydrophilus

...

599

splendens

133

Hydrophyllid.-e

599

varians ...

133

Hydroporus

589

590

violacea...

138

Hydro vatus

596

Lancestes

592

Hygrotropims

600

Lasiodact^

'lus '.'.'.

652,

653

Hyperion

...

383

Lathicrossa leucocentra

776

Hyperoma...

615

Lathridid

w

72

Hypharpax

■419

420

Lathrobiuiu

614,

615

Hypliydrus

584

Latrididffi

666

Idaithina

661

Latridius

(i66

Idius

376

Latohtva cassidoides 699

'700,

710

lUaphami.s

442

Latris Ramsayi

229

niestus

...

658

Lecauomerus

420

Iiiopeplus dimidiatus

220

665

Lecquereusia spiralis

724

Leirodira ...

I'AGK

422

Macrobathra

brontodes

Leperina ...

655

656

ceraiinobjla ...

Leperina adusta

700,

703

chlorosoma

burnettensis

700,

706

chrysospila

cirrosa

700,

706

chrysotoxa

conspicua..

700,

704

constrictella . . .

decorata . . .

-00,

702

crymalea

fraterna ...

■00,

707

desniotoma

lacera

"00,

706

eurylenca

Mastersi ...

"00,

705

euryxantha

opatroides

700,

704

hamaxitodes ...

seposita . . .

"00,

702

heminephla

turbata ...

700,

705

hemitropa

Lepidotrigla pleuracanthica .

578

lencopeda

Lepticanus

613

melanargyra . . .

Leptocroca saiiguinolenta .

775

nielanomitra . . .

Leptopodus

437

melanota

Lesticus ...

422

mesopora

Lestignathus

440

monostadia

Leucandra cataphracta

476

myriophthalma..

Leucocraspedum

606

nephelomorpha. .

Leucothoe spinicarpa

101

niphadobola

Liberkiihnia australis

724

porpliyrea

Liinnichus..

670

rhodospila

Limnius ...

672

synastra

Liniosa uropygialis ...

2.J5

trithyra

Lispinus ...

625

xuthoeoma

Lithocharis

618

Macrogyrus

Litochras ...

650

Macroporus

Lophoeateres

709

714

Macropus tibol

Lophocateres Ivani... 699,

700

715

Macrura ...

Lophorina supeiba minor

242

Mangifera indica ...

Loxandrus

437

Mangilia Goodiiigii

Loxodactylus

433

Maoria

...

Lufiaria digitata ...

152

Margari.s . . .

Lutiochus...

671

Matus

Lycainidaj...

716

Mecodema

Lyonsia reticulata ...

459

Mecynognathus

Lysianassa atfinis ...

99

Megacephala
Megaladerus

...

australiensis

99

nitens ...

98

Megalops ...

Machan-itis ajgrella...

772

Megamoera Mastersii

calligenes

768

suensis

gr'ammophora
hemera

7(;9

Megatoma

...

771

Melania walloriensis

lieniocha

769

Meligethes respondens

indocta

772

Melisodera

inelanospora

770

Meonis

psathyra

771

Meryx

samphoras

770

Metopouciis

;;■ '613

Macrobathra alternatella

812

Mezium atiine

anemarcha

805

Microchwtes

669

anemodes

819

Microsaurus

...

argonota

811

Mtera rubro-

maculata

M<eia Ramsayi

PAGE

.. 105

Notobium

PAGE

. 620

spinosa

.. 105

Notomicrus

585, 586

Monocentrum

.. 385

Notonecta

. 760

Monohammus tistulator

.. 448

Notonomus

i27, 432

Monotonia concinnula

72

Nototarus

. 371

Morio

383, 384

Numenius cyanopus

. 255

Moriodema

.. 384

uropygialis

. 255

Morphnos ...

.. 426

Nurus

. 426

Murrayia Jenkinsi

.. 268

Ochlogenes advectella

. 797

Musa calosperma ...

.. 356

Ochthodromns inornatus

. 255

Maclayi

348, 355

Ocypiis

. 611

parailisiaca ...

.. 348

Oecophora anaema ...

. 791

.Seemanni

.. 355

anthemodes

. 780

uranoscopos ...

.. 355

apanthes

. 791

Mycetophagidaj

.. 667

arniigerella

. 790

Myliobatis punctatus

.. 675

chloritis

. 788

Myrabolia Grouvelliana

224, 666

contextella

789

Haroldiana

223, 666

chrysogramma .

792

Myristicivora spilorrhoa

.. 254

epimicta

. 786

Myrmecophora

.. 604

epunylia

. 789

Myrmecocephalus ...

601, P02

eremaja

. 783

Myrmedouia

.. 603

ourvhoa

. 788

Mystropomus

.. 383

griseata...

789

Myzoniela Rosenbergi

.. 244

hemimochla

7S9

Nannocampus ruber

.. 757

hemisphserica

. 780

Narcodes ...

.. 626

homodoxa

. 792

Nardoa crassa

66

hoplodesma

. 792

Nassa livida

86

horsea

. 790

Nausibius dentatus...

224, 666

hypochalca

. 782

Neaspis ...

656, 708

lagara ...

. 783

Neaspis sciilpturata

700, 709

letharga

. 788

variegata . . .

700, 709

lychiiosema

. 787

villosa

700, 709

lyniphatica

. 785

Nebriosoma

.. 420

macarella

. 791

Necrodes osculans ...

553, 644

maranta

. 791

Necterosoma

.. 590

nubifera

784

Nelidus

.. 436

ochroma

. 781

Neoanthias Giintheri

.. 231

oporsea ..

790

Neobule algicola

96

phegophylla

. 790

Neocarenum

.. 388

poliocrana

. 787

Neolamprima mandibularis

.. 139

pseudospret^lla .

. 782

Nepharis ...

.. 660

schola?a

. 788

Neptis consimilis ...

.. 265

siderodeta

792

>>icotiana tabacura

.. 352

sulfurea ...

786

Nitidula

.. 652

uniformis

781

Nitidula contegens . . .

69

zophodes

784

intendens

70

(Ecophoridae

. 765

significans

70

(Edichirus

619

submaculata

70

Oligorus

gibbiceps ...

. 267

tomentifera

70

Oligota

. 605

Nitidulidas

69, 650

Oinalium

...

625

Nitidulopsis aequalis

70

Onchidiu

m chameleon

729, 730

JNotarcha multilinealis

.. 258

Diimelii

"30. 732

Oodes

Ophionea ...

Ophryosternus

Ornithoptera prianms

Oscarella Bass-augustiorum

Oscarellidaj

Osorius

Ostrffia edulis

Oxypoda ...

Oxytelus ...

Pachidius

Pffiderus ...

Palaminus

Pallodes ...

Palorchestes, sp.

Rephaim

Palparia heyschasa
lithocosoma
mesophthora
theophila ...

.Paludina kowiayiensis

Pamborus ...

Pandanus, sp.

Pangium edule

Papilio polydorus . . .
erectheus ...

Parhypates

Parnidte

Paromalus

Paroster

Parotia Lawesii

Parroa

PHryphanta Hochstetteri

Passandra

Passandra marginata

Pathodermus

Paussida; ...

Pedilophorus

Pediomorphus

Pelecanus conspicillatus

Pelioptera...

Peltis

Peltonyxa DeyroUi... 657,

Peltoscliema

Peltoschema filicornis

Pempheris lineatus...

Pentagonica

Penthelispa

Percis novce-cambriae

I'ercosoma

Perigona

Petraites liept;eolus

Phagonophana

PAGE

... 407
... 364
... 438
... 262
... 475
4
... 622

75
... 604
622-624
... 438
618,619
... 619
... 655

75
... 761

... 826
... 827
... 825
... 825
... 843
362, 363
... 349
349, 356
.. 263
.. 264
.. 427
.. 671
.. 648
.. 587
.. 243
.. 411
.. 695
.. 661
.. 205
.. 660
.. 638
.. 670
.. 424
.. 256
.. 603
. . 656
700, 708
709, 714
700, 714

447
,. 372
,. 660
. 228

412
. 372
. 225

Phalacridae

PAGE

650

Phalacrocorax melanoleucus 256

Phalacrognathus Muelleri

... 474

Phascolomys curvirostris

... 761

Pheropsophus

... 368

Philhydrus

... 600

Philoiithus

... 611

PliilophlKus

373-375

Philoscaphus

... 396

Phloeocarabus

... 370

Phkeocharis

... 625

Phlceodromius

... 372

Phlreopora

... 605

Plioriospongiaj

81

Phorticosomus

413, 414

Phymatopterus

... 642

Physolesthus

... 408

Pinobius

... 616

Pinophilus

619, 620

Piper betel

... 350

methysticiim 350, 68/

,688, 689

riacusa

61)5

Plagiotelum opalescens

... 469

Platisus aiigusticollis

211, 662

integricollis

210, 662

obscurus

210, 662

Platycephalus arenarius

... 577

macrodon

... 226

Platylytron

... 405

Platynectes

... 591

Platynus

440,441

Platysma

... 438

Platysoma

647, 648

Plectropoma nigro-rubrum

... 119

Pleurotoma albula ...

... 116

engoiiia

... 115

ischna

... 116

Neozelanica

... 115

Pleurotomidaj

... 115

Phimularidi3e

... 479

Pocadiiis ...

... 654

Pcecilus

... 438

Pogonus

.. 441

Polydora ciliata

... 2/4

polybranchia

... 275

Polylobus ...

.. 603

Polynoe ...

.. 278

Polyserias mirabilis

.. 480

Polystichus

.. 305

Pria

.. 654

Prioiiophorus

.. 426

Procirrus ...

.. 619

Prognatha decisa ...

71

Pfomecoderus

r.\oE
408 411

Sarticus

PAGE

433-435

Prometopia

654

Satrapia thesaurina

823

Prosopogmus

'432

, 433

8caphidid;B

645, 646

Prostomis Atkiiisoni

•206

, 661

.Scaphidiuin

645

cornutus...

207

, 662

Scaphisoma

.. 646

Proto Novie-Hollaiidise

111

Scarapliites

397, 398

Psainathe crinita . . .

749

Sceparnodon

... 125

Psammapemma deusuni

154

Scliistodactylus

635

Pseaplius ...

628

, 629

Scimbaliuni

615, 616

Psephalidai

626

Scincidaj

65

Psepharobius

643

Scolyptus ...

.. 401

Pseudoceratina durissima

153

8cop£eus ...

617, 618

Pseudohellus

368

Scopodes ...

.. 377

Pseud ophry lie australis

342

Scydma3nid£e

.. 642

Pteroplatea australis

460

, 575

Scydnirenilla

.. 643

l^tilium

645

Soydmasnus

642

PtinidK ...

833

Scyllium anale

445. 464

Ptinus adeps

834

Sebastes scaber

.. 577

attvitus

835

Semiocosoma attactella

.. 774

eniineus

834

austera

.. 774

egeuus

836

copiosella

.. 774

exulans

833

epiphanes

.. 774

imulus

836

peroneanella

.. 773

fur

833

picarella

.. 773

lougus

837

prasophyta

.. 774

Ptomaphila

644

Seriola simplex

.. 757

Ptychornphalus, sp.

343

Sertularella infracta

.. 478

Pyralidae

853

Johnstoni

.. 478

Quediopsis

60S

M.iUeri

.. 478

Quedius ...

"608-610

polyzonias

.. 478

Ranunculus lappaceas

456

purpurea

.. 478

Rapjiyrus Hixonii ...

562

reticulata

.. 478

Rhabdotus

433

subdichotoma

.. 478

Rhantus ...

592

iSertularia elongata . . .

.. 480

Rhinobatus Bougainvillei

464

millefolium

.. 480

Rhinopalpa sabina ...

264

Setalis ... ■ ...

.. 384

Rhynchobatus djeddensis

465

Sharpia ...

.. 624

Rhysodes ...

661

Siagonyx ...

.. 440

Rliysodes lignarius...

471

SilphidfB

.. 644

Rhysodidie

661

Silphomorpha

378-380

Rhyssonotus laticeps

201

8iltopia ...

.. 384

Rhy tisternus

'435

436

8ilusa

602

Rhyzophagus parallelus

70

Silvanus atratulus . . .

223, 665

Rubus rosifolius

455

brevicornis

222, 665

Rytus

628

castaneus . . .

222, 665

Saccharum edule . . .

348

congener ...

223, 665

officinarum

348

surinamensis

222, 666

Sagus, sp. ...

349

Simodontus

438, 439

Salmo f ario

554

Sintectus ...

.. 630

salar

554

Siphonostoma affine

.. 750

Siudracottus

594

Siriocaiita testulalis

.. 258

Saprinus ...

649

650

Somatipion

.. 636

Sarothrocrepis

.373

Soronia

.. 653

Sartallus

58

622

Sparactua...

.. 657

X.

INDEX.

I'AOK 1

PAGK

Spencerhydrus

51)5

cartilaginea

479

.Spongelia cactos

152

oerastium . . .

479

stelliclermata

155

licbeiiastrum

479

.Spongidse ...

283

subarticulata

479

Sprengelia incarnata

456

Tinognathus

404

Squatarola helvetica

254

Tmesiphorus

626

627

StaphylinidiC

601

Trachiclithys australis

580

Staurocephalns australis

747

intermedius

582

8taiii'oglossifius

653

jacksoniensis

580

.Stegocephalus latus

97

Trechus

441

442

Stenolopluis

422

Tribal lus ...

649

Stenus

620

621

Trichisa ...

404

Sternolophus

599

Trichoglossus josephinse

244

Sternopriscus

586

587

Muschenbrok

ii.

244

Sternula nereis

256

papuana

244

Steropus ...

435

puluhellus

244

Stilicus ...

617

Trichopterigydiv

645

Strombus australis . . .

87

Trichosternus

426

Suniopsis ...

615

Trigonothops

"368

369

Sunius

618

Tringa albescens ...

255

Syllidre

733

canutus

255

Syllis corruscans . . .

733

734

subarquata ...

255

Kinbergiana ...

739

variabilis ...

257

nigropunctata

744

Trinodes ...

669

Schmardiana...

742

Trogoderii a

669

tfeniseformis ...

741

Trogophlanxs

624

Sylochelidon caspia...

256

Trogosita ...

655

Syiioicus cervinus ...

254

Trogosita insinuans...

71

Sypbonalia maxima

245

rhyzophagoides

71

Tachynoderus

607

Trogositidje ... 71

055

699

Tachyris Ada

257

Tropidonotus ater ...

67

Tachys

442

Trypanaius

649

Tachyta

442

Tryphyllus

667

Tajiiiura Ij'mna

465

Tychus

629

630

Talitrus sylvaticus . . .

95

Tyraphus ...

628

Tanygnathus

607

Tyromorphus

627

Teiehonella labyvinthica

476

Tyrus

627

prolifera

476

Vcradia ...

384

Tenebrioides mauritanica

700

701

Vitis, sp. ...

353

punctulata

700

701

Wahlenbergia gracilis

457

Teraphis ...

385

Worthenia, sp.

79

Teratidium

396

Xantholinus

612

613

Teiebra tristis

118

Xanthomelas aureus

244

Terebrid;e ...

118

Xanthophtca

369

370

Teretrius ...

649

Xanthopha^a pallida

468

Tetracha ...

359

360

Xenica hobartia

716

Tetradaetylus guttulatus

66

Xenocheira fasciata

105

Tlialasseus cristatus

256

Xinlcenia recurvalis

258

Tlialycra ...

653

Zeodera ...

424

Thamnosara chirista

776

Zingiber olticinalis ...

351

Thaumaglossa

668

Zonopetala erytlirosema

829

Tbop fusiformis

733

synarthra

829

Tbuiaria ambigua ...

479

Zuphiosoma

3fi6

bidens

479 1 Zuphium ...

365

366

F. CUNNINGI1.\MK & Co., GE

S-ERAIi StE.\

M Pri.nters, 143 Pitt Street, Sydney.

EERATA.-VOL. X.

Page 129, line 5 from bottom— /o?- Chasiognathus read Chiasognathus.

Page 130, line 2 from top— /or Cacostoma read Cacostomus.

Page 130, line 2 from bottom— /or Lamprina read Lamprima.

Page 130, line 3 from bottom— /or Latreilla read LatrelUe.

Page 130, line 4 from bottom— /or Harrolds read Harold's.

Page 130, line 8 from bottom— /or Lueanus read Lucanus.

Page 131, line 4 from bottom— /or scuriform read securiform.

Page 132, line 5 from top— /"or Harrolds read Hai'old's.

Page 133, line 1 from top— /o)' Harrold read Harold.

Page 133, line IS from top— /or sulfalciformi read subfalciformi.

Page 133, line 19 from top— /or lacvi read Isevi.

Page 133, line 3 from bottom— /or picous read piceous.

Page 133, line 1 from bottom— /or mandables read mandibles.

Page 134, line 9 from bottom— /or Kreftii read Krefftii.

Page 1 35, line 7 from top — for Harrold's read Harold's.

Page 135, line 8 from top— /or Lotreillei read Latreillei.

Page 136, line 3 from top— /or mentam read inentum.

Page 138, line 8 from bottom— yor Lamprina read Lamprima.

Page 139. line 11 from top— /or Annales Musco civico read Annali del

Museo civico.
Page 139, line 16 from top— /or Ncolamprina read Neolamprima.
Page 139, line 19 from top— /or Neolamprina read Neolamprima.
Page 149, line 5 from bottom— ^or Beccari read Beccarii.
Page 167, line 14 from top -/or orientatis read orientalis.
Page 168, line 1 from top, omit hyphen.
Page 175, line 12 — after word section insert Vide Plate 22.
Page 178, line -2— after Vol. VIII. read page 92.

Page ISO, In notes to Table B., Note 1, omit Royal Soc, N. S. W., p. 82.
Page ISO, In note 3 — read page 53.

Page 180, In note 4 — read Lin. >Soc , New South Wales, page 52.
Page 199, top line— /or Lucandias read Lncanida;.
Page 215, last line -Jar miles read feet.
Page 232, line 9— /or .Schlegeli read Schlegelii.
Page 234, line 24, from top— /or or Bell Paver read River.
Page 236, line 3- /or Diagram II. read I.
Page 236, line 24— /or 100 to 150 read 10,000 to 15,000.
Page 235, line 15— /or at the a level read at a, the level.
Page 256, line 10 from bottom— /or Pelccanus read Pelecanus.
Page 320, line 14 from top— /or noum read novum.
Page 331, line 2 from bottom— /"or branclied read branchial.
Page 342, line 4 from top - /or Australis read bibronii.
Page 457, line 2 from top— /or Beatham read Bentham.
Page 503, line 6 from bottom— /or siena read sienna.
Page 527, line 10 from top— /or Euspongai read Euspongia.
Page 534, line 7 from top— /u?- ipse facta read ipso facto.
Page 560, line 13 from top— /or tranverse-j'efK^ transverse.
Pages 563 and 573 omit all references to fig. 6, which had to be left out

when it was too late to alter the text.
Page 570, line 7 from bottom— /or Dactylochalioa read Dactylochalina.
Page 571, line 11 from bottom— /or where read were.
Page 573, line 15 from bottom is to be omitted altogether.
Page 578, line 8 fi'om bottom— /or has read was.

P.L.5. VoL.IO

Pl.39

^ m

k

:n

U Yl\

\j

D)

iT

©

?jt "

♦tj

rr^>f^^^^

v.lendeitfeld deJ.

S.SedqField LUh.

P.L.S Vol.10

Pl.40

^''" m

-f

.^

S.Sedgrield lUh.

Pl.4I

o o- ^^^

.Len.cUn.re/d dtl.

S.Sedc/fi.eld Utk.

P.L.S.VoL.IO

Pl.42

Lendeafeld del.

S.SedgField llth.

p. L.S. Vol.10

Pl.43

.V _^

S.SedgFLeloi lUK.

P.L. S. Vo^-.IO

P1-.44

(%^>^^

/ ^

/: '•

f

/-^J

S.dedgfLeld lUh.

•o^'

;>

•"VCK^T^-

^-^^-^^ I

Heterodontus Zebra, ««>■.

I

h

A

1 *

'ys::^'\

'i ■♦ * «

/f

^.

V4.

^

DiSCOBATIS MAROINIPINI

•w\

1^^

•^ « (13

i

I hWA

P.L.S.VoL.IO

Pl.48

U'

tiW \

i I !

A

(wi

v.XeJidenfeld del.

S. Sedgfceld LiLh.

P.L.S. Vol.10

Pl.49

/-r

l\ /■

'^

x^-^ *.

M.MacUy del.

S Sed.yFi.eld. UtK.

PL. S. Vol. 10

PL. 50

W. A.H. del.

S Sed^fi-eld Uth.

P.L.S. Vol.10

Pl.51

jm^^

c^k'^>^'

5 SedgFceld lith.

P.L.S.VoL.IO

Pl. 52

; ^ 1 ^%i

R/

W. A. H. del

S Sedg field Litk.

p. L.S.VoL.lO

Pl. 53

5 Sedgneld Itth.

P.L.S. Vol.10

Pl.54

\lZi

'4

I

S Std^Fueld litk.

PI-.55

© @ ^

® ® ^ * r* ' '

•^ -^ « -~- '4,

L.N'I/.,:!!),

SSedgFUid Utk.

P.L.S. Vol.10

Pi-.se

OCc— 1:

.-^,

\

' i^

,j -^ 1

., f t>>^i^^^>X4 ^^

F.Ratl^ del. et nth.

THE

PE0CEEDING8

OF THE

LINNEAN SOCIETY

OF

NEW SOUTH WALES,

FA RT THE FIRST.

Containing the Papers read at the Meetings

held in

January, February and March, 1883.

JUNE 4. 18So.

SYDNEY :

PJUNTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY

BV

F. CUNNINGHAME & CO., 146 PITT STREET,

AXD

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.

[Price, 12/-]

COiNTEKTS OF YOL. X., PART 1.

PAC; K

A Monograph of the Australian .Sponges, Part IV. The Myxo-

spongia;, with 5 Plates. By R. von Lendeni'Eld, Ph.D. . .">

The method of Section Cutting, with some improvements. By R.

vox Lendenfeld, Ph.D. 2.S

AuKi'ba Parasitica, with Plate. By R. von Lexdenfeld, Ph.D. ... 3.1
The Meteorology of Mount Koskiusko. By R. vox Lendenfeld,

Ph.D 3!t

The Glacial Period in Australia, witli two Plates. By I!, vox

Lex1)Enf$:li), Ph.D. ... 44

The Proteaceju of Australia. By tiie Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D.,

F.L.S., &c .14

On a new .Snake, from the Barrier Ranges. By Wji.liam Macleay,

K.L.S., &c (]]

On some Reptiles, from the Herbert River. By Wii.uaai Macleay,

F.L..S.,&c •.. (14

Notes on some Ceylonese Coleoptera. By A. Siuxey Oluff ... (iH

On a Devonian Australian Fossil, allied to Worthenia, with Plates.

By F. Ratte, Esq., Eng. Arts, and Manf 7!'

The Phoriospongife. By R. von Lenuenfeld, Ph.D SI

Synonymy of some Shells described by Gray. By John Bka/iei;,

C.M.Z.S •. ... " S.-.

Notes on Australian Amphipoda, with nine Plates. By W. A.

Haswell, M.A., B.Sc. 'X<

Revision of the Toxoglossate Mollusca of New Zealand. By Captain

F. \V. HcTTO.v, F.G.S. &c 11.".

Notes and Descriptions of some rare Port .fackson Fishes. By .1.

DOUGLA.S-OOILTSY ll!l

Notes and E.\hibits G^,.?.!, l-.>

THE

PEOOEEDINGS

LINNEAN SOCIETY

OF

NEW SOUTH WALES,

VOL. 2^.
PART THE SECOND.

Containing the Papers read at the Meetings

held in

April, May and June, 1885.

JULY 31, 1885.

SYDNEY:

PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY

BY

F. CUNNINGHAME & CO., 146 PITT STREET,

AND

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.
[Price, 7/6]

CONTENTS OF VOL. X., PAKT i

Revision of the Genus Lamprinia, with descriptions of new species,

By William Macleay, F.L.S., &c 129

Notes on the Zoology of the Maclay-Coast in New Guinea, No. 2.

Plate XIX. By N. DE Miklouho-Maclay .. 141

On two new species of Dorcopsis, from New Guinea. Plate XX. By

N. DE Mikloitho-Maclay 145

Notes on Australian Sponges, recently desci-ibed by Carter. By R.

VON Lendexfeld, Ph.D. 151

On the fertilization of Goodenia Hedevacea. By Alex. G. Hamilton,

Esq. Plate XXI., 157

Notes on the liabits of Falco-subniger and Glareola grallaria. By K.

H. Bennett, Esq 162

The Geology of Dubbo. By the Rev. J. Milne Cueran, F.G.S.

Plates XXII. and XXIII 170

Note on the Brain of Halicore Australis. By N. de Miklouho-
Maclay. Plate XXIV 193

Record of a remarkable Haloragia, from New South Wales. By

Baron VON Mueller, K. CM. G., &c. 197

Two new Australian Lucanidaj. By William Macleay, F.L.S., &c. 199

The Cucujidse of Australia. By A. Sidney Olliff, Esq 203

Description of new Fishes from Port Jackson. By J. DouGLAS-

Ogilby, Esq 225

Note on Neoanthias Guntheri. By J. Douglas-Ogildy, Esq. ... 231

Notes on the Geology and Water Supply of the Interior of New

South Wales. Plate XXV. By the Rev. J. Milne Curran,

F.G.S 233

Some remarks on the fertilization of the genus Goodenia. By E.

Haviland, Esq 237

Note on a Medusa from the Tropical Pacific. By R. von Lendenfeld,

Ph.D 241

Notes on Birds from the Asti'olabe Mountains, New Guinea. By H

P. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., &c 242

Description of a new Collyriocincla. By E. P. Ram.say, F.R.S.E., &c. 244
Notes on the Natural History of the Claremont Islands. By Gerva.se

F. Mathew, R.N., &c. 251

An afternoon among the Butterflies of Thursday Island. By Gervase

F. Mathew, N.N., &c. 259

New Fishes from the Upper Murrumbidgee. By William Macleay,

F.L.S., &c 267

Description of a new Diplocrepis from Port Jackson. By J. Douglas-

Ogilby, Esq 270

Jottings from the Biological Laboratory of Sydney University. By

William A. Haswell, M.A., B.Sc. 273

Notes and Exhibits 157,245,279

THE

>%i

PEOCEEDINGS

LINNEAN SOCIETY

OF

NEW SOUTH WALES,

PART THE THIRD.

Containing the Papers read at the Meetings

lield in

July, August and September, 1885.

AATITIi THII^TEElsr :E'Xj J^T :eis.

DECEMBER ^1, 1885.

SYDNEY :
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THB SOCIETY

,^

F. CUNNINGHAME & CO., 14G PITT STREET,

AND

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.
[Price, 15/-]

%,«/^

u

CONTENTS OF VOL. ^.. TART :].

Monograph of tlie Australian Sponges. Part V. By R, von Lkx

UENKELO, Ph.D. With 10 Plates iS'J

On a KSpongc destructive to Oyster Culture in the (Jlarcnct' River, liy

R. vox LENDKNfELD, Ph.D. ... IWi

Note on tiie (ilacial Period in Au.stralia. By R. vox LENDKNi-'iihO,

Ph.D 330

Jottings from the Biological Laboratory of the Sydney University.

By W. A. Haswell, M.A., BSc. ". .Wl

On the supposed Glacial Period in Australia. By Captain F. W.

HUTTOX, F.(r.S., .tc 334

List of Plants used by the Natives of the Macleay-Coast, New

Guinea. By N. de Miklolho-Macl.w 34()

Catalogue of the described Coleoptera of Au.stralia. By (jEOKiiE

Masters. Parti 3.")S

Descriptions of three new Fishes from Port Jackson. By J.

DoUtiL.V.S-OGILJiY 44.')

Remarks on Decay of certain species of Eucalyptus. By K. H.

Bennett 4.")3

Double Flowers. By the Rev. W. Wooli.s, Ph.D., &c 4">.')

Occasional Notes on Plants indigenous in the immediate neighbour-
hood of Sydney. By E. Havii.axd, F.L.S. 4o!l

Notes on the distribution of some Australian Sharks ;ind Rays. By

J. DotJciLAs-OtJiiJiV 463

Contributions towards a knowledge of the Coleoptera of Australia.

By A. Sydney Ollike 467

A new genus of Laniprimides. By William Macleay, F.L.S. ... 473
Addendum to the Australian SjDonges. By R. vox Lenoenfeld, Ph.D. 47;")
Addendum to the Australian Hydrouiudusa>. By R. vox LexdenJ'ELO,

'" Ph.D 477

Monograph of the Australian Sponges. Part VL, with 3 Plates. By

R. vox Lendenfeld, Ph.D 4,S1

Notes and Fxhil)its 341, 448, Two

,lXX- Q> /yy^ .

J>

(^

>\

THE

PROCEEDINGS

LINNEAN SOCIETY

OF

NEW SOUTH WALES,

/^IA'7' 7V/i^' FOURTH.

Containing the Papers read at the Meetings

It eld in

October, November, and December, 1885.

VPRIL J. 16^0.

SYDNEY :
PUINTED AND PUHLiyUliD FOR THE SOCIETY

BY

F. CUNNINGHAME & CO., 14G PITT STREET

AND

SOLD P.Y THE SOCIETY.

[Price, 17/6]

i

CONTENTS OF VOL. X.. PART 1

Studies on .Sponges. By R. von Lendexfeld, I'li.l). Plates XXXIX-

XLIV ...

I. Tho \'osii\>n\ti of I>eii(lrilfa caremosa, u. s\) oo7

II. On /'(ijthuyii-t Hixoxli, a' new gigantic Sponge from Poit

.lackson ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3()2

III. Ou J I (Unit tiiKjens, a 'Sponge with a remarkable colouring

power... ... ... ... .. ... .. ... 5Gt>

IV. On two cases of Mimicry in Sponges !r){)^

Descriptions of new or rai'c Australian Fishes. T>y E. 1'. 1!.\M!^-^^''

F.R.S.K,, and .F. Dou(;l.a.s-0(Uluy 7u'y

llvm;ivk» on the Trarhirh/ ft yx of Port Jacksmi. liyi. I )oi ci. \s-()<;iLiiv. 580
Catalogue of the described dohojitcru of Australia. I'urt 11. By

(4eoiu;e M.\.steks ... 5S3

The Pla(/iontoiiiata of tln' I'ai ilic I'ait lil. By N. in; Mikj.oi'iio-'

M.voL.VYandWii.i.iAM M A. i,i-,A,. F.L.S. Plat.'s XLV. and XLVl. 073
Fourth Addendum to the Austialian ////-//>-/,/,,/,/.,,. \\y K. \(>N

Lkndknfki.i), Pli. I>. IM,,tcXL\in. (.7!i

A Second Note on iMaci-(„b,iitisin nf the Ab'lan^sians. liv X. mk

MlK1.0rj[(.-MACLAY. I'latr XJ.IX (iS'J

Note on the " K.'a " of the Marlay^'oaxt. Xrw (uiima, I'.y N. hk

Miklouho-Maclay ... . . (kS7

A List of the Trocjodtidd;. oi Australia, with notes and drsci i[itions of

new species. By A. SII)M^^ (»i,i.iKi, 1<\K.S. (j!)'.)

Notes from the Australian Museiin;. i )n a new Huttci t!v or \\\,- l-'aiuilv

Liinniubi, from the I'.lne Mountains. I'.y A, s'iunkv ( )i.i.ii. i',

F.E.S 7l(i

(hi a remarkable Fisli, fi-om Ivu,] Howe Island. l!y William

Macleay. F.L.S., cV-e. I'lat. Xl,\l! ■ 718

Recent changes in the |-'orest i'lma o( the interior of X. ."<. Wales.

By K. VON Lkni,km-kli. I'h.l) 7-il

On the Australian Kreslnvater A'A ..^w./rv. J'art I. By B. vox

Lendknikli), I'h.D. ... 7"2k

On an Alga forming a Pseudoniorph of a Silicions Siioiiue. I'.v \\.

vox Lendenfeld, Ph.D. Plate XL\1I1 T'Jti

Description of a new species of OnchiiHinii. By .lonx j]il\/.ii:i;,

C.M.Z.S 72!)

Prelinunary Report on tlic llistoiouical Stiuctui e of tin' doi'sid papilhe

of certain species of Oiirhhliavi . Ily K \(>\ Bk\ oi-;n i-i-'.i.i), i'h.i). 7oO
Observations on soiue Australian J'^'hii-I"' In ■ Part I l'.\ W. A.

Ha.swelt., M.A., B.Sc. Plates L lA' 7.1;;

Descripticms of two new Fishes from Port .laid<son. i'.\- Iv 1'. ll.wis.w.

F.R.S.K.. and J. DorKiL.A.s-OcuLL.v 7.">7

On some remarkable crystals of A''/' y//' . l'.\ l'\ U \ itk. .M.I-:. I'late

LVI ■ 7.3l>

Descriptions of. Australian J//Vto- /.. /""'"/■'"■"- I'^nt -'^JI- % K-

Mkykkk, B.A., F.K.S , 7(35

Uemarks on Australian I'lhiiiln . and <lescriptious of new genera antl

species. By A. Sidney Olliek', F.E.S. ... ... So.S

On new species of Land and Freshwater SloUusca, from Maclay-(Joast

ami Triton Bay, New (iunea. By J. Bka/.iek, (J.M.Z S. ... 841

Second Addendum to the Monograph of the Australian Sponges. By

M. VON Lem>knfklo, Ph.D. ... • ... 845

Notes from the Australian Museum. Description of a new L'urh. By

K. P. Ramsay, F.R.S.E., and J. DouuEA.s-OtiiLKV .. 851

Notes and Exhibits (Ji)5, 7(J0, 85;^

President's Address ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 855

Ofhee-Bearers and Council for 1880 881

Title page, Contents, and Index to \"ol. X.

MBL WHOI I.IBKAin

UH lACP B